JP2021023466A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that can give new interest to a player, after a time-saving game is completed.SOLUTION: A game machine shoots a game ball in a left side area in a normal game state, aiming for a start winning at a first start port, shoots a game ball in a right side area in a big winning game state and a time-saving game state, aiming for a winning to a first special electric accessory and a start winning to a second start port, displays an image suggesting a player that a game ball is shot to the left side area on a display device when the time-saving game state is shifted to the normal game state, and variably displays the holding of a first special symbol based on the start winning at the first start port in preference to the holding of a second special symbol based on the start winning at the second start port.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 209

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine.

In a pachinko gaming machine, generally, when a player launches a game ball into a game area by a launching device and the game ball wins a prize in a winning opening or the like provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines perform a jackpot game in which the jackpot, which is normally closed, is repeatedly opened for a predetermined period of time. In the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the game balls that have won the big prize opening. Here, some of the big winning openings have a blade member, and such a large winning opening repeatedly operates the blade member to change from the closed state to the open state to execute the big hit game. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines perform a small hit game in which the large winning opening is opened for a predetermined period from the closed state.

For example, as disclosed in Patent Document 1, during a small hit game, a pachinko game in which a blade member changes its posture to an open posture in which an opening / closing area is opened, and a game ball can enter the opening / closing area. There is a machine. In this pachinko gaming machine, a V winning opening is provided in the opening / closing area, and the game ball wins a prize in the V winning opening during the small hit game, so that the pachinko gaming machine is controlled to the big hit game state. In this pachinko gaming machine, when a game ball wins a prize in the V winning opening during a small hit game and is controlled to a big hit game state, a small hit symbol showing the result of a special symbol determination that triggered the current big hit game state. The game state after the jackpot game is completed is determined according to the type of. It should be noted that, for example, the transition probability to the jackpot game state changes as the game state changes. Therefore, as a result, the number of game balls that the player can acquire changes, and whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player may change.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-233375

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, it is set that the small hit game is not won in the first start opening winning, and the small hit game is won in the second starting opening winning with a high probability. That is, during the time-saving game, the small hit game is easily won, and the opening / closing area is easily opened. Therefore, there is a possibility that the game ball wins the V winning opening and shifts to the big hit game state. Further, in this type of game machine, there are many cases where the fluctuation due to the second start opening winning, which is easy to win the small hit game, is suspended four times after the time saving game is completed. Therefore, in recent years, a model has been introduced that aims to improve the interest of the player by performing a special effect until the four holds are exhausted.

However, in such a game machine, the period of the special effect is short because the special effect ends when the four holds due to the winning of the second start opening are exhausted. For this reason, it was difficult to give the player an interest.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of giving a new interest to a player.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(1) A launching means for launching a game ball and
A game having a first area (for example, the right side area) of the game area in which the game ball is rollable and can be hit, and a second area (for example, the left side area) of the game area different from the first area. Board and
A first starting area (for example, a second starting port 440) arranged in the first area and through which a game ball can pass,
A second starting area (for example, the first starting port 420) arranged in the second area and through which the game ball can pass,
A special game state control means capable of transition control to a special game state advantageous to the player, triggered by either the passage of the game ball through the first starting area or the passage of the game ball through the second starting area.
A variable winning device (for example, the first special electric accessory 601) capable of entering a game ball in the special gaming state, and
Identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74, display device 16, etc.) that notifies the player of the transition to the special game state by fluctuating and stopping the identification information.
When the game ball passes through the first starting area while the identification information is fluctuating, the first holding means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103), second) that holds the fluctuation of the identification information a predetermined number of times. Special symbol start storage area (0) to (4)),
A second holding means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103), first) that holds the change of the identification information a predetermined number of times when the game ball passes through the second starting area while the identification information is changing. Special symbol start storage area (0) to (4)),
A passing area (for example, a passing gate 49) arranged in the first area and through which the game ball can pass,
A second state capable of switching between a first state that facilitates the passage of the game ball launched into the first region to the first starting region and a second state that makes it difficult for the game ball to pass through the first starting region. 1 Displacement member (for example, ordinary electric accessory 460) and
A determination means for determining whether or not to switch the first displacement member in the second state to the first state when the game ball has passed through the passing region is provided.
The special gaming state includes a first special gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) and a second special gaming state (for example, a small hit gaming state) different from the first special gaming state.
After the end of the first special gaming state, the determination means switches the first displacement member to the first state to improve the passing frequency to the first starting region (for example, a time-saving gaming state). ), And when the number of fluctuations of the identification information reaches a predetermined number of ends, the frequency of passing to the first starting region is reduced from that of the first gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state). The game state control means to shift to the state) and
Further provided is a suggestion means for suggesting to the player that the game ball is fired in the second region when the transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state is provided.
The identification information display means is a gaming machine characterized in that changes held by the second holding means are displayed with priority over changes held by the first holding means.

According to (1), when the player shifts from the first gaming state (for example, a time-saving gaming state) to the second gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state), the player is instructed to launch a game ball in the second region. By suggesting, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being continuously launched (so-called right-handed) into the first region more than necessary. Further, since the identification information display means displays the fluctuations held by the second holding means in preference to the fluctuations held by the first holding means, the first holding means changes the identification information. By passing the game ball through the second starting area in the held state, the start of the variation held by the first holding means can be delayed. In this way, it is possible to continue the state in which the fluctuation is held by the first holding means for a long time, and it is possible to perform various effects by utilizing this continued time. As a result, after the end of the first gaming state, it becomes possible to give the player a new interest.
(2) In (1)
A special area (for example, V winning opening 545) through which the game ball entered in the variable winning device can pass, and
A second displacement member (for example, shutter 546) that can be switched between a first displacement state that facilitates the passage of the game ball to the special region and a second displacement state that makes it difficult for the game ball to pass through the special region. Further prepared,
The second displacement member is switched to the first displacement state at least in the second special gaming state.
When the game ball passes through the first starting area, the special gaming state control means has a higher probability of shifting to the first special gaming state when the game ball passes through the second starting area. A gaming machine characterized by shifting to a second special gaming state and shifting to the first special gaming state when a game ball passes through the special area in the second special gaming state.

According to (2), when the game shifts to the second special gaming state, the same action and effect as (1) is applied to the gaming machine that shifts to the first special gaming state on condition that the game ball passes through the special area. It becomes possible to play.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of giving a new interest to a player.

This is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. This is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of the figure which shows the operation button group of the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention from the back side. It is an example of the front view which shows the appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is an example which shows the external perspective view of the game board unit in the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. This is an example showing a front exploded perspective view of a gaming board unit in a pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention as viewed from diagonally above right. It is an example of the front view which shows the LED unit including the 1st and 2nd special symbol display part. This is an example of a block diagram showing a main control circuit. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the sub-control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the voice / LED control circuit of the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the output signal of the voice / LED control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a control block diagram for demonstrating an example of volume control by a host control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 5 is a schematic connection configuration diagram between a built-in relay board and a speaker of a pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the display control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a schematic connection configuration diagram between the sub-board and the CGROM board (NOR type) of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a schematic connection configuration diagram between the sub-board and the CGROM board (NAND type) of the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a truth table for explaining the operation of the AND circuit provided in the sub-board of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a truth table for explaining the operation of the bidirectional balance transceiver provided in the sub-board of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the table which shows the probability of a big hit of a pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows an example about the selection rate of the main symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of a special symbol is a jackpot. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol stored in the main ROM. It is a figure which shows an example of the decorative symbol determination table stored in the sub-main ROM of a sub-control circuit. It is a figure which shows another example of the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol stored in the main ROM. It is a figure which shows the 1st modification about the selectivity of a main symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of a special symbol is a jackpot. It is a figure which shows the 2nd modification about the selectivity of the main symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of a special symbol is a jackpot. This is a modification of the decorative symbol determination table stored in the sub-main ROM of the sub-control circuit. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline of the drawing control processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the power-on process by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game permission processing. (A) A flowchart showing an example of the setting process, and (b) a flowchart showing another example of the setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the backup clear process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting confirmation process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game return processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the abnormal state processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power failure occurrence. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the system timer interrupt processing by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the switch input detection processing by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start opening prize detection processing by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting check processing by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control main processing by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol control processing by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol memory check processing by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol display time management processing by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving number subtraction processing by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end interval processing by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern table setting process by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the normal symbol control processing by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the sub-control main process executed by a host control circuit (sub-control circuit). It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command analysis processing executed by a host control circuit (sub control circuit). It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command transmission processing executed by a host control circuit (sub control circuit). It is a flowchart which shows an example of a message setting process executed by a host control circuit (sub control circuit). It is a flowchart which shows an example of the direct table registration process executed by a host control circuit (sub control circuit). It is a flowchart which shows an example of the message transmission processing executed by the host control circuit (sub control circuit). It is a table which shows an example of the selection rate of the limiter number in the pachinko gaming machine of expansion example 1 for each set value. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode in which a game ball passes through the right gate of continuous operation of an accessory in the pachinko game machine of expansion example 4. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode in which a game ball passes through the accessory continuous operation left gate in the pachinko game machine of expansion example 4. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the sub-control main processing executed by the host control circuit (sub-control circuit) in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing executed by the host control circuit (sub control circuit) in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example for demonstrating the sub-device input discrimination information created in the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the sub-device input processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the sub-device input ON edge information (with a repeat function) processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. An example of the sub-device input ON edge information (with repeat function) processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention is shown, and is a flowchart continuing from FIG. 65. It is a figure for conceptually explaining the backlight control process in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the backlight control processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing which accompanies the modification of the backlight control processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the backlight control processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing which shows the backlight control processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the sub-control main process (overall flow) executed by the host control circuit for explaining the first embodiment of the process of adjusting the brightness of the backlight and various LEDs. is there. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the sub-control main process (overall flow) executed by the host control circuit for explaining the second embodiment of the process of adjusting the brightness of the backlight and various LEDs. is there. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the sub-control main process (overall flow) executed by the host control circuit for explaining the third embodiment of the process of adjusting the brightness of the backlight and various LEDs. is there. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the RTC acquisition processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the animation control main processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of composition reproduction control processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the sound amplifier check process in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the amplifier check process for use in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the amplifier check process for deep bass in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the sound amplifier check processing which performs the normal amplifier / heavy bass amplifier (collective) check processing in the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the more preferable form of the sound amplifier check process in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a more preferable form of the amplifier check processing for a normal use amplifier and a deep bass in a pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. An example of a more preferable form of the normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier check process in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention is shown, and is a flowchart continuing from FIG. 83. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the sound request control processing when there are a plurality of sound requests for the same channel in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows 1st Example of the sound request control processing at the time of volume adjustment in the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd Embodiment of the sound request control processing at the time of volume adjustment in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd Embodiment of the sound request control processing at the time of volume adjustment in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 4th Embodiment of the sound request control processing at the time of volume adjustment in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows 5th Embodiment of the sound request control processing at the time of volume adjustment in the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, it is an attenuation table which shows an example of the luminance attenuation value of each color (red, green, blue) according to the emission intensity of the strong, medium, and weak LEDs. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the connection state of an LED port, an LED and a solenoid in the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the data load processing which is executed as one of various initialization processing by a host control circuit in the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the random number initialization process which is executed as one of various initialization processes by a host control circuit in the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the random number periodical update process in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, (a) a flowchart showing an example of random number 1 acquisition processing, (b) a flowchart showing an example of random number 2 acquisition processing, and (c) an example of random number 3 acquisition processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of (d) random number 4 acquisition processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the random number acquisition processing which is executed when a random number is used in the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. This is a sub-control main process (overall flow) executed by a host control circuit for explaining a modification of the sub-random number process in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the reception interrupt processing executed by the host control circuit in the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the accessory initial operation process which is executed as one of various initialization processes by the host control circuit in the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the accessory control processing about the accessory executed by the host control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of receiving a production system command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of receiving the variation start command about the accessory executed by the host control circuit in the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the initial position restoration operation processing about the accessory executed by the host control circuit in the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of receiving the demo command about the accessory executed by the host control circuit in the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of receiving the fluctuation determination command about the accessory executed by the host control circuit in the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the hit system command reception time processing about the accessory executed by the host control circuit in the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the hall menu task executed by a sub CPU. It is a figure which shows an example when the hall menu screen is displayed in the display area of a liquid crystal display device. This is an example of a hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the hall menu display process is executed. This is an example of a hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the hall menu display process is executed. It is a figure which shows an example of the hall menu screen which is displayed in the display area of a liquid crystal display device when the hall menu redisplay process is executed. This is an example of a screen in which the error content is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device, (a) a screen indicating that the backup clear process without setting change processing has been executed, and (b) a start port abnormality winning error has occurred. A screen indicating that the backup clear process was executed without the setting change process, (c) the backup clear process without the setting change process was executed, and a start port error winning error occurred. This is the screen after the notification period has elapsed to indicate that the backup clear process has been executed. This is another example of the hall menu task executed by the host control circuit, and is a flowchart in the case of executing the setting determination process for determining the suitability of the set value information by the host control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the hall menu processing executed by a sub CPU. This is an example of an error information history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by a sub CPU. It is an example of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU, and is the flowchart which continues from FIG. 117. It is a figure which shows an example of the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of a liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example when "Page" is selected in the setting change / confirmation history screen. It is a figure which shows an example of the page update screen which can perform a page update in a setting change / confirmation history screen. It is a figure which shows an example when "clear" is selected in the setting change / confirmation history screen. It is a figure which shows an example of the data clear screen which each history data was cleared in the setting change / confirmation history screen. It is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device, and is the figure which shows the example of the initial screen. It is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of a liquid crystal display device, and is the figure which shows an example when "setting display" is selected. It is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of a liquid crystal display device, and is the figure which shows the example when the setting value is newly added and displayed. It is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of a liquid crystal display device, and is the figure which shows an example when "Page" is selected. It is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device, and is the figure which shows the example of the page update screen which can perform page update. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the operation procedure until the setting change / confirmation history screen which can confirm a setting value is displayed in the hall menu screen displayed in the display area of a liquid crystal display device. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the maintenance process executed by a sub CPU. It is a figure which shows an example when the maintenance screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. This is an example of a maintenance screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example when the guide initial image is displayed in the display area of a liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example when the uni-memo initial image is displayed in the display area of a liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example when the password request screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. It is a flowchart which shows the modification 1 of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by a sub CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the authentication process in the modification 1 of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by a sub CPU. In the first modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU, the figure showing an example in which the password request screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the setting change / confirmation history processing is executed. is there. This is an example of a password request screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device in the first modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU. It is a figure which shows the example of the screen which is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the input password is inappropriate in the modification 1 of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by a sub CPU. In the hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 in the modification 1 of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU, the setting change / confirmation history screen in which the set value can be confirmed is displayed. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the operation procedure up to. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the volume switch which generates the volume password applied to the authentication process in the modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by a sub CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the authentication process in the modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by a sub CPU. In the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU, the figure showing an example in which the password request screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the setting change / confirmation history processing is executed. is there. This is an example of a volume password request display screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device in the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the setting value confirmation procedure of the setting change / confirmation history information in the modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by a sub CPU. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the game system which concerns on the modification 3 of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting change / confirmation history processing in the pachinko gaming machine which constitutes the gaming system which concerns on modification 3. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting change / confirmation history processing in the mobile wireless communication terminal and the server device of the game system which concerns on modification 3. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting change / confirmation history screen including the 2D code in the pachinko game machine of the game system which concerns on modification 3. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the setting value confirmation procedure of the setting change / confirmation history information in the game system which concerns on modification 3. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2D code display screen in the portable wireless communication terminal of the game system which concerns on modification 3. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the password input screen in the mobile wireless communication terminal of the game system which concerns on modification 3. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting change / confirmation history screen in the mobile wireless communication terminal of the game system which concerns on modification 3. FIG. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board unit 17 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 in the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the passing path of the game ball which entered into the 2nd big winning opening 540b. It is a side view which shows the schematic structure of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400. It is explanatory drawing which shows the control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game using the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the switch input detection process by the main CPU 101. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol display time management process by the main CPU 101. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end interval processing by a main CPU 101. It is a flowchart which shows the sub lottery process by a sub CPU 201. It is a flowchart which shows the normal game state effect determination process of step S5001 shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the normal effect determination process of step S5013 shown in FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the look-ahead processing. This is an example of a table referenced to determine the main fluctuation pattern used in the case of a jackpot. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit game state effect determination process of step S5002 shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting processing during a round of step S5053 shown in FIG. 168. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit game state effect determination process of step S5003 shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the V prize effect setting process of step S5063 shown in FIG. 170. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving game state effect determination process of step S5004 shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the final decisive battle production decision process of step S5014 shown in FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display device 16 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display device 16 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display device 16 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display device 16 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display device 16 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display device 16 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display device 16 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display device 16 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display device 16 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display device 16 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display device 16 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display device 16 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display device 16 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display device 16 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display device 16 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display device 16 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display device 16 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display device 16 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display device 16 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display device 16 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display device 16 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display device 16 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display device 16 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display device 16 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display device 16 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display device 16 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display device 16 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display device 16 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view which shows another structure of the game board unit 17 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 in the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transition of the production stage which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 in the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol memory check process by the main CPU 101 in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table which is referred for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display device 16 which concerns on the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display device 16 which concerns on the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display device 16 which concerns on the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display device 16 which concerns on the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display device 16 which concerns on the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display device 16 which concerns on the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display device 16 which concerns on the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display device 16 which concerns on the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display device 16 which concerns on the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display device 16 which concerns on the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display device 16 which concerns on the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view which shows the other structure of the game board unit 17 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 in the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the distribution of the time saving number of times which concerns on a pachinko gaming machine 1 in the modification of 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transition of the production stage which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 in the modification of 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transition of the production stage which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 in the other modification of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention.

[First Embodiment]
[1. Game machine configuration]
[1-1. Appearance composition]
First, the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 8. FIG. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a group of operation buttons. FIG. 4 is an example of a perspective view showing the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention from the back side. FIG. 5 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the gaming board unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 6 is an example showing an external perspective view of a gaming board unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is an example showing an exploded perspective view of a gaming board unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention as viewed from diagonally above the front right. FIG. 8 is an example of a front view showing the LED unit including the first and second special symbol display units. Further, the direction shown in the drawing is the direction in front view. Therefore, for example, "left" is described in the right direction of the drawing because the drawing is a rear view, so "right" on the drawing is "left" in the front view. Similarly, in the case where "right" is described in the left direction of the drawing, the "left" on the drawing becomes the "right" in the front view for the same reason.

In the following description, unless otherwise specified, the front-rear direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is defined with the front side as the front side and the back side as the rear side when viewed from the player. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the player, the left-hand side is the left side and the right-hand side is the right side, and the left-right direction is defined. Further, the front surface is a surface on the side that can be visually recognized when viewed from the player side, and the back surface is a surface on the side that can be visually recognized when viewed from the opposite side of the player.

As shown in FIGS. 1, 2 and 4 to 7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a wooden frame 11, a base door 12, a glass door 13, a plate unit 14, a launching device 15, a display device 16, and a game board unit 17. , The payout unit 18, and the substrate unit 19.

The wooden frame 11 is a frame body having a substantially rectangular shape in front view. The wooden frame 11 is provided with an opening 21 that penetrates in the front-rear direction. The base door 12 is fitted into the opening 21 of the wooden frame 11. The base door 12 supports various members. Specifically, the base door 12 supports the payout unit 18 and the substrate unit 19 on the back surface side, and also has the glass door 13, the plate unit 14, the launching device 15, the display device 16, and the game board unit 17 on the front surface side. To support.

The glass door 13 is pivotally attached to the base door 12 so as to be openable and closable. The glass door 13 is provided with an opening 22 and an operation button group 66. A transparent protective glass 23 is arranged in the opening 22 of the glass door 13. The protective glass 23 is arranged so as to face the game board unit 17 described later in the front-rear direction in a state where the glass door 13 is closed with respect to the base door 12. Further, a speaker 24 and an LED 25 are arranged on the upper part of the glass door 13. The speaker 24, for example, performs voice notification, production, error notification, and the like. The LED 25 is, for example, a light emitting means for producing a notification or an effect by light, and is not limited to the LED as long as the light emitting effect can be executed, and may be, for example, a lamp or the like.

As shown in FIG. 3, the operation button group 66 has a main button 662 and a select button 664. The select button 664 has an upper select button 664a, a lower select button 664b, a left select button 664c, and a right select button 664d. In the following, when the term "select button 664" is used, it means a general term for the up / down / left / right select buttons 664a to 664d.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can be operated on a guide menu screen, a hall menu screen, or the like, which will be described later, by using at least one or both of the main button 662 and the select button 664. The position where the operation button group 66 is provided is not limited to the glass door 13, and may be provided on the plate unit 14, for example, the upper plate 26 or the like.

The plate unit 14 is a unit body in which the upper plate 26 and the lower plate 27 are integrated. The dish unit 14 is a lower front portion of the base door 12 and is arranged below the glass door 13.

The upper plate 26 stores game balls, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 26 are launched from the launching device 15 toward the game area 20 described later. The upper plate 26 is provided with a payout port 61 and an effect button 62. The rented game balls and the game balls to be paid out as prize balls are paid out from the payout port 61 to the upper plate 26. The effect button 62 is a so-called "CHANGE button", a "push button", or the like. The effect button 62 may have a predetermined effect function in addition to the operation function operated by the player. The predetermined effect function corresponds to, for example, a function of projecting upward based on the result of a jackpot determination of a special symbol described later.

The lower plate 27 is mainly for storing the game balls overflowing from the upper plate 26. The lower plate 27 is provided with a payout port 63. The game ball overflowing from the upper plate 26 is paid out from the payout port 63 to the lower plate 27.

The launching device 15 is for launching the game ball stored in the upper plate 26 toward the game area 20. The launcher 15 is located at the lower right front of the base door 12 and at the lower right of the dish unit 14. The launch device 15 includes a panel body 31, a drive device (not shown), and a launch handle 32.

The panel body 31 is integrated with the lower right portion of the dish unit 14 in the launching device 15. The firing handle 32 is arranged on the surface side of the panel body 31. The drive device is arranged on the back surface side of the panel body 31, and is composed of, for example, a firing solenoid (not shown). In this way, when the launching handle 32 is operated by the player in the launching device 15, the game ball is launched by the operation of the driving device in response to the operation.

The display device 16 displays the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol (hereinafter, the jackpot determination of the special symbol may be simply referred to as "big hit determination") and various effect images related to the game, for example, a liquid crystal display. The device is used. The various effect images displayed in the display area of the display device 16 include, for example, an identification symbol for effect (decorative pattern), an effect image according to the result of the jackpot determination, an effect image during jackpot, a demo effect image, and a special The number of pending symbols variable display (variable display) is included. The display device 16 (for example, the display area of the liquid crystal display device) is arranged substantially at the center of the game board unit 17 (on the inner peripheral side of the center rail 1742 described later).

In the present embodiment, one display device 16 is provided to display the various effect images, but two liquid crystal display devices are provided and the effect images are displayed using the two liquid crystal display devices. You may try to do it.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control board 30 having a main control circuit 100 (see FIG. 9 described later) and a sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 9 described later). A sub-control board 40 having a sub-control board 40, a payout / launch control board 50 having a payout / launch control circuit 300 (see FIG. 9 described later) for controlling the payout / launch of a game ball, and a power supply circuit 338 (described later) for supplying power. A power supply unit 60 having a power supply unit 60 (see FIG. 9), a power supply switch 35, and a backup clear switch 330 (see FIG. 9 to be described later) are provided, respectively.

In the present embodiment, the sub-control board 40 is configured as a one-board board (a board provided with one control LSI or a plurality of LSIs on one board), but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of boards are used. (For example, the host control circuit 2100, the audio / LED control circuit 2200, the display control circuit 2300, etc.) may be configured.

The pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of set values (six stages of "1" to "6" in the present embodiment) in which various data related to the pachinko game are different. The setting "6" is most advantageous to the player, and as the value of the set value becomes smaller, the advantage to the player gradually decreases.

Inside the main board case that houses the main control board 30, there is a setting switch 332 that is operated when changing the set value, a setting key 328 that is operated when changing or confirming the set value, and a performance display monitor. The 334 and the error notification monitor 336 (both of which see FIG. 9 described later) are housed. For example, the performance display data and set values described later are displayed on the performance display monitor 334. For example, an error code or the like described later is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. The setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 are housed in the main control board case in consideration of security, and are referred to as a pachinko gaming machine 1 management manager (hereinafter referred to as "game machine management manager"). This is to prevent a third party (for example, a player) other than) from easily accessing the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328. The inside of the main board case means that the setting switch 332 and / and the setting key 328 cannot be accessed unless the main board case is opened, and only the corresponding parts of the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 of the main board case are turned off. When there is a notch and the pachinko game machine 1 is rotated from the island equipment where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed using the key managed by the game machine management manager to expose the back surface, the game machine management It also includes those that allow the responsible person to access the configuration switch 332 and / and the configuration key 328.

The game board unit 17 is arranged in front of the base door 12 so as to be located behind the protective glass 23. On the front surface of the game board unit 17, a game area 20 is formed in which the launched game ball can roll and flow down.

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 7, the game board unit 17 is arranged in a transparent panel 172 in which a game area 20 in which a launched game ball can roll and flow down is formed, and a substantially central portion of the game area 20. It includes a center unit 174, an ordinary electric accessory unit 400, an attacker unit 500, a passage gate 49, and a back unit 176. The center unit 174, the ordinary electric accessory unit 400, the attacker unit 500, and the passage gate 49 are provided on the front side of the transparent panel 172. The back unit 176 decorates the game board unit 17 and is provided on the rear side of the transparent panel 172. The back unit 176 includes a accessory group 1000 of an upper accessory or the like (see FIG. 7) arranged above the display area of the display device 16. Of these accessory groups 1000, at least one accessory or an operating member constituting the accessory functions as an operable effect based on the result of the special lottery, and thus will be referred to as an effect below. There is also.

The transparent panel 172 is formed with an opening 1722 at a portion where a display area of the display device 16 described later is arranged. As shown in FIGS. 5 and 7, a guide rail 26 is provided on the front surface of the transparent panel 172, and game nails and the like are planted. The game ball launched from the launching device 15 jumps out from the guide rail 26 toward the game area 20, collides with a game nail or the like, changes the direction of travel, and flows down toward the lower part of the game area 20.

The guide rail 26 is composed of two rail-shaped members (hereinafter, referred to as "outer rail 26a" and "inner rail 26b"). The game area 20 is partitioned (defined) by the guide rail 26. The inner rail 26b, together with the outer rail 26a, is for guiding the launched game ball to the upper part of the game area 20. The inner rail 26b is arranged inside the outer rail 26a on the left side of the transparent panel 172.

The center unit 174 is provided with a center rail 1742 above the opening 1722 of the transparent panel 172 (above the display area of the display device 16), and is formed in an arc shape when viewed from the front. The center rail 1742 is arranged above the game area 20, and divides the flow-down area of the game ball in the game area 20 into the left and right sides of the center rail 1742.

The game ball launched by the launching device 15 is divided into the left and right sides of the center rail 1742 and flows down the game area 20, and the game ball flowing down the game area 20 is planted in the game board unit 17 (specifically, the transparent panel 172). Due to a collision with the installed game nails, etc., it flows downward while changing the direction of travel. The flow-down area of the launched game ball is distributed according to the amount of operation of the launch handle 32. Specifically, when the amount of operation of the launch handle 32 is small, the launched game ball flows down the left region of the center rail 1742. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the launch handle 52 is large, the launched game ball flows down the right region of the center rail 1742. The method of hitting the game ball to the left side area of the center rail 1742 is called "left hitting", and the method of hitting the game ball to flow down to the right side area of the center rail 1742 is called "right hitting". It is possible to distinguish by the player.

The attacker unit 500 is a unit body in which the first starting port 420, the large winning opening 540, and the special electric accessory 600 are integrated. The attacker unit 500 is located in the lower right part of the game area 20 and below the passage gate 49.

The big prize opening 540 is a portion that can be opened in the case of a big hit game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player. A count switch 541 is arranged in the large winning opening 540 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball wins in the large winning opening 540, the winning game ball is detected by the count switch 541. When a game ball is detected by the count switch 541, a preset number of game balls are paid out from the payout port 61 to the upper plate 26 (or from the payout outlet 63 to the lower plate 27).

The special electric accessory 600 includes a shutter 610 that can move forward and backward, and a large winning opening solenoid 620 (see FIG. 9) that drives the shutter 610. The special electric accessory 600 is arranged above the large winning opening 540. The special electric accessory 600 is in an open state in which the shutter 610 is driven by the large winning opening solenoid 620 to enable (or easily) win a game ball in the large winning opening 540, and the special electric accessory 600 is in an open state. It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed state that makes it impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball. The open drive by the special electric accessory 600 (shutter 610) shifts to the jackpot gaming state based on the result of the jackpot determination performed when the game ball wins the first starting port 420 or the second starting port 440 described later. It is done when it is done. The result of the jackpot determination performed when the game ball wins the first starting port 420 or the second starting port 440 described later is the special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74. It is indicated by the stop display mode of.

In addition, in this specification, when it simply refers to "special symbol", it means both 1st special symbol and 2nd special symbol. However, in the present embodiment, the number of special symbols is two (first special symbol, second special symbol), but the number of special symbols may be one.

The first starting port 420 gives an opportunity for a big hit determination on the condition that the game ball wins (passes), and also gives an opportunity to display the result of the big hit determination on the display device 16 or the first special symbol display unit 73 described later. It is something to give. A first start port switch 421 is arranged at the first start port 420 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball wins in the first start port 420, the winning game ball is detected by the first start port switch 421. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 421, a big hit determination is made inside the pachinko game machine 1 (main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 9), and a preset number of game balls are ejected from the payout port 61. It is discharged (discharged) to the upper plate 26 or from the payout port 63 to the lower plate 27. The winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 is performed by left-handed striking.

The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is a unit body in which the second start port 440, the out port 450, and the ordinary electric accessory 460 are integrated. The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is arranged at a substantially left lower portion of the game area 20. The second starting port 440 and the out port 450 are arranged adjacent to each other, and the second starting port 440 is arranged on the right side in the front view and the out port 450 is arranged on the left side in the front view. Conventionally, many of the ordinary electric accessory units 400 are arranged below, for example, the first starting port 420. However, in recent years, it has been required to increase the size of the display device 16, and it is difficult to arrange the display device 16 below the first starting port 420. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is arranged at a substantially left lower portion of the gaming area 20.

The second starting port 440 gives an opportunity for a big hit determination on the condition that the game ball wins (passes), and also gives an opportunity to display the result of the big hit determination on the display device 16 or the second special symbol display unit 74 described later. It is something to give. A second start port switch 441 is arranged at the second start port 440 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball wins in the second start port 440, the winning game ball is detected by the second start port switch 441. When a game ball is detected in the second start port switch 441, a big hit determination is made inside the pachinko game machine 1 (main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 9), and a preset number of game balls are discharged to the payout port 61. Is discharged (discharged) from the upper plate to the lower plate 27 from the payout port 63. The difficulty of winning the second starting port 440 is determined by the ordinary electric accessory 460. As a general rule, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is performed by right-handed hitting.

The ordinary electric accessory 460 includes a blade member 4620 that can rotate to the right, a start port solenoid 4630 (see, for example, FIG. 9), and a power transmission mechanism (not shown) that transmits the power of the start port solenoid 4630 to the blade member 4620. ) Is provided. The ordinary electric accessory 460 can shift (drive) between an open state in which the game ball easily passes and a closed state in which the game ball does not easily pass by driving the blade member 4620 by the start port solenoid 4630. It is composed of. If the game ball passes above the blade member 4620 while the blade member 4620 is being driven, the game ball either wins the second start port 440 or is discharged to the outside of the pachinko game machine 1 from the out port 450. Will be done. The opening / closing drive by the ordinary electric accessory 460 (blade member 4620) is performed for a predetermined period and number of times when the ordinary symbol has a specific stop display mode on the ordinary symbol display unit 71.

The passing gate 49 provides an opportunity for determining a normal symbol on the condition that the game ball wins (passes). The passage gate 49 is located on the lower right side of the center unit 174 and on the upper right side of the attacker unit 500. A passing gate switch 49a is provided at the passing gate 49 (see FIG. 9). When the game ball passes through the passing gate 49, the passing game ball is detected by the passing gate switch 49a. When a game ball is detected by the passing gate switch 49a, a normal symbol determination is performed inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 2). The passing of the game ball to the passing gate 49 is performed by right-handed hitting.

The attacker unit 500 is a unit body in which the first starting port 420, the large winning opening 540, and the special electric accessory 600 are integrated. The attacker unit 500 is arranged at a substantially lower right portion of the game area 20. The reason why the attacker unit 500 is arranged at a substantially lower right portion of the game area 20 is that in recent years, it has been required to make the display device 16 larger, and various members such as the attacker unit 500 are arranged in the game area 20. This is because it is necessary to avoid such an enlarged display device 16.

The big prize opening 540 is a portion that can be opened in the case of a big hit game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player. A count switch 541 is arranged in the large winning opening 540 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball wins in the large winning opening 540, the winning game ball is detected by the count switch 541. When a game ball is detected by the count switch 541, a preset number of game balls are paid out (discharged) from the payout port 61 to the upper plate 26 (or from the payout outlet 63 to the lower plate 27).

The special electric accessory 600 includes a shutter 610 that can move forward and backward, and a large winning opening solenoid 620 (see FIG. 9) that drives the shutter 610. The special electric accessory 600 is arranged above the large winning opening 540. The special electric accessory 600 is in an open state in which the shutter 610 is driven by the large winning opening solenoid 620 to enable (or easily) win a game ball in the large winning opening 540, and the special electric accessory 600 is in an open state. It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed state that makes it impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball. The open drive by the special electric accessory 600 (shutter 610) is performed when the special symbol is in a specific stop display mode in the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 and is shifted to the jackpot game state. Is done in.

The general winning openings 53, 54, and 55 are arranged at the lower left of the game board unit 17, and the general winning openings 56 are arranged at the lower right of the game board unit 17. Further, the general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a are arranged in the general winning opening 53, 54, 55, 56 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball wins in the general winning opening 53, 54, 55, 56, the winning game ball is detected by the general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a. When a game ball is detected in the general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a, a preset number of game balls are paid out from the payout port 61 to the upper plate 26 (or from the payout outlet 63 to the lower plate 27). (Discharged).

In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls in the first starting port 420 and the second starting port 440 is 3, the number of prize balls in the general winning openings 53, 54, 55, and 56 is 10, and the number of prize balls in the large winning opening 540 is 3. The number of prize balls is set to 15 respectively. This value (number of prize balls) can be arbitrarily changed in design.

The out port 57 is arranged at the lowermost center of the game area 20 (the most downstream position in the flow direction of the game ball). The out port 57 is finally flowed in when the launched game ball does not win a prize in any of the starting ports or winning openings.

The LED unit 70 is the lower right portion of the game board unit 17 and is arranged outside the guide rail 26 (see FIGS. 5 and 6). The LED unit 70 is a unit body in which various display units are integrated. Specifically, the LED unit 70 has, as the various display units, a normal symbol display unit 71, a normal symbol hold display unit 72, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74, and a first special. It includes a symbol hold display unit 75 and a second special symbol hold display unit 76.

The normal symbol display unit 71 displays the result of a determination (normal symbol determination) for the normal symbol game. Here, the ordinary symbol game refers to a game in which it is determined whether or not to drive the ordinary electric accessory 460 to open the state based on the result of the determination (ordinary symbol determination). The ordinary symbol display unit 71 includes display LEDs 71a and 71b. When the start condition of the variable display (variable display) is satisfied, the display LEDs 71a and 71b start the variable display that alternately turns on and off. The combination (display pattern) of the display LEDs 71a and 71b by turning on and off is displayed as a normal symbol. The display LEDs 71a and 71b perform a stop display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the variable display.

When the result of the determination (ordinary symbol determination) is a hit (hereinafter referred to as "ordinary hit"), the combination of turning on and off the display LEDs 71a and 71b (ordinary symbol) is a specific stop display mode. In this way, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, it is determined that the normal electric accessory 460 is in the open state, the ordinary electric accessory 460 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and the second starting port is opened. The difficulty of winning a game ball to 440 is changed.

The hold display unit 72 for a normal symbol displays the number of times of execution of the variable display of the reserved normal symbol (hereinafter, referred to as "the number of hold of the variable display of the normal symbol"). The hold display unit 72 for a normal symbol includes display LEDs 72a and 72b. The hold display unit 72 for a normal symbol displays the number of holds for the variable display of the normal symbol by the combination of turning on and off the display LEDs 72a and 72b. For example, when the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended for one time, the display LED 72a is turned on and the display LED 72b is turned off. Further, when the execution of the variation display of the normal symbol is suspended twice, the display LED 72a lights up and the display LED 72b lights up. Further, when the execution of the variation display of the normal symbol is suspended for three times, the display LED 72a blinks and the display LED 72b lights up. Further, when the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended for four times, the display LED 72a blinks and the display LED 72b blinks.

The first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74 display the result of the determination (big hit determination) for the special symbol game. Here, the special symbol game refers to a game in which the transition or maintenance of the gaming state is determined based on the result of the determination (big hit determination).

The first special symbol display unit 73 includes a display LED group 73a composed of eight LEDs. The display LED group 73a displays the variation with the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 (starting winning), and displays the result of the jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball. When the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, the display LED group 73a starts the variable display in which the eight LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off. In the display LED group 73a, the combination (display pattern) by turning on / off the eight LEDs is displayed as a special symbol. The display LED group 73a performs a stop display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the variable display.

When the result of the jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 is a jackpot, the combination of turning on / off the eight LEDs of the display LED group 73a (special symbol) becomes a specific stop display mode. .. In this way, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition of the game state is determined, the shutter 610 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and the game ball can be won in the large winning opening 540. Become. In the following description, the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display unit 73 based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 is referred to as the first special symbol.

The second special symbol display unit 74 includes a display LED group 74a composed of eight LEDs. The display LED group 74a displays the variation with the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 (starting winning), and displays the result of the jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball. When the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, the display LED group 74a starts the variable display in which the eight LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off. In the display LED group 74a, the combination (display pattern) of turning on / off the eight LEDs is displayed as a special symbol. The display LED group 74a performs a stop display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the variable display.

When the result of the jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is a jackpot, the combination of turning on / off the eight LEDs of the display LED group 74a (special symbol) becomes a specific stop display mode. .. In this way, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition of the game state is determined, the shutter 610 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and the game ball can be won in the large winning opening 540. Become. In the following description, the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the second special symbol display unit 74 based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is referred to as the second special symbol.

In this way, when the first or second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the specific stop display mode in the display LED groups 73a and 74a of the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74, it is normal. The transition from the gaming state (normal gaming state) to the jackpot gaming state, which is a state advantageous to the player, is determined. In the present embodiment, the jackpot determination includes a jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 and a jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440. That is, when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the round game in which the jackpot 540 is opened is shifted to the jackpot game state in which the game is executed for a predetermined number of rounds.

The hold display unit 75 for the first special symbol and the hold display unit 76 for the second special symbol determine the number of executions of the variable display of the reserved special symbol (hereinafter, referred to as "the number of pending variable display of the special symbol"). It is to be displayed. The hold display unit 75 for the first special symbol includes display LEDs 75a and 75b. The second special symbol hold display unit 76 includes display LEDs 76a and 76b. The hold display unit 75 for the first special symbol and the hold display unit 76 for the second special symbol display the number of hold of the variable display of the special symbol by turning on / off the display LEDs 75a / 75b and 76a / 76b. The display modes of turning on / off the display LEDs 75a / 75b and 76a / 76b are the same as those of the display LEDs 72a / 72b of the normal symbol hold display unit 72.

[1-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 19.

As shown in FIG. 9, the pachinko gaming machine 1 mainly has a main control circuit 100 that controls the game, a sub control circuit 200 that controls the effect according to the progress of the game, and a payout / launch control circuit 300. And a power supply circuit 338. Hereinafter, each of these configurations will be described in the order of the main control circuit 100, the payout / emission control circuit 300, the power supply circuit 338, and the sub control circuit 200 for convenience.

[1-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 100 includes a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102 (read-only memory), a main RAM 103 (read / write memory), and the like, and is housed in a main board case.

A main ROM 102, a main RAM 103, and the like are connected to the main CPU 101. The main CPU 101 has a function of executing various processes according to a program stored in the main ROM 102.

The main ROM 102 stores a program for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the main CPU 101, various tables, and the like.

The main RAM 103 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 101, and can store and hold the written information even in a non-energized state. In the present embodiment, the main RAM 103 is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 101, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read or written may be used.

The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area in which information on the special symbol game is stored as start-up memory. Specifically, in the main RAM 103, the first special symbol start storage area (0) in which the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the fluctuating first special symbol is stored as the start memory, and the first for the upper limit of four times. The first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), in which the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the special symbol is stored as the start memory, are provided. Similarly, in the main RAM 103, the second special symbol start storage area (0) in which the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the changing second special symbol is stored as the start memory, and the second special for the upper limit of 4 times. The second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), in which the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the symbol is stored as the start memory, are provided.

Further, the main control circuit 100 includes an initial reset circuit 104 that generates a reset signal when the power is turned on, an I / O port 105, a command output port 106, a backup capacitor 107, and the like. The initial reset circuit 104 is connected to the main CPU 101. The I / O port 105 transmits input signals from various devices to the main CPU 101, and transmits output signals from the main CPU 101 to various devices. The command output port 106 transmits a command from the main CPU 101 to the sub control circuit 200. The backup capacitor 107 holds various data stored in the main RAM 103 by promptly supplying power to the main RAM 103, for example, when the power is cut off (power is turned off).

Further, various devices (members) are connected to the main control circuit 100.

For example, the main control circuit 100 includes a normal symbol display unit 71, a normal symbol hold display unit 72, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74, and a first special symbol hold display unit 75. The second special symbol hold display unit 76, the start port solenoid 4630 that drives the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460, the large winning opening solenoid 620 that drives the shutter 610, and the like are connected. The main control circuit 100 can control the operation of these devices (members) by transmitting signals. Further, the main control circuit 100 is used to transmit data to a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall clerk, a function of displaying the number of big hits, and a hall computer 700 that manages pachinko gaming machines in the entire hall. The external terminal plate 323 to be used is connected.

Further, the main control circuit 100 includes a first start port switch 421, a second start port switch 441, a passing gate switch 49a, a count switch 541, general winning port switches 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a, a performance display monitor 334, and the like. Is connected. When a game ball is detected by these members, a predetermined detection signal is supplied to the main control circuit 100 from the members. Further, the main control circuit 100 is connected to a backup clear switch 330 or the like that clears the backup data at the time of power failure according to the operation of the manager of the amusement park.

Further, a setting key 328 and a setting switch 332 are also connected to the main control circuit 100. The setting key 328 is similar to a key or a key that serves as an opportunity to execute a setting change process or a setting confirmation process described later. The setting switch 332 can be pressed and operated, and is for changing the set setting value at the time of the setting change processing described later. As described above, the setting key 328 and the setting switch 332 are housed in the main board case so that they cannot be easily accessed by a third party (for example, a player) other than the game machine manager.

Further, a payout / launch control circuit 300 is connected to the main control circuit 100. The payout / launch control circuit 300 is connected to a payout device 350 for paying out the game ball, a launcher 15 for firing the game ball, a card unit 360, and the like. The payout device 350 is provided in the payout unit 18. A ball lending operation panel 370 is connected to the card unit 360, and a signal corresponding to the player's operation is supplied to the ball lending operation panel 370.

[1-2-2. Payout / launch control circuit]
Upon receiving the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 100 and the rental ball control signal supplied from the card unit 360, the payout / launch control circuit 300 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 350. Control is performed so that the payout device 350 pays out the game ball. Further, in the payout / launch control circuit 300, when the launch handle 32 is gripped by the player and is rotated in the clockwise direction, the launch solenoid (shown) is according to the rotation angle (rotation amount). It supplies power to the wheel and controls the launch of the game ball.

Further, a sub control circuit 200 (relay board 2010) is connected to the command output port 106. The sub control circuit 200 performs display control in the display device 16, control related to sound generated from the speaker 24, control related to light of the LED 25, and the like in response to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100.

In the present embodiment, the command is supplied from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200, while the signal cannot be supplied from the sub control circuit 200 to the main control circuit 100. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured so that a signal can be transmitted from the control circuit 200 to the main control circuit 100.

The payout / launch control circuit 300 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls from the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the payout / launch control circuit 300 includes a payout device 350 for paying out the game balls and a game. A launching device 15 for launching a ball, a backup clear switch 330 for clearing backup data at the time of power failure according to an operation of a game hall administrator, and the like are connected.

[1-2-3. Power supply circuit]
The power supply circuit 338 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage required for playing a game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the main control circuit 100, the sub control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 300, and the like. ..

A power switch 35 or the like is connected to the power supply circuit 338. The power switch 35 is turned on when supplying the necessary power to the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Although the setting key 328 and the setting switch 332 are connected to the main control circuit 100 as described above, they may be connected to the power supply circuit 338 instead. Even in this case, it is preferable that the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 are housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the game machine management manager cannot easily access the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328. .. Even in such a case, the inside of the predetermined case means that the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 cannot be accessed unless the case is opened, and the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 in the above case correspond to each other. When the pachinko game machine 1 is rotated from the island equipment where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed using the key managed by the game machine manager, and the back surface is exposed. , Including those that allow the game machine manager to access the setting switch 332 and / and the setting key 328.

Here, the display contents displayed on the performance display monitor 334 will be described. Performance display data is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 under the control of the main CPU 101. The performance display data is, for example, data indicating the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than the jackpot game state to the launch of a predetermined number (for example, 60,000 shots) of game balls, and is also called a base value.

The payout / launch control circuit 300 aggregates the base values based on the past game history, and stores the aggregated results in a specific work area described later in the work area of the main RAM 103. This specific work area will be described later, but it is an area in which data is not cleared even if the backup clear processing described later is performed. It should be noted that the aggregation of the base values may be performed based on the performance of a predetermined operation, or the aggregation may be performed at all times so that the base values are always displayed on the performance display monitor 334. ..

The payout / launch control circuit 300 includes a total history aggregation means that aggregates all base values based on the total game history from the initial power on (the first power on after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is manufactured) to the present. It is provided with a history aggregation means for each set value that executes aggregation of the base value for each set value based on the past game history for each set value.

For example, when the display operation of all base values is performed by the game machine management manager or the like, the total history totaling means executes the totalization of all the base values described above. All the base values aggregated by the all history aggregation means are displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101. Further, when the display operation of the base value for each set value is performed, the history aggregation means for each set value executes the aggregation of the base value for each set value. The base value for each set value aggregated by the history aggregation means for each set value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101.

The history aggregation means for each set value can also aggregate only the base value for any set value in response to a request (operation). In this case, not only the base value for the set setting value but also the base value for other setting values other than the set setting value can be aggregated. Therefore, the main CPU 101 can display the base values for other set values on the performance display monitor 334 without executing the setting change process described later.

The main CPU 101 has both a total base value aggregated by the total history aggregation means and a set value-specific base value aggregated by the set value-specific history aggregation means, for example, in response to an operation by the game machine management manager or the like. Can be displayed on the performance display monitor 334, or only one of these can be selectively displayed on the performance display monitor 334.

Further, the main CPU 101 may display only the base values of the specific set values on the performance display monitor 334, or may display the base values of all the set values in a list. In addition, both all base values and base values for each set value may be displayed in a list. When displaying the base values of all set values in a list, or when displaying both all base values and base values by set value in a list, use both the performance display monitor 334 and other display means. It may be displayed.

Further, the main CPU 101 includes all history totaling means and set value-based history totaling means, and in addition to these or in place of the set value-based history totaling means, from the execution of the setting change process described later to the present. A means for totaling the history after changing the setting may be provided, which aggregates the base value after changing the setting based on the game history. In this case, the main CPU 101 can display the base value for each set value after the setting change on the performance display monitor 334 based on the display operation of the base value after the setting change.

In this way, by making all or part of all the base values and the base values for each set value and / and the base values for each set value after the setting change displayed on the performance display monitor 334, the pachinko game Information based on the past game history of the machine 1 can be easily confirmed.

In this embodiment, the base value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334, but the total number of game balls to be paid out is paid by entering the special electric accessory (large winning opening) or the ordinary electric accessory. The ratio of the number of game balls issued (payment by the character) may be displayed. Further, it may be displayed with respect to the total number of shots, and may also be displayed as a ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the special electric accessory (large winning opening). Moreover, you may display them by setting.

Further, an error code described later is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 336 may display a setting changing code indicating that the setting change processing described later, a setting checking code indicating that the setting confirmation process described later is in progress, and the like. it can. It should be noted that during the setting change, a symbol (setting change symbol) that is not normally displayed on the special symbol display device may be displayed.

[1-2-4. Sub control circuit]
Next, the internal configuration of the sub-control circuit 200 will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration inside the sub control circuit 200 and a connection relationship between the sub control circuit 200 and various peripheral devices thereof.

The sub-control circuit 200 executes an effect according to the progress of the game in response to a command from the main control circuit 100, and as shown in FIG. 10, the relay board 2010 and the sub-board 2020 (first board). ), A control ROM board 2030, and a CGROM (Character Generator ROM) board 2040 (second board). Then, the sub-board 2020 is connected to the relay board 2010, the control ROM board 2030, and the CG ROM board 2040. In the sub control circuit 200, the sub board 2020 and various ROM boards (control ROM board 2030 and CG ROM board 2040) are connected via a board-to-board connector (not shown).

As shown in FIG. 9, the sub control circuit 200 includes an effect button switch 621 that is turned ON / OFF by operating the effect button 62, a main button switch 6621 that is turned ON / OFF by operating the main button 662, and each select. The select button switches 6641a to 6641d, which are turned on and off by operating the buttons 664a to 664d, and the accessory detection sensor group 1002, which detects that the accessory group 1000 is in the initial position, are connected. These illustrations are omitted. Further, in reality, the select button switches 6641a to 6641d corresponding to the select buttons 664a to 664d are provided, respectively, but in FIG. 9, these are collectively referred to as the select button switch 6641 for convenience. Further, the accessory detection sensor group 1002 is provided as many as the number of motors provided corresponding to the movable accessory.

The relay board 2010 is a relay board for receiving a command transmitted from the main control circuit 100 and transmitting the received command to the sub board 2020.

When the sub-control board is the one-board board described above as the receiving means for receiving the command transmitted from the main control circuit 100, the sub-control board itself may have a function as a receiving means. However, the command may be received as a result via the relay board or the like.

Further, when the sub-control board is composed of a plurality of boards, any board may be provided with the receiving means, and even in this case, it is interpreted that the sub-control board has the receiving means. can do. Further, also in this case, even when the sub-control board composed of a plurality of boards receives the command via the relay board or the like, the information related to the command by any of the boards constituting the sub-control board as a result. It is also possible to express that the sub-control board has received the command if it recognizes.

The sub-board 2020 is provided with a host control circuit 2100, an audio / LED control circuit 2200, a display control circuit 2300, an SDRAM (Synchronous Dynamic RAM) 250, and a built-in relay board 2600. Of these, at least the host control circuit 2100, the audio / LED control circuit 2200, and the display control circuit 2300 are configured as one board.

The host control circuit 2100 is a circuit that controls the operation of the entire sub control circuit 200 based on various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 100, and is a CPU processor, a sub work RAM 2100a, a SRAM 2100b, an RTC (real time clock), and the like. It includes a watchdog timer. The host control circuit 2100 is connected to the audio / LED control circuit 2200, the display control circuit 2300, and the built-in relay board 2600 in the sub-board 2020. Further, the host control circuit 2100 is connected to the control ROM board 2030.

Further, the host control circuit 2100 has a subwork RAM 2100a and an SRAM (Static RAM) 210b. The subwork RAM 2100a is a storage device that acts as a temporary storage area for work when the host control circuit 2100 executes various processes, and various flags and variables required when the host control circuit 2100 executes various processes. Memorize the value of. The RAM 2100b is a storage device that backs up predetermined data in the subwork RAM 2100a. In the present embodiment, the RAM is used as the temporary storage area of the host control circuit 2100, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any recording medium as long as it is a readable and writable storage medium may be used as the temporary storage area. ..

The voice / LED control circuit 2200 is connected to the speaker 24 and the lamp group 25 via the built-in relay board 2600, and is based on the control signals (sound request and LED request described later) input from the host control circuit 2100. This is a circuit that controls the sound reproduction operation by the lamp group 25 and the light emission operation by the lamp group 25. Therefore, functionally, the voice / LED control circuit 2200 has a voice controller 2200a and a lamp controller 2200b. The voice controller 2200a and the lamp controller 2200b are substantially included in the sound lamp control module 2260 described later. The internal configuration of the voice / LED control circuit 2200 will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings.

In the present embodiment, when the control signal and data (for example, LED data described later) output from the voice / LED control circuit 2200 are transmitted to the lamp group 25 via the built-in relay board 2600, the voice / LED Communication between the control circuit 2200 and the lamp group 25 is performed by a communication method (a type of serial communication method) of SPI (Serial Periperal Interface). Further, in the present embodiment, the lamp group 25 includes one or more LEDs and one or more LED drivers for controlling each LED.

The display control circuit 2300 is connected to the display device 16 and displays an image (decorative pattern image, background image, effect image, etc.) related to the effect based on the control signal (drawing request) input from the host control circuit 2100. It is a circuit for controlling various processing operations when displaying with. The display control circuit 2300 has a display controller (first display controller 2380 and second display controller 2390 described later) and a built-in VRAM (Video RAM) 237.

Further, the display control circuit 2300 is connected to the SDRAM 2500 in the sub-board 2020. Further, the display control circuit 2300 is connected to the CGROM board 2040. Further, the display controller in the display control circuit 2300 is directly connected to the display device 16 without going through the relay board. The internal configuration of the display control circuit 2300 will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings.

The SDRAM 2500 is composed of a DDR2 (Double-Date Rate2) SDRAM. Further, the SDRAM 2500 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing various image data in the drawing control process of the image (moving image and still image) displayed by the display device 16. Specifically, for example, the SDRAM 2500 is provided with a texture buffer, a movie buffer, a blend buffer, two frame buffers (first frame buffer and second frame buffer), a motion buffer, and the like.

The built-in relay board 2600 receives various signals and various data output from the host control circuit 2100 and the audio / LED control circuit 2200, and transmits the received various signals and various data to the speaker 24, the lamp group 25, and the accessory group 1000. It is a relay board to transmit to.

Further, the built-in relay board 2600 has an I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) controller 2610 and a digital audio power amplifier 2620 (amplification means). In the present embodiment, an example in which the I2C controller 2610 and the digital audio power amplifier 2620 are mounted on the same relay board is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the relay board on which the I2C controller 2610 is mounted can be used as a digital audio. It may be provided separately from the relay board on which the power amplifier 2620 is mounted.

The I2C controller 2610 is connected to the host control circuit 2100 and the motor controller 2700 of the accessory group 1000. That is, the host control circuit 2100 is connected to the accessory group 1000 via the I2C controller 2610 and the motor controller 2700. Then, the control signals and data (for example, excitation data described later) output from the host control circuit 2100 are input to the accessory group 1000 via the I2C controller 2610 and the motor controller 2700.

In the present embodiment, the communication between the I2C controller 2610 and the motor controller 2700 is performed by the I2C communication method (a type of serial communication method). Further, in the present embodiment, one or more motors are included in the accessory group 1000, and one or more motor drivers for driving each motor are included in the motor controller 2700. Although FIG. 10 shows an example in which only one accessory group 1000 is provided, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of accessory groups 1000 may be provided.

Further, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the host control circuit 2100 directly uses the motor of the accessory that constitutes the accessory group 1000 and the motor of the operating member that constitutes the accessory without using the motor controller 2700. It may be configured to be driven, or a control circuit for motor control may be provided separately. Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of motor drivers (motors) are controlled by one control circuit, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the present embodiment, one or more (one or more) control circuits may be used to control one or more (one or more) motors (motor drivers), or one or more (one or more) control circuits may be used. It may be configured to control one motor (motor driver), or it may be configured to control one motor (motor driver) by one control circuit.

Further, the digital audio power amplifier 2620 is connected to the audio / LED control circuit 2200 and the speaker 24. That is, the voice / LED control circuit 2200 is connected to the speaker 24 via the digital audio power amplifier 2620. Therefore, the audio signal or the like output from the audio / LED control circuit 2200 is input to the speaker 24 via the digital audio power amplifier 2620.

A sub-main ROM 2050 is provided on the control ROM board 2030. In the sub-main ROM 2050, various programs for controlling the production operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the host control circuit 2100 and various data tables (see, for example, FIGS. 21 to 28 described later) are stored. Then, the host control circuit 2100 (more specifically, the CPU processor included in the host control circuit 2100) executes various processes according to the program stored in the sub-main ROM 2050.

In the present embodiment, the sub-main ROM 2050 is applied as a storage means for storing programs, various tables, and the like used in the host control circuit 2100, but the present invention is not limited thereto. As such a storage means, a storage medium of another aspect may be used as long as it is a storage medium that can be read by a computer provided with a control means, for example, a hard disk device, a CD-ROM and a DVD-ROM, a ROM cartridge, or the like. Storage medium may be applied. Moreover, each of the programs may be recorded in a separate storage medium. Further, the program may be recorded in advance on a recording medium, or may be downloaded from the outside or the like after the power is turned on and recorded in the sub-main ROM 2050.

The CGROM board 2040 is provided with the CGROM 2060. The CGROM2060 is composed of a NOR type or NAND type flash memory. Further, the CGROM 2060 stores, for example, image data displayed on the display device 16 and audio data reproduced by the speaker 24 (sometimes referred to as sound data in this specification). At this time, various data are compressed (encoded) and stored in the CGROM 2060, but the present invention is not limited to this, and various data may be stored in the CGROM 2060 without being compressed.

In the present embodiment, the configuration in which various ROM boards (control ROM board 2030 and CGROM board 2040) and the sub board 2020 are connected by a board-to-board connector in the sub control circuit 200 has been described. The invention is not limited to this. For example, various ROMs may be directly inserted into a port such as a socket provided on the sub-board 2020 to form the sub-board 2020 with a single board having a ROM function or the ROM itself. That is, the sub-board 2020 and various ROMs may be integrally configured. Further, when the sub-board 2020 is composed of a single board having a ROM function or the ROM itself, the sub-control circuit 200 is used according to the type of memory used as the CG ROM. It may be provided with a switching means for physically or electrically switching the circuit on the board, or a switching means for switching the information of the circuit on the sub-board to be used according to the type of memory.

Further, in the present embodiment, the magnitude relationship of the data communication speed between each of the various storage means (sub-main ROM 2050, CGROM 2060, built-in VRAM 2370, SDRAM 2500) and the corresponding control circuit is determined by the built-in VRAM 2370> SDRAM 2500> sub-main. ROM2050≈CGROM2060. That is, in the present embodiment, the communication speed between the built-in VRAM 2370 and the various circuits in the display control circuit 2300 is the fastest, followed by the communication speed between the SDRAM 2500 and the display control circuit 2300. Then, the communication speed between the sub-main ROM 2050 and the host control circuit 2100 and the communication speed between the CG ROM 2060 and the display control circuit 2300 become the slowest. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the magnitude relationship of the communication speed between each of the various storage means and the corresponding control circuit can be arbitrarily set. For example, the magnitude relationship of the communication speed between each of the various storage means and the corresponding control circuit may be different from that of the present embodiment, or the communication speed between each storage means and the corresponding control circuit. May all be the same.

Here, possible configurations of the various storage means described above will be described. In the present embodiment, the storage means for storing information about image data (compressed (encoded) image data) is information about transparency data (alpha table described later) that can be used when setting transparency for image data. A configuration example that is the same as the storage means (CGROM2060) has been described. That is, a configuration example in which the "first information storage means" is physically the same as the "second information storage means" has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the "first information storage means" may be composed of a storage means (storage medium) physically different from the "second information storage means".

Further, the "information storage means" referred to in the present specification means not only a storage means such as CGROM2060, but also a table stored in the storage means, a data storage area in the storage means, and the like. Good. Therefore, for example, the "first information storage means" and the "second information storage means" may be different data storage areas or different tables in the same storage means. Further, the mode may be stored in different register addresses. That is, the "information storage means" referred to in the present specification is different not only when the storage means (storage medium) are physically different, but also when they are physically the same storage means (for example, ROM, RAM, etc.). However, it also includes the case where the data areas (storage areas distinguished by addresses, registers, tables, structures, etc.) are different in the storage means.

The above-mentioned meaning of the "information storage means" in the present specification is also applicable to the above-mentioned "third information storage means" (SDRAM 2500) and "fourth information storage means" (built-in VRAM 2370). Therefore, for example, the "first information storage means" to the "fourth information storage means" may be composed of physically different storage means (storage media), or the "first information storage means" to. The "fourth information storage means" may be composed of different data areas (storage areas distinguished by addresses, registers, tables, structures, etc.) in one storage means.

Further, in the present embodiment, the "first information storage means" and the "second information storage means" are configured by different data areas in one storage means (CGROM2060), and the "third information storage means" is defined as a "third information storage means". , The storage means (CGROM2060) including the "first information storage means" and the "second information storage means" and the storage means (SDRAM2500) physically different from each other, and the "fourth information storage means" is the "fourth information storage means". An example will be described in which a storage means (CGROM2060) including the "1 information storage means" and the "second information storage means" and a storage means (built-in VRAM2370) physically different from the "third information storage means" (SDRAM2500) are used. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Whether the "information storage means" is composed of a data area or a storage means, and how to combine the "information storage means" defined as the data area and the "information storage means" defined as the storage means. It can be appropriately set according to, for example, the configuration (number, type, etc.) of the storage means provided in the game machine. For example, in the present embodiment, the "first information storage means" to the "third information storage means" are configured by different data areas in one storage means, and the "fourth information storage means" is the "fourth information storage means". It may be composed of a storage means physically different from the storage means including the "1 information storage means" to the "third information storage means".

[1-2-5. Voice / LED control circuit]
Next, the internal configuration of the voice / LED control circuit 2200 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing an internal circuit configuration of the voice / LED control circuit 2200 and a connection relationship between the voice / LED control circuit 2200 and its various peripheral devices and peripheral circuit units. In FIG. 11, for simplification of the description, the illustration of the relay board and the like provided between the voice / LED control circuit 2200 and various peripheral devices and circuit units is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 11, the audio / LED control circuit 2200 includes an LSI (Large-Scale Integration) interface 2210, a memory interface 2220, a digital audio interface 2230, a peripheral interface 2240, a command register 2250, and a sound lamp. It includes a control module 2260, a main generator 2270, and a multi-effector 2280. The connection relationship of each part in the voice / LED control circuit 2200 is as follows.

Within the audio / LED control circuit 2200, the sound lamp control module 2260 is connected to a memory interface 2220, a peripheral interface 2240, a command register 2250, a main generator 2270 and a multi-effector 2280. Further, the command register 2250 is connected to the LSI interface 2210 in addition to the sound lamp control module 2260. In addition to the sound lamp control module 2260, the main generator 2270 is connected to the memory interface 2220 and the multi-effect unit 2280. Further, the multi-effector 2280 is connected to the memory interface 2220 and the digital audio interface 2230 in addition to the sound lamp control module 2260 and the main generator 2270.

Next, the configuration of each part in the voice / LED control circuit 2200 will be described.

The LSI interface 2210 is an interface circuit used when input / output of control signals (for example, sound request, LED request, etc.) is performed between the host control circuit 2100 and the command register 2250. That is, the command register 2250 is connected to the host control circuit 2100 via the LSI interface 2210.

The memory interface 2220 is an interface circuit used when input / output operations such as voice data are performed between the sub-main ROM 2050 and each of the sound lamp control module 2260, the main generator 2270, and the multi-effector 2280.

The digital audio interface 2230 is an interface circuit used when an audio signal or the like is output from the multi-effect unit 2280 to the speaker 24. Further, the digital audio interface 2230 outputs an audio input signal to the multi-effect unit 2280.

The peripheral interface 2240 is an interface circuit used when input / output of a lamp signal or the like (LED data or the like described later) is performed between the lamp group 25 and the sound lamp control module 2260. Further, the peripheral interface 2240 is provided with three physical systems as physical systems (SPI channels) for outputting data to the LED driver included in the lamp group 25. In this embodiment, as described later, two physical systems (physical system 0 (SPI channel 0) and physical system 1 (SPI channel 1)) are used.

The command register 2250 is composed of a large number of registers (for example, a large number of voice control registers) accessed from the host control circuit 2100. The command register 2250 sets the function control of the sound lamp control module 2260, the main generator 2270, and the multi-effect unit 2280. The command register 2250 also sets the operating conditions of each interface (LSI interface 2210, memory interface 2220, digital audio interface 2230, peripheral interface 2240).

An IC (Integrated Circuit) is mounted on each register constituting the command register 2250, and each register is configured by a memory chip whose operation is stabilized by memory access control. When registers having such a configuration are used, the load on the signal bus to which each register is connected is reduced. Therefore, by increasing the number of memory chips (registers), the capacity per memory module (register) can be easily increased. The capacity of the command register 2250) can be increased.

The sound lamp control module 2260 comprehensively controls the sound reproduction operation and the like, and controls the operation of each component (each block) in the sound / LED control circuit 2200 according to the setting contents of the command register 2250. .. As shown in FIG. 11, the sound lamp control module 2260 includes a simple access controller 2260a, a sequencer 2260b, a lamp control unit 2260c, and a peripheral control unit 2260d.

The simple access controller 2260a is a circuit unit that collectively processes commands. The sequencer 2260b has various sequencers (automatic reproduction function units) for controlling automatic reproduction operations such as lamp lighting and voice. Then, each sequencer controls various operations according to a timer and step conditions (for example, conditions set for each step process during sequence reproduction such as LED animation and voice described later).

The lamp control unit 2260c calculates the set luminance value in all channels (8 channels) in which the LED data described later can be set, and transmits the calculation result to the outside (LED driver). Further, the peripheral control unit 2260d performs physical transmission control when transmitting the calculation result data output from the lamp control unit 2260c to the LED driver.

The main generator 2270 is a circuit unit that generates an audio signal. Specifically, the main generator 2270 acquires predetermined audio data stored in the CGROM 2060 based on the control signal input from the sound lamp control module 2260, and uses the acquired audio data as a predetermined audio signal. Convert to. The main generator 2270 is a channel mix unit 2270c that mixes a decoder 2270a that is divided into playback channels CH1 to CH32 to reproduce compressed data, a channel volume 2270b (V1 to V4) that adjusts the volume, and a playback sound of the decoder 2270a. And a remix unit 2270d that executes the final mixing operation.

The multi-effect unit 2280 includes a mixer that synthesizes an audio signal input from the main generator 2270 and an audio input signal input from the digital audio interface 2230, and various effectors for giving various sound effects to the audio. Then, the multi-effector 2280 outputs the audio signal synthesized by the mixer, the output signal from the effector, and the like to the speaker 24 via the digital audio interface 2230.

FIG. 12 is a drawing for explaining the output signal of the voice / LED control circuit. The CGROM 2060 stores a maximum of 8192 types of sequence code groups and a maximum of 8192 types of SAC data groups. Sequence code and SAC data, respectively, have been identified in the 13 bit long sequence code number or SAC number, a relationship of 8192 ^{= 2 13.}

In the case of this embodiment, the sequencer 2260b is provided with 16 series (SQ0 to SQ15) operating in parallel, and the simple accelerator controller 2260a is provided with 4 series (SAC0 to SAC3) operating in parallel. There is. Corresponding to this configuration, the command register 2250 is provided with a voice control register RGj2 for controlling sequencers (SQ0 to SQ15) and a voice control register RGj1 for controlling SAC (SAC0 to SAC3).

Then, when the host control circuit 2100 configured by the CPU processor writes the SAC number and its attached information to the predetermined voice control register RGj1 for SAC control based on the transmission operation of the voice command, the corresponding simple The access controller 2260a starts to function, and the simple access controller 2260a writes a group of setting data specified by the SAC number to a group of voice control registers instructed by the SAC data. In the present embodiment, the complicated setting operation can be completed by transmitting one SAC number and its attached information.

On the other hand, the host control circuit 2100 configured by the CPU processor transmits the sequence code number and its attached information to the predetermined voice control register RGj2 for controlling the sequencer 2260b (SQ0 to SQ7) based on the transmission operation of the voice command. Upon writing, the corresponding sequencer SQi starts functioning and writes a group of setting data specified by the sequence code to a group of voice control registers instructed by the sequence code.

Here, in the predetermined voice control register RGj2 for controlling the sequencers (SQ0 to SQ7), a plurality of (up to 8) sequence code numbers and loop information for the production of each sequence code number are stored in the predetermined voice control register RGj2 for any sequencer SQi. Can be entered. Therefore, for example, when n + 1 sequence code numbers (X0, X1, ..., Xn) are specified for the sequencer SQi, the sequence code number X0 setting operation → the sequence code number X1 setting operation. → ... The setting operation of the sequence code number Xn is executed in order, and the sound effect corresponding to the setting operation is executed.

Further, since loop information such as the number of repetitions can be specified for each sequence code number, the sound effect specified by the sequence code number is repeated a predetermined number of times and then specified by the next sequence code number. Can be migrated.

As described above, the data to be set in the sequencer SQi is diverse, and it is necessary to appropriately set these sequence code numbers and accompanying data in the voice control register RGj2 for sequencer control. Therefore, in this embodiment, the entire sequence code number and accompanying data are divided in 1-byte units, and the divided 1-byte data and the register address of the sequencer control register RGj2 in which the 1-byte data should be set are divided. A group of SAC data as a set is secured in CGROM2060 (hereinafter, this is referred to as SAC data for starting a sequencer).

Then, the host control circuit 2100 activates the simple access controller 2260a by designating a predetermined SAC number in the voice control register RGj1 for SAC control. Here, of course, the SAC number specifies the SAC data for starting the sequencer. Then, based on the operation of the SAC (Simple Access Controller), necessary data is expanded in the sequencer control register RGj2. Therefore, it is easy to set the activation data of the sequencers SQ0 to SQ15.

By the way, as described above with respect to FIG. 12, a plurality of operation units (sequence steps) separated by a step end code (FFFEH) are described in a group of sequence codes specified by one sequence code number. After all, after executing all the plurality of sequence steps specified by one sequence code number, the plurality of sequence steps specified by the next sequence code number are executed.

Since a standby time can be set for each sequencer, the first sequence step (writing operation of a group of setting data) is started after the standby time indicated by the host control circuit 2100 configured by the CPU processor. , When the step end code (FFFEH) is executed, the next group of setting data is written to the group of voice control registers after the waiting time. As the waiting time, a single time information can be set for each sequencer (SQ0 to SQ7). For example, in the preceding sequence step, the waiting time applied to the subsequent sequence steps following the sequence step is set. By doing so, the waiting time for each sequence step can be set arbitrarily.

Further, to continue the explanation of the internal configuration of the audio / LED control circuit 2200, as shown in FIG. 11, the output signals of the 6 channels of the channel mix unit 2270c (mixed L0, mixed R0, mixed L1, mixed R1, mixed SUB0, The mixed SUB1) is supplied to the total volume 2290 (TV0 to TV3) after being digitally filtered based on the operation parameters specified in the predetermined voice control register of the command register 2250 in the multi-effector 2280, and the total volume value. Amplified based on TV.

The total volume value TV is defined by an operation parameter written in the corresponding voice control register, and as described above, this operation parameter is, in principle, a setting switch (hardware) operated by a staff member in this embodiment. It is specified based on the wear switch). However, if the player operates the volume switch (screen operation) during the game operation (however, while waiting for the sound effect), the total volume TV is defined (changed) based on the set value. When the player operates the volume switch, the channel volume 2270b (V1 to V4) is defined (changed) instead of or in addition to the total volume TV being defined based on the set value. You can do it.

[1-2-5-1. Speaker volume control]
Next, the volume control of each speaker 24 executed by the host control circuit 2100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a control block diagram for explaining an example of volume control by the host control circuit.

Sounds such as game sounds output from each speaker 24 (L0 / R0 / L1 / R1, SUB0, SUB1) are the audio signals of total volume TVs 0 to 3 output to all channels and individual sounds among all channels. By multiplying the audio signal for each playback channel output to the channel, the volume is controlled by the volume transition operation in which the volume value of the audio signal is gradually transitioned.

The "voice signal" has volume information (for example, information such as wattage), and can be simply called "volume". For example, in this specification, "audio signal for each reproduction channel" may be referred to as "volume for each reproduction channel".

The audio signals of the total volume TVs 0 to 3 are output by the total value of the audio signal by the volume control 2810 by the hardware switch and the audio signal output by the user volume control 2820 by the volume setting screen, and the debug volume control 2830 at the time of debugging. It is defined by multiplying the audio signal. The host control circuit 2100 that executes the volume control 2810 by the hardware switch, the user volume control 2820 by the volume setting screen, and the debug volume control 2830 at the time of debugging corresponds to the "first volume control means" of the present invention.

Further, the volume for each playback channel is obtained by multiplying the audio signal of the primary volume and the audio signal of the secondary volume. The audio signal of the primary volume is the audio signal output by the primary control 2840 of the first reproduction channel affected by the volume adjustment and the audio signal output by the primary control 2850 of the second reproduction channel not affected by the volume adjustment. It is defined by the total value. In the first playback channel primary control 2840, control is performed to change the volume of a normal game sound (that is, the audio signal (hereinafter the same)) based on, for example, an operation of changing the volume by a player or the like. It is said. The second playback channel primary control 2850 is a control that outputs a specific game sound (for example, an error sound or an alarm sound at the time of illegal activity) at a constant volume regardless of whether or not an operation for changing the volume is performed. Is done. This constant volume may always be the maximum volume. In this way, the second playback channel primary control 2850, which is not affected by the volume adjustment, is controlled so that a specific game sound is output at a constant volume, so that it can be specified only in a specific playback channel, not the whole. It is possible to execute control to keep the volume of the game sound constant. Further, the audio signal of the secondary volume is a volume incorporated in the audio data specified by the SAC number, and is output by the volume control 2860, 2870, 2880. The host control circuit 2100 that executes the first reproduction channel primary control 2840, the second reproduction channel primary control 2850, and the volume control 2860, 2870, 2880 incorporated in the audio data is the "second volume" of the present invention. Corresponds to "control means".

In this way, the sounds output from each speaker 24 (L0 / R0 / L1 / R1, SUB0, SUB1) are the volume of the total volume TV0 to 3, the volume of the primary volume which is the volume for each playback channel, and the secondary. Since it is defined by multiplying the volume of the volume, it is possible to give diversity to the volume of the game sound. In particular, since the volume of the total volume TVs 0 to 3 is also defined by the volume output by the debug volume control 2830 during debugging, the game sound data used in the game can be used as it is during debugging, and during debugging. It is possible to improve the work efficiency of.

In addition, regarding the volume of normal game sounds, the volume can be changed based on the operation of changing the volume by the player or the like, but specific sounds such as error sounds and alarm sounds at the time of illegal acts are specified. As for the game sound, a constant volume is output by the second reproduction channel primary control 2850 regardless of whether or not the operation for changing the volume is performed. Therefore, it is not possible to hide the occurrence of an error or an illegal act, and it is possible to enhance security.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the volume control 2810 by the hardware switch has, for example, three stages of large, medium, and small. In addition, the user volume control 2820 by the volume setting screen has seven stages, and is set to [small] = [1], [medium] = "4], and [large] = "7] in conjunction with the hardware switch.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, the volume of a specific sound such as an error sound can be maintained only by the control by the second playback channel primary control 2850. It is possible to easily perform volume control such as changing the volume according to the volume adjustment for other normal sounds while maintaining the volume. The processing by the host control circuit 2100 when the volume adjustment is performed will be described later with reference to FIGS. 86 to 90.

[1-2-5-2. Connection configuration between digital audio power amplifier and speakers]
Next, the connection configuration between the digital audio power amplifier 2620 and its peripheral circuits provided in the built-in relay board 2600 and the speaker 24 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a connection configuration diagram between the built-in relay board 2600 and the speaker 24. Note that FIG. 14 shows a state in which the speaker 24 is not connected to the built-in relay board 2600 in order to clarify the configuration of the connection portion.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14, the speaker box 24a provided with the speaker 24 is connected to the built-in relay board 2600 via the harness 3000.

The built-in relay board 2600 includes a digital audio power amplifier 2620, an LC circuit 2630, a connection terminal group 2640 including four connection terminals (first connection terminal to fourth connection terminal), two resistors 2650 and 2660, and a capacitor. It has 2670 and a NOT circuit (logic circuit) 2680.

The digital audio power amplifier 2620 amplifies the input audio signal (audio data), outputs the amplified audio signal to the speaker 24, and drives the speaker 24. The LC circuit 2630 is composed of a resonance circuit including a coil and a capacitor. Further, the NOT circuit 2680 is a logic circuit that inverts the level of the input signal and outputs it.

The clock input terminal (MCK) and data input terminal (SDATA) of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 are connected to the audio / LED control circuit 2200. A clock signal (master clock signal) output from the audio / LED control circuit 2200 is input to the clock input terminal (MCK) of the digital audio power amplifier 2620, and an audio / LED is input to the data input terminal (SDATA). The audio signal (audio data) output from the control circuit 2200 is input.

Further, the first output terminal (OUTM1) and the second output terminal (OUTM2) of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 are the first connection terminal and the first connection terminal in the connection terminal group 2640 of the built-in relay board 2600, respectively, via the LC circuit 2630. It is connected to the second connection terminal. In the present embodiment, an example in which two output terminals of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 are provided is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it may be appropriately changed according to the function and specifications of the speaker 24. Can be done.

Further, the digital audio power amplifier 2620 has a mute terminal (MUTE: audio output control terminal). The digital audio power amplifier 2620 receives audio signals from the first output terminal (OUTM1) and the second output terminal (OUTM2) when the level (amplitude value) of the voltage signal applied to the mute terminal is the LOW level. It has a function of stopping the output or making these output terminals grounded via a high resistance (hereinafter referred to as a mute function). That is, when the level of the voltage signal applied to the mute terminal is the LOW level, the digital audio power amplifier 2620 is the first of the built-in relay board 2600 from the first output terminal (OUTM1) and the second output terminal (OUTM2). It has a function of generating a state in which the output of the audio signal to the connection terminal and the second connection terminal is stopped.

On the other hand, when the level (amplitude value) of the voltage signal applied to the mute terminal (MUTE) is the HIGH level, the digital audio power amplifier 2620 has the first output terminal (OUTM1) and the second output terminal (OUTM2). Outputs an audio signal from.

The third connection terminal in the connection terminal group 2640 of the built-in relay board 2600 is connected to the input terminal of the NOT circuit 2680 via the resistor 2660. Further, the output terminal of the NOT circuit 2680 is connected to the mute terminal (MUTE) of the digital audio power amplifier 2620. The signal wiring between the third connection terminal of the built-in relay board 2600 and the resistor 2660 is connected to the power supply voltage (+ 5V) terminal provided in the built-in relay board 2600 via the resistor 2650. Further, the signal wiring between the input terminal of the NOT circuit 2680 and the resistor 2660 is connected (grounded) to the grounded (GND) terminal provided in the built-in relay board 2600 via the capacitor 2670. Further, the fourth connection terminal of the built-in relay board 2600 is connected to the ground (GND) terminal.

As shown in FIG. 14, the speaker 24 is attached to a speaker box 24a composed of a wooden frame. Further, the speaker box 24a is provided with a connection terminal group 24b including four connection terminals (first connection terminal to fourth connection terminal). Then, the first connection terminal and the second connection terminal of the speaker box 24a are connected to the speaker 24 via signal wiring. Further, the third connection terminal (specific connection terminal) of the speaker box 24a is electrically connected to the fourth connection terminal by the signal wiring W1.

As shown in FIG. 14, the harness 3000 is configured by bundling four signal wirings. Then, one of the four connection terminals (first connection terminal to fourth connection terminal) of the four signal wirings is connected to the first connection terminal to the fourth connection terminal of the built-in relay board 2600, respectively. On the other hand, the other four connection terminals (fifth connection terminal to eighth connection terminal) of the four signal wirings are connected to the first connection terminal to the fourth connection terminal of the speaker box 24a, respectively. That is, the first connection terminal of the built-in relay board 2600 and the first connection terminal of the speaker box 24a are connected by signal wiring between the first connection terminal and the fifth connection terminal in the harness 3000, and the built-in relay board 2600 The second connection terminal of the speaker box 24a is connected to the second connection terminal of the speaker box 24a by a signal wiring between the second connection terminal and the sixth connection terminal in the harness 3000. Further, the third connection terminal of the built-in relay board 2600 and the third connection terminal of the speaker box 24a are connected by signal wiring between the third connection terminal and the seventh connection terminal in the harness 3000, and the built-in relay board 2600 The fourth connection terminal of the speaker box 24a and the fourth connection terminal of the speaker box 24a are connected by signal wiring between the fourth connection terminal and the eighth connection terminal in the harness 3000. As a result, the speaker 24 is connected to the built-in relay board 2600 via the harness 3000.

The number of signal wirings included in the harness 3000 is not limited to four, and is appropriately changed according to, for example, the specifications of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 and the speaker 24, the connection configuration between the two, and the like. The harness 3000 has at least a signal wiring for connecting the output terminal of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 and the speaker 24, and a signal wiring for grounding the mute terminal of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 via the speaker box 24a. Should be included.

When the built-in relay board 2600 and the speaker 24 are connected via the harness 3000 as described above, the first output terminal (OUTM1) and the second output terminal (OUTM2) of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 are connected via the harness 3000. Is connected to the speaker 24. Further, the mute terminal (MUTE) of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 is grounded via the NOT circuit 2680, the harness 3000, and the signal wiring W1 between the third connection terminal and the fourth connection terminal of the speaker box 24a.

As a result, when the speaker 24 is connected to the built-in relay board 2600 (digital audio power amplifier 2620) via the harness 3000, a LOW level voltage signal is input to the NOT circuit 2680, so that the digital audio power amplifier 2620 The level (amplitude value) of the voltage signal input to the mute terminal (MUTE) of is the HIGH level. In this case, an audio signal is output to the speaker 24 from the first output terminal (OUTM1) and the second output terminal (OUTM2) of the digital audio power amplifier 2620.

On the other hand, when the speaker 24 is not connected to the built-in relay board 2600 (digital audio power amplifier 2620), the third connection terminal of the built-in relay board 2600 is opened. In this case, since the power supply voltage (+ 5V) is input to the NOT circuit 2680, the level (amplitude value) of the voltage signal input to the mute terminal (MUTE) of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 becomes the LOW level, and the digital audio power amplifier The above-mentioned mute function of 2620 is activated.

That is, when the speaker 24 is disconnected from the built-in relay board 2600 (digital audio power amplifier 2620), the built-in relay board 2600 is connected from the first output terminal (OUTM1) and the second output terminal (OUTM2) of the digital audio power amplifier 2620. A state is generated in which the output of the audio signal to the first connection terminal and the second connection terminal of the above is stopped. As a result, the occurrence of a resonance phenomenon between the digital audio power amplifier 2620 (output terminal) and the first and second connection terminals of the built-in relay board 2600 is suppressed, and problems such as failure of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 occur. Can be prevented.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the mute function of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 can be operated regardless of the software control by the host control circuit 2100 and the audio / LED control circuit 2200. Therefore, for example, in a situation where the speaker 24 is detached from the built-in relay board 2600, even if it is recognized that the host control circuit 2100 and the audio / LED control circuit 2200 are performing the output stop control of the audio signal, the program In the case where the audio signal is erroneously output due to a bug or the like, or in the pachinko game machine 1 having a structure in which the game board cannot be replaced unless the speaker 24 is removed from the harness 3000, after the replacement of the game board is completed. Even if a situation occurs such as when the door is closed and the audio output is started without connecting the speaker 24 and the harness 3000 by mistake, the mute function of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 described above operates in terms of hardware. In this case, the digital audio power amplifier 2620 can be reliably protected, and the safety of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the third connection terminal of the built-in relay board 2600 is connected to the harness 3000 and the signal wiring W1 between the third connection terminal and the fourth connection terminal of the speaker box 24a. It is connected to a ground (GND) terminal provided in the built-in relay board 2600. In such a configuration, when the signal level of the third connection terminal of the built-in relay board 2600 is LOW, is this factor due to the grounding of the fourth connection terminal of the built-in relay board 2600? Since it can be determined by measuring the signal level of the fourth connection terminal of the built-in relay board 2600, it is possible to more accurately manage the digital output operation from the digital audio power amplifier 2620.

[1-2-6. Display control circuit]
Next, the internal configuration of the display control circuit 2300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration inside the display control circuit 2300 and a connection relationship between the display control circuit 2300 and its various peripheral devices and peripheral circuit units.

As shown in FIG. 15, the display control circuit 2300 includes a memory controller 2310, a command memory 2320, a command parser 2330, a moving image decoder 2340, a still image decoder 2350, an SDRAM controller 2360, a built-in VRAM 2370, and a first unit. It includes a display controller 2380, a second display controller 2390, a 3D (Dimension) geometry engine 2400, and a rendering engine 2410. The connection relationship of each part in the display control circuit 2300 and the connection relationship between the display control circuit 2300 and its various peripheral devices and peripheral circuits are as follows.

In the display control circuit 2300, the memory controller 2310 is connected to the command parser 2330, the moving image decoder 2340, and the still image decoder 2350. In addition to the memory controller 2310, the command parser 2330 is connected to the command memory 2320, the moving image decoder 2340, the still image decoder 2350, and the 3D geometry engine 2400. The moving image decoder 2340 is connected to the SDRAM controller 2360 in addition to the memory controller 2310 and the command parser 2330. The still image decoder 2350 is connected to the built-in VRAM 2370 in addition to the memory controller 2310 and the command parser 2330.

Further, in the display control circuit 2300, the SDRAM controller 2360 is connected to the built-in VRAM 2370, the first display controller 2380, and the second display controller 2390 in addition to the moving image decoder 2340. The built-in VRAM 2370 is connected to the first display controller 2380, the second display controller 2390, and the rendering engine 2410 in addition to the still image decoder 2350 and the SDRAM controller 2360. Further, the 3D geometry engine 2400 is connected to the rendering engine 2410 in addition to the command parser 2330.

The SDRAM 2500 is connected to the memory controller 2310 and the SDRAM controller 2360 in the display control circuit 2300. Further, the CGROM board 2040 is connected to the memory controller 2310 in the display control circuit 2300. Further, the host control circuit 2100 is connected to the memory controller 2310 and the command memory 2320 in the display control circuit 2300. Further, the display device 16 is connected to the first display controller 2380 and the second display controller 2390 in the display control circuit 2300.

Next, the configuration of each part in the display control circuit 2300 will be described.

The memory controller 2310 mainly performs communication control between various external memories (CGROM board 2040 and SDRAM 2500) and the display control circuit 2300. For example, the memory controller 2310 performs processing such as transmission / reception of an address designation signal of an external memory to be controlled, memory readiness, busy management, etc., and data stored at a designated address for various memories (effect data). , Command data, etc.).

The command memory 2320 is a built-in memory for storing a command list. In addition to the command memory 2320, the command list can also be stored in the SDRAM 2500 and the CGROM board 2040 (CGROM2060).

The command parser 2330 acquires a command list from the designated memory (command memory 2320, SDRAM 2500 or CGROM 2060). Specifically, in the present embodiment, the type of memory (command memory 2320, SDRAM 2500 or CGROM 2060) in which the command list is arranged in the system control register (not shown) in the display control circuit 2300 by the host control circuit 2100 and The starting address is set. Then, the command parser 2330 accesses the start address in the memory specified in the system control register (not shown) and acquires the command list.

Further, the command parser 2330 analyzes the acquired command list to generate a specific control code, and outputs the control code to the moving image decoder 2340, the still image decoder 2350, and the 3D geometry engine 2400. In the present embodiment, each image processing module in the display control circuit 2300 operates based on the control code output by the command parser 2330.

The moving image decoder 2340 decodes the moving image compressed data acquired from the CGROM board 2040 or the SDRAM 2500. Then, the moving image decoder 2340 outputs the decoded moving image data to the SDRAM 2500 (external RAM). The moving image data (decoding result) output from the moving image decoder 2340 is stored in the movie buffer provided in the SDRAM 2500.

The still image decoder 2350 decodes the still image compressed data acquired from the CGROM board 2040 or the SDRAM 2500. Then, the still image decoder 2350 outputs the decoded still image data to the built-in VRAM 2370. The still image data (decoding result) output from the still image decoder 2350 is temporarily stored in a sprite buffer described later provided in the built-in VRAM 2370.

The SDRAM controller 2360 is a controller that controls operations such as storage processing of decoded moving image data and still image data in RAM, and image data transfer processing between the built-in VRAM 2370 and the CGROM board 2040 or SDRAM 2500.

The built-in VRAM 2370 operates as a work RAM when executing various processes such as a decoding process and a rendering process in the drawing control process by the display control circuit 2300. Further, in the image data transfer process between the built-in VRAM 2370 and the CGROM board 2040 or the SDRAM 2500, which is performed in each processing process in the drawing control process described later, various image data are temporarily stored in the built-in VRAM 2370.

Each of the first display controller 2380 and the second display controller 2390 acquires a rendering result (drawing result) generated by the rendering engine 2410, and outputs the rendering result to the display device 16. As a result, a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen of the display device 16. When two display controllers are provided as in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, two screens are provided on the display device 16 by one display control circuit 2300 (1 chip) to display each screen. It can be controlled independently.

The 3D geometry engine 2400 converts 3D information into 2D information (projection conversion processing) based on the control code input from the command parser 2330, and affine transformation such as enlargement, reduction, rotation, and movement of figures. (Figure conversion) Performs processing. Then, the 3D geometry engine 2400 outputs the result of the conversion process to the rendering engine 2410.

The rendering engine 2410 refers to a texture source (SDRAM 2500 in this embodiment) in which the stretched still image data and moving image data are stored, and performs rendering (drawing) processing on the image data. Then, the rendering engine 2410 writes the rendering result to the rendering target (in this embodiment, the built-in VRAM2370 or the SDRAM 2500).

The term "rendering" as used herein means editing data decoded according to specified information such as enlargement / reduction and rotation of a moving image (in this embodiment, information output from the 3D geometry engine 2400). It is to be. Further, the "rendering engine" referred to here also includes, for example, a "rasterizer" and a "pixel shader". Therefore, in the rendering engine 2410, similarly to the pixel shader, the ARGB value (A: alpha value indicating transparency (opacity), R: luminance value of red component, G: green component) for image data in pixel units. The calculation process of the luminance value of B: the luminance value of the blue component) is also performed.

[1-2-6-1. Connection configuration between display control circuit and CGROM]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a configuration that can deal with different types of CGROMs (NOR type or NAND type) connected to the display control circuit 2300. Here, a connection configuration between the display control circuit 2300 provided in the sub-board 2020 and its peripheral circuits and the CGROM mounted on the CGROM board will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17.

FIG. 16 is a connection configuration diagram between the sub-board 2020 and the CGROM board 2040a when the CGROM is a NOR-type CGROM 2060a (NOR-type flash memory). Further, FIG. 17 is a connection configuration diagram between the sub-board 2020 and the CGROM board 2040b when the CGROM is a NAND-type CGROM2060b (NAND-type flash memory). Note that FIGS. 16 and 17 show a state in which the CGROM board is detached from the sub-board 2020 in order to clarify the configuration of the connection portion, but in reality, both boards are connected via a board-to-board connector. Be connected.

(1) Configuration of Sub-Board First, the internal configuration of the sub-board 2020 will be described. As is clear from the comparison between FIGS. 16 and 17, the configuration of the sub-board 2020 when the NOR-type CGROM 2060a is mounted on the CGROM board 2040a is the same as that when the NAND-type CGROM 2060b is mounted on the CGROM board 2040b. The same is true.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the sub-board 2020 is provided with a display control circuit 2300, and a bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 and an AND circuit 302 (AND gate) are provided as peripheral circuits thereof. Further, the sub-board 2020 is provided with various signal wirings (buses) and a terminal group 3030 including a plurality of connection terminals directly or indirectly connected to the display control circuit 2300 via various buses.

The bidirectional balanced transceiver 3010 has four input / output terminals (terminals A0 to A3 in FIG. 16) and the other four connected to the four input / output terminals (terminals A0 to A3). It has two input / output terminals (terminals B0 to B3 in FIG. 16). Further, the bidirectional balanced transceiver 3010 has two control terminals (terminals in FIG. 16) for switching and controlling the signal communication direction between the input / output terminals A0 to the input / output terminals A3 and the input / output terminals B0 to the input / output terminals B3. It has OE and terminal DIR).

The bidirectional balanced transceiver 3010 is between the input / output terminals A0 to the input / output terminals A3 and the input / output terminals B0 to the input / output terminals B3 according to the combination of the signal levels of the voltage signals applied to the control terminal OE and the control terminal DIR, respectively. Switch the communication direction of the signal in. As a result, even if the communication direction (communication operation) is inconsistent for some reason, the safety of the communication operation between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM can be ensured. The communication direction switching control operation of the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 will be described in detail later. Further, the bidirectional balanced transceiver 3010 used in the present embodiment can also be used for a system having two power supplies of 3.3V and 5V.

The display control circuit 2300 is provided with four input / output terminals (terminals GMA31 / GRB3 to terminals GMA28 / GRB0 in FIG. 16). The input / output combined terminals GMA31 / GRB3 to the input / output combined terminals GMA28 / GRB0 act as output terminals of the address bus when the CGROM is a NOR type CGROM2060a, and are ready when the CGROM is a NAND type CGROM2060b. / Acts as an input terminal for busy signals. Further, the display control circuit 2300 is provided with 26 output terminals (terminals GMA27 to GMA2 in FIG. 16) that act as output terminals for data related to the address of the data storage area in the CGROM (address designation data, etc.). Be done.

Further, the display control circuit 2300 is provided with two CG memory chip enable output terminals (terminal GCE_0 and terminal GCE_1 in FIG. 16). In the present embodiment, the display control circuit 2300 has two memory spaces corresponding to two CG memory chip enable output terminals (GCE_0, GCE_1: specific output terminals), and each memory space has a memory. Information such as type, bus width, and access timing is set. However, in the present embodiment, the display control circuit 2300 has a configuration that cannot be supported (used) when the ROM in the synchronous mode and the ROM in the asynchronous mode are mixed.

Further, the display control circuit 2300 is provided with a plurality of data bus input terminals for acquiring image data (compressed data of moving images / still images) from the CG ROM via the data bus.

The electrical connection relationship of the above-mentioned components provided on the sub-board 2020 is as follows.

The input / output terminals GMA31 / GRB3 to the input / output terminals GMA28 / GRB0 of the display control circuit 2300 are connected to the input / output terminals B0 to the input / output terminals B3 of the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010, respectively, as shown in FIGS. 16 and 17. Will be done. Then, the input / output terminals A0 to the input / output terminals A3 of the bidirectional balanced transceiver 3010 are connected to the first connection terminal to the fourth connection terminal of the terminal group 3030, respectively. That is, the input / output combined terminals GMA31 / GRB3 to the input / output combined terminals GMA28 / GRB0 of the display control circuit 2300 are connected to the first connection terminal to the fourth connection terminal of the terminal group 3030 via the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010, respectively. To.

Further, the output terminals GMA27 to output terminals GMA2 of the display control circuit 2300 are connected to the ninth connection terminal to the 34th connection terminal of the terminal group 3030, respectively, and the CG memory chip enable output terminal GCE_0 and the CG memory chip enable output terminal GCE_1 are , It is connected to the 35th connection terminal and the 36th connection terminal of the terminal group 3030, respectively. Further, the plurality of data bus input terminals of the display control circuit 2300 are respectively connected to the corresponding connection terminals after the 37th connection terminal of the terminal group 3030.

The control terminal DIR of the bidirectional balanced transceiver 3010 is connected to the fifth connection terminal of the terminal group 3030, and the control terminal OE is connected to the output terminal of the AND circuit 302. One input terminal of the AND circuit 302 is connected to the CG memory chip enable output terminal GCE_1, and the other input terminal of the AND circuit 302 is connected to the CG memory chip enable output terminal GCE_1. Further, the 6th connection terminal and the 7th connection terminal of the terminal group 3030 of the sub-board 2020 are connected to the power supply voltage (+ 3.3V) terminal provided on the sub-board 2020, and the 8th connection terminal is connected to the sub-board 2020. It is connected to the provided ground (GND) terminal.

(2) Configuration of CGROM Substrate (NOR Type) Next, the internal configuration of the CGROM substrate 2040a on which the NOR type CGROM2060a is mounted will be described with reference to FIG.

When the NOR type CGROM2060a is mounted on the CGROM board 2040a, the CGROM board 2040a includes various signal wirings (buses) and a plurality of connection terminals connected to the CGROM2060a via various buses together with the NOR type CGROM2060a. A group 3110 is provided.

The first to fourth connection terminals and the connection terminals after the ninth connection terminal in the terminal group 3110 provided on the CGROM board 2040a are connected to the CGROM 2060a.

In the example shown in FIG. 16, since the CGROM2060a is a NOR type flash memory (random access type flash memory), the first connection terminal to the fourth connection terminal and the ninth connection terminal to the 34th connection terminal in the terminal group 3110 are used. The connection terminal is connected to an input terminal (not shown) of the address bus of the CGROM 2060a. Further, the 35th connection terminal and the 36th connection terminal in the terminal group 3110 are connected to the CG memory chip enable input terminal (not shown) of the CGROM 2060a, and the connection terminals after the 37th connection terminal are displayed by the display control circuit 2300 in the CGROM2060a. It is connected to the data output terminal of the CGROM 2060a used when acquiring image data (compressed data of moving image / still image) from.

Further, the fifth connection terminal (predetermined connection terminal) in the terminal group 3110 provided on the CGROM board 2040a is connected to the eighth connection terminal via the signal wiring W2, and the eighth connection terminal is connected to the CGROM board 2040a. It is connected to the provided ground (GND) terminal. That is, when the CGROM2060a is a NOR type flash memory, the fifth connection terminal is grounded via the signal wiring W2. Further, the sixth connection terminal and the seventh connection terminal in the terminal group 3110 are connected to the power supply voltage (+ 3.3V) terminal provided on the CGROM board 2040a.

The number of connection terminals included in the terminal group 3110 is the same as the number of connection terminals of the terminal group 3030 for connecting the CGROM board provided on the sub-board 2020. Then, when the CGROM board 2040a is connected (mounted) to the sub-board 2020, both boards are connected so that the connection terminals of the CGROM board 2040a are connected to the connection terminals of the sub-board 2020 having the same terminal number. That is, as shown in FIG. 16, the first connection terminal, the second connection terminal, ..., the 37th connection terminal, ... Of the CGROM board 2040a are the first connection terminal, the second connection terminal, ..., The third of the sub-board 2020. It is connected to 37 connection terminals, ...

(3) Configuration of CGROM Substrate (NAND Type) Next, the internal configuration of the CGROM substrate 2040b on which the NAND type CGROM2060b is mounted will be described with reference to FIG. In the configuration of the CGROM substrate 2040b shown in FIG. 17, the same configuration as the CGROM substrate 2040a equipped with the NOR type CGROM 2060a shown in FIG. 16 is shown with the same reference numerals.

When the NAND type CGROM2060b is mounted on the CGROM board 2040b, the CGROM board 2040b is provided with the NAND type CGROM2060b and a transistor circuit 312 as a peripheral circuit thereof. Further, the CGROM board 2040b is provided with various signal wirings (buses) and a terminal group 3110 including a plurality of connection terminals directly or indirectly connected to the CGROM 2060b via various buses.

The first connection terminal to the fourth connection terminal in the terminal group 3110 of the CGROM board 2040b are connected to the drain terminal of the transistor circuit 312. The gate terminal of the transistor circuit 312 is connected to the CGROM 2060b, and the source terminal is connected to the ground (GND) terminal provided on the CGROM board 2040b. That is, the first connection terminal to the fourth connection terminal are connected to the CGROM 2060b via the transistor circuit 312.

In the example shown in FIG. 17, since the CGROM2060b is a NAND type flash memory (sequential access type flash memory), the gate terminal of the transistor circuit 312, that is, the first connection terminal to the fourth connection in the terminal group 3110. The terminal is connected to a ready / busy output terminal (not shown) provided on the CGROM 2060b.

Further, the fifth connection terminal (predetermined connection terminal) in the terminal group 3110 of the CGROM board 2040b is connected to the sixth connection terminal and the seventh connection terminal via the signal wiring W3, and the sixth connection terminal and the seventh connection are connected. The terminals are connected to power supply voltage (+ 3.3V) terminals provided on the CGROM board 2040b. That is, when the CGROM2060b is a NAND flash memory, the fifth connection terminal is connected to the power supply voltage (+ 3.3V) terminal via the signal wiring W3.

Further, the eighth connection terminal in the terminal group 3110 of the CGROM board 2040b is connected to the ground (GND) terminal provided on the CGROM board 2040b.

Further, the connection terminals after the ninth connection terminal in the terminal group 3110 of the CGROM board 2040b are connected to the CGROM 2060b. At this time, the 9th connection terminal to the 34th connection terminal are connected to an input terminal (not shown) for data relating to the address provided in the CGROM 2060b, and the 35th connection terminal and the 36th connection terminal are CGs provided in the CGROM 2060b. Connected to the memory chip enable input terminal. Further, the connection terminals after the 37th connection terminal are connected to the data output terminal (not shown) of the CGROM2060b used when the display control circuit 2300 acquires image data (compressed data of moving image / still image) from the CGROM2060b. To.

Even when the NAND type CGROM2060b is mounted on the CGROM board 2040b, the number of connection terminals included in the terminal group 3110 of the CGROM board 2040b is the number of the terminal group 3030 for connecting the CGROM board provided on the sub board 2020. It is the same as the number of connection terminals. Then, when the CGROM board 2040b is connected (mounted) to the sub-board 2020, both boards are connected so that the connection terminals of the CGROM board 2040b are connected to the connection terminals of the sub-board 2020 having the same terminal number. That is, as shown in FIG. 17, the first connection terminal, the second connection terminal, ..., the 37th connection terminal, ... Of the CGROM board 2040b are the first connection terminal, the second connection terminal, ..., The third of the sub-board 2020. It is connected to 37 connection terminals, ...

[1-2-6-2. Communication operation between display control circuit and CGROM]
Next, the operation when the display control circuit 2300 acquires the image data (compressed data of the moving image / still image) from the CGROM will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 19. Note that FIG. 18 is a truth table showing the correspondence between the input signal and the output signal in the AND circuit 302 provided on the sub-board 2020, and FIG. 19 is a bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 provided on the sub-board 2020. Is a truth table showing the correspondence between the signal level applied to the control terminal OE and the control terminal DIR and the communication direction.

(1) Operation of AND Circuit and Bidirectional Balance Transceiver As shown in FIG. 18, the AND circuit 302 is bidirectional balanced transceiver 3010 only when a HIGH level signal (voltage signal) is input to both input terminals. A HIGH level signal is output to the control terminal OE of the above, and a LOW level signal is output to the control terminal OE under other input conditions.

As shown in FIG. 19, the bidirectional balanced transceiver 3010 is a bidirectional balanced transceiver when a LOW level signal (voltage signal) is input to the control terminal OE and a LOW level signal is input to the control terminal DIR. The input / output terminals A0 to 3010 of 3010 act as output terminals, and the input / output terminals B0 to input / output terminals B3 act as input terminals. In this case, the communication direction between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM is the direction from the display control circuit 2300 toward the CGROM.

Further, in the bidirectional balanced transceiver 3010, when a LOW level signal is input to the control terminal OE and a HIGH level signal is input to the control terminal DIR, the input / output terminals A0 to input / output of the bidirectional balanced transceiver 3010 are input. The terminal A3 acts as an input terminal, and the input / output terminals B0 to the input / output terminal B3 act as output terminals. In this case, the communication direction between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM is the direction from the CGROM to the display control circuit 2300.

When the combination of the signal level input to the control terminal OE of the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 and the signal level input to the control terminal DIR is a combination other than the above (HIGH to the control terminal OE of the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010). When a level signal is input), the input / output terminals A0 to input / output terminals A3 and the input / output terminals B0 to the input / output terminals B3 of the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 are in the HIGH impedance state (“Z” in FIG. 19). ), That is, the state is equivalent to the open state, and communication is not performed between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM.

(2) Communication operation between the display control circuit and the CGROM (NOR type) Here, first, consider the case where the CGROM board 2040a on which the NOR type CGROM 2060a is mounted is connected (mounted) to the sub board 2020.

In this case, in the present embodiment, since the LOW level signal is output from at least one of the two CG memory chip enable output terminals GCE_0 and GCE_1 of the display control circuit 2300, the control terminal OE of the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 is LOW. The level signal is input. The signal levels of the CG memory chip enable output terminals GCE_0 and GCE_1 are set in the hardware initialization process (see FIG. 63 described later).

In the present embodiment, the amplitude values of the output signals from the CG memory chip enable output terminals GCE_0 and GCE_1 (specific terminals), which are preset by the sub control circuit 200, are different depending on the type of the CGROM, so that the display control circuit The amplitude value of the signal output from the CG memory chip enable output terminals GCE_0 and GCE_1 provided in the 2300 changes according to the type of storage means. However, the mode in which "the amplitude value of the output signal changes according to the type of CGROM" is not limited to this mode. As described in the modified example 7 described later, the display control circuit 2300 detects the type of the connected storage means, and based on the detection result, from the CG memory chip enable output terminals GCE_0 and GCE_1 (specific terminals). The amplitude value of the output signal may be set.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16, the fifth connection terminal of the sub-board 2020 to which the control terminal DIR of the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 is connected is grounded via the fifth connection terminal of the CGROM board 2040a and the signal wiring W2. Therefore, a LOW level signal is input to the control terminal DIR.

Therefore, when the CGROM board 2040a equipped with the NOR type CGROM 2060a is connected to the sub board 2020, the input / output terminals A0 to the input / output terminals A3 of the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 are used as output terminals as shown in FIG. It acts, and the input / output terminals B0 to the input / output terminals B3 act as input terminals. That is, the communication direction between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM 2060a in the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 is the direction from the display control circuit 2300 toward the CGROM 2060a.

In this case, the signal wiring connected via the first connection terminal to the fourth connection terminal of the sub-board 2020 and the first connection terminal to the fourth connection terminal of the CGROM board 2040a can be used as an address bus, and display control can be performed. The circuit 2300 can normally execute the memory addressing operation for the NOR type CGROM2060a. As a result, the display control circuit 2300 can directly specify the address via the address bus and perform the data read operation.

(3) Communication operation between the display control circuit and the CGROM (NAND type) Next, consider the case where the CGROM board 2040b on which the NAND type CGROM 2060b is mounted is connected (mounted) to the sub board 2020.

Also in this case, in this embodiment, since the LOW level signal is output from at least one of the two CG memory chip enable output terminals CGE_0 and CGE_1 of the display control circuit 2300, the control terminal OE of the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 is used. Is input with a LOW level signal. That is, in the present embodiment, a LOW level signal is input to the control terminal OE of the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 regardless of whether the type of CGROM is NOR type or NAND type. Further, as shown in FIG. 17, the fifth connection terminal of the sub-board 2020 to which the control terminal DIR of the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 is connected is a power supply voltage (as shown in FIG. 17) via the fifth connection terminal of the CGROM board 2040b and the signal wiring W3. Since it is connected to the + 3.3V) terminal, a HIGH level signal is input to the control terminal DIR.

Therefore, when the CGROM board 2040b equipped with the NAND type CGROM 2060b is connected to the sub board 2020, the input / output terminals A to the input / output terminals A3 of the bidirectional balanced transceiver 3010 are used as input terminals as shown in FIG. It acts, and the input / output terminals B0 to the input / output terminals B3 act as output terminals. That is, the communication direction between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM 2060b in the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 is the direction from the CGROM 2060b toward the display control circuit 2300.

In this case, the signal wiring connected via the first connection terminal to the fourth connection terminal of the sub-board 2020 and the first connection terminal to the fourth connection terminal of the CGROM board 2040b shall be used as the communication wiring of the ready / busy signal. Can be done. That is, in this case, the transmission process of the ready / busy signal referred to by the display control circuit 2300 when reading data from the NAND type CGROM 2060b by the sequential access method from the CGROM 2060 to the display control circuit 2300 can be executed. As a result, the display control circuit 2300 can normally execute the memory state (ready / busy state) acquisition operation for the NAND type CGROM2060b.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the type of CGROM is changed, the communication operation between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM can be normally executed without changing the configuration of the sub-board 2020. Therefore, in the present embodiment, for example, the optimum CGROM can be selected in consideration of data capacity, communication speed, price, and the like. Further, for example, when manufacturing a new pachinko game machine 1, the sub-board 2020 used in the pachinko game machine manufactured in the past is diverted from the conditions such as data capacity and communication speed, and only the type of CGROM is changed. Even in such a case, it can be easily dealt with. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the CGROM can be selected according to the embodiment, and the expandability of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be ensured.

Further, in the present embodiment, by using the bidirectional balanced transceiver 3010, the first connection terminal to the fourth connection terminal in the terminal group 3030 of the sub-board 2020 and the first connection in the terminal group 3110 of the CGROM board 2040 are used. The terminals to the fourth connection terminal can be used as data input / output terminals. In this case, it is not necessary to separately provide the data input terminal and the output terminal corresponding to the first connection terminal to the fourth connection terminal of the sub board 2020 and the CGROM board 2040, and the space of the sub board 2020 and the CGROM board 2040 is saved. Can be achieved.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the bidirectional balanced transceiver 3010 can switch the "communication mode" between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM according to the type of the CGROM. However, the "communication mode" between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM as used herein means the overall mode of transmitting and receiving various information between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM.

For example, the "communication mode" between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM referred to in the present specification includes data (image data (compressed video / still image)) required for displaying information related to the effect operation on the display device 16. )) Not only the transmission / reception mode between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM, but also the transmission / reception mode and display when communicating the information specifying the address of the data stored in the CGROM between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM. It is meant to include a transmission / reception mode when the control circuit 2300 receives a ready / busy signal from the CGROM. The present invention is not limited to this, and the "communication form" referred to in the present specification may mean only the communication form of the portion where the transmission / reception mode of information changes according to the type of CGROM.

[2. Function flow]
Next, the functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention.

As shown in FIG. 20, the pachinko game is a game in which a game ball is launched by a user's operation, and when the game ball wins various prizes, the payout control process of the game ball is performed. Further, the pachinko game includes a special symbol game using a special symbol and a normal symbol game using a normal symbol.

When it becomes a "big hit" in a special symbol game or when it becomes a "normal hit" in a normal symbol game, the possibility that the game ball wins is relatively increased, and the payout control process of the game ball is performed. It will be easier.

In addition, various prizes include a special symbol start prize, which is one condition for the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game, and one condition for the variable display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol game. A certain ordinary symbol start prize is also included.

The outline of the processing flow of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game will be described below. The special symbol game and the normal symbol game are executed as control processing by the main CPU 101.

(1) When there is a special symbol start prize in the special symbol game, various random values (for example, jackpot determination random value and symbol determination random value) are displayed from various counters (for example, a jackpot judgment counter and a symbol determination counter). ) Is extracted (acquired), and each extracted random value is stored (see the flow of the special symbol start winning process in the special symbol game shown in FIG. 20).

Further, as shown in FIG. 20, in the special symbol control process during the special symbol game, it is first determined whether or not the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied. In this discrimination process, it is referred to whether or not various data such as random numbers are stored by the special symbol start winning, and the variation display of the special symbol is performed on the condition that various data such as random values are stored. It is determined that the condition for starting is satisfied.

Next, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, the jackpot determination random value extracted from the jackpot determination counter is referred to, and the jackpot determination as to whether or not to make a "big hit" is performed. After that, the stop symbol determination process is performed. In this process, the symbol determination random value extracted from the symbol determination counter and the result of the jackpot determination described above are referred to, and a special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined.

Next, the fluctuation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from the fluctuation pattern determination counter, and the random value, the result of the jackpot determination described above, and the special symbol to be stopped and displayed described above are referred to, and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (variable display pattern). ) Is determined.

Next, the effect pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from the effect pattern determination counter, and the random number value, the result of the jackpot determination described above, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed described above, and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol described above are referred to. The effect pattern to be executed is determined according to the variable display of the special symbol.

Next, as a result of the determined jackpot determination, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the effect pattern accompanying the variation display of the special symbol are referred to, and the variation display control process for controlling the variation display of the special symbol is performed. , And the effect control process for performing a predetermined effect is executed.

Then, when the variable display control process and the effect display control process are completed, it is determined whether or not the "big hit" is achieved. In this determination process, if it is determined that the "big hit" has been achieved, the big hit game state control process for performing the big hit game state is executed. In the jackpot game state, the possibility of various winnings described above increases. On the other hand, if it is determined that the "big hit" has not been achieved, the big hit game state control process is not executed.

When it is determined that the "big hit" has not been achieved, or when the big hit game state control process is completed, the game state transition control process for shifting the game state is performed. In this game state transition control process, the game state in the normal state, which is different from the jackpot game state, is managed.

As the normal game state, for example, in the above-mentioned big hit determination, the game state in which the "big hit" is determined with a predetermined probability (hereinafter referred to as "normal game state") and the probability of being determined as the "big hit" are A gaming state that increases from the normal gaming state (hereinafter referred to as "high-probability gaming state") and a gaming state in which a special symbol start winning prize is easily obtained as a result of the normal hit determination described later (hereinafter referred to as "short-time gaming state"). ) And so on. After that, the process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the special symbol is performed again, and then the various processes of the above-mentioned special symbol control process are repeated.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the game ball starts and wins during the variable display of the special symbol, various data (big hit determination random value, symbol determination random value, etc.) are extracted at the time of the start winning. ) Is stored until the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied. In this way, storing various data (for example, a random value for jackpot determination) until the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied is called "holding", and the various data held are called starting storage.

That is, if the game ball wins a start prize during the variable display of the special symbol, the execution of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the start prize is suspended, and the execution of the variable display of the special symbol currently being executed is suspended. The variable display of the special symbols is started in order. In the following, various data on the reserved special symbols will also be referred to as "reserved balls".

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, as will be described later, two types of special symbol start prizes (first start opening prize and second start opening prize) are provided, and a maximum of four for each special symbol start prize. The execution of the variable display of the special symbol can be suspended until. That is, in the present embodiment, the execution of the variable display of the special symbol can be suspended up to a total of eight of the four first special symbols and the four second special symbols.

Although not shown in FIG. 20, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment determines the winning of the holding ball (whether or not the “big hit” is won) based on the above-mentioned information on the holding ball, and further, It has a function of performing a predetermined effect based on a determination result, that is, a look-ahead effect function.

(2) When there is a normal symbol start prize in the normal symbol game, a random number value is extracted from the normal hit judgment counter and the random value value is stored (normal symbol start in the normal symbol game shown in FIG. 20). See the winning process flow).

Further, as shown in FIG. 20, in the normal symbol control process during the normal symbol game, it is first determined whether or not the condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied. In this discrimination process, it is referred to whether or not the random number value is stored by the normal symbol start winning, and one condition is that the random value is stored, and the condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied. Determine.

Next, when the variation display of the normal symbol is started, the random number value extracted from the normal hit determination counter is referred to, and the normal hit determination is performed as to whether or not the normal hit is set. After that, the fluctuation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, the result of the normal hit determination is referred to, and the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is determined.

Next, the determined normal hit determination result and the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol are referred to, and the fluctuation display control process for controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol and the effect control process for performing a predetermined effect are executed. ..

When the variable display control process and the effect display control process are completed, it is determined whether or not the "normal hit" is achieved. In this determination process, if it is determined to be a "normal hit", a normal hit game control process for performing a normal hit game is executed.

In the normal hit game control process, the possibility of various winnings described above, particularly the possibility of winning a special symbol start winning of the game ball in the special symbol game increases. On the other hand, if it is determined that the "normal hit" is not obtained, the normal hit game control process is not executed. After that, the process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the normal symbol is performed again, and then the various processes of the above-mentioned normal symbol control process are repeated.

As described above, in the pachinko game, the game ball is paid out depending on the conditions such as whether or not the special symbol game is a "big hit", the transition status of the game state, and whether or not the normal symbol game is a "normal hit". The ease with which control processing is performed changes.

In this embodiment, as various random number value extraction methods, a soft random number method that generates random number values within a predetermined range (width) by executing a program by the main CPU 101 is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the pachinko game machine includes a random number generator in which random numbers are updated at a predetermined cycle, a random number value is obtained from a counter (so-called ring counter) in the random number generator. The hard random number method for extracting the above-mentioned random number values may be adopted as the above-mentioned extraction method for various random number values.

When the hard random number method is used, it is possible to prevent the same random number value from being extracted in the predetermined cycle by determining the initial value of the random number value at a timing different from the predetermined cycle.

[3. Basic specifications of pachinko machines]
Next, the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 24. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a table showing the probability of a big hit of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and FIG. 22 is a hit type when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit (hereinafter referred to as “main symbol”). FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of the selection rate of the special symbol, and FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of a variation time (variable display time) determination table of a special symbol stored in the main ROM 102. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an example of a decorative symbol determination table stored in the sub-main ROM 2050 of the sub-control circuit 200. In the following description, the terms of the main CPU 101 and the main RAM 103 not shown in FIGS. 21 to 24 are used, but these are shown in FIG.

In explaining the probability of the jackpot shown in FIG. 21, first, the jackpot in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be briefly described.

When the main CPU 101 detects that the game ball has won the first starting port 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5), the main CPU 101 extracts a random number for determining the jackpot of the first special symbol from the jackpot determination counter and stores it in the main RAM 103. 1 With reference to the special symbol jackpot random number determination table (not shown), jackpot determination (hereinafter, referred to as “first special symbol jackpot determination”) is performed on the extracted random numbers for jackpot determination. It should be noted that the extraction of the random number for determining the jackpot of the first special symbol is performed even when the jackpot gaming state is controlled.

Similarly, when the main CPU 101 detects that the game ball has won the second starting port 440 (see, for example, FIG. 5), the main CPU 101 extracts a random number for determining the jackpot of the second special symbol from the jackpot determination counter and stores it in the main RAM 103. With reference to the second special symbol jackpot random number determination table (not shown), the jackpot determination (hereinafter, referred to as “second special symbol jackpot determination”) is performed on the extracted random numbers for jackpot determination. It should be noted that the extraction of the random number for determining the jackpot of the second special symbol is performed even when the jackpot gaming state is controlled.

When the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is performed, it is determined to be either "big hit" or "missing". Further, when the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is performed, it is determined to be either "big hit" or "missing" as in the jackpot determination of the first special symbol. The value of the probability variation flag ("0 (= off)" or "1 (= on)" is set in the jackpot random number determination table of the first special symbol and the jackpot random number determination table of the second special symbol stored in the main RAM 103, respectively. ) Relationship between the range (width) of the random number for jackpot judgment determined as "big hit" or "loss" and the corresponding judgment value data ("big hit judgment value data" and "loss judgment value data"). Is stipulated.

In the present embodiment, the total random number is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the above-mentioned big hit determination random number is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535. This range is set as a fixed value. The jackpot probability is determined by the number of jackpot determination value data for the range of random numbers for jackpot determination. The range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination can be changed as appropriate.

The probability change flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and is a flag for managing whether or not the game state is the "high probability game state". When the gaming state is the "high probability gaming state", the probability variation flag is "1", and when the gaming state is the "low probability gaming state", the probability variation flag is "0".

Further, the time saving flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and is a flag for managing whether or not the gaming state is the "time saving gaming state". When the gaming state is the "time saving game state", the time saving flag is "1", and when the game state is the "non-time saving gaming state", the time saving flag is "0". In the time saving game state, the time saving number of times is also managed by the main CPU 101, and the time saving number of times is subtracted by 1 every time the special symbol changes once.

In the time-saving game state in which the time-saving flag is set to ON, the probability of being determined as a normal hit (normal hit probability) in the normal hit determination is higher than in the non-time-saving game state. Therefore, in the time-saving game state, the frequency of the normal electric accessory 46 changing from the closed state to the open state, that is, the frequency of winning the game ball to the second starting port 440 is increased as compared with the non-time-saving game state. However, in the time-saving game state, instead of increasing the normal hit probability as compared with the non-time-saving game state, for example, by increasing the execution frequency of the normal hit lottery (shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol), the normal electric role The frequency with which the object 46 changes from the closed state to the open state may be increased, or the ordinary electric accessory 46 may be easily won by changing the opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory 46. Further, two or three aspects of the above three aspects may be combined.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a normal game state in which both the probability change flag and the time saving flag are OFF, a probability change time saving game state in which the probability change flag is ON and the time saving flag is ON, and a time saving game in which the probability change flag is OFF and the time saving flag is ON It is configured to be controlled by the main CPU 101 to any of the gaming states.

When the main CPU 101 detects the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5) and extracts the random number for determining the jackpot of the first special symbol, the random number for determining the jackpot of the extracted first special symbol is extracted. The numerical value is held as a start memory until the variable display of the first special symbol is started. Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is performed to determine whether it is a jackpot or a loss.

When the main CPU 101 detects the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 (see, for example, FIG. 5) and extracts the random number for determining the jackpot of the second special symbol, the random number for determining the jackpot of the extracted second special symbol is extracted. The numerical value is held as a start memory until the variable display of the second special symbol is started. Then, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is performed to determine whether the second special symbol is a jackpot or a loss.

[3-1. Jackpot probability]
As shown in FIG. 21, in the jackpot determination of the first special symbol, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value set. When the jackpot probability is relatively low in the low probability gaming state (probability variation flag OFF), the jackpot probability for each set value is about 1/300 for setting 1, about 1/290 for setting 2, and about 1/290 for setting 3. It is 1/280, setting 4 is about 1/270, setting 5 is about 1/260, and setting 6 is about 1/250. Further, when the jackpot probability is relatively high in a high probability gaming state (probability variation flag ON), the jackpot probability for each set value is about 1/30 in setting 1, about 1/29 in setting 2, and setting 3. Is about 1/28, setting 4 is about 1/27, setting 5 is about 1/26, and setting 6 is about 1/25.

That is, as described above, in the present embodiment, the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination is set as a fixed value in the range of 0 to 65535, so that the number of jackpot determination value data of the first special symbol is set as the set value. By changing according to it, the jackpot probability is made different according to the set value. For example, in the low-probability gaming state in the first special symbol, the number of jackpot determination value data is 218 in setting 1 and 226 in setting 2 with respect to the range of random numbers for jackpot determination (0 to 65535) which are fixed values. By setting the number, setting 3, 234, setting 4, 243, setting 5, 252, and setting 6, 262, the jackpot probability varies depending on the set value. In addition, the number of jackpot judgment value data in the high-probability gaming state is 21 for setting 1, 22 for setting 2, 23 for setting 3, 24 for setting 4, 25 for setting 5, and 26 for setting 6. It has become.

Also, in the jackpot determination of the second special symbol, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value set. When the jackpot probability is relatively low in the low probability gaming state (probability variation flag OFF), the jackpot probability for each set value is 1/300 for setting 1, 1/290 for setting 2, and 280 minutes for setting 3. 1. Setting 4 is 1/270, setting 5 is 1/260, and setting 6 is 1/250. Further, when the jackpot probability is relatively high in a high probability gaming state (probability variation flag ON), the jackpot probability for each set value is 1/30 for setting 1, 1/29 for setting 2, and 28 for setting 3. It is 1/27, setting 4 is 1/27, setting 5 is 1/26, and setting 6 is 1/25.

That is, with respect to the jackpot probability of the second special symbol, the jackpot probability is made different according to the set value by changing the number of jackpot determination value data according to the set value. For example, in the low-probability gaming state in the second special symbol, the number of jackpot determination value data is 218 in setting 1 and 226 in setting 2 with respect to the range of random numbers for jackpot determination (0 to 65535) which are fixed values. By setting the number, setting 3, 234, setting 4, 243, setting 5, 252, and setting 6, 262, the jackpot probability varies depending on the set value. Also, regarding the number of jackpot judgment value data in the high-probability gaming state, setting 1 is 21 pieces, setting 2 is 22 pieces, setting 3 is 23 pieces, setting 4 is 24 pieces, setting 5 is 25 pieces, and setting 6 is 26 pieces. It is an individual.

It should be noted that the jackpot determination of the first special symbol and the jackpot determination of the second special symbol have the same jackpot probability determined according to the setting. That is, if the set values are the same, the jackpot probability in the jackpot determination of the first special symbol and the jackpot probability in the jackpot determination of the second special symbol are the same. For example, in the case of setting 3, the jackpot probability in the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is 1/280 in the low probability gaming state (1/28 in the high probability gaming state), and this jackpot probability is the second special symbol. It is the same as the jackpot probability in the jackpot determination (1/280 in the low probability gaming state, 1/28 in the high probability gaming state).

In the present embodiment, the set value has 6 stages of setting 1 to setting 6, but it is not always necessary to be 6 stages, and any plurality of stages can be set arbitrarily.

Further, in the present embodiment, the jackpot probability is configured to be different when the set value is different, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot probability may be common to a plurality of set values. For example, setting 1 and setting 2 have a common jackpot probability (first probability), setting 3 and setting 4 have a common jackpot probability (second probability higher than the first probability), and setting 5 and The jackpot probability common to setting 6 (third probability higher than the second probability) may be set.

Further, in the present embodiment, the range (width) of the big hit determination random number generated by the main CPU 101 is set as a fixed value in the range of 0 to 65535, and the range of the big hit determination random number, which is a fixed value, is set. By changing the number of jackpot judgment value data according to the set value, the jackpot probability is different for each set value, but the method for differentiating the jackpot probability for each set value is not limited to this, and the jackpot judgment value is not limited to this. By making the number of data common to all settings and changing the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination as a total random number according to the set value, the jackpot probability may be made different according to the set value. For example, the number of jackpot judgment value data is 218 common to all settings, and the range (width) of random numbers for jackpot determination is in the range of 0 to 65535 in setting 1 (big hit probability is about 1/300) and in setting 2. The range from 0 to 63219 (big hit probability is 1/290), the range from 0 to 61039 in setting 3 (big hit probability is 1/280), and the range from 0 to 58859 in setting 4 (big hit probability is 1/270). , Setting 5 sets the range from 0 to 56679 (big hit probability is 1/260), setting 6 sets the range from 0 to 54499 (big hit probability is 1/250), and the main CPU 101 determines the big hit in the range according to the set value. By generating a random number, the jackpot probability can be changed according to the set value. Moreover, according to this method, the jackpot probability is changed by changing the denominator (range of random numbers for jackpot judgment), which has more digits than the numerator (number of jackpot judgment value data). Compared with the method of changing the number of jackpot determination value data according to the set value with the range as a fixed value, it is possible to finely set the jackpot probability for each set value.

In the above, the number of big hit judgment value data is common to all settings, and the range (width) of the big hit judgment random number as a total random number is changed according to the set value, but the number of big hit judgment value data is all set. It is not always essential to make them common. For example, in setting 1, the number of jackpot determination value data is 218, the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number is set to the range of 0 to 65535 (the jackpot probability is about 1/300), and in setting 2, the jackpot determination value data is set. The number of jackpots is 219, and the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number is in the range of 0 to 63509 (the jackpot probability is about 1/290). In setting 3, the number of jackpot determination value data is 220, and the jackpot determination random number is The range (width) is set to the range of 0 to 61599 (the jackpot probability is about 1/280), and in setting 4, the number of jackpot judgment value data is 221 and the range (width) of the jackpot judgment random number is the range of 0 to 59669. (The jackpot probability is about 1/270), and in setting 5, the number of jackpot determination value data is 222, and the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number is in the range of 0 to 57719 (the jackpot probability is about 1/260). In setting 6, the number of jackpot determination value data is 223, and the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number is in the range of 0 to 55749 (the jackpot probability is about 1/250). Even if both the range (width) of the jackpot judgment random number is changed according to the set value, the method of changing the number of jackpot judgment value data according to the set value with the range of the jackpot judgment random number as a fixed value. In comparison, the jackpot probability for each set value can be set in detail.

When the range (width) of the big hit determination random number as the total random number is changed according to the set value, the main CPU 101 performs the setting check process (see FIG. 42) in steps S72 and S82, which will be described later. , In addition to or instead of determining whether the set value data is within the range of "0" to "5", for example, the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination as a total random number is set as the set value. It may be checked whether or not it is within the corresponding range, and / and whether or not the number of jackpot determination value data is the number specified in the set value. Then, when it is determined that the check is not normal (for example, the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination as a total random number or / and the number of jackpot determination value data is out of the range according to the set value) (step to be described later). (When it corresponds to NO in S721), the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S722 described later), and it becomes impossible to proceed with the game.

[3-2. Big hit distribution]
Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the jackpot distribution when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, that is, the selection rate of the stop symbol (main symbol) of the special symbol will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 22, the distribution of the main symbol is common to all settings. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 22 are stored in the main ROM 102.

As shown in FIG. 22, when the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 sets the main symbol as the special figure 1-1 (distribution probability) based on the extracted random number for determining the symbol. 25.0%), Special Figure 1-2 (Distribution Probability 25.0%), Special Figure 1-3 (Distribution Probability 25.0%), and Special Figure 1-4 (Distribution Probability 25.0%) ) Is decided. Special figure 1-1 is a big hit with 4 rounds, a probability change flag OFF, and 100 time reductions. In Special Figure 1-2, the number of rounds is 4, the probability variation flag is ON, and the time reduction continues until the next jackpot game state is executed (the time reduction flag is set to OFF when the next jackpot game state is started). It's a big hit. Special Figure 1-3 is a big hit with 10 rounds, a probability change flag OFF, and 100 time reductions. Special figures 1-4 are jackpots in which the number of rounds is 10, the probability change flag is ON, and the time reduction continues until the next jackpot game state is executed. When the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 fluctuates and displays the first special symbol over a fluctuation time determined with reference to FIG. 23, which will be described later, and then the determined main symbol. Executes the control to stop with.

In the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (in the present embodiment, the probability change flag is ON as in the special figures 1-2 and the special figure 1-4). After the jackpot gaming state ends, the high-probability gaming state continues until the next jackpot gaming state is started, so-called "probability variation loop machine". In such a probability variation loop machine, the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the high-probability gaming state is a jackpot, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the jackpot gaming state ends and then the next jackpot gaming state starts again. The high-probability gaming state continues until it is played. Then, if the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the high-probability gaming state is a jackpot and a predetermined condition is not satisfied (in the present embodiment, the probability change flag as in the special figure 1-1 or the special figure 1-3). (If it is a big hit that does not turn ON), after the big hit gaming state ends, it is controlled to a low-probability gaming state without being controlled to a high-probability gaming state.

When the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 sets the main symbol as special figure 2-1 (distribution probability 50.0%) or special figure based on the extracted random number for determining the symbol. Determined to be 2-2 (distribution probability 50.0%). Special figure 2-1 is a big hit with 10 rounds, a probability change flag OFF, and 100 time reductions. Special Figure 2-2 is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is 10, the probability change flag is ON, and the time reduction continues until the next jackpot game state is executed. When the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 fluctuates and displays the second special symbol over a fluctuation time determined with reference to FIG. 23, which will be described later, and then the determined main symbol. Executes the control to stop with.

When the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a loss, the main CPU 101 determines the lost symbol and executes a control to stop the special symbol at the determined lost symbol.

The number of rounds is the number of rounds of the round game executed in the jackpot game state. If the probability change flag is ON, the game state after the jackpot game state ends is controlled to the high probability game state (the game state in which the probability change flag is set to ON), and if the probability change flag is OFF, the jackpot game state. The game state after the end of is controlled to the low probability game state (the game state in which the probability change flag is set to OFF). In the following, a jackpot with 4 rounds, a probability change flag OFF, and 100 time reductions (for example, a jackpot in Special Figure 1-1) is referred to as a "4R normal jackpot", and the number of rounds 4, the probability variation flag ON, and the next jackpot game are A jackpot in which the time reduction continues until it is executed (for example, the jackpot in Special Figure 1-2) is called a "4R probability variation jackpot", and the number of rounds is 10, the probability variation flag is OFF, and the number of time reductions is 100 times (for example, Special Figure 1-). 3. The jackpot in Special Figure 2-1 is called "10R normal jackpot", and the number of rounds is 10, the probability change flag is ON, and the jackpot continues until the next jackpot game is executed (for example, Special Figure 1-4, The jackpot in Special Figure 2-2) is referred to as a "10R probability variation jackpot".

Further, in the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the time saving flag is always set to ON, but the time saving flag is not necessarily limited to this, and the determination is made based on the extracted symbol determination random number. It may be decided whether to set the time saving flag to ON or OFF according to the main symbol to be played.

[3-3. Fluctuation time of special symbol]
Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the flow until the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined will be described. Since the fluctuation time of the special symbol corresponds to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, the main CPU 101 simultaneously determines the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol. Further, the variation pattern of the special symbol also corresponds to the effect content (for example, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol) displayed on the display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 5) by the sub control circuit 200 (host control circuit 2100). The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured so that the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol to be determined (that is, the fluctuation time and the effect content) can be different depending on the set value. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 23 are stored in the main ROM 102. Further, the execution probability of the reach effect may be changed according to the number of reserved special symbols, or the fluctuation time in the normal fluctuation may be shortened as the number of reserved special symbols increases, but these are omitted in FIG. 23. ..

As shown in FIG. 23, the main CPU 101 determines the fluctuation time of the first special symbol based on the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol, and the second special based on the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol. Determine the fluctuation time of the symbol.

As shown in FIG. 23, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined using a common table for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. However, instead of this, the fluctuation time of the special symbol may be determined by using different tables for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, the variation time determination table of the special symbol shows the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol, the game state, the random number range for reach determination, the main symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, and the effect selection. The relationship between the random number range for use, the fluctuation pattern (variable display pattern), the fluctuation pattern specification command, the fluctuation time, and the effect content is defined. However, in determining the variation time of the special symbol, the probabilistic time-saving game state and the time-saving game state are not distinguished. Further, different random number ranges are set according to the set values for the reach determination random number range and the effect selection random number range when determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol.

The reach determination random number range is a random number used to determine whether or not to execute the reach effect for each set value when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is lost. When a game ball wins a prize in the first start port 420 or the second start port 440 (both see, for example, FIG. 5), the main CPU 101 extracts a reach determination random number from the reach determination counter and determines the extracted reach. Random numbers are stored in the main RAM 103. As described above, the main CPU 101 makes a big hit determination using the random number value for big hit determination when starting the variable display of the special symbol, and when the result of this big hit determination is a loss, it is stored in the main RAM 103. It is determined whether or not to execute the reach effect using the reach determination random number. In the present embodiment, the reach determination random number value extracted from the reach determination counter is set in the range of 0 to 249, but this range can be changed as appropriate.

For example, if the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the normal game state (probability change flag OFF and time reduction flag OFF) is lost, the reach determination random number range for determining to execute the reach effect is 0 in settings 1 and 2. It is specified in ~ 25, it is specified in 0 to 26 in settings 3 and 4, and it is specified in 0 to 27 in settings 5 and 6. In addition, if the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the probability variation time saving game state (probability variation flag ON and time reduction flag ON) is lost, the reach determination random number range in which it is determined to execute the reach effect is set to 1. In 2, it is specified as 0 to 10, in settings 3 and 4, it is specified as 0 to 11, and in settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 0 to 12.

As described above, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a loss, the reach effect is more easily executed in the settings 3 and 4 than in the settings 1 and 2, and further, the setting 3 -Settings 5 and 6 are easier to execute than 4. That is, the execution frequency of the reach effect differs depending on the set value, and the higher the set value, the higher the execution frequency of the reach effect.

In the present embodiment, when deciding whether or not to execute the reach effect, the reach determination random number range is common to the setting 1 and the setting 2, is common to the setting 3 and the setting 4, and is set to the setting 5. Although it is common to 6, but not limited to this, it may be different in all settings.

Further, the determination as to whether or not to execute the reach effect described above is an explanation of the case where the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a loss, but when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 Determines to execute the reach effect regardless of the value of the reach determination random number extracted from the reach determination counter.

The effect selection random number range is a random number used to determine the fluctuation time of the special symbol for each set value. When a game ball wins a prize in the first start port 420 or the second start port 440 (both see, for example, FIG. 5), the main CPU 101 extracts a random number for effect selection from the effect selection counter, and selects the extracted effect. Random numbers are stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines the effect selection random number stored in the main RAM 103 according to the game state and the result of determining whether or not to execute the reach effect (only when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a loss). To determine the variation time of the special symbol using. In the present embodiment, the effect selection random value extracted from the effect selection counter is set in the range of 0 to 99, but this range can be changed as appropriate. When the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the main CPU 101 determines the fluctuation time of the special symbol by using the effect selection random number stored in the main RAM 103 according to the game state.

Specifically, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the normal game state (probability change flag OFF and time reduction flag OFF) is lost and it is determined that the reach effect is to be executed, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is It is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 20000 msec (normal medium reach) is defined as 0 to 57 in settings 1 and 2, and 0 to 58 in settings 3 and 4. In settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 0 to 59. In addition, the random number range for effect selection, in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30,000 msec (normally Super Reach A), is defined as 58 to 89 in settings 1 and 2, and 59 to 89 in settings 3 and 4. It is specified, and in settings 5 and 6, it is specified in 60 to 89. Further, the random number range for effect selection, in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 40,000 msec (normally, Super Reach B), is defined as 90 to 99 in common with the settings 1 to 6.

In addition, the fluctuation time of the special symbol when it is determined that the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the normal game state (probability change flag OFF and time reduction flag OFF) is lost and the reach effect is not executed is as follows. Will be decided. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 10000 msec (normal variation A) is defined as 0 to 51 in settings 1 and 2, and 0 to 50 in settings 3 and 4. In settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 0 to 49. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 5000 msec (normal variation B) is defined as 52 to 99 in settings 1 and 2, and 51 to 99 in settings 3 and 4. In settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 50 to 99.

In addition, the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the probabilistic time saving game state (probability change flag ON and time saving flag ON) and the normal time saving game state (probability change flag OFF and time saving flag ON) is lost and the reach effect is executed. The fluctuation time of the special symbol when it is determined is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 25,000 msec (normal reach in a short time) is defined as 0 to 57 in settings 1 and 2, and 0 to 58 in settings 3 and 4. In settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 0 to 59. In addition, the random number range for effect selection, in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 35,000 msec (time saving and medium super reach A), is defined as 58 to 89 in settings 1 and 2, and 59 to 89 in settings 3 and 4. It is specified, and in settings 5 and 6, it is specified in 60 to 89. Further, the random number range for effect selection, in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 45,000 msec (super reach B in a short time), is defined as 90 to 99 in common with the settings 1 to 6.

In addition, the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the probabilistic time-saving game state (probability change flag ON and time-saving flag ON) and the normal time-saving game state (probability change flag OFF and time-saving flag ON) is lost and the reach effect is not executed. The fluctuation time of the special symbol when it is determined is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 4000 msec (shortening variation A) is defined as 0 to 51 in settings 1 and 2, and 0 to 50 in settings 3 and 4. In settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 0 to 49. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 2000 msec (shortening variation B) is defined as 52 to 99 in settings 1 and 2, and 51 to 99 in settings 3 and 4. In settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 50 to 99.

Since the main symbol is determined when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a loss, what is the determination of the fluctuation time of the special symbol? not involved.

The fluctuation time of the special symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the normal game state (probability change flag OFF and time reduction flag OFF) is a jackpot is common to all the main symbols and is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 20000 msec (normal medium reach) is defined as 0 to 1 in settings 1 and 2, and 0 to 2 in settings 3 and 4. In settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 0 to 3. In addition, the random number range for effect selection, in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30,000 msec (normally Super Reach A), is defined as 2 to 49 in settings 1 and 2, and 3 to 49 in settings 3 and 4. It is specified, and in settings 5 and 6, it is specified in 4 to 49. Further, the random number range for effect selection, in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 40,000 msec (normally, Super Reach B), is defined as 90 to 99 in common with the settings 1 to 6.

Further, the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the probabilistic time-shortening gaming state (probability variation flag ON and time-saving flag ON) or the normal time-saving gaming state (probability variation flag OFF and time-saving flag ON) is a jackpot is Common to all main symbols, it is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 25,000 msec (normal reach in a short time) is defined as 0 to 1 in settings 1 and 2, and 0 to 2 in settings 3 and 4. In settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 0 to 3. In addition, the random number range for effect selection, in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 35,000 msec (time saving and medium super reach A), is defined as 2 to 49 in settings 1 and 2, and 3 to 49 in settings 3 and 4. It is specified, and in settings 5 and 6, it is specified in 4 to 49. Further, the random number range for effect selection, in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 45,000 msec (super reach B in a short time), is defined as 50 to 99 in common with the settings 1 to 6.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as long as the gaming state, the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol, and the result of the determination of whether or not to execute the reach effect are the same, the variation of the special symbol The time is more likely to be determined to be a shorter fluctuation time in settings 3 and 4 than in settings 1 and 2, and is more likely to be determined to be a shorter fluctuation time in settings 5 and 6 than in settings 3 and 4. Therefore, the higher the set value, the shorter the average of the fluctuation time of the special symbol, and the larger the number of fluctuations of the special symbol per unit time (that is, the number of lottery). As a result, there is a high expectation that the number of executions of the jackpot game state will increase when viewed in a unit time, and the probability that the jackpot game state will be executed within a unit time will also increase. The higher the set value, the higher the player. It is possible to execute an advantageous game.

In the present embodiment, when determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol, the random number range for effect selection is common to setting 1 and setting 2, is common to setting 3 and setting 4, and is common to setting 5 and setting 6. Although it is common, it is not limited to this, and all the setting values may be different.

In addition, the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot is determined in common for all the main symbols, but it is not limited to this, and the special symbol is determined according to the main symbol. It may be configured so that the fluctuation time of is different.

The fluctuation pattern is data representing the fluctuation time and the content of the effect. For example, the fluctuation pattern “02H” represents a normal medium super reach B with a fluctuation time of 40,000 msec.

The variation pattern designation command is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 as data representing the variation time and the effect content. For example, if the fluctuation pattern determined by the main CPU 101 is "05H", the fluctuation pattern designation command of "83H05H" is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200. At this time, a symbol designation command for specifying the main symbol determined by the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) is also transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

[3-4. Decorative design stop design]
Next, with reference to FIG. 24, an example of a stop symbol of the decorative symbol when the main symbol is determined by the selectivity shown in FIG. 22 when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot will be described. .. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 24 are stored in the sub-main ROM 2050 of the sub-control circuit 200.

When the sub control circuit 200 (host control circuit 2100) receives the symbol designation command transmitted from the main control circuit 100, the sub control circuit 200 stops the decorative symbol based on the main symbol specified by the symbol designation command regardless of the set value. Determine the design. For example, when the main symbol specified by the symbol designation command transmitted from the main control circuit 100 is the special figure 1-2, the host control circuit 2100 has the specific symbol (for example, "7" symbol) in which all the decorative symbols are the same. ), Since the distribution probability is 0%, all the decorative symbols (three decorative symbols in this embodiment) are the same even-numbered symbols (distribution probability 30.0%), or all. It is determined that the decorative symbols of the above are the same odd-numbered symbols (distribution probability 70.0%). In the present embodiment, the specific symbol is set to "7" symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and if it can be recognized as a jackpot with a high degree of profit from the player's point of view, another symbol (for example, "V" symbol) is set as the specific symbol. Is also good.

As described above, the main symbol shown in FIG. 24 is determined when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot. Therefore, the host control circuit 2100 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol with reference to FIG. 24 when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, and when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a loss, A symbol other than the symbol shown in FIG. 24 is determined as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol. The symbols other than the symbols shown in FIG. 24 correspond to, for example, a symbol in which at least one of all the decorative symbols is different from the other decorative symbols.

As described above, according to FIG. 24, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the mode when all the decorative symbols are stopped is the jackpot determination of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Whether or not the game state after the jackpot game state ends is a jackpot controlled to a high probability gaming state, and whether or not the number of rounds of the round game executed in the jackpot game state is 10R. Can vary depending on.

That is, when the main symbol determined with reference to FIG. 22 is special figure 1-1, special figure 1-3, or special figure 2-1 (4R normal jackpot or 10R normal jackpot for which the probability variation flag is not set to ON). Regardless of the set value, all the decorative symbols always stop in the same even-numbered symbol (hereinafter referred to as "first aspect").

Further, when the main symbol is the special diagram 1-2 (4R probability variation jackpot), the first mode or all the decorative symbols are the same odd number symbol (other than the specific symbol "7" symbol) regardless of the set value. (Hereinafter referred to as "second aspect").

Further, when the main symbol is the special diagram 1-4 (10R probability variation jackpot), all the decorative symbols are the same odd-numbered symbol regardless of the set value, or all the decorative symbols are the same specific symbol. (Hereinafter referred to as "specific mode").

Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 2-2 (10R probability variation jackpot), the device stops in a specific mode regardless of the set value. Both Special Figure 1-4 and Special Figure 2-2 are 10R probability variation big hits, but since Special Figure 1-4 is a big hit based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420, it is a big hit in the normal game state. There is a high possibility that he won. Further, since the special figure 2-2 is a big hit based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440, it is highly possible that the big hit was won in the high-probability gaming state or the time-saving gaming state.

In this way, when stopped in a specific mode, the 10R probability variable jackpot with the highest degree of profit for the player is determined, and when stopped in a mode in which all the decorative symbols have the same odd number symbol, the probability variable jackpot (4R probability variable jackpot or 10R) Probability change jackpot) is confirmed. On the other hand, when stopped in the first aspect, it is determined that the 10R probability variation jackpot is not the most profitable for the player, but the possibility of the 4R probability variation jackpot remains.

If the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the player may be notified when all the decorative symbols are stopped, and the jackpot game may be notified as to which jackpot the jackpot is. It may be notified during the execution of the state, or may be notified when the jackpot game state ends. Further, although not adopted in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the high-probability gaming state is the high-probability gaming state even though the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends is a jackpot controlled to the high-probability gaming state. It may be controlled to a so-called "latent probability change state" in which the player is not clearly shown to be controlled by.

[4. Other examples of basic specifications of pachinko machines]

The basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment are as described above, but the specifications are not limited to the above specifications and can be changed as appropriate. An example in which the basic specifications are appropriately changed will be described below. However, it goes without saying that the following explanation is an example and is not limited to this.
[4-1. Deformation example of fluctuation time of special symbol]
Next, with reference to FIG. 25, a modification of the variation time of the special symbol (that is, the variation pattern of the special symbol) will be described. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing another example of the variation time determination table of the special symbol stored in the main ROM 102. As described above, there are cases where the execution probability of the reach effect is changed according to the number of reserved special symbols, and the fluctuation time in the normal fluctuation becomes shorter as the number of reserved special symbols increases. Is omitted.

Further, the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the variation example of the special symbol described with reference to FIG. 25 counts the number of times the special symbol is changed (that is, the number of times the special symbol is drawn). It is equipped with a counting means (not shown). This lottery number counting means is reset at the start of the jackpot gaming state, for example, and starts counting the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the end of the jackpot gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 25, in another example, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the normal game state (probability change flag OFF and time reduction flag OFF) is lost, the determination of whether or not to execute the reach effect is performed. It is performed according to both the number of fluctuations of the special symbol counted from the time when the jackpot game state ends and the set value.

Specifically, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from a specific time point (for example, the time when the jackpot game state ends) is 0 to 1000 times, a random number range for reach determination is determined to execute the reach effect. Is specified to 0 to 25 in settings 1 and 2, 0 to 26 in settings 3 and 4, and 0 to 27 in settings 5 and 6. These are the same as in FIG.

On the other hand, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the end of the jackpot game state becomes 1001 or more, the reach determination random number range for determining that the reach effect is to be executed is 0 to 10 in settings 1 and 2. In settings 3 and 4, it is specified in 0 to 5, and in settings 5 and 6, it is specified in 0 to 1. That is, if the result of the jackpot judgment of the special symbol is lost, the execution probability of the reach effect is twice as high in the settings 1 and 2 as compared with the settings 3 and 4, and in the settings 3 and 4 as compared with the settings 5 and 6. The execution probability of the reach effect is as high as 5 times (in the settings 1 and 2, the execution probability of the reach effect is as high as 10 as compared with the settings 5 and 6).

In this way, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the end of the jackpot game state becomes 1001 or more, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the end of the jackpot game state is 0 to 1000 times. Compared with the above, the execution probability of the reach effect is significantly different depending on the setting.

In addition, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the normal game state (probability change flag OFF and time reduction flag OFF) is lost and it is determined that the reach effect is to be executed, the jackpot game is also performed for the fluctuation time of the special symbol. The setting difference is remarkable between the case where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the time when the state ends is 0 to 1000 times and the case where the number of fluctuations is 1001 times or more.

Specifically, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the time when the jackpot game state ends is 0 to 1000, the random number range for effect selection is determined so that the fluctuation time of the special symbol is 20000 msec (normal medium reach). Is specified to 0 to 57 in settings 1 and 2, 0 to 58 in settings 3 and 4, and 0 to 59 in settings 5 and 6. In addition, the random number range for effect selection, in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30,000 msec (normally Super Reach A), is defined as 58 to 89 in settings 1 and 2, and 59 to 89 in settings 3 and 4. It is specified, and in settings 5 and 6, it is specified in 60 to 89. Further, the random number range for effect selection, in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 40,000 msec (normally, Super Reach B), is defined as 90 to 99 in common with the settings 1 to 6. These are the same as in FIG.

On the other hand, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the end of the jackpot game state becomes 1001 or more, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 20000 msec (normal medium reach) is set to 1. It is not specified in ~ 4, but is specified in 0 to 99 in settings 5 and 6. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30,000 msec (normally Super Reach A) is defined as 0 to 89 in settings 1 to 4, but not in settings 5 and 6. .. Furthermore, the random number range for effect selection, in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 40,000 msec (normally medium super reach B), is specified in 90 to 99 for all settings 1 to 4, and is specified in settings 5 and 6. Absent. Therefore, in a so-called big hit situation where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the end of the big hit game state is 1001 times or more, the set value set is suggested to the player by the reach effect executed. It becomes possible.

In addition, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the normal gaming state (probability change flag OFF and time saving flag OFF) is lost and it is decided to execute the reach effect, the starting point is the time when the jackpot gaming state ends. When the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 1001 or more, the higher the set value, the lower the probability of executing the reach effect. Further, even if the reach effect is executed, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of executing the reach effect with a shorter fluctuation time of the special symbol.

In this way, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the end of the big hit game state becomes 1001 or more, the higher the set value, the shorter the average of the fluctuation time of the special symbol per one time, and the unit The number of changes in the special symbol per hour (that is, the number of lottery) becomes even larger. As a result, the expectation that the number of times the jackpot game will be executed in a unit time will be higher, and the probability that the jackpot game will be executed within the unit time will be even higher.

Further, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the end of the jackpot game state is less than 1000 times, it is extremely difficult to estimate the set value from the execution frequency of the reach effect, but the jackpot game state. When the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the end of is 1001 or more, the execution frequency of the reach effect will be significantly different depending on the set value, so when a so-called big hit, the set set value is estimated. There can be room for it. As a result, when a so-called big hit is made, the set value set for the player is set without giving a direct loss to the hole (for example, without giving a game ball to the player). By giving a guessable opportunity, it is possible to give the player fun. Moreover, the player thinks that it should be a reach effect, but in this embodiment, it is expected that the lower the execution frequency of the reach effect is, the higher the set value will be in the so-called big hit. Since the player can hold the game, it is possible to reduce the decrease in motivation to continue the game even if the reach effect is executed infrequently.

In the present embodiment, the starting point at which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is counted is the time when the jackpot gaming state ends, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a predetermined period elapses, the high-probability gaming state becomes The starting point can be any time point, such as when the high-probability gaming state ends in the so-called ST machine that ends, or when the time-saving gaming state ends.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from a specific time point becomes 1001 or more, the execution probability of the reach effect and the fluctuation time of the special symbol are remarkably different depending on the set value, but not necessarily 1001. It does not have to be more than once. For example, the number of times is not limited to a specific number as long as the player feels that it is addictive.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from a specific time point becomes a predetermined number or more, the execution probability of the reach effect and the fluctuation time of the special symbol differ significantly depending on the set value, but the set value What is significantly different depending on the situation is not necessarily limited to the execution probability of the reach effect and the fluctuation time of the special symbol. For example, the main CPU 101 provides a predetermined waiting time (hereinafter referred to as "opening time") between the time when the result of the big hit lottery of the special symbol is determined to be a big hit and the time when the game is actually controlled to the big hit game state. ing. Further, the main CPU 101 also provides a predetermined waiting time (hereinafter referred to as “ending time”) from the end of the big hit game state to the start of the variable display of the special symbol. The host control circuit 2100 (display control circuit 2300) displays the opening effect on the display device 16 at the opening time, and displays the ending effect on the display device 16 at the ending time. In the opening production, for example, a production showing that the result of the special lottery was a big hit, a production to congratulate the fact that the result of the special lottery was a big hit, and a game method in the big hit game state (for example, right-handed). The production to teach is performed. In the ending production, the production showing the amount of prize balls paid out in the jackpot game state, the production showing the number of times the jackpot game state is continued (the number of consecutive villas), and the game state after the jackpot game state ends are high-probability games. An effect indicating that the state is controlled, an effect of teaching a game method (for example, returning to left-handed) in the game state after the jackpot game state is completed, and an effect of displaying the logo of the manufacturer of the pachinko game machine 1. Etc. are performed.

Specifically, by shortening all or at least one of the opening time, the interval time, and the ending time as the set value increases, the time required for the jackpot gaming state increases as the set value increases. Can be shortened. As a result, it is possible to increase the average number of fluctuations (that is, the number of lottery) of the special symbol per unit time, and the higher the set value, the more advantageous the game can be executed for the player.

Further, for example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the higher the set value is, the higher the expected value of the ball is ejected (for example, the higher the set value is, the higher the jackpot probability is), a large amount of prize balls are paid out in a shorter time than the low set value. In view of the possibility of this, all or at least one of the opening time, the interval time, and the ending time may be configured to be longer as the set value becomes higher. In this case, the higher the set value with which the expected ball output value is higher, the longer all or at least one of the opening time, the interval time, and the ending time is, so that the fun of the game with the high setting value is guaranteed. At the same time, it is possible to suppress the prize balls paid out in a unit time.

Even when the main CPU 101 is controlled to the above-mentioned opening time, ending time, and jackpot game state, the main CPU 101 wins a prize of the game ball to the starting port (first starting port 420, second starting port 440). When it is detected, various random numbers are extracted, and the setting check processing (see FIG. 42) of steps S74 and S82, which will be described later, is executed. Then, when it is determined in this setting check process that the set value data is out of the range of "0" to "5" (NO in step S721 described later), even if it is controlled to the jackpot game state. , The main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S722 described later), and it becomes impossible to proceed with the game.

[4-2. Big hit distribution and stop design of decorative design Modification example]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 26 to 28, the first and second modified examples of the jackpot distribution (selectivity of the main symbol) when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, and these second modified examples. The stop symbol of the decorative symbol at the time of the 1st modification and the 2nd modification will be described. In the first modification and the second modification, the selection rate of the main symbol differs depending on the set value. Note that FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a first modification of the selection rate of the main symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, and FIG. 27 is a diagram when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot. It is a figure which shows the 2nd modification about the selectivity of the main symbol of. Further, FIG. 28 is a modification of the decorative symbol determination table stored in the sub-main ROM 2050 of the sub-control circuit 200, and is commonly used in the first modification and the second modification.

[4-2-1. First modification]
First, the first modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 28. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 26 are stored in the main ROM 102, and the contents of the table shown in FIG. 28 are stored in the sub-main ROM 2050 of the sub-control circuit 200.

As shown in FIG. 26, in the first modification, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 sets the main symbol according to the set value based on the extracted random number for determining the symbol. With probability, special figure 1-1, special figure 1-2, special figure 1-3, special figure 1-4, special figure 1-5, special figure 1-6, special figure 1-7, and special figure 1 Determine one of -8. However, in this first modification, special figure 1-1 and special figure 1-3 are "4R normal big hit", special figure 1-2 and special figure 1-4 are "4R probability variation big hit", special figure 1 -5, special figure 1-7, special figure 2-1 and special figure 2-3 are "10R normal jackpot", special figure 1-6, special figure 1-8, special figure 2-2 and special figure 2- 4 is "10R probability variation jackpot".

Specifically, the main CPU 101 has a common probability in settings 1 to 4, and sets the main symbol as special figure 1-1 (distribution probability 12.5%) and special figure 1-2 (distribution probability 12.5). %), Special Figure 1-3 (Distribution Probability 12.5%), Special Figure 1-4 (Distribution Probability 12.5%), Special Figure 1-5 (Distribution Probability 12.5%), Special Figure 1-4 One of 1-6 (distribution probability 12.5%), special figure 1-7 (distribution probability 12.5%), and special figure 1-8 (distribution probability 12.5%). decide. On the other hand, in setting 5, the main symbols are set to special figure 1-1 (distribution probability 10.0%), special figure 1-2 (distribution probability 10.0%), and special figure 1-3 (distribution probability). Separation probability 15.0%), Special figure 1-4 (Distribution probability 15.0%), Special figure 1-5 (Distribution probability 10.0%), Special figure 1-6 (Distribution probability 10.0) %), Special Figure 1-7 (Distribution Probability 15.0%), and Special Figure 1-8 (Distribution Probability 15.0%). Further, in setting 6, the main symbols are set to the special figure 1-1 (distribution probability 5.0%), the special figure 1-2 (distribution probability 5.0%), and the special figure 1-3 (distribution probability 20). .0%), Special Figure 1-4 (Distribution Probability 20.0%), Special Figure 1-5 (Distribution Probability 5.0%), Special Figure 1-6 (Distribution Probability 5.0%), It is determined to be one of the special figure 1-7 (distribution probability 20.0%) and the special figure 1-8 (distribution probability 20.0%).

That is, in the special figures 1-2 and the special figures 1-4 (both of which are 4R probability variation big hits), which have the same big hit type, the combined probability of both is 25.0% regardless of the setting, but the high setting value (both are high setting values). For example, in settings 5 and 6), the selection rate of special figure 1-4 (15.0 in setting 5) is higher than the selection rate of special figure 1-2 (10.0% in setting 5 and 5.0% in setting 6). %, 20.0% in setting 6) is higher (common in settings 1 to 4).

Similarly, in the special figures 1-6 and 1-8 (both are 10R probability variation big hits), which have the same big hit type, the combined probability of both is 25.0% regardless of the setting, but the high setting value. (For example, in setting 5 and 6), the selection rate of special figure 1-8 (15. in setting 5) is higher than the selection rate of special figure 1-6 (10.0% in setting 5 and 5.0% in setting 6). 0%, 20.0% at setting 6) is higher (common to settings 1 to 4).

Furthermore, for Toku-zu 2-2 and Toku-zu 2-4 (both are 10R probability variation jackpots), which have the same jackpot type, the combined probability of both is 50.0% regardless of the setting, but it is a high setting value. (For example, in setting 5 and 6), the selection rate of special figure 2-4 (30. In setting 5) is higher than the selection rate of special figure 2-2 (20.0% in setting 5 and 10.0% in setting 6). 0%, 40.0% at setting 6) is higher.

By the way, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the host control circuit 2100 has the special figure 1-1, the special figure 1-3, the special figure 1-5, and the special figure 1 as shown in FIG. 28. -7, special figure 2-1 and special figure 2-3 (4R normal jackpot or 10R normal jackpot for which the probability variation flag is not set to ON) are always displayed on the display device 16, for example, regardless of the set value. The symbol is controlled to stop in the first aspect.

On the other hand, in the case of the special figure 1-2 (4R probability variation jackpot), the host control circuit 2100 has the first mode (selectivity 50.0%) or the second mode (selectivity 50.) regardless of the set value. Control to stop at 0%). Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 1-4 (4R probability variation jackpot), the host control circuit 2100 has the first mode (selectivity 25.0%) or the second mode (selection) regardless of the set value. It is controlled to stop at a rate of 75.0%). Here, at a high setting value (for example, setting 5.6), the selection rate of the special figure 1-4 is higher than the selection rate of the special figure 1-2 (10.0% at the setting 5 and 5.0% at the setting 6). (15.0% at setting 5 and 20.0% at setting 6) is higher. Therefore, although the special figure 1-2 and the special figure 1-4 have the same jackpot type (both 4R probability variation jackpot), the high setting value is compared with the low setting value (for example, settings 1 to 4). Therefore, the probability that the decorative symbol stops in the second aspect (the aspect having a higher expectation for the player than the first aspect) increases.

Similarly, in the case of the special figure 1-6 (10R probability variation jackpot), the host control circuit 2100 always controls to stop in the second mode regardless of the set value. Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 1-8 (10R probability variation jackpot), the host control circuit 2100 has a second mode (selectivity 50.0%) or a specific mode (selectivity) regardless of the set value. Control to stop at 50.0%). Here, as described above, at a high setting value (for example, setting 5.6), the selection rate of special figure 1-6 is higher than that of special figure 1-6 (10.0% at setting 5 and 5.0% at setting 6). The selectivity of 8 (15.0% at setting 5 and 20.0% at setting 6) is higher. Therefore, although the special figures 1-6 and the special figures 1-8 have the same jackpot type (both are 10R probability variation jackpots), the high setting value is compared with the low setting value (for example, settings 1 to 4). Therefore, the probability that the decorative symbol stops in a specific mode (a mode having the highest expectation for the player) increases.

Similarly, in the case of the special figure 2-2 (10R probability variation jackpot), the host control circuit 2100 has a second mode (selectivity 50.0%) or a specific mode (selectivity 50.0) regardless of the set value. %) To stop. Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 2-4 (10R probability variation jackpot), the host control circuit 2100 always controls to stop in a specific mode regardless of the set value. Here, as described above, at a high setting value (for example, setting 5.6), the selection rate of the special figure 2-2 (20.0% at the setting 5 and 10.0% at the setting 6) is higher than that of the special figure 2-. The selectivity of 4 (30.0% at setting 5 and 40.0% at setting 6) is higher. Therefore, although the special figure 2-2 and the special figure 2-4 have the same jackpot type (both are 10R probability variation jackpots), the high setting value is compared with the low setting value (for example, settings 1 to 4). Therefore, the probability that the decorative symbol stops in a specific mode increases.

In this way, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, it is feasible to make it possible to make the stop mode of the decorative symbol different depending on the set value even if the jackpot type is the same. Become. Especially when the setting value is high (for example, setting 5 and 6), when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the composite probability determined for a specific jackpot type (for example, 10R probability variation jackpot) is the same. However, it is possible to stop the decorative symbol in a mode (for example, a specific mode) having a relatively high expectation for the player with a higher probability than when the set value is low (for example, settings 1 to 4). Become.

[4-2-2. Second variant]
Next, the second modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 27 are stored in the main ROM 102.

In the first modification, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is set to ON according to the main symbol determined when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot. On the other hand, in the second modification, whether or not the probability variation flag is set to ON is not immediately determined according to the main symbol determined when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot. Absent. More specifically, in the second modification, unlike the first modification, a probability variation attacker (not shown) is provided inside, for example, a large winning opening 540 (see, for example, FIG. 5). Then, for example, when the jackpot game state is controlled and the entry of the game ball into the probability change attacker is detected, the game state after the jackpot game state ends is controlled to the high probability game state, and the probability change attacker is reached. When the jackpot gaming state ends without detecting the entry of the game ball, the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends is controlled to the low-probability gaming state. In this way, the pachinko gaming machine controlled to the high-probability gaming state based on the entry of the gaming ball into the probabilistic attacker is also a so-called “probability-changing loop machine”.

As shown in FIG. 27, in the second modification, the ease of entry of the game ball into the probabilistic attacker differs depending on the main symbol determined when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot. ing. For example, in Special Figure 1-1, the game ball is controlled to the jackpot game state in a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probabilistic attacker, and in Special Figure 1-2, the game ball is controlled in the jackpot game state in a mode in which the game ball can easily enter the probabilistic attacker. Is controlled by. In the present embodiment, the number of time reductions when the big hit is in the "mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probabilistic attacker" is 100 times, and in the "mode in which the game ball can easily enter the probabilistic attacker". When it is a big hit, the time reduction continues until the next big hit game is executed.

In the present embodiment, "a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probability change attacker" is almost equal to the possibility that the game ball enters the probability change attacker while being controlled to the jackpot game state (almost 100%). It is controlled to a low probability gaming state with a probability close to). In addition, the "mode in which the game ball can easily enter the probability change attacker" is in the big hit game state as long as the game ball is launched toward the placement portion of the probability change attacker (for example, the big winning opening 540 (see FIG. 5)). This is a mode in which the game ball almost enters the probabilistic attacker while being controlled (controlled to a high-probability gaming state with a probability of almost 100%). Therefore, in this second modification, the jackpot in the "mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probabilistic attacker" is referred to as the "normal jackpot", and in the "mode in which the game ball can easily enter the probabilistic attacker". The jackpot is called a "probability change jackpot".

However, if it is "a mode in which the game ball can easily enter the probabilistic attacker", it is controlled to a high probability gaming state with a probability close to 100%, and if it is "a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probabilistic attacker". Instead of being controlled to a low-probability gaming state with a probability close to 100%, when the "mode in which the game ball can easily enter the probability-changing attacker" is set, "it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probability-changing attacker". It may be a mode in which the gaming state is controlled with a relatively higher probability than the "mode".

As a method of creating a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probabilistic attacker and a mode in which the game ball is easy to enter, for example, a probabilistic attacker is not provided apart from the large winning opening 540 (see, for example, FIG. It is conceivable to provide another big winning opening (not shown). Then, a mode in which the game ball can easily enter the probabilistic attacker (for example, special figure 1-2, special figure 1-4, special figure 1-6, special figure 1-8, special figure 2-2, special figure 2). In the case of -4), the big hit game state in which the big winning opening 540 is opened is controlled, and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probabilistic attacker (for example, special figure 1-1, special figure 1-3, special figure 1). In the case of -5, special figure 1-7, special figure 2-1 and special figure 2-3), by controlling the big hit game state in which the other big winning openings are opened without opening the special winning opening 540. It is possible to create a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probabilistic attacker and a mode in which it is easy to enter. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above mode as long as it is possible to create a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probabilistic attacker and a mode in which it is easy to enter.

Further, as described above, when a large winning opening 540 having a probabilistic attacker inside and another large winning opening (not shown) not equipped with a probabilistic attacker are provided, a large winning prize is opened in the big hit game state. You may make the mouth have a setting difference. For example, at a low setting value such as setting 1, it is easier to select a jackpot game state in which other big winning openings are opened than at the big winning opening 540, and at a high setting value such as setting 6, it is easier than at other big winning openings. The higher the set value, the easier it is to select the jackpot gaming state in which the jackpot 540 is opened, such as the jackpot gaming state in which the jackpot 540 is opened.

As shown in FIG. 27, in such a second modification, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 sets the main symbol based on the extracted random number for determining the symbol. Special Figure 1-1, Special Figure 1-2, Special Figure 1-3, Special Figure 1-4, Special Figure 1-5, Special Figure 1-6, Special Figure 1-7, and, with a probability according to It is decided to be one of the special figures 1-8. However, in this second modification, the special figure 1-1 and the special figure 1-3 are "4R normal jackpot", the special figure 1-2 and the special figure 1-4 are "4R probability variation big hit", and the special figure 1 -5, special figure 1-7, special figure 2-1 and special figure 2-3 are "10R normal jackpot", special figure 1-6, special figure 1-7, special figure 2-2 and special figure 2- 4 is "10R probability variation jackpot".

Specifically, the main CPU 101 has a common probability in settings 1 to 4, and sets the main symbol as special figure 1-1 (distribution probability 12.5%) and special figure 1-2 (distribution probability 12.5). %), Special Figure 1-3 (Distribution Probability 12.5%), Special Figure 1-4 (Distribution Probability 12.5%), Special Figure 1-5 (Distribution Probability 12.5%), Special Figure 1-4 One of 1-6 (distribution probability 12.5%), special figure 1-7 (distribution probability 12.5%), and special figure 1-8 (distribution probability 12.5%). decide. On the other hand, in setting 5, the main symbols are set to special figure 1-1 (distribution probability 10.0%), special figure 1-2 (distribution probability 10.0%), and special figure 1-3 (distribution probability). Separation probability 15.0%), Special figure 1-4 (Distribution probability 15.0%), Special figure 1-5 (Distribution probability 10.0%), Special figure 1-6 (Distribution probability 10.0) %), Special Figure 1-7 (Distribution Probability 15.0%), and Special Figure 1-8 (Distribution Probability 15.0%). Further, in setting 6, the main symbols are set to the special figure 1-1 (distribution probability 5.0%), the special figure 1-2 (distribution probability 5.0%), and the special figure 1-3 (distribution probability 20). .0%), Special Figure 1-4 (Distribution Probability 20.0%), Special Figure 1-5 (Distribution Probability 5.0%), Special Figure 1-6 (Distribution Probability 5.0%), It is determined to be one of the special figure 1-7 (distribution probability 20.0%) and the special figure 1-8 (distribution probability 20.0%).

That is, in the special figures 1-2 and the special figures 1-4 (both of which are 4R probability variation big hits), which have the same big hit type, the combined probability of both is 25.0% regardless of the setting, but the high setting value (both are high setting values). For example, in settings 5 and 6), the selection rate of special figure 1-4 (15.0 in setting 5) is higher than the selection rate of special figure 1-2 (10.0% in setting 5 and 5.0% in setting 6). %, 20.0% in setting 6) is higher (common in settings 1 to 4).

Similarly, in the special figures 1-6 and 1-8 (both are 10R probability variation big hits), which have the same big hit type, the combined probability of both is 25.0% regardless of the setting, but the high setting value. (For example, in setting 5 and 6), the selection rate of special figure 1-8 (15. in setting 5) is higher than the selection rate of special figure 1-6 (10.0% in setting 5 and 5.0% in setting 6). 0%, 20.0% at setting 6) is higher (common to settings 1 to 4).

Furthermore, for Toku-zu 2-2 and Toku-zu 2-4 (both are 10R probability variation jackpots), which have the same jackpot type, the combined probability of both is 50.0% regardless of the setting, but it is a high setting value. (For example, in setting 5 and 6), the selection rate of special figure 2-4 (30. In setting 5) is higher than the selection rate of special figure 2-2 (20.0% in setting 5 and 10.0% in setting 6). 0%, 40.0% at setting 6) is higher.

By the way, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the host control circuit 2100 has the special figure 1-1, the special figure 1-3, the special figure 1-5, and the special figure 1 as shown in FIG. 28. -7, special figure 2-1 and special figure 2-3 (4R normal jackpot or 10R normal jackpot for which the probability variation flag is not set to ON) are always displayed on the display device 16, for example, regardless of the set value. The symbol is controlled to stop in the first aspect.

On the other hand, in the case of the special figure 1-2 (4R probability variation jackpot), the host control circuit 2100 has the first mode (selectivity 50.0%) or the second mode (selectivity 50.) regardless of the set value. Control to stop at 0%). Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 1-4 (4R probability variation jackpot), the host control circuit 2100 has the first mode (selectivity 25.0%) or the second mode (selection) regardless of the set value. It is controlled to stop at a rate of 75.0%). Here, at a high setting value (for example, setting 5.6), the selection rate of the special figure 1-4 is higher than the selection rate of the special figure 1-2 (10.0% at the setting 5 and 5.0% at the setting 6). (15.0% at setting 5 and 20.0% at setting 6) is higher. Therefore, although the special figure 1-2 and the special figure 1-4 have the same jackpot type (both 4R probability variation jackpot), the high setting value is compared with the low setting value (for example, settings 1 to 4). Therefore, the probability that the decorative symbol stops in the second aspect (the aspect having a higher expectation for the player than the first aspect) increases.

Similarly, in the case of the special figure 1-6 (10R probability variation jackpot), the host control circuit 2100 always controls to stop in the second mode regardless of the set value. Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 1-8 (10R probability variation jackpot), the host control circuit 2100 has a second mode (selectivity 50.0%) or a specific mode (selectivity) regardless of the set value. Control to stop at 50.0%). Here, as described above, at a high setting value (for example, setting 5.6), the selection rate of special figure 1-6 is higher than that of special figure 1-6 (10.0% at setting 5 and 5.0% at setting 6). The selectivity of 8 (15.0% at setting 5 and 20.0% at setting 6) is higher. Therefore, although the special figures 1-6 and the special figures 1-8 have the same jackpot type (both are 10R probability variation jackpots), the high setting value is compared with the low setting value (for example, settings 1 to 4). Therefore, the probability that the decorative symbol stops in a specific mode (a mode having the highest expectation for the player) increases.

Similarly, in the case of the special figure 2-2 (10R probability variation jackpot), the host control circuit 2100 has a second mode (selectivity 50.0%) or a specific mode (selectivity 50.0) regardless of the set value. %) To stop. Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 2-4 (10R probability variation jackpot), the host control circuit 2100 always controls to stop in a specific mode regardless of the set value. Here, as described above, at a high setting value (for example, setting 5.6), the selection rate of the special figure 2-2 (20.0% at the setting 5 and 10.0% at the setting 6) is higher than that of the special figure 2-. The selectivity of 4 (30.0% at setting 5 and 40.0% at setting 6) is higher. Therefore, although the special figure 2-2 and the special figure 2-4 have the same jackpot type (both are 10R probability variation jackpots), the high setting value is compared with the low setting value (for example, settings 1 to 4). Therefore, the probability that the decorative symbol stops in a specific mode increases.

In this way, in the second modification as well, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, even if the jackpot type is the same, the decoration is performed according to the set value. It becomes feasible to make the stopping mode of the symbol different. Especially when the setting value is high (for example, setting 5 and 6), when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the composite probability determined for a specific jackpot type (for example, 10R probability variation jackpot) is the same. However, it is possible to stop the decorative symbol in a mode (for example, a specific mode) having a relatively high expectation for the player with a higher probability than when the set value is low (for example, settings 1 to 4). Become.

In both the first modification and the second modification described above, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be different depending on the set value by making the selection rate of the main symbol different according to the set value. doing. That is, the host control circuit 2100 does not control the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the set value, but controls the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the main symbol, and as a result, according to the set value. The stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be different. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be configured to be different depending on the set value by the control by the host control circuit 2100.

According to the first modification and the second modification described above, it is possible to provide a difference in the selection rate of the special symbol according to the set value, that is, to provide a setting difference in the number of rounds, the probability variation inrush rate, and the time saving inrush rate. It will be possible.

[5. Outline of drawing control method]
Here, an outline of the drawing control process executed by the display control circuit 2300 when the control signal of the drawing request is output from the host control circuit 2100 to the display control circuit 2300 will be described with reference to FIG. 29. Note that FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a flow of image data (moving image data and still image data) during drawing control processing.

In the present embodiment, the data (compressed data) of the image (moving image and / or still image) displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the display device 16 is stored in the CGROM 2060 in the CGROM board 2040. Then, when the control signal of the drawing request is input to the display control circuit 2300, the display control circuit 2300 first reads the image compressed data from the CGROM 2060 and decodes (decompresses) it. At this time, when the moving image compressed data is read, the moving image compressed data is decoded by the moving image decoder 2340 in the display control circuit 2300, and when the still image compressed data is read out, the moving image compressed data is read out in the display control circuit 2300. The still image compressed data is decoded by the still image decoder 2350.

Next, the display control circuit 2300 writes the decoding result (image expansion data) of the image data to a predetermined buffer designated as the texture source. In the present embodiment, as the texture source, a movie buffer and a texture buffer provided in the SDRAM 2500 (external RAM) and a sprite buffer in the built-in VRAM 2370 are specified. For example, when displaying one moving image, the decompressed moving image data (decoding result) is written to the movie buffer in the SDRAM 2500. Further, for example, when displaying one still image, the expanded still image data is written to the sprite buffer in the built-in VRAM2370.

Next, the display control circuit 2300 specifies a rendering target for writing the rendering (drawing) result of the image data. As the rendering target, for example, a frame buffer provided in the SDRAM 2500 (external RAM), a frame buffer provided in the built-in VRAM 2370, or the like can be specified.

Next, the display control circuit 2300 operates the rendering engine 2410 to perform rendering processing on the decoding result of the image data written in the texture source, and writes the rendering result to the rendering target. In this process, the rendering process is performed according to designated information (various information input from the 3D geometry engine 2400) such as enlargement / reduction and rotation of the moving image.

Next, the display control circuit 2300 displays the rendering result (display output data) written to the rendering target on the display screen of the display device 16.

In this embodiment, two frame buffers are prepared as rendering targets. Then, when the rendering engine 2410 writes the rendering result to the frame buffer, the frame buffer in which the rendering result is written is switched for each frame. For example, when the rendering result is written to one frame buffer in a predetermined frame, the rendering result is written to the other frame buffer in the next frame, and the rendering result is written to one frame buffer in the next frame. That is, in the present embodiment, the process of writing the rendering result to one frame buffer and the process of writing the rendering result to the other frame buffer are alternately switched and executed for each frame.

Further, in the flow of the rendering result writing process and the display process described above, the rendering result written in one frame buffer in a predetermined frame is displayed on the display screen of the display device 16 in the next frame (on the other hand). The frame buffer function of is switched from the drawing function to the display function). Further, the rendering result written in the other frame buffer in the next frame is displayed on the display screen of the display device 16 in the next frame (the function of the other frame buffer is switched from the drawing function to the display function). That is, in the present embodiment, the rendering result display processing in one frame buffer and the rendering result display processing in the other frame buffer are alternately switched and executed for each frame.

[6. Overview of audio playback control method]
Next, the outline of the voice reproduction processing executed by the voice / LED control circuit 2200 when a sound request is output from the host control circuit 2100 to the voice / LED control circuit 2200 will be described back to FIG.

In the present embodiment, the audio data output to the speaker 24 is stored in the CGROM 2060. The audio data stored in the CGROM 2060 is phrase compressed data specified by a 13-bit long phrase number NUM (000H to 1FFFH), and is a series of background music songs (BGM) or a set. A maximum of 8192 types (= 213) of production sounds (notice sounds) and the like are stored corresponding to the phrase number NUM. The phrase number NUM is specified by a set value (operating parameter) of a voice command transmitted from the host control circuit 2100 to the command register 2250 of the voice / LED control circuit 2200.

The voice command is used for Individual Write, which transmits a set value of 1 byte length to the voice control register of any one of a large number of voice control registers built in the voice / LED control circuit 2200, or a series of N consecutive voice commands. It is used for Block Write, which transmits N set values in a group to the voice control register group of.

In any case, the voice control register to be accessed is specified by a register address having a length of 1 byte, and the storage capacity of each voice control register is 1 byte. Then, in this embodiment, a large number of voice control registers are secured by dividing into seven register banks. That is, since the register bank is divided into seven, the total number of voice control registers is, in principle, a maximum of 7 × 256.

In this embodiment, in all the register banks, the specific register address is a voice control register for register bank setting. Therefore, in order to specify any one of the 7 × 256 voice control registers, the register bank is written in the voice control register for bank setting by the preceding voice command, and then the voice control belonging to that register bank is performed. The register is specified by the register address having a length of 1 byte.

By the way, in the operation of setting the set value in the voice control register, it is not always necessary to directly specify the register address of the voice control register to be set, and the SAC data (Simple Access Code Data) stored in the CGROM2060 or It is also possible to specify a Sequence Code to complete a series of setting operations for a group of voice control registers. In order to realize such an operation, the voice / LED control circuit 2200 includes four simple access controllers 2260a (simple access controller) and 16 sequencers 2260b (Sequencer) shown in FIG. ..

Explaining from the SAC (Simple Access Code) data for operating the simple access controller 2260a, the SAC data has the register address (1 byte) of the voice control register and the set value (1 byte) in the voice control register. It means a maximum of 512 sets (= 1024 bytes) of data groups associated with each other and is an aggregate terminated by a SAC end code (FFFFH) (see FIG. 12).

In the case of this embodiment, a maximum of 8192 types (= 213) of such SAC data can be provided, and the host control circuit 2100 sets a 13-bit length SAC number to a voice control register for SAC control (see FIG. 12). ), The simple access controller 2260a can be made to function. The simple access controller 2260a that has started the function reads a group of SAC data specified by the SAC number in order from the CGROM 2060, and sets the set value indicated by the SAC data in the voice control register indicated by the SAC data.

Therefore, the host control circuit 2100 only needs to write (register) the SAC number in the voice control register for SAC control, and performs a series of setting operations without individually specifying the register address of the voice control register. Can be instructed. In the voice control register for SAC control, a standby time (standby information as attached data) that defines the start timing of a series of setting operations can be set, and the SAC number to the voice control register for SAC control can be set. It is also possible to delay the setting start timing to the voice control register by the simple access controller 2260a from the writing timing of.

Subsequently, a sequence code for operating the sequencer 2260b will be described. Similar to the SAC data, the sequence code is also a plurality of sets of data in which the register address (1 byte) of the voice control register and the set value (1 byte) of the voice control register are associated with each other (see FIG. 12). However, unlike the SAC data, the sequence code can specify a plurality of operation steps (plurality of sequence steps) that can be intermittently executed after a predetermined waiting time.

Further, in the voice control register for sequencer control, for each sequencer SQ0 to SQ15, the standby time (standby information) that defines the start timing of the set operation, the presence or absence of the repeat operation, and the number of repetitions (loop information) ) Can be included. Therefore, the sequence code identifies a series of audio effects that are executed over a predetermined time.

As shown in FIG. 12, the plurality of operation steps are separated by a step end code (FFFEH), and the end of the plurality of operation steps is terminated by a sequence end code (FFFFH). In the case of this embodiment, a maximum of 8192 types (= 213) of sequence codes can be provided, and the host control circuit 2100 uses a sequencer (Sequencer) to provide a sequence code number having a length of 13 bits and attached data that defines the operation of the sequencer. ) By writing to the voice control register for control, a series of setting operations can be instructed to the sequencer 2260b.

In this embodiment, only the necessary sets of such SAC data and sequence codes are stored in advance in the CGROM 2060, and a group of SAC data and a group of sequence codes are specified by SAC numbers and sequence code numbers. Therefore, in the case of this embodiment, the voice command for Write defines not only the direct setting operation to the voice control register but also the indirect setting operation via the simple access controller 2260a and the sequencer 2260b. It is also included when you do.

In order to realize the above operation, the host control circuit 2100 and the voice / LED control circuit 2200 have a parallel signal line (data bus) capable of transmitting and receiving 1-byte data and a 2-bit length operation management capable of transmitting operation management data. It is connected by a data line (address bus), a 2-bit length control signal line capable of controlling read / write operations, and a chip select signal line for selecting an audio / LED control circuit 2200.

The parallel signal line is realized by the data bus of the host control circuit 2100, and the operation management data line is realized by the address bus of the host control circuit 2100. The voice / LED control circuit 2200 is assigned three port numbers PORT in which the upper 6 bits are common and the lower 2 bits are 00, 01, and 10, and the host control circuit 2100 is assigned to these ports. When the I / OREAD instruction or the I / OWRITE instruction for the number PORT is executed, the circuit is configured so that the chip select signal CS becomes the active level in each case.

Then, the data output to the lower 2 bits A0 to A1 of the address bus when the I / OREAD instruction or the I / OWRITE instruction is executed becomes the operation management data A0 to A1 for the voice / LED control circuit 2200, and the 2 bits A0. Based on ~ A1, it is specified whether the 1-byte data of the data bus at that time is a register address, write data, or read data.

That is, if the address data is [00], the data of the data bus at that timing is evaluated as a register address, while if the address data is [01], the data of the data bus at that timing is write data or read. It becomes data. The read data is when the I / OREAD instruction is executed, and the write data is when the I / OWRITE instruction is executed.

Therefore, the transmission operation of the voice command that writes the predetermined set value to the predetermined voice control register issues the I / OWRITE command while changing the lower 2 bits A0 and A1 of the port number PORT of the voice / LED control circuit 2200. It is realized by executing it continuously. Specifically, the lower 2 bits A0 to A1 of the address data are changed from [00] to [01], while the 1-byte data of the data bus is changed from [register address of voice control register] to [voice control register]. By changing to [Data written to], a predetermined voice command transmission operation is realized.

The write data has a multi-byte length and is controlled, as in the case of transmitting the SAC number (13 bits), the sequence code number (13 bits), and the control data (standby information, loop information, etc.) associated therewith. When the register addresses of the register are continuous, the operation management data A0 to A1 of [01] are repeated in the order of [00] → [01] → [01] → [01], and a plurality of bytes of write data are transmitted. ..

The voice command transmitted in this way is subsequently activated inside the voice / LED control circuit 2200 unless there is a communication abnormality. However, if a communication abnormality is found, such as data with multiple byte lengths not matching each other, the voice command will not be effective. Then, the error flag of the voice control register is set, and this error flag (status information STS) is an I / OREAD instruction that changes the operation management data A0 to A1 of the address bus from [01] to [10]. Can be received by executing.

As described above, in this embodiment, in the final cycle in which the operation management data A0 to A1 are changed in the order of [00] → [01] → ... [01] → [10], error information (abnormality) having a plurality of bit lengths is used. Time can get FFH). Then, by retransmitting the voice command that could not be properly transmitted in parallel, the voice effect can be appropriately advanced. Therefore, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, it is possible to eliminate the unnaturalness in which the sound production is suddenly interrupted.

On the other hand, in the data reading operation by the I / OREAD operation, the I / OWRITE instruction and the I / OREAD instruction are continuously executed while changing the lower 2 bits A0 and A1 of the port number PORT of the voice / LED control circuit 2200. It will be realized by. When the read data has a length of a plurality of bytes, the I / OREAD instructions are continued for the required number of bytes.

Specifically, first, as an I / OWRITE operation, for the port number PORT in which the lower 2 bits A0 to A1 of the address data are [00], [the register address of the voice control register that stores the operation status, etc. ( 1 byte length)] is output. Next, if the I / OREAD instruction is executed for the port number PORT in which the lower 2 bits A0 to A1 of the address data are [01], necessary data such as operation status can be acquired from a predetermined voice control register. Can be done.

The audio reproduced by the audio / LED control circuit 2200 having the above configuration is digital audio in the form of a 5-bit signal (SCLK, LRO, SD0, SD1, SD2) as a digital audio signal of the audio / LED control circuit 2200. It is transmitted to the power amplifier 2620, amplified in class D by the digital audio power amplifier 2620, and supplied to each speaker as an analog audio signal. Specifically, the amplified output (analog audio signal) of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 is supplied to the lower speaker for bass, and the amplified output (analog audio signal) of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 is supplied to the player. Four normal speakers (for example, see FIG. 13 (L0, R0, L1, R1)) and two speakers for deep bass (for vibration) (for example, see FIG. 13 (SUB0, SUB0,)) arranged substantially aligned in the vertical and horizontal positions. It is supplied to SUB1).

[7. Processing by the main control circuit]
Next, various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 51. However, in the following description (explanation of processing in the main CPU 101), the terms power switch 35, setting switch 332, setting key 328, performance display monitor 334, error notification monitor 336, external terminal board 323, and hall computer 700 are used. However, these are shown in FIG.

[7-1. Power-on process]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of power-on processing by the main CPU 101. For example, when a person involved in the hall turns on the power switch 35, the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, as shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 performs a power-on processing (step S10), a setting process related to the set value (step S20), and a game return process (step). S30) and are executed in order. Each of these processes will be described below. Although not shown, the main CPU 101 constantly checks whether the voltage has dropped to a predetermined level, and when a power failure occurs or the voltage drops to a predetermined level due to an OFF operation of the power switch 35 or the like, Performs processing when a power failure occurs, which will be described later.

[7-1-1. Power-on processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the power-on processing. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, as shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 sets an initial value in the stack pointer (step S11).

Next, the main CPU 101 permits access to the RWM (main RAM 103) (step S12), and then performs a sub-control reception reception wait process that waits until the sub-control circuit 200 can receive a signal (step S13). After that, the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing for various devices built in the CPU (step S14).

Next, the main CPU 101 activates the switch related to the set value (step S15). The switch related to the set value is a switch used when performing the setting process in step S20. For example, a setting key 328 for starting / ending the setting process, a setting switch 332 for changing the setting value, and the like are used. Equivalent to. Then, the main CPU 101 activates the switches involved in the setting (step S15), then performs a read process (step S16) for each switch, and then performs a game permission process (step S17).

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the game permission process. In the game permission process of step S17 (see FIG. 31), the game permission flag for permitting the execution of the game is managed. The game permission flag is a flag indicating whether or not to permit the execution of the game, and is set to OFF when the game cannot be executed, for example, when the work area of the RWM (main RAM 103) is not normal. .. The game permission process (step S17) will be described below.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power failure status identification flag is ON (step S1710). The power failure status identification flag is a flag that identifies the status at the time of the previous power failure. That is, for example, if a power failure occurs during the setting change process described later, there is a high possibility that the power is cut off before the setting change process is properly completed. Therefore, when the power is turned on, the game is allowed to be executed as it is. Can not do it. Therefore, when the power is turned on, the situation at the time of the previous power failure can be identified. In the present embodiment, for example, when a power failure occurs during a normal game or during a setting confirmation process described later, the power failure situation identification flag is set to ON before the power is cut. On the other hand, when a power failure occurs during the setting change process described later, the power failure status identification flag is set to OFF until the power is cut off. Further, even when a power failure occurs during the abnormal state of steps S722 to S727 described later, the power failure status identification flag is set to OFF. In the initial state where the power has not been turned on yet, or when the data in the main RAM 103 is lost because the power has not been turned on for a long period of time, the power failure status identification flag is OFF. The above-mentioned "during normal game" means during a game in which neither the setting change process nor the setting confirmation process is performed, and does not mean a normal game state in which neither the probability change flag nor the time saving flag is OFF. (same as below).

In step S1710, the main CPU 101 moves to step S1720 when the power failure status identification flag is ON (YES in step S1710), and when the power failure status identification flag is OFF (NO in step S1710), the game permission flag Is turned OFF (step S1750), and then the process proceeds to step S1720.

In step S1720, the main CPU 101 checks the work area of the main RAM 103. The check of this work area also includes a check of whether or not the set value data set is within the specified range (within the range of "0" to "5" in the present embodiment).

The work area of the main RAM 103 is a general work area in which data is cleared when the backup clear process described later is performed, and data is held without being cleared in principle even if the backup clear process described later is performed. It is divided into a specific work area. For example, performance display data, set setting value data, and the like are stored in this specific work area. This is data indicating a set value. In the present embodiment, the set value data of "0" to "5" corresponds to each of the set values "1" to "6" in six stages. That is, for example, if the set value set is "4", the set value data stored in the main RAM 103 is "3".

In step S1730, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the work area of the main RAM 103 is normal, and if it is normal (YES in step S1730), it moves to step S1740, and if it is not normal, that is, abnormal (NO in step S1730). If there is, the game permission flag is turned off (step S1760), and then the process proceeds to step S1740. For example, when the set value data is not within the specified range (within the range of "0" to "5" in this embodiment), the main CPU 101 determines that the work area of the main RAM 103 is not normal.

In step S1740, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON. In step S1740, if a power failure occurs during a normal game or during a setting confirmation process described later (YES in step S1710) and the work area of the main RAM 103 is normal (YES in step S1730), the game permission flag is turned ON. Is determined to be. On the other hand, when a power failure occurs during the setting change process or an abnormal state (NO in step S1710), and when the work area of the main RAM 103 is not normal (NO in step S1730), the game permission flag is OFF. Is determined. Then, when the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S1740), the game permission process is terminated. If the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S1740), the process proceeds to step S1770.

In this specification, the power failure that occurs during the normal game, the power failure that occurs during the setting confirmation process, and the power failure that occurs during the setting change process are regarded as normal power failures, and steps S722 to S727 described later are defined as normal power failures. The power failure that occurs in is regarded as an abnormal power failure.

In step S1770, whether or not the power of the main CPU 101 is turned on (the operation of turning on the power switch 35 is performed) while the setting key 328 is turned on, that is, whether or not the setting key switch signal is ON. When it is determined whether or not the setting key switch signal is ON (YES in step S1770), the process proceeds to step S1780, and when the setting key switch signal is OFF (NO in step S1770), the process proceeds to step S1810.

In step S1780, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the backup clear switch 330 has been pressed, that is, whether or not the backup clear signal is ON, and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S1780). And step S1790, and when the backup clear signal is OFF, the process proceeds to step S1810.

In step S1790, the main CPU 101 sets the game permission flag to ON, and proceeds to step S1800.

In this way, the main CPU 101 turns on the setting key switch signal (NO in step S1740) even if the game permission flag is OFF due to the situation at the time of the previous power failure or the work area of the main RAM 103 is not normal. If YES in step S1770) and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S1780), the game permission flag is set to ON in step S1790. That is, when both the power-on operation and the backup clear switch 330 are pressed while the setting key 328 is turned ON, the game permission flag is turned ON even if the game permission flag is OFF. However, if at least one of the setting key switch signal and the backup clear signal is OFF, the game permission flag is not set from OFF to ON.

In step S1800, the main CPU 101 sets the backup clear flag to ON and ends the game permission process. The backup clear flag is a flag indicating whether or not the backup clear process described later needs to be performed. When the backup clear process needs to be performed, the backup clear flag is set to ON and the backup clear process is performed. The backup clear flag is set to OFF.

In step S1810, the main CPU 101 sets notification so that an error code indicating that execution of the game is not permitted (the game permission flag is OFF) is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. When the main CPU 101 performs the process of step S1810, the game permission process ends. By displaying the error code on the error notification monitor 336 in this way, the hall personnel cannot execute the game by checking the error code displayed on the error notification monitor 336 (the game permission flag is OFF). It is possible to grasp that. In the present embodiment, when the game permission flag is OFF, the game permission flag is set only when both the power-on operation and the backup clear switch 330 are pressed while the setting key 328 is ON. It is possible to set it to ON. That is, when the game permission flag is OFF, the game permission flag is not turned ON unless the power supply is temporarily stopped by performing a power cut operation and the setting change process described later is executed. In the above, the game permission process is terminated when the process of step S1810 is performed. Instead, after the process of step S1810 is performed, the process returns to step S1740 and the game permission flag is turned ON. Is satisfied (in FIG. 32, until YES is determined in step S1780), the processes of steps S1740 to S1810 may be looped.

[7-1-2. Setting process]
FIG. 33 (a) is a flowchart showing an example of the setting process of step S20 (see FIG. 30), and FIG. 33 (b) is a flowchart showing another example of the setting process of step S20. The difference between FIG. 33A and FIG. 33B is that the processing when the game permission flag is determined to be OFF in step S21 (NO in step S21) is different, and other processing (step). The processing of S22 to step S28) is common to both. The setting process will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 33A, the main CPU 101 first determines in step S21 whether or not the game permission flag is ON. When the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S21), the main CPU 101 moves to step S22, and when the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S21), the setting change process (step S24) and the setting confirmation process (step S24). The setting process ends without executing any of steps S26).

When the setting key switch signal is ON (YES in step S22) and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S23), the main CPU 101 performs the setting change process (step S24) and turns on the setting key switch signal (YES in step S22). ) And the backup clear signal is OFF (NO in step S23), the setting confirmation process (step S26) is performed. Therefore, when the power is turned on while the setting key 328 is turned ON, the setting change process (step S24) is executed if the backup clear signal is ON, and the setting confirmation process (step) is executed if the backup clear signal is OFF. S26) is executed.

When the setting key switch signal is OFF (NO in step S22) and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S27), the main CPU 101 sets the backup clear flag to ON (step S28) and changes the setting (step S28). The setting process is terminated without executing either S24) or the setting confirmation process (step S26). If the setting key switch signal is OFF (NO in step S22) and the backup clear signal is OFF (NO in step S27), the main CPU 101 ends the setting process without executing the process of step S28 (setting change). The process (step S24) and the setting confirmation process (step S26) are also not executed).

That is, if the previous power failure is a normal power failure that occurred during the normal game or the setting confirmation process described later, and the work area of the main RAM 103 is normal, YES is determined in step S21. At this time, the main CPU 101 has a setting change process (step S24) and a setting confirmation process (step S26) according to the operation status of the setting key 328 when the power is turned on and the operation status of the operation of pressing the backup clear switch 330. Alternatively, the backup clear flag process (step S28) is executed. If the power is turned on without operating either the setting key 328 or the backup clear switch 330, the setting change process (step S24), the setting confirmation process (step S26), and the backup clear flag process (step S28). The game returns to the game (step S30) without executing any of the above, and after the game return process (step S30) is executed, the game can be executed.

On the other hand, even if the previous power failure is an abnormal power failure or the previous power failure is a normal power failure, if the power failure occurs during the setting change process, it is determined as NO in step S21. .. At this time, the main CPU 101 has a setting change process (step S24) and a setting confirmation process (step S26) regardless of the operation status of the setting key 328 when the power is turned on and the operation status of the operation of pressing the backup clear switch 330. And the backup clear flag ON (step S28) is not executed, and the setting process is terminated. Therefore, if a power failure occurs during the setting change process or the previous power failure is an abnormal power failure, the setting key switch signal is ON (YES in step S1770) and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S1780). (That is, when both the power-on operation and the backup clear switch 330 are pressed while the setting key 328 is turned on and controlled to the setting change state), the set value is confirmed. Only in the case, the setting change process (step S24) is executed to move to the game return process of step S30, and after this game return process (step S30) is executed, the game can be executed. Therefore, when neither the setting key 328 nor the backup clear switch 330 is operated, or even if only one of them is operated, the setting change process (step S24) and the setting confirmation process (step S26) are performed. ) And the backup clear flag process (step S28) are not executed, and the game returns to the game return process (step S30). However, in this game return process (step S30), the abnormal time process (see step S38 of FIG. 37 described later) is executed, the game cannot be executed, and the game is stopped.

As described above, in the example of the setting process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 33 (a), if a power failure occurs during the setting change process or the previous power failure is an abnormal power failure, the power is turned on. Regardless of the operation status of the setting key 328 or the operation status of pressing the backup clear switch 330 at that time, any of the setting change process (step S24), the setting confirmation process (step S26), and the backup clear flag ON (step S28). The setting process is completed without executing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a power failure occurs during the setting change process and / or the previous power failure is abnormal, as in the other example of the setting process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 33 (b). In this case, the main CPU 101 forcibly executes the setting change process (step S24) regardless of the operation status of the setting key 328 when the power is turned on or the operation status of the backup clear switch 330 pressing operation. You may do so. If a power failure occurs during the setting change process or the previous power failure was an abnormal power failure, the operation status of the setting key 328 when the power is turned on or the operation status of the backup clear switch 330 is pressed. By forcibly executing the setting change process (step S24) regardless of this, when the power is turned on without operating the setting key 328 or the backup clear switch 330, the power is turned on again. It is possible to reduce the annoyance that forces a decision.

In the flowchart shown in FIG. 33A, if NO is determined in step S21, the setting process is performed without determining either the operation status of the setting key 328 or the operation status of the backup clear switch 330 pressing operation. It is finished. Similarly, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 33B, if NO is determined in step S21, neither the operation status of the setting key 328 nor the operation status of the press operation of the backup clear switch 330 is determined. The change process (step S24) is being executed. However, instead of these, the operation status of the setting key 328 and / and the operation status of the operation of pressing the backup clear switch 330 are determined, and regardless of the determination result, the setting process is terminated or the setting change process (step S24). May be executed.

[7-1-2-1. Setting change process]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting change process. The setting change process in step S24 (see FIG. 33) is a process for changing the set setting value, but the setting change process can be terminated with the same setting value as the set setting value. .. Further, as described above, when the game permission flag is OFF, the game permission flag is not turned ON unless the power supply is temporarily stopped by performing a power cut operation and then the setting change process is executed.

First, in step S2410, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON. When the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S2410), the main CPU 101 ends the process without executing the setting change process. Even if the game permission flag is OFF when the power is turned on, when the setting key switch signal is ON and the backup clear signal is ON, the game permission flag is set to ON in step S1790 (see FIG. 32). Therefore, the setting change process is executed.

When the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S2410), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S2420 and executes the backup clear process. This backup clearing process will be described later.

After executing the backup clear process in step S2420, the main CPU 101 moves to step S2430, stores the set value data stored in the main RAM 103 in a register, and moves to step S2440. The backup clear process may be executed at any timing from the start to the end of the setting change process.

In step S2440, the main CPU 101 sets the output of the setting change security signal. This setting change security signal is transmitted to the hall computer 700 via the above-mentioned external terminal board 323. The setting change security signal is output for a certain period of time or longer (for example, 50 msec or longer) within the output period of the signal.

In step S2450, the main CPU 101 sets the notification so that the set value information is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. On the performance display monitor 334, the set value data stored in the register is converted into the set value and displayed. For example, when the set value data stored in the register is "3", the performance display monitor 334 displays the set value "4" corresponding to the set value data "3". However, if the set value data stored in the register and the set value set correspond to each other, the number does not necessarily have to be displayed on the performance display monitor. For example, the set value data "0" to "5" are associated with "A" to "F", respectively, and when the set value data stored in the register is, for example, "3", the corresponding "D" is used. May be displayed on the performance display monitor 334. In this step 2450, the set value data stored in the register is converted into the set value and displayed on the performance display monitor 334, but it is determined in advance because the previous data is discarded. The initial value (for example, "1") may be displayed. Further, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on for the first time, the main CPU 101 displays a performance display monitor such as a predetermined initial value (for example, "1") or a value that is not normally displayed (for example, "8"). It may be controlled so as to be displayed at 334. When the main CPU 101 displays a value that is not normally displayed on the performance display monitor 334, the main CPU 101 does not set a valid setting value and turns off the game permission flag unless it is determined in step S2510 that the setting switch 332 has been pressed. It may be.

In step S2460, the main CPU 101 sets the notification so that the setting changing code indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. As a result, the person involved in the hall can grasp that the setting change process is in progress by checking the display of the error notification monitor 336.

In step S2470, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key switch signal is OFF, and if the setting key switch signal is not OFF (NO in step S2470), the process proceeds to step S2510.

In step S2510, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting switch 332 is pressed, and if the setting switch 332 is pressed (YES in step S251), the process proceeds to step S2520 and the set value stored in the register is stored. After updating the data, the process returns to step S2440. On the other hand, if the setting switch 332 is not pressed (NO in step S2510), the process returns to step S2440. That is, in the setting change process, unless it is determined that the setting key switch signal is ON (unless YES in step S2470), steps S2510, step S2520, and steps S2440 to S2470 are looped (step S2510, step S2520, step). The processes of S2440 to S2470 are repeated).

When the setting switch 332 is pressed (determined as YES in step S2510), the main CPU 101 sets the notification so that the updated setting value information is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 in the subsequent step S2450. ..

Further, unless the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key switch signal is OFF (YES in step S2470), each time the setting switch 332 is pressed, the setting value data stored in the register is set to "0" to "5". (If the setting switch 332 is pressed while the set value data is "5", it returns to "0"). As a result, each time the setting switch 332 is pressed, the display on the performance display monitor 334 is also cyclically displayed. However, each time the setting switch 332 is pressed, the set value data stored in the register may be cyclically decreased from "5" to "0", or the circulation may be increased and circulated depending on the pressing mode of the setting switch 332. It may be possible to perform both reduction and reduction.

When the main CPU 101 determines in step S2470 that the setting key switch signal is OFF (YES in step S2470), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S2480. Moving to step S2480, the main CPU 101 ends the loop of step S2510, step S2520, and steps S2440 to S2470.

In step S2480, the main CPU 101 stores the set value data stored in the register in the main RAM 103. When the process of step S2480 is executed, the set value is fixed. That is, in the setting change process, the set value is determined based on the execution of the operation of turning off the setting key switch signal (determined as YES in step S2470), and the setting key switch signal is turned off. If the setting switch 332 is simply pressed without executing (step S2510, step S2520, and steps S2440 to S2470), the setting value data stored in the register is only updated. The set value data stored in the main RAM 103 is not updated.

Even if the setting key switch signal is determined to be OFF (YES in step S2470) in step S2470 and then the setting key 328 is returned again, the operation is not detected (the setting key switch signal is detected as ON). The set value cannot be changed unless the power is turned off (the power switch 35 is turned off). At that time (when the setting key switch signal is determined to be OFF in step S2470 (YES in step S2470) and then the setting key 328 is returned again), the main CPU 101 is set to be stored in the register. The value data may be displayed on the performance display monitor 334 so that the setting can be confirmed (the setting confirmation process is performed). At that time (when the setting confirmation process is performed), the main CPU 101 may turn off the game permission flag until the setting key switch signal is turned off.

By the way, when a power failure occurs during the setting change process or when the previous power failure was an abnormal power failure, and then the power is turned on (when the power is restored), the operation status and backup of the setting key 328. When the setting change process (see FIG. 34) is forcibly executed regardless of the operation status of the press operation of the clear switch 330 (the state of the setting key switch signal and the backup clear signal) (see FIG. 33 (b)). The setting change process is executed even if the setting key 328 is not turned on (the setting key switch signal remains OFF). As described above, when the setting change process (step S24) is executed without turning on the setting key 328, the setting key switch signal may remain OFF, so that the main CPU 101 uses the setting key in step S2470. It is determined that the setting key switch signal is OFF when the setting key 328 is once turned ON and then turned OFF without immediately determining that the switch signal is OFF (YES in step S2470). Move to S2480 (determine the set value). In this case, the main CPU 101 detects that the setting key switch signal is turned on, and further detects that the setting key switch signal is turned off, so that it can be determined as YES in step S2480. Alternatively, even if it is not detected that the setting key switch signal is turned ON, it may be determined as YES in step S2480 by detecting that the setting key switch signal is turned from ON to OFF.

In the above, when a power failure occurs during the setting change process or the previous power failure is an abnormal power failure, it is forcibly forced regardless of the state of the setting key switch signal or backup clear signal when the power failure is restored. It is stated that the setting change process is executed, but it is not limited to this. For example, the main CPU 101 may forcibly change the state to the setting change state regardless of the state of the setting key switch signal or the backup clear signal at the time of recovery from power failure. In addition, regardless of the state of the setting key switch signal or backup clear signal at the time of power failure recovery, the power failure is restored in the setting change state when the power failure occurs (that is, the state is maintained when the power failure occurs, and then the state is maintained. At the time of recovery from power failure, the process of returning to the held state may be executed regardless of the state of the setting key switch signal or backup clear signal at the time of recovery from power failure).

In step S2490, the main CPU 101 sets the notification so that the performance display data is displayed on the performance display monitor 334, and in step S2500, sets the notification so that the initialization code is displayed on the error notification monitor 336, and changes the setting. End the process.

When the setting key switch signal is determined to be OFF (YES in step S2470) in step S2470, the command indicates that the setting key switch signal has been turned OFF, that is, as a command indicating that the setting change process has been completed. The initialization command will be sent to the host control circuit 2100.

When the setting change process of step S24 (see FIG. 33) is completed, the setting process of step S20 (see FIG. 30) is completed, and the game returns to the game return process of step S30 (see FIG. 30).

If the game can be executed through the game return process described later after the setting change process of step S24 (see FIG. 33) is executed, the game can be executed for a certain period of time after the game is started, or the game. Information that suggests that the setting change process may have been executed at a predetermined timing after the start of, information that suggests that the setting change process may have changed to a higher setting value, Information suggesting that the setting value may have been changed to a lower setting value by the setting change process, and the setting value has been changed by two or more steps (for example, setting 6 to setting 4). The information related to the setting change process, such as information suggesting that there is a possibility, may be displayed on, for example, the display device 16. For example, the variation pattern of the effect or decorative pattern performed on the display device 16 or the like can be changed between when the setting change process is executed and when it is not executed, or changed to a higher setting value by the setting change process. It is possible to make a difference between when it is set and when it is changed to a low setting value, and when the setting value is changed by multiple steps or more by the setting change process and when it is not changed by multiple steps or more. Is also good.

Further, the output period of the above-mentioned setting change security signal and the period during which the setting changing code is displayed on the error notification monitor 336 are from the start of the setting change process to the end process of the setting change process. It has become. However, these periods do not have to be exactly the same.

The above setting change process is a process that is executed regardless of whether the game permission flag is ON or OFF internally. Further, a command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 at a predetermined timing, such as when the setting change process in step S24 is started, every time the setting switch is pressed in step S2510, and when the process in step S2480 is executed. As a result, the display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, and the like may notify that the setting is being changed, that the set value has been changed, that the setting change has been completed, and the like.

[7-1-2-1-1. Backup clear processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the backup clear process in step S2420 (see FIG. 34). This backup clear process is a process of clearing the information stored in the work area of the main RAM 103. However, in this backup clear process, as described above, the information stored in the general work area is cleared, but the information stored in the specific work area is not cleared in principle.

First, in step S2421, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the backup clear flag is OFF. When the backup clear flag is OFF (YES in step S2421), the main CPU 101 ends the process without executing the backup clear process, and when the backup clear flag is ON (NO in step S2421), step S2422 Move on to.

In step S2422, the main CPU 101 clears the work area of the RWM (main RAM 103). However, if the previous power failure occurred during the setting change process, there is a possibility that all or part of the backup clear process was executed during the setting change process in which the previous power failure occurred. Therefore, if the previous power failure occurred during the setting change process, the work area of the main RAM 103 should be cleared together with the backup clear process executed during the setting change process in which the previous power failure occurred. In this backup clear process, it may be only partially cleared.

In the process of step S2422, as described above, the performance display data and the set value data stored in the specific work area are not cleared in principle. However, when it is determined that the set value data stored in the RWM (main RAM 103) is abnormal (for example, the set set value data is out of the specified range), the set value data is also cleared. To. Further, when it is determined that the performance display data stored in the RWM (main RAM 103) is abnormal, the performance display data is also cleared. When the set value data is abnormal, the set value data is also cleared, but in that case, the game is permitted unless the game permission flag is turned off and the setting change process (for example, see FIG. 34) is performed. The flag may not be turned on.

In step S2423, the main CPU 101 sets the notification so that the information indicating that the backup clear process has been executed (information indicating that the work area of the main RAM 103 has been cleared) is displayed. After that, in step S2424, the main CPU 101 sets the backup clear flag to OFF and ends the backup clear process. The above notification setting (information indicating that the backup clear process has been executed) is, for example, a command transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, and the display control circuit 2300 (see FIG. 10) indicates that the backup clear process has been executed. The image shown is displayed on, for example, the display device 16.

When the backup clear process is executed along with the setting change process (for example, see FIG. 34), in step S2450 of the setting change process, the main CPU 101 causes the setting value information to be displayed on the performance display monitor 334. Set notification. Similarly, even when the backup clear process is executed without the setting change process, it is preferable to set the notification so that the set value information is displayed on the performance display monitor 334.

[7-1-2-2. Setting confirmation process]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting confirmation process. The setting confirmation process in step S26 (see FIG. 33) is a process for confirming the set setting value. The set value is stored in the main RAM 103.

First, in step S2610, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON. When the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S2610), the main CPU 101 ends the process without executing the setting confirmation process.

When the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S2610), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S2620 and sets the output of the setting confirmation security signal. This setting confirmation security signal is transmitted to the hall computer 700 via the above-mentioned external terminal board 323. The setting confirmation security signal is output for a certain period of time or longer (for example, 50 msec or longer) within the output period of the signal.

In step S2630, the main CPU 101 sets the notification so that the set value information is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. The set value information displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is information indicating the set set value data. For example, when the set value data stored in the main RAM 103 is "3", the performance display monitor 334 displays "4" corresponding to the set value data "3" as information indicating the set value.

In step S2640, the main CPU 101 sets the notification so that the setting confirmation code indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. As a result, the person involved in the hall can grasp that the setting confirmation process is in progress by confirming the display of the error notification monitor 336.

In step S2650, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key switch signal is OFF, and if the setting key switch signal is not OFF (NO in step S2650), the process returns to step S2620. That is, in the setting confirmation process, unless it is determined that the setting key switch signal is ON (unless YES in step S2650), the processes of steps S2620 to S2650 are looped (the processes of steps S2620 to S2650 are repeated). It will be.

When the main CPU 101 determines in step S2650 that the setting key switch signal is OFF (YES in step S2650), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S2660. When moving to step S2660, the main CPU 101 ends each process of steps S2620 to S2650.

When the setting key switch signal is determined to be OFF (YES in step S2650) in step S2650, a power failure recovery command is issued to the host control circuit 2100 as a command indicating that the setting confirmation process is completed in step S37 described later. Will be sent to.

In step S2660, the main CPU 101 sets notification so that the performance display data is displayed on the performance display monitor 334, and in step S2670, sets non-notification so that no information is displayed on the error notification monitor 336, and sets confirmation processing. To finish.

When the setting confirmation process in step S26 (see FIG. 33) is completed, the setting process in step S20 (see FIG. 30) is completed, and the game returns to the game return process in step S30 (see FIG. 30).

[7-1-3. Game return processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the game return process. In the setting process of step S30 (see FIG. 30), a process of returning to a state in which the game can be executed is performed on the premise that the game permission flag is ON. The game return process will be described below.

First, in step S31, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON. When the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S31), the main CPU 101 executes the abnormality processing in step S38. This abnormal processing will be described later.

When the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S31), the main CPU 101 moves to step S32 and performs a process of activating all the switches.

In step S33, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the backup clear signal is OFF. When the backup clear signal is OFF (YES in step S33), the main CPU 101 moves to step S34.

In step S34, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power failure status identification flag is ON. If the power failure status identification flag is ON (YES in step S34), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S35. As described above, the power failure status identification flag is set to ON when a power failure occurs during a normal game (during a game in which neither setting change processing nor setting confirmation processing is performed) or during setting confirmation processing. If a power failure occurs during the change process, it is set to OFF. Therefore, when the previous power failure occurs during the normal game or the setting confirmation process, the process of step S35 is performed.

In step S35, the main CPU 101 performs initial setting of a work area that requires an initial value at the time of power failure recovery.

Next, in step S36, when the gaming state at the time of restoration of the power failure is a high-probability gaming state, the main CPU 101 makes a notification setting indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state.

Next, in step S37, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting a command at the time of power failure recovery (power failure recovery command) to the sub control circuit 200. This command also includes setting value information about the set value. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the game return process in step S30 (see FIG. 30), and a series of power-on processes are completed. As a result, the game can be executed. The above-mentioned power failure recovery command functions as a command indicating that the power failure recovery has occurred or a command indicating that the setting confirmation process has been completed.

When the main CPU 101 determines in step S33 that the backup clear signal is ON (NO in step S33), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the backup clear process in step S39. Since this backup clear process is the same as the backup clear process (backup clear process shown in FIG. 35) in step S2420 shown in FIG. 34, the description thereof will be omitted.

When the backup clear process in step S39 is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to step S40 and performs initial setting of a work area that requires an initial value when initializing the RWM (main RAM 103).

Next, in step S41, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting a command (initialization command) at the time of RWM initialization to the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the game return process in step S30 (see FIG. 30), and a series of power-on processes are completed. As a result, the game can be executed. The above initialization command is a command indicating that the setting change process has been completed (the backup clear process has also been executed), or a command indicating that the backup clear process has been executed without the setting change process. Function.

Further, the output period of the above-mentioned setting confirmation security signal and the period during which the setting confirmation code is displayed on the error notification monitor 336 are from the start of the setting confirmation process to the end process of the setting confirmation process. It has become. However, these periods do not have to be exactly the same.

[7-1-3-1. Processing when abnormal]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of processing at the time of abnormality. As described above, the abnormal processing in step S38 (see FIG. 37) is executed when it is determined in the processing in step S31 (see FIG. 37) that the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S31). It is a process.

First, in step S381, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting an abnormal command indicating that the game permission flag is OFF, that is, the game cannot be executed, to the sub control circuit 200. When the host control circuit 2100 receives an abnormal command, it determines that the backup is defective, and can display information indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not normal on the display device 16 under the control of the host control circuit 2100 (display control circuit 2300). It becomes.

The main CPU 101 does not necessarily have to transmit an abnormal command. For example, the host control circuit 2100 has a backup failure when a normal command from the main CPU 101 cannot be received for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the power supply to the sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 9) is started. You may decide that.

In step S382, the main CPU 101 sets the output of the abnormal security signal. This abnormal security signal is transmitted to the hall computer 700 via the external terminal plate 323 described above.

In step S383, the main CPU 101 sets the notification so that the error code indicating that the game execution is not permitted (the game permission flag is OFF) is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. As a result, the person concerned in the hall can grasp that the game cannot be executed (the game permission flag is OFF) by checking the display of the error notification monitor 336.

In step S384, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power failure detection signal is ON. The power failure detection signal is a signal that turns ON when the voltage drops to a predetermined level. Then, when the main CPU 101 determines that the power failure detection signal is ON (YES in step S384), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S385 and executes the power failure occurrence processing. On the other hand, when the power failure detection signal is OFF (NO in step S384), the main CPU 101 loops in steps S382 to S384 (the processing of steps S382 to S384 is repeated).

[7-1-3-1-1. Processing when power failure occurs]
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when a power failure occurs. As described above, the main CPU 101 constantly checks whether or not the voltage has dropped to a predetermined level, and when the voltage drops to a predetermined level, the process when a power failure occurs is performed.

First, the main CPU 101 sets the interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (step S3851). Then, the checksum in the work area of the main RAM 103 is calculated, and the calculation result and various game data are stored (saved) in the backup area of the main RAM 103 (step S3852). This checksum is used to check whether or not the contents of the main RAM 103 before the power failure are properly held at the time of power recovery. In this way, it is possible to retain various game data stored in the main RAM 103 even if the power supply is stopped.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the power failure status identification flag in the backup flag provided in the predetermined area of the main RAM 103 (step S3853). That is, as described above, if the power failure occurs during the normal game (during a game in which neither the setting change process nor the setting confirmation process is performed) or during the setting confirmation process, the main CPU 101 identifies the situation at the time of the power failure. Set the flag to ON and set it to OFF if it occurs during the setting change process.

When the main CPU 101 finishes the processes of steps S3851 to S3853, the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S3854, prohibits access to the RWM (main RAM 103), enters an infinite loop, and prepares for stopping the power supply.

When the game permission flag is OFF in this way, as described above, the game permission flag is not turned ON unless the power supply is temporarily stopped by performing a power cut operation and the setting change process described later is executed. It has become.

By the way, in this process, if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to a very short power failure or the like (hereinafter referred to as "instantaneous power failure") and the process when a power failure occurs is started, the process can recover from the infinite loop. It may disappear. In order to avoid such an adverse effect, the main CPU 101 of this embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer (not shown), and is configured to be reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is updated periodically while the processing is normally performed, but when the processing when a power failure occurs is entered, the update is not performed. As a result, the process when the power is cut off occurs due to the momentary power failure, and even if the infinite loop shown in FIG. 39 is entered, the reset is performed after the elapse of a predetermined period, and the main CPU 101 is started in the same process as when the power is turned on.

In addition, instead of the backup area of the RWM (main RAM 103), a rewritable non-volatile memory (EEPROM or the like) may be provided. In this case, there is an advantage that a constant power supply is not required to back up the data.

Alternatively, the entire area of the RWM (main RAM 103) may be used as a backup area in which data is backed up by the constant supply of electric power. In this case, it is not necessary to save the data stored in the main RAM 103 to another area when the power is cut off. Further, even when the power is restored, it is not necessary to read the saved data to the processing area, so that the load required for these processes can be reduced.

[7-1-4. Flow of power-on process as seen from the operator side]
The above is the control flow of the power-on process by the main CPU 101, but the flow of the power-on process as seen from the operator (for example, a person involved in the hall) will be briefly described.

[7-1-4-1. Flow of setting change process]
First, the setting change process, that is, the flow for changing the set setting value will be described. In order to change the set value, it is first necessary to perform a power off operation (OFF operation of the power switch 35). Then, while the power is not turned on, the setting key 328 is turned on, and both the backup clear switch 330 is pressed and the power switch 35 is turned on.

When the power switch 35 is turned on, the operations of all the switches are invalidated, and only the operations related to the setting (for example, the operation of the setting key 328 and the operation of the setting switch 332) are enabled and the setting is changed. The process is started and the settings can be changed.

When the setting change process is started, the error notification monitor 336 displays a setting change code indicating that the setting change process is in progress. Further, the display of the performance display monitor 334 is switched from the off state to the information indicating the set value after the power switch 35 is turned on.

In the setting change process, the backup clear process, that is, the initialization process of the main RAM 103 (clearing the work area of the main RAM 103, notifying the clear of the work area of the main RAM 103, initializing the work area of the main RAM 103, commands at the time of initializing the RWM). When transmission) is executed, a voice indicating that the backup clear process has been executed is output from the speaker 24. As will be described later, the display area indicating that the backup clear processing has been executed is not displayed, but instead of or in addition to the audio output from the speaker 24, the display area 16 indicates that the backup clear processing has been executed. It may be displayed in.

In the setting change process, every time the setting switch 332 is pressed, the information indicating the setting value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is cyclically increased and displayed. That is, the information indicating the set value increases by 1 each time the setting switch 332 is pressed when the set value is "1" to "5", but when the set value is "6", the information indicates the setting switch 332. When is pressed, it returns to "1" and is displayed.

If the setting key 328 is turned off during the setting change process, the setting change state ends and the setting value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is set. Further, the display of the error notification monitor 336 is changed from the setting changing code to the initialization code, the performance display (base value) is displayed on the performance display monitor 334, and the operation of all switches is enabled.

In this way, during the setting change process, only the operations related to the setting (for example, the operation of the setting key 328 and the operation of the setting switch 332) of all the switches are enabled, and all the other switches remain disabled. .. Then, when the setting key 328 is turned off, all the switches are activated.

[7-1-4-2. Flow of setting confirmation process]
Next, the setting confirmation process, that is, the flow for confirming the set setting value will be described. The setting confirmation process is a process that is executed on the condition that the game permission flag is internally ON, and is not executed when the game permission flag is internally OFF.

In order to confirm the set value, the setting key 328 is turned on and the backup clear switch 330 is turned on while the power is not turned on, provided that the game permission flag is turned ON internally. The power switch 35 is turned on without being pressed.

When the power switch 35 is turned on, the operation of all the switches is invalidated, only the operation of the setting key 328 is enabled among all the switches, the setting confirmation process is started, and the set setting can be confirmed. It becomes.

When the setting confirmation process is started, the setting confirmation code indicating that the setting confirmation process is in progress is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. Further, the display of the performance display monitor 334 is switched from the off state to the information indicating the set value after the power switch 35 is turned on.

During the setting confirmation process, even if the setting switch 332 is pressed, the information indicating the setting value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 does not change.

If the setting key 328 is turned off during the setting confirmation process, the setting confirmation state ends, the display of the error notification monitor 336 is changed from the setting confirmation code to non-display, and the performance display (base value) is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. Appears and all switch operations are enabled.

As described above, during the setting confirmation process, only the setting key 328 of all the switches is enabled, and all the other switches remain disabled. Therefore, the setting switch 332 also remains disabled. Then, when the setting key 328 is turned off, all the switches are activated. As described above, in the setting confirmation process, the process may be a process that can be executed during the normal game regardless of the operation of the power switch 35.

[7-1-4-3. Flow in abnormal processing]
As described above, when the game permission flag is internally turned off, the setting change process can be executed, but the setting confirmation process cannot be executed. Therefore, when the game permission flag is internally turned off, an operation for executing the setting change process (when the power is not turned on, the setting key 328 is turned on and the backup clear switch 330 is pressed. And, when the operation for executing the setting confirmation process is performed without performing the ON operation of the power switch 35, the backup process without the setting change process (details will be described later) is performed, or simply. If only the operation of turning on the power is performed, the error processing is executed. The flow of processing at the time of abnormality will be described below.

After the power switch 35 is turned on, the operations of all the switches are invalidated, and only the operations related to the setting (for example, the operation of the setting key 328 and the operation of the setting switch 332) are enabled (internal). The processing at the time of abnormality is started). The reason why the operation related to the setting is enabled is that the game permission flag can be turned ON by executing the setting change process.

When the error processing is started, an error code indicating that the game cannot be executed is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. As a result, the operator can confirm that the game cannot be executed. Further, the performance display monitor 334 displays information indicating that an error has occurred.

Furthermore, when the abnormal processing is started, the operations related to the setting are also invalidated. That is, the operation of all switches is invalidated. Therefore, when the abnormal processing is started, no response is made regardless of which operation is executed, and the pachinko game is in a state where the game can be executed unless the power switch 35 is turned off and the above-mentioned setting change processing is performed. Machine 1 cannot be restored. Note that the operation of all switches is invalidated in a situation where each device controlled by the sub control circuit 200 cannot be stopped at all, or each device controlled by some sub control circuits 200 (for example,). LED25) includes those in a controllable state.

[7-2. System timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the system timer interrupt process by the main CPU 101. The system timer interrupt process is executed, for example, every 2 ms. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 saves the value of each register in the stack area of the main RAM 103 (step S51).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a random number update process for updating various random number values (step S52).

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a switch input detection process for detecting input signals from various switches (step S353. The switch input detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 41.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a timer update process for updating the values of various timers (step S54).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a command output process for outputting (transmitting) various commands to the sub control circuit 200 (step S55).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a game information output process for outputting (transmitting) various game information to the sub control circuit 200 (step S56). The game information is information related to the game processed by the main control circuit 100, the sub control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 300, etc., and is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 300, the hall computer 700, and the like. To.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of restoring the values of the saved registers (step S57). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the system timer interrupt process.

[7-2-1. Switch input detection process]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the switch input detection process by the main CPU 101. The switch input detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the system timer interrupt process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 executes a start opening winning detection process (step S61). The starting port winning detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a general winning opening passage detection process (step S62). In the general winning opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like at the time of winning the general winning opening 53, 54, 55, 56 is set.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a large winning opening passage detection process (step S63). In the large winning opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like at the time of winning the large winning opening 540 is set.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a ball passage detector passage detection process (step S64). In the ball passing detector passing detection process, the lottery result of the normal symbol game (not shown) is based on the fact that the passing detection of the game ball to the passing gate 49 (see, for example, FIG. 5) is detected by the ball passing detector (not shown). Random value) is extracted. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the switch input detection process.

[7-2-1-1. Start opening prize detection process]
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a start opening winning detection process by the main CPU 101. The start opening winning detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the switch input detection process described above. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 421 (step S71). When the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 421 (YES in step S71), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S52. When the game ball is not detected by the first start port switch 421 (NO in step S71), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S81.

In step S72, the main CPU 101 performs a setting check process. This setting check process will be described later.

In step S73, the main CPU 101 extracts various random numbers such as a jackpot determination random number and a symbol determination random number for the first special symbol, and performs a process of setting payout information according to the first start opening winning.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of reserved first start opening prizes (the number of reserved first special symbols) is less than four (step S74). When the number of reserved pieces is less than 4 (YES in step S74), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S75. When the number of reserved balls is four (NO in step S74), the main CPU 101 discards various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420, and proceeds to the process of step S80.

In step S75, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the number of reserved first start opening prizes.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of storing various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 in the main RAM 103 until the fluctuation start condition (starting condition) of the first special symbol is satisfied. (Step S76). As a result, the variable display of the first special symbol for the extracted random numbers is suspended until the start condition is satisfied.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs the first special stop symbol determination process (step S77). In the first special stop symbol determination process, the jackpot random number determination table, the symbol determination table, and the jackpot type determination for the first special symbol are determined based on the jackpot determination random number value and the symbol determination random number value extracted for the first special symbol. With reference to the table, the symbol designation command and the hit selection symbol command related to the main symbol (the first special symbol scheduled to be stopped and displayed) are determined.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes the fluctuation pattern determination process (step S78). The variation pattern determination process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the start opening winning detection process described above. Further, the main CPU 101 refers to the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol of FIG. 23 (or FIG. 25), and selects the fluctuation pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination, the reach determination random value, and the effect selection random value. , Perform the process of determining.

As shown in FIGS. 23 and 25, since the variation display time of the decorative symbol is stored in association with the variation pattern, the variation corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the above variation pattern determination process. The pattern specification command is substantially information that can represent the fluctuation time.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a command for increasing the number of reserved pieces of the first start opening winning (step S79). The hold number increase command of the first start opening winning is a command indicating that the hold number of the first special symbol is increased by 1, and is sent to the sub control circuit 200 together with a command indicating a fluctuation pattern determined in the process of step S78. Is sent.

In step S80, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a hold quantity overflow command for the first start opening winning, and proceeds to step S81. The hold quantity overflow command of the first start opening prize is a command indicating that the first start opening prize has been made when the hold number of the first special symbol is the upper limit (for example, 4), and the command is sent to the sub control circuit 200. Is sent.

As is clear from FIG. 42, the pending number overflow command for the first start port winning is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 because the set value data is normally determined in the setting check process in step S72 described later. Is a prerequisite.

In step S81, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game ball is detected by the second start port switch 441 (step S81). When the game ball is detected by the second start port switch 441 (YES in step S81), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S82. When the game ball is not detected by the second start port switch 441 (NO in step S81), the main CPU 101 ends the start port winning detection process.

In step S82, the main CPU 101 performs a setting check process. This setting check process will be described later, but is the same process as in step S72.

In step S83, the main CPU 101 extracts various random numbers such as a big hit determination random number and a symbol determination random number for the second special symbol, and performs a process of setting payout information according to the second start opening winning.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of reserved second start opening prizes (the number of reserved second special symbols) is less than four (step S84). When the number of reserved pieces is less than 4 (YES in step S84), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S85. When the number of reserved balls is four (NO in step S84), the main CPU 101 discards various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 440, and ends the starting opening winning detection process.

In step S85, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the reserved number of the second start opening winnings.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of storing various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 in the main RAM 103 until the fluctuation start condition (starting condition) of the second special symbol is satisfied. (Step S86). As a result, the variable display of the second special symbol for the extracted random numbers is suspended until the start condition is satisfied.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs the second special stop symbol determination process (step S87). The second special stop symbol determination process is also the same as the first special stop symbol determination process, based on the extracted jackpot determination random number value and symbol determination random number value extracted for the second special symbol, and the second special symbol. With reference to the jackpot random number determination table, the symbol determination table, and the jackpot type determination table, the symbol designation command and the jackpot selection symbol command related to the main symbol (the second special symbol scheduled to be stopped and displayed) are determined.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes the fluctuation pattern determination process (step S88). This variation pattern determination process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the start opening winning detection process described above, as in step S78, and the main CPU 101 refers to the variation time determination table of the special symbol in FIG. 23 (or FIG. 25). Then, as a result of the jackpot determination, a process of selecting a fluctuation pattern is performed based on the reach determination random value and the effect selection random value.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a command for increasing the number of reserved pieces of the second start opening winning (step S89). The hold number increase command for the second start opening winning is a command indicating that the hold number of the second special symbol is increased by 1, and is sent to the sub control circuit 200 together with a command indicating a fluctuation pattern determined in the process of step S88. Is sent. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the start opening winning detection process.

If the game ball winning in the first starting port 420 and the game ball winning in the second starting port 440 are detected at the same time, either the setting check process in step S72 or the setting check process in step S82 is performed. You may try to do only one of them.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the second start opening switch 441 (YES in step S81), it is assumed that the number of reserved second start opening prizes is four (NO in step S84). However, the main CPU 101 starts by discarding various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 without transmitting the hold number overflow command of the second starting port winning to the sub control circuit 200. The mouth winning detection process has been completed. This is because the setting value suggestion effect described later can be effectively performed in the non-time saving game state.

[7-2-1-1-1. Setting check process]
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting check process by the main CPU 101, and this setting check process is the same process in step S72 and step S82 (both see FIG. 42). The setting check process is a process of checking whether or not the set setting value is normal. In this setting check process, for example, the same process as the work area check of the RWM (main RAM 103) executed in step S1720 (see FIG. 32) may be performed, but in the present embodiment, the set setting value is set. The emphasis is on checking whether it is normal or not.

As shown in the figure, first, in step S721, the main CPU 101 checks whether or not the set value data stored in the main RAM 103 is appropriate (for example, within a specified range). As described above, in the present embodiment, “0” to “5” are stored in the main RAM 103 as the setting value data corresponding to the setting values “1” to “6”. Therefore, here, the setting value data is “ Whether or not it is within the range of "0" to "5" is determined. When the set value data is within the range of "0" to "5" (YES in step S721), the setting check process ends. If the set value data is out of the range of "0" to "5" (NO in step S721), the process proceeds to step S722.

In step S722, the main CPU 101 sets the game permission flag to OFF, and proceeds to step S723.

In step S723, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. When the main CPU 101 determines that the special symbol is in the variable display (YES in step S723), the process proceeds to step S724, and when it determines that the special symbol is not in the variable display (NO in step S723), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S725.

In step S724, the main CPU 101 prohibits the stop of the special symbol during the variable display. That is, even if the variation time of the special symbol determined in step S78 or step S88 (both refer to FIG. 42) has elapsed with reference to the variation time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 23 (or FIG. 25). The variable display of the special symbol is continued, and the special symbol is not stopped and displayed. Then, the process proceeds to step S726.

For example, if a game ball wins at the starting ports 420 and 440 while the main CPU 101 is displaying the variation of the special symbol, the step is performed during the variation display of the special symbol (before the variation display of the special symbol ends). The setting check process of S72 (or step S82) may be executed. When the main CPU 101 determines that it is not normal in this setting check process (NO in step S721), the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol being displayed is not displayed even if the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. Even), the game permission flag is turned off, and abnormal processing is executed. In this case, since the game cannot be executed unless the power is turned off and the setting change process is executed, the result of the jackpot judgment of the special symbol in the variable display is cleared in the backup clear process including the pending data. The Rukoto.

In step S726, the main CPU 101 prohibits the firing of the game ball. That is, the payout / launch control circuit 300 (see FIG. 9) is controlled so that power is not supplied to the launch solenoid (not shown). Therefore, even if the player holds the firing handle 32 and rotates it in the clockwise direction, the game ball is not fired and the game cannot be played.

When the main CPU 101 prohibits the firing of the game ball in step S726, the main CPU 101 shifts to the abnormality processing in step S727.

In step S725, the main CPU 101 prohibits the variable display of the special symbol so that the next new variable display is not started. For example, even if the variable display of the special symbol is suspended when the special symbol is not in the variable display, or the variable display of the special symbol is stopped and waiting for the start of the next variable display, the variable display of the special symbol starts. Not done. When the main CPU 101 finishes the process of step S725, the main CPU 101 moves to step S726.

In the abnormality processing in step S727, the main CPU 101 performs the same processing as the abnormality processing in step S38 (see FIG. 37). That is, the processes of steps S381 to S384 shown in FIG. 38 are performed until the power failure detection signal ON is detected, and when the power failure detection signal ON is detected, the power failure occurrence process of step S385, that is, FIG. The processes of steps S3851 to S3854 shown in 39 are performed.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the setting check process is performed at the time when the game ball is won in the first starting port 420 and when the game ball is won in the second starting port 440, and the main RAM 103 is subjected to the setting check process. If the stored set value data is not normal, the execution of the game is prohibited. Therefore, even during the execution of the game, if the set value data is not normal, it is impossible to continue the game, and unless the power is turned off and then turned on again to perform the setting change process. The game cannot be performed. Thereby, for example, it is possible to prevent the game from being continuously performed in a state where the setting is not normal.

Further, when the main CPU 101 determines in step S721 that the set value data is not appropriate, even if the variation display of the special symbol is not started yet and is held, as described above, the power is temporarily turned off and the power is turned on again. Since the game cannot be executed unless it is input and the setting change process is performed, all the various data (for example, random numbers for jackpot determination) stored in the main RAM 103 related to the above hold will be cleared. That is, regardless of whether the various data on hold are based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 or the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440, all of them are It will be cleared. As a result, it is possible to prevent the various data related to the above hold from being processed based on the setting values that are not normal, and it is possible to improve the security.

Further, as described above, the setting check process is the same in step S72 and step S82 (see FIG. 42). Therefore, when it is determined that the set value data is not normal in the setting check process (step S72) performed when the game ball wins the first starting port 420 (NO in step S721), in step S724, the main CPU 101 Prohibits the stoppage of the second special symbol in the variable display not only when the special symbol in the variable display is the first special symbol but also when it is the second special symbol. Similarly, when it is determined that the set value data is not normal in the setting check process (step S82) performed when the game ball wins the second starting port 440 (NO in step S721), the setting value data is also determined in step S724. The main CPU 101 prohibits the stop of the first special symbol during the variable display not only when the special symbol during the variable display is the second special symbol but also when the special symbol is the first special symbol.

Similarly, when it is determined that the set value data is not normal in the setting check process (step S72) performed when the game ball wins the first starting port 420 (NO in step S721), in step S725. , The main CPU 101 prohibits the variable display of the second special symbol not only when the special symbol for which the variable display is held is the first special symbol but also when it is the second special symbol. Similarly, when it is determined in the setting check process (step S82) performed when the game ball wins the second starting port 440 that the set value data is not normal (NO in step S721), the setting value data is also determined in step S725. The main CPU 101 prohibits the variable display of the first special symbol not only when the special symbol for which the variable display is held is the second special symbol but also when it is the first special symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, the setting check process is performed not only when the power is turned on (see step S1730 in FIG. 32) but also when the game ball is won in the first starting port 420 and the second starting port 440. Not limited, for example, at the time of setting confirmation processing (see step S24 of FIG. 33), at the time of setting change processing (see step S26 of FIG. 33), at the time of executing backup clear processing (see FIG. 35), variable display of special symbols starts. When the movement of the special symbol is stopped, the passage is detected by the passing gate switch 49a (see FIG. 9), the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started, the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped, and the setting check process is performed at a predetermined timing. You may do it. The above-mentioned predetermined timing is an example list. Further, the setting check process may be performed not only at a specific timing but also at a plurality of timings (for example, all or a part of the above timings). Even in such a case, it is possible to prevent the game from being continuously performed, for example, in a state where the settings are not normal.

Further, in the present embodiment, if it is determined in the setting check process that the set value data is not normal, it is not possible to immediately turn off the game permission flag and proceed with the game regardless of whether or not the game is in the jackpot game state. It is possible, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing at which it is determined that the set value data is not normal in the setting check process and the timing at which the game cannot be executed may be shifted. As a result, it is possible to reduce the player's sense of loss that may occur due to the fact that the variable display is not performed even though the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 420 or the second starting port 440. However, since it is not preferable that various determination processes (for example, big hit determination process) are performed when the set value data is not normal, the change display of the special symbol is performed for a predetermined time without performing various determination processes. It is preferable to stop the special symbol by losing it.

Although not shown in FIG. 43, when the game permission flag is set to OFF in step S722, it is preferable that the normal symbol is also prohibited from stopping if the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. .. Further, when the normal symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, it is preferable to prohibit the variable display of the normal symbol.

[7-3. Main control main processing]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a main control main process by the main CPU 101. When the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the main CPU 101 performs an initial setting process (step S91), as shown in the figure. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs the above-mentioned process such as the power-on process.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an initial value random number update process (step S92). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of updating the initial value random number counter.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol control process (step S93). The special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 45.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol control process (step S94). The normal symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 51.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a symbol display unit control process (step S95). In this process, the main CPU 101 has a special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 73, depending on the result of the special symbol control process and the result of the normal symbol control process stored in the main RAM 103 in steps S93 and S94. A process of storing a control signal for driving the second special symbol display unit 74) and the normal symbol display unit 71 in the main RAM 103 is performed. As a result, the main CPU 101 transmits a control signal to the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) and the normal symbol display unit 71, and the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit). The display unit 73, the second special symbol display unit 74), and the normal symbol display unit 71 perform variable display and stop display of the special symbol and the normal symbol based on the received control signal.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a game information data generation process (step S96). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates a game state command related to game information data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 300, and the hall computer 700, and stores the game state command in the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a storage / game state data generation process (step S97). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates storage / game state data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 based on the value of the probability change flag and the value of the time reduction flag, and stores the storage / game state data in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 returns to the process of step S92.

[7-3-1. Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a special symbol control process by the main CPU 101. The special symbol control process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the main control main process described above. The numerical values (“00” to “08”) shown in parentheses on the left side of each process shown in the figure indicate the value of the control state flag. This control state flag is stored in a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 advances the special symbol game by executing the process according to the numerical value of the control state flag.

As shown in FIG. 45, the main CPU 101 performs a process of loading the control state flag (step S101). In this process, the main CPU 101 reads the value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute each of the processes of steps S102 to S110 described later based on the value of the read control state flag. This control state flag indicates the state of the special symbol game, and enables any process of steps S102 to S110 to be executed. Further, the main CPU 101 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time set for each process in steps S102 to S110. Before reaching this predetermined timing, the processes related to other subroutines are executed without executing each process. Of course, the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40) described above is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol memory check process (step S102). In this process, the main CPU 101 checks the number of pending special symbol variation displays when the control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol memory check process, and when the number of pending items is not “0”. (If there is a reserved ball), the result of the jackpot determination obtained by the start opening winning detection process, the determination result of the main symbol, the determination result of the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, and the like are acquired. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol variable display time management process (step S93) described later, and sets the fluctuation pattern acquired in this process. Set the variation display time of the corresponding special symbol in the waiting time timer. That is, it is set so that the special symbol fluctuation time management process described later is executed after the variation display time of the special symbol corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the start opening winning detection process has elapsed. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is "0" (when there is no reserved ball), the main CPU 101 performs a demo display process for displaying the demo screen. This special symbol memory check process will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol fluctuation time management process (step S103). In this process, the control state flag of the main CPU 101 is a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol variation time management process, and when the variation display time of the special symbol has elapsed, the control state flag is set to the special symbol described later. A value (“02”) indicating the display time management process (step S104) is set, and the waiting time after confirmation is set in the waiting time timer. That is, it is set so that the special symbol display time management process described later is executed after the fixed waiting time set in the process of step S103 has elapsed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol display time management process (step S104). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that the jackpot is determined when the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process and the waiting time after the confirmation set in the process of step S103 elapses. Determine if the result is a "big hit". Then, when the result of the jackpot determination is "big hit", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag with a value ("03") indicating the jackpot start interval management process (step S105) described later, and sets the jackpot start interval. Set the corresponding time in the wait time timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval set in the process of step S104 has elapsed, the jackpot start interval management process described later is set to be executed. On the other hand, when the result of the big hit determination is not "big hit", the main CPU 101 sets a value ("08") indicating the special symbol game end processing (step S110) described later in the control state flag. That is, in this case, it is set so that the special symbol game end processing described later is executed. This special symbol display time management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 47.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a jackpot start interval management process (step S105). In this process, the main CPU 101 has a control state flag having a value (“03”) indicating the jackpot start interval management process, and is large when the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval set in the process of step S104 has elapsed. In order to open the winning opening 540, the variable positioned in the main RAM 103 is updated based on the data read from the main ROM 102. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag with a value (“04)” indicating the process during opening of the large winning opening (step S106), which will be described later, and also sets the opening upper limit time of the large winning opening 540 (for example). 30 seconds) is set in the large winning opening opening time timer. That is, this process is set so that the process during opening of the large winning opening, which will be described later, is executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process during opening of the large winning opening (step S106). In this process, first, when the control state flag is a value (“04”) indicating the process during opening of the large winning opening, the condition that the large winning opening winning counter is equal to or more than a predetermined number and the opening It is determined whether or not one of the conditions that the upper limit time has elapsed (the large winning opening opening time timer is "0") is satisfied (the predetermined closing condition is satisfied). When one of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 103 in order to close the big winning opening 540. Then, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“05”) indicating the large winning mouth residual ball monitoring process (step S107) described later in the control state flag, and sets the large winning mouth residual ball monitoring time in the waiting time timer. To do. That is, by this process, after the time for monitoring the remaining balls in the large winning opening set in step S107 has elapsed, the residual ball monitoring process in the large winning opening, which will be described later, is set to be executed. Immediately before the end of the process during opening of the large winning opening, a round-to-round display command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a large winning opening residual ball monitoring process (step S107). In this process, the control state flag of the main CPU 101 is a value (“05”) indicating the large winning opening residual ball monitoring process, and when the large winning opening residual ball monitoring time elapses, the large winning opening opening count counter It is determined whether or not the condition that the value is equal to or greater than the maximum number of times the large winning opening is opened (the final round) is satisfied. When it is determined that the above conditions are not satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“06”) indicating the large winning opening reopening waiting time management process in the control state flag. Further, the main CPU 101 sets the time corresponding to the interval between rounds in the waiting time timer. That is, by this process, the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, which will be described later, is set to be executed after the time corresponding to the interval between rounds has elapsed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S107 that the above conditions are satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“07”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing in the control state flag, and sets the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval (big hit end interval). Time) is set in the waiting time timer. That is, it is set so that the jackpot end interval process described later is executed after the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval set in this process has elapsed.

Next, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening count counter is not equal to or greater than the maximum value of the large winning opening opening count, the main CPU 101 performs a waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening (step S108). In this process, the control state flag of the main CPU 101 is a value (“06”) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, and when the time corresponding to the interval between rounds elapses, the large winning opening is opened. The value of the count counter is stored and updated so as to increase by "1". Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating the processing during opening of the large winning opening in the control state flag. Then, the main CPU 101 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 30 seconds) in the large winning opening opening time timer. That is, in this process, the above-mentioned large winning opening opening process (step S106) is set to be executed again. Immediately before the end of the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, a command indicating that the large winning opening is open is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening count counter is equal to or greater than the maximum value of the large winning opening opening count, the main CPU 101 performs the jackpot end interval processing (step S109). In this process, the control state flag of the main CPU 101 is a value indicating the jackpot end interval process (“07”), and when the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval elapses, a value indicating the special symbol game end process (“07”). 08 ") is set in the control status flag. That is, by this process, the special symbol game end process described later is set to be executed after the process of step S109. When the above-mentioned main symbol is any one of Special Figure 1-2, Special Figure 1-8, and Special Figure 2-2, the main CPU 101 controls to shift the gaming state to the high-probability gaming state. , When the above-mentioned main symbol is any one of the special figure 1-1, the special figure 1-3, and the special figure 2-1, the control to set the gaming state to the low probability gaming state (probability change flag OFF) is performed. Do.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol game end process when the big hit game state ends or when the result of the big hit determination is "miss" (step S110). In this process, when the control state flag is a value (“08”) indicating the special symbol game end process, the main CPU 101 stores and updates the data indicating the number of held items (starting storage information) so as to decrease by “1”. To do. Further, the main CPU 101 updates the special symbol storage area in order to display the fluctuation of the special symbol next time. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol memory check process in the control state flag. That is, by this process, after the process of step S110, the above-mentioned special symbol storage check process (step S102) is set to be executed. When the special symbol game end process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol control process.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the special symbol game is advanced by sequentially setting various values in the control state flag. Specifically, when the game state is not the big hit game state and the result of the big hit determination is "miss", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags to "00", "01", "02", and "08". Set in order. As a result, the main CPU 101 has the above-mentioned special symbol memory check process (step S102), special symbol variation time management process (step S103), special symbol display time management process (step S104), and special symbol game end process (step S110). Is executed at a predetermined timing in this order.

Further, when the game state is not the big hit game state and the result of the big hit determination is "big hit", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of "00", "01", "02", "03". To do. As a result, the main CPU 101 has the above-mentioned special symbol memory check process (step S102), special symbol variation time management process (step S103), special symbol display time management process (step S104), and jackpot start interval management process (step S105). Is executed at a predetermined timing in this order, and the transition control to the jackpot game state is executed.

Further, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of "04", "05", and "06" when the transition control to the jackpot game state is executed. As a result, the main CPU 101 performs the above-mentioned processing during opening of the large winning opening (step S106), monitoring processing of residual balls in the large winning opening (step S107), and waiting time management process before reopening of the large winning opening (step S108) in this order. It is executed at a predetermined timing, and the jackpot game state is executed.

If the end condition of the big hit game state is satisfied during the big hit game state, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of "04", "05", "07", and "08". As a result, the main CPU 101 has the above-mentioned large winning opening opening processing (step S106), large winning opening residual ball monitoring processing (step S107), big hit end interval processing (step S109), and special symbol game end processing (step S110). Is executed at a predetermined timing in this order, and the jackpot game state is ended.

As described above, in the special symbol control process, the process flow is branched according to the status. Further, the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 51 described later) in step S94 during the main control main process shown in FIG. 44 also branches the processing flow according to the status, similarly to the special symbol control process.

The processing program of the present embodiment is programmed so that pure return processing from a small module to a parent module is possible with a call instruction when the processing is branched according to the status. As a result, in the present embodiment, the capacity of the program can be reduced as compared with the case where the jump table is arranged to execute the above processing.

[7-3-1-1. Special symbol memory check processing]
FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing a special symbol memory check process by the main CPU 101. The special symbol memory check process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 101 reads a control state flag from a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103 by a load process (step S111).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the read control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol memory check process (step S112). When it is determined that the control state flag is not "00" (NO in step S112), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol storage check process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is "00" (YES in step S112), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S113.

In step S113, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the reserved number (second start storage number) of the second start opening winning (variation display of the second special symbol) is “0”. When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of reserved second start opening prizes is "0" (YES in step S113), the process proceeds to step S114, and the number of reserved number of second start opening prizes is not "0". If it is determined (NO in step S113), the process proceeds to step S121.

In step S114, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the reserved number (first start storage number) of the first start opening winning (variation display of the first special symbol) is "0". When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of reserved first start opening prizes is not "0" (NO in step S114), it proceeds to the process of step S115 and determines that the number of reserved first start opening prizes is "0". If it is determined (YES in step S114), the process proceeds to step S120.

In step S115, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the value of the first start storage number corresponding to the number of reserved first start opening prizes. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not data is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 103. It is determined whether or not there is a start memory of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol that is being displayed or is on hold. In the first special symbol start storage area (0), data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display is stored as start storage information. Then, in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), a special symbol game corresponding to four times of reserved variable display (holding ball) of the first special symbol. Data (information) is stored as start storage information. The start storage information of each first special symbol start storage area includes, for example, data indicating a jackpot determination random value, a symbol determination random value, a determined fluctuation pattern, etc. extracted at the time of winning the first start port 420. Is included.

Next, in step S116, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol storage transfer process based on the first start opening winning. In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the data of the first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the first special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. After that, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S117.

In step S117, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol fluctuation time management process in the control state flag. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a special symbol effect start command to the sub control circuit 200.

In step S118, the main CPU 101 performs a jackpot determination process. In this process, the main CPU 101 is set to the jackpot determination random value that is extracted at the time of winning the start opening and is set earlier in the first special symbol start storage area (0) or the second special symbol start storage area (0). Based on this, the judgment value data is acquired by referring to the jackpot judgment table (not shown) corresponding to the type of the winning start opening. Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether it is a "big hit" or a "loss" (big hit determination) based on the acquired determination value data.

Next, in step S119, the main CPU 101 sets in the waiting time timer the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined in the variation pattern determination process of step S78 or step S88 (both see FIG. 42). .. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol memory check process.

Further, in step S120, the main CPU 101 performs a demo display process for displaying the demo screen. In this process, the main CPU 101 transmits a demo display command to the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol memory check process.

Further, in step S121, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the value of the second start storage number corresponding to the number of reserved second start opening prizes. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 103. It is determined whether or not there is a start memory of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol that is being displayed or is on hold. In the second special symbol start storage area (0), data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display is stored as start storage information. Then, in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), a special symbol game corresponding to four times of reserved variable display (holding ball) of the second special symbol is held. Data (information) is stored as start storage information. The start storage information of each second special symbol start storage area includes, for example, data indicating a jackpot determination random value, a symbol determination random value, a determined fluctuation pattern, etc. extracted at the time of winning the second start port 440. Is included.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol storage transfer process based on the second start opening winning (step S122). In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the data of the second special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the second special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. After that, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S117, executes the processes of step S118 and step S119, and then ends the special symbol memory check process.

[7-3-2. Special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing a special symbol display time management process by the main CPU 101. The special symbol display time management process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (step S131). When it is determined that the control state flag is not a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (NO in step S131), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (YES in step S131), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S132.

In step S132, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value (waiting time) of the waiting time timer is "0". In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time (variation display start waiting time) set in the waiting time timer after the fluctuation display is confirmed has been exhausted. When it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0" (NO in step S132), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is "0" (YES in step S132), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S133.

In step S133, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "big hit". When it is determined that the special symbol game is a "big hit" (YES in step S133), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S134. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol game is not a "big hit" (NO in step S133), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S140.

In step S134, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S135.

In step S135, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the time reduction number counter, the time reduction flag, and the probability change flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S136.

In step S136, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“03”) indicating the jackpot start interval management process in the control state flag.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the jackpot start interval time (for example, 5000 ms) corresponding to the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the waiting time timer (step S137).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the jackpot start command corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 103 (step S138). As a result, a jackpot start command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 refers to the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 22, FIG. 26 or FIG. 27), and the upper limit of the number of rounds corresponding to the special symbol (type of the symbol designation command) (upper limit of the number of open winning openings). ) Is set in the main RAM 103, and the round number display LED pattern flag is set (step S139). The round number display LED pattern flag is a flag indicating whether or not to display the remaining number of rounds in a predetermined pattern. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

In step S140, the main CPU 101 performs a time saving number subtraction process. The time saving number subtraction process will be described later with reference to FIG. 48.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“08”) indicating the special symbol game end process in the control state flag (step S141). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

[7-3-2-1. Time saving number subtraction process]
FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a time saving number subtraction process by the main CPU 101. The time reduction number subtraction process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol display time management process described above or the jackpot end interval process described later. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (step S151). The time reduction counter is a subtraction counter that counts until the set time reduction becomes 0. When the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (YES in step S151), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S154. If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0 (NO in step S151), the main CPU 101 ends the time reduction subtraction process. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the number of times set as the time saving number counter is 100 times or 10000 times.

In step S152, the main CPU 101 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the time reduction counter.

Next, the main CPU 101 again determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (step S153). When the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (YES in step S153), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S154. If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0 (NO in step S153), the main CPU 101 ends the time reduction subtraction process.

In step S154, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting "0" as the time saving flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the time saving number subtraction process.

[7-3-3. Big hit end interval processing]
FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end interval processing by the main CPU 101. The jackpot end interval process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“07”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing (step S161). When it is determined that the control state flag is not a value (“07”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing (NO in step S161), the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is a value (“07”) indicating the jackpot end interval process (YES in step S161), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S162.

In step S162, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer is "0". In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the jackpot end interval time set in the waiting time timer has been exhausted. When it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0" (NO in step S161), the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is "0" (YES in step S161), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S163.

In step S163, the main CPU 101 clears the LED pattern flag indicating the number of times the large winning opening is opened. The large winning opening opening number display LED pattern flag is used as a management flag indicating whether or not to display the number of rounds at the time of a big hit by the LED light emission pattern.

Next, the main CPU 101 clears the round number distribution flag (step S164). This round number distribution flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and is used to indicate whether or not to periodically open and close the large winning opening 540 a predetermined number of times even during one round. Is the flag of. If the large winning opening 540 is periodically opened and closed even during one round, the round number distribution flag is set to "1". At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a special symbol jackpot end display command to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“08”) indicating the special symbol game end process in the control state flag (step S165).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "big hit" (step S166). When it is determined that the special symbol game is a "big hit" (YES in step S166), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S167. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol game is not a "big hit" (NO in step S166), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S174.

In step S167, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the jackpot flag to ON in a predetermined area of the main RAM 34.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is a probabilistic jackpot (step S168). In the case of a probability variation jackpot (YES in step S168), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S169. If it is not a probabilistic jackpot (NO in step S168), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S171.

In step S169, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting "1" as the probability change flag.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting "1" as the time saving flag (step S171).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a specified number of time reductions in the time reduction counter (step S172). In the present embodiment, with reference to the jackpot type determination table (FIG. 22, FIG. 26 or FIG. 27), the jackpot with 100 time reductions (for example, special figure 1-1, special figure 1-3, special figure 2-1) When it is (for example), 100 times are set in the time reduction counter, and the time reduction continues until the next big hit game state is executed (for example, special figure 1-2, special figure 1-8, special figure 2-2). Etc.), set 10000 times in the time reduction counter. However, the time reduction counter is not limited to 10,000 times when the time reduction is continued until the next big hit game state is executed, and even if the game is continued from the opening to the closing of the hall. Any number of times that cannot occur realistically will do. In this way, even if the game is continued from the opening to the closing of the hall, by setting the number of times that cannot actually occur in the time reduction counter, the time reduction is substantially continued until the next big hit game state is executed. Will be done. Furthermore, when the jackpot is 100 times of time reduction, counter processing is performed (100 times is set in the time reduction counter), and when the jackpot continues until the next jackpot game state is executed, flag processing is performed. (As long as the time saving flag is ON, the time saving game state is continued).

Next, the main CPU 101 executes the variation pattern table setting process (step S173). The variation pattern table setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval process.

In step S174, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the jackpot flag, that is, a process of setting the jackpot flag set to ON in a predetermined area of the main RAM 34 to OFF.

In step S175, the main CPU 101 executes the above-mentioned time saving number subtraction process (step S175). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval process.

[7-3-3-1. Fluctuation pattern table setting process]
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern table setting process by the main CPU 101. The variation pattern table setting process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the power-on time process or the jackpot end interval process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power is turned on (step S181). When the power is turned on (YES in step S181), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S182. When the power is not turned on (NO in step S181), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S183.

In step S182, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the table pattern 1 as a table pattern when referring to the variation time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 23 (or FIG. 25). The table pattern 1 corresponds to the table pattern when both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are ON (both jackpot and loss) in the variation time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 23 (or FIG. 25). ..

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON (step S183). When the time saving flag is ON (YES in step S183), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S184. When the time saving flag is OFF (NO in step S183), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S185.

In step S184, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the table pattern 2 as a table pattern when referring to the variation time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 23 (or FIG. 25). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the variation pattern table setting process. The table pattern 2 corresponds to the table pattern when the time reduction flag is OFF (both jackpot and loss) in the variation time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 23 (or FIG. 25).

In step S185, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the table pattern 3 as a table pattern when referring to the variation time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 23 (or FIG. 25). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the variation pattern table setting process. The table pattern 3 corresponds to the table pattern when the time saving flag is ON (both big hit and lost) in the variation time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 23 (or FIG. 25).

[7-4. Normal symbol control processing]
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol control process by the main CPU 101. The normal symbol control process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the main control main process described above. The numerical values (“00” to “04”) written in parentheses to the right of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. 51 indicate the normal symbol control state flag, and the normal symbol control state flag is the main RAM 103. It is stored in a predetermined storage area inside. The main CPU 101 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the numerical value of the normal symbol control state flag.

As shown in FIG. 51, the main CPU 101 performs a process of loading the normal symbol control state flag (step S191). In this process, the main CPU 101 reads out the normal symbol control state flag stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute various processes of steps S192 to S196 described later based on the value of the read normal symbol control state flag. This normal symbol control state flag indicates the game state of the normal symbol game, and enables any process of steps S162 to S166 to be executed. Further, the main CPU 101 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time set for each process of steps S162 to S166. Before reaching this predetermined timing, other subroutine processes are executed without executing each process. Of course, the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40) described above is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol memory check process (step S192). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the normal symbol memory check process, the main CPU 101 checks the number of reserved symbols in the variable display, and the number of pending symbols is “0”. If not, processing such as jackpot determination is performed. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol control state flag to a value (“01”) indicating the normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process (step S193) described later, and sets the fluctuation time determined in this process. Set to the wait time timer. That is, it is set so that the normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process described later is executed after the determined normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed by the process of step S192.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process (step S193). In this process, in the main CPU 101, the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“01”) indicating the normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process, and when the normal symbol fluctuation time elapses, the normal symbol control state flag will be added to the normal symbol control state flag, which will be described later. A value (“02”) indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process (step S194) is set, and the waiting time after confirmation (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in the waiting time timer. That is, by the process of step S193, it is set so that the normal symbol display time monitoring process described later is executed after the set waiting time after confirmation has elapsed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol display time monitoring process (step S194). In this process, the main CPU 101 has a normal symbol control state flag having a value (“02”) indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process, and is a big hit when the waiting time after confirmation set in the process of step S193 has elapsed. It is determined whether or not the result of the determination is a "big hit". Then, when the result of the big hit determination is "big hit", the main CPU 101 performs the normal electric accessory release setting process, and the value indicating the normal electric accessory release process (step S195) described later in the normal symbol control state flag (step S195). "03") is set. That is, this process is set so that the ordinary electric accessory opening process described later is executed. On the other hand, when the result of the big hit determination is not "big hit", the main CPU 101 sets a value ("04") indicating the normal symbol game end processing (step S195) described later in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, in this case, it is set so that the normal symbol game end processing described later is executed.

Next, when the result of the big hit determination is determined to be "big hit" in step S194, the main CPU 101 performs a normal electric accessory opening process (step S195). In this process, the main CPU 101 is said to have received a predetermined number of prizes during the opening of the normal electric accessory 460 when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“03”) indicating the normal electric accessory release process. It is determined whether or not one of the condition and the condition that the opening upper limit time of the ordinary electric accessory 460 has elapsed (the ordinary electric accessory opening time timer is "0") is satisfied. When one of the above conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 103 in order to close the blade member 4620 (for example, see FIG. 5) of the ordinary electric accessory 460. Then, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating the normal symbol game end process (step S196) described later in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, this process is set so that the normal symbol game end process described later is executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol game end process (step S196). In this process, the main CPU 101 reduces the data indicating the number of pending fluctuation display of the normal symbol by "1" when the normal symbol control state flag is a value ("04") indicating the normal symbol game end process. Update the memory to. Further, the main CPU 101 updates the normal symbol storage area in order to perform the next variation display of the normal symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“00”) indicating the normal symbol storage check process in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, after the process of step S196, the above-mentioned normal symbol memory check process (step S192) is set to be executed. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the normal symbol control process.

[8. Sub control main processing]
On the other hand, the sub control circuit 200 (host control circuit 2100) including the sub CPU processor executes the sub control main process. This sub-control main process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the sub-control main, and this process is started when the power is turned on. It should be noted that each of FIGS. 61, 72, 73, 74 and 98, which will be described later, is a flowchart showing an example of the sub-control main process executed by the host control circuit 2100 when the power is turned on. However, FIG. 52 is one of the typical examples.
It is a process.

As shown in FIG. 52, the host control circuit 2100 performs initialization processing such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, and the like (step S201). ).

Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of clearing the counter value of the watchdog timer (step S202). When the watchdog timer is started, a reset time (for example, 2000 ms) is set, and when the service pulse is not written (at the time-out), the power interruption process is executed.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 executes the operation means input process (step S203).

Next, the host control circuit 2100 executes a command analysis process (step S204). The command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG. 53.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 executes the effect mode determination process (step S205). The effect mode determination process is a process for determining the effect mode displayed on the display device 16 based on various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 100.

The effect mode determined in the above effect mode determination process (step S205) also includes a setting suggestion effect suggesting a set setting value. This setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to a first example and a second example.

(First example)
The first example of the setting suggestion effect is performed on the condition that the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5) exceeds the holding upper limit. For example, the host control circuit 2100 counts the overflow points of the first start winning opening, and when the hold number overflow command of the first starting winning opening is transmitted from the main control circuit 100, the first starting winning opening overflow point is reached. Add 1 Then, when the first start winning opening overflow point reaches a predetermined point (for example, 50 points), the main CPU 101 decides to execute the setting suggestion effect in the above-mentioned effect mode determination process. In a non-time-saving game state in which the time-saving flag is OFF, such as in a normal game state, it is not easy to win a game ball in the first start winning port 420. Therefore, when the first starting winning opening overflow occurs, the player's disappointment cannot be measured. .. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the disappointment of the player without directly causing a loss to the hole by performing the setting suggestion effect on the condition that the first start winning opening overflow occurs in the non-time saving game state. It will be possible. In addition, some players interrupt the launch of the game ball when the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 is the upper limit of the hold. In this respect, it is possible to promote the game by performing the setting suggestion effect on the condition that the winning of the game ball at the first starting port 420 exceeds the holding upper limit.

In the first example of the above setting suggestion effect, the setting suggestion effect is performed when the overflow point of the first start winning opening reaches a predetermined point, but the setting suggestion effect is not necessarily limited to this, and the first start winning opening winning is performed. The setting suggestion effect may be performed when the hold quantity overflow command is transmitted from the main control circuit 100. In this case, since the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect is high, for example, it is preferable that the setting suggestion effect is difficult to guess only once. For example, it is difficult to guess the setting only from the information obtained from one setting suggestion effect, but it is possible to estimate the setting by collecting a plurality of information obtained from a plurality of setting suggestion effects. It is conceivable to do so.

Further, as described above, the hold number overflow command for the first start port winning is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 on the premise that the set value data is determined to be normal in the setting check process in step S72. is there. Therefore, when the set value data is not determined to be normal in the setting check process, even if the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5) exceeds the holding upper limit. , The host control circuit 2100 does not add to the first start winning opening overflow point. Therefore, in a situation where the overflow point of the first starting winning opening reaches a predetermined point when the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5) exceeds the holding upper limit (for example, a predetermined point). When the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5) exceeds the holding upper limit at 49 points with respect to 50 points), the setting check process of step S72 (FIG. 42). If it is determined that the game is not normal, the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S722 described later), and the game cannot proceed without the setting suggestion effect being performed by the host control circuit 2100. It becomes.

Further, in the first example of the setting suggestion effect, the setting suggestion effect is not performed even if the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 (see, for example, FIG. 5) exceeds the hold upper limit (see FIG. 5). (See FIG. 42), on the condition that the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 exceeds the holding upper limit, the setting is the same as when the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 exceeds the holding upper limit. You may make a suggestion effect.

(Second example)
The second example of the setting suggestion effect is performed when the game ball wins a prize in a specific winning opening during the execution of the reach effect. For example, at the start of the reach effect, the host control circuit 2100 selects a specific winning opening among the first starting opening 420, the second starting opening 440, and each of the general winning openings 53, 54, 55 (see, for example, FIG. 5). For example, it is randomly determined by lottery. Then, when the winning command of the game ball to the specific winning opening determined above is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 during the execution of the reach effect, it is determined that the setting suggestion effect is executed. For example, among the players, there is a player who interrupts the launch of the game ball when the reach effect having a long fluctuation time is executed. Therefore, by executing the setting suggestion effect based on the winning detection of the game ball to the specific winning opening during the execution of the reach effect, it is possible to promote the launch of the game ball even during the reach effect. .. Further, in the reach production, it may be immediately found that the degree of expectation is low when the reach production is started. In such a case, the player may not start the variable display next time until the reach effect is completed, which may reduce the interest. In this respect, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest by executing the setting suggestion effect based on the detection of the winning of the game ball to the specific winning opening during the execution of the reach effect. Moreover, if the game machine manager can set the set value, the player may be skeptical that the set value of the pachinko machine in which he / she plays the game is low. According to the example of, such a fear can be reduced, and it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

When the specific winning opening is randomly selected from the first starting opening 420, the second starting opening 440, and each general winning opening 53, 54, 55 (see, for example, FIG. 5), for example, by lottery. It is preferable to keep it secret without disclosing which is a specific winning opening. As a result, the player is interested in which winning opening should be aimed at.

Further, in the second example of the setting suggestion effect, the specific winning openings are the first starting opening 420, the second starting opening 440, and each general winning opening 53, 54, 55 (see, for example, FIG. 5). Among them, for example, it is decided at random by lottery, but it is not always limited to randomly determining a specific winning opening, and a fixed winning opening may be used as a specific winning opening.

Further, in both the first example and the second example of the setting suggestion effect, it is determined that the host control circuit 2100 executes the setting suggestion effect, but the main CPU 101 may determine it. ..

If the game ball wins a prize in a specific winning slot during the execution of the reach effect, the setting check process of step S72 or step S82 (both refer to FIG. 42) is performed if the specific winning slot is the starting slot. Be told. Then, the setting suggestion effect in this case is performed only when it is determined to be normal in the above setting check process (YES in step S721). When the main CPU 101 determines that it is not normal in the above setting check process (NO in step S721), it not only does not perform the setting suggestion effect, but also prohibits the stop of the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner by the process of step S734. To do. Further, also for the host control circuit 2100, even if the decorative symbol variation effect accompanied by the reach effect is being produced, the decorative symbol variation effect is continued. However, the host control circuit 2100 may stop the output of the sound effect by the voice / LED control circuit 2200, or may reduce the output volume.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 executes a command transmission process (step S206). The command transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG. 54.

Next, the display control circuit 2300 executes the drawing control process (step S207). In this process, the display control circuit 2300 performs drawing control for displaying an image on the display device 16 based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the host control circuit 2100.

Next, the voice / LED control circuit 2200 executes the voice control process (step S208). In this process, the voice / LED control circuit 2200 performs voice control for causing the speaker 24 to output voice based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the host control circuit 2100.

Next, the voice / LED control circuit 2200 executes a control process regarding the light emitting mode of the LED 25 (step S209). In this process, the voice / LED control circuit 2200 performs light emission control for lighting or blinking the LED 25 based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the host control circuit 2100.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 executes the accessory control process (step S210). In this accessory control process, the operating accessory and the operating member constituting the accessory among the accessories constituting the accessory group 1000 are operated based on the effect designation information via the I2C controller 2610 and the motor controller 2700. This is a process for controlling the drive of the effect drive motor, and the details will be described later. In such a sub-control main process, after the initialization process of step S201 is completed, each process of steps S202 to S210 is repeatedly executed.

[8-1. Command analysis processing]
FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a command analysis process by the host control circuit 2100. The command analysis process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the sub-control main process described above. As shown in the figure, the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of analyzing a command stored in the reception buffer of the subwork RAM 2100a after receiving from the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) (step S241).

Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs a consistency check on the received command (step S242). The consistency check is performed to verify that the target data exists when the command is received and that the data is correct or missing.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs a sub lottery process (step S243). In this process, when the received command is a variation pattern designation command, the host control circuit 2100 selects an effect pattern by lottery based on the variation pattern designation command. When this process is completed, the host control circuit 2100 ends the command analysis process. In the sub-lottery process, all items related to the production including the production pattern may be selected by lottery, or only the type of production (presence or absence of dialogue notice, presence or absence of SU notice, etc.) is selected as the production pattern. The effect content (effect type, cut-in type, etc.) selected by lottery and executed in the effect may be selected as effect information by another process separately made into a subroutine. In the present embodiment, an effect pattern indicating the type of effect is selected in the sub-lottery process, and then the effect content to be executed based on the effect pattern is selected as the effect information by the effect mode determination process described later. ing.

By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the setting check process is performed in steps S72 and S82 (see FIG. 42) during the execution of the game, and the set value data is "0" to "5" in this setting check process. (NO in step S721 in FIG. 43), the process of steps S722 to S726 is executed, and then the error processing of step S727 is executed. However, for example, when the main control board 30 is illegally replaced, there is a high possibility that the setting check process in step S72 or step S82 will not be executed. Further, when an invalid signal is input and the set value set is changed, the set value data may be in the range of "0" to "5". Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the set value data is "0" even though the setting check process is not executed in step S72 or step S82, or the set value may have been changed illegally. Assuming that the value is within the range of "5" (for example, when it is determined to be YES in step S721), the host control circuit 2100 executes the setting determination process for determining the suitability of the set value information. .. This setting determination process will be described below without being shown.

First, the main CPU 101 starts the variation display of the special symbol at a specific timing (for example, when the game ball is won in the first start port 420 and the second start port 440, and the variation display of the special symbol is suspended. A command indicating the set value information stored in the main RAM 103 is transmitted. Then, the host control circuit 2100 that has received this command determines the suitability of the set value information (hereinafter referred to as "this time set value") indicated by the command received this time. This suitability determination is, for example, a process of determining whether or not the set value information (hereinafter referred to as "previous set value") indicated by the command received last time and the set value this time match.

Then, the host control circuit 2100 determines that the set value is normal if the previous set value and the current set value match, and if the previous set value and the current set value do not match, the set value is abnormal. Is determined to be.

Further, when the received set value information is abnormal, the host control circuit 2100 executes the set value abnormality processing. In this abnormal execution process, for example, an image for notifying that the set value is abnormal is displayed in the display area of the display device 16, and instead or in addition to this, the notification that the set value is abnormal is notified. It is a process to output the sound to be performed.

The suitability judgment of the above-mentioned set value information is not limited to the judgment of whether or not the previous set value and the current set value match. For example, all the set value information received three times or more match. It may be determined whether or not the information is present, or some of the setting value information received multiple times (for example, the setting value indicated by the command received two times before and the setting value this time) match. It may be determined whether or not there is. However, when the host control circuit 2100 receives a command (for example, a setting change start command or an initialization command) indicating that the setting change process (see step S24 in FIG. 33) has been executed, the set value is set to the subwork RAM 2100a this time. It is only stored in, and it is not determined whether or not the past set value including the previous set value and the current set value match.

Further, it is preferable that the above-mentioned setting determination process (adequacy determination of the set value information) is executed not only during the execution of the game but also when the power is turned on after the power is cut off unless the setting change process is executed. .. The setting determination process executed when the power is turned on after the power is cut off will be described later with reference to FIG. 114.

The setting determination process executed by the host control circuit 2100 described above may be executed in the command analysis process (step S204), or may be executed after exiting the subroutine of the command analysis process.

[8-2. Command transmission process]
FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a command transmission process by the host control circuit 2100. The command transmission process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the sub-control main process described above. As shown in the figure, the host control circuit 2100 executes a message setting process when transmitting a control command (message) to each of the control circuits 204 to 207 (step S251). In this process, the host control circuit 2100 generates a message (effect designation information) based on the effect information obtained in the effect mode determination process, and temporarily stores the message in the direct buffer of the subwork RAM 2100a. Do. This message setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 55.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 executes the directory table registration process (step S252). In this process, the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of setting the corresponding direct table in a predetermined area of the subwork RAM 2100a based on the message stored in the direct buffer and the effect information. This direct table registration process will be described later with reference to FIG. 56.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 executes a message transmission process (step S253). In this process, the host control circuit 2100 reads the message stored in the direct buffer at a predetermined timing based on the direct table, and transmits the message to the predetermined control circuits 204 to 207. When this process is completed, the host control circuit 2100 ends the command transmission process. This message transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG. 57.

[8-2-1. Message setting process]
FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a message setting process by the host control circuit 2100. The message setting process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, the host control circuit 2100 sets the devices (control circuits 204 to 207) to be transmitted based on the effect information (step S261).

Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of setting the presence / absence of system operation (step S262).

Next, the host control circuit 2100 sets the stage information and each effect information (step S263).

Next, the host control circuit 2100 sets the notice pattern (step S264). As a result, the directory buffer stores a device (control circuits 204 to 207) as a transmission destination, the presence / absence of system operation, stage information, each effect information, and a message indicating a notice pattern. When this process is completed, the host control circuit 2100 ends the message setting process.

[8-2-2. Direct table registration process]
FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a directory table registration process by the host control circuit 2100. The directory table registration process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of registering a single table (step S271).

Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of registering the master table based on the effect information determined in the effect mode determination process (step S272).

Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of registering the slave table used in the master table (step S273).

Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of registering the directory table corresponding to the message set in the directory buffer as the slave table (step S274). When this process is completed, the host control circuit 2100 ends the directory table registration process.

[8-2-3. Message sending process]
FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a message transmission process by the host control circuit 2100. The message transmission process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, if a message is registered in the direction buffer corresponding to the direction table, the host control circuit 2100 will perform each device (control circuits 204 to 207) according to the "destination device" set in the message. A process of transmitting a message to is performed (step S281).

Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of discarding an unnecessary directory table after the message transmission is completed (step S282). When this process is completed, the host control circuit 2100 ends the message transmission process.

[9. Expandability of the game machine according to this embodiment]
As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the jackpot probability, the reach probability, the fluctuation time of the special symbol, and the selection rate of the main symbol (number of rounds, probability variation inrush rate, time reduction) are shortened according to the set value. The inrush rate) was changed, but it is not always necessary to change all of them according to the set value, and only one of these may be changed or a plurality of them may be changed according to the set value.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed in the normal symbol display unit 71 is in a predetermined mode (a mode of "normal hit"), the normal electric accessory 46 is predetermined. It changes from the closed state to the open state only for the period of. Therefore, the player may be notified of the timing when the ordinary electric accessory 46 is changed from the closed state to the open state and the timing when the normal electric accessory 46 is changed from the open state to the closed state (that is, the launch timing of the game ball). In this case, the frequency of notifying the launch timing of the game ball may be changed according to the set value (the higher the set value, the higher the frequency of notifying the launch timing).

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the backup clear process (for example, step S39) is performed, the data stored in the general work area of the work area of the main RAM 103 is cleared. Since this backup clear process is always performed even when the setting change process (step S24) is executed, when the backup clear process is performed, the data stored in the general work area of the work area of the main RAM 103 is always performed. Is cleared. However, instead of this, the clear address range of the main RAM 103 in which the data is cleared by the backup clear process performed when the setting change process is executed and the backup clear process performed without executing the setting change process is set. You may make them different. For example, after the jackpot game state ends, the game is set to a high-probability game state until a predetermined number of games are executed (until the special symbol is displayed in a variable number of times), and the game state is low after the execution of the predetermined number of games is completed. In a pachinko game machine (so-called "ST machine") that shifts to the stochastic game state, when the pachinko game machine is controlled to the high probability game state (before the execution of a predetermined number of games is completed), the setting change process is performed. When the backup clear process is performed without the above, the probability change flag is set to OFF, and when the backup clear process is performed along with the execution of the setting change process, the probability change flag is set to ON (the rest of the high probability game state). You may try to keep a memory of the number of games). Furthermore, when the backup clear process is performed along with the execution of the setting change process, when the same setting value as the previous time is set, the ON setting of the probability change flag is continued, and when the setting value is different from the previous time. May set the probability change flag to OFF.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in each round game in the big hit game state, the big winning opening 540 is in the open state when the count of the game balls winning in the big winning opening 540 reaches 10. When either of the conditions when the time reaches 30 sec is satisfied, the closed state is established. Therefore, in each round game in the big hit game state, the condition that the big winning opening 540 is changed from the open state to the closed state may be changed according to the set value. For example, a plurality of conditions for changing the large winning opening 540 from the open state to the closed state are prepared (for example, a plurality of different expected values of the number of game balls that can be won by the large winning opening 540 during one round). (Prepare conditions), and by changing the conditions according to the set value, the higher the set value, the easier it is to select the condition with the higher expected value. As a specific example, it is considered that the opening time of the large winning opening 540 in the round game is determined by lottery according to the set value so that the higher the setting value, the longer the opening time of the large winning opening 540 is likely to be. Be done. In addition, by changing the count of the game balls in which the large winning opening 540 is closed from the open state in the round game according to the set value, the higher the set value, the more the number of game balls to the large winning opening 540 is likely to increase. It is also possible to make it.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the normal symbol displayed as stopped is in the normal hit mode, the normal electric accessory 46 is changed from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period, but is normally electric. By making the time (opening time) in which the accessory 46 is in the open state different according to the set value, the higher the set value, the longer the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 46 may be.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot is a jackpot in which the probability change flag is turned on as in Special Figure 1-2 and Special Figure 1-4, the next jackpot game is executed after the jackpot game state ends. The high-probability gaming state continues until the game is played, but it is not always limited to this, and when the game ball is won at a specific timing (for example, the first starting port 420 and the second starting port 440, the variable display of the special symbol is suspended. At that time, when the variable display of the special symbol is started), a transition lottery for whether or not to shift from the high-probability gaming state to the low-probability gaming state may be executed. In this case, the transition probability from the high-probability gaming state to the low-probability gaming state differs according to the set value, so that the higher the setting value, the higher the continuation probability of the high-probability gaming state (from the high-probability gaming state to the low-probability gaming state). (Lower the probability of transition to). In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, a setting check process (step S72, step S82) is performed when a game ball is won in the first starting port 420 and the second starting port 440. This setting check is performed. When it is determined that the process is not normal (NO in step S721), the result of the transition lottery is also cleared in the backup clear process (step S2420) by executing the setting change process (step S24) (the probability change flag is also turned off). To be set).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the jackpot probability, the reach probability, the fluctuation time of the special symbol, and the selection rate of the main symbol (number of rounds, probability variation inrush rate, time reduction inrush rate) are changed according to the set value. Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above has been described, the provision of setting differences is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and some configurations may be changed. An example of another extension with a partial configuration changed will be described below. The configurations not particularly mentioned in the description of other extended examples below are the same as the configurations of the present embodiment, but in the following, except for the step numbers, each member such as the main CPU is intentionally assigned a reference numeral. Not done.

[9-1. Expansion example 1]
In the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 1, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, the jackpot gaming state ends, and then the high-probability game is started until the next jackpot gaming state is started. A so-called "probability variation loop machine" in which the state continues will be described as an example. In this extended example 1, an upper limit is set for the number of times the jackpot gaming state and the high-probability gaming state are repeatedly executed (hereinafter referred to as "loop count"), and when the number of loops reaches this upper limit, the jackpot gaming state ends. In addition to controlling the later gaming state to a low-probability gaming state, the upper limit of the number of loops (hereinafter referred to as "limiter number") can be different depending on the set value (such a gaming machine is a "limiter"). Also called "machine"). This will be described with reference to FIG. 58. Note that FIG. 58 is a table showing an example of the selection rate of the number of limiters in the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 1 for each set value.

The main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the expansion example 1 has a loop count checking means for checking the number of loops when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, and a limiter count for drawing a limiter count when the loop count is 0. The lottery means, the loop number counting means that increments the number of loops when the number of loops is within the specified range (within the range of 1 to 4 in this example), and the number of loops is the specified value (5 in the limiter upper limit in this example) If this is the case, the game state control means for controlling the game state after the jackpot game state ends to a low probability state, and the loop number reset means for resetting the loop number when the loop number is a specified value are provided. The limiter number lottery may be performed at any timing when it is determined that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, at the start of the jackpot game state, during the jackpot game state, or at the end of the jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 58, in setting 1, the number of limiters is determined, for example, once with a probability of 25%, twice with a probability of 30%, and three times with a probability of 25%. There is a 15% chance that it will be decided 4 times, and a 5% chance that it will be decided 5 times. In setting 2, for example, the number of limiters is determined once with a probability of 25%, determined twice with a probability of 25%, determined three times with a probability of 25%, and determined four times with a probability of 20%. It is decided to be 5 times with a probability of 5%. In setting 3, the number of limiters is determined, for example, once with a probability of 15%, determined twice with a probability of 25%, determined three times with a probability of 25%, and four times with a probability of 20%. It is decided to be 5 times with a 15% probability. In setting 4, the number of limiters is determined, for example, once with a 15% probability, twice with a 20% probability, three times with a 25% probability, and four times with a 25% probability. It is decided to be 5 times with a 15% probability. In setting 5, for example, the number of limiters is determined once with a probability of 5%, determined twice with a probability of 20%, determined three times with a probability of 25%, and determined four times with a probability of 25%. It is decided to be 5 times with a 25% probability. In setting 6, the number of limiters is determined, for example, once with a 5% probability, twice with a 10% probability, three times with a 25% probability, and four times with a 30% probability. It is decided to be 5 times with a 25% probability. That is, the higher the set value, the higher the expectation that the number of limiters will be determined.

In this way, by making the expectation for the number of limiters different according to the set value so that the higher the set value, the more the jackpot game state and the high probability gaming state can be repeated, one chance (big hit). It is possible to make the amount of prize balls given to the player different according to the set value (an opportunity until the player is controlled to the low probability game state when he wins once). Moreover, although the expected value for the number of limiters differs depending on the set value, since the number of limiters is determined by lottery, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing the set value depending on the number of limiters. It has become.

In the above extended example 1, the number of limiters is determined by lottery according to the installation value, but the lottery is not always essential. For example, although there is a concern that the set value may be guessed by the player, the setting value is set. The number of limiters may be uniquely determined according to the set value, such as 3 times for 1 and 2, 4 times for settings 3 and 4, and 5 times for settings 5 and 6.

The number of limiters described above may be set separately for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, or may be set for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. good.

For example, when the number of limiters described above is set separately for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, if the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is a jackpot, the number of first limiters for the first special symbol Is determined, and when the jackpot game state based on the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is controlled during the loop, the number of loops for the first special symbol is incremented. However, when the jackpot game state is controlled based on the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol during the above loop, the number of loops for the first special symbol is not incremented and the number of second limiters for the second special symbol is not incremented. To determine. In this case, the loop may be terminated (controlled to a low-probability gaming state) when either the first limiter count or the second limiter count reaches the limiter count, or the first limiter count and the second limiter count may be terminated. The loop may be terminated when both the number of times and the number of times reach the limiter number.

Further, for example, when the number of times of the above limiter is determined for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the result of the jackpot determination regardless of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol. When is a big hit, the number of limiters is determined, and during the loop, when the jackpot game state is controlled based on the result of the big hit determination regardless of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the loop Increment the number of times. Then, when the number of loops reaches the number of limiters, the loop ends.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine of the above-mentioned expansion example 1 is a so-called probabilistic loop machine, but it does not necessarily have to be a probabilistic loop machine. For example, the above technical idea is applied to a so-called "ST machine" pachinko gaming machine. You can also do it. The "ST machine" controls the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends to a high-probability gaming state without fail or based on a predetermined lottery result, and the high-probability gaming state is referred to as a predetermined number of times (hereinafter referred to as "ST number"). It is a pachinko gaming machine that continues until the variable display of the special symbol (referred to as) is performed, and when the variable display of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times, the high-probability gaming state is terminated and the low-probability gaming state is controlled. Even with such an "ST machine", the degree of expectation for the number of limiters can be changed according to the set value. That is, the higher the set value, the more the jackpot gaming state and the high-probability gaming state can be repeated, so that one chance (the chance of being controlled to the low-probability gaming state when one jackpot is won). It is possible to make the amount of prize balls given to the player different according to the set value.

In the so-called "ST machine", the "ST number" can be set to a predetermined number (for example, 70 times), but the ST number can be changed according to the set value. .. For example, the main CPU of the "ST machine" can determine the number of STs by lottery so that the expected value of the number of STs determined according to the set value is different. As a specific example, the expected value of the number of STs determined by the lottery is 60 times in setting 1, 63 times in setting 2, 66 times in setting 3, 69 times in setting 4, 72 times in setting 5, and setting 6 By setting the number to 75, the higher the set value, the higher the expected value of the number of STs. However, it is not essential to determine the number of STs by lottery, and the number of STs may be uniquely determined according to the set value. When the number of STs is different depending on the set value, it is preferable that the number of time reductions is common to all the set values. For example, when the expected value of the number of STs or the number of STs is 60 times in setting 1, 63 times in setting 2, 66 times in setting 3, 69 times in setting 4, 72 times in setting 5, and 75 times in setting 6. , It is conceivable to set the number of time reductions to, for example, 60 times, which is common to all settings. Then, the sub CPU performs an effect of grasping that the game is in a high probability gaming state until the number of STs reaches a certain number of games (for example, 60 games) on, for example, the display device 16, and when the number of STs reaches a certain number of games, Regardless of whether or not the game is in the high-probability gaming state, it is preferable to perform an effect that makes it difficult to grasp the high-probability gaming state, for example, on a liquid crystal display device. As a result, it is possible to make the ST number of times and the expected value of the ST number of times different according to the set value while preventing the player from detecting the set value.

Further, also in the pachinko gaming machine of the expansion example 1, a setting check process (step S72, step S82) is performed, for example, when a game ball is won in the first starting port and the second starting port. Then, when it is determined that the setting check process is not normal (NO in step S721), even during the loop (that is, when the jackpot gaming state and the high probability gaming state are repeatedly executed), The loop count is also cleared in the backup clear process (step S2420) by executing the setting change process (step S24) without the loop count reaching the limiter count (the probability change flag is also set to OFF).

[9-2. Expansion example 2-1]
The pachinko gaming machine of Expansion Example 2 has a specific area in which a specific mouth is provided. This specific area is partitioned from the flow-down area of the game ball by, for example, an accessory, and it is usually difficult (or impossible) for the game ball to enter the specific area. In addition to the big hit, a small hit is also prepared as a result of the big hit determination of the special symbol.

Specifically, the main CPU makes a big hit determination of a special symbol with a big hit probability determined according to a set value, and makes a small hit winning determination when the result of the big hit determination is a loss. Then, when the result of the small hit winning determination is a small hit, the small hit game is executed. That is, the big hit is a hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device, but the small hit is not a hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device.

Further, in the extended example 2, in the normal gaming state such as the non-time saving game state in which the time saving flag is set to OFF, the first special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port and the second Of the second special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port, the first special symbol game is mainly played. On the other hand, in, for example, a probabilistic time-saving game state in which the time-saving flag is set to ON, the second special symbol game is mainly played among the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. Further, in the second special symbol game, when the result of the big hit determination is a loss, a small hit is won with a predetermined probability. When the result of the big hit determination in the first special symbol game is a loss, it is not necessary to perform the small hit winning determination.

Further, when the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol performed based on the entry (acceptance) of the game ball into the starting port is a small hit, the main CPU operates a predetermined movable piece to close the specific area. Based on the small hit game execution means for executing the small hit game and the game ball winning a prize in the specific area which became the open mode by executing the small hit game, the payout / launch control circuit is used. It is provided with a payout means for paying out a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of game balls as prize balls.

Further, in the extended example 2, the number of time reductions is set to, for example, 5 times, and a specific port is provided in the specific area. Then, for example, in a time-saving game state of 5 times, a normal hit occurs and the game ball wins a prize at the starting port. At this time, when it is detected that the game ball that has entered the specific area has further entered the specific mouth, the main CPU executes the jackpot game. Further, when the normal hit is not achieved in the time-saving game state of 5 times, the main CPU ends the time-saving game state and controls the non-time-saving game state. In the time-saving game state, the game is performed by right-handed firing toward the right side area of the game area, and in the non-time-saving game state, the game ball is fired toward the left side area of the game area. The game is played.

In such a pachinko game machine, in this extended example 2, at least the small hit probability in the second special symbol game is made different according to the set value, so that the second special symbol game is mainly performed, for example, a time-saving game state. In the above, it is possible to make the opening frequency of the specific area and thus the payout different according to the set value.

For example, the probability of a small hit is 1/9 for setting 1, 1/8 for setting 2, 1/7 for setting 3, 1/6 for setting 4, 1/5 for setting 5, and setting 6. To make it a quarter. In this case, the higher the setting value, the longer the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the higher the opening mode of the normal electric accessory, the more difficult it is for the game ball to win the starting opening. It becomes easier for the game ball to win a prize at the starting port. As a result, the higher the set value, the higher the frequency of winning the game ball in the specific area, and by extension, it is possible to provide a difference in the ball ejection speed according to the set value.

In this extended example 2, the probability change flag may be set to ON in the time-saving game state, but it is not always necessary to set the probability change flag to ON.

Further, if the game ball wins a prize at the first start port or the second start port while the main CPU is displaying the variation of the special symbol, the setting check process of step S72 or step S82 is also executed in this case as well. .. When the main CPU determines that the setting check process is not normal (NO in step S721), the game permission flag is turned off even if the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol in the variable display is a small hit. Executes abnormal processing. Therefore, even if the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol in the variable display is a small hit, when it is determined that the setting check process is not normal, the main CPU executes the small hit game based on the above small hit. Without doing so, the game permission flag is turned off and the error processing is executed. Therefore, the game permission flag is not set to ON unless various data are cleared in the backup clear process, including the fact that the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol displayed in the variable display is a small hit.

[9-3. Expansion example 2-2]
The pachinko gaming machine of Expansion Example 2-2 includes a first starting port and a second starting port. The main CPU makes a big hit determination of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "first special lottery") based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port, and wins the game ball to the second starting port. Based on this, the jackpot determination of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "second special lottery") is performed.

Further, the main CPU is in the first gaming state (for example, the probability change flag) in which the lottery of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "first special lottery") is mainly performed among the first special lottery and the second special lottery. A normal game state in which both the time saving flag and the time saving flag are set to OFF) and a second game state in which the second special symbol lottery (hereinafter referred to as "second special lottery") is mainly performed (for example, the probability change flag is ON). It is provided with a game state control means capable of controlling any one of a plurality of game states including (an advantageous game state in which the time saving flag is set to OFF). In this pachinko gaming machine, if a jackpot is won with a specific symbol in the first gaming state, the pachinko gaming machine is controlled to the second gaming state after the jackpot game is completed.

In addition, a normal gate is provided in the right side area of the game area, and when a game ball passes through the normal gate, a normal lottery is held. When the result of this ordinary lottery is a specific result (for example, ordinary hit), the main CPU opens a predetermined movable member (for example, an electric tulip), which facilitates winning of the game ball to the second starting port. Will be done. Therefore, when the game is played by firing the game ball toward the right side area of the game area, the second starting port is compared with the case where the game ball is fired toward the left side area of the game area and the game is played. The frequency of winning game balls is increased.

In the first special lottery, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of the first special symbol with a jackpot probability determined according to the set value, and when the result of this jackpot determination is a jackpot, a predetermined jackpot is used for a plurality of rounds. It is provided with a first jackpot game execution means for executing a jackpot game that is open over a number of times.

Further, in the second special lottery, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of the second special symbol with a jackpot probability determined according to the set value, and when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, a predetermined jackpot is opened. A second jackpot game execution means for executing a jackpot game that is open over a plurality of rounds is provided. Further, in the second special lottery, when the result of the big hit determination of the second special symbol is a loss, the main CPU makes a small hit winning determination, and when the result of the small hit winning determination is a small hit. It also has a small hit game execution means for executing a small hit game.

The jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the jackpot probability in the second special lottery are common. The jackpot probability in the first game state in which the probability change flag is set to OFF is, for example, 1/300 in setting 1, 1/290 in setting 2, 1/280 in setting 3, and 1/270 in setting 4. , Setting 5 is 1/260, and setting 6 is 1/250. Further, the jackpot probability in the second game state in which the probability change flag is set to ON is, for example, 1/30 in setting 1, 1/29 in setting 2, 1/28 in setting 3, and 27 minutes in setting 4. 1, setting 5 is 1/26, and setting 6 is 1/25.

When the result of the first special lottery is a big hit, the main CPU has the first big hit game execution means for executing the big hit game in which a predetermined big winning opening is opened for a plurality of rounds, and the result of the second special lottery. It has a second big hit game execution means for executing a big hit game in which a predetermined big winning opening is opened over a plurality of rounds when the big hit is made. Even if the big prize opening that is opened when the result of the first special lottery is a big hit and the big prize opening that is opened when the result of the second special lottery is a big hit are common big prize openings It may be good, or it may be a different big prize opening.

Further, the small hit probability in the first special lottery is 0 (common to settings 1 to 6) regardless of whether the probability variation flag is ON or OFF. Further, the small hit probability in the second special lottery is, for example, 1/9 for setting 1, 1/8 for setting 2, and 1/7 for setting 3, regardless of whether the probability variation flag is ON or OFF. , Setting 4 is 1/6, and setting 5 is 1/6. As described above, the small hit probability in the second special lottery differs depending on the set set value, but any set value is higher than the small hit probability in the first special lottery.

Further, the main CPU has a small hit game execution means for executing a small hit game when the result of the second special lottery is a small hit. The small hit game is a game in which the same large winning opening as the large winning opening opened when the result of the second special lottery is a big hit is opened. When a game ball wins a prize in this large winning opening, the payout / launch control circuit operates a payout device to control a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out as a prize. However, in the small hit game, since the number of game balls that can be won in the big prize opening is smaller than that in the big hit game, the degree of advantage for the player is lower in the small hit game than in the big hit game.

Further, as described above, the small hit probability in the first special lottery is 0. That is, when the result of the big hit determination of the first special symbol is a loss, the main CPU makes a small hit determination with a small hit probability of 0. However, instead of this, when the result of the big hit determination of the first special symbol is a loss, the main CPU may not perform the small hit determination itself.

The big hit is a hit that involves the operation of the condition device, but the small hit is not a hit that involves the operation of the condition device.

Further, the main CPU is based on the first special symbol variation display control means for displaying the variation of the first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port, and the winning of the game ball to the second starting port. The second special symbol variation display control means for displaying the variation of the second special symbol is provided. The first special symbol variation display control means changes and displays the first special symbol over a predetermined time, and then stops the first special symbol so that the result of the first special lottery is displayed. In addition, the second special symbol variation display control means stops the second special symbol so that the result of the second special lottery is displayed after the second special symbol is variablely displayed for a predetermined time.

The variation display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol variation display control means and the variation display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol variation display control means can be performed at the same timing. That is, if the game ball wins the second starting port while the variable display of the first special symbol is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port, the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. However, the variable display of the second special symbol is started. If the game ball wins the first starting port while the second special symbol is variablely displayed based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port, even if the second special symbol is variablely displayed. The variable display of the first special symbol is started.

Further, the average time of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol executed by the first special symbol variation display control means is almost the same between the case where the probability variation flag is ON and the case where the probability variation flag is OFF, but the second special symbol. The average time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol executed by the fluctuation display control means is remarkably different depending on whether the probability variation flag is ON or OFF. For example, the average time of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 10 sec in the first game state and 10 sec in the second game state, while the average time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 1000 sec in the first game state. It is set to 1 sec in the second game state. The special lottery (1st special lottery, 2nd special lottery) is performed when the variable display of the special symbols (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol) is started, but the result of the special lottery is displayed. Is when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. Therefore, when the game ball wins the second starting port in the first game state, although the second special lottery has already been performed, it takes a considerable amount of time for the result of the second special lottery to be displayed. It becomes.

In this way, in the first game state in which the probability change flag is set to OFF, even if the game ball is fired toward, for example, the right side area of the game area and the game ball wins the second starting port, the second special symbol It takes time until the variable display of is stopped. Moreover, since the second special symbol is variablely displayed in any one of a plurality of patterns having different fluctuation times, the second special symbol is temporarily stopped in a manner indicating a small hit (it may be a small hit). Even if the big winning opening is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 1.8 seconds), it is difficult to grasp the timing when the second special symbol is confirmed as a small hit. Therefore, it is also difficult to perform so-called aiming, such as having a game ball win in the large winning opening aiming at the timing when the second special symbol is determined to be a small hit. Further, in the first game state, when the game ball is fired toward, for example, the right side area of the game area, a warning sound is output from the speaker, for example, under the control of the sub CPU. Therefore, in the first game state, the game is performed by firing the game ball toward, for example, the left side area of the game area. On the other hand, in the second game state, not only the winning of the game ball to the second starting port is facilitated through the normal lottery by passing the game ball through the normal figure gate, but also the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is increased. Since it is as short as 1 sec and in the second special lottery, a small hit is won with a probability higher than 1/10 regardless of the set value, so that a game in which a game ball is launched toward, for example, the right side area of the game area is Will be done.

The average time (for example, 1000 sec) of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the first game state is, for example, 50 times or more the average time (for example, 10 sec) of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the first game state. Is preferable, but it is preferably at least 10 times or more.

The sub CPU is a decorative symbol variation display control means for controlling the variation display of the decorative symbol to be displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display device in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). To be equipped. However, in the first game state, even if the game ball wins the second starting port, the decorative symbol variation display control means does not display the variation of the decorative symbol in a conspicuous manner in synchronization with the second special symbol. 1 When the game ball wins a prize at the starting port, the variation display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the first special symbol is performed in a conspicuous manner.

To elaborate on the example of the above "conspicuous aspect", the liquid crystal display device has, for example, a left symbol (first symbol), a middle symbol (second symbol), and a right symbol (third symbol) at substantially the center of the display area. It is possible to display the result of the special lottery by changing the display. Further, in a small area of, for example, one of the four corners of the display area, a fourth symbol (for example, ○ or △) that can be displayed in a variable manner (for example, blinking) in synchronization with each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Shape) can be displayed. Since the ratio of the first to third symbols occupying the display area is extremely large compared to the ratio of the fourth symbol occupying the display area, the player's gaze is closer to the first to third symbols than the fourth symbol. It will be suitable. Then, for example, in the first game state, when the game ball wins a prize at the second starting port, the sub CPU does not change the first to third symbols and displays only the fourth symbol in a variable manner, while the sub CPU displays the fourth symbol in a variable manner. 1 When a game ball wins a prize at the starting port, the 1st to 3rd symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the 4th symbol is also displayed in a variable manner. In this way, in the first game state, even if the game ball wins at the second start port, the variable display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the second special symbol is not conspicuously displayed, and the game ball is at the first start port. It is possible to realize that the variable display of the decorative symbol that is synchronized with the first special symbol is performed in a conspicuous manner when the prize is won.

According to the pachinko gaming machine of the above-mentioned expansion example 2-2, in the first gaming state, even if the gaming ball wins the second starting port, the result of the second special lottery is hardly displayed, but the second gaming state. Then, not only the winning of the game ball to the second starting port is facilitated, but also the average time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is as short as 1 sec. Moreover, in the second game state, when the game ball wins the second starting port, the probability that the result of the second special lottery will be a small hit (1/9 to 1/4 depending on the setting) is a big hit. Since it is higher than the probability of becoming (1 / 30th to 1 / 25th depending on the setting), the big winning opening is frequently opened by the small hit game, and the time saving flag is not set (that is, the normal lottery). It is possible to increase the chances that the game ball as a prize will be paid out (without increasing the execution frequency of). Moreover, since the probability that the result of the second special lottery will be a small hit differs depending on the set setting, even if the big hit game is not executed, the ball is ejected according to the set set value. Can be made different.

Further, if the game ball wins a prize at the first start port or the second start port while the main CPU is displaying the variation of the special symbol, the setting check process of step S72 or step S82 is also executed in this case as well. .. Therefore, the main CPU performs the setting check process of step S72 or step S82 even when the game ball wins the first starting port during the variation display of the second special symbol, for example, in the second game state. Then, when the main CPU determines that the setting check process is not normal (NO in step S721), it turns off the game permission flag and executes the abnormal time process. That is, in the second game state, even if the result of the big hit determination for the second special symbol being displayed in the variable display is a small hit, when it is determined that the setting check process is not normal, the main CPU performs the above small hit. The game permission flag is turned off and the abnormal time processing is executed without executing the small hit game based on the hit. Therefore, even if the result of the big hit determination for the second special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner in the second game state is a small hit, the information indicating that the second game state is included and the information indicating that the second special symbol is a small hit are included. Unless various data are cleared in the backup clear process, the game permission flag will not be set to ON.

[9-4. Expansion example 3]
The pachinko gaming machine of the expansion example 3 is a pachinko gaming machine having two routes for being controlled to a jackpot gaming state, and therefore has a specific area provided with a specific opening. This specific area is partitioned from the flow-down area of the game ball by, for example, an accessory, and it is usually difficult (or impossible) for the game ball to enter the specific area. In addition to the big hit, a small hit is also prepared as a result of the big hit determination of the special symbol.

Specifically, the main CPU makes a big hit determination of a special symbol with a big hit probability determined according to a set value, and makes a small hit winning determination when the result of the big hit determination is a loss. Then, when the result of the small hit winning determination is a small hit, the small hit game is executed. That is, the big hit is a hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device, but the small hit is not a hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device.

Further, in the extended example 3, in the normal gaming state such as the non-time saving game state in which the time saving flag is set to OFF, the first special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port and the second Of the second special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port, the first special symbol game is mainly played. On the other hand, in, for example, a probabilistic time-saving game state in which the time-saving flag is set to ON, the second special symbol game is mainly played among the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. Further, in the second special symbol game, when the result of the big hit determination is a loss, a small hit is won with a predetermined probability. When the result of the big hit determination in the first special symbol game is a loss, it is not necessary to perform the small hit winning determination.

Further, when the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol performed based on the entry (acceptance) of the game ball into the starting port is a small hit, the main CPU operates a predetermined movable piece and operates the inside of the specific area. It is provided with a small hit game execution means for executing a small hit game that allows a game ball to enter the game. When the game ball enters the inside of the specific area due to the operation of the predetermined movable piece in this way and the game ball that has entered the inside of the specific area is detected to enter (accept) the specific port, the main The CPU controls the jackpot game state. That is, when the result of the jackpot determination process performed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port is a jackpot, the main CPU performs a first jackpot game in which a round game for opening the jackpot is performed over a plurality of rounds. Based on the first big hit game control means for controlling the state and the game ball entering the specific mouth when the small hit game is executed, the round game for operating the predetermined movable piece is performed over a plurality of rounds. It is provided with a second big hit game control means for controlling the second big hit game state to be performed.

In such a pachinko gaming machine, in this expansion example 3, the ease of winning a winning ball at the starting port (for example, the execution frequency of a small hit game and the opening pattern of an ordinary electric accessory) is set as a set value. It is different according to. In addition, also in this expansion example 3, the result of the normal symbol determination performed based on the fact that the main CPU detects the passage to the gate through which the game ball can pass when the player hits the right is a normal hit. Occasionally, the normally electric accessory is controlled from the closed state to the open state. When the ordinary electric accessory is opened, it becomes easy to win a game ball at the starting port. As a method of making the execution frequency of the small hit game different according to the set value, for example, if the probability of normal hit in the normal symbol determination is different according to the set value, or if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is different according to the set value. It can be realized by letting it go.

As a method of making the ease of winning a game ball to the starting port different according to the set value, a method of making the probability of normal hit in the normal symbol determination different according to the set value will be described as an example.

For example, the probability of normal hit is 1/60 for setting 1, 1/50 for setting 2, 1/40 for setting 3, 1/30 for setting 4, 1/20 for setting 5, and setting 6. Is 1/10. In this case, the higher the setting value, the longer the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the higher the opening mode of the normal electric accessory, the more difficult it is for the game ball to win the starting opening. It becomes easier for the game ball to win a prize at the starting port. As a result, the higher the set value, the higher the execution frequency of the small hit game, and by extension, the opportunity to be controlled to the big hit game state by the second big hit game control means is promoted. In this way, it is possible to provide a difference in the ball ejection speed according to the set value.

Also in this extended example 3, if the game ball wins a prize at the first start port or the second start port while the in-CPU 101 is displaying the variation of the special symbol, the setting check process of step S72 or step S82 is performed. Will be executed. When the main CPU 101 determines that it is not normal in this setting check process (NO in step S721), the game permission flag is turned off even if the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol being displayed in the variation is a small hit. Executes abnormal processing. Therefore, even if the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol being displayed in the variable display is a small hit, the main CPU 101 executes the small hit game based on the small hit when it is determined that the setting check process is not normal. Without doing so, the game permission flag is turned off and the error processing is executed. Therefore, the game permission flag is not set to ON unless various data are cleared in the backup clear process, including the fact that the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol displayed in the variable display is a small hit.

[9-5. Expansion example 4]
In the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 4, even if the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, it is not immediately controlled to the jackpot game state by itself, but the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot. The condition device is operated based on the above, and the accessory continuous operation device is operated based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed (or entered) a predetermined area on the premise that the condition device has been operated. Hereinafter, description will be made with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example of a mode in which the game ball passes through the accessory continuously operating right gate, and FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of a mode in which the game ball passes through the accessory continuously operating left gate.

As shown in FIGS. 59 and 60, the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 4 includes a bonus continuous operation left gate 1100 and a bonus continuous operation right gate 1110 in the game area. Further, the distribution device 1120 capable of distributing the game ball flowing down the game area to either the accessory continuous operation left gate 1100 or the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110 is the accessory continuous operation gate 1100, It is located above 1110.

The accessory continuous operation left gate 1100 and the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110 are provided with a left gate sensor and a right gate sensor (neither shown) capable of detecting the passage of a game ball, respectively. The left gate sensor and the right gate sensor are normally disabled from the passage detection of the game ball, and are enabled based on the activation of the condition device. Further, the left gate sensor and the right gate sensor are activated based on the activation of the condition device, and then the game ball moves one of the accessory continuous operation left gate 1100 and the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110. It is invalidated based on the detection that it has passed.

When the left gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball through the accessory continuous operation left gate 1100, the main CPU controls, for example, the 8R jackpot game state in which a round game of 8 rounds is executed. Further, when the right gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball through the character continuous operation right gate 1110, the main CPU is in a 2R jackpot game state (selection rate 50%) in which a two-round round game is executed, and 16 rounds. The 16R jackpot game state (selection rate 50%) in which the round game is executed is determined by lottery, and the jackpot game state determined in the lottery is controlled.

It should be noted that the big hit is when the left gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball through the accessory continuously operating left gate 1100 and when the right gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball through the accessory continuously operating right gate 1110. The expected value of the prize ball amount to be paid out in the game state is the same.

Further, the game ball that has passed through the character continuous operation left gate 1100 or the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110 flows down the game area as it is, but instead, it is discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine from the out port. It may be configured as follows.

The distribution device 1120 distributes the game ball that has reached the upper part of the distribution device 1120 to either the accessory continuous operation left gate 1100 or the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110 by a regular operation. In the first posture in which the distribution device 1120 is tilted to the left, the game ball easily passes through the right gate 1110 (see FIG. 59), and in the second posture in which the distribution device 1120 is tilted to the right, the game ball is useful. Object continuous operation It is easy to pass through the left gate 1100 (see FIG. 60).

In the extended example 4, the ease of passing the game ball is different between the accessory continuous operation left gate 1100 and the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110 according to the set value. For example, in setting 1, the operation of the sorting device 1120 is repeated with the first posture of 0.5 seconds and the second posture of 1.5 seconds, and in setting 2, the first posture is 0.7 seconds and the second posture is 1.3. The operation of repeating seconds, the operation of repeating the first posture of 0.9 seconds and the second posture of 1.1 seconds in setting 3, and the operation of repeating the first posture of 1.1 seconds and the second posture of 0.9 seconds in setting 4. Operation, setting 5 is an operation of repeating the first posture of 1.3 seconds and the second posture of 0.7 seconds, and setting 6 is an operation of repeating the first posture of 1.5 seconds and the second posture of 0.5 seconds. Therefore, it is possible to change the mode of the jackpot game state according to the set value.

In the extended example 4, the left gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball through the accessory continuously operating left gate 1100, and the right gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball through the accessory continuously operating right gate 1110. The expected value of the prize ball amount to be paid out in the jackpot game state is the same as when it is done. That is, although it is possible to change the mode of the jackpot game state according to the set value, there is no difference in the amount of prize balls paid out in the jackpot game state according to the set value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the left gate sensor Is paid out in the jackpot game state when the player detects the passage of the game ball through the character continuous operation left gate 1100 and when the right gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball through the character continuous operation right gate 1110. The expected value of the prize ball amount may be different. For example, when the left gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball through the accessory continuous operation left gate 1100, either the 2R jackpot game state (selection rate 70%) or the 16R jackpot game state (selection rate 30%). Is determined by a lottery performed with the above selection rate, and when the right gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the right gate 1110, which is the continuous operation of the accessory, the 2R jackpot game state (selection rate 30%). It is also possible to decide which of the 16R jackpot game state (selection rate 70%) is to be executed by the lottery performed at the above selection rate. In this case, it is possible to make a difference in the amount of prize balls paid out in the jackpot game state according to the set value, and the higher the set value, the larger the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls is controlled to the higher expected value in the jackpot game state. It is possible to increase the possibility of

Further, in the extended example 4, when the game ball passes through any one of the two gates (the accessory continuous operation left gate 1100 and the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110) under the condition that the condition device is operated, the accessory continuous operation is performed. The device is configured to operate and be controlled to a jackpot game state. However, even if the condition device is activated based on the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol performed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port, the game ball can be used in either of the above two gates. A game ball may win a prize at the starting port before passing. In this case, under the condition that the condition device is activated but the game ball has not yet passed through either of the above two gates, the main CPU 101 performs a setting check process (for example, based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port). (See step S72 in FIG. 42) may be executed, and it may be determined that the setting check process is not normal (for example, NO in step S721 in FIG. 43). In this case, even if the condition device is activated, the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S722 described later), making it impossible to proceed with the game.

Further, in the extended example 4, two gates (continuous operation of the accessory) in which the continuous operation device of the accessory operates when the passage of the game ball is detected on the premise that the condition device is operating below the distribution device 1120. The left gate 1100 and the right gate 1110) are provided, but the one provided below the distribution device 1120 is not necessarily limited to the continuous operation gate of the accessory, for example, the starting port and the general winning opening. Is also good. That is, in this case, the distribution device 1120 uses the game ball that has reached above the distribution device 1120 by a regular operation to have a start port that triggers a jackpot determination of a special symbol and a general prize that does not trigger a jackpot determination. Sort to one of the mouths. Then, the operation of the distribution device 1120 is repeated, for example, in setting 1, 0.5 seconds in the first posture and 1.5 seconds in the second posture, and in setting 2, 0.7 seconds in the first posture and 1 in the second posture. The operation of repeating 3 seconds, the operation of repeating the first posture of 0.9 seconds and the second posture of 1.1 seconds in setting 3, and the operation of repeating the first posture of 1.1 seconds and the second posture of 0.9 seconds in setting 4. In setting 5, the first posture is 1.3 seconds and the second posture is 0.7 seconds, and in setting 6, the first posture is 1.5 seconds and the second posture is 0.5 seconds. By doing so, it is possible to make the winning rate at the starting port different according to the set value. Moreover, according to such a pachinko gaming machine, although it is possible to make the winning rate at the starting port different according to the set value, regardless of the set value, at the timing of launching the game ball by the player. It is possible to have the fun of being able to aim for a prize at the starting port.

[9-6. Expansion example 5]
The pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 5 does not make the data related to the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine different according to the set value, but makes it possible to change the game characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine according to the set value. .. In this extended example 5, the setting value is configured to be set to any one of the five stages of setting 1 to setting 5, but the setting value does not necessarily have to be five stages, and may be a plurality of stages. Can be determined arbitrarily.

Specifically, when the set value is set to setting 1, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of, for example, a probability special symbol of 1/99, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, 5 rounds. Control the jackpot game state. That is, when the set value is set to setting 1, the jackpot probability is relatively high, less than 1/100, but the amount of prize balls paid out in one jackpot game state is relatively small, so-called Amadeji. It becomes possible to execute a game in a game-like manner.

Further, when the set value is set to the setting 2, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of a probability special symbol of, for example, 1/300, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, 12 rounds (for example, a ball is ejected). It is controlled to a jackpot game state (about 1500 pieces). That is, when the set value is set to setting 2, the jackpot probability is 1/300, and the amount of prize balls paid out in one jackpot game state is about 1500, which is a game in a general game called Digipachi. Can be executed. Then, in this gaming machine, the main CPU controls the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends to the high-probability gaming state, and when a predetermined period elapses, the high-probability gaming state ends and becomes the low-probability gaming state. Control. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 2, it becomes possible to execute a game with a so-called ST machine.

Further, when the set value is set to the setting 3, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of a probability special symbol of, for example, 1/300, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, 12 rounds (for example, a ball is ejected). It is controlled to a jackpot game state (about 1500 pieces). That is, when the set value is set to setting 2, the jackpot probability is 1/300, and the amount of prize balls paid out in one jackpot game state is about 1500, which is a game in a general game called Digipachi. Can be executed. Then, in this game machine, when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the main CPU determines whether or not to set the probability variation flag ON by using, for example, a symbol random number, and when the probability variation flag is set ON, the jackpot game The game state after the state ends is controlled to a high-probability game state until the next big hit game state is executed. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 3, it is possible to execute a game with a game property called a so-called probabilistic loop machine.

Further, when the set value is set to the setting 4, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of a probability special symbol of, for example, 1/300, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, 12 rounds (for example, a ball is ejected). It is controlled to a jackpot game state (about 1500 pieces). That is, when the set value is set to setting 2, the jackpot probability is 1/300, and the amount of prize balls paid out in one jackpot game state is about 1500, which is a game in a general game called Digipachi. Can be executed. Then, in this game machine, when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the main CPU determines whether or not to set the probability variation flag ON by using, for example, a symbol random number, and when the probability variation flag is set ON, the jackpot game The game state after the state ends is controlled to a high-probability game state until the next big hit game state is executed. However, an upper limit is set on the number of times that the jackpot game state and the high-probability gaming state are repeatedly executed (the above-mentioned "loop count"), and when the number of loops reaches this upper limit, the main CPU ends the jackpot game state. The game state is controlled to a low probability game state. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 4, it is possible to execute a game with a so-called limiter machine. In the above game characteristics, if the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends is the high-probability gaming state, the high-probability gaming state is continued until the next jackpot gaming state is executed. The present invention is not limited to this, and a so-called ST machine may be used in which the high-probability gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is completed is terminated when a predetermined period elapses and is controlled to the low-probability gaming state.

Further, when the set value is set to the setting 5, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of, for example, a probability special symbol of 1/300, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, 12 rounds (for example, a ball is ejected). It is controlled to a jackpot game state (about 1500 pieces). That is, when the set value is set to setting 2, the jackpot probability is 1/300, and the amount of prize balls paid out in one jackpot game state is about 1500, which is a game in a general game called Digipachi. Can be executed. Then, in this game machine, the main CPU always or with a certain probability sets the probability change flag ON when the jackpot game state ends, and when the probability change flag is set ON, the game state after the jackpot game state ends. , Control to high probability game state. Further, in the high-probability game state, the main CPU performs a game state transition lottery when determining a big hit of a special symbol, and when it is determined to shift the game state in the game state transition lottery, the probability change flag is set to OFF. , Execute control to shift from the high-probability gaming state to the low-probability gaming state. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 5, it is possible to execute the game in a game-like manner in which the lottery for shifting to the low-probability gaming state is performed in the high-probability gaming state.

In this way, in the pachinko game machine of the extended example 5, the game characteristics of the pachinko game machine can be changed according to the set value, instead of the specifications such as the jackpot probability, and the pachinko machine has a wide variety of game characteristics. It is possible to run the game with one machine.

In the above, setting 1 can execute a game with a so-called Amadeji game, setting 2 can execute a game with a so-called ST machine, and setting 3 can execute a so-called game. It is possible to execute a game with a game-like property called a probabilistic loop machine, and in setting 4, it is possible to execute a game with a game-like property called a so-called limiter machine, and in setting 5, it is low in a high-probability game state. Transition to a stochastic game state It is possible to execute a game in which a lottery is performed, but it is not essential to be able to execute all of these game characteristics according to a set value. However, it is preferable that the so-called ST machine and the so-called probabilistic loop machine can be switched and executed according to the set value. The so-called ST machine and the so-called probabilistic loop machine are both common in that they may be controlled to a high-probability gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, but the high-probability gaming state is It greatly differs depending on whether it continues until the next big hit game state or ends halfway. In this way, by making it possible to switch between two games that are similar at first glance but are substantially different, the manager of the game machine can use the pachinko game machine more widely. At the same time, it is possible to provide a pachinko game machine that can improve the interest.

[9-7. Other expansion examples]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can apply the present invention to all gaming machines in which a game is played using a game medium and benefits are given based on the result of the game. That is, not only is the game played by the game medium being launched or thrown in by the physical movement of the player, and the game medium is paid out based on the result of the game, but the main control circuit 100 itself is The game medium owned by the player may be electromagnetically managed to enable a game performed by circulating the enclosed game ball or a game performed without a medal. Further, it may be a game medium management device that is attached (connected) to the main control circuit 100 and manages the game medium to electromagnetically manage the game medium owned by the player.

When the game medium management device connected to the main control circuit 100 manages the game medium management device, the game medium management device has a ROM and an RWM (or RAM) and is provided in the game machine, and is an external game (not shown). It is connected to a two-way communication function via a medium handling device and a predetermined interface, and provides a game medium necessary for a game medium lending operation (that is, a player performs a game medium loading operation). Operation) or when a winning combination related to the payout of the game medium is won (the winning combination is established), the payout action of the game medium (that is, the payout of the game medium to the player is performed, and the necessary game medium is acquired. It suffices that the operation of electromagnetically recording the game medium used for the game can be performed. Further, the game media management device not only manages the actual number of game media, but also displays the number of game media to be held on the front surface of the pachinko game machine 1, for example, based on the management result of the number of game media. A game medium number display device (not shown) may be provided, and the number of game media displayed on the possessed game medium number display device may be managed. That is, the game media management device may be capable of recording and displaying the total number of game media that the player can use for the game by an electromagnetic method.

Further, in this case, the game medium management device has a performance that allows the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to an external game medium handling device, and also has a game. In addition to the case where a person directly operates the game medium, the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and an external connection terminal plate (not shown) is provided between the device and an external game medium handling device. In some cases, it is desirable that the player has the ability to transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media only through the external connection terminal plate.

In addition to the above, the game machine is provided with a lending operation means, a return (payment) operation means, and an external connection terminal plate that can be operated by the player, and the game medium handling device is provided with a slot for valuable value such as banknotes and a recording medium. (For example, IC card) insertion slot, non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money from mobile terminals, other various operation means such as lending operation means, return operation means, external connection terminal board on the game media handling device side It may be provided (neither is shown).

As a flow of the game at that time, for example, the player deposits valuable value to the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of any of the above lending operation means. Then, the number of game media corresponding to the valuable value subtracted from the game media handling device to the game media management device is increased. Then, the player plays a game, and if a game medium is required, the above operation is repeated. After that, a predetermined number of game media are acquired as a result of the game, and when the game is finished, the number of game media is transmitted from the game media management device to the game media handling device by operating one of the return operation means, and the game is played. The medium handling device discharges a recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. The game media management device clears the number of game media stored by itself when the number of game media is transmitted. The player takes the discharged recording medium to a prize counter or the like for exchanging prizes, or moves the game table to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another table.

In the above example, all the game media are transmitted to the game medium handling device, but only the number of game media desired by the player is transmitted on the game machine or the game medium handling device side, and the game medium possessed by the player is transmitted. It may be divided and processed. Further, not only the recording medium is discharged, but cash or a cash equivalent may be discharged, or the recording medium may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. Further, the game medium handling device may be capable of inserting a member recording medium of the game hall and storing the member recording medium in the member recording medium so that the game can be replayed at a later date.

Further, in the game machine or the game medium handling device, a lock operation for locking the game medium or valuable value data communication can be executed on the game medium handling device or the game medium management device by operating a predetermined operation means (not shown). May be good. In that case, information such as a one-time password that only the player can know may be set, or the player may be recorded by an imaging means provided in the game medium handling device.

Further, in the above, the case where the game medium management device is applied to the pachinko game machine is described, but the game medium management device is also used in the pachislot machine, the slot machine using the game ball, and the enclosed game machine. It can also be provided so that the player's game medium is managed.

In this way, by providing the game medium management device described above, the number of parts inside the game machine can be reduced as compared with the case where the game medium is physically used for the game, and the cost and manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced. Not only can it be reduced, but it can also prevent the player from coming into direct contact with the game medium, improving the game environment, reducing noise, and reducing the power consumption of the game machine by reducing the number of parts. It will also be. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts through the game medium and the slot and payout port of the game medium. That is, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of improving various environments surrounding the game machine.

In addition, a communication cable is used to transmit data on an enclosed game machine configured so that the game medium can be played without being discharged to the outside, and an increase / decrease in the game medium due to consumption, lending, and payout of the game medium to the game machine. When the present invention is applied to a game system having a game medium management device connected so as to be able to transmit and receive by an optical signal via an optical signal, the game system may be configured as follows.

The outline of the enclosed game machine will be described below. In the enclosed game machine, the launching device is located above the game area and launches a game ball as a game medium from above with respect to the game area. When the player operates the handle, the payout control circuit drives the ball feed solenoid, and the ball feed punch pushes the ball in the standby state toward the launch pad. As a result, the game ball moves to the launch pad. In addition, a subtraction sensor is provided on the path from the standby position to the launch pad to detect a game ball moving to the launch pad. When the game ball is detected by the subtraction sensor, the number of balls held is subtracted by 1. In this way, since the game ball as the game medium is launched from above with respect to the game area, the so-called return ball (foul ball) can be avoided in the enclosed game machine. Then, the game ball discharged from the game area after rolling in the game area is polished by the ball polishing device. The game ball polished by the ball polishing device is transported upward by the lifting device and guided to the launching device. The game balls are not discharged to the outside of the enclosed game machine, and a certain number (for example, 50) of game balls are configured to circulate in a series of paths in the game machine.

In the enclosed game machine, since the game ball is not discharged to the outside of the game machine, an upper plate or a lower plate for temporarily holding the game ball is not provided. Since the game ball is not discharged to the outside in the enclosed game machine, the game ball is not actually in the player's hand, and the game ball does not actually increase or decrease by playing the game. In the enclosed game machine, the player starts the game after obtaining a ball by lending from the game medium management device. Here, obtaining a holding ball means that the player obtains a game medium for data management. Then, when the game ball is launched from the launching device, the ball held is consumed and the number of balls held decreases. In addition, as the game balls pass through each winning opening or the like provided in the game area, the number of balls held is increased by paying out the number according to the conditions set according to the winning opening. Furthermore, the number of balls held will increase by lending from the game media management device. In addition, "consumption, lending and payout of game media" means that the ball is consumed, lent and paid out. In addition, "increase / decrease in game media" means that the number of balls held increases / decreases due to consumption, lending, and payout. Further, "data on increase / decrease in game media due to consumption, lending and payout of game media" is data on a decrease in the number of balls held due to the launch of a game ball and an increase in the number of balls held due to lending and paying out.

The enclosed game machine has a payout control circuit and a touch panel type liquid crystal display device. The payout control circuit is connected to various sensors that detect the passage of the game ball through each winning opening or the like. The payout control circuit manages the number of balls held. For example, when a game ball passes through each winning opening, the number of game balls paid out due to this is added to the number of balls held. Also, when the game ball is launched, the number of balls held is subtracted. The payout control circuit transmits data regarding the number of balls held to the game medium management device by the operation of the player. Further, the above-mentioned liquid crystal display device is located at the upper part of the game machine, and receives a request for conversion (ball lending) from the game value managed by the game medium management device to a ball held (ball lending) and counting (return) of the ball held. Then, these requests are transmitted to the payout control circuit via the game medium management device, and the payout control circuit instructs the game medium management device to transmit data regarding the current number of balls held. Here, the "game value" refers to money / banknotes, prepaid media, tokens, electronic money, tickets, etc., which can be converted into holding balls by the game media management device. In the present embodiment, the game media management device is a so-called CR unit, and is configured to be able to accept banknotes, prepaid media, and the like. In addition, the counted balls can be used for prize exchange and the like at a game hall where a game system is installed.

In addition, the enclosed game machine has a backup power supply. As a result, even when the power is turned off at night or the like, the data immediately before the power is turned off can be retained. Further, with this backup power supply, for example, the door frame opening detection by the door opening sensor may be continuously executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent cheating at night. In this case, information such as the number of times the door frame is opened may be stored. Further, when the power is turned on, information such as the number of times the door frame is opened may be output to the liquid crystal display device of the game machine or the like.

The game medium management device has a game machine connection board. The game medium management device is configured to transmit / receive data (transmission signal) to / from the game machine via the game machine connection board. The data to be transmitted and received includes the unique ID of the CPU provided in the main control circuit, the unique ID of the CPU provided in the payout control circuit, the game machine manufacturer code stored in the game machine, the security chip manufacturer code, and the game. Information such as the model code of the machine. Then, when one of the game machine and the game medium management device is used as a transmission source and the other is used as a transmission destination, and the transmission source transmits a transmission signal, the transmission destination that receives the transmission signal is the same signal as the transmission signal. The confirmation signal is transmitted to the transmission source, and the transmission source compares the transmission signal with the confirmation signal and determines whether or not they are the same.

In this way, the transmission source compares the confirmation signal transmitted from the transmission destination with the transmission signal to determine whether or not they are the same, so that the signal transmitted from the transmission source is not tampered with. It can be confirmed that the signal has been sent to the sender. As a result, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as falsification of transmission / reception signals between the game machine and the game medium management device.

Further, in the game system, the transmission source has a modulation unit that modulates a signal, the signal modulated by the modulation unit is transmitted as the transmission signal, and the transmission destination transmits the signal modulated by the modulation unit. It may have a demodulation unit for demodulation.

As a result, even if the transmission / reception signal between the game machine and the game medium management device is read, it is difficult to decipher this signal, and the transmission / reception signal between the game machine and the game medium management device is transmitted. It is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as falsification.

Further, in the game system, when the transmission destination receives the transmission signal from the transmission source, the approval signal, which is a signal indicating that the transmission signal has been received, is set in addition to the confirmation signal. It may be transmitted to the source.

As a result, by comparing the transmission signal and the confirmation signal, it is confirmed not only that the normal signal has been transmitted / received, but also that the normal signal has been transmitted / received based on the approval signal. Because it can be done, it is possible to further strengthen the suppression of fraudulent activities.

[10. Processing executed by the host control circuit]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the various control circuits in the sub-board 2020 of the sub-control circuit 200 (see, for example, FIG. 10) will be described. The sub control circuit 200 receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 100 (see, for example, FIG. 10), and performs various processes based on the various commands.

In the following, first, the processes related to various devices and the like will be described, and then the processes related to the hall menu task will be described. It should be noted that both the processing related to the hall menu task and the processing related to various devices and the like are processes executed by the host control circuit 2100 (more specifically, the CPU processor included in the host control circuit 2100) and the like, but for convenience of explanation, Each will be described using a separate flowchart.

[10-1. Processing related to various devices]
The processes related to various devices and the like will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 99. In addition, FIG. 61, FIG. 72, FIG. 73, FIG. 74, and FIG. 98, including FIG. 52 described above, are examples of sub-control main processing (overall flow) executed when the power is turned on. It is a flowchart which shows. All of these are processes executed by the host control circuit 2100 (more specifically, the CPU processor included in the host control circuit 2100), but for convenience of explanation, the processes are appropriately omitted depending on various situations. For example, in FIGS. 52 and 61, the accessory control process (step S210, step S1213) is shown, but in FIGS. 72, 73, 74 and 98, the accessory control process is not shown. Further, in FIGS. 61, 72, 73, 74 and 98, even if the same processing is performed, different reference numerals are given for convenience of explanation. For example, when the initialization process is described as an example, various initialization processes (step S1201) of FIG. 61, an initialization process of FIG. 72 (step S1381), an initialization process of FIG. 73 (step S1391), and an initial stage of FIG. 74 The conversion process (step S401) is substantially the same initialization process. Taking the accessory control process as an example, the accessory control process of FIG. 52 (step S210) and the accessory control process of FIG. 61 (step S210) Step S1213) is substantially the same process.

As shown in FIG. 61, the host control circuit 2100 performs various initialization processes (step S1201). In this process, the host control circuit 2100 performs various initial setting processes such as hardware initialization process, device initialization process, various application initialization process, backup data recovery initialization process, and RTC acquisition process. Do. When the game data is erased by clearing the RAM, the random number initialization process is also performed. Further, the host control circuit 2100 clears the watchdog timer counter each time each initialization process is completed. At startup, the reset time of the watchdog timer is set, and if the service pulse is not written after that (at the time of timeout), the power interruption process is performed. The timing for clearing the watchdog timer is at the start of each process in the main loop in the sub-control main process, at the start of each initialization process, and at the time of transition to the power interruption process.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 enters the main loop and performs an RTC acquisition process, that is, a process of acquiring the current time based on the RTC time (step S1202).

The host control circuit 2100 performs a random number initialization process in step S1203. This random number initialization process will be described later.

The host control circuit 2100 acquires the accessory control code in step S1204 and performs synchronous processing between the accessory and the solenoid (step S1205). These processes will be described in the "accessory solenoid control process" described later.

The host control circuit 2100 performs the sub-device input process in step S1206. In this process, the host control circuit 2100 performs information acquisition processing of the operation content based on the input state of the operation means and the like (determination process of whether or not the player has performed an operation on the operation means such as a button). And so on. This sub-device input process (step S1206) includes adjusting the brightness of the LED or the like by the operation of the player or the like.

The host control circuit 2100 performs various request control processes in step S1207. In this process, the host control circuit 2100 performs various request control processes such as sound request control process, LED request control process, accessory request control process, and accessory control process. The sound request, LED request, accessory request, and the like are stored in a buffer and output to each device after the bank flip in step S1214, which will be described later. As a result, synchronization with drawing can be achieved. The bank flip is a process of switching the function of one frame buffer from the drawing function to the display function and switching the function of the other frame buffer from the display function to the drawing function.

By the way, the accessory control process is performed in various request control processes (S1207), and is also shown in FIG. 61 to be performed in step S1213 after the drawing control process (step S1212). It is not essential that this be done in step S1213 after step S1212). In the character processing, considering that the character request stored in the buffer is output in the animation construction process (step S1210) one frame before and the animation update process (step S1211), the animation construction process (step S1210) Is preferably done before. However, when the accessory request stored in the buffer is output in the same frame as the frame stored in the buffer, the accessory control process is performed in step S1213 after the drawing control process (step S1212). Is also good.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 enters the packet reception loop in the main loop and performs command control processing between main and sub (step S1208). In this process, the host control circuit 2100 performs a command data reading process (command receiving process) when command data is received from the main CPU 101 and a command data storage process (received data storage process) in the subwork RAM 2100a.

The host control circuit 2100 performs a game data backup process in step S1209. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first data (magic code, program version and SUM value) and the second data (both are information set in the hall menu) are the game data used for the RAM clear determination. And SUM value) are prepared. Then, in the game data backup process, after the first data is stored in the game data, it is backed up to SRAM 2100b (see FIG. 10). In addition, the game data is backed up (mirrored) in another area of the SRAM 2100b. After the power is turned on, the game data is restored from the data backed up in the SRAM 2100b. At this time, the first data is used to check whether the backed up data is damaged. If the backed up data is corrupted, check if the second data is corrupted. At this time, the data stored in all the SRAM 2100b such as the hall menu information is also initialized.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs an animation construction process (step S1210). In this process, the host control circuit 2100 performs command analysis, state setting, and lottery processing, and in response to these, generates an animation request necessary for performing effect control using the display device 16, and this animation request. In response to the effect control (display) in the display device 16 executed based on the above, various requests (drawing request, sound request, LED request, and accessory request) for operating the various effect devices are generated.

The host control circuit 2100 executes the processes of steps S1208 to S1210 until it is executed for the number of received commands, and exits the packet reception loop when it is executed for the number of received commands. After that, the host control circuit 2100 goes through an animation update process (step S1211), a drawing control process (step S1212), an accessory control process (step S1213), and a bank flip / bank flip end wait (step S1214) in the main loop. Each process is repeated.

The host control circuit 2100 repeatedly executes the process (main loop process) of the above-mentioned example of steps S1202 to S1214 in a predetermined FPS cycle. The FPS cycle is set to, for example, about 16.7 msec (60 FPS), about 33.3 msec (30 FPS), and the like. The predetermined FPS cycle is time adjusted in step S1214.

Below, timer interrupt processing, sub-device input processing, backlight control processing, backlight and various LED brightness adjustment, RTC acquisition processing, composition playback control, sound amplifier control processing, sound request control processing (for the same channel) (When there are a plurality of sound requests), sound request control processing (when volume adjustment is performed), LED brightness adjustment processing, accessory solenoid control processing, data load processing, and sub-random number processing will be described in this order. The description order of each of the above processes is different from the process order for convenience of explanation.

[10-2. Timer interrupt processing]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the host control circuit 2100 performs interrupt processing at a cycle of 1 msec. The interrupt processing will be described in each process described later, but here, an example of a typical interrupt process will be briefly described with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed by the host control circuit (sub control circuit). In the timer interrupt process described briefly with reference to FIG. 62 and the timer interrupt process described later (see FIGS. 69 and 71), even if they are the same process, different reference numerals are given for convenience of explanation. For example, when the accessory motor control is described as an example, the accessory motor control of FIG. 62 (step S1251), the accessory motor control of FIG. 69 (step S1352), and the accessory motor control of FIG. 71 (step S1371). Is substantially the same process but has a different reference numeral.

With reference to FIG. 62, in the timer interrupt process, the host control circuit 2100 first controls the accessory motor (step S1251). Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs an input state determination process based on the input information of the subdevice (step S1252). Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs control processing such as the backlight of the liquid crystal display device used as the display device 16 based on the brightness value (step S1253). Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs a sound amplifier check process (step S1254).

[10-3. Sub-device input processing]
In the present embodiment, the host control circuit 2100 creates subdevice input discrimination information in the main process every 33.3 msec based on the input state of the subdevice detected by the timer interrupt every 1 msec, and this is created. The sub-device is controlled based on the sub-device input discrimination information.

When the host control circuit 2100 detects the input state of the subdevice by a timer interrupt every 1 msec, the subdevice input information and the subdevice are used as the above subdevice input determination information created in the main process based on the detection result. Input ON edge information, sub device input ON edge information (with repeat function), and sub device input OFF edge information are created.

The sub-device input process shown in FIG. 61 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66. The subdevice is controlled by the host control circuit 2100 based on input (eg operation) information, such as a push button. Note that FIG. 63 is a diagram showing an example for explaining the sub-device input discrimination information to be created, (a) a diagram showing the input state of the sub-device detected by the timer interrupt, and (b) created by the main process. A diagram showing the sub-device input information to be generated, (c) a diagram showing the sub-device input ON edge information created in the main process, and (c) a sub-device input ON edge information (with a repeat function) created in the main process. The figure which shows, (d) is the figure which shows the sub device OFF edge information created by the main process. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing an example of the sub-device input process. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing an example of the sub-device input ON edge information (with repeat function) processing. FIG. 66 shows an example of the sub-device input ON edge information (with repeat function) processing, and is a flowchart continuing from FIG. 65.

As shown in FIG. 63 (b), the sub-device input information created in the main process is created according to the sub-device input state (see FIG. 63 (a)) detected by the timer interrupt. That is, when the sub-device input state detected by the timer interrupt is ON, 1 is set. Further, when the subdevice input state detected by the timer interrupt is OFF, 0 is set.

As shown in FIG. 63 (c), the sub-device input ON edge information is only one frame in the main process when it is detected that the sub-device input state detected by the timer interrupt has changed from OFF to ON. Is set.

The sub-device input ON edge information (with repeat function) is information used for control, for example, when debugging or when the operation button is pressed and held for a long time, and is detected by a timer interrupt as shown in FIG. 63 (d). When it is detected that the input state of the sub-device is changed from OFF to ON, 1 is set for one frame in the main process. Then, if the input state of the sub-device continues to be ON after that, 1 is set for one frame after 10 frames have elapsed in the main process, for example, as a fixed time until the start of key repeat, and after that, for example, in the main process. 1 is set every 4 frames. In this way, the reason why only the first frame is lengthened to 10 frames is to make it possible to determine whether or not the subdevice has been long-pressed, and if the first frame is short, it is determined that it is not long-pressed. Can be done.

As shown in FIG. 63 (e), the sub-device input OFF edge information is only one frame in the main process when it is detected that the sub-device input state detected by the timer interrupt has changed from ON to OFF. Is set.

In the present embodiment, assuming that there are a plurality of sub-devices, the host control circuit 2100 manages the sub-device input determination information in bit units. For example, bit0 is the main button, bit1 is the left button, bit2 is the right button, and so on. Sub-device input discrimination information for up to 32 devices can be managed.

Next, the sub-device input process (see, for example, step S1206 in FIG. 61) will be described with reference to FIG. In this sub-device input process, the sub-device input discrimination information includes sub-device input information, sub-device input ON edge information, sub-device input ON edge information (with repeat function), and sub-device input OFF edge information, for example, 4. This is the process of creating type information.

The host control circuit 2100 first creates the input information of the current subdevice based on the input state of the current subdevice (step S1301). Specifically, 1 is set when the sub device is in the ON state, and 0 is set when the sub device is in the OFF state.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 updates the input information of the subdevice in accordance with the current subdevice input information, that is, the input information of the subdevice created in step S1301 (step S1302).

Next, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the previous subdevice input information is 0 and the current subdevice input information is 1 (step S1303). If the previous sub-device input information is 0 and the current sub-device input information is 1 (YES in step S1303), the host control circuit 2100 sets the sub-device input ON edge information to 1 (step S1304), and steps. Move to S1306. On the other hand, if the previous subdevice input information is 0 and the current subdevice input information is not 1 (that is, if the previous subdevice input information is 1 and / and the current subdevice input information is 0), the host The control circuit 2100 sets the sub-device input ON edge information to 0 (step S1305), and proceeds to step S1306.

In step S1306, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the previous subdevice input information is 1 and the current subdevice input information is 0. If the previous sub-device input information is 1 and the current sub-device input information is 0 (YES in step S1306), the host control circuit 2100 sets the sub-device input OFF edge information to 1 (step S1307), and steps. Move to S1309. On the other hand, if the previous subdevice input information is 1 and the current subdevice input information is not 0 (that is, if the previous subdevice input information is 0 and / and the current subdevice input information is 1), the host The control circuit 2100 sets the sub-device input OFF edge information to 0 (step S1308), and proceeds to step S1309.

In step S1309, the host control circuit 2100 performs subdevice input ON edge information (with repeat function) processing. Details of this sub-device input ON edge information (with repeat function) processing will be described later.

When the subdevice input ON edge information (with repeat function) processing in step S1309 is completed, the host control circuit 2100 sets the input information of the current subdevice to the previous subdevice input information (step S1310), and inputs the subdevice. End the process.

Next, the sub-device input ON edge information (with repeat function) processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66.

As shown in FIG. 65, in the sub-device input ON edge information (with repeat function) processing, the host control circuit 2100 first determines whether or not the previous sub-device input information is 0 (step S1321). .. If the previous sub-device input information is 0 (YES in step S1321), the process proceeds to step S1322.

In step S1322, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the subdevice input information this time is 1. If the current sub-device input information is 1 (YES in step S1322), that is, if the previous sub-device input information is 0 and the current sub-device input information is 1, the process proceeds to step S1323. On the other hand, if the current sub-device input information is not 1 (NO in step S1322), that is, if the previous sub-device input information is 0 and the current sub-device input information is 0, the sub-device input is ON. Ends edge information (with repeat function) processing.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 sets the sub-device input ON edge information (with repeat function) to 1 (step S1323), sets 10 frames as elapsed frames (step S1324), and sets the sub-device input ON edge information. (With repeat function) Ends the process.

If the previous sub-device input information is 1 in step S1321 (NO in step S1321), the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S1325 in FIG.

With reference to FIG. 66, the host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1325 whether or not the subdevice input information this time is 1. If the current sub-device input information is 1 (YES in step S1325), that is, if the previous sub-device input information is 1 and the current sub-device input information is 1, subtract 1 from the elapsed frame. (Step S1326), the process proceeds to step S1327.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1327 whether or not the elapsed frame is zero. If the elapsed frame is 0 (YES in step S1327), the sub-device input ON edge information (with repeat function) is set to 1 (step S1328), and the elapsed frame is set to 4 (step S1329). Input ON Edge information (with repeat function) processing ends.

In step S1325, if the current subdevice input information is not 1 (NO in step S1325), that is, if the previous subdevice input information is 1 and the current subdevice input information is 0, the host control The circuit 2100 sets the elapsed frame to 0 (step S1330) and proceeds to step S1331.

When the sub-device input ON edge information (with repeat function) is set to 0 in step S1331, the host control circuit 2100 ends the sub-device input ON edge information (with repeat function) processing.

In this way, the host control circuit 2100 creates the above-mentioned four types of sub-device input discrimination information in the main process every 33.3 msec based on the input state of the sub-device detected by the timer interrupt every 1 msec. By controlling the sub-devices based on these four types of sub-device input discrimination information, it is easy to control the sub-device's repeated hitting effect, long-press effect control, time setting control, and other operation control. It becomes possible.

[10-4. Backlight control process]
Next, the backlight control process (for example, the backlight control process for controlling the backlight of a liquid crystal display or the like) will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing an example for conceptually explaining the backlight control process. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing an example of the backlight control process.

The backlight control process of the present embodiment uses the function of SPI asynchronous data write (SPI + DMA) to continuously and continuously from the serial output terminal of, for example, the Serial Peripheral Interface (hereinafter referred to as "SPI"). A signal equivalent to pulse width modulation (hereinafter referred to as "PWM") is output so that the duty (brightness) can be changed. This makes it possible to perform backlight control without going through a driver for backlight control.

In the present embodiment, for example, the frequency of the SPI clock is 100 kHz, the SPI1 clock is 0.01 msec, the time required for data transmission of 16 bits (1 data of brightness data is 16 bits) is 0.16 msec, and the host control circuit 2100 is scheduled. The interrupt is 1 msec, and the number of brightness data transmitted from the SPI between the scheduled interrupts of the host control circuit 2100 is 100 bits. Therefore, the number of luminance data transmitted between the scheduled interrupts of the host control circuit 2100 is 6.25 (100/16) (see FIG. 67). Therefore, for example, the number of scheduled interrupts executed until 32 luminance data are replenished in the FIFO (First In First Out) data area where 64 16-bit luminance data can be set (stored) is 5 to 6 times. it is conceivable that. The number of times varies depending on the time of the scheduled interrupt of the host control circuit 2100.

For example, if the number of brightness data set (stored) in the FIFO (First In First Out) data area that can set (store) 64 16-bit brightness data is less than 32, the callback function is called, so the FIFO data. The area is not always filled. Therefore, if the process of setting (storing) the luminance data in the FIFO data area does not take time in other processes in the main process executed in the cycle of 33.3 msec, the FIFO data area becomes empty. (The backlight goes black).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, after the power is turned on, first 64 pieces of 1 data 16 bit brightness data are set to fill the FIFA data area, and then 32 pieces of brightness data set in the FIFA data area are set. Below, the callback function is called, and 32 data are set in the callback function so that the FIFA data area is not emptied.

As shown in FIG. 68, in the backlight control process, the host control circuit 2100 first determines whether or not the process is the process at the time of initial setting (step S1341). When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the process is the process at the time of initial setting (that is, one process in step 201 of FIG. 61) (YES in step S1341), 64 pieces of luminance data having a luminance of 0 are stored in the data area of the FIFO. It is set (step S1342), and the process proceeds to step S1343. On the other hand, if it is determined that the process is not the initial setting process (that is, the process of step S1253 in FIG. 62) (NO in step S1341), the process of step S1342 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S1343.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1343 whether or not the luminance value has been changed. When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the brightness value has been changed (YES in step S1343), the host control circuit 2100 changes the brightness data to be set in the data area of the FIFO (step S1344), and proceeds to step S1345. On the other hand, if it is determined that the luminance value has not been changed (NO in step S1343), the process of step S1344 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S1345.

In step S1345, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the number of brightness data set in the FIFO data area is less than 32, and the number of brightness data set in the FIFO data area is 32. If the number is less than (YES in step S1345), 32 brightness data are set in the FIFO data area, that is, replenished (step S1346), and the backlight control process is terminated. On the other hand, if the number of luminance data set in the FIFO data area is more than 32 (NO in step S1345), the host control circuit 2100 ends the backlight processing.

In this way, by processing so that the brightness data set in the FIFO data area is not emptied, it is possible to continuously and continuously output a signal equivalent to PWM from the serial data output terminal of SPI, and back. It is possible to perform backlight control without going through a driver for light control.

The processing of steps S1343 to S1346 of the backlight control processing of the present embodiment can be replaced as follows. That is, after 64 pieces of data having 0 brightness are set (see step S1342), a process of determining whether or not the number of brightness data set in the data area of the FIFO is less than 32 pieces is performed. After that, it is determined whether or not the brightness value has been changed, and when it is determined that the brightness value has been changed, 32 pieces of brightness data according to the setting are set in the FIFA data area, and when it is determined that the brightness value has not been changed, the previous time. 32 pieces of the same luminance data as the above are set in the FIFA data area. In this way, the luminance data may be set in the FIFO data area and the backlight control process may be terminated.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of brightness data set in the FIFO data area is less than 32 (half the number of data that can be set in the FIFA), 32 pieces of brightness data are replenished. The timing of replenishing the data and the number of brightness data to be replenished are not limited to this, and when the brightness data set in the FIFO data area falls below a predetermined number, the predetermined number of brightness data may be replenished. Further, the brightness data to be replenished in the FIFO data area does not have to be the above-mentioned predetermined number. For example, when the brightness data set in the FIFA data area is less than the first number, the second number is added. The brightness data may be supplemented. However, from the viewpoint of preventing the brightness data set in the FIFA data area from being set too frequently and the brightness data set in the FIFA data area not being emptied, the above-mentioned predetermined number or the first The number is preferably about half the number of brightness data that can be set in the FIFA data area, but is not limited to this as described above. The above "about half" is sufficient as long as the frequency of setting the brightness data in the FIFO data area does not become too high and the brightness data set in the FIFO data area does not become empty. There are various judgment methods such as less than half or less than half depending on the consumption speed of the brightness data set in the data area of. For example, since the FIFA data area in the present embodiment can set up to 64 16-bit brightness data, when the number of brightness data set in the FIFA data area is 1 to 64, one or more is newly set. It is possible to set the brightness data, but from the viewpoint of preventing the backlight from becoming dark (the brightness data set in the FIFA data area becomes 0), the FIFA data When the number of brightness data set in the region is two or more, it is preferable to newly set one or more brightness data. Further, the number of luminance data that can be set in the FIFO data area is not limited to 64, and it is sufficient that at least two or more luminance data can be set. When the number of brightness data set in the FIFA data area is, for example, two or more, and the number of brightness data set in the FIFA data area is less than the first number (for example, two), the second number is obtained. The brightness data (for example, one) may be supplemented.

[10-4-1. Modification example of backlight control processing]
Next, a modification of the backlight control process will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing accompanying a modified example of backlight control processing. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the backlight control process.

In a modified example of the backlight control processing, when the processing may take time in the timer interrupt processing of 1 msec, whether or not a predetermined time or more has passed since the data was set in the data area of the FIFO in the backlight control processing. It is determined whether or not the data is set in the data area of the FIFO when a predetermined time or more has elapsed.

In the timer interrupt process of FIG. 69, the host control circuit 2100 first performs the backlight control process (step S1351). Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the backlight control process in step S1351 will be described with reference to FIG. 70 before the processes after step S1352 are described.

As shown in FIG. 70, in the backlight control process, the host control circuit 2100 first determines whether or not the process is the process at the time of initial setting (step S1361). When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the process is the process at the time of initial setting (that is, one of the processes in step 201 of FIG. 61) (YES in step S1361), 64 luminance data having a luminance of 0 are stored in the data area of the FIFO. It is set (step S1362), and then the process proceeds to step S1366. On the other hand, if it is determined that the process is not the process at the time of initial setting (that is, the process of step S1351) (NO in step S1361), the process proceeds to step S1363.

In step S1363, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the number of brightness data set in the FIFO data area is less than 32, and the number of brightness data set in the FIFO data area is 32. If the number is less than (YES in step S1363), 32 pieces of brightness data are set or replenished in the data area of the FIFO (step S1364), and the process proceeds to step S1365. On the other hand, if the number of luminance data set in the FIFO data area is more than 32 (NO in step S1363), the process proceeds to step S1366. As described above, the above 32 pieces are half the number of data that can be set in the FIFO.

In step S1365, the host control circuit 2100 resets the elapsed time (step S1365) and starts timing the elapsed time (step S1366). When the time counting of the elapsed time is started in step S1366, the host control circuit 2100 ends the backlight control process.

Returning to FIG. 69, the host control circuit 2100 performs the accessory motor control after completing the backlight control process in step S1351 (step S1352).

In this modification, whether or not the elapsed time at which the time counting is started in step S1366 has elapsed more than a predetermined time after the host control circuit 2100 has performed a process such as the accessory motor control which may take a long time. (Step S1353). If a predetermined time or more has passed (YES in step S1353), 32 luminance data are set in the FIFO data area (step S1354). On the other hand, if the predetermined time or more has not passed (NO in step S1353), it is not necessary to replenish the luminance data in the FIFO data area, so the process proceeds to step S1357.

As described above, since the time required for 16-bit (1 piece of luminance data is 16 bits) data transmission in SPI is 0.16 msec, it is considered that 5.12 msec is required to transmit 32 luminance data. Be done. Therefore, in this modified example, in step S1353, it is determined whether or not 5.12 msec or more has elapsed as a predetermined time.

After performing the process of step S1354, the host control circuit 2100 resets the elapsed time (step S1355) and restarts the time counting of the elapsed time (step S1356). Then, when the time counting of the elapsed time is started in step S1356, the host control circuit 2100 performs the input state determination process (step S1357) and ends the timer interrupt process.

In this way, when the brightness data is set in the FIFO data area, the time counting is started, and after the processing that may take time, the brightness data is replenished if the above time counting time elapses for a predetermined time or more. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the brightness data in the FIFO data area from becoming empty.

In this modified example, an example in which the processes of steps S1353 to S1357 are performed after the accessory motor control (step S1352) has been described, but this is only an example. That is, from the viewpoint of preventing the luminance data set in the FIFO data area from becoming empty, if the processing of steps S1353 to S1357 is performed after the processing that may take time. Often, such processing is not limited to a particular processing.

[10-5. Brightness adjustment of backlight and various LEDs]
Next, variations of brightness adjustment of the backlight and various LEDs will be described. The various LEDs correspond to board-side LEDs (for example, LEDs arranged on the game board unit 17), frame-side LEDs, and the like, and in the present specification, the lamp group 25 and the like including LEDs (for example, see FIG. 9). Corresponds to. Further, in the present specification, as variations of brightness adjustment of the backlight and various LEDs, three variations of the first embodiment to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 74, respectively. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process showing the backlight control process. FIG. 72 is a sub-control main process (overall flow) executed by the host control circuit 2100 for explaining the first embodiment of the process of adjusting the brightness of the backlight and various LEDs. FIG. 73 is a sub-control main process (overall flow) executed by the host control circuit 2100 for explaining a second embodiment of the process of adjusting the brightness of the backlight and various LEDs. FIG. 74 is a sub-control main process (overall flow) executed by the host control circuit 2100 for explaining a third embodiment of the process of adjusting the brightness of the backlight and various LEDs. However, in FIGS. 72 to 74, only the processes necessary for the explanation are shown, and the other processes are omitted. In the first to third embodiments described below, as described above, the host control circuit 2100 will be placed in the FIFO data area when the luminance data set in the FIFO data area is reduced to about half. Replenish the brightness data.

The timing of replenishing the luminance data in the FIFO data area is not limited to the time when the luminance data set in the FIFO data area is reduced to about half. In the FIFO data area of the present embodiment, for example, up to 64 16-bit luminance data can be set. Therefore, when the number of luminance data set in the FIFO data area is 1 to 64, one or more new luminance data can be set. Luminance data may be set. However, from the viewpoint of preventing the backlight from becoming dark (the luminance data set in the FIFO data area becomes 0), the luminance data set in the FIFO data area is 2. It is preferable to newly set one or more luminance data when the number is one or more. Further, the number of luminance data that can be set in the FIFO data area is not limited to 64, and it is sufficient that at least two or more luminance data can be set. When the number of brightness data set in the FIFA data area is, for example, two or more, if the number of brightness data set in the FIFA data area is less than the first number (for example, two), the second number is obtained. The brightness data (for example, one) may be supplemented.

(First Example)
For example, when the brightness of the backlight (for example, the backlight of a liquid crystal display or the like) is adjusted by the operation of a player or the like, the brightness of the backlight is changed. At this time, the panel side LED and the frame side LED are controlled. May affect. In this embodiment, in such a case, the brightness setting of the backlight and the brightness setting of the panel side LED and the frame side LED are set in common, and the backlight, the panel side LED, and the frame side LED are set according to the setting. It is designed to be controlled. As a result, even if the update timing of the backlight control and the update timing of the control of the panel side LED and the frame side LED are different, it is possible to facilitate the processing.

In the timer interrupt process of FIG. 71, the host control circuit 2100 performs the accessory motor control (step S1371), the input state determination process (step S1372), and the backlight control process (step S1373) in this order.

As shown in FIG. 72, the host control circuit 2100 performs the initialization process (step S1381), then moves to the main loop and performs the LED request control process (step S1382). The LED request made in step S1382 was created in the animation construction process one frame before (step S1386 described later).

When the host control circuit 2100 performs the process of step S1382, the host control circuit 2100 performs the above-mentioned subdevice (button) input determination information generation process (step S1383) based on the input state of the subdevice, and proceeds to step S1384.

In step S1384, the host control circuit 2100 determines the brightness of the backlight based on the input state of the sub-device (for example, the player or the like operates the brightness setting screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device used as the display device 16). To set. The brightness of the backlight is set in three stages, for example, strong, medium, and weak.

When the process of step S1384 is performed, the host control circuit 2100 shifts to the packet reception loop, and first, the brightness values of the panel side LED and the frame side LED are set according to the effect mode to be executed and the setting of the brightness value. (Step S1385). Similar to the backlight, the brightness of the panel side LED and the frame side LED is also set to, for example, three levels of strong, medium, and weak.

Here, by setting the brightness of the panel side LED and the frame side LED and the setting of the brightness of the backlight as a common setting, the brightness of the panel side LED and the frame side LED can be suppressed while suppressing the increase in the control load. Both the setting and the brightness setting of the backlight can be changed by the operation of the player or the like. For example, the host control circuit 2100 changes the brightness value of the backlight based on the player or the like operating the brightness setting screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device used as the display device 16 (step S1384). The brightness values of the panel side LED and the frame side LED are also changed (step S1385). At this time, the stage of the brightness value of the backlight and the stage of the brightness value of the panel side LED and the frame side LED are also common. For example, if the stage of the brightness value of the backlight is medium, the stage of the brightness value of the panel side LED and the frame side LED is also medium. As shown in FIG. 72, since the brightness update timing of the backlight and the brightness update timing of the panel side LED and the frame side LED are different, after the brightness of the backlight is updated, the panel side LED and the frame side LED The brightness of is updated. However, the brightness update timing of the backlight may be controlled so that the brightness update timing of the panel side LED and the frame side LED is the same.

The brightness of the backlight and the brightness of the panel side LED and the frame side LED are changed based on the player or the like operating the brightness setting screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device used as the display device 16. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the brightness of the backlight and the brightness of the panel side LED and the frame side LED may be changed based on the operation of the push button for the effect. In this case, since it is necessary to determine whether or not it is a period (push button valid period) that functions as a push button for production, the brightness of the board side LED and the frame side LED is adjusted in the main flow. It is necessary to control the backlight according to the brightness of the LED.

The host control circuit 2100 performs the animation construction process in step S1386. In the animation construction process of step S1386, an LED request is created. The created LED request is waited in the buffer and then output in the LED request control process (see step S1382) of the next frame.

The host control circuit 2100 repeats the processes of step S1385 and step S1386 according to the received packets.

When the host control circuit 2100 exits the packet reception loop, it performs animation update processing (step S1387), and then waits for bank flip / bank flip end (step S1388).

The host control circuit 2100 repeats each process of steps S1382 to S1388 in the main loop at a cycle of 33.3 msec.

(Second Example)
For example, when the brightness adjustment operation is performed by a player or the like, the control of the board side LED and the frame side LED may be affected as described above. In this embodiment, in such a case, for example, when a player or the like performs a brightness adjustment operation, the brightness value of the backlight is changed immediately, but the control of the board side LED and the frame side LED is a special symbol. It is designed to be executed after the end of the fluctuation or between bank flips.

As described above, the host control circuit 2100 performs the accessory motor control (step S1371), the input state determination process (step S1372), and the backlight control process (step S1373) in this order in the timer interrupt process of FIG. 71. Do.

As shown in FIG. 73, the host control circuit 2100 performs the initialization process (step S1391), then moves to the main loop and performs the LED request control process (step S1392). The LED request made in step S1392 was created in the animation construction process one frame before (step S1395 described later).

When the process of step S1392 is performed, the host control circuit 2100 generates the above-mentioned sub-device (button) input discrimination information (step S1393) based on the input state of the sub-device (for example, the brightness adjustment operation by the player or the like). ), And the process proceeds to step S1394.

In step S1394, the host control circuit 2100 sets the brightness of the backlight based on the input state of the sub-device (for example, a brightness adjustment operation by a player or the like). The brightness of the backlight is set in three stages, for example, strong, medium, and weak.

When the process of step S1394 is performed, the host control circuit 2100 shifts to the packet reception loop and performs the animation construction process (step S1395). In the animation construction process of step S1395, an LED request is created. The created LED request is waited in the buffer and then output in the LED request control process (see step S1392) of the next frame.

The host control circuit 2100 repeats the process of step S1395 according to the received packet.

When the host control circuit 2100 exits the packet reception loop, it performs animation update processing (step S1396), then waits for bank flip / bank flip end (step S1397), and proceeds to step S1398.

In step S1398, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the variation of the effect identification displayed on the liquid crystal display device as the display device 16 has been completed, that is, whether or not the variation time of the effect identification symbol has elapsed. (Step S1398). If the variation of the effect identification symbol is completed (YES in step S1398), the host control circuit 2100 changes the brightness of the panel side LED and the frame side LED according to the set value at that time (step S1399). On the other hand, if the variation of the special symbol is not completed (NO in step S1398), the processes of steps S1392 to S1399 in the main loop having a cycle of 33.3 msec are repeated. The process of step S1399 may be performed during the bank flip of step S1397 instead of or in addition to when the change of the special symbol is completed.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the host control circuit 2100 determines the brightness of the backlight that directly affects the eyes of the player based on the input state of the sub-device (for example, the brightness adjustment operation by the player or the like). Is controlled so as to be changed immediately, but the brightness of the panel side LED and the frame side LED is changed after the brightness of the backlight is changed and after the variation of the effect identification symbol is completed. To control. In addition, when the brightness adjustment operation is performed by a player or the like while the identification symbol for production is fluctuating, the brightness of the panel side LED and the frame side LED needs to be changed by the LED request control process, but the backlight Can be changed immediately. Therefore, the brightness of the backlight is controlled to be changed immediately based on the input state of the sub-device, but the brightness of the panel side LED and the frame side LED is changed by the LED request control process to control the load. Can be minimized. That is, for example, it is possible to change the brightness of the backlight and the brightness of the panel-side LED and the frame-side LED while minimizing the control load by performing the brightness adjustment operation by a player or the like only once.

When the brightness of the backlight is changed based on the input state of the sub-device (for example, the brightness adjustment operation by a player or the like), the host control circuit 2100 transmits the brightness data related to the changed brightness to the FIFO. Set in the data area.

(Third Example)
For example, when the brightness adjustment operation is performed by a player or the like, the control of the board side LED and the frame side LED may be affected as described above. In this embodiment, in such a case, for example, when a player or the like performs a brightness adjustment operation, the brightness value of the backlight is changed, and the effect of the board side LED and the frame side LED is limited. This is what I did. The term "limited" means, for example, limiting the number of LEDs that emit light in the effect of the board-side LED and the frame-side LED, limiting the number of effects performed by the board-side LED and the frame-side LED, and the like. .. Limiting the number of effects means, for example, that the effects 1 to 5 are originally performed, but only the effects 1 to 3 are performed, and the effects 4 and 5 are not omitted. As a result, the effect of the board-side LED and the frame-side LED is limited without directly changing the brightness value, so that the intensity of the light received by the player from the board-side LED and the frame-side LED is suppressed. Become. Further, even if the update timing of the backlight control and the update timing of the control of the panel side LED and the frame side LED are different, it is possible to facilitate the processing.

As described above, the host control circuit 2100 performs the accessory motor control (step S1371), the input state determination process (step S1372), and the backlight control process (step S1373) in this order in the timer interrupt process of FIG. 71. Do.

As shown in FIG. 74, the host control circuit 2100 performs the initialization process (step S1401), then moves to the main loop and performs the LED request control process (step S1402). The LED request made in step S1402 is created in the animation construction process one frame before (step S1407 described later).

When the host control circuit 2100 performs the process of step S1402, the host control circuit 2100 performs the above-mentioned subdevice (button) input determination information generation process (step S1403) based on the input state of the subdevice, and proceeds to step S1404.

In step S1404, the host control circuit 2100 sets the brightness of the backlight based on the input state of the sub-device (for example, a brightness adjustment operation by a player or the like). The brightness of the backlight is set in three stages, for example, strong, medium, and weak.

When the process of step S1404 is performed, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the brightness setting has been changed (step S1405). If there is a change in the luminance setting (YES in step S1405), the host control circuit 2100 limits the luminance of the panel side LED and the frame side LED according to the setting at that time (step S1406), and moves to the packet reception loop. On the other hand, if there is no change in the brightness value setting (NO in step S1405), the host control circuit 2100 shifts to the packet reception loop without performing the process of step S1406.

Moving to the packet reception loop, the host control circuit 2100 performs an animation construction process (step S1407). In the animation construction process of step S1407, an LED request is created. The created LED request is waited in the buffer and then output in the LED request control process (see step S1402) of the next frame.

The host control circuit 2100 repeats the process of step S1407 according to the received packet.

When the host control circuit 2100 exits the packet reception loop, it performs animation update processing (step S1408), and then waits for bank flip / bank flip end (step S1409).

The host control circuit 2100 repeats the processes of steps S1402 to S1409 in the main loop having a period of 33.3 msec.

Regarding the brightness adjustment of the backlight and various LEDs described above (first to third embodiments), the backlight control process of the present embodiment uses the function of the SPI asynchronous data light (SPI + DMA) as described above. For example, a signal corresponding to PWM is continuously and continuously output from the serial output terminal of SPI. On the other hand, with respect to the panel-side LED and the frame-side LED, the LEDs are controlled based on the LED request created one frame before the main loop, for example, as shown in step S1382 of FIG. Therefore, even if the brightness of the backlight and various LEDs is adjusted, the timing at which the brightness of the backlight is changed is different from the timing at which the brightness of the panel side LED or the frame side LED is changed.

[10-6. RTC acquisition process]
Next, the RTC acquisition process will be described with reference to FIG. 75. As described above, the RTC acquisition process is performed both in the various initialization processes (see step S1201 in FIG. 61) and in the main loop (see step S1201 in FIG. 61). Note that FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing an example of the RTC acquisition process.

For example, when it is not possible to communicate with the RTC, or when an abnormality has occurred in the RTC itself, or when an accurate time cannot be obtained due to an RTC abnormality, the time is not updated and remains at the previous time. Therefore, when the RTC effect (for example, an effect related to Christmas at Christmas time) is executed based on the RTC time, if an RTC abnormality occurs, the RTC effect may not be executed. Further, when the RTC or more occurs, the RTC time is not updated, so that the RTC effect may remain executed or the RTC effect may be executed at an unexpected time.

Therefore, in the RTC acquisition process of the present embodiment, when the RTC is abnormal, that is, when the previous RTC time and the current RTC time are different, the RTC effect is executed based on the current time. The RTC is provided with a secondary battery, and it is possible to manage the time even when the power supply of the host control circuit 2100 is turned off. Further, the host control circuit 2100 acquires the time from the RTC and manages the error occurrence time and the like.

As shown in FIG. 75, in the RTC acquisition process, the host control circuit 2100 first acquires the RTC time (step S1412), and then proceeds to step S1413.

The host control circuit 2100 updates the previous time in step S1413. In this update of the previous time, the current time updated in step S1416 described later is updated as the previous time. After that, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the RTC is abnormal (step S1414). If the RTC is abnormal (YES in step S1414), the current time is maintained (step S1415), and the process proceeds to step S1417. On the other hand, if the RTC is not abnormal (NO in step S1414), the current time is updated (step S1416), and the process proceeds to step S1417.

In the RTC acquisition process of the present embodiment, after updating the previous time (step S1413), it is determined whether or not the RTC is abnormal (step S1414), but instead of this, the previous time is updated. It may be determined before whether or not the RTC is abnormal, and if the RTC is not abnormal, the previous time may be updated to control so that the current time is not maintained.

In step S1417, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the current time is a designated time (for example, a time when the RTC effect is executed). If the current time is the designated time (YES in step S1417), the process proceeds to step S1418, and if the current time is not the designated time (NO in step S1417), the process proceeds to step S1420.

In step S1418, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the previous time and the current time do not match. If the RTC is abnormal, the previous time and the current time do not match (YES in step S1418). If the previous time and the current time do not match (YES in step S1418), the RTC effect execution flag is set to 1 (step S1419). That is, in the case of an RTC abnormality, the RTC effect is executed when the current time reaches the designated time. Then, when the process of step S1419 is performed, the host control circuit 2100 ends the RTC acquisition process. On the other hand, if the previous time and the current time do not match (NO in step S1418), the process proceeds to step S1420.

The host control circuit 2100 sets the RTC effect execution flag to 0 in step S1420. Then, when the process of step S1420 is performed, the host control circuit 2100 ends the RTC acquisition process.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the RTC is abnormal, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the RTC effect is not executed by executing the RTC effect when the current time reaches the designated time. ..

[10-7. Composition playback control]
Next, composition reproduction control will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77.

The composition is scene data in which material data for forming an image (movie) displayed on a liquid crystal display device used as a display device 16 is combined, and is generally composed of a plurality of layers. Layers include animations, vector graphics, still images, lights, and more.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of the animation control main process executed by the display control circuit 2300. This animation control main process is executed based on the input of the control signal of the drawing request output in the animation construction process (see step S1211 in FIG. 61) executed by the host control circuit 2100. As shown in FIG. 76, the display control circuit 2300 first clears the composition reproduction information (step S1431). Then, the display control circuit 2300 executes the composition reproduction control process (step S1432). This composition reproduction control process will be described later. After that, the display control circuit 2300 executes the top-level direct drawing function (step S1433), and ends the animation control main process.

FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing an example of the composition reproduction control process executed by the display control circuit 2300. As shown in FIG. 77, the display control circuit 2300 first determines whether or not the determined number of priorities is less than (or less than or equal to) the upper limit of the number of priorities (step S1441). If the determined number of priorities is less than (or less than or equal to) the upper limit of the number of priorities (YES in step S1441), the process proceeds to step S1442. The number of priorities is the number of layers of the composition to be played back at the same time, and the upper limit of the number of priorities is predetermined based on the composition to be played back. Therefore, as long as the processing by the host control circuit 2100 is normal, the determined number of priorities does not exceed the upper limit of the number of priorities. Therefore, when the determined priority number exceeds the upper limit of the priority number (NO in step S1441), the display control circuit 2300 ends the composition reproduction control process.

The display control circuit 2300 determines whether or not the determined number of displays is less than (or less than or equal to) the number of usable displays in step S1442, that is, the determined number of displays is a display that can be used (for example, mounted) on the system. It is determined whether or not the number is less than (or less than or equal to) the number (step S1442). If the determined number of displays is less than (or less than or equal to) the number of usable displays (YES in step S1442), the process proceeds to step S1443.

In step S1443, the display control circuit 2300 determines whether or not the used display number is not 0, that is, whether or not there is a usable display number. If the display number used is not 0 (YES in step S1443), that is, if a usable display number exists, the display control circuit 2300 moves to step S1444. On the other hand, if the display number used is 0 (NO in step S1443), that is, if there is no usable display number, the display control circuit 2300 moves to step S1459.

By the way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes two frame buffers as frame buffers in which compositions are registered. These two frame buffers are used by switching the function of one frame buffer from the drawing function to the display function and switching the function of the other frame buffer from the display function to the drawing function by bank flip. Hereinafter, in this specification, a frame buffer having a display function is simply referred to as a “frame buffer”, and a frame buffer having a drawing function is referred to as a “drawing result output destination buffer”.

In step S1444, the display control circuit 2300 determines whether or not the composition is registered in the drawing result output destination buffer. In the determination process of step S1444, it is determined whether or not all the compositions are registered (that is, whether or not there are any unregistered ones). If all the compositions are registered in the drawing result output destination buffer (YES in step S1444), the display control circuit 2300 sets the drawing target (step S1445). Setting a drawing target is a process of setting a display to which drawing is performed. If the composition is not registered in the drawing result output destination buffer (NO in step S1444), that is, if there is an unregistered composition, the display control circuit 2300 moves to step S1450.

In step S1446, the display control circuit 2300 sets the drawing result output destination buffer as the frame buffer. That is, the process of step S1446 is a process of switching the drawing result output destination buffer to the frame buffer by the bank flip. At this time, the composition registered in the drawing result output destination buffer switched from the frame buffer is cleared. After that, the display control circuit 2300 determines whether or not there is a pause flag in the composition registered in the frame buffer switched from the drawing output destination buffer by the bank flip in step S1446 (step S1447). The pause flag is a flag of the debug function that pauses the image, and when this pause flag is present (YES in step S1447), the display control circuit 2300 is the drawing output destination buffer switched from the frame buffer by the bank flip in step S1446. The composition reproduction information is registered in (step S1448) and the composition is reproduced (step S1449). On the other hand, if there is no pause flag (NO in step S1447), the process proceeds to step S1459. The composition reproduction information includes, for example, the frame buffer size, the composition size, the coordinates of the four vertices of the image to be reproduced, the composition registration information, the loop composition to be reproduced, the composition length, and the start frame setting. , Loop playback flag, etc. Further, the registration of the reproduction information of the composition is to collect the reproduction information of the composition, and the composition reproduction is to register the reproduction information of the collected composition. When the playback information of the composition is registered, the previous playback information is cleared.

In step S1450, the display control circuit 2300 determines whether or not the number of frames reproduced in the drawing result output destination buffer is equal to or greater than the upper limit (that is, whether or not the number of reproduced frames exceeds the number of frames possessed by the composition). Determine. If the number of frames reproduced in the drawing result output destination buffer is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (NO in step S1450), the display control circuit 2300 proceeds to step S1457 and registers composition reproduction information in the drawing result output destination buffer (step). The composition is regenerated together with S1457) (step S1458).

When the display control circuit 2300 determines in step S1450 that the number of frames reproduced in the drawing result output destination buffer is equal to or greater than the upper limit (YES in step S1450), the display control circuit 2300 moves to step S1451.

In step S1451, the display control circuit 2300 determines whether or not the reproduction mode of the composition registered in the frame buffer is loop reproduction. If the reproduction mode of the composition registered in the frame buffer is loop reproduction (YES in step S1451), the display control circuit 2300 reproduces from the beginning during loop reproduction (step S1452), and then proceeds to step S1457. .. If the reproduction mode of the composition registered in the frame buffer is not loop reproduction (NO in step S1451), the display control circuit 2300 shifts to step S1453.

In step S1453, the display control circuit 2300 determines whether or not the reproduction mode of the composition registered in the frame buffer is frame continuous display. If the reproduction mode of the composition registered in the frame buffer is frame continuous display (YES in step S1453), the display control circuit 2300 reproduces the final frame at the time of frame continuous display (step S1454), and then in step S1457. Move to. If the reproduction mode of the composition registered in the frame buffer is not frame continuous display (NO in step S1453), the display control circuit 2300 shifts to step S1455.

In step S1455, the display control circuit 2300 determines whether or not the reproduction mode of the composition registered in the frame buffer is shot reproduction. If the reproduction mode is shot reproduction (YES in step S1455), the display control circuit 2300 clears the composition at the time of shot reproduction (step S1456), and then proceeds to step S1459. If the reproduction mode of the composition registered in the frame buffer is not shot reproduction (NO in step S1455), the display control circuit 2300 shifts to step S1457.

The composition reproduction information registration in step S1457 is, in principle, a process performed when the composition is not registered in the drawing result output destination buffer (when NO is determined in step S1444). However, as described above, the display control circuit 2300 also has a pause flag in the frame buffer switched from the drawing output destination buffer in the bank flip in step S1446 (YES in step S1447), and the frame in the bank flip in step S1446. The composition reproduction information is registered in the drawing output destination buffer switched from the buffer (step S1448), and the composition is reproduced (step S1449). As described above, when the frame buffer switched from the drawing output destination buffer in the bank flip in step S1446 has a pause flag (YES in step S1447), the composition reproduction information is immediately registered in the drawing output destination buffer (YES). Since the composition is regenerated together with step S1448) (step S1449), quick processing can be performed.

The display control circuit 2300 adds 1 to the number of displays determined in step S1459, and returns to step S1442.

When the display control circuit 2300 determines in step S1442 that the determined number of displays exceeds the upper limit of the number of usable displays (NO in step S1442), the display control circuit 2300 executes the direct drawing function if there is data to be directly drawn. (Step S1460). After that, the display control circuit 2300 adds 1 to the determined priority number (step S1461), and returns to step S1441.

As described above, in the composition reproduction control of the present embodiment, in principle, the reproduction information of a new composition is not registered in the state where the composition is registered in the drawing output destination buffer. However, the composition is not registered only when the specific condition is satisfied (when YES is determined in step S1447, that is, when the composition registered in the drawing output destination buffer has a pause flag). It becomes possible to perform the processing (composition reproduction information registration) of the time. In other words, while the composition is registered in the drawing output destination buffer, it is possible to register the composition again at any timing, so it depends on the contents of the (newly) registered composition. , It is possible to overwrite the effect, skip the effect, and stop the effect.

Further, the process of step S1441 (processing for determining whether or not the determined number of priorities is less than (or less than or equal to) the upper limit of the number of priorities (whether the number of determined displays is less than (or less than or equal to) the number of usable displays). The process of determining whether or not the display is performed) is higher than the process of step S1442. Therefore, by returning to step S1442 from the process of step S1459 and performing the process, the number of priorities determined in step S1441 is displayed on a plurality of displays. On the other hand, it can be standardized and the processing load can be reduced.

[10-8. Sound amplifier check process]
Next, the sound amplifier check process shown in FIG. 62 will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 80. In this sound amplifier check process, it is determined whether or not the digital audio power amplifier 2620 (hereinafter referred to as "sound amplifier") is in an abnormal state (for example, overcurrent abnormality, high temperature abnormality, DC detection abnormality in which the audio signal does not change, etc.). Also, the setting information of the sound amplifier is confirmed. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing an example of the sound amplifier check process. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal amplifier check process. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing an example of a deep bass amplifier check process.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes, as a sound amplifier, a normal amplifier that amplifies normal audio data and a deep bass amplifier that amplifies deep bass audio data.

As shown in FIG. 78, the host control circuit 2100 performs a normal amplifier check process (step S1471) and a deep bass amplifier check process (step S1472).

As shown in FIG. 79, in the normal amplifier check process, the host control circuit 2100 first determines whether or not the setting has been made from the binary file (step S1481). If there is a binary file at the time of initialization, the settings will be made from the binary file. The process at the time of initialization is executed not only when the power is turned on but also when a problem is found in the amplifier check and the setting is reset. Further, in the present embodiment, the setting is made from the binary file, but the setting is not limited to this, and a storage area different from the read setting such as the binary file may be used.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the setting has been made from the binary file (YES in step S1481), the host control circuit 2100 performs a determination process of whether or not the register as a reference of the register value to be checked is normal (step S1482), and then performs a determination process. , Step S1483. In the determination process of step S1482, the register values are checked in the order of the address, so it is determined whether or not there is a register value for starting the check, and whether or not the value is normal.

In step S1483, the host control circuit 2100 performs a sorting process of the received data from the binary file. After that, the host control circuit 2100 compares the value of the RAM of the register with the received data (step S1484), and performs a determination process of whether or not the value of the normal amplifier is normal (step S1485). When the determination process of step S1485 is performed, the host control circuit 2100 ends the normal amplifier check process.

On the other hand, if the setting is not made from the binary file in step S1481 (NO in step S1481), the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of comparing the default value with the set value (step S1486), and performs a normal amplifier check process. To finish. When the normal amplifier check process is completed, the host control circuit 2100 performs the deep bass amplifier check process.

As shown in FIG. 80, in the deep bass amplifier check process, the host control circuit 2100 first determines whether or not the setting has been made from the binary file (step S1491).

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the setting has been made from the binary file (YES in step S1491), the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of determining whether or not the register to be checked is normal (step S1492), and then proceeds to step S1493. ..

In step S1493, the host control circuit 2100 clears registers 0x17-0x25 with an appropriate value (binary file information) in consideration of a case where the value cannot be read due to a hardware defect.

In step S1494, the host control circuit 2100 rearranges the received data from the binary file. After that, the host control circuit 2100 compares the value of the RAM of the register with the received data (step S1495), and updates the RAM address (step S1494). When the host control circuit 2100 performs the update process of step S1496, the deep bass amplifier check process ends.

On the other hand, if the setting is not made from the binary file in step S1491 (NO in step S1491), the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of comparing the default value with the set value (step S1497), and checks the amplifier for deep bass. End the process.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the host control circuit 2100 performs the sound amplifier check process in the interrupt process of 1 msec. By the way, such a sound amplifier check process can also be performed in the main loop. However, when the sound amplifier check process is performed in the main loop, if the sound amplifier check process takes time, it may put pressure on other processes. Therefore, by performing the sound amplifier check process in the interrupt process as in the present embodiment, it is possible to perform the sound amplifier check process without overwhelming other processes in the main loop.

Further, the sound amplifier check process shown in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 62) is, for example, as shown in FIG. 81, in the interrupt process of 1 msec, the normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier (batch) check process (step S1497). ) May be performed. The normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier (batch) check process (step S1497) is a process of collectively performing the normal amplifier check process (see FIG. 79) and the deep bass amplifier check process (see FIG. 80).

However, if the sound amplifier check process is performed in the interrupt process of 1 msec, it may not be possible to execute all of the sound amplifier check process. Therefore, a more preferable embodiment of the sound amplifier check process will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of a more preferable form of the sound amplifier check process. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of a more preferable form of the normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier check process. FIG. 84 shows an example of a more preferable form of the normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier check process, and is a flowchart continuing from FIG. 83.

In a more preferred embodiment of the sound amplifier check process, as shown in FIG. 82, the host control circuit 2100 performs a normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier (division) check process (step S1498). The details of this normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier (split) check process will be described later, but the range that can be performed within 1 msec of interrupt processing by dividing each check process of the normal amplifier and each check process of the deep bass amplifier. The check process is performed within, and the subsequent process is performed in the next and subsequent frames. In other words, out of all the check processing of the normal amplifier and all the check processing of the deep bass amplifier, only a part of the check processing is performed in the one interrupt processing, but all the checks are performed over multiple interrupt processing. It is the one that was made. By doing so, in the interrupt processing, it is possible to execute all the check processing of the normal amplifier and the check process of the deep bass amplifier without ending in the middle.

As shown in FIG. 83, in the normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier (division) check process, the host control circuit 2100 first determines whether or not the setting is made from the binary file (step S1501).

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the setting has been made from the binary file (YES in step S1501), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the check status is 0 (step S1502). When the check status is 0 (YES in step S1502), the host control circuit 2100 performs a determination process of whether or not the register value checked by the normal amplifier is normal (step S1503). After performing the process of step S1503, the host control circuit 2100 sets the check status to 1 (step S1504), and ends the normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier (division) check process. If the host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1502 that the check status is not 0 (NO in step S1502), the host control circuit 2100 proceeds to step S1505. The process of step S1503 may be performed by further dividing each register into determining whether or not each register value among the plurality of registers is normal.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1505 whether or not the check status is 1. When the check status is 1 (YES in step S1505), the host control circuit 2100 performs a sorting process of the received data from the binary file (step S1506). After that, the host control circuit 2100 compares the value of the RAM of the register of the normal amplifier with the received data (step S1507), and determines whether or not the processing for the number of divisions of the normal amplifier has been executed (step S1508). ). If the processing for the number of divisions of the normal amplifier is executed (YES in step S1508), the host control circuit 2100 sets the check status to 2 (step S1509), and the normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier (division). ) End the check process. On the other hand, if the processing for the number of divisions of the normal amplifier is not executed (NO in step S1508), the host control circuit 2100 checks the normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier (division) without updating the check status. To finish. That is, since the check status is not updated and is maintained at 1, the host control circuit 2100 performs the process when the check status is 1 again in the next and subsequent frames. If the host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1505 that the check status is not 1 (NO in step S1505), the host control circuit 2100 proceeds to step S1510. The process of step S1508 may be performed by further dividing the process of comparing the RAM value of each register among the plurality of registers with the received data for each register.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1510 whether or not the check status is 2. When the check status is 2 (YES in step S1510), the host control circuit 2100 performs a determination process of whether or not the value of the normal amplifier is normal (step S1511). After that, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the processing for the number of divisions of the normal amplifier has been executed (step S1512). If the processing for the number of divisions of the normal amplifier is executed (YES in step S1512), the host control circuit 2100 sets the check status to 3 (step S1513), and the normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier (division). ) End the check process. On the other hand, if the processing for the number of divisions of the normal amplifier is not executed (NO in step S1512), the host control circuit 2100 checks the normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier (division) without updating the check status. To finish. That is, since the check status is not updated and is maintained at 2, the host control circuit 2100 performs the process when the check status is 2 again in the next and subsequent frames. When the host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1510 that the check status is not 2 (NO in step S1510), the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S1514 (see FIG. 84).

With reference to FIG. 84, the host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1514 whether or not the check status is 3. When the check status is 3 (YES in step S1514), the host control circuit 2100 performs a determination process of determining whether or not the register value checked by the deep bass amplifier is normal (step S1515). After that, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the processing for the number of divisions of the deep bass amplifier has been executed (step S1516). If the processing for the number of divisions of the deep bass amplifier is executed (YES in step S1516), the host control circuit 2100 sets the check status to 4 (step S1517), and the normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier (step S1517). (Split) End the check process. On the other hand, if the processing for the number of divisions of the deep bass amplifier is not executed (NO in step S1516), the host control circuit 2100 checks the normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier (division) without updating the check status. End the process. That is, since the check status is not updated and is maintained at 3, the host control circuit 2100 performs the process when the check status is 3 again in the next and subsequent frames. If the host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1514 that the check status is not 3 (NO in step S1514), the host control circuit 2100 proceeds to step S1518.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1518 whether or not the check status is 4. When the check status is 4 (YES in step S1518), the host control circuit 2100 clears the register value of the deep bass amplifier with an appropriate value (step S1519). After that, the host control circuit 2100 sets the check status to 5 (step S1520), and ends the normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier (division) check process. When the host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1518 that the check status is not 4, (NO in step S1518), the host control circuit 2100 proceeds to step S1521.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1521 whether or not the check status is 5. When the check status is 5 (YES in step S1521), the host control circuit 2100 performs a sorting process of the received data from the binary file (step S1522). After that, the host control circuit 2100 compares the value of the RAM of the register of the deep bass amplifier with the received data (step S1523), and updates the RAM address (step S1524). After that, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the processing for the number of divisions of the deep bass amplifier has been executed (step S1525). If the processing for the number of divisions of the deep bass amplifier is executed (YES in step S1525), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the update of the RAM address is completed (step S1526), and sets the check status. It is set to 0 (step S1527), and the normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier (division) check process is completed. When the processing for the number of divisions of the deep bass amplifier is not executed in step S1525 (NO in step S1525), and when it is determined in step S1526 that the update of the RAM address is not completed (NO in step S1526). , The host control circuit 2100 ends the normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier (division) check process without updating the check status. That is, since the check status is not updated and is maintained at 5, the host control circuit 2100 performs the process when the check status is 5 again in the next and subsequent frames. When the host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1521 that the check status is not 5 (NO in step S1521), the host control circuit 2100 ends the normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier (division) check process.

As described above, in a more preferable embodiment of the sound amplifier check process, each check process of the normal amplifier and each check process of the deep bass amplifier can be divided into 1 msec interrupt process (that is, within one frame). The check process is performed within the range, and the subsequent process is performed in the next and subsequent frames. In this way, since a part of the check process of the normal amplifier and the check process of the deep bass amplifier are performed over a plurality of frames within one frame, the entire check process of each amplifier can be executed over a plurality of frames. It will be possible.

When the check status is 4, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the processing for the number of divisions has been executed (for example, if the check status is 3, the processing in step S1516 is equivalent). Absent. This is because the processing of step S1519 performed when the check status is 4 can be performed in a short time so as not to affect the interrupt processing of 1 msec. In other words, the process performed when the check status is 4 (step S1519) is the process performed when the check status is 0 (step S1503) and the process performed when the check status is 1 (step S1506). And step S1507), the process performed when the check status is 2 (step S1511), the process performed when the check status is 3, (step S1515), and the process performed when the check status is 5 (step). This is because the time required for processing is shorter than that in steps S152 to S1524), and the interrupt processing of 1 msec is not affected. As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the processing for the number of divisions has been executed in consideration of the time required for the processing (whether or not it affects the interrupt processing of 1 msec). I have decided whether or not. However, whether or not the processing for the number of divisions is executed even if the processing does not affect the interrupt processing of 1 msec (for example, the processing such as step S1519 performed when the check status is 4). The determination may be made.

In each process of step S1503, step S1511, and step S1515, it may be possible to further divide each register into determine whether or not each register value among the plurality of registers is normal. In this case, the progress of the further divided determination may be managed by the second check status. That is, the check status (first check status) related to the processing of the major classification shown in FIGS. 83 and 84 and the check status (second check status) related to the processing of the minor classification obtained by further dividing the processing of the major classification. Therefore, the progress of processing can be managed. Similarly, in each of the processes of steps S1506 to S507 and steps S152 to S523, the process of comparing the RAM value of each register among the plurality of registers with the received data is further divided for each register. You may. In this case, the progress of the further divided processing may be managed by the second check status. That is, the check status (first check status) related to the processing of the major classification shown in FIGS. 83 and 84 and the check status (second check status) related to the processing of the minor classification obtained by further dividing the processing of the major classification. Therefore, the progress of processing can be managed. For example, even if a power failure occurs during the sub-classification process or judgment, the progress of the sub-classification process or judgment is checked by the first check status and the second check status after the power is restored. It may be controlled to restart each process and each determination.

In addition, the check status can be set to 0 when the power is turned on, and when the power is cut off during processing, various settings can be made, such as starting from the check status at the time of the previous power cut after the power is restored. Of course, if a power failure occurs, the power is turned on, or backup clear (ram clear) processing is performed, the check status is set to 0 after the power is restored, and all processing and judgment are performed again ( Alternatively, as one of the initialization processes, all processes or determinations or some processes or determinations may be performed again).

[10-9. Sound request control processing (when there are multiple sound requests for the same channel)]
Next, regarding the sound request control process shown in FIG. 61, a sound request control process when there are a plurality of sound requests (also referred to as SAC requests) for the same channel will be described with reference to FIG. 85. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing an example of sound request control processing when there are a plurality of sound requests for the same channel.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a plurality of SAC requests are made to the same playback channel in the same frame of the main loop performed in a cycle of 33.3 msec, for example, a mute command of 2 msec is performed between the SAC request and the SAC request. Is registered with. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game sound output based on the SAC request from being overlaid on other game sounds, and it is possible to output a highly accurate game sound. However, in this case, although there is an advantage that the game sound is not overwritten, there is a possibility that processing will take time. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a plurality of SAC numbers are specified (registered) in the same virtual track in the same frame of the main loop, the SAC of the second arrival is spaced apart from the first SAC request. There is a case where a request is made and a case where a second-arrival SAC request is made without a gap between the first-come-first-served SAC number. Specifically, it will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 85, in the sound request control process (when there are a plurality of sound requests for the same channel), the host control circuit 2100 first confirms the SAC number and the playback channel (step S1541). After that, the process proceeds to step S1542.

In step S1542, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not there are a plurality of SAC requests for the same reproduction channel. For example, since the SAC numbers are different between SHOT reproduction and LOOP reproduction, a plurality of SAC numbers may be specified for the same reproduction channel without intervals. When there are a plurality of SAC requests for the same reproduction channel (YES in step S1542), the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S1543. On the other hand, if there are not a plurality of SAC requests for the same playback channel (NO in step S1542), the sound request control process ends. In this embodiment, since one virtual track corresponds to one playback channel, the determination process in step S1542 is synonymous with the determination as to whether or not there is a SAC request for the same virtual track. Is. That is, the "track" is an interface for decoding and reproducing the "phrase", and the "playback channel" is the concept of reproducing the "phrase". That is, when a "playback channel" is specified and a "phrase" is requested to be played back, the phrase is played by being assigned to the corresponding "track". The "virtual track" is an "interface for controlling phrase playback". There are 128 virtual tracks, which can be automatically assigned to 32 phrase reproduction channels. However, since this function is not used in this embodiment, "virtual track" = "reproduction channel".

In step S1543, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the SHOT reproduction and the LOOP reproduction are chain reproductions. In the case of chain reproduction of SHOT reproduction and LOOP reproduction (YES in step S1543), the host control circuit 2100 executes the SAC request of LOOP reproduction one frame later (33.3 msec later) (step S1544), and controls the sound request. End the process. In the case of chain playback of SHOT playback and LOOP playback, the SAC request of LOOP playback is executed with a delay of one frame to prevent the sound of SHOT playback from being overwritten and to prevent the sound of SHOT playback from becoming difficult to hear. It becomes possible. On the other hand, if it is not a chain reproduction of SHOT reproduction and LOOP reproduction (NO in step S1543), the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S1545.

In step S1545, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the mute command between SACs is a mute setting for all playback channels. For example, when the variable display of a special symbol or a decorative symbol ends, a mute command is uniformly set between SACs for all playback channels. Then, when the mute command between SACs is the mute setting of all the reproduction channels (YES in step S1545), the host control circuit 2100 performs the SAC data corresponding to the first-come-first-served SAC request so that the mute is executed. The SAC data corresponding to the subsequent SAC request is set (step S1546) without overwriting the mute command, and the sound request control process is terminated. On the other hand, when the mute command between SACs is not set to mute all the playback channels (NO in step S1545), the mute command of each playback channel corresponds to the later SAC request so that quick processing is performed. It is overwritten with SAC data and set (step S1547), and the sound request control process is terminated.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a plurality of SAC requests are made to the same playback channel in the same frame of the main loop, when the plurality of SAC requests are chain playback of SHOT playback and LOOP playback. , The SAC number of the LOOP reproduction is delayed by one frame (for example, 33.3 msec) so as not to cover the sound of the LOOP reproduction with respect to the SHOT reproduction. SHOT reproduction is, for example, one-time reproduction of a phrase, and LOOP reproduction is, for example, LOOP reproduction (reproduction of a plurality of times) of a phrase.

In addition, when the mute command between SACs is the mute setting of all playback channels, the SAC data corresponding to the SAC number is input to the mute command without overwriting the SAC data of the subsequent arrival so that the mute is executed. to register. As a result, for example, when the variable display of the special symbol is completed, it is possible to secure the period until the variable display of the next special symbol is started. Further, when the mute command between SACs is not set to mute all the reproduction channels, the mute command of each reproduction channel is overwritten with the SAC data corresponding to the later SAC request to prevent the mute from being executed. In this way, by executing or not executing muffling depending on the situation, it is possible to ensure the speed of processing (quickness by overwriting the muffling) while making the best use of the game sound effect of muffling. ing.

[10-10. Sound request control processing (when volume adjustment is performed)]
Next, regarding the sound request control process shown in FIG. 61, variations of the sound request control process when the volume adjustment is performed will be described. In the present specification, as variations of the sound request control process when the volume adjustment is performed, five variations of the first embodiment to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 90, respectively. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing a first embodiment of the sound request control process when the volume adjustment is performed. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing a second embodiment of the sound request control process when the volume adjustment is performed. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing a third embodiment of the sound request control process when the volume is adjusted. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing a fourth embodiment of the sound request control process when the volume is adjusted. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing a fifth embodiment of the sound request control process when the volume is adjusted.

(First Example)
As shown in FIG. 86, in the first embodiment of the sound request control process (when the volume is adjusted), the host control circuit 2100 first performs the input process of the voice data specified by the SAC number (when the volume is adjusted). Step S1551). Then, the process proceeds to step S1552. The SAC number is registered in each channel by the host control circuit 2100.

In step S1552, the host control circuit 2100 designates the output destination speaker based on the voice data designated by the SAC number, and proceeds to step S1553. In this first embodiment, the audio data designated by the SAC number incorporates information on which speaker to output from. Speakers are, for example, a shared speaker that is used for general purposes (used to output normal sounds that are sounds other than specific sounds) and dedicated speakers that are used to output specific sounds (error sounds, warning sounds, etc.). It has a speaker (for example, a speaker for deep bass). The host control circuit 2100 sets which of the plurality of speakers is to be the dedicated speaker in various initialization processes (see, for example, various initialization processes in FIG. 61 (step S1201)).

In step S1553, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the volume is controlled by the hardware switch. If the volume is controlled by the hardware switch (YES in step S1553), the volume is controlled by the hardware switch (see reference numeral 2810 in FIG. 13) (step S1554), and the process proceeds to step S1556. On the other hand, if the volume is not controlled by the hardware switch (NO in step S1553), the user volume control (see reference numeral 2820 in FIG. 13) is performed (step S1555), and the process proceeds to step S1556.

In step S1556, the host control circuit 2100 performs debug volume control at the time of debugging (see reference numeral 2830 in FIG. 13), and then proceeds to step S1557.

In step S1557, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the volume control of the specific sound is performed. The specific sound corresponds to a sound that is not affected by the volume adjustment, such as an error sound. In addition, the voice data commanded by the SAC number incorporates information that the output destination of the normal sound is a shared speaker and information that the output destination of the specific sound is a dedicated speaker. There is.

When it is determined in step S1558 that the volume control of the specific sound is not performed (NO in step S1557), the host control circuit 2100 performs volume control (see reference numeral 2840 in FIG. 13) for the normal sound set in the channel (step S1558). ), The process proceeds to step S1560. In the volume control in step S1558, control is performed to change the volume according to the volume adjustment.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1557 that the volume control of the specific sound is performed (YES in step S1557), the host control circuit 2100 performs volume control (reference numeral 2850 in FIG. 13) for the specific sound set in the channel (reference numeral 2850 in FIG. 13). Step S1559) and step S1560. In the volume control in step S1559, regardless of whether or not the volume adjustment is performed, a constant volume is output without being affected by the volume adjustment (that is, even if the volume change operation is performed, the operation is concerned. Control to output a constant volume before and after the operation) is performed.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1560 whether or not volume control for the number of channels (32 channels of 1CH to 32CH in the present embodiment) has been performed.

If the volume setting for the number of channels is performed in step S1560 (YES in step S1560), the volume control incorporated in the voice data specified by the SAC number is performed (step S1561), and the sound request control process is completed. To do.

If the volume control for the number of channels is not performed in step S1560 (NO in step S1560), the host control circuit 2100 returns to step S1557 and determines YES until the volume control for the number of channels is performed (YES in step S1560). Until this is done), the processes of steps S1557 to S1560 are performed. Although not shown in FIG. 86, considering that the SAC number is specified corresponding to each channel, it is assumed that the volume control for the number of channels is also performed in the process of step S1561. good.

(Second Example)
As shown in FIG. 87, in the second embodiment of the sound request control process (when the volume is adjusted), the host control circuit 2100 first performs the input process of the voice data specified by the SAC number (when the volume is adjusted). Step S1571). Then, the process proceeds to step S1572. The SAC number is registered in each channel by the host control circuit 2100.

In this second embodiment, for example, a shared channel used for general purposes (used for outputting a normal sound that is a sound other than a specific sound) and a specific sound (error sound, warning sound, etc.) There is a dedicated channel used for output. The host control circuit 2100 includes a dedicated channel (CH31, CH32) used for outputting a specific sound among a plurality of channels (CH1 to 32) and a shared channel (CH1) used for sounds other than the specific sound. ~ CH30) are set in various initialization processes (see, for example, various initialization processes in FIG. 61 (step S1201)).

In step S1572, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the volume is controlled by the hardware switch. If the volume is controlled by the hardware switch (YES in step S1572), the volume is controlled by the hardware switch (see reference numeral 2810 in FIG. 13) (step S1573), and the process proceeds to step S1575. On the other hand, if the volume is not controlled by the hardware switch (NO in step S1572), the user volume control (see reference numeral 2820 in FIG. 13) is performed (step S1574), and the process proceeds to step S1575.

In step S1576, the host control circuit 2100 performs debug volume control at the time of debugging (see reference numeral 2830 in FIG. 13), and then proceeds to step S1576.

In step S1576, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the volume control of the specific sound is performed. Also in the second embodiment, the specific sound corresponds to a sound that is not affected by the volume adjustment, such as an error sound.

When it is determined in step S1576 that the volume control of the specific sound is not performed (NO in step S1576), the host control circuit 2100 performs volume control (see reference numeral 2840 in FIG. 13) for the normal sound set in the channel (step S1577). ), Step S1578. In the volume control in step S1577, control is performed to change the volume according to the volume adjustment.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1576 that the volume control of the specific sound is performed (YES in step S1576), the host control circuit 2100 performs volume control (reference numeral 2850 in FIG. 13) for the specific sound set in the channel (reference numeral 2850 in FIG. 13). Step S1579) and step S1582. In the volume control in step S1579, regardless of whether or not the volume adjustment has been performed, a constant volume is output without being affected by the volume adjustment (that is, even if the volume change operation is performed, the operation is concerned. Control to output a constant volume before and after the operation) is performed.

In step S1578, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the reproduction is performed on the reproduction channel that is not affected by the volume adjustment. If the playback is on a playback channel (for example, CH31, CH32) that is not affected by the volume adjustment (YES in step S1578), a constant volume is specified (step S1580). If the playback is on a playback channel (for example, CH1 to CH30) that receives volume adjustment (NO in step S1578), the volume is set according to the user volume (step S1581). When the process of step S1580 is completed or the process of step S1581 is completed, the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S1582.

In step S1582, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not volume control for the number of channels (32 channels of 1CH to 32CH in this embodiment) has been performed.

If the volume setting for the number of channels is performed in step S1632 (YES in step S1582), the volume control incorporated in the voice data specified by the SAC number is performed (step S1583), and the sound request control process is completed. To do.

If the volume control for the number of channels is not performed in step S1582 (NO in step S1582), the host control circuit 2100 returns to step S1576 and determines YES in step S1582 until the volume control for the number of channels is performed. Until this is done), the processes of steps S1576 to S1582 are performed. Although not shown in FIG. 87, it is preferable that the volume control for the number of channels is also performed in the process of step S1583.

(Third Example)
As shown in FIG. 88, in the third embodiment of the sound request control process (when the volume is adjusted), the host control circuit 2100 first performs the input process of the voice data specified by the SAC number (when the volume is adjusted). Step S1591). Then, the process proceeds to step S1592.

In step S1592, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the volume is controlled by the hardware switch. If the volume is controlled by the hardware switch (YES in step S1592), the volume is controlled by the hardware switch (see reference numeral 2810 in FIG. 13) (step S1593), and the process proceeds to step S1595. On the other hand, if the volume is not controlled by the hardware switch (NO in step S1592), the user volume control (see reference numeral 2820 in FIG. 13) is performed (step S1594), and the process proceeds to step S1595.

In step S1595, the host control circuit 2100 performs debug volume control at the time of debugging (see reference numeral 2830 in FIG. 13), and then proceeds to step S1596.

In step S1596, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the volume control of the specific sound is performed. Also in the third embodiment, the specific sound corresponds to a sound that is not affected by the volume adjustment, such as an error sound.

When it is determined in step S1596 that the volume control of the specific sound is not performed (NO in step S1596), the host control circuit 2100 performs volume control (see reference numeral 2840 in FIG. 13) for the normal sound set in the channel (step S1597). ), The process proceeds to step S1599. In the volume control in step S1597, control is performed to change the volume according to the volume adjustment.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1596 that the volume control of the specific sound is performed (YES in step S1596), the host control circuit 2100 performs volume control (reference numeral 2850 in FIG. 13) for the specific sound set in the channel (reference numeral 2850 in FIG. 13). Step S1598) and step S1599. In the volume control in step S1598, regardless of whether or not the volume adjustment has been performed, a constant volume is output without being affected by the volume adjustment (that is, even if the volume change operation is performed, the operation is concerned. Control to output a constant volume before and after the operation) is performed.

In step S1599, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the data currently in the reproduction channel (data being reproduced) is data that is not affected by the volume adjustment. If the data in the reproduction channel is not affected by the volume adjustment (YES in step S1599), the next time, a constant volume is specified for the reproduction channel (step S1600). If the data in the reproduction channel is the data to be adjusted in volume (NO in step S1599), the next time, the volume in the reproduction channel is set according to the volume adjustment (step S1601). When the process of step S1600 is completed or the process of step S1601 is completed, the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S1602.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1602 whether or not volume control for the number of channels (32 channels of 1CH to 32CH in this embodiment) has been performed.

If the volume setting for the number of channels is performed in step S1602 (YES in step S1602), the volume control incorporated in the voice data specified by the SAC number is performed (step S1603), and the sound request control process is completed. To do.

If the volume control for the number of channels is not performed in step S1602 (NO in step S1602), the host control circuit 2100 returns to step S1599 and determines YES in step S1602 until the volume control for the number of channels is performed. Until this is done), the processes of steps S1599 to S1602 are performed. Although not shown in FIG. 88, it is preferable that the volume control for the number of channels is also performed in the process of step S1603.

In this third embodiment, in step S1599, it is determined whether or not the data currently in the reproduction channel (data being reproduced) is data that is not affected by the volume adjustment, and the determination result in step S1599 is obtained. If YES, a constant volume is set for the next playback channel (step S1600), and if the determination result in step S1599 is NO, the volume according to the volume adjustment is set for the next playback channel. Instead, the modification described below may be used. That is, in this modified example, as the processing of the next step of step S1597 and step S1598, the audio data set this time and the audio data already being reproduced on the reproduction channel in which the audio data is set are volume-adjusted. After performing the process of checking whether the data is not affected, the process of determining whether the volume adjustment setting of the current audio data and the volume adjustment setting of the previous audio data are the same. I do. If the volume adjustment setting of the current audio data and the volume adjustment setting of the previous audio data are the same, a process of determining whether or not the data is not affected by the volume adjustment is performed. If the volume adjustment setting for the current audio data and the volume adjustment setting for the previous audio data are not the same, the volume adjustment will not be affected after the volume adjustment setting for the audio data set this time. Move on to the process of determining whether or not the data is data. Move on to the process of determining whether or not the data is not affected by the volume adjustment. Then, if the data is not affected by the volume adjustment, a process of setting a constant volume is performed on the playback channel, and if the data is affected by the volume adjustment, the volume adjustment is applied to the playback channel. Performs the process of setting the volume. After that, as in step S1602, it is preferable to move to the process of determining whether or not the number of channels has been set. In this modified example, the processing different from that of the third embodiment is only the processing described above, and the other processing is the processing of the third embodiment (processes of steps S1592 to S1598 shown in FIG. 88, processing of step S1602, and so on. And the process of step S1603).

(Fourth Example)
As shown in FIG. 89, in the fourth embodiment of the sound request control process (when the volume adjustment is performed), the host control circuit 2100 first determines whether the SAC number is the SAC number affected by the volume adjustment. Confirm whether or not (step S1611). Then, the process proceeds to step S1612.

In step S1612, the host control circuit 2100 updates the flag indicating whether or not the SAC number is affected by the volume adjustment, and inputs the voice data specified by the SAC number (step S1613). Specifically, the flag is set to ON when the SAC number is affected by the volume adjustment (the flag is OFF when the SAC number is not affected by the volume adjustment).

In step S1614, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the volume is controlled by the hardware switch. If the volume is controlled by the hardware switch (YES in step S1614), the volume is controlled by the hardware switch (see reference numeral 2810 in FIG. 13) (step S1615), and the process proceeds to step S1617. On the other hand, if the volume is not controlled by the hardware switch (NO in step S1614), the user volume control (see reference numeral 2820 in FIG. 13) is performed (step S1616), and the process proceeds to step S1617.

In step S1617, the host control circuit 2100 performs debug volume control at the time of debugging (see reference numeral 2830 in FIG. 13), and then proceeds to step S1618.

In step S1618, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the volume control of the specific sound is performed. Also in the fourth embodiment, the specific sound corresponds to a sound that is not affected by the volume adjustment, such as an error sound.

When it is determined in step S1618 that the volume control of the specific sound is not performed (NO in step S1618), the host control circuit 2100 performs volume control (see reference numeral 2840 in FIG. 13) for the normal sound set in the channel (step S1619). ), The process proceeds to step S1620. In the volume control in step S1619, control is performed to change the volume according to the volume adjustment.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1618 that the volume control of the specific sound is performed (YES in step S1618), the host control circuit 2100 performs volume control (reference numeral 2850 in FIG. 13) for the specific sound set in the channel (reference numeral 2850 in FIG. 13). Step S1622) and step S1624. In the volume control in step S1622, regardless of whether or not the volume adjustment has been performed, a constant volume is output without being affected by the volume adjustment (that is, even if the volume change operation is performed, the operation is concerned. Control to output a constant volume before and after the operation) is performed.

In step S1620, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the reproduction is performed on the reproduction channel that is not affected by the volume adjustment. That is, it is determined in step S1612 whether or not the flag is set to ON. When the reproduction is performed on the reproduction channel that is not affected by the volume adjustment (YES in step S1620), a constant volume is specified for the reproduction channel (step S1621), and the process proceeds to step S1624. When the reproduction is not performed on the reproduction channel that is not affected by the volume adjustment (NO in step S1620), the volume corresponding to the volume adjustment is set in the reproduction channel (step S1623), and the process proceeds to step S1624.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1624 whether or not volume control for the number of channels (32 channels of 1CH to 32CH in this embodiment) has been performed.

If the volume setting for the number of channels is performed in step S1624 (YES in step S1624), the volume control incorporated in the audio data specified by the SAC number is performed (step S1625), and the sound request control process is completed. To do.

If the volume control for the number of channels is not performed in step S1624 (NO in step S1624), the host control circuit 2100 returns to step S1618 and determines YES as the volume control for the number of channels is performed in step S1624. Until this is done), the processes of steps S1618 to S1624 are performed. Although not shown in FIG. 89, it is preferable that the volume control for the number of channels is also performed in the process of step S1625.

(Fifth Example)
As shown in FIG. 90, in the fifth embodiment of the sound request control process (when the volume is adjusted), the host control circuit 2100 first performs an input process of voice data specified by the SAC number (when volume adjustment is performed). Step S1631). After that, the process proceeds to step S1632.

The host control circuit 2100 confirms whether the audio data is audio data for which each channel undergoes volume adjustment (step S1633). Specifically, when the audio data specified by the SAC number is the audio data affected by the volume adjustment, the flag is set to ON (the audio data specified by the SAC number is not affected by the volume adjustment). If it is voice data, the flag is OFF).

In step S1633, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the volume is controlled by the hardware switch. If the volume is controlled by the hardware switch (YES in step S1633), the volume is controlled by the hardware switch (see reference numeral 2810 in FIG. 13) (step S1634), and the process proceeds to step S1636. On the other hand, if the volume is not controlled by the hardware switch (NO in step S1633), the user volume control (see reference numeral 2820 in FIG. 13) is performed (step S1635), and the process proceeds to step S1636.

In step S1636, the host control circuit 2100 performs debug volume control during debugging (see reference numeral 2830 in FIG. 13), and then proceeds to step S1637.

In step S1637, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the volume control of the specific sound is performed. Also in the fifth embodiment, the specific sound corresponds to a sound that is not affected by the volume adjustment, such as an error sound.

When it is determined in step S1637 that the volume control of the specific sound is not performed (NO in step S1637), the host control circuit 2100 performs volume control (see reference numeral 2840 in FIG. 13) for the normal sound set in the channel (step S1638). ), The process proceeds to step S1639. In the volume control in step S1638, control is performed to change the volume according to the volume adjustment.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1637 that the volume control of the specific sound is performed (YES in step S1637), the host control circuit 2100 performs volume control (reference numeral 2850 in FIG. 13) for the specific sound set in the channel (reference numeral 2850 in FIG. 13). Step S1640) and step S1643. In the volume control in step S1640, regardless of whether or not the volume adjustment is performed, a constant volume is output without being affected by the volume adjustment (that is, even if the volume change operation is performed, the operation is concerned. A constant volume is output before and after the operation) is performed.

In step S1639, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the channel is not affected by the volume adjustment. That is, it is determined in step S1632 whether or not the flag is set to ON. If the channel is not affected by the volume adjustment (YES in step S1639), a constant volume is set for the playback channel (step S1641). If the channel is affected by the volume adjustment (NO in step S1639), the volume corresponding to the volume adjustment is set in the playback channel (step S1642). When the process of step S1641 is completed or the process of step S1642 is completed, the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S1643.

In step S1643, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not volume control for the number of channels (32 channels of 1CH to 32CH in this embodiment) has been performed.

If the volume setting for the number of channels is performed in step S1643 (YES in step S1643), the volume control incorporated in the audio data specified by the SAC number is performed (step S1644), and the sound request control process is completed. To do.

If the volume control for the number of channels is not performed in step S1643 (NO in step S1643), the host control circuit 2100 returns to step S1637 and determines YES in step S1643 until the volume control for the number of channels is performed. Until this is done), the processes of steps S1637 to S1643 are performed. Although not shown in FIG. 90, it is preferable that the volume control for the number of channels is also performed in the process of step S1644.

According to the sound request control process (1st to 5th examples) when the volume adjustment is performed as described above, when the volume adjustment is performed, the volume corresponding to the volume adjustment is output for the normal sound. On the other hand, for a serious specific sound such as an error sound, even if the volume is adjusted, it is possible to easily perform voice control such as outputting a constant volume from the speaker.

[10-11. LED brightness adjustment process]
Next, the brightness adjustment of the LED will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 and 91. FIG. 91 is an attenuation table showing an example of the luminance attenuation values of each color (red, green, blue) according to the emission intensity of the strong, medium, and weak LEDs. This attenuation table is stored in the sub-main ROM 2050 (see, for example, FIG. 10).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured so that the brightness of the LED can be adjusted in three stages by, for example, an operation of a player or the like. Specifically, when the brightness adjustment operation is performed on the brightness setting screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device used as the display device 16, the host control circuit 2100 performs the attenuation table switching process shown in FIG. 91. For example, when an operation of changing from strong to medium among the three levels of brightness is performed, the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of switching the reference table from strong to medium in the attenuation table of FIG.

The LED whose brightness can be adjusted by the operation of a player or the like may be, for example, an LED provided on a glass door 13 (see, for example, FIG. 2), or may be, for example, a backlight of a liquid crystal display device used as a display device 16. It may be. The brightness adjustment of the LED is not limited to three steps, and may be configured so that the LED brightness can be adjusted in more steps, for example.

The output value of the LED is represented by the following equation (1).
LED output value = brightness value based on LED data x (100-luminance attenuation value) / 100 ... Equation (1)
The output value of the LED of the above formula (1) can also be set for each reproduction channel of the LED. The parameter changed by the operation of the player is the luminance attenuation value. For example, when the brightness attenuation value is 0, the brightness is the strongest, and when the brightness attenuation value is 100, the brightness is the weakest and the light is turned off. Further, the calculation of the output value of the LED is performed inside the sequencer 2260b (see FIG. 11).

For the LED data table that defines LED data and playback patterns, a BLD file (LED animation) is created using tools such as ActiveLED (UE) and LEDMaker (UE), and information is added to the created BLD file. While doing so, it is created by converting with the LED list (Excel macro) (UE).

By the way, in the case of a three-primary-color full-color LED, if the brightness attenuation values of red, green, and blue are uniformly the same, the white balance may be lost, and for example, what was white may turn yellow. For example, when the brightness of the LED is reduced, it is necessary to make the brightness attenuation value of blue the largest among red, green and blue, and it is preferable to make the brightness attenuation value of red the smallest.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, even when the brightness of the LED is changed by the operation of a player or the like, the brightness attenuation value is set for each of the 1024 ports, for example, to make white. It is configured to maintain the balance as much as possible.

Specifically, when the brightness of the LED is adjusted to one of strong, medium, and weak by the operation of a player or the like, the voice / LED control circuit 2200 refers to the attenuation table of FIG. The brightness of the LED is controlled based on the brightness attenuation values set for each of green and blue. Since the attenuation table is prepared for each of 1024 ports (for each LED), for example, the attenuation value can be set for each port.

For example, when the brightness of the LED is set to be strong by the operation of a player or the like, the sequencer 2260b of the voice / LED control circuit 2200 has a red brightness attenuation value of 0, a green brightness attenuation value of 5, and a blue brightness attenuation value of 25. Is substituted into the above equation (1) to calculate the output value of the LED. Similarly, in the sequencer 2260b of the voice / LED control circuit 2200, when the brightness of the LED is set to the middle by the operation of a player or the like, the brightness attenuation value 50 for red, the brightness attenuation value 53 for green, and the brightness attenuation value for blue are set. When 63 is substituted into the above equation (1) and the brightness of the LED is set to be weak by an operation of a player or the like, the brightness attenuation value of red 80, the brightness attenuation value 81 of green, and the brightness attenuation value of blue 85 are set. Substituting into the above equation (1), the output value of the LED is calculated. Then, the voice / LED control circuit 2200 controls the light emission of the LED based on the output value of the LED calculated in this way.

In this way, the audio / LED control circuit 2200 calculates the LED output value based on the brightness attenuation values set corresponding to each of red, green, and blue, and based on the calculated LED output value. By controlling the light emission of the LED, it is possible to maintain the white balance as much as possible even if the brightness of the LED is changed by an operation of, for example, a player or the like.

[10-12. Accessory solenoid control process]
Next, the accessory solenoid control process will be described with reference to FIGS. 61, 62, and 92. FIG. 92 is a block diagram showing an example of a connection state between the LED port and the LED and the solenoid.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, the movements of the movable body (role) provided in the game area are diversified, and the control of the movable body is complicated accordingly. Therefore, for simple movements among a wide variety of movements of the movable body, the control load of the movable body is suppressed by operating the members constituting the accessory with a solenoid or by providing the accessory with a locking mechanism. I am trying to. When the motor driver that operates the accessory receives a request for motor operation (accessory request), the motor driver outputs the contents of the motor operation data in order. The output of the motor driver and the determination of the end of motor operation are performed by a timer interrupt process of 1 msec as shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, output determination and end determination (that is, determination of start and end) of the accessory motor are performed, and synchronous control of a plurality of motors is also performed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 92, the voice / LED control circuit 2200 of the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment has the LED on the frame side connected to each LED port and the LED on the frame side based on the command from the host control circuit 2100. The light emission of the LED on the board surface side (for example, the LED arranged on the game board unit 17 or the backlight of the liquid crystal display device used as the display device 16) is controlled via the LED driver. Then, among the LED ports (Port 0 to Port 23) controlled by the LED driver, the above solenoid is connected to Port 6, and the LED is connected to the other Port.

The voice / LED control circuit 2200 receives a command from the host control circuit 2100 and executes the light emission of the LEDs connected to the ports of the frame side LED and the board side LED via the LED driver. By connecting the solenoid to the port 6, the operation of the solenoid can also be executed via the LED driver. As a result, even if the number of solenoids increases due to the diversification of the movement of the accessory, it is possible to suppress the control load for operating the accessory while maintaining the diversity of the movement of the accessory. ..

By the way, when the operation of the solenoid is executed via the LED driver as shown in FIG. 92, it is necessary to synchronously control the operation of the motor for operating the accessory and the operation of the solenoid. It should be noted that the operation of the accessory is performed by interrupt processing of 1 msec including the synchronous control of a plurality of motors.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a control code is added to the accessory sequence table, and when it is desired to synchronously control the solenoid and a plurality of motors that operate the accessory, a value larger than 0 is added to the control code. I try to set it. Then, the host control circuit 2100 acquires the control code of the accessory being reproduced by the accessory device in the processing of the main loop (see step S1204 of FIG. 61), and the acquired control code has a value larger than 0. In this case, the control of the LED port corresponding to the control code (for example, Port 6 to which the above solenoid is connected) is executed (see step S1205 in FIG. 61). This makes it possible to execute synchronous control between the solenoid and a plurality of motors that operate the accessory.

The control of the LED port corresponding to the control code is executed in the main loop so as not to affect the normal LED control executed by the interrupt process of 1 msec.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the solenoid is connected to some of the LED ports (Port0 to Port23), for example, the brightness of the LED described above is adjusted by an operation of a player or the like. Then, the voltage to the solenoid is also reset, but it is considered that the influence on the solenoid is small because the operation of the solenoid is only ON / OFF. Further, when the synchronization effect for synchronizing the light emission of the LED and the operation of the solenoid is executed, it is possible to easily execute the synchronization effect.

[10-13. Data load processing]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a data load process is performed as one of various initialization processes (see step S1201 in FIG. 61) executed when the power is turned on. In addition, data loading processing may be performed during the game. These data load processes include data transfer from the ROM to the RAM or buffer (eg, data transfer from the sub-main ROM 2050 to the SRAM 2100b, data transfer from the CGROM 2060 to the built-in VRAM 2370 (eg, all see FIG. 10)), that is. , A process of loading data stored in a ROM into a RAM or a buffer (data load process).

If the amount of data to be transferred is large, the above data load process takes a long time to load, and the watchdog may be reset to end the data load process. When the watchdog is reset, it is difficult to determine whether the cause of the reset is simply because the amount of data is large and it takes time, or because an error has occurred during data loading. Further, when the data loading process is completed, the host control circuit 2100 cannot determine whether the loading is completed or the loading is unsuccessful, and continues to wait for the loading completion, so that the automatic recovery cannot be performed. There is a risk of becoming.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the time required for the data load processing exceeds a predetermined upper limit value, the data load process is terminated as an error and the data is reloaded. Hereinafter, the data loading process will be described with reference to FIG. 93. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing an example of a data load process executed as one of various initialization processes by the host control circuit 2100.

As shown in FIG. 93, the host control circuit 2100 first sets the upper limit of the transfer time (step S1651). The transfer time is the time required to load data from ROM to RAM. The upper limit of the transfer time varies depending on the amount of data to be transferred, but in the present embodiment, it is determined by the following equation (2).
Upper limit of transfer time = (transfer data amount per unit time) x (transfer time guideline + α) ・ ・ ・ Equation (2)
The transfer data amount and transfer time guideline per unit time of the above equation (2) may be set in advance based on the transfer data amount, or for example, the host control circuit 2100 based on the transfer data amount. It may be calculated by. Note that α is a time for allowing a margin for data loading.

When the process of step S1651 is completed, the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S1652 and starts loading data from the ROM to the RAM.

After starting the data loading (step S1652), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the data loading is completed (step S1653). If the data loading is not completed (NO in step S1653), the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S1654. On the other hand, if the data load is completed (YES in step S1653), the host control circuit 2100 ends the data load process.

In step S1654, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the data transfer time exceeds the upper limit value. If the data transfer time exceeds the upper limit value (YES in step S1654), the watchdog timer is cleared at regular intervals (step S1655). On the other hand, if the data transfer time exceeds the upper limit value (NO in step S1654), the host control circuit 2100 determines that an error has occurred and executes error processing. The error processing executed here is a processing of resetting the load data by watchdog reset (step S1656) and reloading without performing the watchdog timer clearing processing. After that, the host control circuit 2100 returns to step S1654. That is, when the data transfer time exceeds the upper limit value (NO in step S1654), the data is reloaded as an error process.

In this way, when performing data load processing, the host control circuit 2100 keeps clearing the watchdog timer at regular intervals while waiting for the completion of loading so that the watchdog reset does not occur during normal loading. I have to. However, when the data load process exceeds a predetermined upper limit value, the host control circuit 2100 resets the load data and reloads the data. As a result, even if it takes time to load the data, the data is automatically restored by reloading.

[10-14. Sub-random number processing]
Next, the sub-random number processing executed in the main loop by the host control circuit 2100 will be described.

The sub-random number processing includes a random number initialization process executed as one of various initialization processes (see step S1201 in FIG. 61) when the power is turned on, a random number periodic update process executed periodically, and a random number periodic update process. It includes a random number acquisition process that is executed when a random number is used. The sub-random number processing is different from the lottery of special symbols by the main CPU 101 (see, for example, FIG. 9) related to the ball ejection, and is a process for random numbers used for, for example, determining the effect mode, which does not affect the ball ejection. However, the sub-random number processing described below may be applied to the random number processing executed by the main CPU 101. These sub-random number processing described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 97. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing an example of a random number initialization process executed as one of various initialization processes by the host control circuit 2100. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing an example of the random number periodic update process. FIG. 96 shows (a) a flowchart showing an example of random number 1 acquisition processing, (b) a flowchart showing an example of random number 2 acquisition processing, (c) a flowchart showing an example of random number 3 acquisition processing, and (d) random number 4 acquisition processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing an example of a random number acquisition process executed when a random number is used.

In the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, four random numbers are used (random numbers 1 to 4), and the initialization processing for these four random numbers is performed by clearing the game data RAM as shown in FIG. It is executed at the same timing.

As shown in FIG. 94, in the random number initialization process, the host control circuit 2100 first acquires the RTC time (minutes / seconds) (step S1671), and then enters the loop for the number of random numbers.

In the loop for the number of random numbers, the host control circuit 2100 first creates a random number SEED (step S1672). The random number SEED creation in the random number initialization process is executed based on the following equation (3).
SEED (random numbers 1 to 4) = (RTC time (seconds) + (RTC time (minutes) x 60) + random number number (random numbers 1 to 4)) x initial prime number ... Equation (3)

The host control circuit 2100 creates a random number SEED in step S1672, and then stores the random number SEED created in step S1672 in a random number backup, that is, SRAM 2100b (see, for example, FIG. 10) (step S1673). The random number SEED backed up here is the random number SEED created this time, but the information backed up up to the previous time may be deleted or may be continuously stored.

When the host control circuit 2100 executes the processes of steps S1672 and S1673 for the number of random numbers (four random numbers 1 to 4 in the present embodiment), the host control circuit 2100 exits the loop for the number of random numbers and ends the random number initialization process.

As described above, the minutes and seconds of the RTC time are used in the random number initialization process. Therefore, the random number SEED at the time of initialization is involved in the time when the power is turned on in units of minutes and seconds.

Next, the random number periodic update process will be described with reference to FIG. 95. The random number periodic update process is a process of periodically updating the random numbers 1 to 4 even if none of the random numbers 1 to 4 is used in the waiting for the end of the bank flip shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 95, in the random number periodic update process, the host control circuit 2100 has a random number 1 acquisition process (step S1681), a random number 2 acquisition process (step S1682), a random number 3 acquisition process (step S1683), and a random number 4 acquisition process. The processing (step S1684) is performed in this order. The random number periodic update process is always executed while waiting for the end of the bank flip. Further, even if the bank flip end wait does not occur due to any processing failure in the main loop, the host control circuit 2100 performs random number periodic update processing once in one frame.

As shown in FIG. 96A, the random number 1 acquisition process updates the random number 1 (step S1685), that is, after acquiring the random number 1, the random number 1 is updated. After that, the acquired random number 1 is stored in the random number 1 backup, that is, SRAM 2100b (see, for example, FIG. 10) (step S1686). Similarly, as shown in FIG. 96B, the random number 2 acquisition process updates the random number 2 (step S1688) and backs up the random number 2 (step S1688). Similarly, as shown in FIG. 96 (c), the random number 3 acquisition process updates the random number 3 (step S1689) and backs up the random number 3 (step S1690). Similarly, as shown in FIG. 96 (d), the random number 4 acquisition process updates the random number 4 (step S1691) and backs up the random number 4 (step S1692). The random numbers backed up in step S1686, step S1688, step S1690, and step S1692 are the random numbers acquired this time, but the information backed up up to the previous time may be deleted or may be continuously stored. ..

Note that any of the random numbers 1 to 4 is obtained from the random numbers generated in the range of 0 to 32767, but the range of the generated random numbers is not limited to this.

As shown in FIG. 97, in the random number acquisition process executed when the random number is used, the host control circuit 2100 first performs the random number 3 acquisition process (step S1693). This random number 3 acquisition process is a process of acquiring a random number to be used for determining the random number to be used among the random number 1, the random number 2, and the random number 4. When the random number 3 acquisition process of step S1693 is executed, the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S1694.

In step S1694, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the remainder number (hereinafter, simply referred to as “remainder number”) when the random number acquired in the random number 3 acquisition process in step S1693 is divided by 4 is 0 or 1. To determine. If the number of remainders is 0 or 1 (YES in step S1694), the random number 1 acquisition process is performed (step S1695). On the other hand, if the remainder number is neither 0 nor 1 (NO in step S1694), the process proceeds to step S1696.

In step S1696, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the remainder number is 2. If the number of remainders is 2 (YES in step S1696), the random number 2 acquisition process is performed (step S1697). On the other hand, if the remainder number is not 2 (NO in step S1696), the process proceeds to step S1698.

In step S1698, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the remainder number is 3. If the number of remainders is 3 (YES in step S1698), the random number 4 acquisition process is performed (step S1699). On the other hand, if the remainder number is not 3 (NO in step S1698), this means that there is no remainder number 0 to 3, so the process is repeated from step S1693.

The random number 1 acquisition process (step S1695), the random number 2 acquisition process (step S1697), the random number 3 acquisition process (step S1693), and the random number 4 acquisition process (step S1699) are all as shown in FIG. ..

In this way, in the random number acquisition process executed when a random number is used, the selected random number among the random number 1, the random number 2 and the random number 4 is updated, but the random number not selected is updated. Not done.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a random number initialization process is performed when the power is turned on, and when a random number is used, a random number acquisition process is performed for the selected random number, waiting for the bank flip to end or the bank flip to end. Random number periodic update processing is performed even if no wait occurs.

The calculation formula at the time of random number update is as shown in the following formula (4).
This time update value = (previous update value x prime number of each random number) + 1 ... Equation (4)
Here, the return value of the random number acquisition process is a value of 0 to 32767 that is right-shifted and returned from 32 bits to 16 bits. That is, the current update value calculated based on the above equation (4) is represented by 32 bits, and the current update value of the 32 bits is right-shifted and returned from 32 bits to 16 bits. Then, the 16th bit is masked, and the value shown in 1 to 15 bits (any of 0 to 32767) is determined as the update value this time.

By performing the above-mentioned sub-random number processing, the acquired random numbers can be made random, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of bias in the acquired random numbers. In particular, since the random number SEED at the time of initialization is involved in the time when the power is turned on in units of minutes and seconds, it is possible to make the initial value different each time.

[10-14-1. Modification example of sub-random number processing]
Although the sub-random number processing in the present embodiment has been described above, the sub-random number processing (modification example) described below may be performed in place of or in combination with the above-mentioned sub-random number processing. Further, the sub-random number processing (modification example) described below may be applied to the random number processing executed by the main CPU 101. A modification of this sub-random number processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99. Note that FIG. 98 is a sub-control main process (overall flow) executed by the host control circuit 2100 for explaining a modified example of the sub-random number process. However, in FIG. 98, only the processing necessary for the explanation is shown, and the other processing is omitted. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing an example of the reception interrupt process executed by the host control circuit 2100.

The host control circuit 2100 first performs a random number initialization process executed as one of various initialization processes (see step S1201 in FIG. 61) (step S1701). In this random number initialization process, for example, a random number seed of a power of 2 (a perfect power) and a current random number seed number are prepared, and a predetermined initial value is set in the stack pointer.

When the random number initialization process of step S1701 is performed, the host control circuit 2100 enters the main loop, performs input processing of the subdevice (step S1702), and then performs various request control processes (step S1703). In this various request control process (step S1703), the output is output to various devices based on the request created in step S1705 described later one frame before.

When the input process of the subdevice (step S1702) and various request control processes (step S1703) are performed, the host control circuit 2100 performs a random number table creation process (step S1704). In the random number table creation process of step S1704, a new random number table is created by updating the random numbers registered in the random number table having a power of 2 size at the drawing timing. For the acquisition of the random numbers registered in the random number table, for example, among the random number seeds of powers of 2, the random number seeds determined based on the current random number seed number are used. For example, if the random number seed a~h 2 3 ⁽⁸⁾ are prepared, the current random number seed number if 4, the random number seed d is used.

In step S1704, the host control circuit 2100 ^{can create, for example, a random number table having a size of 25} (32), and 32 random numbers are registered in this random number table. When the random number is registered in the random number table, the host control circuit 2100 updates the value of the random number seed. The random number seed is updated by adding 1 after multiplying the previous update value × the prime number, as in the above equation (4). In this modification, the size of the random number table may be a power of 2 (pieces), and ²⁵ (32) is used, but any power of 2 (pieces) can be used. good.

As shown in FIG. 99, the random number seed used for creating the random number table in step S1704 is, for example, the value of the CPU counter by the CPU processor of the host control circuit 2100 when receiving a serial command (step S1801). It is updated using (step S1802). In the random number seed update process of step S1802, the random number seed number used for creating the random number table is updated by incrementing the random number seed number and using the incremented random number seed number as the current random number seed number.

Returning to FIG. 98 and performing the random number table creation process in step S1704, the host control circuit 2100 enters the packet reception loop.

In the packet reception loop, the host control circuit 2100 performs an animation construction process (step S1705) for creating a request for animation for moving image production, and performs a random number acquisition process when a random number is used (step S1706). The request created in step S1705 is output in the next frame after waiting in the buffer.

The host control circuit 2100 acquires random numbers from the random number table created in step S1704 in the random number acquisition process of step S1706. The random numbers acquired here are used in a lottery related to the effect executed by the host control circuit 2100 (for example, a lottery for determining an animation for moving image effect). When the host control circuit 2100 acquires a random number from the random number table in step S1706, the host control circuit 2100 updates (increments) the reference position of the random number table. The reference position of the random number table is only performed when a random number is acquired from the random number table, and is not performed in the random number table creation process in step S1704.

The host control circuit 2100 repeats the processes of steps S1705 and S1706 for the number of received packets. When the processing of step S1705 and step S1706 is performed for the packet reception, the host control circuit 2100 exits the packet reception loop.

Upon exiting the packet reception loop, the host control circuit 2100 performs animation update processing (step S1707), and then waits for bank flip / bank flip end (step S1708).

The host control circuit 2100 repeats the processes of steps S1702 to S1708 in the main loop having a period of 33.3 msec.

According to the above-mentioned modification of the sub-random number processing, even if there are multiple random number acquisition opportunities in the packet reception loop, only the random number is acquired by changing the reference position using the same random number table already created. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load of the host control circuit 2100 while giving irregularity to the acquired random numbers.

[10-15. Other expansion examples]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can apply the present invention to all gaming machines in which a game is played using a game medium and benefits are given based on the result of the game. That is, not only is the game played by the game medium being launched or thrown in by the physical movement of the player, and the game medium is paid out based on the result of the game, but the main control circuit 100 itself is The game medium owned by the player may be electromagnetically managed to enable a game performed by circulating the enclosed game ball or a game performed without a medal. Further, it may be a game medium management device that is attached (connected) to the main control circuit 100 and manages the game medium to electromagnetically manage the game medium owned by the player.

When the game medium management device connected to the main control circuit 100 manages the game medium management device, the game medium management device has a ROM and an RWM (or RAM) and is provided in the game machine, and is an external game (not shown). It is connected to a two-way communication function via a medium handling device and a predetermined interface, and provides a game medium necessary for a game medium lending operation (that is, a player performs a game medium loading operation). Operation) or when a winning combination related to the payout of the game medium is won (the winning combination is established), the payout action of the game medium (that is, the payout of the game medium to the player is performed, and the necessary game medium is acquired. It suffices that the operation of electromagnetically recording the game medium used for the game can be performed. Further, the game media management device not only manages the actual number of game media, but also displays the number of game media to be held on the front surface of the pachinko game machine 1, for example, based on the management result of the number of game media. A game medium number display device (not shown) may be provided, and the number of game media displayed on the possessed game medium number display device may be managed. That is, the game media management device may be capable of recording and displaying the total number of game media that the player can use for the game by an electromagnetic method.

Further, in this case, the game medium management device has a performance that allows the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to an external game medium handling device, and also has a game. In addition to the case where a person directly operates the game medium, the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and an external connection terminal plate (not shown) is provided between the device and an external game medium handling device. In some cases, it is desirable that the player has the ability to transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media only through the external connection terminal plate.

In addition to the above, the game machine is provided with a lending operation means, a return (payment) operation means, and an external connection terminal plate that can be operated by the player, and the game medium handling device is provided with a slot for valuable value such as banknotes and a recording medium. (For example, IC card) insertion slot, non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money from mobile terminals, other various operation means such as lending operation means, return operation means, external connection terminal board on the game media handling device side It may be provided (neither is shown).

As a flow of the game at that time, for example, the player deposits valuable value to the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of any of the above lending operation means. Then, the number of game media corresponding to the valuable value subtracted from the game media handling device to the game media management device is increased. Then, the player plays a game, and if a game medium is required, the above operation is repeated. After that, a predetermined number of game media are acquired as a result of the game, and when the game is finished, the number of game media is transmitted from the game media management device to the game media handling device by operating one of the return operation means, and the game is played. The medium handling device discharges a recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. The game media management device clears the number of game media stored by itself when the number of game media is transmitted. The player takes the discharged recording medium to a prize counter or the like for exchanging prizes, or moves the game table to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another table.

In the above example, all the game media are transmitted to the game medium handling device, but only the number of game media desired by the player is transmitted on the game machine or the game medium handling device side, and the game medium possessed by the player is transmitted. It may be divided and processed. Further, not only the recording medium is discharged, but cash or a cash equivalent may be discharged, or the recording medium may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. Further, the game medium handling device may be capable of inserting a member recording medium of the game hall and storing the member recording medium in the member recording medium so that the game can be replayed at a later date.

Further, in the game machine or the game medium handling device, a lock operation for locking the game medium or valuable value data communication can be executed on the game medium handling device or the game medium management device by operating a predetermined operation means (not shown). May be good. In that case, information such as a one-time password that only the player can know may be set, or the player may be recorded by an imaging means provided in the game medium handling device.

Further, in the above, the case where the game medium management device is applied to the pachinko game machine is described, but the game medium management device is also used in the pachislot machine, the slot machine using the game ball, and the enclosed game machine. It can also be provided so that the player's game medium is managed.

In this way, by providing the game medium management device described above, the number of parts inside the game machine can be reduced as compared with the case where the game medium is physically used for the game, and the cost and manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced. Not only can it be reduced, but it is also possible to prevent the player from coming into direct contact with the game medium, improving the game environment, reducing noise, and reducing the power consumption of the game machine by reducing the number of parts. It will also be. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts through the game medium and the slot and payout port of the game medium. That is, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of improving various environments surrounding the game machine.

In addition, a communication cable is used to transmit data on an enclosed game machine configured so that the game medium can be played without being discharged to the outside, and an increase / decrease in the game medium due to consumption, lending, and payout of the game medium to the game machine. When the present invention is applied to a game system having a game medium management device connected so as to be able to transmit and receive by an optical signal via an optical signal, the game system may be configured as follows.

The outline of the enclosed game machine will be described below. In the enclosed game machine, the launching device is located above the game area and launches a game ball as a game medium from above with respect to the game area. When the player operates the handle, the payout control circuit drives the ball feed solenoid, and the ball feed punch pushes the ball in the standby state toward the launch pad. As a result, the game ball moves to the launch pad. In addition, a subtraction sensor is provided on the path from the standby position to the launch pad to detect a game ball moving to the launch pad. When the game ball is detected by the subtraction sensor, the number of balls held is subtracted by 1. In this way, since the game ball as the game medium is launched from above with respect to the game area, the so-called return ball (foul ball) can be avoided in the enclosed game machine. Then, the game ball discharged from the game area after rolling in the game area is polished by the ball polishing device. The game ball polished by the ball polishing device is transported upward by the lifting device and guided to the launching device. The game balls are not discharged to the outside of the enclosed game machine, and a certain number (for example, 50) of game balls are configured to circulate in a series of paths in the game machine.

In the enclosed game machine, since the game ball is not discharged to the outside of the game machine, an upper plate or a lower plate for temporarily holding the game ball is not provided. Since the game ball is not discharged to the outside in the enclosed game machine, the game ball is not actually in the player's hand, and the game ball does not actually increase or decrease by playing the game. In the enclosed game machine, the player starts the game after obtaining a ball by lending from the game medium management device. Here, obtaining a holding ball means that the player obtains a game medium in terms of data management. Then, when the game ball is launched from the launching device, the possessed ball is consumed and the number of possessed balls decreases. In addition, as the game balls pass through each winning opening or the like provided in the game area, the number of balls held is increased by paying out the number according to the conditions set according to the winning opening. Furthermore, the number of balls held will increase by lending from the game media management device. In addition, "consumption, lending and payout of game media" means that the ball is consumed, lent and paid out. In addition, "increase / decrease in game media" means that the number of balls held increases / decreases due to consumption, lending, and payout. In addition, "data on increase / decrease in game media due to consumption, lending, and payout of game media" is data on a decrease in the number of balls held due to the launch of a game ball and an increase in the number of balls held due to lending and paying out.

The enclosed game machine has a payout control circuit and a touch panel type liquid crystal display device. The payout control circuit is connected to various sensors that detect the passage of the game ball through each winning opening or the like. The payout control circuit manages the number of balls held. For example, when a game ball passes through each winning opening, the number of game balls paid out due to this is added to the number of balls held. Also, when the game ball is launched, the number of balls held is subtracted. The payout control circuit transmits data regarding the number of balls held to the game medium management device by the operation of the player. Further, the above-mentioned liquid crystal display device is located at the upper part of the game machine, and receives a request for conversion (ball lending) from the game value managed by the game medium management device to a ball held (ball lending) and counting (return) of the ball held. Then, these requests are transmitted to the payout control circuit via the game medium management device, and the payout control circuit instructs the game medium management device to transmit data regarding the current number of balls held. Here, the "game value" refers to money / banknotes, prepaid media, tokens, electronic money, tickets, etc., which can be converted into holding balls by the game media management device. In the present embodiment, the game media management device is a so-called CR unit, and is configured to be able to accept banknotes, prepaid media, and the like. In addition, the counted balls can be used for prize exchange and the like at a game hall where a game system is installed.

In addition, the enclosed game machine has a backup power supply. As a result, even when the power is turned off at night or the like, the data immediately before the power is turned off can be retained. Further, with this backup power supply, for example, the door frame opening detection by the door opening sensor may be continuously executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent cheating at night. In this case, information such as the number of times the door frame is opened may be stored. Further, when the power is turned on, information such as the number of times the door frame is opened may be output to the liquid crystal display device of the game machine or the like.

The game medium management device has a game machine connection board. The game medium management device is configured to transmit / receive data (transmission signal) to / from the game machine via the game machine connection board. The data to be transmitted and received includes the unique ID of the CPU provided in the main control circuit, the unique ID of the CPU provided in the payout control circuit, the game machine manufacturer code stored in the game machine, the security chip manufacturer code, and the game. Information such as the model code of the machine. Then, when one of the game machine and the game medium management device is used as a transmission source and the other is used as a transmission destination, and the transmission source transmits a transmission signal, the transmission destination that receives the transmission signal is the same signal as the transmission signal. The confirmation signal is transmitted to the transmission source, and the transmission source compares the transmission signal with the confirmation signal and determines whether or not they are the same.

In this way, the transmission source compares the confirmation signal transmitted from the transmission destination with the transmission signal to determine whether or not they are the same, so that the signal transmitted from the transmission source is not tampered with. It can be confirmed that the signal has been sent to the sender. As a result, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as falsification of transmission / reception signals between the game machine and the game medium management device.

Further, in the game system, the transmission source has a modulation unit that modulates a signal, the signal modulated by the modulation unit is transmitted as the transmission signal, and the transmission destination transmits the signal modulated by the modulation unit. It may have a demodulation unit for demodulation.

As a result, even if the transmission / reception signal between the game machine and the game medium management device is read, it is difficult to decipher this signal, and the transmission / reception signal between the game machine and the game medium management device is transmitted. It is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as falsification.

Further, in the game system, when the transmission destination receives the transmission signal from the transmission source, the approval signal, which is a signal indicating that the transmission signal has been received, is set in addition to the confirmation signal. It may be transmitted to the source.

As a result, by comparing the transmission signal and the confirmation signal, it is confirmed not only that the normal signal has been transmitted / received, but also that the normal signal has been transmitted / received based on the approval signal. Therefore, it is possible to further strengthen the suppression of fraudulent activities.

[10-16. Processing related to the operation of the character in the character group]
The processing related to the operation of the accessory (the accessory (including the operating member constituting the accessory) constituting the accessory group 1000) in the accessory group 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 107. The accessory referred to here is a movable accessory that can be operated by driving various power sources such as a motor and a solenoid, and does not include a non-movable decorative accessory. The accessory is driven based on the control signal and data (for example, excitation data described later) output from the host control circuit 2100, but the excitation data includes the number of steps (for example, when the power source is a stepping motor). The data is not limited to specific data as long as it has a unit representing the magnitude of power such as excitation time and excitation time.

The processing related to the operation of the accessory in the accessory group 1000 is largely the initial operation process of the accessory performed by the host control circuit 2100 when the power is turned on and the sub-control main process (or sub-control main) by the host control circuit 2100. There is an accessory control process performed in various request control processes in the process). The accessory initial operation process and the accessory control process will be described in order below.

[10-16-1. Character initial operation processing]
First, with reference to FIG. 100, the accessory initial operation process performed by the host control circuit 2100 as one of various initialization processes (see, for example, step S1201 in FIG. 61) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing an example of the accessory initial operation process executed by the host control circuit 2100 in the present embodiment.

First, the host control circuit 2100 sets the number of operations of the motor used to operate the accessory, that is, the initial position recovery counter to "0" (step S1901).

After the process of step S1901, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the accessory of the accessory group 1000 is in the initial position (step S1902). In the process of step S1902, the host control circuit 2100 detects whether or not the accessory is in the initial position of the accessory detection sensor group 1002 (specifically, whether or not the accessory detection sensor group 1002 is in the initial position). The determination is made based on the detection state of the accessory detection sensor) provided corresponding to the accessory that is the determination target.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the accessory is not in the initial position (NO in step S1902), whether or not the number of operations is equal to or greater than the specified number of times (for example, 10 times), that is, the value of the initial position recovery counter is "10". It is determined whether or not it is equal to or greater than that (step S1904).

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the number of operations is less than the specified number of times (for example, 10 times) (NO in step S1904), the host control circuit 2100 performs an initial position movement operation (step S1906). This initial position moving operation is an operation of driving the motor so as to move the accessory to the initial position.

After the process of step S1906, the host control circuit 2100 adds "1" to the number of motor operations, that is, the value of the initial position recovery counter (step S1907), and proceeds to step S1902. Therefore, as long as it is determined that the accessory is not in the initial position (NO in step S1902) until the number of times the motor is operated reaches the specified number of times (for example, 10 times), the host control circuit 2100 has step S1902, step S1904, and step. The initial position movement processing of S1906 and step S1907 will be repeated.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1904 that the number of operations is equal to or greater than the specified number of times (for example, 10 times) (YES in step S1904), the host control circuit 2100 ends the initial position movement process and sets the transition to the error motor operation stop state. The process is performed (step S1905). When the error motor operation is shifted to the stopped state, the operation of all the accessories is stopped, the host control circuit 2100 ends the accessory initial operation process, and returns the process to the sub-control main process (see, for example, FIG. 61).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1902 that the accessory is in the initial position (YES in step S1902), the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S1901 and determines whether or not the accessory is in the initial position for the next accessory. Discrimination (step S1902). Then, when the host control circuit 2100 determines that all the motors for operating the accessory to be used are in the initial positions (YES in step S1902), the host control circuit 2100 performs a power-on processing (step S1903) to perform the accessory initial operation process. Is terminated, and the process is returned to the sub-control main process (see, for example, FIG. 61).

The power-on processing in step S1903 is a process of moving the accessory to the initial position after moving the accessory to the maximum range of motion in order to confirm the operation of the accessory. In the power-on processing of step S1903, the operation of moving the accessory to the maximum range of motion and then moving it to the initial position may be performed simultaneously for all the accessories, or one or a plurality of accessories may be performed in order. It may be.

In the process of turning on the power in step S1903, that is, the process of moving the accessory to the maximum range of motion and then moving it to the initial position, it is sufficient if the operation of the accessory can be confirmed. When there is an accessory to be driven (for example, an accessory that moves from the initial position to the first stage and then moves from the first stage to the second stage), the operation of the accessory is confirmed by the first stage from the initial position. It may be controlled to execute the first operation check of moving to the first stage and the second operation check of moving from the initial position to the first stage and then moving to the second stage.

Further, for example, a first accessory that is driven stepwise (for example, a first accessory that moves from the initial position to the first stage and then moves from the first stage to the second stage) and from the initial position. When there is a second accessory that drives to a predetermined position, as an operation check of the accessory, a first operation check is performed in which the first accessory moves from the initial position to the first stage, and then the first operation is confirmed. A third operation check is performed in which the second accessory moves from the initial position to a predetermined position, and then a second operation check in which the first accessory moves from the first stage to the second stage is performed. You may. In this case, by performing the third operation check between the first operation check and the second operation check, it is possible to efficiently check the operation of a plurality of accessories.

As described above, in the accessory initial operation processing, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the accessory is in the initial position when the power is turned on (specifically, among the accessory detection sensor group 1002). , The accessory detection sensor provided corresponding to the accessory that is the target of determining whether or not it is in the initial position) (step S1902), and if all the accessories are in the initial position, when the power is turned on. The process (step S1903) is performed. Then, when there is an accessory that is not in the initial position (NO in step S1902), the initial position movement process (step S1902, step S1904, step S1906, step S1907) is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). If there is no accessory in the initial position even after performing the initial position movement processing (step S1902, step S1904, step S1906, step S1907) a specified number of times (for example, 10 times) (YES in step S1904), the host control circuit 2100 causes an error. The transition setting process to the motor operation stop state is performed (step S1905). As a result, when the power is turned on, it is possible to confirm whether or not the motor for operating the accessory operates normally, and to move the accessory to the initial position when the accessory is not in the initial position. Can be done. Moreover, if the accessory happens to be in the initial position due to a minor trouble (error), the accessory cannot return to the initial position while avoiding the transition to the motor error operation stop state. , It is possible to suppress the occurrence of serious errors by shifting to the motor error operation stop state.

[10-16-2. Accessory control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the accessory control process performed in step S210 during the sub control circuit main process (see FIG. 52) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing an example of accessory control processing executed by the host control circuit 2100 in the present embodiment.

First, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the current operation status is a command reception standby operation capable of receiving a command from the main control circuit 100 (that is, whether or not the command reception standby flag is ON). (Step S1911).

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the current operation status is not in the command reception standby operation from the main control circuit 100 (that is, the command reception standby flag is OFF) (NO in step S1911), the accessory control The processing is completed, and the processing is transferred to the sub control circuit main processing (see FIG. 52).

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the current operation status is in the reception standby operation of the command from the main control circuit 100 (YES in step S1911), whether or not the host control circuit 2100 has received the command related to the effect from the main control circuit 100. Is determined (step S1912). The commands related to the effect to be judged in this process are, for example, a special symbol fluctuation start command, a special symbol fluctuation stop command, a demo command, a fluctuation confirmation command, and a jackpot command, and these commands are the hosts. When received by the control circuit 2100, each accessory in the accessory group 1000 is driven.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the command related to the effect has not been received from the main control circuit 100 (NO in step S1912), the host control circuit 2100 ends the accessory control process and performs the process as the sub control circuit main process (see FIG. 52). Move to.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the host control circuit 2100 has received the command related to the effect from the main control circuit 100 (YES in step S1912), the host control circuit 2100 performs the effect command reception time process (step S1913). In this effect command reception time processing, as shown in FIG. 102 described later, according to the command related to the effect received from the main control circuit 100, the variation start command reception time accessory processing (step S19133), the initial position restoration accessory Each process of operation processing (step S19134), demo command reception time accessory processing (step S19136), fluctuation confirmation command reception time accessory processing (step S19138), and hit command reception time accessory processing (step S19139) is performed. It is said. Details of each of these processes will be described later.

In the present embodiment, an example in which each process of step S19133, step S19136, step S19138, and step S19139 is performed in the accessory control process is described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and commands related to the production are not limited to this. , Each of these processes may be performed as an interrupt process, or each of these processes may be performed immediately after the command analysis process (see step S204 of FIG. 52) described above.

After executing the effect command reception processing (step S1913), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the acceptance permission of the accessory request is set (step S1914).

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the acceptance permission for the accessory request is not set (NO in step S1914), the host control circuit 2100 ends the accessory control process and shifts the process to the sub control circuit main process (see FIG. 52). ..

On the other hand, when it is determined that the acceptance permission of the accessory request is set (YES in step S1914), the host control circuit 2100 acquires the accessory request stored in the accessory request buffer in the animation construction process of FIG. 61. Processing is performed (step S1915).

Further, in the present embodiment, in the process of step S1915, the host control circuit 2100 generates a request for effect control in order to synchronize the effect operation by each accessory in the accessory group 1000 with the effect operation by the display device 16. After two frames have elapsed, the above-mentioned acquisition process of the accessory request is executed.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 transmits excitation data to the motor driver via the I2C controller 2610 based on the acquired accessory request (step S1916), and then sets the command reception standby flag to ON (step S1917). ). Next, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not a communication error signal has been received from the I2C controller 2610 (step S1918). In this process, the host control circuit 2100 may determine whether a communication error between the I2C controller 2610 and the motor controller 2700 or an error of the I2C controller 2610 is detected (acquired or input).

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the communication error signal has been received from the I2C controller 2610 (YES in step S1918), the host control circuit 2100 sets the communication controller error (step S1921). Then, after the process of step S1921, the host control circuit 2100 ends the accessory control process and shifts the process to the sub control circuit main process (see FIG. 52).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the communication error signal is not received from the I2C controller 261 (NO in step S1918), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the address of each motor driver can be accessed (step S1919).

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the address of each motor driver cannot be accessed (NO in step S1919), it sets a connection error (step S1922). Then, after the process of step S1922, the host control circuit 2100 ends the accessory control process and shifts the process to the sub control circuit main process (see FIG. 52).

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the address of each motor driver can be accessed (YES in step S1919), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the operation of each accessory (each motor) is normally completed (step S1920).

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the operation of each accessory (each motor) has been normally completed (YES in step S1920), the host control circuit 2100 ends the accessory control process and performs the process as the sub control circuit main process (see FIG. 52). ). On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation of each accessory (each motor) is not normally completed (NO in step S1920), the host control circuit 2100 sets a data error (step S1923). Then, after the process of step S1923, the host control circuit 2100 ends the accessory control process and shifts the process to the sub control circuit main process (see FIG. 52).

[10-16-3. Processing when receiving production commands]
Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the production command reception processing performed in step S1913 during the accessory control processing (see FIG. 101) will be described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing an example of processing at the time of receiving a production command. This process is executed by the host control circuit 2100 based on the reception of the effect system command transmitted from the main control circuit 100.

First, the host control circuit 2100 sets the command reception standby flag to OFF in step S19131. Then, the host control circuit 2100 executes each process in response to the command of the effect system received in step S1912. Specifically, when the command received in step S1912 is the variation start command (YES in step S19132), the accessory process at the time of receiving the variation start command (step S19133) is executed. After that, the host control circuit 2100 executes the initial position restoration accessory operation process (step S19134), and ends the process at the time of receiving the effect system command.

If the command received in step S1912 is a demo command (NO in step S19132 and YES in step S19135), the demo command reception accessory processing (step S19136) is executed, and the production command is received. End the process.

If the command received in step S1912 is a fluctuation determination command (NO in both steps S19132 and S19135 and YES in step S19137), the variable start command reception accessory process (step S19138) is executed. Then, the processing when the production command is received is terminated.

Further, when the command received in step S1912 is neither a fluctuation confirmation command, a demo command, or a fluctuation confirmation command (NO in step S19132, step S19135, and step S19137), it is determined that the hit command has been received. , The accessory process at the time of receiving the hit system command (step S19139) is executed, and the process at the time of receiving the effect system command is completed. If the command received in step S1912 is neither a fluctuation confirmation command, a demo command, or a fluctuation confirmation command, the command received in step S1912 is the hit command instead of determining that the hit command has been received. It is also possible to execute the accessory process (step S19139) at the time of receiving the hit system command based on the determination that the above is true.

The above-mentioned variable start command received accessory process (step S19133), initial position recovery accessory operation process (step S19134), demo command received accessory process (step S19136), variable start command received accessory process (step S19138). ) And each process of the accessory process at the time of receiving the hit system command (step S19139) will be described below.

[10-16-4. When the fluctuation start command is received, the accessory processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 103, a special symbol variation start command reception accessory processing performed in step S19133 during the production command reception processing (see FIG. 102) will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing an example of accessory processing at the time of receiving a change start command of a special symbol. This process is executed by the host control circuit 2100 based on the reception of the change start command of the special symbol transmitted from the main control circuit 100.

First, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not all the accessories (including the operating members constituting the accessories) of the accessory group 1000 are in the initial positions (step S19141). In the process of step S19141, the host control circuit 2100 determines based on the detection state of the accessory detection sensor group 1002 that detects that each accessory exists at the initial position.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that all the accessories are in the initial positions (YES in step S19141), the host control circuit 2100 sets the acceptance permission of the accessory request (step S19142). When the acceptance permission of the accessory request is set, the control state of each accessory of the accessory group 1000 shifts from the command reception standby state to the accessory request acceptance permission state.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 sets the initial position recovery counter to “0” (step S19143). Then, after the process of step S19143, the host control circuit 2100 ends the accessory process at the time of receiving the variation start command.

On the other hand, in step S19141, when the host control circuit 2100 determines that there is an accessory that is not in the initial position, that is, that one or more accessories are not in the initial position (NO in step S19141), the initial position recovery counter is set to ". The process of adding "1" is executed (step S19144).

After executing the process of step S19144, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the initial position recovery counter is equal to or greater than the specified number of times (for example, 10 times) (step S19145).

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the initial position recovery counter is equal to or greater than the specified number of times (YES in step S19145), the host control circuit 2100 performs a transition setting process to the error motor operation stop state (step S19146). When the error motor operation stop state is entered, the operation of all the accessories is stopped. After the processing of step S19146, the host control circuit 2100 ends the accessory processing at the time of receiving the variation start command.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the initial position restoration counter is not more than the specified number of times (NO in step S19145), the host control circuit 2100 sets the transition to the initial position restoration operation state (step S19147). In the initial position recovery operation state, the initial position recovery operation process described later is executed.

In this way, in the accessory processing when the variation start command is received, the host control circuit 2100 detects whether or not all the accessories are in the initial positions when the variation start command of the special symbol is received by the accessory detection sensor group 1002. (Step S19141) If there is an accessory that is not in the initial position, the setting is made so that the acceptance of the accessory request is not permitted (prohibited) and the transition to the initial position restoration operation state is performed (step S19147). Then, when the number of times of the accessory processing at the time of receiving the variation start command, which is determined in step S19141 that one or more accessories are not in the initial position, reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), the host control circuit 2100 causes The transition to the motor error operation stop state is set. That is, even if there is an accessory that is not in the initial position at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, the variation of the special symbol starts continuously within the specified number of times (for example, 10 times) in the situation that there is an accessory that is not in the initial position. Up to that point, the setting is made to shift to the initial position restoration operation state, and when the specified number of times is reached, the setting is made to shift to the error motor operation stop state. Therefore, if there is an accessory that does not return to the initial position due to a minor trouble (error), the accessory that cannot return to the initial position while avoiding the transition to the motor error operation stop state. If it continues, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a serious error by shifting to the motor error operation stop state.

[10-16-5. Initial position recovery accessory operation processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the initial position restoration accessory operation process performed in step S19134 during the production command reception process (see FIG. 102) will be described. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing an example of the initial position restoration accessory operation process. This process is executed by the host control circuit 2100 based on the setting for shifting to the initial position restoration operation state in step S19147 of the accessory process at the time of receiving the variation start command (see FIG. 103).

First, whether or not the host control circuit 2100 is in the initial position restoration operation state, that is, whether or not the transition setting to the initial position restoration operation state is made in step S19147 of the accessory processing at the time of receiving the fluctuation start command (see FIG. 103). Whether or not it is determined (step S19151).

If it is not in the initial position restoration operation state (NO in step S19151), the host control circuit 2100 ends the initial position restoration accessory operation process.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that it is in the initial position restoration operation state (YES in step S19151), it determines whether or not the accessory is in the initial position in the accessory detection sensor group 1002 (specifically, the accessory detection sensor group 1002). Of these, the accessory detection sensor provided corresponding to the accessory that is the target of determination of whether or not the accessory is in the initial position) detects the accessory, and determines whether or not the accessory is in the initial position (step S1952).

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the accessory is not in the initial position (YES in step S1952), the host control circuit 2100 executes the initial position movement operation process (step S19153). This initial position movement operation process is a process of driving the motor to return the accessory to the initial position.

The processes of steps S19152 and S19153 are performed for the number of motors that drive the accessory.

On the other hand, when the host control circuit 2100 determines that the accessory is in the initial position (NO in step S1952), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the next accessory is in the initial position without performing the process of step S19153. (Step S19152).

When the host control circuit 2100 performs the processes of step S19152 and / and step S19153 for the number of motors for driving the accessory, the initial position restoration accessory operation process ends.

[10-16-6. Processing of accessories when receiving demo commands]
Next, with reference to FIG. 105, the demo command reception accessory processing performed in step S19136 during the production command reception processing (see FIG. 102) will be described. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing an example of accessory processing at the time of receiving a demo command. This process is executed by the host control circuit 2100 based on the reception of the demo command transmitted from the main control circuit 100.

First, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not there is a motor error, that is, whether or not an error due to a malfunction of the motor for driving the accessory is detected (step S19161). In this process, for example, the host control circuit 2100 causes various errors (communication controller error, connection error, data error) set in the processes after step S1918 in the accessory control process (see FIG. 101). Determine if or not.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that there is no motor error, that is, no error due to a malfunction of the motor for driving the accessory is detected (the motor is normal) (YES in step S19161), the accessory excitation is performed. The opening process is performed (step S19162). In this process, the host control circuit 2100 stops outputting excitation data to all motor drivers.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not all the accessories are in the initial positions (step S19163).

When it is determined that all the accessories are in the initial positions (YES in step S19163), the host control circuit 2100 sets the acceptance permission of the accessory request (step S19164). On the other hand, when it is determined that one or more accessories are not in the initial position (NO in step S19163), the host control circuit 2100 ends the accessory processing at the time of receiving the demo command.

On the other hand, in step S19161, when the host control circuit 2100 determines that there is a motor error, that is, an error due to a malfunction of the motor for driving the accessory is detected (NO in step S19161), the accessory request is not accepted. Permission is set (step S19165).

Next, the host control circuit 2100 stops all the motors (step S19166), performs the motor driver reset process (step S19167) after the process of step S19166, and ends the accessory process at the time of receiving the demo command.

As described above, in the accessory processing at the time of receiving the demo command, the host control circuit 2100 performs an error check (step S19161) of the motor driver for driving the accessory, and if an error is detected, the accessory request is performed. (Step S19165) is prohibited, and the motor driver reset process (step S19167) is performed. If no error is detected, the bonus detection sensor group 1002 determines whether or not all the bonuses are in the initial positions after performing the release process (step S19162) for releasing all the excitations of the bonuses. When it is detected (step S19163) and all the accessories are in the initial position, the acceptance of the accessory request is permitted.

[10-16-7. When receiving the fluctuation confirmation command, the accessory processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the special symbol variation determination command reception accessory processing performed in step S19138 during the production command reception processing (see FIG. 102) will be described. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing an example of the accessory processing at the time of receiving the change determination command of the special symbol. This process is executed by the host control circuit 2100 based on the reception of the change determination command of the special symbol transmitted from the main control circuit 100.

First, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not there is a motor error, that is, whether or not an error due to a malfunction of the motor for driving the accessory is detected (step S19171). In this process, the host control circuit 2100 is similar to step S19161 (see FIG. 105), for example, various errors (communication controller error,) set in the processes after step S1918 in the accessory control process (see FIG. 101). Determine if a connection error, data error, etc. has occurred.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that there is no motor error, that is, no error due to a malfunction of the motor for driving the accessory is detected (the motor is normal) (YES in step S19171), the number of continuous errors is determined. The indicated continuous error counter is set to "0" (step S19172).

Next, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not all the accessories are in the initial positions (step S19173).

When it is determined that all the accessories are in the initial positions (YES in step S19173), the host control circuit 2100 sets the acceptance permission of the accessory request (step S19174). On the other hand, when it is determined that one or more accessories are not in the initial position (NO in step S19173), the host control circuit 2100 ends the accessory processing at the time of receiving the fluctuation determination command.

On the other hand, in step S19171, when the host control circuit 2100 determines that there is a motor error, that is, an error due to a malfunction of the motor for driving the accessory is detected (NO in step S19171), the control to stop all the motors. Is executed (step S19175).

After the process of step S19175, the host control circuit 2100 performs a motor driver reset process (step S19176), adds 1 to the number of continuous errors, that is, adds "1" to the value of the continuous error counter (step S19177).

After the processing of step S19177, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the value of the continuous error counter is equal to or greater than the specified number of times (for example, 10 times) (step S19178).

When the value of the continuous error counter is equal to or greater than the specified number of times (for example, 10 times) (YES in step S19178), the host control circuit 2100 performs a transition setting process to the error motor operation stop state (step S19179). When the error motor operation stop state is entered, the operation of all the accessories is stopped. After the processing of step S19179, the host control circuit 2100 ends the accessory processing at the time of receiving the fluctuation determination command.

On the other hand, when the value of the continuous error counter is less than the specified number of times (for example, 10 times) (NO in step S19178), the host control circuit 2100 performs the transition setting process to the accessory request acceptance disallowed state (step S19180). ..

The number of continuous errors, that is, the value of the continuous error counter indicates the number of times that the accessory processing at the time of receiving the variation determination command, which is determined to have a motor error (NO in step S19171), is continuously performed.

As described above, in the accessory processing at the time of receiving the fluctuation confirmation command, the host control circuit 2100 performs an error check of the motor driver for driving the accessory (step S19171), and when an error is detected, the motor driver Is reset (step S19176), and acceptance of the accessory request is prohibited (step S19180). Then, when the number of times of the accessory processing at the time of receiving the fluctuation determination command determined to have a motor error (NO in step S19161) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), the host control circuit 2100 is in the error motor operation stopped state. (Step S19179), the operation of all the accessories is stopped. Further, when it is determined that there is no motor error (YES in step S19171), the host control circuit 2100 detects whether or not all the accessories are in the initial positions by the accessory detection sensor group 1002 (step S19173), and all of them. When the accessory is in the initial position, the acceptance of the accessory request is permitted (step S19174). Therefore, if it happens to be a motor error due to a minor trouble (error), the motor error will continue while avoiding the transition to the motor error operation stop state by stopping the reception of the accessory request with disapproval. In that case, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a serious error by shifting to the motor error operation stop state.

The initial position restoration operation transition setting in step S19147 (see FIG. 103) described above corresponds to the first restoration process of the present invention, and the motor driver reset process in step S19176 (see FIG. 106) is the second of the present invention. Corresponds to recovery processing. However, in addition to the initial position restoration operation transition setting, the first restoration process may be various operations such as motor error cancellation and restoration operation such as moving the accessory from the standby position to the drive position. Similarly, regarding the second recovery process, in addition to the motor driver reset process, the process in the sub control circuit 200 is executed again, the parameters are set again regarding the operation of the motor, and the same as in the first recovery process. Various processes such as control may be performed.

Further, the process of step S19144 described above corresponds to the first counting means of the present invention, and the process of step S19177 described above corresponds to the second counting means of the present invention. Strictly speaking, neither the first counting means nor the second counting means counts the number of games played. However, the above-mentioned first recovery process can be performed each time a fluctuation start command is received, and the above-mentioned second recovery process can be performed each time a fluctuation confirmation command is received. Therefore, the first counting means and the second counting means do not strictly count the number of games as described above, but substantially count the number of games (variation number). it can.

Further, if the above-mentioned first counting means has a specification that the initial position recovery counter is reset only when the power is turned off, the number of consecutive games (number of fluctuations) does not have to be, and "the power is supplied from the time the power is turned on. It can be expressed as "the number of games in which the accessory did not exist at the initial position before being refused". Further, if the initial position recovery counter is reset by, for example, the presence of the accessory in the initial position, the number of consecutive fluctuations in which the accessory does not exist in the initial position and the first counting means are used. It is possible that the counted number will be the same value. Further, since the above-mentioned second counting means is the number of times that the motor error has occurred continuously, it may be substantially the same value as the number of games (number of fluctuations) in which the motor error has occurred continuously. , If the power is turned off between the start of fluctuation of the special symbol and the end of fluctuation, and then the power is restored, the count value by the first counting means and the count value by the second counting means are reset during the fluctuation of the special symbol. Will be done. Therefore, in such a case, when the sub-control circuit 200 receives the fluctuation determination command indicating the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol, the counting value by the first counting means is changed to 0 and the counting value by the second counting means is changed to 1. Therefore, there may be a difference between the count value by the first counting means and the count value by the second counting means. Considering this way, the counting value counted by the first counting means and the second counting means can be expressed as the number of games, and the first counting means is the number of games that start the game to change the special symbol. It is the same, and it can be expressed that the second counting means is the same as the number at which the fluctuation of the special symbol is completed. However, the count value by the first counting means and the count value by the second counting means are not reset by simply turning the power on and off. For example, a reset button provided on the main control board 30 (not shown). ) And other operating means related to the setting (setting key 328 and setting switch 332) while performing power operation (power on operation and power off operation), setting confirmation processing and / and setting It may be reset only when the change process is performed.

Regarding the number of games (number of fluctuations), it may be defined that one game (one symbol variation) is performed at the start of the variation display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). , It may be defined that one game was played at the end of the variable display of the special symbol (when the result of the special lottery is derived), or after the variable display of the special symbol is started, the special symbol The entire game until the end of the variable display may be defined as one game.

[10-16-8. Accessory processing when receiving a hit command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 107, the hit system command reception time accessory processing performed in step S19139 in the effect system command reception time processing (see FIG. 102) will be described. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing an example of accessory processing at the time of receiving a hit system command. This process is executed by the host control circuit 2100 based on the reception of the hit system command transmitted from the main control circuit 100. The hit-type commands correspond to, for example, a command for shifting to a jackpot game state (a command for starting a jackpot game), a command for starting a round game, a command for inter-round games (for example, an interval time, etc.), a command for ending a jackpot game state, and the like.

First, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not all the accessories are in the initial positions (step S19181).

When it is determined that all the accessories are in the initial positions (YES in step S19181), the host control circuit 2100 sets the acceptance permission of the accessory request (step S19182). On the other hand, when it is determined that one or more accessory is not in the initial position (NO in step S19181), the host control circuit 2100 ends the accessory process at the time of receiving the hit system command.

As described above, in the accessory processing at the time of receiving the hit system command, the host control circuit 2100 detects whether or not all the accessories are in the initial positions by the accessory detection sensor group 1002 (step S19181), and all the accessories are released. If it is in the initial position, it is allowed to accept the character request (step S19182), and if it is determined that one or more characters are not in the initial position, it is a hit system without permitting the acceptance of the character request. When a command is received, the accessory processing is terminated.

It should be noted that it is determined whether or not the number of operations in step S1904 (see FIG. 100) is equal to or greater than the specified number of times (for example, 10 times) through all the processes related to the operation of the accessory in the accessory group, and step S19145 (FIG. FIG. Determining whether the initial position recovery counter of (see 103) is the specified number of times (for example, 10 times) or more, and whether the value of the continuous error counter in step S1968 (see FIG. 105) is the specified number of times (for example, 10 times) or more. In the determination of whether or not, the specified number of times is the same (10 times) in each case, but it goes without saying that the specified number of times may be different in each process.

Further, if the error continues in the initial operation processing of the accessory (see FIG. 101), the accessory processing at the time of receiving the fluctuation start command (see FIG. 103), and the accessory processing at the time of receiving the variation confirmation command (see FIG. 106), the motor It was explained that the occurrence of a serious error can be suppressed by shifting to the error operation stop state, but the following errors can be exemplified as the occurrence of a serious error.

For example, a predetermined accessory (including an operating member constituting the accessory) is provided so as to be able to operate from a specific position (for example, an initial position) to a predetermined position (for example, a maximum range of motion). The predetermined accessory is operated by, for example, a motor. Then, when a predetermined accessory is present at a specific position, the predetermined accessory is locked by a locking member (for example, a solenoid). The lock member is located at a lock position for locking a predetermined accessory in a normal state (for example, when not energized), and normally operates at an unlocked position to unlock the predetermined accessory. The locking member is energized, for example, by the host control circuit 2100 via the I2C controller 2610 and the motor controller 2700 (both see FIG. 10). Then, the host control circuit 2100 energizes the lock member when the predetermined accessory operates from the specific position to the specified position, and the predetermined accessory operates from the specific position to the specified position. It is configured to end the energization of the lock member after the start. That is, after the predetermined accessory moves toward the specified position, the lock member is in the locked position when returning to the specific position, and is locked when the predetermined accessory is pushed into the specific position. .. In such a configuration, if a motor error (for example, an error in which a motor drive command to the motor driver cannot be transmitted due to a communication error) occurs, the motor cannot be driven. On the other hand, although the lock member is energized, the predetermined accessory does not start operating toward the specified position. Therefore, the energized state of the lock member continues (the lock member continues to stay in the unlocked position), and the lock member may be disconnected due to an overcurrent. Therefore, when such an error occurs, the error motor operation stop is not set until the error reaches the specified number of times, but if such an error continues to occur the specified number of times, the error motor operation stop. By setting the transition to, the motor error operation stop state will not be entered even if a minor error occurs, and if the error occurs continuously for the specified number of times, the motor error operation stop state will be entered. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of serious errors such as the lock member being disconnected due to overcurrent.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the effect system command is received from the main control circuit 100 (YES in step S1912), the effect system command reception time process (step S1913) is executed according to the received effect system command, and then the effect system command is executed. The process of determining whether or not the transfer permission of the accessory request is set (step S1914) is being executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a command reception standby operation is in progress between steps S1913 and step S1914. A process for determining whether or not a command may be received (hereinafter, this process is referred to as a "command reception standby operation determination process (not shown)) may be executed. The processing method in this case may be any of the following first processing methods to third processing methods.

The first processing method is a control that shifts from the status during the command reception standby operation to one of the statuses of the character request acceptance permission, the error motor operation stop, the initial position recovery operation, and the character request acceptance disapproval. This is the processing method by the host control circuit 2100 in the case, and the processing is executed by the following procedure.
(A) It is determined whether or not the command reception standby operation is in progress (corresponding to the process of step S1911).
(B) When the command reception standby operation is in progress (corresponding to YES in step S1911), it is determined whether or not any of the fluctuation start command, demo command, fluctuation confirmation command, and hit command has been received. To do.
(C) When a production command is received from the main control circuit 100 (corresponding to YES in step S1912), the variation start command is processed when the command is received, the demo command is processed when the command is received, and the variation is confirmed according to the received command. Executes the accessory processing when receiving a command or the accessory processing when receiving a hit command, and from the status of waiting for command reception, the accessory request acceptance permission, error motor operation stop, initial position recovery operation, and accessory request acceptance disapproval After shifting to one of the statuses, execute the command reception standby operation determination process (not shown). When all the accessories are restored to the initial positions as a result of the initial position restoration accessory operation processing, they are controlled during the command reception standby operation.
(D) When it is determined that the command reception standby operation is in progress in the command reception standby operation determination process (not shown in the figure), another command is executed by executing the process of step S1912 with all the accessories in the initial positions. It may be determined whether it is being received, whether it is receiving the next fluctuation start command, etc., and if it is based on the currently received fluctuation start command, for example, during one fluctuation (with one fluctuation start command), for example. The process of step S1912 may be executed 10 times.
(E) If NO is determined in the process of step S1914 (the process of determining whether or not the transfer permission of the accessory request is set) executed after the command reception standby operation determination process (not shown), the error motor If the operation is stopped, the motor is stopped until the power is turned off. In addition, if the character reception is not permitted, the character will not be activated, but when a change start command or the like is received, it is determined whether or not all the characters are in the initial position, and the character request is accepted. It may be controlled to the permitted state.

The second processing method is a command reception standby operation in which the production system commands (variation start command, demo command, fluctuation confirmation command, hit system command) have not been received as commands transmitted from the main control circuit 100. This is the processing method in the case of, and the processing is executed by the following procedure.
(A) It is determined whether or not the command reception standby operation is in progress (corresponding to the process of step S1911).
(B) When the command reception standby operation is in progress (corresponding to YES in step S1911), it is determined whether or not any of the fluctuation start command, demo command, fluctuation confirmation command, and hit command has been received. To do.
(C) When a production command is received from the main control circuit 100 (corresponding to YES in step S1912), the status shifts from the command reception standby status to the command reception non-standby operation status.
(D) Depending on the received production command, the variable start command received bonus process, the demo command received bonus process, the variable confirmation command received bonus process, or the hit command received bonus process is executed.
(E) If none of the variable start command received bonus processing, the demo command received bonus process, the variable confirmation command received bonus process, and the hit command received bonus process is executed, the command is received. Return to standby status. If any one of the variable start command reception bonus processing, demo command reception bonus processing, fluctuation confirmation command reception bonus processing, and hit command reception bonus processing is performed, the command Since the status shifts to a status other than reception standby, it is determined as NO in the command reception standby operation determination process (not shown).

The third processing method is based on the premise that a plurality of types of commands are received as production commands, for example, depending on the type of the received command, the variable start command reception accessory processing, the demo command reception accessory processing, This is a processing method that loops the accessory processing when receiving a variable confirmation command and the accessory processing when receiving a hit command. Since the command reception standby operation is canceled when the variation start command reception accessory processing, demo command reception accessory processing, fluctuation confirmation command reception accessory processing, and hit command reception accessory processing are looped. If there is, the above looping process may be performed when YES is determined in the command reception standby operation determination process (not shown).

[10-17. Hall menu task processing]
Next, processing related to the hall menu task will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 111. The hall menu task is a task that controls the hall menu. The hall menu task is performed by the host control circuit 2100 at a predetermined cycle, every 33 msec in this embodiment.

FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing an example of a hall menu task executed by the host control circuit 2100.

As shown in FIG. 108, the host control circuit 2100 first determines whether the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is in progress (step S301). Specifically, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the setting operation command (setting change start command, setting confirmation start command) transmitted from the main CPU 101 at the time of turning on the power is received.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is in progress, that is, it determines that the setting operation command has been received (YES in step S301), the host control circuit 2100 executes the hall menu display process in step S302. This hall menu display process (step S302) is a process of displaying the hall menu screen, which will be described later, in the display area of the display device 16 by the display control circuit 2300. The hall menu screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16 even when the process of step S312 described later is executed, but the hall menu screen displayed in step S302 and the hall menu displayed in step S312 are displayed. There are some differences from the screen, which will be described later.

An image (screen) displayed in the display area of the display device 16 when the hall menu display process of step S302 is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 to 111. FIG. 109 is a diagram showing an example when the hall menu screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16 when the hall menu display process of step S302 is executed. 110 and 111 are diagrams showing an example of a hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 when the hall menu display process of step S302 is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 109 to 111, when the hall menu display process (step S302) is executed, the hall menu screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. As shown in FIGS. 110 and 111, the hall menu screen has a hall menu item display area 1610 in the left side area of the screen, an operation explanation area 1620 in the lower left-right direction of the screen, and a preview arranged in the center of the screen. It has a display area 1630 and.

Each item of the hall menu is displayed in the hall menu item display area 1610. In FIGS. 109 to 111, for convenience, only time setting, prize ball information, setting history / setting confirmation history, error information history, monitoring history, and warning display setting are shown as hall menu items, but these items are shown. In addition, items such as notification setting, power saving setting (power saving mode), maintenance, accessory operation check, liquid crystal brightness setting, liquid crystal check, and volume control setting may be displayed. However, since step S302 is a process during the setting change process or the setting confirmation process, it is not possible to end the display of the hall menu screen and return to the game screen. Therefore, there is no item for ending the hall menu among the items in the hall menu.

In the operation explanation area 1620, an image corresponding to the operation button group 66 (see FIG. 3), that is, an image corresponding to the main button 662 and the up / down / left / right select buttons 664a to 664d is displayed. On the hall menu screen, it is displayed so that the activated operation button and the disabled operation button in the operation button group 66 can be distinguished. For example, in FIGS. 109 to 111, the activated operation buttons are displayed in white (the main button 662 and the up / down select buttons 664a and 664b are enabled), and the disabled operation buttons are displayed. It is displayed in black (the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d are disabled).

By operating the activated select buttons (up / down select buttons 664a, 664b), the operator can select one of a plurality of hall menu items. In FIGS. 109 and 110, the hall menu item surrounded by the solid line is the selected hall menu item. For example, FIG. 109 shows that the "time setting" surrounded by a solid line is selected. Further, in FIG. 111, it is shown that the “setting change / confirmation history” surrounded by the solid line is selected.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the host control circuit 2100 highlights the selected item. However, the highlight display is not always limited as long as the selected item can be easily grasped by the operator. The screen in which the time setting item is selected (see FIGS. 109 and 110) is the initial screen of the hall menu screen.

In the preview display area 1630, a preview screen for a selected item among a plurality of hall menu items is displayed. For example, when the "time setting" item is selected, the time setting screen is previewed (see FIGS. 109 and 110), and when the "setting change / confirmation history" item is selected, the setting is made. The change / confirmation history screen is previewed (see FIG. 111). However, it is preferable that the set value is not displayed on the preview screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen. It should be noted that the operation cannot be performed in the above preview screen. For example, when the time setting screen is previewed, the time setting operation cannot be performed on the preview displayed time setting screen, and the time setting displayed as a hall menu item is selected and determined. You can set the time on the time setting screen displayed by.

Further, the host control circuit 2100 is set in the display area of the display device 16 together with the hall menu screen, for example, in the minimum area at the lower right so as not to interfere with the operation on the hall menu screen. "Confirming" is displayed. At the same time, the host control circuit 2100 controls the voice / LED control circuit 2200 (see FIG. 10) to output a voice such as "setting is being changed" or "setting is being confirmed" from the speaker 24. Further, the host control circuit 2100 executes control to turn on all the LEDs 25 (for example, see FIG. 1) in white via the voice / LED control circuit 2200 (see FIG. 10). In this way, the operator is made to grasp whether the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed without hindering the operation on the hall menu screen.

Next, returning to FIG. 108, the host control circuit 2100 executes the hall menu process in step S303. Details of this hall menu process (step S303) will be described later.

After executing the hall menu process (step S303), the host control circuit 2100 executes a command (initialization command) indicating whether or not the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is completed, that is, the setting change process is completed. It is determined whether or not a command (power recovery command) indicating that the setting confirmation process has been completed has been received from the main CPU 101 (step S304). If neither the initialization command nor the power failure recovery command is received (NO in step S304), the host control circuit 2100 continues to execute the hall menu process in step S303.

Further, when the main CPU 101 transmits an initialization command, the main CPU 101 also transmits the changed setting value information to the host control circuit 2100 at the same timing as the command.

The changed setting value information does not necessarily have to be transmitted at the same timing as the initialization command, and may be transmitted at different timings if it can be associated with the setting change processing.

Further, when the main CPU 101 transmits a power failure recovery command, it is not necessary to transmit the set value information to the host control circuit 2100 because the set value has not been changed, but the set value information is also the host control circuit 2100. It may be sent to.

When the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is completed in step S304, that is, when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received from the main CPU 101 (YES in step S304), the host control circuit 2100 is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a. It is determined whether or not the number of histories is a predetermined number N or more (step S305). This records the history while leaving as much history data as possible by appropriately deciding whether to overwrite the data or write the data to the free area according to the number of histories stored in the subwork RAM 2100a. This is to prevent the situation where you cannot record when you want to. The predetermined number N can be appropriately set according to the capacity that can be stored in the subwork RAM 2100a, but is set to 500, for example, in the present embodiment.

If the number of histories of the history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a is a predetermined number N or more (YES in step S305), the process proceeds to step S306, and the history information overwriting process (step S306) is executed. The history information overwriting process in step S306 overwrites the history stored in the subwork RAM 2100a in order from the earliest stored history (oldest history information). It should be noted that the above-mentioned history information includes history information of the error motor operation stop state, history information of the initial position recovery operation transition setting, and history information of disapproval of acceptance of the accessory request. The history information of the error motor operation stop state is the date and time information set to shift to the error motor operation stop state (step S19146 in FIG. 103, step S19179 in FIG. 106) and the error motor operation stop state is released (FIGS. 108 and 114). Step S311) Date and time information and the like. The history information of the initial position restoration operation transition setting is the date and time information of the initial position movement operation (step S1906 in FIG. 100) and the initial position restoration operation transition setting (step S19147 in FIG. 103). The history information of disapproval of acceptance of the accessory request is date and time information or the like in which the accessory request is disapproved (step S19165 in FIG. 105, step S19180 in FIG. 106). However, strictly speaking, the error motor operation stop state is released in step S311 described later. However, since the process of step S311 is always performed when controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the date and time information controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is used as the date and time information when the error motor operation stop state is released. Should be overwritten.

Further, in the above, the history information of the error motor operation stop state, the history information of the initial position recovery operation transition setting, and the history information of the disapproval of acceptance of the accessory request are stored in the subwork RAM 2100a in step S306 or step S307. However, when "error information history" is selected in the hall menu processing in step S302 (YES in step S3008 in FIG. 115), it is reflected in the error information history screen (see FIG. 116) displayed on the display device 16. From the viewpoint, between step S301 and step S302, the history information of the error motor operation stop state, the history information of the initial position recovery operation transition setting, and the history information of the disapproval of acceptance of the accessory request are stored in the subwork RAM 2100a. It is preferable to carry out the process of causing.

In addition, as described above, by making it possible to view the history information of the initial position recovery operation transition setting and the history information of the disapproval of acceptance of accessory requests, although it has not led to a serious error such as an error motor operation stop. The game machine manager can grasp in advance the possibility of leading to a serious error such as an error motor operation stop, and the pachinko game machine 1 can be appropriately managed.

In the history information overwriting process in step S306, the history information already stored in the subwork RAM 2100a is overwritten with new history information, so that the history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a is eventually obtained. It is designed to be erased, but it is not limited to this. For example, if there is a risk of exceeding a predetermined upper limit when new history information is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a when an initialization command or a power failure recovery command is received, at least the history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a The history information may be stored after erasing a part of the information. Further, even if the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is not received, when there is a possibility that the upper limit may be exceeded if more history information is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a, the setting history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a may be exceeded. At least a part may be erased.

If the number of histories stored in the subwork RAM 2100a is less than a predetermined number N (NO in step S305), the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S307 and records the history information in the free area of the subwork RAM 2100a. The recording process (step S307) is executed. The history information recorded in step S307 also includes history information about the error motor operation stop state.

In this specification, the history information overwriting process in step S306 and the history information recording process in step S307 may be collectively referred to as history recording process.

The history information is the time information measured by the RTC209 and the operation type information (information indicating that the setting change process has been executed or setting confirmation) when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received from the main CPU 101. Information that the process has been executed) and information such as set value information. Specifically, when the initialization command is received, the time information when the initialization command is received, the information that the setting change process is executed, and the setting value information after the setting change sent from the main CPU 101 are used. The information associated with is the history information. In addition, when the power failure recovery command is received, the time information when the power failure recovery command is received, the information that the setting confirmation process has been executed, and the current setting value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 correspond to each other. The attached information is history information. When the power recovery command is received, it is not essential to include the current setting value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 in the history information, but it is transmitted from the main CPU 101 in order to execute the above-mentioned setting determination process. It is preferable to include the current setting value information in the history information. Further, the browsing history is also included in the above history information, and if the setting change / confirmation history is browsed in the hall menu process (step S303), the browsing history is overwritten as history information in step S306. Alternatively, in step S307, the browsing history is recorded as history information in the free area of the subwork RAM 2100a.

In the normal state, when the power is turned on, some command (for example, power failure recovery command, setting operation command, etc.) is immediately transmitted from the main CPU 101 after the host control circuit 2100 is started. However, when the host control circuit 2100 does not receive a command from the main CPU 101 even after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since it was started, it determines that the host control circuit 2100 is abnormal and puts the game stopped on the sub control circuit 200 side. Each aspect of the display output, the sound output, and the LED 25 when the game is stopped on the sub control circuit 200 side will be described later.

Further, it is preferable that the time information, which is one of the history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a, stores not only the date and time information but also the information up to the hour and minute or the information up to the hour, minute and second.

The host control circuit 2100 executes the process of step S306 or step S307, and then proceeds to step S308.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S308 whether or not the setting has been changed, that is, whether or not the initialization command has been received in step S304 (step S308). When the setting operation command received in step S301 is the setting change start command, the power failure recovery command is not received in step S304, and the setting operation command received in step S301 is the setting confirmation start command. Does not receive the initialization command in step S304. Further, in the process of step S308, since it is sufficient for the host control circuit 2100 to determine that the setting has been changed, instead of determining whether or not the command received in step S304 is an initialization command, for example, after the change. It may be determined that the setting change process has been performed by receiving the setting value information of.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the setting change has been made (YES in step S308), the host control circuit 2100 performs the setting change initialization process (step S309), and proceeds to step S310.

In step S310, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the error motor operation is stopped (step S310). That is, if the processes of step S1905 (see FIG. 100), step S19146 (see FIG. 103), and step S19179 (see FIG. 106) are performed, it is determined that the error motor operation is stopped.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the error motor operation stop state is determined (YES in step S310), the host control circuit 2100 releases the error motor operation stop state (step S311). When the error motor operation stop state is released, all the accessories can be operated.

On the other hand, if the error motor is not in the stopped state (NO in step S310), it is determined whether or not the accessory request is disallowed (step S322), and if the accessory request is disallowed (YES in step S322). ), Canceling the disapproval of the accessory request, resetting the initial position recovery counter, resetting the number of consecutive errors (step S323), and moving to step S312. If the accessory request is not permitted (NO in step S322), the process proceeds to step S312 without performing the process of step S322.

The release of the error motor operation stop state (step S311) is executed regardless of whether the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the setting. It may be canceled when the change process is performed and may not be canceled when the setting confirmation process is performed.

Further, as described above, when the setting change process is performed, the backup clear process is also performed, but the release of the error motor operation stop state (step S311) is executed when the setting change process is performed, while the setting is performed. It is preferable not to execute the backup clear process that does not involve the change process (for example, the backup clear process that is executed at the time of NO determination in step S22 of FIG. 33). Since the production using the character group is an important factor for enhancing the game interest, it is undeniable that the interest is lowered when the game is played on the game machine in which the character cannot operate normally. Therefore, important decisions such as whether or not to operate a game machine whose accessory has become inoperable should be made by an authorized hall official, and the error motor operation stop state cannot be canceled by an unauthorized person. I have to. However, it is convenient when a serious error such as an error motor operation stop state has not occurred, such as cancellation of disapproval of accessory request, reset of initial position recovery counter, reset of number of continuous errors (step S323). From this point of view, it is preferable that the backup clear process is executed not only when the setting change process is performed but also when the backup clear process is performed without the setting change process.

The host control circuit 2100 executes the hall menu redisplay process in step S312. At this time, the hall menu screen that is redisplayed is different from the hall menu screen (the hall menu screen displayed in step S302) that is displayed during the setting change or setting confirmation, and the setting change process is completed and the game It is a screen displayed in a state where it can be executed (or during the game return process in step S30). For example, as shown in FIG. 112, an item for ending the hall menu is displayed as one of the items in the hall menu. Will be done. Note that FIG. 112 is a diagram showing an example of a hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 when the hall menu redisplay process of step S312 is executed.

That is, on the hall menu screen (the hall menu screen displayed in step S302) displayed during the setting change or setting confirmation, the display of the hall menu screen cannot be terminated by the operator's intention, but the setting change process The hall menu screen (the hall menu screen displayed in step S312), which is redisplayed after the completion of, is configured so that the display of the hall menu screen can be ended at the will of the operator. The hall menu screen displayed in step S302 (see, for example, FIG. 110) and the hall menu screen displayed in step S312 (see FIG. 112) can be operated by selecting and determining any one of the items. (For example, the functional aspect such as being able to browse the setting change / confirmation history screen) and the like are common.

Further, when the host control circuit 2100 determines that the setting has been changed in step S308 (YES in step S308), in the hall menu redisplay process in step S312, the display area of the display device 16 is combined with the hall menu screen. In order not to interfere with the operation on the hall menu screen, for example, a character such as "setting has been changed" is displayed in the minimum area at the lower right. When the screen of the selected hall menu item (for example, the setting change / confirmation history screen) is displayed, similarly, in the minimum area at the lower right so as not to interfere with the operation on the screen, "setting change". "It was done" is displayed. At the same time, the host control circuit 2100 controls the voice / LED control circuit 2200 (see FIG. 10) to output a voice such as "The setting has been changed. The RAM has been initialized" from the speaker 24. To do. This makes it possible for the operator to know that the setting has been changed (and the backup clear process has been executed) without interfering with the operation on the hall menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item. It becomes. Further, the host control circuit 2100 executes a control for turning on all the LEDs 25 (for example, see FIG. 1) in red via the voice / LED control circuit 2200 (see FIG. 10).

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S308 that the setting confirmation has been performed (NO in step S308), that is, when the command received in step S304 is a power failure recovery command indicating the end of the setting confirmation process, the host control circuit 2100 The game screen return process of step S317 is executed without executing the processes of steps S309 to S316. Therefore, when the setting confirmation process is completed, the hall menu redisplay process (step S312) is not executed. In addition, characters indicating that the setting confirmation has been completed are not displayed in the display area of the display device 16. Furthermore, the voice indicating that the setting confirmation is completed is not output. However, the host control circuit 2100 executes control to fully turn on the LED 25 (for example, see FIG. 1) in red via the voice / LED control circuit 2200 (see FIG. 10).

By the way, when the process of step S302 is executed and when the process of step S312 is executed, the hall menu screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16, but the process of step S302 is executed. When the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed, the game cannot be executed, whereas when the process of step S312 is executed, the game can be executed. However, as described above, the mode of displaying characters in the display area of the display device 16 when the process of step S302 is executed and when the process of step S312 is executed (not displayed when the setting confirmation is completed). , The mode of the sound output from the speaker 24 and the mode of light emission of the LED 25 are significantly different. Therefore, even if the hall menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item is displayed in the display area of the display device 16, operations on the hall menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item (for example, the hall menu item can be displayed. It is easy to grasp from the appearance whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a state where it is possible to execute a game or a state where it is impossible, without hindering the operation of selecting or updating the page. It is possible.

When the host control circuit 2100 executes the process of step S312, the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S313 and executes the hall menu process. The hall menu process in step S313 is basically the same process as step S303, but the process when YES in step S3072 in FIG. 118, which will be described later, is different, and this will be described later.

The host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not "Hall menu end" is selected on the redisplayed hall menu screen in step S314. When it is determined that "end of hall menu" is selected (YES in step S314), the host control circuit 2100 performs the game screen return display process (step S317). In this game screen return display process, the host control circuit 2100 operates the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, the firing handle 32) for a predetermined period of time in the display area of the display device 16 to display an image for effect when playing a game. Display the initial image that will be displayed if there is none. Then, the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S318 after executing the game screen return process in step S317.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S314 that "end of hall menu" is not selected (NO in step S314), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed (for example, 30 seconds). Step S315). Although not shown in FIG. 108, when the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing is completed (YES in step S304) and the hall menu redisplay processing (step S312) is executed, the hall menu processing (step S313) When any of the hall menu items is selected in the above, the time counting is started based on the operator performing some operation, and in the process of step S315, is the time counting time elapsed for a predetermined time? It is a process of determining whether or not, and if the operator does not execute any operation for a predetermined time or more, the host control circuit 2100 determines YES in step S315.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed without any operation (YES in step S315), the host control circuit 2100 ends the display of the redisplayed hall menu screen, and returns to the game screen in step S317. Execute the process.

Further, if a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has not elapsed without any operation (NO in step S315), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not a command for generating an effect control object has been received (step). S316). The command to generate the effect control object is a command that can be received when the game is executed. For example, a symbol fluctuation start command, a symbol fluctuation confirmation (variation stop) command, a jackpot game execution start command, and a jackpot game A command indicating the number of rounds in the above, a round interval command in a big hit game, an end command of a big hit game, an initialization command, a power failure recovery command, and the like. When the host control circuit 2100 determines in step S316 that it has received any of the commands for generating these effect control objects, it ends the display of the redisplayed hall menu screen and ends the display of the redisplayed hall menu screen, and the game screen in step S317. Execute return display processing. As a result, the game screen according to the progress of the game by the main CPU 101 is displayed in the display area of the display device 16, and for example, an image unrelated to the game is displayed even though the game by the main CPU 101 is progressing. It is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being hindered, such as being played. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command for generating the effect control object has not been received (NO in step S316), the process returns to step S313.

When the host control circuit 2100 executes the game screen return display process (step S317), the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S318 and executes the hall menu display prohibition process. This hall menu display prohibition process is a process for prohibiting the hall menu screen from being displayed again in the display area of the display device 16. That is, when the hall menu display prohibition process (step S318) is executed, the hall menu screen is not displayed even if the setting key 328 is turned ON again, and the power OFF operation is performed to execute the setting change process or the setting confirmation process. Unless this is done, the hall menu display process (step S302) cannot be executed.

As described above, the hall menu screen is, in principle, a screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 during the execution of the setting change process or the setting confirmation process. However, when the setting change process is executed, even if the setting change process is completed, for example, the operator himself / herself does not select the "Hall menu end" item on the hall menu screen (NO in step S314). Under certain conditions such as the operation time not elapsed for a predetermined time (NO in step S315) and the command to generate the effect control object not being received (NO in step S316), the processes of steps S313 to S316 are repeatedly executed. The hall menu screen will be displayed continuously. Therefore, if the operator performs any operation on the hall menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item (for example, the setting change / confirmation history screen), the hall menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item is displayed. It will be displayed continuously without ending. As a result, even if the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is completed, it is possible to allow the operator time to operate the home menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item. Moreover, even if the operator forgets to select "End Hall Menu", if there is no operation for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the display of the Hall Menu screen or the screen of the selected Hall Menu item ends and the game is played. Since the screen return process (step S317) is executed, an unauthorized person (for example, a hall clerk or a player who is not a game machine administrator) can easily view confidential information such as setting change history, setting confirmation history, and browsing history. It is not possible to do so, and it is possible to ensure security.

In the present embodiment, in step S316, when it is determined that the command to generate the effect control object has been received, the game screen return process (step S317) and the hall menu display prohibition process (step S318) are performed. The game screen is not necessarily limited to this, and is based on receiving a specific command that can be received when the execution of the game is started, such as receiving a command indicating that the firing handle 32 has been operated. The return process (step S317) and the hall menu display prohibition process (step S318) may be performed.

Here, a notification mode when an error occurs, including a backup clear process that does not involve a setting change process, will be described with reference to FIG. 113. FIG. 113 is an example of a screen in which the error content is displayed in the display area of the display device 16, where (a) a screen showing that the backup clear process without setting change processing has been executed, and (b) a start port abnormality. Both a screen indicating that a winning error has occurred and a backup clearing process without setting change processing has been executed, (c) a backup clearing process without setting change processing has been executed, and a start port error winning error It is a figure which shows the screen after the notification period (for example, 30 seconds) which shows that the backup clear process was executed with the occurrence of.

As shown in FIG. 113, when a plurality of errors occur, the host control circuit 2100 displays all the error contents generated in the display area of the display device 16 and controls the voice and LED in the order of high priority errors. The sound is output from the speaker 24 via the circuit 2200 (see FIG. 10), and the light emission control of the LED 25 is executed via the sound / LED control circuit 2200 (see FIG. 10).

When the backup clear process without the setting change process is executed, if no other error has occurred, the host control circuit 2100 has the display area of the display device 16 as shown in FIG. 113 (a). It is controlled so that the characters such as "RAM has been cleared" are displayed inside, and the sound such as "RAM has been cleared" is controlled to be output from the speaker 24. Furthermore, the voice / LED control circuit 2200 Control is performed to fully turn on the LED 25 (for example, see FIG. 1) in red via (see FIG. 10). The characters such as "RAM has been cleared" are displayed using an area larger than the above-mentioned minimum area (see FIG. 112) in which the characters such as "settings have been changed" are displayed.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the setting change process is performed, the backup clear process is always executed (see FIG. 34), and in the hall menu redisplay process of step S312 executed after the setting change process is completed, as described above, " Although characters such as "Settings have been changed" are displayed in the display area of the display device 16, the fact that the backup clear process has been executed is not displayed, and "Settings have been changed. RAM has been initialized." The sound such as "wa" is only output from the speaker 24. On the other hand, when the backup clear process is executed without the setting change process, the host control circuit 2100 uses an area larger than the above-mentioned minimum area (see FIG. 112) in the display area of the display device 16. The characters such as "RAM has been cleared" are controlled to be displayed, and the voice such as "RAM has been cleared" is controlled to be output from the speaker 24 (see FIG. 113 (a)). Here, while the main purpose of the backup clear process that involves the setting change process is to change the setting value (not the backup clear process), the main purpose of the backup clear process that does not involve the setting change process is the backup clear process. Is considered to be. Therefore, when the backup clear process accompanied by the setting change process is executed, the execution of the backup clear process is conservatively notified in a manner that does not interfere with the operation of the redisplayed hall menu screen. On the other hand, when the backup clear process without the setting change process is executed, the fact that the backup clear process is executed is notified in a more conspicuous manner than when the backup clear process with the setting change process is executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the backup clearing process from being executed illegally.

If, for example, a start port abnormal winning error has also occurred as another error after the backup clear process has been executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 113 (b), the starting port abnormal winning error has occurred. , Both that the backup clearing process has been executed are displayed as characters in the display area of the display device 16. At this time, since the backup clear process has a higher priority than the start port abnormal winning error, the characters indicating that the backup clear process has been executed are displayed at the top regardless of the order in which they occurred. .. In addition, a voice notifying that the backup clear process having a high priority has been executed is output from the speaker 24, and the LED 25 is emitted in a mode indicating that the backup clear process has been executed.

In addition, when the notification period (for example, 30 seconds) indicating that the backup clear process has been executed has elapsed while both the backup clear process has been executed and the start port abnormal winning error has occurred, the backup clear process has occurred. Is deleted from the display area of the display device 16, and if no other error has occurred, only the character indicating the start opening abnormality winning error is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. Further, the voice output from the speaker 24 changes from the voice notifying that the backup clear process has been executed to the voice notifying that the start port abnormality winning error has occurred, and the light emitting mode of the LED 25 is also backed up and cleared. The mode changes from the mode indicating that the process has been executed to the mode indicating that an abnormal start opening winning error has occurred. In this way, it is possible to easily grasp the content of the error that has occurred.

In the above, when it is determined that the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is in progress, that is, it is determined that the setting operation command has been received (YES in step S301), the hall menu display process (step S302) is executed. However, it is advisable to execute it even when the backup clear process that does not involve the setting change process is executed. In the backup clear process that does not involve the setting change process, when the backup clear switch 330 is pressed and the power switch 35 is turned on without turning on the setting key 328 when the power is not turned on. It is executed (see FIG. 33). When the backup clear process is executed, the main CPU 101 sends an initialization command to the host control circuit 2100. Therefore, the host control circuit 2100 that receives the initialization command without receiving the setting operation command is accompanied by the setting change process. It can be determined that no backup clear processing has been executed, and the hall menu display processing (step S302) and the hall menu processing (step S303) can be executed.

[10-17-1. Other examples of hall menu tasks]
By the way, the main CPU 101 of the pachinko game machine of the present embodiment determines whether or not the work area of the main RAM 103 is normal in the game permission process (step S17) of the power-on process (see FIG. 31). (See step S1730 in FIG. 32), for example, when the set value data is not within the specified range (within the range of “0” to “5” in this embodiment), it is determined that the work area of the main RAM 103 is not normal (see step S1730). NO in step S1730), the game permission flag is turned off (see step S1760), and the game cannot be executed. However, for example, when the main control board 30 is illegally replaced, there is a high possibility that the work area check process (step S1720) of the RAM 103 will not be executed. Further, when an invalid signal is input and the set value is changed, the set value data may be in the range of "0" to "5". Therefore, similarly to the above-mentioned setting determination process executed during the execution of the game, the set value may not be executed in step S1720 or the set value may have been changed illegally. Assuming that the data is in the range of "0" to "5" (for example, when it is determined to be YES in step S1730), the setting determination process (step) for determining the suitability of the set value information by the host control circuit 2100. The process of S319 and step S320) may be executed. The hall menu task in this case is shown in FIG. FIG. 114 is another example of a hall menu task executed by the host control circuit 2100, and is a flowchart in the case where the host control circuit 2100 executes a setting determination process for determining the suitability of the set value information. Other examples of hall menu tasks will be described below. However, the description of the process common to FIG. 108 will be omitted, and only the setting determination process will be described.

First, the main CPU 101 uses the setting value information stored in the main RAM 103 as the current setting value used for the progress of the game even when the power failure recovery command indicating that the setting confirmation process is completed is transmitted. It is transmitted to the host control circuit 2100.

On the other hand, the host control circuit 2100 that has received the power interruption recovery command determines that the setting has not been changed (NO in step S308), and proceeds to step S319. In step S319, the host control circuit 2100 executes the set value check process. In this set value check process (step S319), the current set value information (the set value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 before the power failure and stored in the subwork RAM 2100a) and the set value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 are performed. This is a process for confirming (set value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 after the power failure). When it is determined in step S308 that the setting has not been changed (NO in step S308), the processes of steps S309 to S316 are not executed.

After confirming the current set value information and the set value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 in the set value check process (step S319), the host control circuit 2100 performs the set value suitability determination process, that is, whether or not the set value is appropriate. Is determined (step S320). At this time, if the current set value information and the set value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 match, it is determined to be appropriate (YES in step S320), and the process proceeds to step S317. The processing after step S317 is as described above.

On the other hand, if the current set value information and the set value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 do not match, it is determined that it is inappropriate (NO in step S320), the process proceeds to step S321, and the host control circuit 2100 sets the set value. Executes abnormal processing.

The above-mentioned processing when the set value is abnormal is a process of displaying an image notifying that the set value is abnormal in the display area of the display device 16. In this set value abnormality processing (step S321), instead of or in addition to the process of displaying an image notifying that the set value is abnormal, a voice notifying that the set value is abnormal is output. The process may be executed.

In this way, when the command transmitted from the main CPU 101 is a power failure recovery command indicating the end of the setting confirmation process, the host control circuit 2100 executes the setting determination process (processes in steps S319 and S320). When it is determined that the set value is not appropriate (NO in step S320), the set value abnormality processing (step S321) is executed, so that it is possible to notify the game machine administrator that the set value is not appropriate.

The above-mentioned setting determination process (process of step S319 and step S320) is executed when the setting confirmation process is completed, but the setting change process is executed without executing either the setting change process or the setting confirmation process. When the backup process (when the power is not turned on, the backup clear switch 330 is pressed and the power switch 35 is turned on without turning on the setting key 328) is executed, or the power is simply turned on. It is preferable to execute even when only inputting. Unless the setting change process is executed, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the setting value information received before the power failure and the setting value information received after the power failure match. This is because it is possible to determine the suitability of.

[10-18. Hall menu processing]
Next, the hall menu processing (step S303) in the hall menu task (see FIGS. 108 and 114) will be described with reference to FIG. 115. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing an example of hall menu processing executed by the host control circuit 2100.

First, the host control circuit 2100 selects a hall menu item that is a target for checking various information / settings and changing various settings based on the operation of the select button 664 and / and the main button 662 by the operator. The hall menu selection process is performed (step S3001). In the hall menu selection process of FIG. 115, the hall menu items include time setting, prize ball information, setting history / setting confirmation history, error information history, monitoring history, warning display setting, notification setting, power saving mode, maintenance, and so on. The case of checking the operation of the accessory, setting the liquid crystal brightness, and setting the volume control will be described, but the hall menu items are not limited to these as described above.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S3001 is "time setting" (step S3002). When it is determined in step S3002 that the selected hall menu is "time setting" (YES in step S3002), the host control circuit 2100 performs the time setting process (step S3003). In this time setting process, the host control circuit 2100 displays a time setting screen (not shown) in the display area of the display device 16 so that the operator can confirm and change the set time. ..

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not "time setting" (NO in step S3002), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S3001 is "prize ball information". Discrimination (step S3004). When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the selected hall menu is "prize ball information" (YES in step S3004), the host control circuit 2100 performs prize ball information processing (step S3005). In this prize ball information processing, the host control circuit 2100 displays a prize ball information screen (not shown) in the display area of the display device 16 so that the operator can confirm the prize ball information. The prize ball information includes, for example, information on the number of prize balls paid out today, information on the difference between the number of prize balls paid out today and the number of game balls fired, and the number of daily prize balls paid out in the past few days. Information, difference information (daily) between the number of prize balls paid out in the past few days and the number of prize balls fired.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not "prize ball information" (NO in step S3004), whether or not the hall menu selected in step S3001 is "setting change / confirmation history". (Step S3006). When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the selected hall menu is "setting change / confirmation history" (YES in step S3006), the host control circuit 2100 performs setting change / confirmation history processing (step S3007). In this setting change / confirmation history processing, the host control circuit 2100 displays a setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 119 described later) described later in the display area of the display device 16, and the operator sets the settings. It is possible to check the confirmation history, change history, and browsing history.

Further, when the host control circuit 2100 detects that the main button 662 has been operated while the select button 664 is operated and the "setting change / confirmation history" is selected, the host control circuit 2100 displays the display area of the display device 16. The setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 119 described later) is displayed, and the operator changes the setting (setting value), confirming the setting (setting value), browsing history, and confirming the setting (setting value). ) And the changed settings (set values) can be confirmed. The details of the setting change / confirmation history processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not "setting change / confirmation history" (NO in step S3006), whether or not the hall menu selected in step S3001 is "error information history". (Step S3008). When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the selected hall menu is "error information history" (YES in step S3008), the host control circuit 2100 performs error information history processing (step S3009). In this error information history processing, the host control circuit 2100 displays an error information history screen (see, for example, FIG. 116) in the display area of the display device 16 so that the operator can check or change the error information history. And.

The error history displayed in the error information history processing is, for example, information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as an error history when the host control circuit 2100 determines that the backup is defective. As described above, the host control circuit 2100 may determine that the backup is defective when an abnormal command is received from the main CPU 101, or the sub control circuit 200 (FIG. 6) without transmitting the abnormal command from the main CPU 101. It may be a time when a normal command from the main CPU 101 cannot be received for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the power supply to (see 9) is started.

As shown in FIG. 116, an error information history table is arranged substantially in the center of the error information history screen. The error information history table has an error content column in which an error code is displayed, an occurrence date and time column in which the date and time when the error code was recorded is displayed, and a cancellation date and time column in which the date and time when the error is cleared is displayed. For example, "MOTOR ERR" is shown in the error content of No. 2 on the error information history screen of FIG. 116, which is, for example, step S1905 (see FIG. 100), step S19146 (see FIG. 103), and step S19179. It shows the date and time information that the process of (see FIG. 106) was performed. Although not shown in FIG. 116, the date / time information (strictly speaking, the date / time information controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state) in which the error motor operation stop state release process (step S311) is performed is the release date / time Shown in the column. Further, the operation method on the error information history screen is displayed at the lower left of the error information history screen. For example, it is shown that the cursor (not shown) can be moved up / down / left / right by operating the select buttons 664a to 664d (see FIG. 3), and the determination can be made by operating the main button 662. It is shown that it can be done.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not "error information history" (NO in step S3008), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S3001 is "monitoring history". (Step S3010). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is "monitoring history" (YES in step S3010), the host control circuit 2100 performs monitoring history processing (step S3011). In this monitoring history processing, the host control circuit 2100 displays a monitoring history processing screen (not shown) in the display area of the display device 16 so that the operator can check the monitoring history.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not "monitoring history" (NO in step S3010), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S3001 is "warning display setting". (Step S3012). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is the "warning display setting" (YES in step S3012), the host control circuit 2100 performs the warning display setting process (step S3013). In this warning display setting process, the host control circuit 2100 displays a warning display setting screen (not shown) in the display area of the display device 16 and enables the operator to check and change the warning display setting.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not the "warning display setting" (NO in step S3012), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S3001 is the "notification setting". (Step S3014). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is the "notification setting" (YES in step S3014), the host control circuit 2100 performs the notification setting process (step S3015). In this notification setting process, the host control circuit 2100 displays a notification setting screen (not shown) in the display area of the display device 16 so that the operator can confirm and change the notification setting.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not the "notification setting" (NO in step S3014), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S3001 is in the "power saving mode". (Step S3016). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is the "power saving mode" (YES in step S3016), the host control circuit 2100 performs the power saving mode processing (step S3017). In this power saving mode processing, the host control circuit 2100 displays a power saving mode screen (not shown) in the display area of the display device 16 so that the operator can confirm and change the power saving mode setting. To do.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not in the "power saving mode" (NO in step S3016), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S3001 is "maintenance". (Step S3018). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is "maintenance" (YES in step S3018), the host control circuit 2100 performs maintenance processing (step S3019). Details of the maintenance process will be described later with reference to FIG. 130.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not "maintenance" (NO in step S3018), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S3001 is "accessory operation check". (Step S3020). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is "confirmation of accessory operation" (YES in step S3020), the host control circuit 2100 performs the accessory operation confirmation process (step S3021). In this accessory operation confirmation process, the host control circuit 2100 displays an accessory operation confirmation screen (not shown) in the display area of the display device 16 so that the operator can confirm the operation of the accessory. ..

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not "confirmation of accessory operation" (NO in step S3020), whether or not the hall menu selected in step S3001 is "liquid crystal brightness setting". Is determined (step S3022). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is "liquid crystal brightness setting" (YES in step S3022), the host control circuit 2100 performs the liquid crystal brightness setting process (step S3023). In this liquid crystal brightness setting process, the host control circuit 2100 displays a liquid crystal brightness setting screen (not shown) in the display area of the display device 16 so that the operator can confirm and change the brightness setting of the display device 16. And.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not the "liquid crystal brightness setting" (NO in step S3022), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S3001 is the "volume adjustment setting". Discrimination (step S3024). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is the "volume adjustment setting" (YES in step S3024), the host control circuit 2100 performs the volume adjustment setting process (step S3025). In this volume adjustment setting process, the host control circuit 2100 displays a volume adjustment setting screen (not shown) on the display device 16, and the operator confirms and changes the volume of the sound output from the speaker 24. Make it possible.

After processing in step S3003, step S3005, step S3007, step S3009, step S3011, step S3013, step S3015, step S3017, step S3019, step S3021, step S3023, step S3025, and the hall menu selected in step S3001 is "volume adjustment". If it is determined that it is not "setting" (NO in step S3024), the host control circuit 2100 ends the hall menu processing and returns the processing to step S304 of the hall menu task (see FIG. 108).

[10-19. Modes of various devices when changing settings and checking settings]
The modes of various devices (display device 16, speaker 24, LED 25, main RAM 103, performance display monitor 334) at the time of setting change / setting confirmation are as described above, but are summarized below for easy understanding. To do.

First, when the settings are changed, the order in which various operations are executed will be described. In the power off state before the power is turned on, the power switch 35 is off. At this time, the display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, and the performance display monitor 334 are turned off. In order to start the setting change process, it is necessary to turn on the setting key 328 before turning on the power. However, even if the setting key 328 is turned on, the display device 16 and the speaker 24 are not turned on unless the power is turned on. , The LED 25 and the performance display monitor 334 remain off.

Next, when both the backup clear switch 330 and the power switch 35 are turned ON while the setting key 328 is turned ON, the main CPU 101 controls the setting change state and transmits a setting operation command (setting change start command). .. The host control circuit 2100 determines that the setting change state has been controlled (the setting change state has been started) based on the reception of the setting operation command (setting change start command) transmitted from the main CPU 101. When controlled to the setting change state, the game cannot be executed, and the host control circuit 2100 displays the hall menu screen in the display area of the display device 16 by the display control circuit 2300 and says "settings are being changed". Display characters. At the same time, the host control circuit 2100 outputs a voice such as "setting is being changed" from the speaker 24 by the voice / LED control circuit 2200, and lights the LED 25 in white by the voice / LED control circuit 2200. Further, the main CPU 101 transmits a setting change security signal to the hall computer 700 via the external terminal board 323. Further, the main CPU 101 executes a backup clear process in which the work area of the main RAM 103 is cleared. The set value set is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101.

Next, when the setting switch 332 is operated in the setting change state, the setting value is updated. However, the set value has not been finalized yet at this stage. The updated setting value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. Further, in the display area of the display device 16, the hall menu screen is displayed, and characters such as "setting is being changed" are continuously displayed. At the same time, a voice such as "setting is being changed" is continuously output from the speaker 24, and the LED 25 is continuously lit in white. In the present embodiment, even if the set value is updated, it is only stored in the register until it is confirmed and is not stored in the main RAM 103. It may be stored in the work area of the main RAM 103. Further, in the present embodiment, the set value is updated by operating the setting switch 332, but the set value is updated by operating another operating means (for example, the backup clear switch 330). You may do so.

Next, when the setting key 328 is turned off, the main CPU 101 ends the setting change state and transmits an initialization command. The host control circuit 2100 determines that the setting change state has ended based on the reception of the initialization command transmitted from the main CPU 101. When the setting change state ends, the game can be executed. However, even if the setting change state ends, the host control circuit 2100 displays at least a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) unless the game execution is started (for example, unless a command for generating an effect control object is received). The control circuit 2300 displays the hall menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item (for example, the setting change / confirmation history screen) in the display area of the display device 16, and displays a character such as "setting has been changed". It is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. However, it is not displayed that the backup clear process has been executed. At the same time, the host control circuit 2100 outputs a voice such as "The setting has been changed. The RAM has been initialized." From the speaker 24 by the voice / LED control circuit 2200 for at least a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). At the same time, the LED 25 is fully lit in red by the voice / LED control circuit 2200. Such display in the display area of the display device 16, output from the speaker 24, and full lighting of the LED 25 in red are continued as long as some operation is performed on the hall menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item. It ends when the non-operation period continues for a predetermined period or when the execution of the game is started. The base value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101. By the way, in the above, it was decided that the backup clear process was not displayed, but the host control circuit 2100 displays "RAM has been cleared" in addition to the display "The settings have been changed". May be written together.

In this way, even if the setting change state is completed, the text display such as "The setting has been changed", the voice output such as "The setting has been changed. The RAM has been initialized.", And the entire red color of the LED 25 By turning on the light for at least a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), it is possible to prevent fraud such as viewing the setting change / confirmation history screen, etc., by an unauthorized third party. Become. Further, since at least the light emitting mode of the LED 25 is clearly different between the setting change state and the end of the setting change state, it is possible to easily grasp from the appearance whether or not the game can be executed.

The above is the mode of various devices (display device 16, speaker 24, LED 25, main RAM 103, performance display monitor 334) when the setting is changed.

Next, when confirming the settings, the order in which various operations are executed will be described. In the power off state before the power is turned on, the power switch 35 is off. At this time, the display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, and the performance display monitor 334 are turned off. In order to start the setting confirmation process, it is necessary to turn on the setting key 328 before turning on the power. However, even if the setting key 328 is turned on, the display device 16 and the speaker 24 are not turned on unless the power is turned on. , The LED 25 and the performance display monitor 334 remain off.

Next, when the power switch 35 is turned ON while the setting key 328 is turned ON (the backup clear switch 330 is not turned ON), the main CPU 101 controls the setting confirmation state and sets operation command (setting confirmation start command). To send. The host control circuit 2100 determines that the setting confirmation state has been controlled (the setting confirmation state has been started) based on the reception of the setting operation command (setting confirmation start command) transmitted from the main CPU 101. When controlled to the setting confirmation state, the game cannot be executed, and the host control circuit 2100 displays the hall menu screen in the display area of the display device 16 by the display control circuit 2300 and "setting is being confirmed". Is displayed. At the same time, the host control circuit 2100 outputs a voice such as "setting is being confirmed" from the speaker 24 by the voice / LED control circuit 2200, and lights the LED 25 in white by the voice / LED control circuit 2200. Further, the main CPU 101 transmits a setting confirmation security signal to the hall computer 700 via the external terminal board 323. The set value set is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101.

Next, when the setting key 328 is turned off, the main CPU 101 ends the setting confirmation state and transmits a power failure recovery command. The host control circuit 2100 determines that the setting confirmation state has been completed based on the reception of the power failure recovery command transmitted from the main CPU 101. When the setting confirmation state is completed, the game can be executed. Further, the host control circuit 2100 executes the game screen return display process (step S318) based on the reception of the power failure recovery command transmitted from the main CPU 101. At this time, the host control circuit 2100 does not display the character indicating that the setting confirmation has been completed, and does not output the voice indicating that the setting confirmation has been completed. However, the host control circuit 2100 lights all the LEDs 25 in red for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), and ends all the red lights of the LEDs 25 when the execution of the game is started. The performance display monitor 334 displays the base value by the main CPU 101.

In this way, even if the setting confirmation state is completed, by performing all the red lighting of the LED 25 for at least a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), fraud such as viewing the setting change / confirmation history screen or the like is authorized. It is possible to suppress what is done by a third party who does not have. Further, since at least the light emitting mode of the LED 25 is clearly different between the setting change state and the setting change state, it is possible to easily grasp from the appearance whether or not the game can be executed.

As described above, when the host control circuit 2100 determines that it is abnormal without receiving any command from the main CPU 101 even after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since it was started, it is determined that the game is stopped. To do. When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the game is stopped, the display control circuit 2300 and the voice / LED control circuit 2200 output a display and a voice saying "Please determine the set value", and the voice / LED control circuit 2200. The LED 25 (see, for example, FIG. 1) is made to blink in white. This state is again controlled by the main CPU 101 to the setting change state, and continues until the host control circuit 2100 receives an initialization command based on the end of the setting change state.

The above is the aspect of various devices (display device 16, speaker 24, LED 25, main RAM 103, performance display monitor 334) at the time of setting confirmation.

[10-20. Setting change / confirmation history processing]
Next, the setting change / confirmation history processing (step S3007) in the hall menu processing (see step S303 in FIG. 108) will be described. In the setting change / confirmation history processing, the setting change / confirmation history information (described later) is displayed in the display area of the display device 16 as the setting change history, the setting value confirmation history, and the browsing history of setting changes and confirmations. Displayed as "setting change history information" and "setting confirmation history information"). In the following, before explaining the setting change / confirmation history processing, first, the setting change, the setting confirmation, and the browsing will be described.

In the present embodiment, the setting change operation can be performed in the setting change process as described above. This setting change process is started by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on, and performing both the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 and the ON operation of the power switch 35. As described above, when the setting change process is started, the set value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. Then, for example, by pressing the setting switch 332, the setting value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is increased or decreased in the range of "1" to "6", and when the desired setting value is reached, the setting key switch signal is output. When the operation is turned off, one of the plurality of set values to be used for the progress of the game is determined, and the setting change process ends.

In order to make it possible to display the history of setting changes, as described above, the main CPU 101 executes an initialization command indicating that the setting change processing is completed after executing the setting change processing, and sets value information after the change. It is transmitted to the host control circuit 2100.

On the other hand, when the host control circuit 2100 receives the initialization command indicating that the setting change processing is completed, the operation type information (information indicating that the setting change processing has been executed) and the setting value indicating the setting value after the setting change have been performed. The information and the date and time data currently timed by the RTC209, that is, the date and time data for which the initialization command is received are stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as the setting change history information. The setting change history information stored at this time corresponds to, for example, the information displayed in the "No. 3" and "No. 4" columns in the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in FIG. 119, which will be described later. To do.

Further, in the present embodiment, when confirming the set value, it is necessary for the main CPU 101 to execute the setting confirmation process as described above. This setting confirmation process is executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. As described above, when the setting confirmation process is started, the set value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. Then, when the setting key switch signal is operated so as to be OFF, the setting confirmation process ends. It should be noted that the setting confirmation process may be executed again when the setting key switch signal is operated to be turned off and then the setting key switch signal is operated to be turned on again. As you did.

Further, in order to be able to display the history of setting confirmation, as described above, the main CPU 101 issues a power failure recovery command as a command indicating that the setting confirmation process is completed after executing the setting confirmation process, to the host control circuit 2100. Send to. At this time, although the set value has not been changed, in order to execute the above-mentioned setting determination process (process in step S319 and step S320, see FIG. 114), the set value information is also transferred from the main CPU 101 to the host control circuit 2100. It is preferable to be transmitted.

On the other hand, when the host control circuit 2100 receives the power failure recovery command indicating that the setting confirmation process has been completed, the operation type information (information indicating that the setting confirmation process has been executed) and RTC209 are currently timed. The date and time data, that is, the date and time data for which the power failure recovery command is received is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as setting confirmation history information. The setting confirmation history information stored at this time corresponds to, for example, the information shown in the “No. 1” column in the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in FIG. 119, which will be described later. As shown in the "No. 1" column on the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in FIG. 119, the setting value information is associated with the information indicating that the setting confirmation process has been executed and the time information. May also be displayed.

The subwork RAM 2100a according to the present embodiment constitutes a storage holding storage area capable of storing and holding written information even in a non-energized state. Therefore, even if the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off by the operator or the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the storage of, for example, setting change / confirmation history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a is retained. ..

In the present embodiment, browsing means that the main button 662 is pressed while the "setting change / confirmation history" is highlighted on the hall menu screen (see FIGS. 110 and 111), and the subwork RAM 2100a is displayed. It means that the setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 119 described later) showing the setting change / confirmation history information stored in is displayed.

The host control circuit 2100 executes the following processing so that the browsing history (browsing history) can be displayed. That is, when the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is in progress (YES in step S301), the host control circuit 2100 displays the hall menu screen in the display area of the display device 16 (step S301). Then, when the "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S303) (YES in step S3006), the host control circuit 2100 highlights the "setting change / confirmation history" (FIG. FIG. See 111). When the main button 662 is pressed in this state, the host control circuit 2100 reads the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a, and reads the setting change / confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 119 described later). ) Is displayed in the display area of the display device 16, and the operation type information (information indicating that the browsing has been performed) and the date and time data currently clocked by the RTC209, that is, the browsing has been performed. The time (when the main button 662 is pressed) is associated with the date and time data and stored in the subwork RAM 2100a. This is the process when the browsing history is recorded in the above-mentioned history recording process (step S306, step S307). That is, the browsing history is recorded in the subwork RAM 2100a when the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16 regardless of whether the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is in progress. When the browsing history is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a, the host control circuit 2100 integrates the browsing history with the already stored setting change / confirmation history information and stores it in the subwork RAM 2100a. The browsing history stored at this time corresponds to, for example, the information displayed in the "No. 2" and "No. 5" columns in the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in FIG. 119, which will be described later.

Here, the history recording processes in steps S306 and S307 can be summarized as follows. First, when the "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S303) (YES in step S3006), and the command received in step S304 is an initialization command indicating the end of the setting change process. The host control circuit 2100 performs both a setting change history and a browsing history. Further, in the hall menu process (step S303), the "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined (YES in step S3006), and the command received in step S304 is a power failure recovery command indicating the end of the setting confirmation process. At that time, the host control circuit 2100 performs both the confirmation history and the browsing history of the settings. Further, when the "setting change / confirmation history" is not selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S303) (NO in step S3006) and the command received in step S304 is an initialization command, the host control circuit 2100 Does not perform the browsing history of the setting change history and the browsing history, but only the setting change history. Further, when the "setting change / confirmation history" is not selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S303) (NO in step S3006) and the command received in step S304 is a power failure recovery command, the host control circuit The 2100 does not perform the browsing history of the setting confirmation history and the browsing history, but only performs the setting confirmation history. Therefore, in the history recording process of step S306 and step S307, "setting change / confirmation" is performed in the hall menu process (step S303) regardless of whether the command received in step S304 is an initialization command or a power failure recovery command. When "History" is selected and determined (YES in step S3006), browsing recording is performed.

In addition to the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing, the hall menu display processing (step S302) and the hall menu processing (step S302) and the hall menu processing (step S302) are performed when the backup clear processing without the setting change processing is executed as described above. When the step S303) is executed, the above-mentioned browsing record is performed, so that the fraudulent monitoring of the amusement store clerk is also performed. That is, in order to perform the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing, a dedicated key (a key that has a notch only in the corresponding part of the setting key 328 and is managed by the game machine management manager) is required, and this dedicated key is used. For example, a general store clerk who does not have a key cannot browse, but a general game store clerk or an unauthorized player who does not have a dedicated key can perform the backup process to view the backup clear process that does not involve the setting change process. It becomes possible to do. Therefore, even when the backup clear process that does not involve the setting change process is executed, the viewing record is performed by the host control circuit 2100, so that the security camera corresponding to that time (usually the security camera installed in the store) It is possible to identify the person who browsed by collating with the image of the camera) or the like.

In the history recording process in steps S306 and S307, regardless of whether the command received in step S304 is an initialization command indicating the end of the setting change process or a power failure recovery command indicating the end of the setting confirmation process. As described above, when the "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S303) (YES in step S3006), browsing recording is performed, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the host control circuit 2100, when the "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined in the hall menu processing (step S303) (YES in step S3006) and the command received in step S304 is a power failure recovery command. Performs both the confirmation history and the browsing history of the setting, but the "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S303) (YES in step S3006), and the command received in step S304 is When it is an initialization command, only the setting change history of the setting change history and the browsing history may be recorded, and the browsing history may not be recorded. As a result, the number of times the browsing history is recorded can be suppressed as much as possible, and it is possible to prevent the browsing history from being unnecessarily increased and making it difficult to detect fraud. Explaining this, when fraud involving a setting change is performed, it is possible to detect that there is a possibility of fraud based on the setting change history that is not remembered by the game machine manager, but the setting confirmation history can be used. Regarding the accompanying fraud, it is difficult to detect that there is a possibility of fraud only from the confirmation history of the settings. Therefore, when the setting is changed, the browsing history is not recorded regardless of whether it is browsed, and when the setting is confirmed, the browsing history is recorded if it is browsed (at least the setting value information is browsed). I tried to record it. This is because it is considered that a person who commits fraud mainly browses after confirming the settings rather than browsing after changing the settings. That is, in the same time zone, if there is no browsing history and only the setting confirmation history, the possibility of fraud is low, but if the number of times of both the setting confirmation history and the browsing history is large, it is considered that there is a possibility of fraud. .. Regardless of whether the command received in step S304 is an initialization command or a power failure recovery command, if "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S303) (step). YES in S3006), the setting change history or the setting confirmation history and the browsing history are both recorded, and the setting confirmation process is executed when the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. The browsing history may also be displayed when the operation type information indicates that the setting has been changed, and the browsing history may not be displayed when the operation type information indicates that the setting change process has been executed.

Further, the history recording processing of steps S306 and S307 was browsed a plurality of times between the start of the hall menu display processing of step S302 and the execution of the game screen return display processing of step S317. Even so, the browsing record is executed only once in step S306 or step S307, which is executed when the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is completed. For example, when "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 111) (YES in step S3046), the setting change / confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 119) is displayed. However, if you select and confirm "Back" on this setting change / confirmation history screen, you will return to the hall menu screen again. Then, when "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and decided on this hall menu screen, the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed again. In this way, even if the setting change / confirmation history screen is browsed a plurality of times between steps S302 and S317, the browsing record is only once.

The reason why it is preferable to limit the browsing record performed between steps S302 to S317 to one time is as follows. That is, for example, a person who changes settings, confirms settings, or browses for the purpose of fraud may intentionally increase the browsing record to increase the number of histories and perform an act that makes it difficult to detect fraud. Therefore, even if such an act is performed, even if the setting change, the setting confirmation, or the browsing is performed a plurality of times during the steps S301 to S314, these histories are recorded only once and the power supply is supplied. It is possible to prevent these histories from increasing unnecessarily by preventing the history from being recorded unless the is turned off and then re-entered.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the hall menu redisplay process (step S312) is executed after the setting change process is completed, and the hall menu redisplay process is not executed after the setting confirmation process is completed. The screen return process (step S317) is executed. For example, even after the setting key 328 is turned off to complete the setting change process or the setting confirmation process, if the setting key 328 is turned on again, the hall menu is displayed. If the specifications are such that the screen is displayed, the hall menu screen can be displayed again after returning to the game screen. In this case, every time the "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and decided on the hall menu screen displayed again, or the ON / OFF operation of the setting key 328 is repeatedly executed, the user browses the screen. Even if there is, it is preferable to record the browsing once.

In addition to the main button 662 and the select button 664, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has operating means such as a power switch 35, a firing handle 32, a volume switch 108, a setting switch 332, a setting key 328, and a backup clear switch 330. ing. Of these, the main button 662, the select button 664, and the firing handle 32 are operation units that can be operated by the player. Regarding the power switch 35, the volume switch 108, the setting switch 332, the setting key 328, and the backup clear switch 330. Is an operation unit that cannot be operated by the player and can be operated only by a specific person such as a game machine administrator.

Further, in the present embodiment, the setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 119) in which the setting value can be confirmed is stored as the browsing history, but the setting value is not displayed. -The confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 124 described later) may be stored as a browsing history.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 117, 118 and 119 to 123, the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the host control circuit 2100 and the display device 16 when the setting change / confirmation history process is executed are executed. The explanation will be given in comparison with the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of.

Note that FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the host control circuit 2100. FIG. 118 is an example of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the host control circuit 2100, and is a flowchart continuing from FIG. 117. FIG. 119 is a diagram showing an example of an initial screen (a screen when the screen is changed to the setting change / confirmation history screen) of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16. FIG. 120 is a diagram showing an example when "Page" is selected on the setting change / confirmation history screen. FIG. 121 is a diagram showing an example of a page update screen on which the page can be updated on the setting change / confirmation history screen. FIG. 122 is a diagram showing an example when "Clear" is selected on the setting change / confirmation history screen. FIG. 123 is a diagram showing an example of a data clear screen in which each history data is cleared on the setting change / confirmation history screen.

When "setting change / confirmation history" is selected in the hall menu process (see FIG. 115) (YES in step S3006 of FIG. 115), the host control circuit 2100 performs the setting change / confirmation history screen display process (step S3051). ). At this time, the initial screen (see FIG. 119) of the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. "Back" is highlighted on the initial screen of this setting change / confirmation history screen.

The setting change / confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 119) displayed in the display area of the display device 16 includes a setting change / confirmation history display area 1640, an operation explanation area 1650, a first selection area 1660a, and the like. It has two selection regions 1660b. In FIG. 119, an example is shown in which "Page" is displayed in the first selection area 1660a and "Clear" and "Return" are displayed in the second selection area 1660b.

For example, as shown in FIG. 119, the time information, the operation type information, and the set value information are associated with each other and displayed in a list in the setting change / confirmation history display area 1640. In the date and time column, the date and time when the setting was changed, the setting was confirmed, or the browsing was performed is displayed. The operation type (setting change, setting confirmation, browsing) is displayed in the operation type column. In the setting value column, when the setting is changed, the changed setting value is displayed, and when the setting is confirmed, the setting value at that time is displayed. In the operation type column, "change" is simply displayed when the setting is changed, and "confirmation" is simply displayed when the setting is confirmed.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the time information and the operation type information (setting change, setting confirmation, browsing) are displayed in association with each other on the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen. .. Further, when the operation type is a setting change, the set value after the setting is displayed, and when the setting is confirmed, the set value at that time is displayed in association with the date and time and the operation type, respectively.

The host control circuit 2100 executes the timekeeping process after executing the setting change / confirmation history screen display procedure (step S3051) (step S3052). This timekeeping process is a process of starting the timekeeping of the timer built in the host control circuit 2100. Here, the timer is started to be timed after the setting change / confirmation history screen display process (step S3051) is executed (the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen in the display area of the display device 16 (see FIG. 119). ) Is displayed), and when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the hall menu screen (for example, see FIG. 110) is displayed.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S3053 whether or not the select button 664 has been operated. If the select button 664 is not operated (NO in step S3053), the process proceeds to step S3071 described later, and it is determined whether or not "return" is determined on the initial screen (see FIG. 119) of the setting change / confirmation history screen. On the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen, "Back" is highlighted (selected) as described above. Therefore, if the main button 662 is pressed without operating the select button 664, it is determined to be "Back". Will be done.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the select button 664 has been operated (YES in step S3053), the host control circuit 2100 highlights the selected item (step S3054). For example, when the upper select button 664a is operated on the initial screen (see FIG. 119) of the setting change / confirmation history screen in which "back" is highlighted, the highlight display moves from "back" to "page" (see FIG. 119). See FIG. 120).

The host control circuit 2100 highlights the selected item (step S3054) and then executes the timekeeping process (step S3055). This timekeeping process is a process of clearing the timekeeping of the timer started in step S3052 and starting the timekeeping of the timer built in the host control circuit 2100 again. Clearing the timer and restarting the time is to perform any processing within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the item selected on the setting change / confirmation history screen is highlighted (step S3054). This is so that the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 110) is displayed when the procedure is not performed.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S3056 whether or not it is determined to be "Page". When the operator presses the main button 662 while "Page" is selected (highlighted state) on the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16, the host control circuit 2100 causes the host control circuit 2100 to move. It is determined that it is determined to be "Page".

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the "Page" has been determined (YES in step S3056), the host control circuit 2100 executes the page update screen display process (step S3057). When the page update screen display process is executed, the page update screen (see FIG. 121) on the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. On the page update screen on the setting change / confirmation history screen, images imitating the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d, and "next page" and "previous page" are displayed on the left and right of the notation of "Page". As a result, the operator understands that operating the left select button 664c updates the setting change / confirmation history screen to the previous page, and operating the right select button 664d updates the setting change / confirmation history screen to the next page. can do. If the left select button 664c is operated while the first page of the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed, the final page is displayed, and if the right select button 664d is operated while the final page is displayed, one page is displayed. Convenience can be enhanced by cyclically displaying the eyes so that they are displayed.

On the other hand, if it is not determined to be "Page" (NO in step S3056), the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S3065 described later and determines whether or not it is determined to be "Clear" on the setting change / confirmation history screen. ..

When the host control circuit 2100 executes the page update screen display process (step S3057), the host control circuit 2100 executes the timekeeping process (step S3058). This timekeeping process is a process of clearing the timekeeping of the timer started in step S3055 and starting the timekeeping of the timer built in the host control circuit 2100 again. The timer is cleared and the time is restarted after the page update screen display process (step S3057) is executed (after the page update screen (see FIG. 121) on the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed). ), The hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 110) is displayed when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds).

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S3059 whether or not the page update operation has been performed. If the page update operation has not been performed (NO in step S3059), the process proceeds to step S3062 described later.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the page update operation has been performed (YES in step S3059), the host control circuit 2100 executes the page update process (step S3060). When the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d are operated on the page update screen (see FIG. 121) on the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16, the host control circuit 2100 performs page update processing. The setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 is updated to the setting change / confirmation history screen of the next page or the previous page and displayed. The setting change / confirmation history screen when the setting change / confirmation history screen on the next page or the previous page is updated is omitted.

In the present embodiment, in the host control circuit 2100, when the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d are operated on the page update screen (see FIG. 121) on the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16. Although the page update process is performed, the operation for performing the page update process is not limited to this. For example, by operating the up and down select buttons 664a and 664b, one of "No. 1" to "No. 5" in the setting change / confirmation history screen can be selected, and the lower select button 664b is operated. Moreover, the page update process may be performed when it is determined to be the last line. The same applies to the page update process in the modified example of the setting change / confirmation history process described later.

When the host control circuit 2100 executes the page update process (step S3060), the host control circuit 2100 executes the timekeeping process (step S3061). This timekeeping process is a process of clearing the timekeeping of the timer started in step S3058 and starting the timekeeping of the timer built in the host control circuit 2100 again. The timer is cleared and restarted for a predetermined time (after the setting change / confirmation history screen of the next page or the previous page is displayed) after the page update process (step S3060) is executed. This is so that the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 110) is displayed when no processing is performed within (for example, 30 seconds).

After executing the timekeeping process of step S3061, the host control circuit 2100 returns to step S3059 and determines whether or not the page update operation has been performed.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S3062 whether or not the select button 664 has been operated. If the select button 664 is not operated (NO in step S3062), the process proceeds to step S3072 described later. In this case, moving to step S3072 instead of step S3071 is that "return" is highlighted (selected) on the page update screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen as in the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen. Because it is not.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the select button 664 has been operated (YES in step S3062), the host control circuit 2100 highlights the selected item (step S3063). For example, when the lower select button 664b is operated on the setting change / confirmation history screen (see FIG. 121), the highlight display moves from “Page” to “Clear” (see FIG. 122).

The host control circuit 2100 highlights the selected item (step S3063) and then executes the timekeeping process (step S3064). This timekeeping process is a process of clearing the timekeeping of the timer started in step S3061 and starting the timekeeping of the timer built in the host control circuit 2100 again. Clearing the timer and restarting the time is that no processing was performed within the specified time (for example, 30 seconds) after the selected item was highlighted on the setting change / confirmation history screen. This is so that the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 110) is sometimes displayed.

After executing the timekeeping process of step S3064, the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S3065 and determines whether or not it is determined to be “clear”. When the operator presses the main button 662 while "Clear" is selected (highlighted state) on the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16, the host control circuit 2100 causes the host control circuit 2100 to move. It is determined that it is determined to be "clear".

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the determination is "clear" (YES in step S3065), the host control circuit 2100 executes the setting change / confirmation history data clear process (step S3066). This setting change / confirmation history data clearing process is a process of erasing all the data of the setting change history, the setting confirmation history, and the browsing history stored in the subwork RAM 2100a. When the setting change / confirmation history data clearing process is executed, all the history data displayed in the setting change / confirmation history display area 1640 in the display area of the display device 16 are deleted (see FIG. 123). When the setting change / confirmation history data clearing process in step S3065 is executed, the item "Return" is highlighted.

In the above setting change / confirmation history data clearing process (step S3066), all the data of the setting change history, the setting confirmation history, and the browsing history stored in the subwork RAM 2100a are deleted, but not necessarily all. The data is not limited to the erasure, and only a part of the data may be erased. As a mode for erasing a part of data, for example, No. 1-No. A mode of erasing the time (date and time) information, operation type information, and setting value information corresponding to a specific No. 5 among 5, a mode of erasing the setting change / confirmation history screen for each page, and a plurality of operation types (setting change). , Setting confirmation, browsing) of the mode of deleting the date and time (time) information, operation type information, and setting value information corresponding to a specific operation type, time (date and time) information, operation type information, and setting value information. A mode in which only specific information (for example, set value information) is deleted can be considered.

Further, it is preferable that the setting change / confirmation history data clearing process (step S3066) is executed only by a person who satisfies a specific condition. For example, in the state where "Clear" is selected (highlighted state) on the setting change / confirmation history screen, for example, the input of the password may be a condition for enabling the pressing of the main button 662. In this case, if the operator presses the main button 662 without entering the password, a screen requesting the password is displayed, and the setting change / confirmation history data clearing process is executed only when the correct password is entered. Can be done. As a result, it is possible to prevent accidentally clearing the setting change history, setting confirmation history, and browsing history data. Further, for example, a person who performs a setting change process or browsing for the purpose of fraud may delete the setting change history, setting confirmation history, and browsing history data in order to hide his / her fraud. Therefore, by allowing only a specific person, such as a person who knows the password, to execute the setting change / confirmation history data clearing process, it is possible to suppress the setting change processing and browsing for the purpose of fraud. It will be possible.

When the host control circuit 2100 executes the setting change / confirmation history data clear process (step S3066), the host control circuit 2100 executes the timekeeping process (step S3067). This timekeeping process is a process of clearing the timekeeping of the timer started in step S3064 and starting the timekeeping of the timer built in the host control circuit 2100 again. The timer is cleared and the time is restarted after the setting change / confirmation history data clear process (step S3066) is executed (each history data displayed in the setting change / confirmation history display area 1640). This is so that the hall menu screen (for example, see FIG. 110) is displayed when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after all are erased.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S3068 whether or not the select button 664 has been operated. If the select button 664 is not operated (NO in step S3068), the process proceeds to step S3072 described later. In this case, the reason for moving to step S3071 instead of step S3072 is that "return" is highlighted (selected) on the data clear screen in which each history data is cleared, unless the select button 664 is operated. .. Therefore, if the specification is such that "return" is not highlighted on the data clear screen in which each history data is cleared, the process proceeds to step S3072.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the select button 664 has been operated (YES in step S3068), the host control circuit 2100 highlights the selected item (step S3069).

The host control circuit 2100 highlights the selected item (step S3069) and then executes the timekeeping process (step S3070). This timekeeping process is a process of clearing the timekeeping of the timer started in step S3067 and starting the timekeeping of the timer built in the host control circuit 2100 again. Clearing the timer and restarting the time is to perform any processing within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the item selected on the setting change / confirmation history screen is highlighted (step S3069). This is so that the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 110) is displayed when the procedure is not performed.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S3071 whether or not it is determined to "return". When the operator presses the main button 662 while "Back" is selected (highlighted state) on the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16, the host control circuit 2100 causes the host control circuit 2100 to move. It is determined that "return" has been decided.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that "return" is determined (YES in step S3071), the hall menu screen display process is executed (step S3073), and the setting change / confirmation history process is terminated. This hall menu screen display process is a process of displaying the initial screen (see FIG. 110) of the hall menu screen in the display area of the display device 16 instead of the setting change / confirmation history screen.

If "return" is not determined in step S3071 (NO in step S3071), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed (step S3072).

When the host control circuit 2100 determines in step S3072 that the predetermined time has elapsed (YES in step S3072), the host control circuit 2100 proceeds to step S3073, exits the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16, and halls. The initial screen of the menu screen (see FIG. 110) is displayed. That is, even if the operator does not voluntarily select and decide the "return" item, if the non-operation period continues for a predetermined period, the setting change / confirmation history screen is finished and the initial screen of the hall menu screen is displayed. The Rukoto.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not elapsed in step S3072 (NO in step S3072), the host control circuit 2100 returns to step S3053 and continues the processing after step S3053.

In this way, on the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed on the display device 16 during setting change or setting confirmation, the setting change / confirmation history screen ends when a predetermined time elapses without performing any operation. , The hall menu screen is configured to be displayed. However, on the hall menu screen, the host control circuit 2100 controls so that the display of the hall menu screen continues without ending the hall menu screen as long as the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed even if there is no operation. To do. In this case, the item for ending the hall menu is not displayed on the hall menu screen.

The process of moving to step S3073 when it is determined in step S3072 that the predetermined time has elapsed (YES in step S3072) is the hall menu process (that is, the setting is being changed or is being changed) in step S303 (see FIGS. 108 and 114) described above. It is a process in (setting confirmation), and a different process is executed in the hall menu process (that is, after the setting change or setting confirmation is completed) in step S313 (see FIGS. 108 and 114) (not shown). Specifically, when a predetermined time elapses without any operation in the setting change / confirmation history process (step S3007) in the hall menu process in step S313 (a predetermined time elapses in step S3072 in the hall menu process in step S313) (step S3072). When it is determined to be YES) in), the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S317 (see FIGS. 108 and 114), ends the display of the setting change / confirmation history screen, and returns to the game screen display process (step S317). And the hall menu display prohibition process (step S318) is executed. That is, on the setting change / confirmation history screen during setting change or setting confirmation, if the non-operation time continues for a predetermined time, the hall menu screen is only returned (the setting change / confirmation history screen can be viewed again). However, on the setting change / confirmation history screen that is displayed via the hall menu screen that is redisplayed after the setting change process is completed, if the non-operation time continues for a predetermined time, the setting change / confirmation history screen is viewed again. You will not be able to.

Further, regarding the process of returning to step S3053 when it is determined in step S3072 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (NO in step S3072), the hall menu process (that is, setting) of step S303 (see FIGS. 108 and 114) described above is also performed. It is a process during the change (during change or setting confirmation), and a different process is executed in the hall menu process (that is, after the setting change or setting confirmation is completed) in step S313 (see FIGS. 108 and 114) (not shown). Specifically, even if the non-operation period does not reach the predetermined period in the setting change / confirmation history process (step S3007) in the hall menu process in step S313 (NO in step S3072), for example, an effect control object is generated. The game screen return process (step S317) and the hall menu display prohibition process (step S318) are executed based on the fact that a predetermined end condition such as when it is determined that the command has been received is satisfied. That is, on the setting change / confirmation history screen during setting change or setting confirmation, if the non-operation time continues for a predetermined time, the hall menu screen is only returned (the setting change / confirmation history screen can be viewed again). However, on the setting change / confirmation history screen that is displayed via the hall menu screen that is redisplayed after the setting change process is completed, the setting change / confirmation history is displayed again even if the non-operation time does not reach the specified time. You will not be able to browse the screen. In other words, on the setting change / confirmation history screen that is displayed via the hall menu screen that is redisplayed after the setting change process is completed, the no-operation period is not continued for a predetermined period, and the above-mentioned predetermined end condition Unless is satisfied, the processes of steps S3053 to S3072 are repeatedly executed.

In this way, when the setting change process is executed, even if the setting change process is completed, the operator has a grace period for viewing the confidential information such as the history of the setting change and the setting confirmation, and the predetermined time ( For example, if there is no operation for 30 seconds), the display of the setting change / confirmation history screen ends and the game screen return process (step S317) and the hall menu prohibition process (step S318) are executed. (For example, a hall clerk or a player who is not a game machine administrator) cannot easily browse confidential information such as a setting change history, a setting confirmation history, and a browsing history, and it is possible to ensure security.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, on the setting change / confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 119, the time information, the operation type information, and the set value are set regardless of the operation type (setting change, setting confirmation, browsing). A list screen showing all the information is displayed. That is, the first information (for example, No. 3 in FIG. 119) in which the time information and the set value information when the setting is changed is displayed, and the time information and the set value information when the setting is confirmed are displayed. The second information to be displayed (for example, No. 3 and No. 4 in FIG. 119) and the third information in which the time information and the set value information at the time of browsing are displayed (for example, No. 3 in FIG. 119). 2, No. 5) and are displayed in a list. However, the operator (for example, the game machine administrator) may want to narrow down the target to display the specific operation type information. Therefore, a screen in which time information, operation type information, and set value information are displayed in a list (see, for example, FIG. 119), the above-mentioned first information, the above-mentioned second information, and the above-mentioned third information Of these, the narrowed-down screen narrowed down to only specific information may be selectively displayed in the display area of the display device 16 according to the intention of the operator. This makes it possible to improve the convenience of the operator. In particular, the above-mentioned first information is highly convenient in terms of business because it is possible to know not only fraudulent detection but also information such as how many days the business has been conducted with the set value. Since the above narrowing screen can be displayed by narrowing down the target to specific operation type information, information unrelated to the operation type (for example, current time information) may be displayed.

[10-21. Other examples of display screens displayed in setting change / confirmation history processing]
Next, another example of the display screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 in the setting change / confirmation history processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 to 128. However, the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the host control circuit 2100 is the same as in FIGS. 117 and 118. Therefore, in another example, the screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 will be described. The description of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the host control circuit 2100 will be omitted.

FIG. 124 is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16, and is a diagram showing an example of the initial screen. FIG. 125 is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16, and is a diagram showing an example when “setting display” is selected. FIG. 126 is a diagram showing another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 when a set value is newly added and displayed. FIG. 127 is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16, and is a diagram showing an example when “Page” is selected. FIG. 128 is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16, and is a diagram showing an example of a page update screen on which the page can be updated.

For example, as shown in FIG. 124, the setting change / confirmation history screen has a setting change / confirmation history display area 1670, an operation explanation area 1680, a first selection area 1690a, and a second selection area 1690b.

In the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 124, the time information and the operation type information are displayed in the setting change / confirmation history display area 1670, but the setting value information is not displayed. That is, the setting change / confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 124 is a screen in which only the time information and the operation type information of the time information, the operation type information, and the setting value information are displayed. In the date and time column where the time information is displayed, the date and time when the setting change / setting confirmation / browsing was performed is displayed, and in the operation type column where the operation type information is displayed, the operation type (setting change, setting change, Setting confirmation, browsing) is displayed.

Further, on the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen, in addition to "clear" and "return", "setting display" is also displayed in the second selection area 1690b. In the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history, "Back" is selected and displayed (highlighted). Also in this other example, the highlighted item can be selected by operating the select button 664.

When the select button 664 is operated to select "setting display", "setting display" is highlighted (see FIG. 125). Then, when the host control circuit 2100 detects that the main button 662 is pressed while the "setting display" is selected (highlighted), the time information and the operation type information are displayed, but the setting value information. The setting change / confirmation history screen (list screen), which displays a list of time information, operation type information, and setting value information, is displayed instead of the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen. 126). In this way, in this other example, although the setting value is not displayed on the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen, by selecting and deciding "setting display", it is associated with the date and time and the operation type. The new set values will be displayed in a list. When the setting change / confirmation history screen in which the time information, the operation type information, and the setting value information are displayed is displayed instead of the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen, as shown in FIG. 126, " Back is highlighted.

On the setting change / confirmation history screen (see FIG. 126) in which time information, operation type information, and setting value information are displayed, when "Page" is selected by operating the select button 664, "Page" is highlighted. (See FIG. 127). Then, when the host control circuit 2100 detects that the main button 662 is pressed while "Page" is selected (highlighted), the host control circuit 2100 executes the page update process. When this page update process is executed, the page update screen (see FIG. 128) on the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. On this page update screen, the next page or the previous page can be updated by operating the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d.

In addition, when "Page" is selected and the main button 662 is pressed on the initial screen (see FIG. 124) of the setting change / confirmation history screen in which the time information and the operation type information are displayed but the setting value information is not displayed. However, the page update process is executed by the host control circuit 2100. However, when this page update process is executed, the page update screen on the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16 although the time information and the operation type information are displayed but the setting value information is not displayed. Is displayed. On this page update screen, by operating the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d, it is possible to update to the next page or the previous page of the setting change / confirmation history screen in which the setting value is not displayed. However, the page update process may not be executed on the setting change / confirmation history screen in which the time information and the operation type information are displayed but the setting value information is not displayed.

In this other example, for example, as shown in FIG. 124, only the time information and the operation type information among the time information, the operation type information, and the set value information are displayed on the screen, and as shown in FIG. 126, the time information and the operation type information are displayed. And the screen in which the setting value information is displayed in a list can be selectively displayed, but the screen in FIG. 124 is one or two of the time information, the operation type information, and the setting value information. Any screen may be used as long as only information is displayed.

In addition, the setting change / confirmation history screen in which time information, operation type information, and setting value information are displayed in a list can be viewed only by those who meet specific conditions (for example, those who have entered an appropriate password). This may be done, but this will be described later.

FIG. 129 shows a setting change / confirmation history screen on which the set value can be confirmed on the hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the operation procedure until it is done. As shown in FIG. 129, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a hall menu when a setting change process or a setting confirmation process is executed as a first procedure for viewing the setting change / confirmation history information. Display the screen. As described above, the setting change process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on, and performing both the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 and the ON operation of the power switch 35. Further, the setting confirmation process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. The setting key 328 can turn on the setting key switch signal by turning it in one direction, and turns off the setting key switch signal by turning it in the opposite direction (returning it to the original position). It is configured to be able to.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the ON operation of the setting key 328 is an operation performed regardless of whether the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is executed, but the setting is not limited to this. It may be an operation performed when executing at least one of the change process and the setting confirmation process. The same applies to any of the modifications described later.

As a second procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to "setting change / confirmation history" by selecting and determining "setting change / confirmation history" in the hall menu on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 111). Is highlighted and only the date and time data and operation type (corresponding operation type of setting change, confirmation, browsing) are displayed. Preview of setting change / confirmation history screen including setting change / confirmation history information. Display the screen (see FIG. 111) (setting values are not displayed).

As a third step, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the main button 662 is pressed in a state where "setting change / confirmation history" is highlighted on the hall menu screen (see FIG. 111) displayed in the second step. When pressed, the setting change / confirmation history screen (see FIG. 119) is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. On this setting change / confirmation history screen, date and time data, an operation type (corresponding operation type among setting change, confirmation, and browsing) and a set value are associated with each other.

Therefore, the person who can use and operate the setting key 328 (the person who has the authority) can change the setting of the setting change / confirmation history screen (see FIG. 119) displayed through the first to third steps. By looking at the confirmation history, it becomes possible to check at a glance each history of setting change of the setting value that defines the payout rate, confirmation of setting change, viewing of setting change and confirmation, and the corresponding setting value. .. The person who has the authority is a person who is given the authority to change the setting, confirm the setting change, etc., and means the store manager of the hall or the like. Hereinafter, the "authoritative person" may be referred to as an "administrative authority".

As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 constituting the game machine according to the present invention controls the display device 16 for displaying various images, the operation button group 66 such as the main button 662 and the select button 664, and the control related to the game. The main CPU 101, which is a control unit for performing the data, and the host control circuit 2100, which is a display control unit for controlling the display of the display device 16, are provided, and the control unit changes or confirms set values (for example, settings 1 to 6). The display control unit includes a setting switch 332 which is a setting means for enabling the above, a data transmission means for transmitting various data to the host control circuit 2100, and a reception means for receiving various data from the data transmission means. The main CPU 101 includes a sub-work RAM 2100a that functions as a backup memory capable of storing and holding written information even in a non-energized state, and an RTC 209 that measures the date and time, and the main CPU 101 changes or confirms the settings by means of data transmission means. And the set value are transmitted to the host control circuit 2100, and the host control circuit 2100 changes the setting or confirms the setting and confirms the setting in the subwork RAM 2100a when the data received by the data receiving means changes the setting or confirms the setting. It also has a setting display function that stores the date and time data from RTC209 as setting change / confirmation history information and displays the setting change or setting confirmation and date / time data stored in the subwork RAM 203 on the display device 16, and changes or sets the setting. It has a configuration in which the set value stored in the subwork RAM 2100a is displayed when the main button 662 is operated while the confirmation and the date and time data are displayed.

With this configuration, setting change or setting confirmation, setting value and date and time data from RTC209 are stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as setting change / confirmation history information. Therefore, the main setting change or setting confirmation and date / time data are displayed. When the button 662 is operated, the set value stored in the subwork RAM 2100a can be displayed. Therefore, when "setting change / confirmation history" is selected in the hall menu, each history related to the setting value can be confirmed, and it can be determined whether or not an illegal setting change or setting confirmation has been performed. Will be.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment may acquire the date and time data for which the set value is received from the RTC209, and store the set value, the date and time data, and the information indicating the setting change in association with each other. Good.

With this configuration, the changed setting value, the changed date and time data, and the information indicating the setting change are stored in association with each other, so that the authorized person can specify the date and time when the setting value is changed. This makes it possible to identify the fraudulent activity such as changing the set value.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment acquires the date and time when the information indicating that the set value has been confirmed is received from RTC209, and stores the date and time data and the information indicating the setting confirmation in association with each other. May be good.

With this configuration, the date and time data for which the set value is confirmed and the information indicating the setting confirmation are stored in association with each other, so that the authorized person can specify the date and time when the set value is confirmed and set. It is possible to identify the fraud when fraud such as checking the value has been performed.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is displayed when the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data of the setting change / confirmation history information of the subwork RAM 2100a are displayed. The date and time data may be stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as a browsing history, and the browsing history may be displayed on the display device 16.

With this configuration, when the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data are displayed in the setting change / confirmation history information, the displayed date and time data is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as a browsing history. Browsing history can be displayed. Therefore, in the state where "Setting change / confirmation history" is selected in the hall menu where the setting value is not displayed, in addition to setting change or setting confirmation, setting value and date / time data display among the setting change / confirmation history information, browsing Since the history can be displayed, it is possible to determine whether or not the setting change or the browsing history of the setting confirmation has been browsed for an illegal purpose such as a goto act.

With the above configuration, in the present embodiment, it is possible to save and display the setting change / confirmation history information in which the setting change or setting confirmation and the setting value and the date and time data are associated with each other, so that each history related to the setting value can be saved and displayed. It is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine 1 that can be confirmed and can determine whether or not an illegal setting change or setting confirmation has been performed.

Further, the pachinko game machine 1 constituting the game machine according to the present invention is a display device 16 for displaying various images, an operation unit such as a main button 662 and a select button 664, and a control unit for controlling the game. A setting that includes a main CPU 101 and a host control circuit 2100 that is a display control unit that controls the display of the display device 16, and the control unit can change or confirm set values (for example, settings 1 to 6). A setting switch 332, which is a means, and a data transmission means for transmitting various data to the host control circuit 2100 are provided, and the display control unit has a receiving means for receiving various data from the data transmitting means and a non-energized state. The main CPU 101 includes a subwork RAM 2100a capable of storing and holding the written information and an RTC 209 for measuring the date and time, and the main CPU 101 sends a setting change or setting confirmation and a set value to the host control circuit 2100 by a data transmission means. When the data received by the data receiving means is changed or confirmed, the host control circuit 2100 transmits and changes the setting or confirms the setting in the subwork RAM 2100a, and changes the setting and the date and time data from the RTC209. It has a setting display function that stores as confirmation history information and displays the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a on the display device 16, and the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a is displayed on the display device 16. When displayed in, the date and time data is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as a browsing history, and the browsing history is displayed on the display device 16.

With this configuration, when the setting change / confirmation history information of the subwork RAM 2100a is displayed, the displayed date and time data is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as a browsing history, and the browsing history is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. be able to. Therefore, it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

Further, the pachislot machine according to the present embodiment has a configuration in which the date and time data in which the setting change / confirmation history information is displayed on the display device 16 is acquired from the RTC209, and the date and time data and the information representing the browsing history are stored in association with each other. May be.

With this configuration, the date and time data and the information representing the browsing history are stored in association with each other, so that the date and time when the information related to the set value was browsed can be specified, and fraud such as changing the set value can be performed. If it has been done, it will be possible to identify the fraud.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is displayed when the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data of the setting change / confirmation history information of the subwork RAM 2100a are displayed. The date and time data may be stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as a browsing history, and the browsing history may be displayed on the display device 16.

With this configuration, when the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data are displayed in the setting change / confirmation history information, the displayed date and time data is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as a browsing history. The browsing history can be displayed on the display device 16. Therefore, in the state where "Setting change / confirmation history" is selected in the hall menu where the setting value is not displayed, in addition to setting change or setting confirmation, setting value and date / time data display among the setting change / confirmation history information, browsing Since the history can be displayed, it is possible to determine whether or not the setting change or the browsing history of the setting confirmation has been browsed for an illegal purpose such as a goto act.

With the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, it is possible to save and display the browsing history information in which the browsing history of browsing the setting change confirmation / history information is associated with the date and time data, so that an unnatural operation regarding the setting value can be performed. It is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine 1 that can not only determine whether or not it has been done, but also can determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

[10-22. Maintenance process]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 130 to 132, a maintenance process (step S3019) executed by the host control circuit 2100 and a maintenance screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 when the maintenance process is executed. Will be explained in comparison. Note that FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing an example of maintenance processing executed by the host control circuit 2100. FIG. 131 is a diagram showing an example when the maintenance screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. FIG. 132 is an example of a maintenance screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16.

In the maintenance process, the host control circuit 2100 displays the maintenance screen (see FIGS. 131 and 132) in the display area of the display device 16. In this maintenance process, devices (for example, various sensors, various operating accessories, etc.) connected to the host control circuit 2100, such as an effect button switch 621, an effect group 1000, and other effects, are subject to maintenance processing. Then, the operator can confirm whether or not these devices operate normally.

As shown in FIGS. 131 and 132, the host control circuit 2100 displays an operation status display table of various devices (various sensors, various accessories, etc.) in the substantially center of the maintenance screen (see FIGS. 131 and 132). .. In this operation status display table, for example, a name string in which the names of 28 various devices are displayed and a number string in which serial numbers (1 to 28) attached to the various devices displayed in the name column are displayed. And an operating state sequence indicating the operating states of various devices. The "OFF" display in the operating status column indicates that there is no input from various devices. When there is input from various devices, the display of the operating status column is changed from "OFF" display to "ON" display. For example, when the effect button 1 is operated while the maintenance screen is being displayed, the host control circuit 2100 changes the display of the operation status column of the effect button 1 from the “OFF” display to the “ON” display. The "ON" display is displayed in red. The above "input from each device" is based on the detection of an input port or the like by the host control circuit 2100. Further, each of the effectable objects has an accessory detection sensor group 1002 (see FIG. 9) for detecting the presence at least in the normal position (for example, the initial position), and when the sensor for detecting the normal position is ON. It is assumed that the display is turned off and the display is turned on when the accessory detection sensor group 1002 for detecting the normal position is OFF, that is, when the effecting accessory moves.

Further, the host control circuit 2100 displays an operation method on the maintenance screen below the maintenance screen. Specifically, when the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are pressed at the same time, it is displayed that the initial screen (see FIG. 110) of the hall menu screen is returned (redisplayed). Further below, images corresponding to the main button 662 and the select button 664 are displayed. In FIG. 132, the images corresponding to all the select buttons 664a to 624d are displayed in white to indicate that they are valid.

In the maintenance process (see FIG. 130), the host control circuit 2100 first acquires the sub-device input information (step S3081). The sub-device input information is the detection result of the operating state of various devices with serial numbers 21 to 28 in the operating state display table shown in FIG. 132. The sub-device input information includes sub-input state information indicating whether the various devices are in an on state with an input or an off state with no input.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs a sub-input state information editing process for reading the sub-input state information in the acquired sub-device input information (step S3082).

Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs a maintenance screen display process for displaying the maintenance screen (see FIGS. 131 and 132) in the display area of the display device 16 based on the sub-input state information read in step S3082 (step). S3083). In this process, the display of the maintenance screen and the update of the display (for example, change from "OFF" display to "ON" display) are performed.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are operated at the same time (step S3084). When it is determined that the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are operated at the same time (YES in step S3084), the host control circuit 2100 ends the maintenance process and the hall menu process (see FIG. 115). The process returns to step S304 of the hall menu task (see FIG. 108).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are not operated at the same time (NO in step S3084), the host control circuit 2100 returns the process to step S3081.

By the way, in recent years, some pachinko machines and pachislot machines have a plurality of functions in one device. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the effect button 62 is provided with a function as an operation button and a function as an effect button. The function of the effect button corresponds to, for example, a function of projecting and moving upward based on the lottery result of a special symbol. Then, when the "effect button 1" of the serial number 21 shown in FIG. 132 is selected and determined, the host control circuit 2100 executes maintenance for the operation function of the effect button 62. Further, when the "effect button 2" having the serial number 22 shown in FIG. 132 is selected and determined, the host control circuit 2100 projects and moves the effect button 62 upward to perform maintenance on the effect function. If the result of the maintenance operation is a normal determination, the host control circuit 2100 executes the maintenance screen display process (step S3083) and executes the maintenance screen display process (changes from "OFF" display to "ON" display. ). When the effect button 62 protruding upward due to the selection and determination of the "effect button 2" is determined to be normal, for example, the select button 664 is operated to select another serial number item shown in FIG. 132. When this is done, the host control circuit 2100 returns to the normal state (the state before protruding upward) when the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are pressed at the same time and the maintenance mode ends. Be controlled.

Further, in recent pachinko gaming machines and pachislot machines, some pachinko machines and pachislot machines are provided with a plurality of effecting objects having different driving means. In such a gaming machine, a plurality of producing objects having different driving means are simultaneously operated. Maintenance may be executed, a plurality of effectors having different driving means may be operated at different timings to perform maintenance, or they may be independently operated to perform maintenance. For example, in a gaming machine provided with the effectors 1 to 3 having different drive means, for example, when the "effector 1 + 2" of the serial number 14 shown in FIG. 132 is selected and determined, the host control circuit 2100 sets the host control circuit 2100. The production accessory 1 and the production accessory 2 are operated at the same time to perform maintenance. Further, for example, when the serial number 17 “effect 1 → 2” shown in FIG. 132 is selected and determined, the host control circuit 2100 first activates the effect 1 and then operates the effect 2. Let me perform maintenance. Further, for example, when the “directing accessory 1” having the serial number 11 shown in FIG. 132 is selected and determined, the host control circuit 2100 operates the producing accessory 1 independently to perform maintenance. For example, if the effect 1 and the effect 3 operate at the same time, they interfere with each other and become inoperable. For example, "effect 1 + 3" of serial number 15 in FIG. 132 cannot be selected, or even if it is selected, it cannot be determined. (The operation of the main button 662 is not enabled). In FIG. 132, the serial number 15 “directing accessory 1 + 3” is shaded as an item that cannot be selected. However, for example, when the effect 1 and the effect 3 are operated at the same time, they interfere with each other and become inoperable, but when they are operated at different timings (for example, the effect 1 is first operated and then the effect 1 is operated). If it does not interfere with the effect (when the effect accessory 3 is operated), for example, it is preferable to enable selection and determination of “effect object 1 → 3” of serial number 18 shown in FIG. 132. In this way, it is possible to operate a plurality of production objects in a plurality of manners, to operate them at different timings, or to operate them independently, and at the same time when they interfere with each other when they are operated simultaneously. By making it inoperable, it is possible to improve maintainability while avoiding the occurrence of troubles.

Although not shown in FIG. 132, a game ball or medal payout sensor, a payout collateral ball sensor, a lending button (also called a ball lending button), a CR card return button, a pachislot settlement button, and the like are enclosed. In a pachinko gaming machine that enables games by circulating the game balls, it is preferable that the launch detection sensor of the game balls is also subject to maintenance. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the devices (various sensors, various accessories, etc.) connected to the host control circuit 2100 have been described as targets for maintenance processing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the devices are connected to the main CPU 101. Devices (for example, power switch 35, first start port switch 421, second start port switch 441, etc.) may be subject to maintenance processing. Furthermore, in the CR machine, it is simulated between the ball lending machine and the pachinko game machine (in the case of CR pachislot, between the ball lending machine and the pachislot machine) based on the operation of the lending button and the return button of the CR card. Signal communication may be performed, the normal state of this signal communication may be detected, and if normal, the maintenance screen display process may be executed (change from "OFF" display to "ON" display).

[10-23. Mobile terminal cooperation function]
Next, the mobile terminal cooperation function of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described as an example with reference to FIGS. 133 to 135.

The mobile terminal cooperation function of the pachinko game machine 1 is a function of linking the pachinko game machine 1 and the mobile terminal. By using the mobile terminal cooperation function of the pachinko game machine 1, detailed information about the game played by the player can be recorded, and the function that does not affect the game result of the pachinko game machine 1 can be customized by satisfying predetermined conditions. Can be done.

As the predetermined condition, for example, the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is determined as the small hit without the operation of the condition device, or a specific effect is executed. Further, as a function of customizing a function that does not affect the game result of the pachinko game machine 1, for example, the music output during the big hit game or the high probability game state may be changed to a special song, or the display device 16 may be used. For example, changing the costume of the character displayed in.

When using the mobile terminal cooperation function, first, the guide menu screen (guide initial image) is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. If, for example, a pressing operation is performed on the main button 662 in a state where the decorative symbol displayed in the display area of the display device 16 is not variablely displayed, the guide initial image is displayed in the display area of the display device 16.

FIG. 133 is a diagram showing an example when the guide initial image is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. The guide initial image includes the characters "Unimemo (registered trademark)", the characters "Please select your favorite menu", and the guide menu.

As shown in FIG. 133, the items of the guide menu include "start uni-memo", "big hit symbol / number of rounds", "model site", and "return to game". In the initial guide image, "Start Unimemo" is highlighted. Then, the highlighted item among the items of the plurality of guide menus can be selected by operating the up / down select buttons 664a and 664b. Also, when the main button 662 is operated, the highlighted item is determined. In FIG. 133, each of the plurality of items is surrounded by a solid line frame, and the highlighted "Start Unimemo" is surrounded by a thicker solid line frame.

When "Start Unimemo" is selected from the guide menu, the Unimemo initial image is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. When "big hit symbol / number of rounds" is selected, the jackpot symbol / number of rounds is displayed in the display area of the display device 16 (not shown). Then, when "model site" is selected, the model site registration code is displayed in the display area of the display device 16 (not shown).

When "Return to game" is selected, the display of the guide initial image displayed in the display area of the display device 16 ends (the display of the guide menu also ends). Then, in the display area of the display device 16, the image for effect displayed when the game is played, the firing handle 32 is not operated for a predetermined period, or the first start port 420 or the second start port 440 is displayed. Also, the demo video that is displayed when you do not win a prize for a specified period is displayed. Further, even if a predetermined time elapses without selecting any of the items in the guide menu, the display area of the display device 16 displays the effect image to be displayed when the game is played and the above demo image. Will be done.

FIG. 134 is a diagram showing an example when the uni-memo initial image is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. In the initial image of Unimemo, the characters "Unimemo", "Customize your favorite character", and the Unimemo menu are displayed. The items of the Unimemo menu include "password input", "record", "record and end", "member registration", "return to game", and "return". In the initial image of Unimemo, "Enter password" is highlighted. Then, the highlighted item among the items of the plurality of Unimemo menus can be selected by operating the select buttons 664a to 664d. Also, when the main button 662 is operated, the highlighted item is determined. In FIG. 134, each of the plurality of items is surrounded by a solid line frame, and the highlighted "password input" is surrounded by a thicker solid line frame.

Then, when "password input" is selected and determined, the password request screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16 (see FIG. 135).

FIG. 135 is a diagram showing an example when the password request screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. The password display image includes the characters "Enter password" and a password entry menu.

In the password input menu, a plurality of password input menu items are displayed. The items of the password input menu are "OK", "Delete", numbers "0" to "9", alphabets "A" to "F", "Return to game", and "Return". including. In the password display image, the highlighted item from "0" to "9" and "A" to "F" can be selected by operating the select buttons 664a to 664d, and when the main button 662 is operated, the item is selected. , Determined by the highlighted number or alphabet. The determined number or alphabet is displayed on the password display image. When "Enter" is selected and determined from the password input menu, a plurality of characters displayed on the password display image are determined as the password to be input. Then, when "Delete" is selected from the password input menu, the characters are deleted from the password display image one by one from the last input character.

When "Return to game" is selected from the password input menu, the display area of the display device 16 may display an image for production when the game is played, the firing handle 32 may not be operated for a predetermined period, or the first A demo image displayed when a prize is not won for a predetermined period is displayed in either the start port 420 or the second start port 440. When "Back" is selected from the password input menu, the Unimemo initial image is displayed in the display area of the display device 16.

[10-24. Modification example of setting change / confirmation history processing]
Modifications 1 to 3 of the setting change / confirmation history processing will be described below.
[10-24-1. Modification example of setting change / confirmation history processing 1]
First, a modification 1 of the setting change / confirmation history processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 141.

The setting change / confirmation history processing in this modification 1 is substantially the same as the setting change / confirmation history processing described above with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118, except that it has an authentication function for viewing the setting value. .. In the following, the differences from the above-mentioned setting change / confirmation history processing will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118. In the setting change / confirmation history processing described above with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118, when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 110). It was explained that the timekeeping process (see step S3052 and the like in FIG. 117) is performed so that is displayed. Also in this modification 1, when the time counting process is performed in the same manner as the setting change / confirmation history process described above with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118, and no process is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). Although the hall menu screen may be displayed in, the description of the timekeeping process will be omitted in the following description.

FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing a modification 1 of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the host control circuit 2100. In this setting change / confirmation history process, "setting change / confirmation history" is selected (highlighted) from the hall menu screens (see FIGS. 110 and 111) displayed in step S3006 of FIG. 115. It is started on condition that the main button 662 is pressed.

When the setting change / confirmation history process is started, the host control circuit 2100 performs an authentication process for authenticating the administrator authority (step S3100). This authentication process will be described with reference to FIG. 137. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing an example of the authentication process in the first modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the host control circuit 2100.

As shown in FIG. 137, in the authentication process, the host control circuit 2100 first puts a password in the display area of the display device 16 on which the hall menu screen is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 138 and 139, for example. The password request screen to be requested is further displayed (step S3101). FIG. 138 shows a password request screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 when the setting change / confirmation history process is executed in the first modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the host control circuit 2100. It is a figure which shows the example. FIG. 139 is an example of a password request screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 in the first modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the host control circuit 2100.

In this modification 1, when the setting change / confirmation history processing is started (the main button 662 is pressed while "setting change / confirmation history" is selected (highlighted) on the hall menu screen). And), for example, as shown in FIGS. 138 and 139, the password request screen is displayed while the hall menu screen is displayed, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the setting change / confirmation history is started, only the time information and the operation type information of the time information, the operation type information, and the setting value information are displayed (the setting value is not displayed). Is displayed, and the password request screen may be displayed while this setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed, or the password request may be performed without displaying either the hall menu or the setting change / confirmation history screen. Only the screen may be displayed.

When the password is input, the host control circuit 2100 executes the password input process (step S3102), and proceeds to step S3103.

In step S3103, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the entered password is correct, and if the entered password is correct (YES in step S3103), the authentication process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the entered password is not appropriate (NO in step S3103), the host control circuit 2100 executes the authentication NG display process (step S3104). When the authentication NG display process is executed, the screen shown in FIG. 140, for example, is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. Here, FIG. 140 is an example of a screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 when the entered password is inappropriate in the modification 1 of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the host control circuit 2100. It is a figure which shows.

When the host control circuit 2100 executes the authentication process in step S3100 and determines that the authentication result is correct, that is, the password is correct (YES in step S3103), the host control circuit 2100 determines that the authentication is OK (YES in step S3110). , Step S3120. On the other hand, when it is determined that the password is not appropriate (NO in step S3103), the host control circuit 2100 determines that the authentication is not OK (NO in step S3110), and ends the setting change / confirmation history process.

The host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the entered password is appropriate when, for example, the main button 662 is pressed after the password is entered on the password request screen. If the entered password is inappropriate, or if the main button 662 is pressed without entering the password, the authentication NG process in step S3103 described above is executed. Then, only when the correct password is input and the main button 662 is pressed, for example, the setting change / confirmation history screen in which the time information, the operation type information, and the setting value information are displayed is displayed. Can be done. This makes it possible to prevent the history information of the set value from being browsed for the purpose of fraud.

In step S3120, the host control circuit 2100 performs a setting change / confirmation history screen display process. At this time, in the display area of the display device 16, a setting change / confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 119) is displayed in which the date and time data, the operation type, and the set value are shown in association with each other.

After the setting change / confirmation history screen display process in step S3120, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the page update operation has been performed (step S3130). When it is determined that the page update operation has been performed (YES in step S3130), the page update process is executed (step S3140), and then the process proceeds to step S3130. On the other hand, if the page update operation has not been performed (NO in step S3130), the process proceeds to step S3150.

The host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not it is determined to be "clear" in step S3150. When the operator presses the main button 662 while "Clear" is selected (highlighted state) on the setting change / confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 122) displayed in the display area of the display device 16. , The host control circuit 2100 determines that it is determined to be "clear".

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the determination is "clear" (YES in step S3150), the setting change / confirmation history data clear process is executed (step S3180), and the process proceeds to step S3180. The setting change / confirmation history data clearing process is a process of erasing the setting change history, setting confirmation history, and browsing history data stored in the subwork RAM 2100a. When the setting change / confirmation history data clearing process is executed, all the history data displayed in the display area of the display device 16 are deleted (see, for example, FIG. 123). On the other hand, if it is not determined to be "clear" (NO in step S3150), the process proceeds to step S3170.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S3170 whether or not it is determined to "return". When the operator presses the main button 662 while "Back" is selected (highlighted state) on the setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 119) displayed in the display area of the display device 16. , The host control circuit 2100 determines that it has been determined to "return".

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that "return" is determined (YES in step S3170), the hall menu screen display process is executed (step S3180), and the setting change / confirmation history process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is not determined to "return" (NO in step S3170), the process proceeds to step S3130 and the process of shifting to step S3130 is continued.

FIG. 141 shows a setting change / setting change that allows the setting value to be confirmed on the hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 in the modification 1 of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the host control circuit 2100. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the operation procedure until the confirmation history screen is displayed. As shown in FIG. 141, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a hall menu when the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is executed as the first procedure for viewing the setting change / confirmation history information. Display the screen. As described above, the setting change process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on, and performing both the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 and the ON operation of the power switch 35. Further, the setting confirmation process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. The setting key 328 can turn on the setting key switch signal by turning it in one direction, and turns off the setting key switch signal by turning it in the opposite direction (returning it to the original position). It is configured to be able to.

As a second procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to "setting change / confirmation history" by selecting and determining "setting change / confirmation history" in the hall menu on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 111). Is highlighted and only the date and time data and operation type (corresponding operation type of setting change, confirmation, browsing) are displayed. Preview of setting change / confirmation history screen including setting change / confirmation history information. Display the screen (see FIG. 111) (setting values are not displayed).

As a third procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1 requests the input of the password (see FIGS. 138 and 139), and determines the suitability of the input password.

As a fourth step, if the password entered in the third step is appropriate, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has set value information, more specifically, date and time data and operation type (setting change, confirmation, browsing). The setting change / confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 126) in which the corresponding operation type) and the set value are associated with each other is displayed in the display area of the display device 16.

Therefore, the person who can use and operate the setting key 328 (the person who has the authority) can change the setting of the setting change / confirmation history screen (see FIG. 119) displayed through the first to fourth steps. By looking at the confirmation history, it becomes possible to check at a glance each history of setting change of the setting value that defines the payout rate, confirmation of setting change, viewing of setting change and confirmation, and the corresponding setting value. .. The person who has the authority is a person who is given the authority to change the setting, confirm the setting change, etc., and means the store manager of the hall or the like. Hereinafter, the "authoritative person" may be referred to as an "administrative authority".

As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 constituting the game machine according to the present invention controls the display device 16 for displaying various images, the operation button group 66 such as the main button 662 and the select button 664, and the control related to the game. The main CPU 101, which is a control unit for performing the data, and the host control circuit 2100, which is a display control unit for controlling the display of the display device 16, are provided, and the control unit changes or confirms set values (for example, settings 1 to 6). The display control unit includes a setting switch 332 which is a setting means for enabling the above, a data transmission means for transmitting various data to the host control circuit 2100, and a reception means for receiving various data from the data transmission means. The main CPU 101 includes a sub-work RAM 2100a that functions as a backup memory capable of storing and holding written information even in a non-energized state, and an RTC 209 that measures the date and time, and the main CPU 101 changes or confirms the settings by means of data transmission means. And the set value are transmitted to the host control circuit 2100, and the host control circuit 2100 changes the setting or confirms the setting and confirms the setting in the subwork RAM 2100a when the data received by the data receiving means changes the setting or confirms the setting. It also has a setting display function that stores the date and time data from RTC209 as setting change / confirmation history information and displays the setting change or setting confirmation and date / time data stored in the subwork RAM 203 on the display device 16, and changes or sets the setting. It has a configuration in which the set value stored in the subwork RAM 2100a is displayed when the main button 662 is operated while the confirmation and the date and time data are displayed.

With this configuration, setting change or setting confirmation, setting value and date and time data from RTC209 are stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as setting change / confirmation history information. Therefore, the main setting change or setting confirmation and date / time data are displayed. When the button 662 is operated, the set value stored in the subwork RAM 2100a can be displayed. Therefore, when "setting change / confirmation history" is selected in the hall menu, each history related to the setting value can be confirmed, and it can be determined whether or not an illegal setting change or setting confirmation has been performed. Will be.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment may acquire the date and time data for which the set value is received from the RTC209, and store the set value, the date and time data, and the information indicating the setting change in association with each other. Good.

With this configuration, the changed setting value, the changed date and time data, and the information indicating the setting change are stored in association with each other, so that the authorized person can specify the date and time when the setting value is changed. This makes it possible to identify the fraudulent activity such as changing the set value.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment acquires the date and time when the information indicating that the set value has been confirmed is received from RTC209, and stores the date and time data and the information indicating the setting confirmation in association with each other. May be good.

With this configuration, the date and time data for which the set value is confirmed and the information indicating the setting confirmation are stored in association with each other, so that the authorized person can specify the date and time when the set value is confirmed and set. It is possible to identify the fraud when fraud such as checking the value has been performed.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is displayed when the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data of the setting change / confirmation history information of the subwork RAM 2100a are displayed. The date and time data may be stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as a browsing history, and the browsing history may be displayed on the display device 16.

With this configuration, when the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data are displayed in the setting change / confirmation history information, the displayed date and time data is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as a browsing history. Browsing history can be displayed. Therefore, in the state where "Setting change / confirmation history" is selected in the hall menu where the setting value is not displayed, in addition to setting change or setting confirmation, setting value and date / time data display among the setting change / confirmation history information, browsing Since the history can be displayed, it is possible to determine whether or not the setting change or the browsing history of the setting confirmation has been browsed for an illegal purpose such as a goto act.

With the above configuration, in the present embodiment, it is possible to save and display the setting change / confirmation history information in which the setting change or setting confirmation and the setting value and the date and time data are associated with each other, so that each history related to the setting value can be saved and displayed. It is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine 1 that can be confirmed and can determine whether or not an illegal setting change or setting confirmation has been performed.

Further, the pachinko game machine 1 constituting the game machine according to the present invention is a display device 16 for displaying various images, an operation unit such as a main button 662 and a select button 664, and a control unit for controlling the game. A setting that includes a main CPU 101 and a host control circuit 2100 that is a display control unit that controls the display of the display device 16, and the control unit can change or confirm set values (for example, settings 1 to 6). A setting switch 332, which is a means, and a data transmission means for transmitting various data to the host control circuit 2100 are provided, and the display control unit has a receiving means for receiving various data from the data transmitting means and a non-energized state. The main CPU 101 includes a subwork RAM 2100a capable of storing and holding the written information and an RTC 209 for measuring the date and time, and the main CPU 101 sends a setting change or setting confirmation and a set value to the host control circuit 2100 by a data transmission means. When the data received by the data receiving means is changed or confirmed, the host control circuit 2100 transmits and changes the setting or confirms the setting in the subwork RAM 2100a, and changes the setting and the date and time data from the RTC209. It has a setting display function that stores as confirmation history information and displays the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a on the display device 16, and the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a is displayed on the display device 16. When displayed in, the date and time data is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as a browsing history, and the browsing history is displayed on the display device 16.

With this configuration, when the setting change / confirmation history information of the subwork RAM 2100a is displayed, the displayed date and time data is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as a browsing history, and the browsing history is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. be able to. Therefore, it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

Further, the pachislot machine according to the present embodiment has a configuration in which the date and time data in which the setting change / confirmation history information is displayed on the display device 16 is acquired from the RTC209, and the date and time data and the information representing the browsing history are stored in association with each other. May be.

With this configuration, the date and time data and the information representing the browsing history are stored in association with each other, so that the date and time when the information related to the set value was browsed can be specified, and fraud such as changing the set value can be performed. If it has been done, it will be possible to identify the fraud.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is displayed when the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data of the setting change / confirmation history information of the subwork RAM 2100a are displayed. The date and time data may be stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as a browsing history, and the browsing history may be displayed on the display device 16.

With this configuration, when the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data are displayed in the setting change / confirmation history information, the displayed date and time data is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as a browsing history. The browsing history can be displayed on the display device 16. Therefore, in the state where "Setting change / confirmation history" is selected in the hall menu where the setting value is not displayed, in addition to setting change or setting confirmation, setting value and date / time data display among the setting change / confirmation history information, browsing Since the history can be displayed, it is possible to determine whether or not the setting change or the browsing history of the setting confirmation has been browsed for an illegal purpose such as a goto act.

With the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, it is possible to save and display the browsing history information in which the browsing history of browsing the setting change confirmation / history information is associated with the date and time data, so that an unnatural operation regarding the setting value can be performed. It is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine 1 that can not only determine whether or not it has been done, but also can determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

[10-24-2. Modification example of setting change / confirmation history processing 2]
Next, a modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 146.

The basic configuration of the setting change / confirmation history processing in the modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history processing is substantially the same as that of the modification 1 except that the configuration of the authentication function is different. In the following, the differences from the first modification will be described in detail.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing is provided with, for example, a slide switch as a volume adjusting means for adjusting the volume of the speaker 24, and has a plurality of volume positions (volume positions), for example, a volume “loud”. , "Medium", and "Small" to switch to one of the three volume positions, and to switch to multiple volume positions in a predetermined operation order, and the switching operation order is set in advance. Authenticate as a user with administrator privileges when the order is matched. The volume adjusting means for adjusting the volume of the speaker 24 is not limited to the slide switch. For example, the volume may be adjusted by turning the jog dial and the volume may be fixed by pressing the jog dial.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history process has an authentication processing function for performing authentication based on the volume password corresponding to the change order of the volume position. In this modification 2, for example, a control program in which the authentication processing function is added to the voice / LED control circuit 2200 is stored, and the host control circuit 2100 executes the authentication processing based on the volume password according to the control program.

FIG. 142 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the volume switch 108 that generates the volume password applied to the authentication process (see FIG. 143) in the modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the host control circuit 2100. is there. The volume switch 108 is arranged in, for example, the circuit board of the sub control circuit 200, and can perform a slide operation for setting an initial setting value. For example, the volume switch 108 is set to one of the three volume positions 603a, 603b, and 603c (hereinafter, may be referred to as volume positions 1, 2, and 3) corresponding to the volume "low", "medium", and "large". In addition to the switching operation, the switching operation is sequentially performed to a plurality of volume positions 1, 2, and 3 in a predetermined operation order. Specifically, when setting the initial setting value, it can be set by sliding the volume switch 108 in the order of "large"-> "medium"-> "small"-> "medium". That is, the host control circuit 2100 constitutes a position detection unit that detects the volume positions 1, 2, and 3 of the volume switch 108.

On the other hand, when setting a user with administrator authority (administrator authority), a predetermined authentication operation via a plurality of volume positions is performed in a different order from the initial setting of the volume switch 108 according to a predetermined administrator setting procedure. Operate with a pattern and store the multiple volume positions and operation order in the memory. Then, when administrator authority is required to view the change history of the set value, the volume switch 108 is operated in a predetermined authentication operation pattern to enable viewing of the change history of the set value.

The authentication operation pattern includes, for example, an operation pattern representing a position change from the volume position 2 (volume “medium”) in FIG. 142 to the volume position 1 (volume “low”), or a volume position 2 to the volume position 3 (volume position 3). An operation pattern or the like indicating a position change to the volume “loud”) can be stored in advance.

As a result, the host control circuit 2100 recognizes the operation pattern from the volume position information indicating each volume position of the volume switch 108, and has management authority depending on whether or not the operation pattern matches the preset authentication operation pattern. It is possible to judge whether or not it is from a person.

As described above, in the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing, the volume switch 108 functions as an operation unit for inputting the volume password corresponding to the operation pattern of the volume position. The volume switch 108 in the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing is an operation unit that cannot be operated by the player, like the setting switch 332, the setting key 328, the power switch 35, and the backup clear switch 330. On the other hand, for example, the main button 662, the select button 664, the firing handle 32, and the like are operation units that can be operated by the player.

FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing an example of the authentication process in the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the host control circuit 2100. In this authentication process, "setting change / confirmation history" is selected from the hall menu (see FIG. 110) displayed in step S3006 of FIG. 115 (YES in step S3006), and "setting change / confirmation" is displayed on the hall menu screen. It is started by pressing the main button 662 while the "history" is highlighted (see FIG. 111).

When this authentication process is started, the host control circuit 2100 displays a screen prompting the input of the volume password in the display area of the display device 16 on which the hall menu screen is displayed (step S3201). To execute.

FIG. 144 shows a password request screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 when the setting change / confirmation history process is executed in the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the host control circuit 2100. It is a figure which shows the example. FIG. 145 is an example of a volume password request display screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 in the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the host control circuit 2100. As shown in FIGS. 144 and 145, in the volume password request display process in step S3201 of FIG. 143, the host control circuit 2100 enters the password in the display area of the display device 16, for example, by operating the volume switch. Please. A message such as "The set value will be displayed after entering the password." Is displayed together with the setting change / confirmation history information.

In this modification 2, when the setting change / confirmation history processing is started (the main button 662 is pressed while "setting change / confirmation history" is selected (highlighted) on the hall menu screen). And), for example, as shown in FIGS. 144 and 145, the volume password request screen is displayed while the hall menu screen is displayed, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the setting change / confirmation history is started, only the time information and the operation type information of the time information, the operation type information, and the setting value information are displayed (the setting value is not displayed). Is displayed, and the volume password request screen may be displayed while this setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed, or the volume may be displayed without displaying either the hall menu or the setting change / confirmation history screen. Only the password request screen may be displayed.

After displaying the volume password request display screen, the host control circuit 2100 continuously executes the change order of the volume position information of the volume switch 108, that is, the operation pattern acquisition process for monitoring the operation pattern (step S3202).

When the volume position information is input during the input monitoring of the volume position information, the host control circuit 2100 extracts the operation pattern corresponding to the volume position information from the volume position information and sets the authentication operation pattern in advance. And it is determined whether or not the correct operation has been performed depending on whether or not they match (step S3203). Here, when it is determined that the correct operation has been performed (YES in step S3203), the host control circuit 2100 executes the processes after step S3120 in FIG. 136.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the correct operation has not been performed (NO in step S3203), the host control circuit 2100 displays the authentication NG display process in the display area of the display device 16 to indicate that the authentication is NG. (Step S3204). As a result, the host control circuit 2100 ends the authentication process and shifts to the process of step S3110 in FIG. 136. In the above authentication NG display process, a message such as "The volume password is incorrect. Please try again from the beginning." Is displayed in the display area of the display device 16.

In addition, in FIG. 142, an example in which the volume switch 108 having three volume positions is used as the operation switch according to the present invention is given, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the operation switch may be any of at least three or more. It may be a switch that can take a position. In this case, the host control circuit 2100 is provided with a position detection function capable of detecting each volume position of the operation switch, and the position information detected by this position detection function (volume position information is acquired, and the acquired order and subwork). The setting change / confirmation history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a may be displayed on condition that the operation order is matched with the predetermined operation order stored in the RAM 2100a in advance.

FIG. 146 is a flow chart showing an example of the setting value confirmation procedure of the setting change / confirmation history information in the modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the host control circuit 2100. As shown in FIG. 146, in the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing, a hole is formed when the setting change processing or the setting confirmation process is executed as the first procedure for confirming the setting value of the setting change / confirmation history information. Display the menu screen. As described above, the setting change process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on, and performing both the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 and the ON operation of the power switch 35. Further, the setting confirmation process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. The setting key 328 can turn on the setting key switch signal by turning it in one direction, and turns off the setting key switch signal by turning it in the opposite direction (returning it to the original position). It is configured to be able to.

As a second procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to "setting change / confirmation history" by selecting and determining "setting change / confirmation history" in the hall menu on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 111). Is highlighted and only the date and time data and operation type (corresponding operation type of setting change, confirmation, browsing) are displayed. Preview of setting change / confirmation history screen including setting change / confirmation history information. Display the screen (see FIG. 111) (setting values are not displayed).

As a third procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1 requests the input of the volume password (see FIGS. 144 and 145), captures the input volume password, and determines the suitability of the captured volume password. The suitability of the volume password is determined by collating the captured volume password with the authentication operation pattern (authentication password), and when both match and authentication is OK, the volume password is considered to be appropriate. to decide.

As a fourth step, if the volume password entered in the third step is appropriate, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has set value information, more specifically, date and time data and operation type (setting change, confirmation, browsing). The setting change / confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 126) in which the setting value is associated with the corresponding operation type of the above is displayed in the display area of the display device 16.

As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 constituting the game machine according to the present invention includes a display device 16 for displaying various images, at least a main button 662 and a select button 664 which are operation units for receiving operations of the player. It includes a non-game operation unit that is not operated by the player, a main CPU 101 that is a control unit that controls the game, and a host control circuit 2100 that is a display control unit that controls the display of the display device 16. The control unit includes a setting switch 332 that enables change or confirmation of set values (for example, settings 1 to 6) and data transmission means for transmitting various data to the display control unit. The main CPU 101 includes a receiving means for receiving various data from the data transmitting means, a subwork RAM 2100a capable of storing and holding the written information even in a non-energized state, and an RTC 209 for measuring the date and time. The transmission means transmits the setting change or setting confirmation and the set value to the host control circuit 2100, and the host control circuit 2100 sends the setting change or setting confirmation to the subwork RAM 2100a when the data received by the data receiving means is the setting change or setting confirmation. It has a setting display function that stores setting change or setting confirmation, setting value and date and time data from RTC209 as setting change / confirmation history information, and displays the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a on the display device 16. , The non-game operation unit is configured to display the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a on condition that the operation units are operated in a predetermined order.

With this configuration, it is possible to display the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a on condition that the non-game operation units are operated in a predetermined order. Therefore, only a person who has the authority to know the predetermined operation order can save and display the setting change / confirmation history information, so that it is possible to judge whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed. Or you will be able to determine whether it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment stores the displayed date and time data as a browsing history in the subwork RAM 2100a when the setting change / confirmation history information of the subwork RAM 2100a is displayed, and the display device 16 The browsing history may be displayed on the screen.

With this configuration, when the setting change / confirmation history information of the subwork RAM 2100a is displayed, the displayed date and time data can be stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as a browsing history and the browsing history can be displayed on the display device 16. .. Therefore, it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the non-gaming operation unit may be an operation switch for adjusting the volume, for example, a volume switch 108.

With this configuration, authentication can be performed in an operation order known only to the authorized person, so that the cost can be reduced without adding an operation switch for identifying the authorized person. This operation order is shown when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is delivered to the hall, and only those who have authority use it when changing the setting or confirming the setting.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the operation switch is a switch capable of taking at least three or more arbitrary positions, and the host control circuit 2100 sets each volume position of the operation switch. Further equipped with a detectable position detection function, the setting display function acquires the volume position information detected by the position detection function, and the order of the acquired volume position information matches the predetermined operation order stored in advance. May be configured to display the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a on the condition that.

With this configuration, the operation order of three or more arbitrary volume positions is stored in advance as a predetermined operation order, and the operation order is notified to an authorized person in advance to identify the authorized one. It is possible to authenticate in an operation order known only to an authorized person without adding an operation switch.

With the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, only the authorized person can save and display the setting change / confirmation history information, so that it is only possible to determine whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed. Alternatively, it is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of determining whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment authenticates by operating the volume switch 108 so that only those who have the authority regarding the set value in the hall can display the setting change / confirmation history information. Although the configuration has been described, when displaying the setting change / confirmation history information as in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the modification 3 of the setting change / confirmation history processing described below, the input unit in the pachinko game machine 1 is used. It may be configured to authenticate using the entered password.

[10-24-3. Modification example of setting change / confirmation history processing 3]
Next, a modification 3 of the setting change / confirmation history processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 147 to 154.

FIG. 147 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the game system 210 according to the third modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the host control circuit 2100. The gaming system 210 includes a pachinko gaming machine 1A, a mobile wireless communication terminal 220, and a server device 240 arranged in the network 230. As will be described later, the gaming system 210 cooperates with the pachinko gaming machine 1A, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, and the server device 240 to perform an authentication process related to confirmation of setting change / confirmation history information.

In the game system 210, the pachinko game machine 1A has a function of generating a two-dimensional code including setting change / confirmation history information and a URL (Uniform Resource Locator) in addition to the functions of the pachinko game machine 1 described above. It has a function of displaying the code in the display area of the display device 16A (see FIG. 150). Specifically, the setting change / confirmation history information included in the two-dimensional code is information content such as displayed on the setting change / confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 119, and includes the setting value. The sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine 1A constitutes a generation means for generating the two-dimensional code according to the present invention.

The mobile wireless communication terminal 220 is a mobile communication terminal such as a smart phone, and includes a control unit 221, a display operation unit 222, a camera unit (not shown), and the like. The display operation unit 222 is provided with the functions of the display unit and the operation unit, and is composed of a touch panel or the like. The camera unit is a functional unit that reads (images) the two-dimensional code 161a or the like (see FIG. 150) displayed in the display area of the display device 16A of the pachinko gaming machine 1A. The display operation unit 222 and the camera unit constitute the operation display unit and the imaging means in the present invention, respectively.

The control unit 221 has a CPU, a storage device (flash memory, microSD memory card, etc.), a RAM, a communication circuit, and the like, and the CPU controls various operations according to, for example, a storage device or a control program stored in the RAM. Do. In the present embodiment, the control unit 221 analyzes the captured two-dimensional code, extracts the setting change / confirmation history information and the URL, and inputs the password to the operation display unit 222 (the figure to be described later). Input screen display control unit that displays (see 153), an authentication result acquisition unit that sends the input password entered on the password input screen to the server device 240 based on the above URL, and acquires the authentication result notified from the server device 240. It has a history information display control unit that displays the setting change / confirmation history information on the display operation unit 222 in a manner including the set value when the acquired authentication result is correct. The extraction unit, the display control unit, the authentication result acquisition unit, and the history information display control unit are functions that can be realized by a CPU that operates according to a dedicated application installed in advance in the storage device or the like. The extraction unit, the input screen display control unit, the authentication result acquisition unit, and the history information display control unit, which are the components of the control unit 221 according to the present invention, are the extraction means, the input screen display control means, and the authentication result, respectively, in the present invention. It constitutes an acquisition means and a history information display control means.

The server device 240 is realized by a computer, has a function of managing a dedicated site for an authentication service identified by the above URL, receives an input password from the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 that has accessed the above URL, and has a preset password. It is equipped with an authentication service function that determines whether or not the password is correct and notifies the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 of the authentication result. The server device 240 constitutes an authentication means in the present invention.

FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change / confirmation history processing in the pachinko gaming machine 1A constituting the gaming system 210 according to the modification 3. This setting change / confirmation history processing is performed by "setting change / confirmation" from among a plurality of hall menu items displayed on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 109) displayed in the display area of the display device 16A of the pachinko gaming machine 1A. It is started on condition that the "confirmation history" is selected and determined, and the main button 662 is pressed while the "setting change / confirmation history" is highlighted (see, for example, FIG. 111) on the hall menu screen.

In the setting change / confirmation history processing described above with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118, when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 110). It was explained that the timekeeping process (see step S3052 and the like in FIG. 117) is performed so that is displayed. Also in this modification 3, when the time counting process is performed in the same manner as the setting change / confirmation history process described above with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118, and no process is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). Although the hall menu screen may be displayed in the above, the description of the timekeeping process is omitted in the description in this modification 3.

When this setting change / confirmation history processing is started, the sub CPU reads the setting change / confirmation history information from the work RAM, and a two-dimensional code including the setting change / confirmation history information and the URL of the dedicated site of the authentication service. A two-dimensional code generation process for generating 161a (see FIG. 150) is performed (step S3301). Next, the host control circuit 2100 displays the setting change / confirmation history information read in step S3301 and the generated two-dimensional code 161a in the display area of the display device 16A in the manner shown in FIG. 150, for example. Is executed (step S3302).

After executing the two-dimensional code display process in step S3302, the host control circuit 2100 can accept a data clear request, a cursor movement (page break) request, and a process return request based on the operation of the main button 662 and the select button 664. Move to the possible state. The main button 662 is a button for making a processing return request. The select button 664 is a button for making a cursor movement (page break) request. Further, by operating the main button 662 and the select button 664 together, a data clear request can be instructed.

After shifting to the acceptable state, the host control circuit 2100 performs the processes of steps S3303 to S3305. Note that, in FIG. 148, the processes of steps S3056 to S3064 shown in FIG. 117 are omitted, but in order to perform these processes, there is a gap between step S3302 and step S3303 of FIG. The processes of steps S3056 to S3064 shown in the above are added.

In FIG. 148, after the two-dimensional code display process of step S3302, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not it is determined to be “clear” in step S3303. When the operator presses the main button 662 while "Clear" is selected (highlighted state) on the setting change / confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 150) displayed in the display area of the display device 16. The host control circuit 2100 determines that it has been determined to be "clear".

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the determination is "clear" (YES in step S3303), the host control circuit 2100 executes the setting change / confirmation history data clear process (step S3304), and proceeds to step S3306. The setting change / confirmation history data clearing process is a process of erasing the setting change history, setting confirmation history, and browsing history data stored in the subwork RAM 2100a. When the setting change / confirmation history data clearing process is executed, all the history data displayed in the setting change / confirmation history display area of the display area 16 of the display device 16 is deleted (see FIG. 123). On the other hand, if it is not determined to be "clear" (NO in step S3303), the process proceeds to step S3305.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S3305 whether or not it is determined to "return". When the operator presses the main button 662 while "Back" is selected (highlighted state) on the setting change / confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 150) displayed in the display area of the display device 16. , The host control circuit 2100 determines that it has been determined to "return".

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that "return" is determined (YES in step S3305), the hall menu screen display process is executed (step S3306), and the setting change / confirmation history process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is not determined to "return" (NO in step S3305), the process proceeds to step S3303 and the processing after step S3303 is continued.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the host control circuit 2100 determines that it is determined to be "clear" (YES in step S3303), the setting change / confirmation history displayed together with the two-dimensional code 161a (see FIG. 150) is displayed. You may try to clear the information. In this case, the pachinko gaming machine 1A displays the two-dimensional code 161a, but since the authentication result has not been acquired, the setting change / confirmation history information can be cleared regardless of whether the authentication result is OK or NG. You can do it.

FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change / confirmation history processing in the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 and the server device 240 of the gaming system 210 according to the third modification. This process is started on condition that the two-dimensional code 161a displayed in the display area of the display device 16A (for example, a liquid crystal display device) of the pachinko gaming machine 1A is photographed by the portable wireless communication terminal 220.

When the two-dimensional code 161a is photographed by the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, the control unit 221 reads the image data obtained by the image data and displays the image data on the display operation unit 222 based on the image data, for example, in the manner shown in FIG. A two-dimensional code reading display process for displaying the two-dimensional code 222a is performed (step S3401).

Subsequently, in the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, the control unit 221 analyzes the read two-dimensional code, extracts the setting change / confirmation history information and the URL contained therein, and temporarily stores the URL in a predetermined storage area in the RAM, for example. The two-dimensional code acquisition process to be held is executed (step S3402). Next, the control unit 221 accesses the dedicated site of the authentication service based on the above URL, displays the password input screen (see FIG. 153), and executes the password input display process for accepting the password (step S3403).

After executing the password input display process in step S3403, the control unit 221 of the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 cooperates with the server device 240 and performs the password authentication process through the following steps S3404 and S3405.

In the password authentication process, the control unit 221 of the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 first monitors whether or not a password has been entered in the password display field 222c (see FIG. 153) (step S3404), and from the ten-key 222b. Performs the process of accepting the input of the password. Here, when the password is input (YES in step S3404), the control unit 221 transmits the input password to the server device 240.

The server device 240 collates the password sent from the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 with the registered password registered in advance, and determines whether the authentication is OK or NG depending on whether or not the two match. The server device 240 notifies the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 of the above determination result. As described above, in the present embodiment, only the authentication is performed by the server device 240. That is, the server device 240 returns only the authentication result to the mobile wireless communication terminal 220.

On the other hand, the control unit 221 of the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 transmits the input password received in step S3404, waits for the notification of the authentication result from the server device 240, and the notified authentication result is authentication OK or authentication NG. It is determined whether the password is correct or not (step S3405).

Here, when it is determined that the password is incorrect (NO in step S3405), the control unit 221 performs an authentication NG display process for displaying a message or the like indicating that the password is authentication NG on the display operation unit 222 (NO). Step S3410), and then the process ends. In the authentication NG display process, a message such as "The password is incorrect. Please try again from the beginning." Is displayed in the message field 222d.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the password is correct (YES in step S3405), the control unit 221 is set to display the setting change / confirmation history information temporarily held in step S3402 on the display operation unit 222. The change / confirmation history display process is performed (step S3406). In this setting change / confirmation history display process, the control unit 221 embeds (arranges) the setting change / confirmation history information held in step S3402 according to a preset display format for display information. A process of creating and displaying the setting change / confirmation history information on the display operation unit 222 based on the display information (see FIG. 154) is performed.

FIG. 150 is a diagram showing an example of a setting change / confirmation history screen including a two-dimensional code in the pachinko gaming machine 1A of the gaming system 210 according to the modified example 3.

As shown in FIG. 150, in the pachinko gaming machine 1A, the host control circuit 2100 has a setting change / confirmation history in the display area of the display device 16A of the pachinko gaming machine 1A in the two-dimensional code display process (step S3302) of FIG. 148. The setting change / confirmation history screen including the information and the two-dimensional code 161a is displayed. As described above, the two-dimensional code 161a displayed on the setting change / confirmation history screen includes the setting change / confirmation history information displayed in the display area of the display device 16A and the URL of the dedicated site for the authentication service. There is.

When displaying the two-dimensional code 161a in the two-dimensional code display process (see FIG. 148) in step S3302, the host control circuit 2100 displays, for example, "* 2D code on a mobile terminal in the display area of the display device 16A." It may be configured to display a message prompting the transition to the authentication service, such as "Please read and access the authentication service."

FIG. 151 is a flow chart showing an example of a setting value confirmation procedure of the setting change / confirmation history information in the game system 210 according to the modification 3. This set value confirmation procedure will be described at the end of this embodiment for convenience.

FIG. 152 is a diagram showing an example of a two-dimensional code display screen in the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 of the gaming system 210 according to the third modification. The mobile wireless communication terminal 220 displays the two-dimensional code 222a as shown in FIG. 152 on the display operation unit 222 in the two-dimensional code reading and display processing of S1101.

FIG. 153 is a diagram showing an example of a password input screen in the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 of the gaming system 210 according to the third modification. In the password input display process (see FIG. 149) in step S3403, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 accesses the URL and displays the password input screen shown in FIG. 153 on the display operation unit 222.

As shown in FIG. 153, on the password input screen, a numeric keypad 222b having keys "0" to "9", "*", and "#", and a password display field 222c displaying a password input by the numeric keypad 222b , The message field 222d is displayed. In the message field 222d, a message prompting you to enter the password is displayed, for example, "* Please enter the password. The set value will be displayed after entering the password." In the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, on the password word input screen shown in FIG. 153, the password converted into the hidden character "*" can be displayed in the password display field 222c in which the password is input by operating the numeric keypad 222b.

FIG. 154 is a diagram showing an example of a setting change / confirmation history screen 222g in the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 of the game system 210 according to the modification 3. As shown in FIG. 154, the setting change / confirmation history screen 222g displays the setting change / confirmation history information temporarily held in S1102, for example, equivalent to the setting change / confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 119. It is displayed in the format. That is, in FIG. 154, the setting value of the setting change / confirmation history information is displayed corresponding to the setting change / confirmation date and time.

In the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, the dedicated application installed in advance has the above-mentioned display format, the above-mentioned display format of the setting change / confirmation history screen 222g shown in FIG. 154, the scrolling of the setting change / confirmation history information, and the processing function of batch deletion. Supports. As a result, the control unit 221 performs the setting change / confirmation history display processing in S1107 during the setting change / confirmation history processing in FIG. 149, and then the decision button displayed on the display operation unit 222 together with the setting change / confirmation history information. It shifts to the acceptable state where the page update request based on the operation of 222e and the select button 222f can be accepted.

After shifting to the acceptable state, the control unit 221 of the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 determines whether or not the page update operation has been performed (step S3407). To determine whether or not the page update operation has been performed, when it is determined that the select button 222f has been operated and the last line has been reached, it is determined that the page update operation has been performed (YES in step S3407), and the page is determined. The update process is executed (step S3408). Here, as long as it is determined that the select button 222f is operated and the page refresh operation is performed (that is, as long as it is determined that the select button 222f is operated and the last line is reached), scrolling of the page is continued. Page update processing is performed (step S3408).

When the control unit 222 determines that the page update operation has been stopped (NO in step S3407), that is, when the operation of the select button 222f is stopped and the decision button 222e is not pressed, the process proceeds to step S3409. If it is determined in step S3409 that "return" is determined (YES in step S3071), the control unit 222 executes the hall menu screen display process (step S3410) and ends the setting change / confirmation history process. On the other hand, if it is determined that "return" is not determined (NO in step S3409), the control unit 222 returns to step S340.

In the game system 210 according to the present embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1A side converts the setting change / confirmation history information into a two-dimensional code as the so-called raw data and displays it in the display area of the display device 16A (FIG. 148). Step S3301 and step S3302), the process of photographing the two-dimensional code displayed in the display area of the display device 16A of the pachinko game machine 1A on the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 side and returning the setting change / confirmation history information to the raw data. (See step S3401 and step S3402 in FIG. 149).

On the other hand, many mobile communication terminals in recent years are equipped as standard with a function of reading and analyzing a two-dimensional code.

Regarding this point, in the game system 210 according to the present embodiment, a dedicated application is installed on the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, and the dedicated application makes it possible to display in the same display format as the pachinko gaming machine 1A side.

In other words, on a mobile communication terminal that does not have a dedicated application installed, even if the setting change / confirmation history information can be viewed as raw data, it should be viewed in the same display format as the pachinko machine 1A side. It is difficult to recognize the setting change / confirmation history information.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, by installing and using the dedicated application on the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, only an authorized person can see the setting change / confirmation history information with the set value, which is sufficient confidentiality. Can be secured.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the two-dimensional code is read, all the data obtained by the two-dimensional code is taken into the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, but the above data is as shown in FIG. 154 according to the display format of the dedicated application. Is displayed in. Therefore, if you do not have a dedicated application that has the display format, even if you read it with a general-purpose barcode reader, you will not be able to understand what kind of display the character string that reads the two-dimensional code is. A certain degree of confidentiality can be ensured. The application is distributed at the time of delivery of the pachinko gaming machine 1A, and can be obtained only by an authorized person.

In the present embodiment, the password is authenticated by receiving the notification of the authentication result from the server device 240, and determining whether the password is correct or not depending on whether the notified authentication result is authentication OK or authentication NG, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The mobile wireless communication terminal 220 may receive the password from the server device 240, determine that the entered password matches the password received from the server device 240, and determine whether the entered password is correct or not. If you want to further secure the confidentiality, you can use the dedicated application to be installed on the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 by encrypting the setting change / confirmation history information on the pachinko game machine 1A side, then generating and displaying a two-dimensional code. The configuration may be such that a setting change / confirmation history information decryption function corresponding to the above encryption is added.

Next, the procedure for confirming the set value of the setting change / confirmation history information in the game system 210 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. 151.

As shown in FIG. 151, as the first procedure for confirming the set value of the setting change / confirmation history information in the game system 210 according to the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1A executes a setting change process or a setting confirmation process. The hall menu screen is displayed when this is done. As described above, the setting change process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on, and performing both the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 and the ON operation of the power switch 35. Further, the setting confirmation process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. The setting key 328 can turn on the setting key switch signal by turning it in one direction, and turns off the setting key switch signal by turning it in the opposite direction (returning it to the original position). It is configured to be able to.

As the second procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1A is set to "setting change / confirmation history" by selecting and determining "setting change / confirmation history" in the hall menu on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 111). Is highlighted and only the date and time data and operation type (corresponding operation type of setting change, confirmation, browsing) are displayed. Preview of setting change / confirmation history screen including setting change / confirmation history information. Display the screen (see FIG. 111) (setting values are not displayed).

As a third step, the pachinko game machine 1A is mainly in a state where "setting change / confirmation history" is selected (highlighted) on the preview screen (see FIG. 111) of the setting change / confirmation history screen. When the button 662 is pressed, a two-dimensional code including the setting change / confirmation history information and the URL held in the subwork RAM 2100a is generated, and the two-dimensional code is displayed together with the setting change / confirmation history information (FIG. 150). reference).

As a fourth procedure, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 photographs the two-dimensional code displayed on the pachinko gaming machine 1A (see FIG. 152). After shooting the two-dimensional code, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 extracts the setting change / confirmation history information and the URL included in the two-dimensional code.

As a fifth step, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 accesses the dedicated site of the authentication service based on the URL extracted in the third step, and the password is entered from the password input screen (see FIG. 153) provided by the dedicated site. Make an input.

This password is, for example, a password disclosed by the manufacturer of the game system 210 in an instruction manual or the like and registered in association with the game system 210 or each pachinko game machine 1A or the like. At the dedicated site, the server device 240 receives the input password from the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 and collates it with the registered password to perform password authentication. Here, the server device 240 notifies the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 to that effect when the authentication is OK.

As a sixth step, when the authentication is OK in the fifth step, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 displays the setting change / confirmation history information extracted in the fourth step on a screen in a predetermined display format (FIG. 154). (Refer to), the content including the set value is displayed on the display operation unit 222. As a result, the administrator who has entered the password can confirm the setting change / confirmation history information together with the set value on the screen displayed on the display operation unit 222 of the mobile wireless communication terminal 220.

As described above, the pachinko game machine 1A according to the present embodiment includes a display device 16A for displaying various images, a main button 662 and a select button 664 which are operation units for receiving various operations, and a control for controlling the game. A main CPU 101, which is a unit, and a host control circuit 2100, which is a display control unit that controls the display of the display device 16A, are provided, and the control unit can change or confirm set values (for example, settings 1 to 6). The display control unit includes a setting switch 332 and a data transmission means for transmitting various data to the display control unit, and the display control unit writes the reception means for receiving various data from the data transmission means and writes even in a non-energized state. A subwork RAM 2100a capable of storing and holding the stored information and an RTC 209 for measuring the date and time are provided, and the main CPU 101 transmits a setting change or setting confirmation and a set value to the host control circuit 2100 by a data transmission means. When the data received by the data receiving means is the setting change or the setting confirmation, the host control circuit 2100 sets the setting change or the setting confirmation, the setting value and the date and time data from the RTC209 in the subwork RAM 2100a. It is equipped with a setting display function that displays the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a in the display area of the display device 16A, and the setting change or setting confirmation and date / time data are displayed by the setting display function. Therefore, when the main button 662, which is an operation unit, is operated, the setting change / confirmation history information is displayed by a two-dimensional code.

With this configuration, the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value and the date and time data from the sundial time means are stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as the setting change / confirmation history information, so that the setting change or setting confirmation and the date and time data are displayed. Then, when the main button 662 is operated, the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a can be displayed by the two-dimensional code. Therefore, if the two-dimensional code is read by the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 and the display is permitted after the password is authenticated, only the person who has the authority to know the predetermined password can save and display the setting change / confirmation history information. Therefore, it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the set value has been performed, but also to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1A according to the present embodiment, when the setting change / confirmation history information of the subwork RAM 2100a is displayed by the setting display function, the host control circuit 2100 uses the displayed date / time data as the browsing history. The browsing history may be stored in the subwork RAM 2100a and displayed in the display area of the display device 16A.

With this configuration, when the setting change / confirmation history information of the subwork RAM 2100a is displayed, the displayed date and time data is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as a browsing history, and the browsing history is displayed in the display area of the display device 16A. be able to. Therefore, it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1A according to the present embodiment has a mobile wireless communication based on information from a predetermined server device 240 when the two-dimensional code displayed by the display control function is read by the mobile wireless communication terminal 220. The terminal 220 may be configured to display the setting change / confirmation history information.

With this configuration, when the two-dimensional code displayed by the display control function is read by the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, information from a predetermined server device 240, for example, a predetermined password and the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 The setting change / confirmation history information can be displayed on the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 on condition that the entered password matches. Therefore, since it is possible to authenticate with a password known only to an authorized person, it is possible to reduce the cost without adding an input means for identifying the authorized one to the pachinko gaming machine 1A side. This password is shown when the pachinko gaming machine 1A is delivered to the hall, and only those who have authority use it when changing the setting or confirming the setting.

Further, the game system 210 according to the present embodiment includes the above-mentioned pachinko game machine 1A and a server device 240 connected to the network 230 and managing a site for authentication, and the pachinko game machine 1A is a sub. The server device 240 further has a generation function of generating the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 2100a and the two-dimensional code of the site URL, and the server device 240 uses the password from the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 as a preset password. The mobile wireless communication terminal 220 has an authentication service machine that compares and authenticates and notifies the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 of the authentication result, and the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 has a display operation unit 222 having a display and operation function and a display area of the display device 16A. A camera unit that captures the displayed two-dimensional code, an extraction unit that analyzes the captured two-dimensional code and extracts setting change / confirmation history information and URL, and an input screen that displays a password input screen for entering a password. When the display control unit, the authentication result acquisition unit that sends the password entered on the password input screen to the server device 240 based on the URL and acquires the authentication result notified from the server device 240, and the acquired authentication result are correct. The configuration includes a history information display control unit that displays setting change / confirmation history information on the display operation unit 222.

With this configuration, the gaming system according to the present embodiment reads the two-dimensional code displayed by the display control function of the pachinko gaming machine 1A by the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, and after authentication by the server device 240, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220. Setting change / confirmation history information can be displayed. Therefore, only a person who has the authority to know the predetermined password can save and display the setting change confirmation information, so that it is possible to judge whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed, and it is illegal. You will be able to judge whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate the act.

With the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, only the authorized person can save and display the setting change / confirmation history information, so that it is only possible to determine whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed. Alternatively, it is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine 1A and a gaming system 210 that can determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

The gaming machine according to each embodiment of the present invention has been described above, including its action and effect. However, the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described here, and it goes without saying that the present invention includes various embodiments as long as it does not deviate from the gist of the present invention described in the claims.

[10-25. Application example to pachislot]
For example, the invention according to the present embodiment can be applied to pachislot machines. When the invention according to the present embodiment is applied to a pachislot machine, the procedure for executing the setting change processing and the setting confirmation processing is different from that of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In pachislot, the setting change process is performed on the condition that the setting key is operated from OFF to ON while the power is off, and the set value can be changed. Then, when the operation of the start lever is detected or it is detected that the setting key is changed from ON to OFF, the setting change is confirmed.

In order to be able to display the history of setting changes, the main CPU of the pachislot has made the above-mentioned setting changes, input a signal generated from the setting switch by operating the setting key, and then operate the start lever. When the indicated signal is received, data indicating that the setting has been changed and a command indicating the current setting value are transmitted to the sub CPU. The main CPU of the pachislot machine constitutes a control unit that controls the progress of the game. The main CPU also constitutes a data transmission means for transmitting various data to the display control unit.

On the other hand, when the data received from the main CPU is an initialization command indicating that the setting has been changed, the sub CPU has operation type information (information indicating the setting change) indicating that the setting has been changed and RTC. The date and time data currently clocked by, that is, the date and time data for which the initialization command is received is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as the setting change confirmation history information. The pachislot sub CPU constitutes a display control unit that controls the display of the display unit. Further, the sub CPU constitutes a receiving means for receiving various data from the data transmitting means.

In pachislot, checking the set value means operating the setting key (rotating to the right) and displaying the current set value on the 7-segment display based on the signal generated from the setting key type switch. .. In this way, the pachislot shifts to the setting confirmation process on the condition that the setting key is operated from OFF to ON in the power ON state, and the set value is displayed on the 7-segment display. The pachislot setting switch, together with the main CPU, constitutes a setting means that enables change or confirmation of the set value.

In order to be able to display the confirmation history of the set value, the main CPU confirms the set value by the above operation, and when the signal generated from the setting switch by the operation of the setting key is input, the set value is confirmed. And the setting confirmation command which is the current setting value are transmitted to the sub CPU.

On the other hand, when the data received from the main CPU is a setting confirmation command indicating that the set value has been confirmed, the sub CPU has operation type information (information indicating the setting confirmation) indicating that the set value has been confirmed, and The date and time data currently timed by the RTC, that is, the date and time data for receiving the setting confirmation command indicating that the set value has been confirmed, is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a functioning as a backup memory as the setting change confirmation history information. The subwork RAM 2100a can store and hold the written information even in the non-energized state.

The sub CPU that receives the setting change start command or the setting confirmation command determines that the setting key has changed from OFF to ON. Then, when the sub CPU determines that the setting key has changed from OFF to ON, the sub CPU performs a hall menu display process for displaying the hall menu screen on the main screen of the liquid crystal display device provided in the pachislot machine. The hall menu screen displayed on the pachislot is "total" instead of the "prize ball information" displayed on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 110) displayed on the display device 16 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. Although there are some differences in details such as "medal information" being displayed, the screen is basically the same as the hall menu screen displayed on the display device 16 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment.

In pachislot, browsing means operating the setting key (rotating to the right) and selecting (highlighting) "setting change / confirmation history" in the hall menu screen displayed on the main screen of the liquid crystal display device. The setting change confirmation history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a is displayed as, for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen on condition that the main button is pressed in this state.

The pachislot sub CPU executes the same processing as the processing executed by the host control circuit 2100 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, such as hall menu processing, setting change / confirmation history processing, maintenance processing, and authentication processing. can do. Further, when the embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is applied to the pachislot machine, the hall menu screen, the setting change / confirmation history screen, the error information history screen, the guide menu screen, and the password request screen described in the embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are applied. , A screen similar to the screen displayed when the entered password is inappropriate, the screen displayed on the mobile wireless communication terminal, etc. is displayed on the main screen of the pachislot liquid crystal display device or the mobile wireless communication terminal.

In pachislot, when "bonus winning" is determined by the bonus lottery, one of "SBB", "BB", and "RB" is determined by the bonus distribution lottery. However, as the game machine of the present invention, either "SBB or BB" or "RB" is determined by the bonus distribution lottery, and either "SBB" or "BB" is determined at the end of the precursory game. You may.

Further, in pachislot, the "BB precursor flag" is turned on when the precursor game of "SBB" or "BB" is being played. That is, the precursor games of "SBB" and "BB" are managed by the "BB precursor flag". However, the gaming machine of the present invention may be configured to provide a precursor flag for "SBB" and a precursor flag for "BB". In this case, the production of the precursor game corresponding to "SBB" and the production of the precursor game corresponding to "BB" may be different.

Further, in pachislot, the first ART ("SBB", "BB", "RB") and the second ART are ended on the condition that the games of the number of staying games are exhausted, respectively, but the first ART The second ART may be configured to end on the condition that the navigation (notification of display auxiliary information) is performed a predetermined number of times.

Further, in pachislot, the number of staying games of "SBB" in the first ART may be fixed to, for example, "100", or the number of games added to the number of staying games in "SBB" is increased like "BB". It may be configured to be added (added).

Further, in pachislot, the number of games for producing additional additions A, B, and C that may occur in BR may be fixed to, for example, "2". That is, when the effects of the additional additions A, B, and C are determined, "2" may be set in the additional addition game number counter. However, the number of games for which the additional additions A, B, and C are produced may be variable. For example, the value set in the additional additional game number counter may be different depending on the type of the additional additional effect (additional additions A, B, C).

Further, in pachislot, the number of staying games in the second ART may be determined to be a fixed number of games, for example, "50", or instead, a predetermined number of games is set as one set (for example,). , 1 set "50" games), the number of games of the second ART may be set by a plurality of sets determined by lottery. For example, the number of staying games in the second ART may be set to two sets of one set "50" games, that is, a total of "100" games. Further, in this case, a predetermined period may be provided in which the stop order is not notified between sets and the value of the ART game number counter is not subtracted for each game. In addition, a lottery for the number of additional games may be performed for each game in this predetermined period. Then, before the end of this predetermined period (when the predetermined number of games reaches the predetermined number of games, before the predetermined number of games is reached), the stop order other than the forward push is performed. When the stop operation (irregular push) is performed in, the predetermined period is forcibly terminated, and the value of the ART game number counter is subtracted by "1" for each game from the next game of the game in which the irregular push is performed. You may.

Further, in the pachislot machine, as an accessory provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a rotating accessory unit 122 having a rotating accessory 123 that is rotated by being driven by a stepping motor has been described as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be provided with an accessory that moves in the left-right direction, the up-down direction, or the front-back direction by driving, for example, a stepping motor or a solenoid.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. In the second embodiment of the present invention, the same members or members having the same function as the members in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

[11-1. Game machine configuration]
[11-1-1. Appearance composition]
Since the appearance configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment of the present invention is the same as the appearance configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 155 is a front view showing the configuration of the gaming board unit 17 according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the second embodiment is partially different from the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the first embodiment shown in FIG. Specifically, in the second embodiment, the configuration and arrangement of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 in the first embodiment are different, and the large winning opening 540 (see FIG. 5) and the special electric accessory 600 (see FIG. 5). ), The first large winning opening 540a and the first special electric accessory 601 and the second large winning opening 540b and the second special electric accessory 602 are arranged on the board surface.

The first large winning opening 540a is a portion that can be opened in the case of a big hit gaming state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player. The second large winning opening 540b is a portion that can be opened in a small hit game state that is advantageous to the player and has a smaller advantage than the big hit game state. A first count switch 541a is arranged in the first winning opening 540a (see FIG. 158). A second count switch 541b is arranged in the second winning opening 540b (see FIG. 158). When a game ball wins in either the first large winning opening 540a or the second large winning opening 540b, the winning game ball is detected by the first count switch 541a or the second count switch 541b. When a game ball is detected by the first count switch 541a or the second count switch 541b, a preset number of game balls are paid out from the payout port 61 to the upper plate 26 (or from the payout outlet 63 to the lower plate 27). ..

The first special electric accessory 601 includes a shutter 611 that can rotate in the front-rear direction and a first special winning opening solenoid 620a (see FIG. 158) that drives the shutter 611. The first special electric accessory 601 is arranged above the out port 57. The first special electric accessory 601 is in an open state in which a game ball can be won (or easily) in the first special winning opening 540a by driving the shutter 611 by the first large winning opening solenoid 620a. It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed state that makes it impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball into the first special winning opening 540a. The open drive by the first special electric accessory 601 (shutter 611) is performed when the game state is shifted to the jackpot game state based on the result of the jackpot determination performed when the game ball wins the first starting port 420. .. The result of the jackpot determination performed when the game ball wins the first starting port 420 is indicated by the stop display mode of the special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 73.

The second special electric accessory 602 includes a shutter 612 that can rotate in the front-rear direction and a second special winning opening solenoid 620b (see FIG. 158) that drives the shutter 612. The second special electric accessory 602 is arranged on the upstream side in the flow direction of the game ball with respect to the first special electric accessory 601. The second special electric accessory 602 is in an open state in which a game ball can be won (or easily) in the second special winning opening 540b by driving the shutter 612 by the second large winning opening solenoid 620b. It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed state that makes it impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball into the second major winning opening 540b. The open drive by the second special electric accessory 602 (shutter 612) is performed when the game shifts to the jackpot gaming state based on the result of the jackpot determination performed when the game ball wins the second starting port 440. .. The result of the jackpot determination performed when the game ball wins the second starting port 440 is indicated by the stop display mode of the special symbol in the second special symbol display unit 74. In addition, in the vicinity of the second special electric accessory 602, the direction of the first special electric accessory 601 so that the ball not picked up by the second special electric accessory 602 can be picked up by the first special electric accessory 601. A passage or a nail to which the game ball is transferred may be provided toward.

FIG. 156 is an explanatory diagram showing a passage path of the game ball that has entered the second special winning opening 540b, and the game ball that has entered the second special winning opening 540b first passes through the second count switch 541b. Head to V winning opening 545. At the entrance of the V winning opening 545, a flat plate-shaped shutter 546 that can be projected and retracted with respect to the board surface is arranged. The shutter 546 is driven by the V winning opening solenoid 443 (FIG. 158), and can be switched between a retracted state in which the shutter 546 can pass through the V winning opening 545 and a protruding state in which movement to the V winning opening 545 is restricted. FIG. 156 (a) shows a case where the shutter 546 is in the retracted state, and the game ball that has entered the second major winning opening 540b enters the V winning opening 545 and passes through the V winning opening switch 442. , Is discharged to the outside of the game machine as an out ball. FIG. 156 (b) shows a case where the shutter 546 is in a protruding state, and the game ball that has entered the second special winning opening 540b comes into contact with the shutter 546 and is guided to another path as an out ball. It is discharged to the outside of the game machine.

The protrusion drive by the second special electric accessory 602 (shutter 612) is performed when the game shifts to the small hit game state based on the result of the big hit determination performed when the game ball wins the second starting port 440. Be told. The result of the jackpot determination performed when the game ball wins the second starting port 440 is indicated by the stop display mode of the special symbol in the second special symbol display unit 74. Then, when the game ball that has entered the second big winning opening 540b passes through the V winning opening 545, it shifts to the big hit gaming state and the first special electric accessory 601 (shutter). The open drive according to 611) is executed.

The first starting port 420 gives an opportunity for a big hit determination on the condition that the game ball wins (passes), and also gives an opportunity to display the result of the big hit determination on the display device 16 or the first special symbol display unit 73 described later. It is something to give. A first start port switch 421 is arranged at the first start port 420 (see FIG. 158). When the first special symbol display unit 72 displays the mode of the jackpot, the game shifts to the jackpot game state in which the first special electric accessory 601 is driven to open.

The second starting port 440 gives an opportunity for a big hit determination on the condition that the game ball wins (passes), and also gives an opportunity to display the result of the big hit determination on the display device 16 or the second special symbol display unit 74 described later. It is something to give. When the second special symbol display unit 74 displays the mode of the jackpot, the game shifts to the jackpot game state in which the first special electric accessory 601 is driven to open. When the second special symbol display unit 74 displays the mode of the small hit, the game shifts to the small hit game state in which the second special electric accessory 602 is driven to open.

The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 in the second embodiment is a unit body in which the second starting port 440 and the ordinary electric accessory 460 are integrated. The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is arranged so that the ordinary electric accessory 460 is located directly below the passing gate 49. The ordinary electric accessory 460 of the second embodiment transmits the power of the flat plate member 4621 that can be projected and retracted in the front-rear direction, the start port solenoid 4630 (see, for example, FIG. 158), and the start port solenoid 4630 to the flat plate member 4621. It is equipped with a power transmission mechanism (not shown). The ordinary electric accessory 460 has a protruding state in which the flat plate member 4621 is driven by the starting port solenoid 4630 so that the game ball can easily pass through the second starting port 440 shown in FIG. 157 (b). It is configured to be able to shift (drive) from the retracted state where it is difficult for the game ball to pass as shown in c). The second starting port 440 is arranged on the left side of the flat plate member 4621 and opens toward the right side. The flat plate member 4621 is inclined downward toward the second starting port 440, and when the game ball rides on the flat plate member 4621 while the flat plate member 4621 is protruding, the game ball is placed at the second starting port 440. It is transported toward and wins a prize in the second starting port 440. The drive by the ordinary electric accessory 460 (flat plate member 4621) is performed a predetermined number of times in a predetermined period when the ordinary symbol has a specific stop display mode on the ordinary symbol display unit 71.

As described above, according to the second embodiment, in the right region of the gaming region 21 of the gaming board unit 17, the passing gate 49, the ordinary electric accessory 460, and the second special electric motor are along the flow direction of the right-handed gaming ball. The accessory 602 and the first special electric accessory 601 are arranged in this order.

[11-1-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 158.

The control circuit according to the second embodiment includes a first special winning opening solenoid 620a and a second winning opening solenoid 620b instead of the large winning opening solenoid 620 and the count switch 541 in the control circuit of the first embodiment shown in FIG. The first count switch 541a and the second count switch 541b are connected to the main control circuit 100, and the V winning port switch 442 and the V winning port solenoid 443 are further connected. Since other configurations are the same as those of the control circuit of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 9, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The first prize-winning solenoid 620a drives the shutter 611 of the first special electric accessory 501 based on the command from the main control circuit 100, and the second prize-winning solenoid 620b receives a command from the main control circuit 100. Based on this, the shutter 612 of the second special electric accessory 502 is driven.

The first count switch 541a detects a game ball that has entered the first large winning opening 540a, and the second count switch 541b detects a game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 540b, and the main control circuit. The detection signal is output to 100. The main control circuit 100 counts the number of game balls entering the first special winning opening 540a and the second special winning opening 540b based on the signals from the first count switch 541a and the second count switch 541b.

The V winning opening solenoid 443 drives the shutter 546 based on a command from the main control circuit 100, and the V winning opening switch 442 detects a game ball that has entered the V winning opening 545 and is the main control circuit. The detection signal is output to 100. In the second embodiment, the main control circuit 100 drives the V winning opening solenoid 443 at the start of the small hit game to project the shutter 546, and when the detection signal from the V winning opening switch 442 is received, the shutter 546 To pull in.

[11-2. Function flow]
Next, the functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention will be described. The functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment does not have a function of probabilistically shifting in the functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. Further, in the second embodiment, the "big hit determination" shown in FIG. 20 also includes a "small hit determination".

Specifically, when the specific stop display mode in the second special symbol display unit 74 is a small hit, the game shifts to the small hit game state. Then, in the small hit game state, the second large winning opening 540b shifts from the closed state to the open state, and a predetermined number of game balls win or the game shifts to the closed state after a predetermined time elapses. Only done once. That is, in the small hit game state, the round game is not performed unlike the big hit game state.

[11-3. Basic specifications of pachinko machines]
Next, the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the second embodiment will be described.

[11-3-1. Number of limiters]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment includes the above [9-1. The number of limiters described in [Expansion Example 1] is set, and “3” is set as the number of limiters in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Specifically, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the second embodiment, when the first jackpot is included, the limiter count is reached and the limiter count is reached when the jackpot that shifts to the time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot game state is won four times in a row. The jackpot of time (fourth jackpot) is controlled so as not to shift to the time-saving game state after the jackpot game is completed. In addition, "4 times in a row" means that the big hit to shift to the time-saving game state is executed 4 times in succession by alternately repeating the big hit game state and the time-saving game state. In the case of a big hit game when the number of limiters is reached, it is controlled so as not to shift to the time saving game state after the end of the big hit game state, but this is only a count of the counter that manages whether or not the number of limiters is reached. It depends on the number of times. That is, if the jackpot that shifts to the time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game state is won unless the limiter count is reached (the random number extracted by the special symbol lottery is the jackpot judgment, and the special symbol that is in the time-saving game state is selected. The number of counts of the counter that manages whether or not the limiter count is reached is updated. Then, as a result of determining that the number of limiters has been reached, control is performed so as not to shift to the time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game state. In the second embodiment, after the jackpot game state ends, the time saving game state shifts to the time saving game state where the number of time reductions is 1 or 100 times, but before the limiter number is reached (shifts to the time saving game state after the jackpot game state ends). Before the jackpot is won four times in a row), the game does not shift to the time-saving game state after the jackpot game state ends. If the jackpot is won, the number of times to manage whether or not the limiter count is reached at that point is reset. (Updated to 0, initial value, etc.).

[11-3-2. Big hit, small hit probability]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, when the main CPU 101 detects that the game ball has won the first starting port 420, it extracts a random number for determining the jackpot of the first special symbol from the jackpot determination counter (hereinafter, Refer to the first special symbol lottery or the special figure 1 lottery) and the first special symbol jackpot random number determination table (not shown) stored in the main RAM 103 to determine the jackpot of the extracted random numbers for jackpot determination. I do.

Further, when the main CPU 101 detects that the game ball has won the second starting port 440, it extracts a random number for determining the jackpot of the second special symbol from the counter for determining the jackpot (hereinafter, the second special symbol lottery or the special symbol). With reference to the first special symbol jackpot random number determination table (not shown) stored in the main RAM 103 (referred to as 2 lottery), the jackpot determination of the extracted jackpot determination random numbers is performed.

In the second embodiment, the probability of a big hit determination in the first special symbol lottery is about 1 / 319.69, and the probability of a small hit determination is 0. The probability of a big hit determination in the second special symbol lottery is about 1 / 319.69, and the probability of a small hit determination is 1 / 3.75. That is, the probability of losing the second special symbol lottery is lower than that of the first special symbol lottery because there may be a small hit.

[11-3-3. Number of prize balls]
In the second embodiment, the number of prize balls by winning the first prize opening 540a is "10", the number of prize balls by winning the second prize opening 540b is "3", and the prize is won by the first starting port 420. The number of prize balls by winning is "4", the number of prize balls by winning the second starting port 440 is "1", the number of prize balls by winning the general winning opening 53 is "5", and the number of winning balls by winning the general winning openings 54 and 55 is The number of prize balls by winning is "3", and the number of prize balls by winning the general winning opening 56 is "2".

[11-3-4. Big hit, small hit game state count number]
In the second embodiment, the number of counts (maximum number of balls entered) in the round game in the big hit game state is 9, and the number of counts (maximum number of balls entered) in the small hit game state is 10. That is, according to the second embodiment, since the first big prize opening 540a is won in the big hit game state, 90 prize balls are refunded per round, and the second big prize is given in the small hit game state. There are 30 prize ball refunds to win the prize in the mouth 540b.

[11-3-5. Big hit distribution]
In the case of a big hit by the special figure 1 lottery (hereinafter referred to as the special figure 1 big hit) and a big hit by the special figure 2 lottery (hereinafter referred to as the special figure 2 big hit), the number of rounds is set according to the big hit mode of the special symbol. Either "10 times" or "6 times" is selected. The probability that the number of rounds will be "10 times" is 0.5%, and the probability that the number of rounds will be "6 times" is 99.5%. In addition, when the ball enters the V winning opening 545 in the small hit game state and shifts to the big hit game state, the number of rounds is either "10 times" or "6 times" depending on the small hit mode of the second special symbol. Is selected. The probability that the number of rounds will be "10 times" is 0.5%, and the probability that the number of rounds will be "6 times" is 99.5%. The special figure 2 big hit is a big hit that does not go through the small hit.

[11-3-6. Time saving number distribution]
In the case of the special figure 1 big hit and the special figure 2 big hit, the game shifts to the time-saving game state after the big hit game state ends. At this time, either "100 times" or "1 time" is selected as the number of time reductions depending on the jackpot mode of the special symbol. In the special figure 1 jackpot, the probability that the number of time reductions will be "100 times" is 50%, and the probability that the number of time reductions will be "1 time" is 50%. More specifically, there are 6R jackpot and 10R jackpot as special figure 1 jackpot, 50% of jackpots given once in 6R jackpot, 49.5% of jackpots given 100 times in 6R jackpot, and 10R jackpot. The jackpot given 100 times in a short time is 0.5%.

The probability that the number of time reductions will be "100 times" in the special figure 2 jackpot is 100%. Further, when the ball enters the V winning opening 545 in the small hit game state and shifts to the big hit game state, the time shortening game state is shifted to after the end of the big hit game state, and the time saving number of times "100 times" is given. If the ball is not entered in the V winning opening 545 in the small hit game state, the game state after the end of the small hit game state is maintained as the game state before the end of the small hit game state. That is, if the gaming state before the end of the small hit gaming state is the normal gaming state, the gaming state after the end of the small hit gaming state is the normal gaming state, and if the gaming state before the end of the small hit gaming state is the time-saving gaming state. , The game state after the end of the small hit game state becomes the time saving game state. In this case, the number of time reductions will be inherited from the number of time reductions before the end of the small hit game state. In the following description, entering a ball into the V winning opening 545 may be simply referred to as a V winning.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, when the pachinko game machine 1 is won in the special figure 2 lottery and the game shifts to the big hit game state (including the big hit via the small hit winning and the V prize), the big hit game state ends. After that, it will always be a time-saving game state in which 100 times of time-saving is given, but it is not limited to this, and a small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery, and after the end of the big hit game state via V prize, the time-saving 100 times In the case of a big hit game state without going through the small hit winning and V winning of the special figure 2 lottery, one time saving may be given after the big hit game state ends. Further, 10% of the 6R jackpot in at least one of the special figure 2 lottery and the special figure 1 lottery may be a jackpot that does not shift to the time saving game state. In the second embodiment, since 0.5% is a 10R jackpot, the remaining 89.5% of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is a 6R jackpot that shifts to a shorter time. In addition, if a big hit is won in the special figure 1 lottery during the time-saving game state, it may be controlled so as to always shift to the time-saving game state of 100 times, or a big hit that does not always shift to the time-saving game state is won. It may be controlled as follows. It is also possible to express that "the number of time reductions is 0" that the game does not shift to the time reduction game state.

In addition, the big hit game state can perform a round game, while the small hit game state basically does not have a round game. In the small hit game state, it is possible to open and close the large winning opening (second large winning opening 540b) in which the accessory continuous operation device does not operate. Here, after the end of the big hit game state, it is possible to shift to a game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a time-saving game state), but basically, after the end of the small hit game state, it shifts to the small hit game state. It does not shift to a more advantageous gaming state than before the shift.

However, during the small hit game state, the large winning opening (second large winning opening 540b) provided with the specific area (V winning opening 545) is opened, and the game ball passes through the specific area (V winning opening 545). When the condition device is activated and the accessory continuous actuating device is activated, after the end of the small hit game state, the player shifts to the big hit game state, which is an advantageous game state for the player. At this time, the small hit game state may also be counted in the number of rounds.

Further, according to the second embodiment, there is no difference in the round allocation between the big hit game state triggered by the special figure 2 lottery and the big hit game state triggered by the special figure 1, but the special figure 2 lottery is used as an opportunity. It may be easier to win a big hit with a larger number of rounds than the round allocation in the big hit game state triggered by the special figure 1 lottery. Alternatively, the big hit triggered by the special figure 2 lottery may be given a larger number of time reductions after the end of the big hit game state than the big hit triggered by the special figure 1 lottery. In addition, when the game shifts to the big hit game state triggered by the special figure 2 lottery or the special figure 1 lottery during the time saving game state, the number of time reductions executed after the end of the big hit game state is 100 times unless the limiter is reached. Although it is desirable, a number less than 100 times may be given even during the time saving game state. Here, if the game shifts to the big hit game state triggered by the special figure 2 lottery or the special figure 1 lottery during the normal game state, one time reduction is given, but similarly, 1 as a number less than 100 times. You may give a time reduction of times. Furthermore, it is possible to set a time reduction of 0 times even if the limiter number has not been reached.

[11-5. Game flow]
FIG. 159 is an explanatory diagram showing a flow of a game using the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment of the present invention.

In many cases, at the beginning of the game, the game is started from the normal game state. In the normal game state, left-handed to advance the game with the aim of winning a prize at the first starting port 420. The special figure 1 lottery is performed with the first start opening 420 winning as an opportunity, and when the special figure 1 lottery is won, the game shifts to the big hit game state. Then, after the jackpot game state ends, the game shifts to the time-saving game state of once or 100 times. In the time-saving game state, the game is advanced with the aim of passing the game ball to the passing gate 49 by hitting right. In the time-saving game state, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery triggered by the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 49 becomes a high probability state, so that the normal electric accessory 460 is easily operated.

When the number of time reductions is "1 time", when the first variation of the second special symbol stops in a lost manner, the time reduction game state ends and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery shifts to the low probability state. Here, in the present embodiment, it is possible to suspend the change of the second special symbol during the first change of the second special symbol. That is, when the player launches the game ball to the passing gate 49 during the change of the second special symbol and the game ball passes through the passing gate 49, the normal symbol display unit 71 can change the normal symbol. Is. Then, during the fluctuation of the second special symbol, if the ordinary symbol has a specific stop display mode in the ordinary symbol display unit 71, the ordinary electric accessory 460 (flat plate member 4621) drives the game ball to the second. It is possible to win a prize in the starting port 440. Therefore, when the time-saving gaming state ends when the change of the second special symbol is stopped in a lost manner (or when the change of the second special symbol is stopped), the second special symbol is changed during the change of the second special symbol. 2 There is a possibility that the change of the special symbol is suspended. It should be noted that the variation of the second special symbol can be configured to be executed with priority over the variation of the first special symbol.

For example, when the fluctuation time of the first second special symbol in the time-saving game state is 100 seconds, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the time-saving game state is 3 seconds, and the normal symbol becomes a specific stop display mode. In this case, if the ordinary electric accessory 460 operates for 5 seconds, it is possible to change the ordinary symbol and operate the ordinary electric accessory 460 a plurality of times during the first variation of the second special symbol. As a result, the game ball wins the second starting port 440 during the change of the second special symbol, and the change of the second special symbol can be reserved and stored. When controlled in this way, even after the time-saving game state ends after the second special symbol fluctuates once and the winning probability of the normal symbol becomes a low probability state, the lottery by the reserved second special symbol is performed. It becomes possible to do.

On the other hand, the end condition of the time-saving game state is not limited to the above example, and the time-saving game state may be controlled to end at the start of the first change of the second special symbol in the time-saving game state. In this case, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol that started to fluctuate after the start of the fluctuation of the first second special symbol is controlled to be longer than the fluctuation time of the normal symbol that started to fluctuate during the time-saving game state. You may. As a result, even if the normal symbol is changed by the game ball passing through the passing gate 49 after the start of the change of the second special symbol, the normal electric accessory 460 is driven by the end of the change of the second special symbol. It is also possible to prevent it from being damaged.

For example, the hold of the second special symbol is not stored at the end of the big hit game state in which the number of time reductions is "1 time", and the game ball passes after the end of the big hit game state (or until the big hit game state ends). It is assumed that the normal symbol is changed by passing through the gate 49, and the game ball wins the second starting port 440 by driving the normal electric accessory 460 in the "one time" time-saving game state. In this case, the first fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the time-saving game state is 100 seconds, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the time-saving game state is 3 seconds, and the time-saving game state ends and the normal symbol It is assumed that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 150 seconds when the winning probability of is low.

In this example, the jackpot game state ends without the second special symbol being held, and then the game shifts to the "1 time" time-saving game state, and with the transition to the time-saving game state (the game ball passes through the gate 49). When the normal symbol starts to fluctuate (by passing through) and the normal symbol becomes a specific stop display mode, the normal electric accessory 460 is driven, and the game ball wins the second starting port 440 and the second When the special symbol starts to fluctuate, the time-saving game state ends at that point, and the winning probability of the normal symbol becomes low. At this time, when the driving of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is completed, and then, as described above, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol when the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is low is set, and when the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is high. If it is made longer than the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in, the normal electric accessory 460 will not be driven even if the game ball passes through the passing gate 49 by the end of the fluctuation (100 seconds) of the second special symbol. Can be controlled as

Further, the driving time of the ordinary electric accessory 460 when the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is low is the driving time of the ordinary electric accessory 460 when the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is high (for example, 5 seconds). The relative drive time may be shorter (for example, 0.1 second) than the above. By controlling in this way, even if the normal electric accessory 460 is operated when the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is low, the game ball is substantially second-started by the ordinary electric accessory 460. It can be controlled to reduce the probability of winning the mouth 440.

Further, at the end of the jackpot game state in which the number of time reductions is "1 time", the hold of the second special symbol is not stored, while four hold of the first special symbol is stored, and the jackpot game state is concerned. If the hold of the normal symbol is stored because the game ball has passed through the passing gate 49, the time-saving game state of "1 time" is started after the end of the jackpot game state, and the hold of the first special symbol is held. The change of the first special symbol due to the digestion of the normal symbol and the change of the normal symbol due to the digestion of the hold of the normal symbol are performed.

At this time, assuming that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 3 seconds and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 10 seconds, the normal electric accessory 460 operates for 5 seconds because the normal symbol has a specific stop display mode. In this case, since the first special symbol is still changed (because the fluctuation time of 2 seconds remains), the time-saving game state is continued as the game state. Then, until the change of the first special symbol is completed, if the hold of the normal symbol exists (or if the game ball passes through the passing gate 49), the normal symbol is changed, and as a result, the second special symbol is changed. The state in which the hold of is can be accumulated continues. From the above, if one fluctuation of the first special symbol is longer than one fluctuation of the normal symbol, the player can win at least one ball in the second starting port 440 for each winning of the normal symbol. Since the hold of the second special symbol can be stored, it is also possible to encourage the player to play a game in order to save the hold of the second special symbol.

However, on the other hand, assuming that the hold of the second special symbol can be stored even when the number of time reductions is "1 time", a plurality of second special symbols can be stored even when the number of time reductions is "1 time". Since the number of times can be changed, the game tends to be monotonous (the significance of setting "1 time" and "100 times" as the number of time reductions is reduced) is also assumed. In view of this point, in the time-saving game state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set longer than the fluctuation time of at least 4 fluctuations of the first special symbol (for example, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 3 seconds, the thirth 1 It is also possible to set the fluctuation time of the special symbol to 0.1 seconds).

By doing so, at the end of the jackpot game state in which the number of time reductions is "1 time", the time reduction game state is started in a state where there is no hold of the second special symbol and there are four hold of the first special symbol, and the first Even if the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started at the same time as the fluctuation of the special symbol is started, the fluctuation of the maximum number of reserved symbols (temporarily four) of the first special symbol can be completed by at least the end of the fluctuation of the normal symbol. Thereby, it is possible to control so as to make it difficult to create a situation in which the time-saving gaming state is unintentionally extended by the fluctuation time of the first special symbol.

Further, even if the time-saving game state is controlled to end by the change start, change end, change number of times, etc. of the second special symbol (as the end condition of the time-saving game state, the condition related to the change of the second special symbol is set. (Even if it is adopted), since the time-saving game state does not end unless the second special symbol is changed, the player does not win the game ball in the second start port 440 and puts the game ball in the first start port 420. If the player continues to win a prize, it is expected that a situation may occur in which he / she can continue to receive the lottery for the first special symbol during the time-saving game state.

In this regard, in the second embodiment, for example, when the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is in a low-probability gaming state and the winning probability of the normal symbol is low, the jackpot by the first special symbol is reduced in time. May win a "one-time" jackpot. However, if the jackpot by the first special symbol is won during the time-saving game state, the number of time-savings of the jackpot may be all "100 times". When controlled in this way, a player who wishes to win a big hit with the first special symbol during the time-saving game state may continue to receive the lottery for the first special symbol without receiving the lottery for the second special symbol. Conceivable. However, it is assumed that such a game is a game not intended by the developer. Therefore, as a condition for ending the time-saving game state, when the lottery of the first special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (more times than the maximum number of holdings of the first special symbol, for example, 5 times), the time-saving game state is set. It may be controlled to end.

Further, in the second embodiment, it is possible to shift to the big hit game state by passing the game ball through the specific area (V winning opening 545) during the small hit game state, but in such a game machine, Even if a small hit is won as a result of the lottery of the second special symbol during the time-saving game state, the game ball does not pass through the specific area unless the player fires the game ball. For example, a small hit game that is relatively advantageous to the player (a small hit game or a big hit game in which a 10R big hit game is started if a prize is won in a specific area during the small hit game) and a disadvantageous small hit game (small hit). If a 6R big hit game is started if a prize is won in a specific area during the game (small hit game or big hit game), the player is expected to win a disadvantageous small hit. Plays the game in a way that does not intentionally fire the game ball (as a result, in order for the player to obtain the most advantageous small hit game (or big hit game), the second special symbol as long as the short game state continues. It is also possible to receive a lottery. In view of this point, as one game property, if the time-saving game state is controlled to end when the small hit is won a predetermined number of times (for example, once) as the end condition of the time-saving game state, the game property is rich. It is also expected that it will be possible to provide games.

By combining various conditions as described above (game conditions for the number of time reductions "1 time"), it is possible to realize a game in which the lottery of the second special symbol is performed once when the number of time reductions is "1 time". Is. Regarding playability, it is desirable to set the following conditions (i) to (vii), but by combining (or using alone) various types of the following (i) to (vii), the playability is rich. However, a game machine may be provided.

(I) The condition for shifting from the state where the lottery probability (winning probability) of the normal symbol is high to the state where the lottery probability (winning probability) is low is the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol in the state where the lottery probability of the normal symbol is high. (Ii) A bridge-type ordinary electric accessory 460 as shown in FIG. 157 is used, and the ordinary electric accessory 460 is driven by winning a prize (when the game ball enters the second starting port 440). To end (close)
(Iii) Make the fluctuation time of one normal symbol when the lottery probability of the normal symbol is high longer than the fluctuation time of 4 fluctuations (maximum number of holdings) of the first special symbol (iv) Normal symbol The condition for shifting from a state in which the lottery probability is high to a state in which the lottery probability is low is one small hit. (V) From a state in which the lottery probability of a normal symbol is high to a low probability. The condition to be transferred is the case where the change of the second special symbol is performed once (mainly, it is assumed that the change of the second special symbol is completed, but the second special symbol is similar to the above (i). It may be the case when the fluctuation starts, or it may be the case where the fluctuation is executed once as some counting method).
(Vi) The condition for shifting from the state where the lottery probability of the normal symbol is high to the state where the lottery probability is low is the line where the fluctuation of the first special symbol is 5 times (the number is larger than the maximum number of reserved symbols of the first special symbol). (Vii) The condition for shifting from the state where the lottery probability of the normal symbol is high to the state where the lottery probability is low is one operation of the special electric accessory.

Regarding the above configuration, when the winning probability of the normal symbol is high and the driving time by the normal electric accessory 460 is long (for example, 5 seconds), the game ball to the second starting port 440 By detecting a predetermined number of winnings (for example, one ball), the operation is terminated, and it is possible to control so that the game ball is not guided to the second starting port 440 any more. Further, if the number of time reductions is "1 time" and the normal electric accessory 460 ends its operation due to one game ball winning the second starting port 440, the number of time reductions is "1 time". In addition, the number of winning game balls to the second starting port 440 is limited to one ball, and by controlling so that the time-saving game state ends when the first second special symbol changes in the time-saving game state, the number of time-saving games is reduced. When is "1 time", the fluctuation of the second special symbol can be controlled substantially once. Further, even when the number of time reductions is a number other than "1 time" or in a gaming state other than the time reduction gaming state, the above configurations (i) to (vii) can be used as long as there is no particular adverse effect. ..

When the time-saving game state ends and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery shifts to the low probability state, if there is a hold of the special figure 2 change, the pullback mode is shifted. Special Figure 2 If there is no hold of fluctuation, the mode shifts to the normal mode. Here, if there is a hold of the special figure 2 change, the game shifts to the time-saving game state and the first change becomes the special figure 2 change. The fluctuation time of this first special figure 2 fluctuation is made longer than the four fluctuations of the fluctuation time of special figure 1. When the reserved special figure 2 fluctuation stops in the big hit mode, it shifts to the big hit game state, and when it stops in the small hit mode, it stops in the small hit mode and shifts to the small hit game state, and the small hit game state. When a V prize is won in, the game shifts to a big hit game state (hereinafter, this big hit game state may be referred to as a V big hit game state). Then, after the jackpot game state ends, the game shifts to the time-saving game state of "100 times". In the second embodiment, the fluctuation of the first special symbol is not counted in the number of time reductions. For this reason, when the special figure 1 lottery is won and the first hit is made, and when the time saving "1 time" is given after the end of the big hit game state, there is a hold of the special figure 1 change, and the special figure 1 change due to the hold. Even if the stop is performed, the time saving game state may be controlled so as not to end.

According to the above explanation, when the number of time reductions is "1 time", when the fluctuation of the second special symbol stops in a lost manner, the time reduction game state ends and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is low. It was explained that it will shift to, but it is not limited to this, and a small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery, and the big winning opening (second big winning opening 540b) is opened by the small hit, and it is specified. If the ball does not win in the area (V winning opening 545), the time-saving gaming state may end after the small hit gaming state ends. In addition to the fluctuation according to the special figure 2, the end condition of the time saving game state is the end when the fluctuation according to the special figure 1 is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) when the number of changes according to the special figure 2 is 1. It is also possible to control the number of times the small hit is won so that it ends at a predetermined number of times (for example, once).

When the number of time reductions is "100 times", when the 100th change of the second special symbol stops in a lost manner, the time reduction game state ends and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery shifts to the low probability state. At this time, if there is a hold of Special Figure 2, the mode shifts to the pullback mode (the final battle described later). If there is no hold in Special Figure 2, the game shifts to the normal game state. If the fluctuation of the second special symbol stops in the big hit mode before the time saving number "100 times" is digested, or it stops in the small hit mode and shifts to the small hit game state, the V prize is won in the small hit game state. In some cases, the game shifts to the V jackpot game state. Then, after the V jackpot game state ends, the game shifts to the time-saving game state of "100 times".

The pullback mode shifts to the case where the special figure 2 is held after the time saving game state ends. Here, the pullback mode is executed in a normal game state (a game state in which both the special symbol lottery and the normal symbol lottery have a low probability of winning). In the pullback mode, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol stops in the big hit mode, or stops in the small hit mode and shifts to the small hit game state, and when the V prize is won in the small hit game state, the state shifts to the V big hit game state. To do. Then, after the jackpot game state ends, the game shifts to the time-saving game state of "100 times".

In addition, when the number of consecutive big hits reaches the limiter number, in other words, the big hit game state and the time-saving game state are alternately shifted from the first big hit, and the number of times the big hit game state is reached is 4 times including the first hit. When becomes, the game shifts to the normal game state after the end of the fourth big hit game state. The number of limiters is reset when the game shifts to the normal game state. If there is a hold of the change in Special Figure 2 when the game shifts to the normal game state, the pullback mode is started. Special Figure 2 If there is no hold of change, the game returns to the normal game state.

Therefore, in the second embodiment, when the time reduction number of 100 times is acquired in the first hit, or even if the time reduction number is one time, the mode shifts to the V big hit game state triggered by the reserved special figure 2 fluctuation. If the number of time reductions of 100 times is obtained, the possibility of obtaining a jackpot for the number of limiters is high. Further, even if the jackpot for the number of limiters is acquired, if there is a hold in Special Figure 2, the mode shifts to the pullback mode. When the mode shifts to the pullback mode, the number of limiters is reset to 4 times. Then, if a special figure 2 big hit, a small hit, or a big hit is obtained by winning a V in the pullback mode, there is a high possibility that the number of time reductions of 100 times will be obtained and the number of big hits corresponding to the number of limiters will be obtained.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the game machine capable of giving a high interest that there is a possibility that the jackpot for the number of limiters can be further won after the jackpot for the number of limiters is obtained is provided. be able to.

[11-6. Outline of drawing control method and audio reproduction control method]
Also in the second embodiment, the above-mentioned [11-4. Outline of drawing control method], [6. The control according to the first embodiment described in the item of [Summary of voice reproduction control method] is executed.

[11-7. Processing by the main control circuit]
Next, various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the second embodiment will be described.

Also in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, the main CPU 101 executes the same processing as the processing in the first embodiment shown in FIGS. 30 to 51 or a processing in which a part is modified. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, in particular, the switch input detection process shown in FIG. 41, the special symbol display time management process shown in FIG. 47, and the jackpot end interval process shown in FIG. 49 are partially changed.

[Switch input detection process]
FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing a switch input detection process by the main CPU 101. Since the processes of steps S61 to S64 are the same as the switch input detection process in the first embodiment shown in FIG. 41, detailed description thereof will be omitted. When the process of step S64 is completed, the process shifts to step S65.
In step S65, the main CPU 101 performs the V winning opening passage detection process. In the V winning opening passage detection process, the V winning opening flag is set based on the detection of the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 545 (see, for example, FIG. 158) by the V winning opening switch 442 (see, for example, FIG. 158). Stored in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the switch input detection process.

[Special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing a special symbol display time management process by the main CPU 101. The special symbol display time management process in the second embodiment is obtained by adding the processes of steps S14201 to S14206 to the special symbol display time management process in the first embodiment shown in FIG. 47.

Steps S131 to S139 are as in the first embodiment shown in FIG. 47.

In step S133, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "big hit". When it is determined that the special symbol game is not a "big hit" (NO in step S133), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S14201.

In step S1421, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "small hit". When it is determined that the special symbol game is a "small hit" (YES in step S14201), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S14202. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol game is not a "small hit" (NO in step S14201), the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S140.

In step S14202, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a small hit flag indicating a small hit. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S14203.

In step S14203, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“03”) indicating the jackpot start interval management process in the control state flag.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the small hit start interval time (for example, 5000 ms) corresponding to the second special symbol in the waiting time timer (step S14204).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a small hit start command corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 103 (step S14205). As a result, a small hit start command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the small hit LED pattern flag in the main RAM 103 (step S14206). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

In step S140, the main CPU 101 performs a time saving number subtraction process. The time saving number subtraction process is as described with reference to FIG. 48.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“08”) indicating the special symbol game end process in the control state flag (step S141). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

[Big hit end interval processing]
FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end interval processing by the main CPU 101.

In FIG. 162, the processes of steps S161 and S162 are the same as the processes in the first embodiment shown in FIG. 49.
When the main CPU 101 determines in step S162 that the value of the waiting time timer is "0" (YES in step S161), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S16201.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "big hit" (step 16201). When it is determined that the special symbol game is a "big hit" (YES in step S16201), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S163. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol game is not a "big hit" (NO in step S16201), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S17701.

In step S163, the main CPU 101 clears the LED pattern flag indicating the number of times the large winning opening is opened. The large winning opening opening number display LED pattern flag is used as a management flag indicating whether or not to display the number of rounds at the time of a big hit by the LED light emission pattern.

Next, the main CPU 101 clears the round number distribution flag (step S164). This round number distribution flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and whether or not to periodically open and close the first large winning opening 540a a predetermined number of times even during one round. It is a flag to indicate. When the first large winning opening 540a is periodically opened and closed even during one round, the round number distribution flag is set to "1". At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a special symbol jackpot end display command to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 clears the jackpot flag (step S16401), and sets the control state flag to a value (“08”) indicating the special symbol game end process (step S165).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is a big hit (time saving big hit) that shifts to the time saving game state after the big hit game is completed (step S176). In the case of a time saving jackpot (YES in step S176), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S171. If it is not a time-saving jackpot (NO in step S176), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S172.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting "1" as the time saving flag (step S171).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a specified number of time reductions in the time reduction counter (step S172).

Next, the main CPU 101 executes the variation pattern table setting process (step S173). The process of step S173 is the same as the process in the first embodiment shown in FIG. 49. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval process.

In step S17701, the main CPU 101 clears the small hit display LED pattern flag, and in step S17702, the main CPU 101 clears the small hit flag.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game ball has passed the specific area. Here, the specific area refers to the V winning opening 545, and specifically, it is determined whether or not the specific area has been passed by turning the V winning flag on or off. When it is determined that the game ball has passed the specific area, the process is transferred to step S17704, and when it is not determined that the game ball has passed the specific area, the process is transferred to step S175.

In step S17704, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the V winning flag and setting a value (“03”) indicating the jackpot start interval process in the control state flag (step S17704).

In step S175, the main CPU 101 executes the above-mentioned time saving number subtraction process (step S175). Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“08”) indicating the special symbol game end process in the control state flag (step S178). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval process.

In addition, in the second embodiment, in the fluctuation pattern determination process of step S88 in the start opening winning detection process shown in FIG. 42, the main CPU 101 is the first and second second after shifting from the time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state. 2 Switch the variation pattern determination table to be referred to to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol. This variation pattern determination table is tentatively used in the case where the normal game state starts after the end of the jackpot game state, such as when the game shifts to the normal game state after the end of the time-saving game state or when the limiter number is reached. When there are four holds, the fluctuation time of the first and second fluctuations of Special Figure 2 is set to be longer than the fluctuation time of the third and fourth fluctuations of Special Figure 2. .. This makes it possible to secure time for explaining the game in the pullback mode.

[11-8. Processing by sub-control circuit]
Next, various processes executed by the sub CPU 201 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the second embodiment will be described.

Also in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, the sub CPU 201 executes the same processing as the processing in the first embodiment shown in FIGS. 52 to 57. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, in particular, a process is added for the sub-lottery process according to the first embodiment shown in step S243 of FIG. 53.

FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing a sub lottery process by the sub CPU 201.
As shown in FIG. 163, in step S5000, the sub CPU 201 performs a hold information storage process for storing the data indicated by the start winning command in the effect start storage area. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of storing the data indicated by the start winning command in the effect start storage area. In the present embodiment, the effect start storage area is from the effect start storage area (0) to the effect start storage area (4). The analyzed start winning command data is sequentially stored in the effect start storage area (0) to the effect start storage area (4). In the following description, the data stored in the effect start storage area (1) to the effect start storage area (4) will be referred to as hold information.

The data of the start winning command includes the data of the fluctuation pattern, and the sub CPU 201 performs derivation display based on the data of the fluctuation pattern stored in the effect start storage area (0), and performs the effect start storage. Based on the fluctuation pattern data stored in the area (1) to the effect start storage area (4), it is determined whether or not to change the display mode of the hold symbol corresponding to the hold information. Here, the data of the start winning command may not include the data of the fluctuation pattern. In this case, an "indefinite value" indicating that the fluctuation pattern has not been determined is stored.

The sub CPU 201 can perform a so-called "look-ahead effect" by reading the hold information stored in the effect start storage area (1) to the effect start storage area (4). Further, the effect start storage area (0) to the effect start storage area (4) are the first effect start storage areas (0) to the first effect storage area (0) to store the data of the start winning command based on the first start opening prize. From the production start storage area (4) and the second production start storage area (0) to the second production start storage area (4) in which the data of the start winning command based on the second start opening prize is stored. Become. For convenience of the following description, the first production start storage areas (0) to (4) may be referred to as special drawing 1 hold (0) to (4). Similarly, the second production start storage areas (0) to (4) may be referred to as special drawing 2 hold (0) to (4).

Next, the look-ahead rule applied to the second embodiment will be described.
The look-ahead lottery is performed for the main fluctuation pattern and the jackpot determination determined based on the special symbol lottery, and determines the presence / absence of the look-ahead. However, in the second embodiment, the sub CPU 201 has a look-ahead lottery during the big hit and 5G after the big hit when the change of the special figure 2 is suspended in the normal game state and when the special figure 2 is changing in the normal game state. Do not do. Further, when the special figure 2 wins a prize during the look-ahead in the normal game state, the sub CPU 201 clears all the effects when the change of the special figure 2 is started in the next change. In addition, at the start of the big hit game, if there is pre-reading information in the special figure 1 and special figure 2 hold (1) to (4), all of them are deleted. Even when the power is turned on / off, if there is pre-reading information in the special figure 1 and special figure 2 hold (1) to (4), all of them are deleted.

If any of the above-mentioned conditions for not performing the look-ahead lottery are met at the time of winning the special figure 1, the look-ahead lottery is not executed. If the above-mentioned condition for not performing the look-ahead lottery is not met, the sub CPU 201 performs the look-ahead lottery.

When the look-ahead lottery is won, the fact that the look-ahead is reserved as the hold information is stored in the special figure 1 hold corresponding to the special figure 1 prize. If the pre-reading lottery is not won, it is stored in the special figure 1 hold corresponding to the special figure 1 winning that the pre-reading is not performed as the hold information. If the look-ahead lottery is not performed, it is stored that the look-ahead is not reserved.

FIG. 166 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the look-ahead process. In FIG. 166, the special figure 1 hold that memorizes that the look-ahead is reserved is “look-ahead”, and the special figure 1 hold that memorizes that the look-ahead is not performed is “look-ahead”. "No pre-reading" and special figure 1 hold that does not remember to reserve pre-reading are described as "no reservation".

For example, as shown in FIG. 166 (1), the special figure 1 hold (1) and (2) are "no reservation", and in the pre-reading lottery of the special figure 1 hold (3) triggered by the special figure 1 prize. If "with look-ahead" is won, the special figure 1 hold (3) is set to "look-ahead" and the special figure 1 hold (1) and (2) are set to "look-ahead". As a result, it becomes possible to perform an effect having a series of scenarios in the fluctuations of the special figures 1 hold (1) to (3).

FIG. 166 (2) shows a case where there is “look-ahead” or “no look-ahead” in the special figure 1 hold. For example, as shown in FIG. 166 (2-1), the special figure 1 hold (1) is "look-ahead", and the special figure 1 hold (2) and (3) are "no reservation". When "pre-reading" is won in the pre-reading lottery triggered by the prize in Fig. 1, special figure 1 hold (4) is set to "look-ahead" and special figure 1 hold (2) and (3) are set to "look-ahead". To do. Special figure 1 hold (1) does not change with "look-ahead". In this case, it is possible to perform a look-ahead effect in the fluctuation of the special figure 1 hold (1) and then perform a new look-ahead effect in the change of the special figure 1 hold (2) and (3). In other words, when a look-ahead effect occurs during look-ahead, only the effect of the undigested part is used.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 166 (2-2), the special figure 1 hold (1) and (2) are "look-ahead", and the special figure 1 hold (3) is "no reservation". When "pre-reading" is won in the pre-reading lottery triggered by the special figure 1 winning, the special figure 1 hold (4) is set to "look-ahead" and the special figure 1 hold (3) is set to "look-ahead". Special figure 1 hold (1) and (2) do not change with "look-ahead".

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 166 (2-3), when the special figure 1 hold (1) is "look-ahead" and the special figure 1 hold (2) is "no reservation", the special figure 1 prize is won. When "No look-ahead" is won in the look-ahead lottery, the special figure 1 hold (2) and the special figure 1 hold (3) are set to "No look-ahead".

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 166 (2-4), the special figure 1 hold (1) is “no look-ahead”, and the special figure 1 hold (2) and (3) are “no reservation”. , When "pre-reading" is won in the pre-reading lottery triggered by the special figure 1 winning, the special figure 1 hold (4) is set to "look-ahead" and the special figure 1 hold (2) and (3) are set to "look-ahead". ". Special figure 1 hold (1) does not change with "no look-ahead".

In step S5021 (see FIG. 165), which will be described later, the sub CPU 201 is associated with the main fluctuation pattern when the pre-reading process is performed with the special figure 1 winning as an opportunity, if the main fluctuation pattern is stored. The existing information is stored as pending information. When the pre-reading process is performed with the special figure 1 winning as an opportunity, when the main fluctuation pattern is not stored, an "indefinite value" indicating that the fluctuation pattern is not determined is stored as hold information.

Further, when there is an "indefinite value" in the hold of the special figures 1 hold (1) to (4), the sub CPU 201 makes a look-ahead reservation for the change after the change of the "indefinite value". Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 166 (2-5), the special figure 1 hold (1) is an "indefinite value", and the special figure 1 hold (2) and (3) are "no reservation". In a certain state, when "pre-reading" is won in the pre-reading lottery triggered by the special figure 1 winning, the special figure 1 hold (4) is changed to "look-ahead" and the special figure 1 hold (2), (3). Is "look-ahead". Special figure 1 hold (1) is "indefinite value" and does not change.

Further, when the sub CPU 201 stores a specific fluctuation pattern as the hold information in the special figure 1 hold (1) to (4), the sub CPU 201 changes after the change of the special figure 1 in which the specific fluctuation pattern is stored. On the other hand, make a look-ahead reservation. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 166 (2-6), the special figure 1 hold (1) is "no reservation", the special figure 1 hold (2) is "pseudo-gase", and the special figure 1 hold (3). ) Is "No reservation", and if "With look-ahead" is won in the look-ahead lottery triggered by the special figure 1 prize, the special figure 1 hold (4) is set to "look-ahead" and the special figure 1 hold. Let (3) be "look-ahead". Special figure 1 hold (1) does not change with "no reservation".

In addition to winning the lottery that actually performs look-ahead such as "with look-ahead" and "look-ahead" in FIG. 166, winning the look-ahead lottery actually means "no look-ahead" and "undefined value". It may also include winning a lottery that does not. That is, winning the look-ahead lottery may include winning the information related to the look-ahead lottery in some way, but it is also possible to call the look-ahead lottery winning only when the lottery that actually performs the look-ahead is won.

Returning to FIG. 163, when the process of step S5000 is completed, the normal game state effect determination process (step S5001) for determining the effect mode of the normal game state, and the jackpot game state effect determination process for determining the effect mode of the jackpot game state. (Step S5002), the small hit game state effect determining process (step S5003) for determining the effect mode of the small hit game state, and the time saving game state effect determining process (step S5004) for determining the effect mode of the time saving game state are executed. , End this subroutine. The processing of steps S5001 to S5004 will be described later.

[Normal game state production determination process]
FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing the normal game state effect determination process of step S5001 shown in FIG. 163.

As shown in FIG. 164, in step S5011, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not it is in a normal gaming state. When it is determined that the game is in the normal gaming state, the process is moved to step S5012. If it is not determined that the game is in the normal game state, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S5012, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a hold of the second special symbol. If it is determined that there is a hold, the process is moved to step S5014. If it is not determined that there is a hold, the process is moved to step S5013.

In step S5013, the sub CPU 201 performs a normal effect determination process for determining the effect in the normal mode. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S5014, the sub CPU 201 performs the final battle production determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining the final battle effect to be executed during the pullback mode. The details of this process will be described after the time-saving game state effect determination process (step S5004 in FIG. 163), which will be described later, will be described with reference to FIG. 172. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Normal production decision processing]
FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the normal effect determination process of step S5013 shown in FIG. 164.

In step S5021, the sub CPU 201 performs a look-ahead lottery. In this process, the sub CPU 201 pre-reads the main fluctuation pattern, the jackpot information, etc. transmitted from the main control circuit 100, which are stored in the special figure 1 hold, before the start of the fluctuation, and determines various effect contents. Make a lottery. The effect based on the look-ahead lottery may be referred to as a look-ahead effect. As the look-ahead lottery, a look-ahead type lottery for determining the type of effect and a look-ahead rank lottery for determining the strength of the effect content are performed.

The look-ahead type lottery selects one or more from a plurality of production systems classified by type. The look-ahead type includes SB look-ahead, pending change type, change start symbol notice, chance item type, and the like. By determining the production system from among them by the look-ahead type lottery, the scenario of the look-ahead effect is determined.

SB look-ahead is an effect in which a plurality of skulls are displayed and one or several skulls are destroyed each time the identification symbol for production is changed, and finally all the skulls are destroyed. Is to develop. The hold change type changes the display mode of hold. The change start symbol notice changes the display mode of the effect identification symbol at the start of the change. The chance eye type is an effect in which the effect identification symbol is stopped and displayed in the "chance eye" display mode.

[Look-ahead rank lottery]
The look-ahead rank lottery is performed when the look-ahead type lottery is won, and determines the strength of the effect pattern. By this lottery, it becomes possible to control the strength of the notice. For example, as shown in FIG. 166 (1), when the hold information is stored in the special figure 1 hold (3), the look-ahead type lottery is performed, and when the strong level is won in the look-ahead rank lottery, the special figure 1 hold ( Before the fluctuation of 3) starts, the scenario that raises the expectation of the player is announced in the fluctuation of special figure 1 hold (1) and (2), and it is hot from the start of the change of special figure 1 hold (3). It is possible to create a beautiful flow of notice, such as issuing a notice. In addition, when performing a pseudo-continuous production, it is possible to create a flow of a notice such as issuing a hot notice as the process progresses to the pseudo 1 and the pseudo 2. Here, the pseudo-continuous effect is an effect of repeating the variation and temporary stop of the effect identification symbol a predetermined number of times to stop the effect in the reach mode or the final stop mode. Further, in the SB look-ahead, several skulls are destroyed in the fluctuations of the special figure 1 hold (1) and (2), a pseudo-ream is performed in the fluctuation of the special figure 1 hold (3), and the skull is temporarily stopped each time. It becomes possible to create a flow such as destroying.

In the second embodiment, "normal reach" is provided as an effect executed in response to the fluctuation of the first effect identification symbol 5021 or the second effect identification symbol 5022. Normal reach is, for example, a simple effect in which the same number of right and left symbols are stopped and displayed, and finally the center symbol is stopped. Further, it may be provided with a "super reach" that is executed when a fluctuation pattern has a higher expectation of a big hit than the "normal reach". At this time, it is desirable that the "super reach" is a variation pattern in which the variation time of the first effect identification symbol 5021 or the second effect identification symbol 5022 is longer than that of the "normal reach". Here, the degree of expectation is a concept including the degree of expectation for a big hit game state rush, a probabilistic game state rush, and a time-saving game state rush. Specifically, the degree of expectation for a big hit (reliability, etc.) is the degree of expectation (ratio of a big hit) that becomes a big hit when each reach fluctuation pattern is selected. For example, reach with a predetermined reach fluctuation pattern. If the jackpot is 70 times when the fluctuation is performed 100 times, the expectation for the jackpot of the reach fluctuation pattern is 70% (the appearance rate (probability) at which the jackpot appears is 70%). In addition, the degree of expectation for entering the probabilistic gaming state or entering the time-saving gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state (the probability of winning the special symbol lottery is high after the end of the big hit game state, etc. Probability or low probability state) or time saving game state (so-called electric chew support state, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is high probability state, mainly the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is low probability state but high probability state , May be), and various expectations are compounded.

Further, the above-mentioned "strength of the production pattern" and "strength of the notice" are measures indicating the high degree of expectation and the flashiness of the production described above, and when the production pattern is strong, the production with a high degree of expectation is executed. As a result, the production has a strong tendency to improve the player's interest in the game, for example, a more flashy production.

Further, the above-mentioned "hot notice" indicates a notice with high expectation for the above-mentioned various game results, and generally, the interest of the player in the game is improved, and the player tends to be uplifted. ..

Further, the above-mentioned "flow of notice" will be described. The notice is executed by pre-reading the information stored in the special figure 1 hold (1) to the special figure 1 hold (4) or the special figure 2 hold (1) to the special figure 2 hold (4) before the change. The notice effect to be performed and the effect identification symbol fluctuate in order to notify the result of whether or not the jackpot determination value stored in the special figure 1 hold (0) or the special figure 2 hold (0) is a jackpot ( Hereinafter, this variation may be referred to as the variation), and the advance notice effect executed while the variation may be included. Here, even when various notices are combined or executed alone, the execution order and execution timing of a series of effects may be collectively expressed as "flow of notice". From this series of advance notices, the player can infer the degree of expectation when various effects are combined, and thereby provide the playability of inferring the degree of expectation of the effect to be executed during fluctuations and the like.
When the sub CPU 201 finishes the process of step S5021, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S5022.

In step S5022, the sub CPU 201 draws a sub fluctuation pattern lottery at the start of the fluctuation based on the special figure 1 hold (0). In this process, the sub CPU 201 draws a sub-variation pattern lottery at the start of variation of the effect identification symbol. By this sub-variation pattern lottery, a sub-variation pattern that defines an effect pattern developed in the display device 16 or the like is determined corresponding to the main variation pattern. When pre-reading is in progress, a sub-variation pattern is set using a table according to the pre-reading rank lottery result.

Here, the table used to determine the main fluctuation pattern in the second embodiment will be described.
FIG. 167 is an example of a table referred to for determining the main variation pattern used in the case of a jackpot in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 167, a random number range is assigned to a plurality of fluctuation patterns by dividing the special figure 1 lottery into a 10-round jackpot and a special figure 1 lottery into a 6-round jackpot. In the example of FIG. 167, [fixed value] per pseudo 3 is the fluctuation pattern most easily selected.

Further, according to the table shown in FIG. 167, for example, there are two versions of the fluctuation pattern per legend stage, [indefinite jackpot B] per legend stage and [fixed value] per legend stage. .. For [Indefinite jackpot B] per legend stage, the selection ratio for 10R special figure 1 jackpot is different from the selection ratio for 6R special figure 1 jackpot, and for [fixed value] per legend stage, the selection ratio for 10R special figure 1 jackpot is different. And 6R special figure 1 jackpot have the same selection ratio.

As described above, in the second embodiment, in the table referred to for determining the main fluctuation pattern, two versions, a version having the same ratio and an indefinite version, are prepared for one fluctuation pattern. There is something that is.

As a result, in the main control circuit 100, when the hit of [indefinite big hit B] is selected as the main fluctuation pattern, the main fluctuation pattern cannot be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, but the hit of [fixed value] is selected. In this case, the main fluctuation pattern can be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

That is, for example, if only [indefinite jackpot B] is provided and the probability that the legend stage hit is executed is changed according to the symbol of the jackpot mode, the look-ahead cannot be performed at all when the legend stage hit. Here, in the second embodiment, the ratio of [fixed value] is made large, and the execution ratio (random number ratio) per legend stage according to the jackpot symbol is changed by [indefinite jackpot B] to make the legend. Even if it is per stage, if [Fixed value] is selected, it is controlled so that the look-ahead effect can be executed. On the other hand, the execution rate (ratio of random numbers) of [Indefinite jackpot B] is reduced as much as possible. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the probability that the indefinite jackpot B is selected and the look-ahead cannot be performed. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the effect of controlling the look-ahead effect as a variation of the effect while maintaining the balance of the effect according to the design (or type) of the jackpot mode.

In addition, when the fluctuation pattern of [indefinite jackpot B] is selected as the main fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern of [fixed value] may be controlled to be transmitted.

When the sub CPU 201 develops the main fluctuation pattern as a sub fluctuation pattern, the sub CPU 201 can be roughly framed according to the information from the main control circuit 100, for example, an effect for indefinite jackpot A, an effect for indefinite jackpot B, or an effect for fixed values. In the case of a fixed value, it is possible to select a look-ahead effect according to various jackpots, but in the case of an indefinite jackpot, a process may be performed in which the look-ahead effect is not executed.

As the main fluctuation pattern, for example, when a jackpot of the type [indefinite jackpot A] comes, the result is obtained by executing any one of the effects that can be selected by the indefinite jackpot A in the [fixed value]. Therefore, it may be controlled so that the same effect as when the [fixed value] is transmitted can be executed for the jackpot of the type of [indefinite jackpot A].
When the process of step S5022 is completed, the process is transferred to step S5023.

In the second embodiment, when the time saving game state ends and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery becomes a low probability state, the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit (shift to the small hit game state). When the lottery result is (or the lottery result), the lottery result is small before the second special symbol change based on the lottery result (small hit winning) starts (or before the second special symbol change ends). It may be possible to transmit (transmit as look-ahead information) as a command from the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 that it is a hit. Similarly, in the case where the lottery result of the first special symbol is configured so that a small hit can be won, the lottery result is also when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a small hit. From the main control circuit 100, the lottery result is a small hit before the first special symbol change based on (winning of a small hit) starts (or before the first special symbol change ends). It may be possible to send it as a command to the sub CPU 201.

By controlling in this way, it is possible to perform an effect related to the small hit game state as a look-ahead effect. In the second embodiment, it is desirable that the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second start port 440 to The variation of the second special symbol or the variation of the first special symbol may be started in the order in which the game balls are won in the first starting port 420.

Further, when the number of time reductions given when the condition device is activated and the game shifts to the big hit game state is constant (for example, even if the big hit is obtained by the first special symbol lottery, the big hit is obtained by the second special symbol lottery. However, when the number of time reductions is always "100 times"), the information of the symbol (small hit symbol) corresponding to the small hit won during the time reduction game state is displayed in the small hit game state based on the small hit. A command is sent from the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 before the start (or before the change of the first special symbol or the change of the second special symbol from which the small hit symbol is to be derived is started). It may be possible to send as. However, when the limiter is activated (when the limiter count is reached), the jackpot gaming state ends (even if a jackpot gaming state occurs in which 100 time-saving gaming states are granted when the limiter is not activated). There is no transition to the time-saving game state later. Therefore, when the limiter is operated, the information of the symbol (small hit symbol) corresponding to the winning small hit during the time saving game state cannot be transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201. It may be controlled.

The information transmitted as a command may be information on a small hit symbol or information on a small hit game state. The information on the small hit symbol or the information on the small hit game state may be, for example, a small hit symbol displayed by an LED or the like, or is related to a special electric accessory (opening / closing of an attacker) during the small hit game state. Information or the like indicating that the player is in the small hit game state or information that can determine the type of the small hit game state may be used.

Even when a game in which any one of (i) to (vii) described above is adopted as a game condition or a game in which (i) to (vii) are combined is performed, the information of the small hit symbol is used. Alternatively, it may be possible to transmit the information on the small hit game state from the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 as pre-reading information.

In step S5023, the sub CPU 201 performs a lottery to determine the background. In this process, the sub CPU 201 is determined by lottery according to a preset rule from a plurality of types of backgrounds. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S5024.

In step S5024, the sub CPU 201 performs a lottery for determining whether or not to make the SP character appear, and a lottery for determining the SP character to be made to appear. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S5025.

In step S5025, the sub CPU 201 performs a sub fluctuation pattern lottery. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a sub fluctuation pattern lottery using the table corresponding to the current background at the start of the fluctuation based on the information stored in the special figure 1 hold (0). However, in the case of pre-reading, a sub-variation pattern lottery according to the pre-reading rank lottery result is performed for the fluctuation satisfying a predetermined condition (for example, the fluctuation time is 2.5 seconds to 12 seconds or less). Here, if a background change is performed in which the backgrounds of the outline change, the effect determined by the sub-variation pattern lottery may not be performed. For example, in the second embodiment, there is a division stage in which an identification symbol for effect is displayed in each of a plurality of areas. When the background is changed in this divided stage, it may not be possible to apply the effect to the stage that displays the effect identification symbol in one area. Therefore, when the background is changed in the division stage, the sub CPU 201 again performs the sub fluctuation pattern lottery corresponding to the division stage (step S5028). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S5026.

In step S5026, the sub CPU 201 draws a lottery to determine the execution of the effect related to the pre-reading fluctuation. Specifically, a lottery is conducted to determine the hold change method, the hold change gadget (the effect that suggests the change of the hold color and does not change it), and the like. As a hold change method, for example, "spear" is displayed as a hold symbol at the stage of special figure 1 hold (4), and "spear" is displayed before shifting to special figure 1 hold (0). There is a method of linking to the subsequent production, such as changing the display mode of the reserved design by sticking a "spear" in the reserved design, or giving a notice that it will develop into a reach production that confronts using the "spear". is there. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S5027.

In step S5027, the sub CPU 201 draws a lottery for the effect identification symbol (decorative symbol). Specifically, a lottery is performed to determine the final stop symbol of the effect identification symbol, the re-lottery symbol, the symbols before and after the slip in the slip effect, the chance eye system symbol, the pseudo-continuous pattern, and the like. When this process is completed, the process is performed in step S5029.

In step S5029, the sub CPU 201 sets an index (level) for controlling the strength of the advance notice of the entire fluctuation. For example, Lv1 (pseudo 1) uses less than reach & pseudo 2, Lv2 (pseudo 2) uses more than reach & pseudo 2, Lv3 (pseudo 2) uses more than reach & pseudo 2, and Lv4 (pseudo 3) uses. Used in hot SP and above & Pseudo 3. When this process is completed, the process is performed in step S5030.

In step S5030, the sub CPU 201 performs a lottery according to the index set in step S5029, and determines the scenario of the SB effect. When this process is completed, the process is performed in step S5031.

In step S5031, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not to execute the hold change according to the index set in step S5029, and also determines the type of hold change (design of hold symbol), the scenario of hold change, and the hold color. A lottery will be held to determine the change timing. The table for determining the type, scenario, change timing, etc. of the pending change is selected based on the index set in step S5029 and the result of the SB effect lottery. When this process is completed, the process is performed in step S5032.

In step S5032, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not to execute the main notice according to the level set in step S5029, and draws a lottery for determining the type of the main notice, the scenario, and the like. The main notice corresponds to, for example, an hourglass notice, a character step-up notice, and the like. The hourglass notice is a so-called timer notice, and when all the sand of the hourglass has fallen, the effect develops. When the level set in step S5029 is a strong level, the display mode of the hourglass may be changed from normal to "gold" or the amount of sand may be reduced to give a message. Further, the timing at which the sand of the hourglass starts to fall may be changed according to the flow of the notice. Furthermore, it may be combined with an hourglass notice and a pseudo-continuous production. The bonus step-up notice is a notice in which the mode of the bonus is changed stepwise according to the number of pending fluctuations prior to the suspension of the fluctuations won in the look-ahead lottery. The table for determining the type, scenario, etc. of the main notice is selected based on the index set in step S5029 and the lottery result regarding the pending change in step S5031.
In this way, in the second embodiment, the SB lottery is performed, the scenario of the SB production is determined, and then the lottery regarding the pending change and the main notice is performed, in order of importance to low. The production will be decided. When this process is completed, the process is performed in step S5033.

In step S5033, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not to execute the hold change according to the level set in step S5029, and also determines the type of hold change (design of hold symbol), the scenario of hold change, and the hold color. A lottery will be held to determine the change timing. When this process is completed, the process is performed in step S5034.
In step S5034, the sub CPU 201 performs a lottery for determining whether or not to execute the special variation. When this process is completed, the process is performed in step S5035.

In step S5035, the sub CPU 201 performs a lottery for determining various effects to be executed in the normal reach. When this process is completed, the process is performed in step S5036.

In step S5036, the sub CPU 201 performs a lottery for determining various effects to be executed in the SP reach (super reach). When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Big hit game state production determination process]
FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the jackpot game state effect determination process of step S5002 shown in FIG. 163.

As shown in FIG. 168, in step S5051, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not it is in the jackpot gaming state. When it is determined that the game is in the big hit game state, the process is moved to step S5052. If it is not determined that the game is in the jackpot game state, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S5052, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting the jackpot game start effect. For example, control is performed so that the display device 16 displays an image showing the game method in the big hit game state such as "Please hit right". When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S5053.

In step S5053, the sub CPU 201 performs an in-round effect setting process for setting an effect in each round game. This process will be described later. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S5054.

In step S5054, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting the jackpot game end effect. For example, the display device 16 is controlled to suggest a transition to a time-saving game state of 100 times of time reduction such as "super death load rush!" When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Round production setting process]
FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing the effect setting process during the round of step S5053 shown in FIG. 168.

In step S5151, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of limiters has been reached. When it is determined that the number of limiters has been reached, the process proceeds to step S5152. If it is not determined that the limiter number has been reached, the process is moved to step S5155.

In step S5152, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the currently executed jackpot gaming state is due to the special figure 2 jackpot. If it is determined that the special figure 2 is a big hit, the process is moved to step S5154. If it is not determined that the special figure 2 is a big hit, the process is moved to step S5153.

In step S5153, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the small hit is a big hit due to a V winning. If it is determined that the jackpot is due to the V prize, the process is moved to step S5154. If it is not determined that the jackpot is due to the V prize, the process is moved to step S5155.

In step S5154, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting an effect suggesting that the time-saving gaming state continues. In this process, the sub CPU 201 is a jackpot when the number of limiters is reached by the jackpot currently being executed, and when there is a jackpot that shifts to a shorter time within the hold of the special figure 2, the time saving continuation suggestion effect is produced. Set. Here, when the limiter number is reached, the time-saving game state ends at the same time as the jackpot game state ends, and then the fluctuation that becomes the jackpot that shifts to the time saving in the hold stops and the jackpot game state (or the small hit game state) ), It is in the normal game state and not in the time-saving game state. Therefore, strictly speaking, the time-saving continuation suggestion effect is an effect that suggests re-entry into the time-saving game state. However, from the player's point of view, it can be said that the period of the normal gaming state is short, which substantially suggests the continuation of the time reduction. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S5155.

In step S5155, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting an effect to be executed during the round. That is, in the second embodiment, in the special figure 2 jackpot, an effect suggesting the remaining number of limiters is executed in the first round. In the case of a V big hit by winning a V from the special figure 2 small hit, the small hit game state is counted in the first round, so an effect suggesting the remaining number of limiters is executed in the second round. In the case of the special figure 1 big hit, the suggestion of the remaining number of limiters is not executed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S5156.

In step S5156, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not it is the final round. If it is determined that it is the final round, the process is moved to step S5157. If it is not determined that it is the final round, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S5157, the sub CPU 201 selects to the player a mode of effect to be executed during the period of digesting the reserved special figure 2 variation after the end of the time saving game state. In the second embodiment, the player is allowed to select either the first effect mode (single combat mode) in which the character is determined by automatic lottery or the second effect mode (selection mode each time) in which the player can select the character. I do. That is, in the final round, the effect mode executed in the pullback mode is determined. If there is no hold of Special Figure 2 at the start of the final round, the above-mentioned effect mode is not selected. For example, in the case of a big hit in which one time reduction is given by the special figure 1 lottery, the above-mentioned effect mode is not selected. However, in this case, since there is a high possibility that the hold of the special figure 2 will occur before the time saving once is exhausted, there is a high possibility that the pullback mode will be entered after the time saving game state ends. Therefore, in the case of a big hit in which one time reduction is given, the first production mode (single combat mode) is selected without selecting the production mode described above. Then, as a special effect for one time reduction in the time reduction game state, an effect of notifying the character determined by the automatic lottery is performed. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Small hit game state production determination process]
FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing a small hit game state effect determination process in step S5003 shown in FIG. 163.
As shown in FIG. 170, in step S5061, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not it is in the small hit game state. When it is determined that the game is in the small hit game state, the process is moved to step S5062. If it is not determined that the game is in a small hit game state, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S5062, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting the small hit game start effect. In the second embodiment, the display device 16 is controlled to display a character image prompting the player to win a prize (V prize) in the second large winning opening 540b, such as "Aim for V". When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S5063.

In step S5063, the sub CPU 201 performs the V winning effect setting process. For example, the sub CPU 201 controls the display device 16 to display a large "V" when a V prize is won. This process will be described later. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S5064.

In step S5064, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting the small hit game end effect. For example, when a V prize is won, the display device 16 for prompting the winning of the first large winning opening 540a is controlled to display the prize. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[V prize production setting process]
FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing the V winning effect setting process of step S5063 shown in FIG. 170.
As shown in FIG. 171, in step S5911, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not a V prize has been won. When it is determined that the V prize has been won, the process is moved to step S5192. If it is not determined that the V prize has been won, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S5192, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the limiter has been reached by winning a V prize. When it is determined that the limiter has been reached, the process is moved to step S5193. If it is not determined that the limiter has been reached, the process proceeds to step S5195.

In step S5913, the sub CPU 201 performs pre-reading and performs a process of determining whether or not there is a big hit in the special figure 2 hold. When it is determined that there is a big hit in the special figure 2 hold, the process is moved to step S5194. If it is not determined that there is a big hit in the special figure 2 hold, the process is moved to step S5195.

In step S5194, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting an effect of notifying an increase in the number of limiters. It should be noted that the effect here may include an effect that suggests re-entry into the time-saving game state, as in step S5154 shown in FIG. 169. Further, not only the number of limiters is increased, but also the effect may be changed / updated, or the effect may be reset. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S5195.

In step S5195, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting an effect of notifying the V winning. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Time saving game state production determination process]
FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing a time-saving game state effect determination process in step S5004 shown in FIG. 163.

As shown in FIG. 172, in step S5071, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the game is in a time-saving game state. When it is determined that the game is in a time-saving game state, the process is shifted to step S5072. If it is not determined that the game is in a time-saving game state, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S5072, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a hold of the second special symbol. If it is determined that there is a hold, the process is moved to step S5073. If it is not determined that there is a hold, this subroutine is terminated.

It should be noted that the second special symbol is held in step S5072 not only when there is hold information in any of the special figure 2 hold (1) to the special figure 2 hold (4), but also when the special figure 2 hold (0). ) ~ The special figure 2 hold (0) stores the jackpot random number value and the main fluctuation pattern when the start prize is won in the second starting port 440 without the hold information in the special figure 2 hold (4). It may include a situation in which a variable display of the second special symbol is performed.

Therefore, when the determination in step S5072 is YES, there is a start winning of the second starting port 440 related to the second special symbol, and the variation of the second special symbol is started or the variation of the second special symbol is started. It may be executed when is started, and a command at the time of winning from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200, a hold addition command, a fluctuation start command, a hold subtraction command, etc. Each process may be performed when it is transmitted or in a situation where such a command is transmitted.

In step S5073, the sub CPU 201 performs a sub-variation pattern lottery when the hold information is stored in the special figure 2 hold. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a lottery to develop the main fluctuation pattern as a sub fluctuation pattern. Specifically, a lottery is performed to determine the effect to be executed based on the main fluctuation pattern, and the outline of the sub fluctuation pattern is determined. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S5074.

In step S5074, the sub CPU 201 performs a look-ahead large frame lottery when the hold information is stored in the special figure 2 hold. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a lottery to determine a general scenario of what to look ahead based on the result of the sub fluctuation pattern lottery. In the second embodiment, it is determined whether or not to give a chance eye notice or a background change notice. This lottery is performed for each hold, and the table to be used is divided for each setting 1 to 6. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S5075.

In step S5075, the sub CPU 201 performs a look-ahead background change notice lottery. In this process, when the background change notice is selected in the look-ahead large frame lottery in step S5074, the sub CPU 201 determines the background change notice scenario by lottery based on the result of the sub-variation pattern lottery. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S5076.

In step S5076, the sub CPU 201 performs a look-ahead chance notice lottery. In this process, when the look-ahead chance eye notice lottery is selected in the look-ahead large frame lottery in step S5074, the sub CPU 201 determines the chance eye and reach eye notice scenarios by lottery based on the result of the sub-variable pattern lottery. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S5077.

In step S5077, the sub CPU 201 performs a sub-variation pattern lottery when the effect identification symbol changes based on the information stored in the special figure 2 hold (0). In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a lottery to develop the main variation (variation of the identification symbol in the second special symbol display unit 74) into the sub variation (variation of the identification symbol by the display device 16). Specifically, a lottery is conducted to determine the outline of the notice and the production based on the lottery result of the main fluctuation pattern, and the sub fluctuation pattern is determined. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S5078.

In step S5078, the sub CPU 201 draws a premium notice when the premium notice is determined in the sub fluctuation pattern lottery in step S5077. When this process is completed, the process is performed in step S5079.

In step S5079, the sub CPU 201 performs a background change notice lottery. The background change notice lottery is performed when the background change notice is determined in the sub-variation pattern lottery in step S5077 and the background change flag is set, and the background change notice determined in the background change notice lottery is executed. When this process is completed, the process is performed in step S5080.

In step S5080, the sub CPU 201 performs a chance eye notice lottery. The chance eye notice lottery is performed when the chance eye notice is decided in the sub-variation pattern lottery in step S5077.

Here, according to the second embodiment, the table used for the chance eye notice lottery is divided by the result of the background change notice, the value of the tempai counter, and the result of the previous chance eye notice. The tempai counter counts the number of appearances of chance eyes having a specific common mode, for example, chance eyes having the same two heads and having an odd number of modes (head odd number tempai) such as "112" and "335". The sub CPU 201 switches the table used for the chance eye notice lottery according to the count number of the tempai counter. Specifically, the table used for the chance eye notice lottery is a random number, a weak chance (order, 3rd odd number), multiple types of odd-numbered head tempai, and a strong chance (2nd and 3rd are the same number and odd number). , 7 entanglements, random numbers of a predetermined width are assigned to the reach. According to this embodiment, the same table is used when the count number of the tempai counter is 0 to +2, and another table is used when the count number of the tempai counter is +3. The table used when the count number of the tempai counter is +3 is a strong chance because the range of random numbers assigned to multiple types of odd-numbered tempais is smaller than the table used up to the count number of the tempai counter +2. The range of random numbers assigned to (the second and third are the same number and odd number) is set large. In other words, it is difficult to select odd-numbered tenpai, and it is easy to select strong chances (the second and third are the same number and odd number). It should be noted that the tempai counter is cleared to 0 when the overall "random eyes" and "chance eyes" are determined as the outcomes. When this process is completed, the process is performed in step S5081.

In step S5081, a lottery is performed for other notices determined in the sub-variation pattern lottery of step S5077, and a process of determining the notice is performed. When this process is completed, the process is performed in step S5082.

In step S5082, the sub CPU 201 performs a setting suggestion lottery. The setting suggestion lottery determines the setting suggestion pattern based on the result of the chance eye notice lottery in step S5080. In the second embodiment, since the setting suggestion pattern is determined based on the result of the chance eye notice lottery, the setting suggestion effect is generated based on the result of the previous change chance eye. When this process is completed, the process is performed in step S5083.

In step S5083, the sub CPU 201 performs a symbol lottery. The symbol lottery determines the arrangement of the effect identification symbols to be displayed on the display device 16. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a final symbol lottery, a temporary stop symbol lottery in the pseudo-continuous production, and a reach eye lottery to determine the symbol. Further, the sub CPU 201 performs pre-reading of the special figure 2 hold after the end of the big hit game state when the limiter is reached, and when the special figure 2 big hit or the special figure 2 small hit is won, a specific symbol (for example, VVV) ) Is displayed. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Final battle production decision processing]
FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing the final battle production determination process of step S5014 shown in FIG. 164.

As shown in FIG. 173, in step S5091, the sub CPU 201 performs a sub fluctuation pattern lottery. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a lottery to develop the main fluctuation pattern as a sub fluctuation pattern. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S5094.

In step S5094, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining the mode of the final battle effect selected by the player based on the operation of the operation button group 66 by the player. The mode of the final battle production is the first production mode (one-on-one combat mode) in which the sub CPU 201 confronts the character determined by lottery, and the character that becomes the ally can be changed for each change. It has two production modes (selection mode each time). The player can select any mode based on the operation of the operation button group 66. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the single combat mode is selected, the process shifts to step S5095, and when it does not determine that the single combat mode is selected (when the selection mode is selected each time), the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S5096. ..

In step S5095, the sub CPU 201 performs a character lottery and performs a process of setting the character selected by the lottery as an opponent. When this process is completed, the process proceeds to step S5097.

In step S5096, the sub CPU 201 displays the character on the display device 16 on the screen for selecting the character, and performs a process of setting the character selected by the operation of the operation button group 66 by the player as a ally character. If the player does not operate the operation button group 66, the character designated as the selection target on the initial selection screen of the display device 16 is set as the ally character. When this process is completed, the process proceeds to step S5097.

In step S5097, the sub CPU 201 performs a lottery for determining various effects to be executed in the SP reach (super reach). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S5098.

In step S5098, the sub CPU 201 performs a tempai fanning lottery. In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines by lottery whether or not the effect identification symbol (decorative symbol) is expected to have reach, reach eyes, and pseudo-continuous occurrence. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S5099.

In step S5099, the sub CPU 201 performs a countdown notice lottery. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to execute the countdown notice for notifying that the reach occurrence is confirmed by counting down to 0. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S5100.

In step S5100, the sub CPU 201 draws a lottery to determine the outline of the main notice. When this process is completed, the process is performed in step S5101.

In step S5101, the sub CPU 201 draws a lottery to determine the details of the main notice. When this process is completed, the process is performed in step S5103.

In step S5103, the sub CPU 201 performs a lottery for determining the outline of the fluctuation start notice. When this process is completed, the process is performed in step S5104.

In step S5104, the sub CPU 201 performs a lottery for determining the sub notice. As a sub-notice, for example, post-loss production and reach look-ahead are executed. When this process is completed, the process is performed in step S5105.

In step S5105, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining a symbol. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a final symbol lottery, a temporary stop symbol lottery in the pseudo-continuous production, and a reach eye lottery to determine the symbol. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Explanation of production]
Next, various effects displayed on the display device 16 will be described.

[Direction from the first hit to the end of the pullback mode]
In most cases, the player starts the game from the normal game state. In the normal game state, as described above, the game is advanced while hitting left with the aim of winning a prize in the first starting port 420. When the first starting port 420 is won, as shown in FIG. 174 (a), the first effect identification symbol 5021 starts to change, and the special figure 1 reserved symbol 5011 is displayed. The special figure 1 reserved symbol 5011 can display five of the special figure 1 reserved (0) to the special figure 1 reserved (4), and in particular, the special figure 1 reserved symbol 5011 of the special figure 1 reserved (0) varies. It corresponds to the identification symbol 5021 for the first effect in the inside, and at the same time when the changing identification symbol 5021 for the first effect stops. As shown in FIG. 174 (b), the special figure 1 reserved symbol 5011 is erased. At this time, if the special figure 1 reserved symbol 5011 of the special figure 1 hold (1) is displayed, the special figure 1 reserved symbol 5011 is placed at the display position of the special figure 1 reserved symbol 5011 of the special figure 1 hold (0). shift.

Then, when the display mode of the first effect identification symbol 5021 is a reach mode as shown in FIG. 174 (c) and a jackpot mode in which the same number of numbers are lined up as shown in FIG. 174 (d). As shown in FIG. 174 (e), the “big hit” notification image is displayed, the game shifts to the big hit game state, and the round game is started as shown in FIG. 174 (f). Then, as shown in FIG. 174 (g), there is an explanation about the game after the big hit game state after the end of the round game, and the game shifts to the time saving game state after the end of the big hit game state. When the time-saving game state starts, as shown in FIG. 174 (h), an image called "right-handed" is displayed to encourage the player to right-handed. In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 174 (d), when even numbers are aligned, a big hit is made once in a short time. Therefore, the second starting port 440 is won and the identification symbol 5022 for the second production is won. The time-saving game state ends when the number fluctuates and stops. Here, as for the first fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2, since the pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time is determined by lottery, as shown in FIGS. 175 (a) and 175 (b), by the time the time saving once is completed. , It is easily possible to make the second starting port 440 win four prizes and display the reserved symbols 5012 of the special figures 2 reserved (1) to (4). In the example shown in FIG. 174, since the special figure 1 hold remains at the end of the big hit game state, the change of the special figure 1 hold is executed, but even if the change of the special figure 1 hold is stopped, the time saving game state Does not end. For this reason, it becomes possible to lengthen the fluctuation of the special figure 1 hold, the stop time, and the time of the time-saving game state, and display the hold symbols 5012 of the special figure 2 hold (1) to (4). Is more certainly possible.

The period until the four special figures 2 hold shown in FIG. 175 (b) are exhausted is the period of "death load" shown in FIG. 174 (g), and the period of this "death load" is the period of the pullback mode described above. Correspond. In "Death Road", an image production of the final battle in which the characters confront each other is performed, and as shown in FIG. 175 (c), when the enemy character is defeated, the second production identification symbol 5022 is a "big hit" or "big hit". It becomes a stop display mode of "small hit". If a big hit is won, the game shifts to the big hit game state, and if a small hit is won, the game shifts to the small hit game state. When the small hit game state starts, as shown in FIG. 175 (e), a display prompting the player to win the second large winning opening 540b, such as "Aim for V!", Is displayed. Then, when the game ball that has passed through the second big winning opening 540b passes through the V winning opening 545, “V” is displayed as shown in FIG. 175 (f), and the big hit game state is started.

When the jackpot game state starts when the game ball passes through the V winning opening 545, the number of limiters is displayed in the second round. In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 175 (g), one of the four "GOODBONUS" icons displayed is deleted, and three "GOODBONUS" icons are displayed. As a result, the number of limiters is reduced by one due to the jackpot game, and the number of limiters is reduced to three. In other words, the number of jackpots that shift to the jackpot game state in the time-saving game state is three more, and the third jackpot. If this happens, the player is notified that the game state will shift to the normal game state after the jackpot game state ends. In addition, when the game shifts to the big hit game state by winning the special figure 2 lottery, the number of limiters is displayed in the first round.

Then, after the final round is completed, as shown in FIG. 175 (h), the character image "Super Death Road rush!" Is displayed, and the time-saving game state and the pullback mode after the time-saving game state is completed are given 100 times. After notifying the player that the game can be performed, as shown in FIG. 176 (a), the time-saving game state in which the time-saving 100 times is given is started. It should be noted that the background image during the time-saving game state may indicate the number of remaining jackpots until the limit number of times is reached.

Further, as shown in FIG. 176 (b), when a small hit is won in the time-saving game state, as shown in FIGS. 176 (c) to 176 (f), a display prompting a prize in the second large winning opening 540b. When the game ball passes through the V winning opening 545, "V" is displayed, one of the "GOODBONUS" icons is deleted in the second round, and two "GOODBONUS" icons are displayed. After that, as shown in FIGS. 176 (f) to 177 (g), the number of limiters decreases each time the game shifts to the big hit game state by winning a big hit or winning a V from a small hit in the time-saving game state.

Then, as shown in FIG. 177 (g), the player is notified that the number of limiters has been reached by eliminating the "GOODBONUS" icon during the round game. When the number of limiters is reached, as shown in FIG. 177 (h), in the final round, the game selection screen in the pullback mode is displayed, and the player is made to operate the operation button group 66 to select the game. In the second embodiment, a one-on-one combat mode in which the game machine fights against an enemy character determined by lottery, and a selection mode in which a ally character can be changed for each change are prepared. The player selects a desired mode from these two modes during the effective time. If the valid time has passed without the player operating the operation button group 66, the one-on-one combat mode is selected. After the round game is completed, as shown in FIG. 178 (a), when the game shifts to the jackpot game state, the display device 16 displays an image notifying the player that the player is re-entered into the time-saving game state.

When the normal gaming state is entered, as shown in FIG. 178 (b), an image prompting the player to strike left is displayed on the display device 16. Then, as shown in FIGS. 178 (c) to 178 (f), a small hit is won due to the fluctuation of the special figure 2 hold, and "Aim for V!" Is displayed at the opening of the small hit game state, and at the same time, "GOODBONUS x 4" is displayed. The display of "GOODBONUS x 4" suggests that the number of limiters has been reset. Then, when a V prize is won in the small hit game state, "V" is displayed. Further, in the next round, as shown in FIG. 179 (a), four "GOODBONUS" icons are displayed side by side, and then one "GOODBONUS" is deleted. Then, in the next round, as shown in FIG. 179 (b), after the round game is completed, "Super Death Road rush!" Is displayed to notify that the time reduction of 100 times has been granted, and then in FIG. 179 (c). As shown, it shifts to the time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 179 (d), if the jackpot gaming state is not entered within the time reduction of 100 times, the normal gaming state is entered. Then, in the first change of the reserved special figure 2, the game explanation is given as shown in FIG. 179 (e). After that, as shown in FIGS. 179 (f) to 179 (g), when the jackpot game state is not shifted based on the reserved fluctuation of the special figure 2, as shown in FIG. 179 (h). "End of death load" is displayed. Here, the death load refers to a period from the time-saving game state to the digestion of all the remaining special figure 2 hold in the normal game state shifted after the time-saving game state ends. As described above, in the second embodiment, since there is no small hit in the special figure 1 and there is a small hit in the special figure 2, a period advantageous for the player who is likely to win the small hit substantially is provided. Can be provided. As shown in FIG. 180, even when the limiter number is reached and the jackpot game state shifts to the normal game state, and the jackpot game state does not shift based on the remaining fluctuation of the special figure 2 hold. , As shown in FIG. 180 (g), "death load end" is displayed, and a period advantageous for the player who is likely to win a small hit substantially ends. Then, as shown in FIG. 180 (h), the first effect identification symbol 5021 is changed and stopped.
In the second embodiment, since there is no small hit in the special figure 1 lottery and there is a small hit in the special figure 2 lottery, there is a high possibility that the player will win the small hit, which is called death road. A favorable period can be provided. Here, in the second embodiment, since there are settings 1 to 6, the actual small hit probability may change as the big hit probability changes according to the setting. In this case, it may be possible to increase the substantial jackpot probability during death load or increase the jackpot probability via the small hit when the jackpot probability is set lower than when the setting is high.

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 177 (h), the effect in the final battle (the effect mode when the normal game state and the special figure 2 are held) is selected during the round. 2 The embodiment is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 201 (a), when the number of limiters is reached, and as shown in FIGS. 201 (b) and 201 (c), after the jackpot game state ends, the game shifts to the normal game state. When there is a hold, as shown in FIG. 201 (d), the effect mode of the final battle may be selected at the first change in the change due to the special figure 2 hold. Then, as shown in FIG. 201 (e), the first variation is completed, and as shown in FIGS. 201 (f) and 201 (g), after the next special FIG. 2 variation, the effect mode selected in the first variation is applied. The production is executed. If the special figure 2 hold does not shift to the big hit game state, as shown in FIG. 201 (h), "death load end" is displayed as shown in FIG. 179 (h), which is advantageous for the player. Period ends.

[Chance notice production]
When the process of step S5076 of FIG. 172 or the lottery in step S5080 is won, the chance eye notice effect is performed.
FIG. 181 shows an example of the chance eye notice. As shown in FIG. 181 (a), the second effect identification symbol 5022 fluctuates, and as shown in FIG. 181 (b), the left symbol and the right symbol are shown. Is stopped and the central symbol is fluctuating, as shown in FIG. 181 (c), the second effect identification symbol 5022 is swung in the front-rear direction, and as shown in FIG. 181 (d). The central symbol is stopped and the reach is displayed.

[Setting suggestion effect]
When the lottery in the process of step S5082 of FIG. 172 is won, the setting suggestion effect is performed.

182 and 183 show an example of the setting suggestion effect, and the case where the setting is "3" will be described as an example.
As shown in FIGS. 182 (a) to 182 (f), the chance eye notice is given, and as shown in FIG. 182 (f), the middle symbol and the right symbol have the same number and an odd number. When stopped by the eye, as shown in FIG. 183 (a), a chance eye notice is given in the next fluctuation, and as shown in FIG. 183 (b), the central symbol displaying the fluctuation at high speed is "3". At any point, the slow fluctuation display is performed, and as shown in FIGS. 183 (c) and 183 (d), the stop display is performed at the chance. In this way, the setting of the game machine is suggested in the next variation in which the middle symbol and the right symbol have the same number and an odd number.

By the way, in the examples shown in FIGS. 182 and 183, the chance eyes are consecutive four times. Here, as shown in FIGS. 182 (b) and 182 (c), the first chance and the second chance are the same chance, and the left symbol and the middle symbol are the same number and odd numbers. It is stopped at a specific roll (for example, "115" (so-called odd-numbered tempai)). At this time, the value of the tempai counter is "1" at the first chance, and the value of the tempai counter is "2" at the second chance. If the result of "155" shown in FIG. 182 (f) is "115", the value of the tempai counter used in the process of step S5080 becomes "3", and the next chance number is determined. When doing so, another table is used, which makes it easier to get a roll that is not a specific roll (eg, "115"). Further, when a hit-notifying result, reach, or the like appears, the tempai counter may be controlled to be cleared. Further, the reach to be counted by the tempai counter is not limited to the continuation of numerical symbols, and symbols and marks may be used. Furthermore, there may be elements such as color, sound, and light.

[Freeze production]
The freeze effect executed during the round game will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 and 185. When a V prize is won during the small hit game state, the small hit game state is treated as the first round.

FIG. 184 shows the case where the limiter number is reached by shifting from the small hit winning to the big hit gaming state by V winning, while any of the four pending fluctuations of Special Figure 2 is won the big hit. Is shown as a display example of. As shown in FIG. 184 (a), the variation of the special figure 2 is performed, the stop is performed in the small hit mode as shown in FIG. 184 (b), and the V prize is urged as shown in FIG. 184 (c). It is assumed that the player hits right according to the display and wins a V prize. At this time, if the condition that the limiter number is reached by the big hit by the V prize and the condition that one of the four reserved special figure 2 lottery wins the big hit instead of the small hit are satisfied. When the V prize is won, the screen goes black (freezes) as shown in FIG. 184 (d), and as shown in FIG. 184 (e), "GOODBONUS" is displayed in large size, and there is a special figure 2 jackpot in the hold. Suggest to do. Then, as shown in FIG. 184 (f), an image suggesting that the limit number of times has been increased to 4 is displayed. In addition, after the jackpot game state is completed, when the jackpot game state is changed to the jackpot game state by the jackpot hold in the special figure 2 hold, an image suggesting that the limit number of times is reduced by 1 is displayed in the second round. .. This makes it possible to give the player the impression that good luck is concentrated by suggesting that the limiter is reached by the jackpot and the limiter is reset, and that there is a 10R jackpot in the hold. It becomes possible to give the player a greater interest.

In FIG. 185, the number of limiters is reached by shifting to the jackpot game state by winning the special figure 2 lottery, while any of the four pending fluctuations of special figure 2 wins the jackpot. The display example when there is is shown. As shown in FIG. 185 (a), the variation of the special figure 2 was performed, the stop was performed in the jackpot mode as shown in FIG. 185 (b), and the jackpot was confirmed as shown in FIG. 185 (c). Notify the image. At this time, if the condition that the number of limiters has been reached by the big hit and the condition that any of the four reserved special figure 2 lottery has won the big hit instead of the small hit are satisfied, FIG. 185. As shown in (d), the screen goes black (freezes), and as shown in FIG. 185 (e), "GOODBONUS" is displayed in a large size, suggesting that there is a special figure 2 jackpot in the hold. Then, as shown in FIG. 185 (f), an image suggesting that the limit number of times has increased to 4 is displayed in the first round. As a result, similar to the example shown in FIG. 184, good luck is concentrated by suggesting to the player that the jackpot reaches the limiter and the limiter is reset, and that there is a 10R jackpot in the hold. It becomes possible to give the impression of being, and it becomes possible to give the player a greater interest.

In the second embodiment, the first big winning opening 540a and the first special electric accessory 601 and the second big winning opening 540b and the second special electric accessory 602 are arranged on the board surface, and the big hit game state. In, the first special electric accessory 601 is operated, and in the small hit game state, the second special electric accessory 602 is operated. Here, since the number of prize balls to the first big prize opening 540a is set to be larger than the number of prize balls to the second big winning opening 540b, the big hit game by the special figure 2 lottery is the special figure 2 lottery. It is more advantageous than the big hit game that has undergone a small hit and a V prize.

In addition, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit (when it is determined that a small hit by the special figure 2 lottery and a big hit game state without V winning) can occur, the lottery result (winning of the big hit). ) Before the start of the second special symbol change (or before the end of the second special symbol change), the main control is to provide information indicating the number of time reductions and the number of continuous operation of the accessory related to the jackpot game state. The circuit 100 may output the look-ahead information to the sub CPU 201.

In the second embodiment, not limited to the above-described configuration, only one special electric accessory is installed on the game board, and a big hit game by the special figure 2 lottery and a small hit and a V prize by the special figure 2 lottery are performed. A common special electric accessory may be used in the big hit game that has passed. In this case, a V winning opening is provided in the common special electric accessory, and the game ball can pass through the V winning opening in both the small hit by the special figure 2 lottery and the big hit game after the V winning. In addition, in the big hit game by the special figure 2 lottery and the big hit game after the small hit and the V prize by the special figure 2 lottery, the opening and closing pattern of the special electric accessory is changed, and the actual big hit game after the small hit and the V prize is changed. The number of prize balls will be regulated by shortening the opening time compared to the big hit game by the special figure 2 lottery. As a result, it is possible to realize the same amount of balls as when there are two special electric accessories. Furthermore, if the condition that the number of limiters has been reached by the big hit and the condition that any of the four reserved special figure 2 lottery wins the big hit instead of the small hit are satisfied, the V prize is awarded. As an opportunity, as shown in FIG. 185 (e), "GOODBONUS" may be displayed in a large size.

[Big hit look-ahead production at the time of limit]
In the time-saving game state in which the limiter number is reached in the next big hit, when the big hit or the small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery, the sub CPU 201 pre-reads the special figure 2 hold and wins the big hit in the hold. Or, it is determined whether or not there is a small hit winner. When it is determined that there is a big hit or a small hit in the hold, as shown in FIG. 186 (a), the display device 16 displays the identification symbol 5022 for the second effect of the special stop mode called "VVV". To display. After that, as shown in FIGS. 186 (b) to 186 (f), the fluctuation of the second effect identification symbol 5022 based on the winning hold, for example, prompts a right-handed hit after a small hit is displayed. An image suggesting that the number of limiters has increased along with the image is displayed on the display device 16, and an image of "V" is displayed on the display device 16 by winning a V prize.

In addition, when the special figure 2 lottery is won a big hit or a small hit in the time-saving game state where the number of limiters is 2 times, the special figure 2 hold is pre-read and the big hit win or the small hit winning hold is 2 Even when there are more than one, the display device 16 may display the second effect identification symbol 5022 in a special stop mode. In addition, a random number value that becomes a small hit or a big hit is stored in the hold of the special figure 2, and as shown in FIGS. 184 to 186, a special effect is executed and the small hit or the big hit exists in the hold of the special figure 2. Even after notifying that the game is to be performed, the effect mode is selected during the small hit game state or the big hit game state, and the small hit existing in the hold of the reserved special figure 2 according to the effect mode is selected. It may be possible to perform an effect when the jackpot fluctuates or an effect until the change.

[Final battle production]
The final decisive battle effect executed when there is a special figure 2 hold after the end of the time saving game state will be described with reference to FIGS.
As shown in FIGS. 187 (a) and 187 (b), in the final round after entering the jackpot game state, the player is made to select either "one-on-one combat mode" or "every time selection mode" as described above. .. As shown in FIG. 187 (b), when the “single combat mode” is selected, as shown in FIG. 187 (c), the transition to the normal gaming state is suggested in the first variation of the special figure 2 hold. The image of "Final Battle" is displayed and the game description is displayed. In the first variation, neither the second effect identification symbol 5022 nor the reserved symbol 5012 is displayed so far. Then, after displaying the game description for a predetermined time, as shown in FIG. 187 (d), an image in which the character is automatically drawn is displayed, and the second effect identification symbol 5022 and the reserved symbol 5012 are displayed. That is, the display that the reserved symbol 5012 decreases in the first fluctuation is not performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 187 (e), the first confrontation image is displayed. As shown in FIG. 187 (f), when the image that won the confrontation is displayed, the second effect identification symbol 5022 of the hit mode is displayed, and the state shifts to the big hit game state or the small hit game state. If there is no big hit or small hit hold in the special figure 2 hold, after the fluctuation of the last special figure 2 hold is stopped, as shown in FIG. 187 (h), the display device 16 displays "defeat". It is said that. The mode selection effect shown in FIG. 187 (b) may be executed in the first variation as shown in FIG. 201.

Here, as described above, the table is set so that a pattern with a long fluctuation time can be determined as the main fluctuation pattern determined based on the first special figure 2 lottery that shifts to the normal game state, and the first half of the fluctuation time. The game is explained at, and the first confrontation image is displayed in the latter half.

By the way, if there is only one special figure 2 hold at the time when the time reduction number of times is reached and the time reduction game state ends, or when the jackpot game state when the limiter number is reached ends, the time reduction game state or the jackpot game state ends. Later, it is necessary to display the final battle entry screen and the final battle result screen in the first change due to the special figure 2 hold, and if there are two special figure 2 hold, the final battle entry screen is set to 1. It is necessary to display the result screen of the final battle in the second fluctuation.

Therefore, in the second embodiment, as the first half fluctuations in the sub-variation pattern, the normal fluctuations, the fluctuations of the final battle rush screen, and the fluctuations of the final battle rush screen and the result screen are newly added. Be prepared for.

If there is only one special figure 2 hold at the time when the time reduction number of times is reached and the time reduction game state ends, or when the limiter number of times is reached and the jackpot game state ends, the first half fluctuation will be the same as the entry screen of the final battle. Select the variation of the fluctuation time for the result screen, and select the common variation for various reach effects and loss as the latter half variation.

If there are two special figures 2 hold at the time when the time reduction number of times is reached and the time reduction game state ends or when the limiter number of times is reached and the jackpot game state ends, the final battle will be the first half fluctuation in the first fluctuation pattern. Select the variation of the fluctuation time for the rush screen, and select the common variation for various reach effects and loss as the latter half variation. Further, as the first half fluctuation in the second fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation of the fluctuation time for the result screen of the final battle is selected, and as the second half fluctuation, common fluctuations for various reach effects and loss are selected.

In this way, by preparing the fluctuation time of the rush screen and the result screen individually for the first half fluctuation and preparing the fluctuation time for various reach effects in common for the second half fluctuation, it depends on the number of holds and the game state. While the content to be displayed differs depending on one variation, it is possible to prepare a common variation time for the effect by the character or the like during the variation to be executed.

FIG. 188 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect screen when the “every time selection mode” is selected.
As shown in FIGS. 188 (a) and 188 (b), in the final round after entering the jackpot game state, the player is made to select either "one-on-one combat mode" or "every time selection mode" as described above. .. As shown in FIG. 188 (b), when the "selection mode every time" is selected, as shown in FIG. 188 (c), an image of the "final battle" suggesting the transition to the normal gaming state is displayed. Later, as shown in FIG. 188 (d), the character selection screen and the effective time during which the character can be selected are displayed. Then, when the effective time elapses, the character is determined, and the confrontation effect is started as shown in FIG. 188 (e) from the next variation in Special Figure 2. When the image that won the confrontation is displayed, as shown in FIG. 188 (g), the second effect identification symbol 5022 of the hit mode is displayed, and the state shifts to the big hit game state or the small hit game state. When an image defeated in the confrontation is displayed, as shown in FIG. 188 (f), a character selection screen and an effective time during which the character can be selected are displayed. Hereinafter, the same effect is repeated as many times as the number of special figures 2 held. When there is no big hit or small hit hold in the special figure 2 hold, the game result is displayed on the display device 16 together with the display of "defeat" as shown in FIG. 188 (h). The mode selection effect shown in FIG. 188 (b) may be executed in the first variation as shown in FIG. 201.

Further, also in the "every time selection mode" shown in FIG. 188, the fluctuation time of the rush screen and the result screen is individually prepared for the first half fluctuation as in the one-on-one combat mode, and the fluctuation time for various reach effects is common to the second half fluctuation. It is prepared at.

In addition, a pseudo-continuous production may be selected in the final battle production. FIG. 189 is an explanatory diagram showing a pseudo continuous effect screen when the “every time selection mode” is selected.
As shown in FIG. 189, in the pseudo-continuous production in the "every time selection mode", as shown in FIG. 189 (b), the character selection screen and the effective time during which the character can be selected are displayed immediately after the temporary stop. Then, the player can select the desired ally character. Further, the character displayed on the selection screen may be determined by lottery so that a stronger character appears as the number of temporary stops in the pseudo-continuous production increases, and if it is a big hit or a small hit, the premium character It may be decided by lottery to appear.

[Continuous hit production]
Further, in the second embodiment, when the first effect identification symbol 5021 or the second effect identification symbol 5022 is temporarily stopped in a lost mode, the stop mode is changed by causing the player to repeatedly press a button. The continuous hitting effect for displaying the final stop symbol may be determined by lottery.

FIG. 190 is an explanatory diagram showing a change in the effect screen in the continuous striking effect. As shown in FIG. 190 (a), after the first effect identification symbol 5021 is temporarily stopped in a lost manner, an image prompting the button repeated hits and an image showing the remaining time during which the button repeated hits are effective are displayed. Then, when the player repeatedly hits the button, the left symbol is destroyed and a new symbol is displayed every few strokes, and when the left symbol becomes a new symbol, the central symbol is then destroyed and a new symbol is displayed. When the center symbol becomes a new symbol, the right symbol is destroyed every few strokes and a new symbol is displayed, and when the right symbol becomes a new symbol, the left symbol is destroyed every few strokes and a new symbol is displayed. Is displayed, the display is repeated. At this time, as the numbers change, the color of the numbers, the color behind the first effect identification symbol 5021, and the like are changed to indicate whether or not a big hit is achieved. Specifically, the display mode of "224" as shown in FIG. 190 (a) is switched to the display mode of "113" as shown in FIGS. 190 (b) to 190 (e) by repeatedly pressing the button, and further. When the display mode is switched to "111" by repeatedly hitting, the big hit is confirmed. If the display mode is switched to "113" as shown in FIG. 190 (e) and the display mode of "113" does not change even after repeated hits, "113" is the final stop as shown in FIG. 190 (h). It becomes a display mode.

FIG. 191 is an explanatory diagram showing a case where the three symbols cannot be completely destroyed in the continuous striking effect. As shown in FIG. 191 (a), after the first effect identification symbol 5021 is temporarily stopped in a lost manner, an image prompting the button repeated hits and an image showing the remaining time during which the button repeated hits are effective are displayed. Then, when the player repeatedly presses the button, the display mode of the first effect identification symbol 5021 changes, as shown in FIGS. 191 (b) to 191 (d). Here, as shown in FIGS. 191 (e) and 191 (f), when the left symbol is destroyed and the display mode of the left symbol is changed and the remaining time is exhausted, in the case of a big hit. As shown in FIG. 191 (g), the jackpot mode is switched to stop display. In the case of loss, as shown in FIG. 191 (h), the stop display is performed as it is as an detached mode.

[Hourglass production]
Next, the hourglass effect, which is one of the main notices determined in step S5032 shown in FIG. 165, will be described with reference to FIGS. 192 and 193.
FIG. 192 shows an example in which the development of the pseudo-continuous production is suggested by the hourglass production. As shown in FIG. 192 (a), when the identification symbol for the first effect starts to fluctuate and temporarily stops as shown in FIG. 192 (b), as shown in FIG. 192 (b), the hourglass Display the image. Then, as shown in FIGS. 192 (c) and 192 (d), the sand of the hourglass falls as the pseudo-ream progresses, and as shown in FIG. 192 (e), the first effect identification symbol is in the reach mode. If the sand of the hourglass has fallen at that point, the reach effect will develop (Fig. 192 (f)). Here, as shown in FIG. 192 (e), even if the identification symbol for the first effect is in the reach mode, the normal reach effect is continued if the sand of the hourglass remains.
In FIG. 192, the hourglass is displayed at the pseudo (1) timing, but the hourglass is not limited to this, and may be displayed at the pseudo (2) timing as shown in FIG. 193. In this case, the timer is basically from the pseudo (1), but it is determined whether to display the hourglass in the pseudo (2) or the pseudo (1) depending on the strength of the pseudo (1). The amount of sand may be reduced from the beginning, or the color of the hourglass may be changed to gold so that the development effect to be executed later can be expected.

[Background change production]
When the lottery in the process of step S5022 of FIG. 165, or step S5075 and step S5079 is won, the background change notice is given.
FIG. 194 shows an example of the background change notice, and is shown in FIG. 194 (b) after the fluctuation of the first effect identification symbol 2021 is stopped at the stage before the background change as shown in FIG. 194 (a). After displaying the effect image when the background is switched as described above, the stage is switched to, for example, a division stage as shown in FIG. 194 (c). In the division stage, the result of the special drawing 1 lottery is notified to the player by changing or stopping the first effect division identification symbol 5121 and the second effect division identification symbol 5122. If either the first effect split identification symbol 5121 or the second effect split identification symbol 5122 stops in the jackpot mode, the game shifts to the jackpot game state.

[Pseudo-continuous production of split stages]
195 and 196 are explanatory views showing an effect screen in the divided stage. As shown in FIGS. 195 and 196, the display device 16 displays the first effect division identification symbol 5121 and the second effect division identification symbol 5122, and fluctuates and stops, respectively. Here, when the pseudo-ream notice symbol 5050 is displayed, the roulette symbol 5031 including "NEXT" and "x" is displayed, and when "NEXT" is displayed, the pseudo-ream effect is performed. When "x" is displayed, it stops in an out-of-order manner or shifts to a normal reach effect. For convenience of the following explanation, the fluctuation from the first temporary stop in the pseudo-continuous production is simulated (1), the fluctuation from the second temporary stop is simulated (2), and the fluctuation from the third temporary stop is simulated. (3) The fluctuation from the fourth temporary stop is referred to as pseudo (4).

Specifically, in the division stage, the first effect division identification symbol 5121 and the second effect division identification symbol 5122 start to change at the same time, and the first effect division identification symbol 5121 and the second effect division identification symbol 5121 and the second effect division identification symbol Stop in the order of 5122. When the pseudo-series notice symbol 5050 is displayed before the first effect division identification symbol 5121 and the second effect division identification symbol 5122 are stopped (FIG. 195 (b)), "NEXT" and "x" are included. When the roulette symbol 5031 is displayed (FIG. 195 (c)) and "NEXT" is displayed (FIG. 195 (d)), the process proceeds to pseudo (1). At this time, since the second effect division identification symbol 5122 is displayed later, the temporary stop mode of the second effect division identification symbol 5122 is displayed small in the right corner of the screen.

In the pseudo (1), as shown in FIG. 195 (e), the first effect division identification symbol 5121 and the second effect division identification symbol 5122 revariate. Similarly, when the pseudo-continuous notice symbol 5050 is displayed (FIG. 195 (f)), the roulette symbol 5031 is displayed (FIG. 195 (g)), and "NEXT" is displayed (FIG. 195 (h)). , Move to pseudo (2). At this time, the temporary stop mode of the second effect division identification symbol 5122 is displayed small in the right corner of the screen. That is, the second effect division identification symbol 5122 becomes the final stop symbol.

In the pseudo (2), the first effect division identification symbol 5121 and the second effect division identification symbol 5122 are revariated, and the third effect division identification symbol 5123 is added to add the first effect division identification symbol 5121. , It fluctuates with the second effect division identification symbol 5122 (FIG. 196 (a)). That is, the number of effective lines is three. Similarly, when the pseudo-ream notice symbol 5050 is displayed (FIG. 196 (b)), the roulette symbol 5031 to which "development" is added is displayed (FIG. 196 (c)), and "NEXT" is displayed. (Fig. 196 (d)), shift to pseudo (3). At this time, the temporary stop mode of the first effect division identification symbol 5121 is displayed small in the right corner of the screen. That is, the first effect division identification symbol 5121 is the final stop symbol.

In the pseudo (3), as shown in FIG. 196 (e), the first effect division identification symbol 5121, the second effect division identification symbol 5122, and the third effect division identification symbol 5123 are revariated and the third effect division identification symbol 5123 is changed. 4 The effect division identification symbol 5124 is added and changes together with the first effect division identification symbol 5121, the second effect division identification symbol 5122, and the third effect division identification symbol 5123. Similarly, the pseudo-ream notice symbol 5050 is displayed (FIG. 196 (f)), and the roulette symbol 5031 to which the "decisive battle" is added is displayed (FIG. 196 (g)).

Here, when other than "NEXT" is displayed (FIG. 196 (h)), an effect such as development to SP reach is performed. At this time, the temporary stop mode of the second effect division identification symbol 5122 is displayed small in the right corner of the screen. That is, the second effect division identification symbol 5122 becomes the final stop symbol. When "NEXT" is displayed in FIG. 196 (g), the process shifts to pseudo (4). In this case, the first effect division identification symbol 5121 to the fourth effect division identification symbol 5124 are revariated. In the second embodiment, since the pseudo (4) is the final stage, the temporary stop is not performed after the change of the pseudo (4), and it develops into SP reach or the like.

FIGS. 195 and 196 take the case of reach of even-numbered symbols as an example, but in the second embodiment, when even one reach mode of odd-numbered symbols is displayed in a plurality of effective lines in the division stage, the next time. In the re-variation of, the symbol is determined so that all of the plurality of effective lines have the reach mode of the odd symbol.

FIGS. 197 and 198 are explanatory views showing an example in which even one odd-numbered symbol reach mode is displayed in a plurality of effective lines in the division stage. As shown in FIGS. 197 (a) to 197 (c), the reach mode of the even-numbered symbol was displayed in the variation of the pseudo (1), but in the variation of the pseudo (2) shown in FIG. As shown in 197 (f), it is assumed that the reach mode of the odd-numbered symbol is displayed. After that, as shown in FIGS. 197 (g) and 197 (h), when the temporary stop occurs and the fluctuation shifts to the pseudo (3) fluctuation, the plurality of effective lines are all odd-numbered symbols in the pseudo (3) fluctuation. (Fig. 198 (a), Fig. 198 (b)). Then, as the reach develops and three odd numbers of the same number stop, the player is notified that the jackpot is a big hit (FIGS. 198 (c) to 198 (f)).

Here, a variable symbol lottery (process of step S5027 shown in FIG. 165) of reach or higher in the division stage will be described. First, the symbol before re-lottery to be stopped at the final pseudo stop line is determined by lottery. Next, the symbols to be stopped at the pseudo effective line before the final pseudo are drawn down based on the symbols before the re-lottery. For example, when the final pseudo is pseudo (3), the pseudo (3) symbol is determined, and then the pseudo (2) and pseudo (1) are determined by lottery based on this symbol. The effective line of each pseudo is decided before the lottery of the symbol.

When conducting a down lottery, first, classification is performed. Specifically, when the symbols before the re-lottery determined by the lottery are odd, it is decided by the lottery whether all the symbols of the valid lines before the final pseudo are odd or whether to promote from even to odd by the final pseudo. .. If the symbols before the re-lottery determined by the lottery are even numbers, all the symbols on the valid lines before the final pseudo are determined to be even numbers.

Next, when it is decided to promote from an even number to an odd number by the final pseudo, the down lottery determines to what stage before the final pseudo the even number is to be promoted. Next, the number of symbols to be the final symbol of the descent (how many symbols to tempai) is decided by lottery. Then, based on the classification of the symbols before the re-lottery and the stop icon, the symbols at each stage in the pseudo-ream or the other symbols are determined by lottery. In this way, a series of temporary stop symbols and final stop symbols in the pseudo-continuous production are determined, and it is possible to express the rise from even-numbered symbols to odd-numbered symbols. In the second embodiment, in the case of a big hit stopped with an odd number symbol, there is a possibility that 100 times of time reduction are given after the big hit game state ends. For this reason, it is possible to give the player a new interest in the pseudo-continuous production in which any one of the plurality of effective lines is expected to be an odd number.

In addition, as a special case, only in the case of long reach (normal reach with a long fluctuation time of the third symbol), a lottery is drawn because the stop icon "x" is used to notify that the pseudo-ream will not continue.

Although the pseudo-ream pattern of the division stage has been described above, in the second embodiment, it is also possible to make full use of the look-ahead to excite the pseudo-ream effect. As shown in FIG. 199, a pseudo-continuous notice may be displayed and stopped in a lost manner from the fluctuation of the hold two before the special figure 1 hold on which the pseudo-continuous effect is performed. When a pseudo-ream notice is given due to the change in the special figure 1 hold (3), the pseudo-ream notice is displayed due to the change in the previous special figure 1 hold (1) and (2) and stopped in a lost manner. As a result, it is possible to start the pseudo-ream production in a state of amplifying the expectation that the pseudo-ream notice may be issued next time. In the example shown in FIG. 199, the pseudo-continuous notice is continuously issued, but the character symbol "pseudo?" Or "pseudo" is displayed on the reserved symbol 5011 of the special figure 1 hold (2). It is also possible to set the number of effective lines to three at the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 hold (3).

Further, with respect to the pseudo-continuous notice, for example, as shown in FIG. 200 (a), a variation mode different from the usual one such as rotating the effect identification symbol horizontally, or as shown in FIG. 200 (b), the effect is produced. By changing the display mode of the background of the identification symbol, for example, by using a green or red background, it may be suggested that the number of pseudo-reams may increase.

[Other configurations of game board unit 17]
FIG. 202 is a front view showing another configuration of the game board unit 17 according to the second embodiment of the present invention. In the game board unit 17 shown in FIG. 202, members having the same or the same function as the members in the game board unit 17 shown in FIG. 155 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
The types of the normal electric accessory unit 400 and the second special electric accessory 602 are different between the game board unit 17 shown in FIG. 202 and the game board unit 17 shown in FIG. 155. In the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 in the game board unit 17 shown in FIG. 202, the shutter member rotates forward to capture the game ball, and the second special electric accessory 602 is the ordinary electric accessory unit shown in FIG. 156. Like the accessory unit 400, the flat plate member protrudes, and the game ball on the flat plate member is guided to the second starting port 440 which is arranged on the left side of the flat plate member and opens on the right side.

As described above, as one embodiment of the present invention, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment has been described.

[Third Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 203 to 217. In the third embodiment of the present invention, the same members or members having the same function as the members in the second embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

[12-1. Game machine configuration]
Since the appearance configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment of the present invention is the same as the appearance configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, the description thereof will be omitted.

The configuration of the gaming board unit according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the third embodiment is the same as the configuration of the gaming board unit 17 relating to the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the second embodiment shown in FIG. 155, and in particular, an ordinary electric accessory. The unit 400, the first special electric accessory 540a, the first special electric accessory 601 and the second special electric accessory 540b, and the second special electric accessory 602 use the same members as those in the second embodiment, and the second The same operation as that of the embodiment is performed.

Since the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the third embodiment is the same as the control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the second embodiment of the present invention shown in FIG. 158, the description thereof will be omitted.

[12-2. Function flow]
Next, the functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention will be described. The functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment does not have a function of probabilistically shifting in the functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. Further, in the third embodiment, as in the second embodiment, the "big hit determination" shown in FIG. 20 also includes a "small hit determination".

[12-3. Basic specifications of pachinko machines]
Next, the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the third embodiment will be described.

[12-3-1. Number of limiters]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment is the same as the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment [9-1. The number of limiters described in [Expansion Example 1] is set, and “3” is set as the number of limiters in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

[12-3-2. Big hit, small hit probability]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, when the main CPU 101 detects that the game ball has won the first starting port 420, it extracts a random number for determining the jackpot of the first special symbol from the jackpot determination counter (hereinafter, Refer to the first special symbol lottery or the special figure 1 lottery) and the first special symbol jackpot random number determination table (not shown) stored in the main RAM 103 to determine the jackpot of the extracted random numbers for jackpot determination. I do.

Further, when the main CPU 101 detects that the game ball has won the second starting port 440, it extracts a random number for determining the jackpot of the second special symbol from the counter for determining the jackpot (hereinafter, the second special symbol lottery or the special symbol). With reference to the first special symbol jackpot random number determination table (not shown) stored in the main RAM 103 (referred to as 2 lottery), the jackpot determination of the extracted jackpot determination random numbers is performed.

In the third embodiment, the probability of a big hit determination in the first special symbol lottery is about 1/256 (setting 1), and the probability of a small hit determination is 0. The probability of a big hit determination in the second special symbol lottery is about 1/256 (setting 1), and the probability of a small hit determination is 1 / 3.02. That is, the probability of losing the second special symbol lottery is lower than that of the first special symbol lottery because there may be a small hit. The higher the set value, the higher the probability of a big hit judgment and the probability of a small hit judgment. In the case of setting 6, the probability of a big hit judgment is 1/149 and the probability of a small hit judgment is 1/2. It is .99.

[12-3-3. Number of prize balls]
In the third embodiment, the number of prize balls by winning the first prize opening 540a is "10", the number of prize balls by winning the second prize opening 540b is "3", and the prize is won by the first starting port 420. The number of prize balls is "4", the number of prize balls by winning the second starting port 440 is "1", the number of prize balls by winning the general prize opening 53 is "5", and the number of prize balls by winning the general winning openings 54 and 55 is The number of prize balls by winning is "3", and the number of prize balls by winning the general winning opening 56 is "2".

[12-3-4. Big hit, small hit game state count number]
In the third embodiment, the number of counts (maximum number of balls entered) in the round game in the big hit game state is 8, and the number of counts (maximum number of balls entered) in the small hit game state is 10. That is, according to the third embodiment, since the prize is won in the first big prize opening 540a in the big hit game state, there are 80 prize ball refunds per round, and the second big prize is in the small hit game state. There are 30 prize ball refunds to win the prize in the mouth 540b.

[12-3-5. Big hit distribution]
A big hit by a special figure 1 lottery (hereinafter referred to as a special figure 1 big hit), a big hit by a special figure 2 lottery (hereinafter referred to as a special figure 2 big hit), and a V prize in a small hit game state will be a V big hit. In each case, the number of rounds is "3 times", "6 times", "8 times", or "10 times" depending on the big hit mode of the special symbol or the small hit mode of the second special symbol. Is selected. The probability that the number of rounds will be "3" is 65%, the probability that the number of rounds will be "6" is 20%, the probability that the number of rounds will be "8" is 10%, and the probability that the number of rounds will be "10" is 5%. is there. The special figure 2 big hit is a big hit that does not go through the small hit.

[12-3-6. Time saving number distribution]
In the case of the special figure 1 big hit, the special figure 2 big hit, and the V big hit via the small hit, the game shifts to the time-saving game state after the big hit game state ends. At this time, either "100 times" or "1 time" is selected as the number of time reductions depending on the jackpot mode of the special symbol. In the special figure 1 jackpot, the probability that the number of time reductions will be "100 times" is 35%, and the probability that the number of time reductions will be "1 time" is 65%.

The probability that the number of time reductions will be "100 times" in the special figure 2 jackpot is 100%. Further, when the ball enters the V winning opening 545 in the small hit game state and shifts to the big hit game state, the time shortening game state is shifted to after the end of the big hit game state, and the time saving number of times "100 times" is given. If the ball is not entered in the V winning opening 545 in the small hit game state, the game state after the end of the small hit game state is maintained as the game state before the end of the small hit game state. That is, if the gaming state before the end of the small hit gaming state is the normal gaming state, the gaming state after the end of the small hit gaming state is the normal gaming state, and if the gaming state before the end of the small hit gaming state is the time-saving gaming state. , The game state after the end of the small hit game state becomes the time saving game state. In this case, the number of time reductions will be inherited from the number of time reductions before the end of the small hit game state. In the third embodiment as well, as in the second embodiment, when the end condition of the time-saving gaming state is the number of fluctuations according to the special figure 2 once, the fluctuation according to the special figure 1 is a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times). When it is executed, it ends, when the number of small hits won reaches a predetermined number (for example, once), and when the first second special symbol changes in the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state It is also possible to control to end.

In addition, the big hit game state can perform a round game, while the small hit game state basically does not have a round game. In the small hit game state, it is possible to open and close the large winning opening (second large winning opening 540b) in which the accessory continuous operation device does not operate. Here, after the end of the big hit game state, it is possible to shift to a game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a time-saving game state), but basically, after the end of the small hit game state, it shifts to the small hit game state. It does not shift to a more advantageous gaming state than before the shift.

However, during the small hit game state, the large winning opening (second large winning opening 540b) provided with the specific area (V winning opening 545) is opened, and the game ball passes through the specific area (V winning opening 545). When the condition device is activated and the accessory continuous actuating device is activated, after the end of the small hit game state, the player shifts to the big hit game state, which is an advantageous game state for the player. At this time, the small hit game state may also be counted in the number of rounds.

[12-4. Game flow]
Since the transition of the gaming state using the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment of the present invention is the same as that of the second embodiment described with reference to FIG. 159, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the transition of the production stage will be described.
FIG. 203 is an explanatory diagram showing a transition of an effect stage in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment. In the normal game state in which there is no hold of the special figure 2, the effect of the normal stage is executed.

In the normal stage, if you win a big hit with one time saving in the special figure 1 lottery, you will move to the challenge stage. If you win a big hit of 100 times in the special figure 1 lottery, you will move to the super bonus stage.

At the challenge stage, one big hit game will be produced for the first time. This effect includes giving a notification prompting the player to hit right before the start of the big hit game. This right-handed notification will continue during the challenge stage. In the challenge stage, any one of "3 times", "6 times", "8 times", and "10 times" is played, so 240 to 800 game balls can be expected to be paid out.

After the jackpot game state ends, one time-saving game state is produced. In this one time-saving game state, when the special figure 2 fluctuates and stops once and becomes a special figure 2 big hit or a V big hit via a small hit, the stage shifts to the bonus stage. If the special figure 1 is held before the start of the big hit game state, the change of the special figure 1 is prioritized over the change of the special figure 2. Therefore, after the big hit game state ends, the special figure 1 big hit In some cases. In the case of a special figure 1 big hit in the challenge stage, it shifts to the super bonus stage.

In the bonus stage, two big hit games will be produced. Specifically, after the second big hit game state is completed, the game shifts to the time-saving game state where the number of time reductions is 100 times. At this time, the fluctuation time in the case of the loss in Special Figure 2 is as short as 100 ms, and the small hit Since the probability is 1/3, there is a high possibility that a small hit will be won during the 100 times of time reduction. For this reason, the player is requested to shift to the third jackpot game state at an early stage because the special figure 2 fluctuates and stops at high speed in 100 times of time reduction after the second jackpot game state is completed. felt.

In the bonus stage, the production of the two jackpot game states, the production of the time-saving game state, and the production of the third jackpot game state are executed as a series of effects. In addition, in the bonus stage, there is a high possibility that the game will shift to the jackpot game state twice, so that 480 to 1600 game balls can be expected to be paid out. In addition, when two big hit games are digested in the bonus stage, the big hit game state is three times in a row including one big hit game state in the challenge stage, and the limiter number is reached. Therefore, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state. At this time, if there is a hold of Special Figure 2, the process shifts to the revival stage. If there is no hold of special figure 2, the stage shifts to the normal stage.

In the super bonus stage, three big hit games will be produced. Specifically, the production of the first big hit game state by the special figure 1 lottery which is the first hit, the production of the time reduction game state of 100 times of time reduction after the end of the first big hit game state, and the second big hit game The effect of the state, the effect of the time-saving game state of 100 times after the end of the second big hit game state, and the effect of the third big hit game state are performed. According to the third embodiment, these effects are executed as a series of related effects. The production of the first big hit game state includes a notification prompting the player to hit right before the start of the big hit game. This right-handed notification will continue during the challenge stage. In the super bonus stage, a minimum of 9 rounds and a maximum of 30 rounds are played, so 720 to 2400 game balls can be expected to be paid out. When the third big hit game state is completed in the super bonus stage, the limiter number is reached and the game shifts to the normal game state. At this time, if there is a hold of Special Figure 2, the process shifts to the revival stage. If there is no hold of special figure 2, the stage shifts to the normal stage.

The revival stage will continue until the hold of Special Figure 2 is exhausted. Since the resurrection stage is normally executed in the game state, a notification prompting the player to hit left is given immediately after the transition to the resurrection stage. This left-handed notification prompts the player to directly convey the image or voice to the player, and also restores the image displayed on the display device 16 in the bonus stage or super-bonus stage to prompt the player to perform the right-handed hit. It also includes suggesting a left-handed hit to the player by not displaying it on the stage.

In the revival stage, as in the normal stage, an effect of displaying an image notifying the number of hold of special figure 1 is performed, and an effect of displaying an image notifying the number of hold of special figure 2 is performed. The maximum number of holds in Special Figure 2 is 4, and irregular hitting methods, such as stopping until the hold in Special Figure 2 is exhausted, are performed during the 100 time reductions in the bonus stage and super bonus stage. Or, unless you hit left to increase the number of holds in Special Figure 1, after the number of big hits reaches the limiter number, the number of holds in Special Figure 1 is 0 and the number of holds in Special Figure 2 is 4. Move to the resurrection stage. Therefore, at the start of the revival stage, the fluctuation of Special Figure 2 is started.

Then, when the revival stage starts, the player strikes left according to the left-handed notification, and while the special figure 2 is fluctuating, the first starting port 420a is started and won a prize, the change of the special figure 1 is changed. It is put on hold. Then, after the changing special figure 2 is stopped, the change of the special figure 1 is preferentially started even if the holding of the special figure 2 remains. That is, when the player strikes left to change the special figure 1, the revival stage can be lengthened by the change time of the special figure 1. If the change in the special figure 1 is a big hit, the stage shifts to the super bonus stage according to the third embodiment. If you win the special figure 1 jackpot in the resurrection stage, you may move to either the challenge stage or the super bonus stage. In this case, the probability of shifting to the challenge stage is 65%, and the probability of shifting to the super bonus stage is 35%, but the probability of shifting to the super bonus stage may be higher than that of the challenge stage.

In the revival stage, if there is a hold that becomes a small hit among the four holds in Special Figure 2, the game shifts to the small hit game state, and by winning a V, the stage shifts to the super bonus stage. In addition, even if there is a big hit hold among the four holds in Special Figure 2, the stage shifts to the super bonus stage. If there is no big hit or small hit among the four holds of special figure 2, the stage shifts to the normal stage after the four holds of special figure 2 are exhausted.

If the special figure 1 jackpot is achieved in the normal stage, the probability of moving to the challenge stage is 65%, and the probability of moving to the super bonus stage is 35%. In the challenge stage, the time is shortened once, so only one special figure 2 is reserved. Therefore, the probability of shifting from the challenge stage to the bonus stage is 33%, which is the small hit probability. If there is a hold of Special Figure 2 after the end of the bonus stage and the super bonus stage, the stage shifts to the resurrection stage. If there is no hold of special figure 2, the stage shifts to the normal stage. In the resurrection stage, if there is a big hit or a small hit among the four holds in Special Figure 2, it is possible to move to the super bonus stage, so the loop probability between the resurrection stage and the super bonus stage is 80%. ..

[13-6. Outline of drawing control method and audio reproduction control method]
Also in the third embodiment, the above-mentioned [11-4. Outline of drawing control method], [6. The control according to the first embodiment described in the item of [Summary of voice reproduction control method] is executed.

[13-7. Processing by the main control circuit]
Next, various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the third embodiment will be described.

Also in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, the main CPU 101 executes the same processing as the processing in the first embodiment shown in FIGS. 30 to 51 or a processing in which a part is modified. Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, the switch input detection process shown in FIG. 41, the special symbol display time management process shown in FIG. 47, and the jackpot end interval process shown in FIG. 49 are shown in FIGS. 160 to 162. The same processing as the switch input detection processing, the special symbol display time management processing, and the jackpot end interval processing in the second embodiment shown is executed. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, a process in which a part of the special symbol memory check process shown in FIG. 46 is changed is executed.

[Special symbol memory check processing of the third embodiment]
FIG. 204 is a flowchart showing a special symbol storage check process by the main CPU 101 executed in the third embodiment.

As for the special symbol memory check process in the third embodiment, the processes of steps S113 to 116 and steps S121 to 122 in the special symbol memory check process of the first and second embodiments described with reference to FIG. 46 are shown in FIG. 204. As shown, the processing is changed to steps S113-1 to 116-1 and steps S121-11 to 122-1.
In FIG. 204, the processes of steps S111 and S112 are omitted because they are as described with reference to FIG.

In step S113-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the reserved number (first start storage number) of the first start opening winning (variation display of the first special symbol) is "0". When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of reserved first start opening prizes is "0" (YES in step S113-1), the process proceeds to step S114-1, and the number of reserved first start opening prizes is "0". If it is determined that it is not "0" (NO in step S113-1), the process proceeds to step S121-1.

In step S114-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the reserved number (second start storage number) of the second start opening winning (variation display of the second special symbol) is "0". When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of reserved second start opening prizes is not "0" (NO in step S114-1), the process proceeds to step S115-1, and the number of reserved number of second start opening prizes is "0". (YES in step S114-1), the process proceeds to step S120.

In step S115-1, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the value of the second start storage number corresponding to the number of reserved second start opening prizes. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 103. It is determined whether or not there is a start memory of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol that is being displayed or is on hold. In the second special symbol start storage area (0), data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display is stored as start storage information. Then, in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), a special symbol game corresponding to the four times of reserved variable display (holding ball) of the second special symbol is held. Data (information) is stored as start storage information. The start storage information of each second special symbol start storage area includes, for example, data indicating a jackpot determination random value, a symbol determination random value, a determined fluctuation pattern, etc. extracted at the time of winning the second start port 440. Is included.

Next, in step S116-1, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol storage transfer process based on the second start opening winning. In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the data of the second special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the second special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. After that, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S117.
The processes of steps S117 to S120 are omitted because they are as described with reference to FIG. 46.

In step S121-1, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the value of the first start storage number corresponding to the number of reserved first start opening prizes. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not data is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 103. It is determined whether or not there is a start memory of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol that is being displayed or is on hold. In the first special symbol start storage area (0), data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display is stored as start storage information. Then, in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), a special symbol game corresponding to four times of reserved variable display (holding ball) of the first special symbol. Data (information) is stored as start storage information. The start storage information of each first special symbol start storage area includes, for example, data indicating a jackpot determination random value, a symbol determination random value, a determined fluctuation pattern, etc. extracted at the time of winning the first start port 420. Is included.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol storage transfer process based on the first start opening winning (step S122-1). In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the data of the first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the first special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. After that, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S117, executes the processes of step S118 and step S119, and then ends the special symbol memory check process.

As described above, according to the special symbol memory check process shown in FIG. 46, the variable display hold of the second special symbol is preferentially digested, whereas the special symbol memory check process in the third embodiment shown in FIG. According to the above, the variable display hold of the first special symbol is preferentially digested.

[Variation time determination table]
FIG. 205 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the fluctuation time determination table used in the third embodiment.
There are three types of variable time determination tables used in the third embodiment: a normal table, a special figure 2 holding table, and a time saving table.

A normal table is used when there is no hold in FIG. 2 and the game is not in a time-saving game state. That is, a normal table is used for determining the fluctuation pattern of FIG. The table with special figure 2 hold is used when the second special symbol is held and the game is not in the time-saving game state. Used for holding the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The time saving table is used in the time saving game state. Since the fluctuation time is associated with the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time is determined by determining the fluctuation pattern.

In the third embodiment, after the jackpot game state ends, the time saving game state shifts to the time saving game state in which the number of time reductions is 1 or 100 times. In this case, the fluctuation time is determined based on the time saving table regardless of whether the first special symbol is on hold or the second special symbol is on hold.

Further, when the special figure 1 is held and the special figure 2 is not held after the time saving game is completed, a normal table is used to determine the fluctuation pattern based on the hold of the special figure 1. When there are both the hold of the special figure 1 and the hold of the special figure 2, the digestion of the hold of the special figure 1 is prioritized, but the table with the hold of the special figure 2 is used to determine the fluctuation pattern.

Comparing the normal table and the table with special figure 2 hold, the table in the case of big hit is the same, while the table with special figure 2 hold is set to have a longer fluctuation time in the case of loss. ing. Here, if there is a start prize at the first starting port 420 and the change of the special figure 1 is held before all the hold of the special figure 2 is exhausted after the time saving game is completed, the hold has priority. Since it is digested, it is possible to delay the digestion of the hold of the second special symbol by the fluctuation time of the special figure 1. Moreover, since the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is relatively longer than the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 determined by using a normal table, the hold of the special figure 1 is increased during the fluctuation of the special figure 1. It is also possible for the player to intentionally delay the digestion of the hold of the second special symbol.

As a result, for example, in a model in which the hold of special figure 2 is preferentially digested, the launch of the game ball is stopped after the jackpot game state ends, and the launch of the game ball is started after all the hold of special figure 2 is digested. Often started. On the other hand, in the third embodiment, after the jackpot game state ends, the player intentionally delays the digestion of the hold of the second special symbol by firing the game ball and causing the first starting port 420 to win a starting prize. As a result, it becomes possible to provide the player with the so-called interest of saving the fun later.

[12-8. Processing by sub-control circuit]
Also in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, the sub CPU 201 executes the same processing as the processing of the second embodiment. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

[Explanation of production]
Next, various effects displayed on the display device 16 will be described.

Next, the effect displayed on the display device 16 from the first hit to the end of the revival stage will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 and 206 to 216.

In most cases, the player starts the game from the normal stage. In the normal stage, the game is advanced while hitting left with the aim of winning the first starting port 420. In the normal stage, as shown in FIG. 206 (a), the left-handed notification image 5100 of "← left-handed" is displayed on the display device 16, and the start to the first starting port 420 while left-handed. Digest the game ball (ball) aiming for a prize. In the normal stage (normal game state), the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is low, the opening time of the normal electric accessory is short, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to be long.

When the first starting port 420 is won, as shown in FIG. 206A, the first effect identification symbol 5021 starts to fluctuate, and the special figure 1 reserved symbol 5011 is displayed. The special figure 1 reserved symbol 5011 can display five of the special figure 1 reserved (0) to the special figure 1 reserved (4), and in particular, the special figure 1 reserved symbol 5011 of the special figure 1 reserved (0) varies. It corresponds to the identification symbol 5021 for the first effect in the inside, and at the same time when the identification symbol 5021 for the first effect that is changing stops, as shown in FIG. 206 (b), the special figure of the special figure 1 hold (0) 1 Reserved symbol 5011 is erased. At this time, if the stop mode of the first effect identification symbol 5021 is the lost mode and the special figure 1 hold symbol 5011 of the special figure 1 hold (1) is displayed, the special figure 1 hold (1) The special figure 1 reserved symbol 5011 shifts to the display position of the special figure 1 reserved symbol 5011 of the special figure 1 reserved (0). When the stop mode of the first effect identification symbol 5021 is a jackpot mode in which the same number of numbers are lined up as shown in FIG. 206 (b), a "big hit" notification is given as shown in FIG. 206 (c). An image is displayed and an image called "challenge stage" is displayed to notify the stage transition.

Round game starts when the game shifts to the jackpot game state. In the jackpot game state, as shown in FIG. 206 (d), a right-handed notification image 5110 of "right-handed →" is displayed so as to aim at the ordinary electric accessory 460 during the round game. The player digests the game ball (holding ball) aiming to win a prize in the first large winning opening 540a while hitting right. At this time, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is low, the opening time of the normal electric accessory is short, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to be long. If the number of rounds is 3 and the number of time reductions is 1 big hit, after the end of the 3rd round shown in FIG. 206 (d), as shown in FIG. 206 (e), the ordinary electric accessory 460 is used. The right-handed notification image 5110 of "right-handed →" is displayed in a more conspicuous manner so as to aim. The gaming state at this time is a time-saving gaming state in which the number of time reductions is one.

In the time-saving game state, a right-handed hit notification is made, and the game ball (possessed ball) is digested aiming at entering the passing gate 49 while hitting right. At this time, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol lottery is high, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory is long, and the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is set to be short. In the third embodiment, the same ordinary electric accessory unit 400 as in the second embodiment is used, and when only one game ball enters the ordinary electric accessory 460 in one time-saving gaming state in the challenge stage. The ordinary electric accessory 460 is closed, and then the ordinary electric accessory 460 is not opened. In other words, the hold of special figure 2 does not accumulate.

Specifically, the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 in the third embodiment is the same as the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 in the second embodiment, and see FIG. 157 for the configuration and operation of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400. However, when the game ball rides on the flat plate member 4621 while the flat plate member 4621 is protruding, the game ball moves along the inclination of the flat plate member 4621 and reaches the second starting port 440. It is transported toward and wins a prize at the second starting port 440.

Here, as shown in FIG. 206 (b), when the special figure 1 jackpot is obtained while the special figure 1 hold remains, the special figure 1 hold remains at the start of the time saving game state. In this case, since the change of the special figure 1 is prioritized, the change of the special figure 2 starts after all the reservations of the special figure 1 are exhausted. However, while the special figure 1 is fluctuating, it is in a time-saving game state, and if the ordinary symbol lottery is won during that time, there is a possibility that a plurality of reservations of the special figure 2 can be accumulated.

In the third embodiment, since the table for shortening the time shown in FIG. 205 is used, the hold of special figure 1 is digested at high speed (100 (ms)) when the hold of special figure 1 remains. .. Further, the normal symbol fluctuation time in the time-saving game state is set to be longer than the four fluctuations (100 × 4 (ms)) of the special figure 1. Therefore, when the hold of the special figure 1 remains after the big hit game due to the first hit is completed, and the change of the first rotation of the time reduction of the special figure 2 is started after all the hold of the special figure 1 is started, the time saving game state. Is finished.

As described above, in the third embodiment, by speeding up the fluctuation of the special figure 1, a plurality of reservations of the special figure 2 are prevented from being accumulated during the fluctuation of the special figure 1. By controlling so as to end the time-saving game state at the start of the first change of the second special symbol during the time-saving game state, it is realized that the change of the special figure 2 does not exceed one rotation.

As shown in FIG. 206 (e), when the player hits the right as instructed, only one game ball wins the second starting opening 440, and the special figure 2 hold (1) is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 206 (e), when the hold of the special figure 1 remains, the variation of the special figure 1 hold symbol 5011 is prioritized, and the first effect identification symbol 5021 is displayed relatively inconspicuously. Variable display is performed according to the mode. At this time, since the gaming state has shifted from the time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state, the left-handed notification image 5100 is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 206 (f), when all the special figure 1 reserved symbols 5011 are erased and the stop display of the first effect identification symbol 5021 is maintained, the special figure 2 reserved symbol 5012 is maintained. Shifts to the special figure 2 hold (0), and the variable display of the second effect identification symbol 5022 starts.

When the stop mode of the second effect identification symbol 5022 is a small hit mode in which the same number of numbers are lined up as shown in FIG. 206 (g), as shown in FIG. 206 (h), "breaking through the limit". Is displayed. At this time, the right-handed notification image 5110 is displayed. After the image of "breaking through the limit" is displayed, as shown in FIG. 207 (a), a right-handed notification of "Aim for V attacker!" Is given, and a game ball is inserted into the second prize opening 540b. An image is displayed instructing the user to do so. Then, the game shifts to the small hit game state, and the second big winning opening 540b is opened in an opening time not exceeding 1.8 seconds. In the small hit game state, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is low, the opening time of the normal electric accessory is short, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to be long.

When the player hits the right side according to the instruction shown in FIG. 207 (a) and the game ball wins a V prize, the image "V" is displayed as shown in FIG. 207 (b). Here, it is designed to enter the second major winning opening 540b and win a V by hitting right when "Aim for V attacker!" Shown in FIG. 207 (a) is displayed. ..

Then, as shown in FIG. 207 (c), after displaying an image notifying the transition to the bonus stage and the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game, the images are shown in FIGS. 207 (d) to 207 (f). Update the production image of the number of rounds. As a stop display mode of the second effect identification symbol 5022 in the third embodiment, a big hit is obtained when three "7" s are aligned, and a small hit is performed when three numbers other than "7" are aligned. Other than that, it will be lost.

After the jackpot game is completed, the game shifts to a time-saving game state in which the number of time-saving games is 100 times. In the time-saving game state, since the fluctuation time of the second effect identification symbol 5022 in the case of loss is set short, as shown in FIG. 208 (a), the second effect identification symbol 5022 fluctuates and stops. Is repeated in a short time. Further, since the small hit probability is 1/3, the second effect identification symbol 5022 is stopped and displayed in the small hit mode relatively quickly as shown in FIG. 208 (b). The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment switches to a state in which it is difficult to enter the ball after one of the ordinary electric accessories 460 has entered the ball. However, since the number of time reductions is 100 times, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment is shown in FIG. It is possible to save a hold.

When the identification symbol 5022 for the second effect is stopped and displayed in the small hit mode, as shown in FIGS. 208 (c) and 208 (d), "Aim at the V attacker!" Is displayed, and the game ball wins a V prize. In this case, the image "V" is displayed. After the image "V" is displayed, for example, as shown in FIG. 208 (e), the number of rounds acquired by the V jackpot "8 rounds added!" Is displayed, and the round game is started. In the start round, the number of rounds is displayed by taking over the number of rounds in the previous jackpot game. In the examples shown in FIGS. 207 and 208, since the jackpot game is executed following the jackpot game of three rounds, “Round 4” is displayed as the number of rounds as shown in FIG. 208 (f). After that, as the round game progresses, in the final round, as shown in FIG. 209 (a), "Round 11" is displayed as the number of rounds. Then, after the end of the round game, as shown in FIG. 209 (b), an image of "end of bonus stage" is displayed to notify the end of the jackpot game state. At this point, the number of consecutive jackpot games has reached the limiter number of three, so it is called the "revival stage", which indicates that the game has transitioned to the normal game state, as shown in FIG. 209 (c). The image is displayed. At this time, the display device 16 also has a left-handed notification image 5100 called "left-handed" that urges the player to left-handed, and "111" which is a stop mode of the second effect identification symbol 5022 in the previous small hit. 2 "and the special figure 2 hold symbol 5012 of the special figure 2 hold (1) to (4) are displayed.

At the time of shifting to the resurrection stage, the special figure 1 reserved symbol 5011 is not displayed and the special figure 2 reserved symbol 5012 is displayed. Therefore, the change of the first effect identification symbol after shifting to the resurrection stage is The second effect identification symbol 5022 fluctuates. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 209 (d), the special figure 2 hold (1) to (4) shifts to the special figure 2 hold (0) to (3). However, the special figure 2 hold (0) indicates the hold during the change. Further, when the player hits the left side and the game ball starts and wins the first starting port 420, the special figure 1 reserved symbol 5011 is displayed as shown in FIG. 209 (d). As shown in FIG. 209 (e), after the fluctuation of the second effect identification symbol 5022 is stopped, as shown in FIG. 209 (f), the special figure 1 reserved symbol 5011 is preferentially digested, and the special figure 1 After all the display of the reserved symbol 5011 is erased, the special figure 2 reserved symbol 5012 changes as shown in FIG. 209 (g). The display mode of the first effect identification symbol 5021 and the display mode of the second effect identification symbol 5022 in the resurrection stage are the same.

When the game ball starts and wins the first starting port 420 during the fluctuation of the special figure 2 reserved symbol 5012 shown in FIG. 209 (g), as shown in FIG. 209 (h), the special figure 1 reserved symbol 5011 Is displayed. Hereinafter, as shown in FIGS. 210 (a) to 210 (f) and 211 (a), the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold are digested, and as shown in FIG. 211 (b), the special figure 2 ( At the end of the variable display of the special figure 2 reserved symbol 5012 of 0), "Resurrection stage end" is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 211 (c), when the special figure 1 reserved symbol 5011 is displayed when the fluctuation of the special figure 2 reserved symbol 5012 of the special figure 2 (0) is stopped, FIG. 211 ( As shown in d), the first effect identification symbol 5021 is displayed in a variable manner, and an image called "normal stage" is displayed. As a result, it is possible to impress the player that the gaming state is no longer advantageous.

Next, in the challenge stage, a case where a small hit is not achieved due to the fluctuation of the special figure 2 after the end of the big hit game shown in FIG. 206 (f) will be described.
As described with reference to FIGS. 206 (a) to 206 (e), in the normal game state, the special figure 1 jackpot is obtained, and in the time-saving game state where the number of time reductions is one after the transition to the challenge stage and the end of the jackpot game. After displaying the special figure 2 reserved symbol 5012, as shown in FIG. 206 (f), the second effect identification symbol 5022 fluctuates on the display screen of the display device 16. On the display screen of the display device 16 shown in FIG. 206 (f), when the changing second effect identification symbol 5022 is stopped and displayed in a lost manner, as shown in FIG. 212 (a), "if the limit is exceeded". After the image "Zu" is displayed, as shown in FIG. 212 (b), the image "normal stage" is displayed together with the mode of stopping the loss of the second effect identification symbol 5022.

Next, a case where a small hit is obtained due to the fluctuation of Special Figure 2 in the revival stage will be described. For example, after the display of the display device 16 shown in FIG. 210 (d), as shown in FIG. 212 (c), the variation of the second effect identification symbol 5022 starts, and the variation is shown in FIG. 212 (d). As shown, when the stop display is performed in the small hit mode, as shown in FIGS. 212 (e) and 212 (f), "Aim at the V attacker!" Is displayed, and when the game ball wins a V prize. The image "V" is displayed. After the image "V" is displayed, as shown in FIG. 213 (a), the image "super bonus stage" is displayed, and the player is notified of the transition to the super bonus stage. At the same time, for example, the number of rounds acquired by the V jackpot of "10 rounds" is displayed, and the round game is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 213 (b), when the final round game is completed and the jackpot game is completed, the game shifts to the time-saving game state in which the number of time reductions is 100 times. In the time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 213 (c), the second effect identification symbol 5022 fluctuates, and the second effect identification symbol 5022 hits relatively quickly as shown in FIG. 213 (d). Stop display in the mode.

When the second production identification symbol 5022 is stopped and displayed in the small hit mode, as shown in FIGS. 213 (e) and 213 (f), "Aim at the V attacker!" Is displayed and the game ball wins a V prize. In this case, the image "V" is displayed. After the image "V" is displayed, if the V jackpot is a 10-round jackpot, as shown in FIG. 213 (g), the number of rounds acquired by the V jackpot "10 rounds added!" Is displayed, and the rounds are displayed. The game starts. Taking over the previous number of rounds of 10, as shown in FIG. 213 (h), "Round 11" is displayed as the number of rounds. After that, when the final round game is completed and the big hit game is completed, as shown in FIGS. 214 (a) to 214 (d), the game shifts to the time-saving game state and the small hit is made relatively quickly, and "Aim for V attacker". "!" Is displayed, and when the game ball wins a V, the image "V" is displayed. After the image "V" is displayed, if the V jackpot is a 10-round jackpot, as shown in FIG. 214 (e), the number of rounds acquired by the V jackpot "10 rounds added" is displayed, and the round game Is started. At this time, as shown in FIG. 214 (f), "Round 21" is displayed as the number of 214 rounds, taking over the previous number of rounds of 20. Then, as shown in FIG. 215 (a), the final round "Round 30" is displayed. After the end of the final round game, as shown in FIG. 215 (b), an image of "super bonus stage end" is displayed, and after notifying the end of the jackpot game state, as shown in FIG. 215 (c). The image "Resurrection Stage" is displayed. At this time, the display device 16 also has a left-handed notification image 5100 called "left-handed" that urges the player to left-handed, and "111" which is a stop mode of the second effect identification symbol 5022 in the previous small hit. 2 "and the special figure 2 hold (1) to (4) are displayed. In this way, in the revival stage, in the case of the special figure 1 big hit, the special figure 2 big hit, and the V big hit via the special figure 2 small hit, the stage shifts to the super bonus stage, and the special figure 2 reserved symbol 5012 is all erased. Move to the normal stage.

Next, in the challenge stage after the first hit, a case where a big hit is made by the special figure 1 lottery will be described.
Further, in the third embodiment, since the variation of the special figure 1 has priority over the variation of the special figure 2, the special figure 1 big hit may occur after the first hit. For example, as shown in FIGS. 216 (a) to 216 (e), in the first hit due to the fluctuation of the special figure 1, when the special figure 1 reserved symbol 5011 remains after the big hit game ends, the special figure 1 reserved symbol 5011 Is digested as shown in FIG. 216 (e).

When the four special figure 1 reserved symbols 5011 have a big hit, as shown in FIG. 216 (f), the first effect identification symbol 5021 is stopped and displayed in the big hit mode. After that, as shown in FIG. 216 (g), after displaying "super bonus stage" and "big hit", the game shifts to the big hit game state. In the round game, as shown in FIG. 216 (h), since the number of rounds of the previous first hit is three, "Round 4" is displayed by taking over the number of rounds. Then, after digesting the jackpot games for the remaining number of limiters, the game shifts to the revival stage.

In the third embodiment, in the revival stage, when a left-handed strike is performed, the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is repeated without interruption, and the special figure 1 jackpot is obtained while the hold of the special figure 2 is held. , Move to "Super Bonus Stage". If there is no hold of special figure 2, the revival stage is shifted to the normal stage, so if the special figure 1 is a big hit, it will move to the "challenge stage".

According to the third embodiment configured as described above, by suggesting to the player that the game ball is fired in the left region when the time-saving game state is changed to the normal game state, it is more than necessary. It is possible to prevent the right-handed hit from continuing. Further, since the hold of special figure 1 is consumed in preference to the hold of special figure 2, even if the player starts left-handed after the jackpot game state ends and the first start opening 420 is given a start prize, the player It does not mean that the game ball is wasted. Further, the start fluctuation start of the hold of the special figure 2 can be postponed by making the first starting port 420 start and win a prize in the state where the hold of the special figure 2 is held. In this way, the state in which the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is suspended can be continued for a long time, and various effects can be performed by utilizing this continuous time. As a result, it becomes possible to give the player a new interest after the end of the time-saving game, that is, the time that can be stayed in the revival stage can be extended.

Further, in the third embodiment, if the special figure 1 big hit is obtained by the lottery by holding the special figure 1 in the time-saving game state after the big hit game at the time of the first hit, the stage shifts to the super bonus stage, for example. Before the start of the big hit game of the first hit or during the big hit game, by hitting left to maximize the number of holdings of special figure 1 and increasing the possibility of special figure 1 big hit, it shifts to the super bonus stage. It is possible to provide the player with a new interest of increasing the possibility. In addition, it is also possible to control to always shift to the super bonus stage when the special figure 1 big hit is obtained by the lottery by holding the special figure 1 in the time-saving game state after the big hit game at the time of the first hit.

Further, in the third embodiment, when the special figure 1 jackpot is reached in the revival stage, the player shifts to the super bonus stage, so that the left-handed strike is started after the jackpot game state ends, and the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is interrupted. By advancing the game so that there is no such thing and aiming for the special figure 1 big hit while holding the hold of the special figure 2, it is possible to shift to the super bonus stage instead of the challenge stage in the case of the special figure 1 big hit. It is possible to provide the player with an interest. In addition, after the start of the resurrection stage, the start timing of the left-handed strike is set, for example, after all the holds of special figure 2 have been digested, one or two holds of special figure 2 have been digested, and then the start time of the resurrection stage. It is also possible to provide the player with a new hobby that can be selected.

Although the third embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the third embodiment of the present invention is not limited to the above. For example, in the super bonus stage, three jackpots, which is the number of limiters, may be produced as a series of jackpots including the period of the time-saving game state. Further, after the third big hit game is completed in the super bonus stage, a character may be selected to perform a success / failure effect of the hold sequence as in the effect of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 189.

Further, in the third embodiment, as a condition for ending the time-saving game state, the lottery of the first special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (more than the maximum number of reserved symbols of the first special symbol, for example, 5 times) during the time-saving game state. In that case, it is controlled to end the time-saving game state. Therefore, the hold of special figure 1 remains in the state of the time saving game of one time reduction after the end of the big hit game by the first hit by the special figure 1 lottery, and the player's left during the change of special figure 1 due to this hold. If the change of special figure 1 is performed 5 times in succession after the end of the first hit, such as when the number of hold of special figure 1 becomes 4 by hitting, it is possible to make the last 5th rotation a long change. Is. This makes it possible to impress the end of the time-saving game state. In addition, when the lottery of the first special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, five times) during the time-saving game state, the game ball is launched so as to accumulate the hold of the second special symbol before the time-saving game state ends. You may perform a special production that encourages you. In particular, when the number of time reductions is 100, it is better to hit right and get the jackpot for the number of limiters earlier than to hit left and aim for the special figure 1 jackpot. Since the consumption can be suppressed, it is possible to notify the player that it is disadvantageous by a special effect.

Further, in the third embodiment, when the game is played by left-handed with the holding of the special figure 2 left, the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is continued until the next big hit is won while the holding of the special figure 2 is left. There may be a variation pattern determination table capable of. Specifically, a fluctuation pattern determination table in which the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 having a relatively longer fluctuation time is selected in the case where the special figure 2 is held and the case where the special figure 2 is not held. To do. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a new hobby such as aiming for a big hit by the special figure 1 lottery while maintaining the possibility of the V big hit via the small hit by holding the special figure 2.

Further, in the third embodiment, when there is a hold of the special figure 2, the fluctuation patterns of the special figures 1 and 2 are determined by referring to the special figure 2 hold useful table shown in FIG. 205. It is easier to determine the fluctuation pattern of Special Figure 1 which has a longer fluctuation time of about 10 to 20 seconds than the fluctuation pattern of Special Figure 1 determined by a normal table, but it is not limited to this, and for example, the fluctuation pattern of Special Figure 2 is reserved. When there is 0 or 1 hold of special figure 1, it may be easier to determine a fluctuation pattern having a longer fluctuation time than when 2 or more holds of special figure 1.

Specifically, the second table useful for holding the special figure 2 for determining the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 with reference to the case where the hold of the special figure 2 is present and the hold of the special figure 1 is 0 or 1. The second table of the special figure 2 hold useful is designed so that a longer variation (for example, 60 to 90 seconds) than the special figure 2 hold useful table is selected. Then, when there are two or more holds of special figure 1, the special figure 2 hold useful table shown in FIG. 205 is referred to, and when the hold of special figure 1 is 0 or 1, the special figure 2 hold is useful. The second table is referenced. The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern according to the second table, which is useful for holding the special figure 2, is set so that the game ball is continuously fired and the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is not interrupted, that is, at least 1 during the fluctuation of the special figure 1. If the setting is such that the number of holds is set, it can be set as appropriate.

In this way, by adjusting the fluctuation pattern on the condition that the remaining hold of special figure 2 exists in the normal game state, the change of special figure 1 is preferentially digested, while the remaining hold of special figure 2 4 Therefore, it will be possible to hold it until the first hit of the next special figure 1 without digesting the continuation rate of 80%.

Here, in order to be able to hold the remaining hold of the special figure 2 until the first hit of the next special figure 1, for example, the starting prize for the first starting port 420 is designed to be 6.0 times per minute, and the game is played. If the number of times is 5.5 times per minute in consideration of nails, by winning a prize at the first starting port 420 once every 11 seconds on average, the fluctuation of the special figure 1 can be continued without interruption. Although illustrated in the 6.0-time design, the set number of start prizes per minute (reference start number) can be changed arbitrarily. In that case, the fluctuation time can be adjusted according to the reference start number, such that when the reference start number is low, the fluctuation time is long, and when the reference start number is high, the fluctuation time is shortened.

Then, in the variation pattern of the identification information in the display device 16, for example, in the case of a normal table, it is a normal variation, but in the table for determining the variation pattern of the special figure 1 when there is a hold of the special figure 2, it is long. The fluctuation is selected, and especially when the hold of the special figure 1 is 0 or 1, the normal fluctuation is simulated and rotated a plurality of times, and then the long fluctuation is performed.

As a result, in the revival stage, it is possible to provide the player with a new hobby that the game can be advanced aiming at the big hit by the special figure 1 lottery without consuming the special figure 2 hold. When the number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 with the special figure 2 hold remaining reaches a specific number of times (for example, 100 times), the table is switched to the normal table to accelerate the digestion of the hold of the special figure 1. The special figure 2 hold may be consumed. Here, the specific number of times may be set to a fixed numerical value in advance, or may be appropriately set by calculation according to the progress of the game. It is also possible to control the fluctuation pattern table of the special symbol to change at a specific rotation speed, or to perform a lottery to change the fluctuation pattern table of the special figure 1 for each fluctuation.

Further, in the third embodiment, the right side area of the game area 21 has a mechanism for constantly opening and closing the entrance periodically (for example, once every 10 to 100S), and winning a prize is an opportunity for the special drawing 1 lottery. A third starting port 470 (see FIG. 217) may be provided, and an image guiding the opening timing of the third starting port 470 may be displayed on the display device 16. As a result, for example, in the time-saving game state where the number of time reductions is 100 times, by stopping the launch of the game ball when guidance occurs during right-handed striking, the variation of the special figure 1 becomes 5 times and the time-saving game state ends. You may play the game so as to avoid this, or you may save the special figure 1 hold by continuing to hit the game ball. Further, as shown in FIG. 217, by arranging the first big winning opening 540a in the right side region and above the third starting opening 470, it is possible to win a prize in the third starting opening 470 during the big hit game. May be good. Further, in the normal game state, the opening cycle of the entrance of the third starting port may be made very long and the opening time may be set short so that the starting port cannot be aimed at. Further, by this mechanism, it is possible to reduce the difference in the frequency of the special figure 1 lottery according to the way the player hits the special figure 2 fluctuation. Alternatively, by lengthening the cycle of constantly opening and closing and performing an effect of notifying the opening and closing timing, it is possible to control so that the hitting method avoiding the special drawing 1 lottery is possible.

Further, in the third embodiment, since the change of the special figure 1 is always prioritized for the remaining hold of the special figure 2 after the big hit when the limiter number is reached, even if there is an interruption of the change of the special figure 1, the special figure 1 is special. FIG. 2 Hold look-ahead may be enabled. As a result, it is possible to extend the period of the character production shown in FIG. 189 by interrupting the fluctuation of the special figure 1. In addition, the pre-reading effect that can be executed in the second embodiment can be executed in the third embodiment. In addition, by enabling the look-ahead of the special figure 2 hold, the look-ahead is performed by digesting the special figure 2 hold in which the look-ahead is performed first, or by increasing the priority hold of the special figure 1. It becomes possible for the player to postpone the special figure 2 hold or to select and play the game.

Further, in the third embodiment, in the challenge stage after the first hit, if a big hit is obtained by the special figure 1 lottery, the player goes straight to the super bonus stage, but shifts to either the challenge stage or the super bonus stage. May be good. In this case, the probability of shifting to the challenge stage is 65%, and the probability of shifting to the super bonus stage is 35%, but the probability of shifting to the super bonus stage may be higher than that of the challenge stage.

[Modified example of the third embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 218 and 219. In the third embodiment, as described above, when the special figure 2 small hit is changed to the V big hit, 100 time reductions are given after the big hit game state ends. On the other hand, in the modified example of the third embodiment, when the special figure 2 small hit is changed to the V big hit, whether the gaming state immediately before the special figure 2 small hit is the time-saving gaming state or the non-time-saving gaming state. The number of time reductions given after the end of the jackpot game state is distributed.

FIG. 218 is an explanatory diagram showing the distribution of the number of time reductions. As shown in FIG. 218, there are two types of special figure 1 jackpots, one per 1-1 and one per 1-2. The probability that the special figure 1 jackpot is 1-1 is 99%, and in the case of hit 1-1, regardless of whether the gaming state before the special figure 1 jackpot is a time-saving gaming state or a non-time-saving gaming state. After the end of the special figure 1 big hit, the game shifts to the time-saving game state in which the number of time-savings is one. The probability that the special figure 1 jackpot is 1-2 is 1%, and in the case of hit 1-2, regardless of whether the gaming state before the special figure 1 jackpot is a time-saving game state or a non-time-saving gaming state. After the end of the special figure 1 big hit, the game shifts to the time-saving game state in which the number of time-savings is 100 times.

There are two types of special figure 2 big hits, hit 2-1 and hit 2-2. The probability that the special figure 2 jackpot is 2-1 is 99%. In the case of hit 2-1 if the game state before the special figure 2 big hit is the time-saving game state, after the end of the special figure 2 big hit, the game shifts to the time-saving game state where the number of time reductions is 5 times, and the special figure 2 big hit is common. If the game state is a non-time-saving game state, the game shifts to the time-saving game state in which the number of time reductions is 100 after the end of the special figure 2 jackpot. The probability that the special figure 2 jackpot is 2-2 is 1%. In the case of hit 2-2, regardless of whether the game state before the special figure 2 big hit is the time-saving game state or the non-time-saving game state, the game state shifts to the time-saving game state where the number of time reductions is 100 times after the end of the special figure 2 big hit. To do.

Next, the transition of the production stage will be described.
FIG. 219 is an explanatory diagram showing the transition of the effect stage in the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment. In the normal game state in which there is no hold of the special figure 2, the effect of the normal stage is executed.

In the normal stage, if a big hit is won in the special figure 1 lottery, the stage shifts to the first hit bonus stage, and the production for one first hit is executed. This effect includes giving a notification prompting the player to hit right before the start of the big hit game. This right-handed notification will continue during the challenge stage. In the first hit bonus stage, any one of "3 times", "6 times", "8 times", and "10 times" is played, so 240 to 800 game balls can be expected to be paid out.

After the big hit game state ends, the stage shifts from the first hit bonus stage to the small hit high probability stage. The small hit high probability stage is continued during the time-saving game state and after the time-saving game state ends until the holding of special figure 2 is removed. When shifting from the first hit bonus stage to the small hit high probability stage, the number of time reductions is one, and only one can be won at the second starting port 440. Therefore, in this one time reduction game state. Special figure 2 fluctuates once and stops. Then, when the special figure 2 big hit or the V big hit via the small hit is reached, the stage shifts to the bonus stage. Special figure 2 If there is no big hit or small hit, the stage shifts to the normal stage. If the special figure 1 is held before the start of the big hit game state, the change of the special figure 1 is prioritized over the change of the special figure 2. In some cases. In this case as well, the stage shifts to the bonus stage.

In the bonus stage, one big hit game will be produced. During the bonus stage, any of the round games "3 times", "6 times", "8 times", and "10 times" will be played as jackpot games, so 240 to 800 game balls are expected to be paid out. it can.

After the big hit game state ends, the stage shifts from the bonus stage to the small hit high probability stage. When shifting from the bonus stage to the small hit high probability stage, the number of time reductions is 5 or 100 times, so the special figure 2 is higher than when shifting from the first hit bonus stage to the small hit high probability stage. It becomes easier to accumulate the hold of, and the probability of winning a small hit increases accordingly. Then, every time a special figure 2 big hit or a V big hit via a small hit is reached, the bonus stage and the small hit high probability stage are looped.

In particular, if a special figure 2 big hit or a V big hit via a small hit is caused by holding the special figure 2 remaining after the time saving game state ends, the special figure 2 big hit in the non-time saving game state is obtained. The game shifts to the high-probability stage and the time-saving game is executed 100 times. It should be noted that, when the special figure 2 that remains during the time-saving game state period and after the time-saving game state ends does not result in a special figure 2 big hit or a small hit, the stage shifts to the normal stage.

If the transition between the small hit high probability stage and the bonus stage is repeated and the big hit game state reaches the limiter number three times in a row, the small hit high probability stage after the end of the third big hit game state is a normal game. An image that starts from the state and prompts the player to strike left is displayed on the display device 16. At this time, if the special figure 2 that remains after the end of the big hit game state results in a special figure 2 big hit or a V big hit via a small hit, the special figure 2 big hit in the non-time saving game state is obtained. After the end of the big hit game state in the bonus stage, the stage shifts to the small hit high probability stage and the time saving game of 100 times is started. If the special figure 2 that remains after the end of the time-saving game state does not result in a special figure 2 big hit or a small hit, the stage shifts to the normal stage.

According to the modified example of the third embodiment configured as described above, if a special figure 2 big hit or a V big hit via a small hit occurs during the time saving game state, the number of time reductions is reduced after the big hit gaming state ends. Five times are given with high probability. Furthermore, by holding the special figure 2 remaining after the end of the time-saving game state, or by holding the special figure 2 remaining when the limiter number is reached and the normal game state is entered, the special figure 2 big hit or small hit is passed. In the case of a V jackpot, 100 times of time reduction are always given after the jackpot game state ends. As described above, according to the modified example of the third embodiment, in the case of the special figure 2 big hit or the V big hit from the special figure 2 small hit, the distribution of the number of time reductions differs depending on the game state at the time of winning the special figure 2 small hit. I am doing it. As a result, even if the same jackpot is used, the number of time reductions changes according to the situation in which the jackpot is achieved, and the number of time reductions does not become a jackpot during the number of hours reductions, but a jackpot is obtained by holding the special figure 2 remaining after the end of the time reduction game state. Since it is more advantageous, it has the effect of further improving the interest after the end of the time-saving game state.

According to the above-described modification, the limiter number is mounted, but the limiter number may not be mounted. In this case, as shown in FIG. 220, in the case of a big hit triggered by the special figure 2 lottery, one is added to the number of time reductions after the end of the big hit game state, and one of one, five, and 100 times. May be decided by lottery. According to this modification, when shifting from the bonus stage to the high probability of small hits, there is a high possibility that there are four special figure 2 holds before the start of the time-saving game state, and in this case, substantially five times. , 9 times, 104 times special figure 2 lottery, the winning probability is 1/3 small hit winning, it becomes a continuous big hit. Further, for example, by setting the probability of one time reduction to 33%, the probability of five times to 66%, and the probability of 100 time reductions to 1%, there is a possibility that the time reduction will be once every three times. Is increased, and it is possible to approach the third embodiment in which the limiter number of times is three times.

According to the above-described modification, the special figure 1 lottery is prioritized for digestion, but the special figure 2 lottery may be prioritized, and which of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is prioritized is determined. It can be decided as appropriate. Further, according to the above-described modification, the number of time reductions given in the case of the special figure 1 big hit is divided into either 1 time or 100 times, but for example, the number of time reductions is limited to 1 time. It does not have to be.

Further, according to the above-described modification, there is no small hit in the special figure 1 lottery, but a small hit is provided in the special figure 1 lottery, and the number of time reductions via the small hit is provided according to the state (whether the time reduction is medium or the non-time reduction medium). May be sorted. At this time, the special figure 2 may distribute the number of times of the big hit via the small hit according to the state (whether it is during the time reduction or the non-time reduction), or the number of time reductions is always 1 or 100 regardless of the state. You may do it.

As described above, as one embodiment of the present invention, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment has been described.

<Appendix a>
In a pachinko gaming machine, generally, when a player launches a game ball into a game area by a launching device and the game ball wins a prize in a winning opening or the like provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines perform a jackpot game in which the jackpot, which is normally closed, is repeatedly opened for a predetermined period of time. In the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the game balls that have won the big prize opening. Here, some of the big winning openings have a blade member, and such a large winning opening repeatedly operates the blade member to change from the closed state to the open state to execute the big hit game. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines perform a small hit game in which the large winning opening is opened for a predetermined period from the closed state.

For example, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-233375, during a small hit game, the blade member changes its posture to an open posture that opens the opening / closing region, and the gaming ball can enter the opening / closing region. There is a pachinko game machine. In this pachinko gaming machine, a V winning opening is provided in the opening / closing area, and the game ball wins a prize in the V winning opening during the small hit game, so that the pachinko gaming machine is controlled to the big hit game state. In this pachinko gaming machine, when a game ball wins a prize in the V winning opening during a small hit game and is controlled to a big hit game state, a small hit symbol showing the result of a special symbol determination that triggered the current big hit game state. The game state after the jackpot game is completed is determined according to the type of. It should be noted that, for example, the transition probability to the jackpot game state changes as the game state changes. Therefore, as a result, the number of game balls that the player can acquire changes, and whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player may change.

By the way, in the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-233375, it is set that the small hit game is not won in the first start opening prize and the small hit game is won in the second start opening prize with high probability. ing. That is, during the time-saving game, the small hit game is easily won, and the opening / closing area is easily opened. Therefore, there is a possibility that the game ball wins the V winning opening and shifts to the big hit game state. Further, in this type of game machine, there are many cases where the fluctuation due to the second start opening winning, which is easy to win the small hit game, is suspended four times after the time saving game is completed. Therefore, in recent years, a model has been introduced that aims to improve the interest of the player by performing a special effect until the four holds are exhausted.

However, in such a game machine, the period of the special effect is short because the special effect ends when the four holds due to the winning of the second start opening are exhausted. For this reason, it was difficult to give the player an interest.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of giving a new interest to a player.

In this respect, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment has the following features.

(A-1) A launching means for launching a game ball and
A game having a first area (for example, the right side area) of the game area in which the game ball is rollable and can be hit, and a second area (for example, the left side area) of the game area different from the first area. Board and
A first starting area (for example, a second starting port 440) arranged in the first area and through which a game ball can pass,
A second starting area (for example, the first starting port 420) arranged in the second area and through which the game ball can pass,
A special game state control means capable of shifting to a special game state advantageous to the player, triggered by either the passage of the game ball through the first start area or the passage of the game ball through the second start area.
A variable winning device (for example, the first special electric accessory 601) capable of entering a game ball in the special gaming state, and
Identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74, display device 16, etc.) that notifies the player of the transition to the special game state by fluctuating and stopping the identification information.
When the game ball passes through the first starting area while the identification information is fluctuating, the first holding means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103), second) that holds the fluctuation of the identification information a predetermined number of times. Special symbol start storage area (0) to (4)),
A second holding means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103), first) that holds the change of the identification information a predetermined number of times when the game ball passes through the second starting area while the identification information is changing. Special symbol start storage area (0) to (4)),
A passing area (for example, a passing gate 49) arranged in the first area and through which the game ball can pass,
A second state capable of switching between a first state that facilitates the passage of the game ball launched into the first region to the first starting region and a second state that makes it difficult for the game ball to pass through the first starting region. 1 Displacement member (for example, ordinary electric accessory 460) and
A determination means for determining whether or not to switch the first displacement member in the second state to the first state when the game ball has passed through the passing region is provided.
The special gaming state includes a first special gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) and a second special gaming state (for example, a small hit gaming state) different from the first special gaming state.
After the end of the first special gaming state, the determination means switches the first displacement member to the first state to improve the passing frequency to the first starting region (for example, a time-saving gaming state). ), And when the number of fluctuations of the identification information reaches a predetermined number of ends, the frequency of passing to the first starting region is reduced from that of the first gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state). The game state control means to shift to the state) and
Further provided is a suggestion means for suggesting to the player that the game ball is fired in the second region when the transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state is provided.
The identification information display means is a gaming machine characterized in that changes held by the second holding means are displayed with priority over changes held by the first holding means.

According to (a-1), when the state shifts from the first game state (for example, the time-saving game state) to the second game state (for example, the normal game state), the game is to launch a game ball into the second region. By suggesting to a person, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being continuously launched into the first region (so-called right-handed) more than necessary. Further, since the identification information display means displays the fluctuations held by the second holding means in preference to the fluctuations held by the first holding means, the first holding means changes the identification information. By passing the game ball through the second starting area in the held state, the start of the variation held by the first holding means can be delayed. In this way, it is possible to continue the state in which the fluctuation is held by the first holding means for a long time, and it is possible to perform various effects by utilizing this continued time. As a result, after the end of the first gaming state, it becomes possible to give the player a new interest.
(A-2) In (a-1)
A special area (for example, V winning opening 545) through which the game ball entered in the variable winning device can pass, and
A second displacement member (for example, shutter 546) that can be switched between a first displacement state that facilitates the passage of the game ball to the special region and a second displacement state that makes it difficult for the game ball to pass through the special region. Further prepared,
The second displacement member is switched to the first displacement state at least in the second special gaming state.
When the game ball passes through the first starting area, the special gaming state control means has a higher probability of shifting to the first special gaming state when the game ball passes through the second starting area. A gaming machine characterized by shifting to a second special gaming state and shifting to the first special gaming state when a game ball passes through the special area in the second special gaming state.

According to (a-2), in the game machine that shifts to the first special gaming state on the condition that the game ball passes through the special area when the transition to the second special gaming state occurs, the same as (a-1). It is possible to achieve the same effect.

<Appendix b>
In a pachinko gaming machine, generally, when a player launches a game ball into a game area by a launching device and the game ball wins a prize in a winning opening or the like provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines perform a jackpot game in which the jackpot, which is normally closed, is repeatedly opened for a predetermined period of time. In the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the game balls that have won the big prize opening. Here, some of the big winning openings have a blade member, and such a large winning opening repeatedly operates the blade member to change from the closed state to the open state to execute the big hit game. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines perform a small hit game in which the large winning opening is opened for a predetermined period from the closed state.

For example, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-233375, during a small hit game, the blade member changes its posture to an open posture that opens the opening / closing region, and the gaming ball can enter the opening / closing region. There is a pachinko game machine. In this pachinko gaming machine, a V winning opening is provided in the opening / closing area, and the game ball wins a prize in the V winning opening during the small hit game, so that the pachinko gaming machine is controlled to the big hit game state. In this pachinko gaming machine, when a game ball wins a prize in the V winning opening during a small hit game and is controlled to a big hit game state, a small hit symbol showing the result of a special symbol determination that triggered the current big hit game state. The game state after the jackpot game is completed is determined according to the type of. It should be noted that, for example, the transition probability to the jackpot game state changes as the game state changes. Therefore, as a result, the number of game balls that the player can acquire changes, and whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player may change.

By the way, in the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-233375, it is set that the small hit game is not won in the first start opening prize and the small hit game is won in the second start opening prize with high probability. ing. That is, during the time-saving game, the small hit game is easily won, and the opening / closing area is easily opened. Therefore, there is a possibility that the game ball wins the V winning opening and shifts to the big hit game state. Further, in this type of game machine, since there are many cases where the fluctuation due to the second start opening winning, which makes it easy to win the small hit game after the time saving game is completed, is held four times, these four times are held. Models that improve the interest of players by performing special effects before they are digested have appeared.

In the game machine as described above, the period of the special effect is short because the special effect ends when the four holds due to the second start opening winning are exhausted. For this reason, it was difficult to give the player an interest.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of giving a new interest to a player.

In this respect, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment has the following features.

(B-1) A launching means for launching a game ball and
A game having a first area (for example, the right side area) of the game area in which the game ball is rollable and can be hit, and a second area (for example, the left side area) of the game area different from the first area. Board and
A first starting area (for example, a second starting port 440) arranged in the first area and through which a game ball can pass,
A second starting area (for example, the first starting port 420) arranged in the second area and through which the game ball can pass,
A special game state control means capable of shifting to a special game state advantageous to the player, triggered by either the passage of the game ball through the first start area or the passage of the game ball through the second start area.
A variable winning device (for example, the first special electric accessory 601) capable of entering a game ball in the special gaming state, and
Identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74, display device 16, etc.) that notifies the player of the transition to the special game state by fluctuating and stopping the identification information.
When the game ball passes through the first starting area while the identification information is fluctuating, the first holding means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103), second) that holds the fluctuation of the identification information a predetermined number of times. Special symbol start storage area (0) to (4)),
A second holding means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103), first) that holds the change of the identification information a predetermined number of times when the game ball passes through the second starting area while the identification information is changing. Special symbol start storage area (0) to (4)),
A passing area (for example, a passing gate 49) arranged in the first area and through which the game ball can pass,
A second state capable of switching between a first state that facilitates the passage of the game ball launched into the first region to the first starting region and a second state that makes it difficult for the game ball to pass through the first starting region. 1 Displacement member (for example, ordinary electric accessory 460) and
A determination means for determining whether or not to switch the first displacement member in the second state to the first state when the game ball has passed through the passing region is provided.
The special gaming state includes a first special gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) and a second special gaming state (for example, a small hit gaming state) different from the first special gaming state.
After the end of the first special gaming state, the determination means switches the first displacement member to the first state to improve the passing frequency to the first starting region (for example, a time-saving gaming state). ), And when the number of fluctuations of the identification information reaches a predetermined number of ends, the frequency of passing to the first starting region is reduced from that of the first gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state). The game state control means to shift to the state) and
Further provided with a fluctuation time setting means for setting the fluctuation time of the identification information,
The variable time setting means
In the second gaming state, when the first holding means has a hold of the change of the identification information, the change time of the identification information triggered by the passage of the game ball to the second starting region is set to the first. It can be set longer than the fluctuation time of the identification information triggered by the passage of the game ball to the second starting region when the holding means does not have the retention of the fluctuation of the identification information.
The identification information display means is a gaming machine characterized in that changes held by the second holding means are displayed with priority over changes held by the first holding means.

According to (b-1), the identification information display means displays the variation held by the second holding means in preference to the variation held by the first holding means, and displays the variation in the second gaming state. (For example, in the normal gaming state), the fluctuation time of the identification information when the first holding means has a hold of the change of the identification information, and the identification information when the first holding means does not have the hold of the change of the identification information. It can be set to be longer than the fluctuation time. Therefore, the change of the identification information is likely to be held by the second holding means before the change held by the first holding means is digested, and the holding of the change of the identification information of the first holding means is held. , It becomes possible to adjust the fluctuation time of the identification information based on the holding of the first holding means so that the game of passing the game ball to the second starting area can be advanced. As a result, the transition to the special gaming state due to the change in the identification information of the first holding means is left as a pleasure later, and the game is advanced aiming at the transition to the special gaming state triggered by the passage of the second starting area. Can proceed. In this way, after the end of the first gaming state (for example, the time-saving gaming state), it is possible to give the player a new interest.

(B-2) In (b-1), the variable time setting means sets the variable time of the identification information when the number of holdings of the first holding means is less than the predetermined number to the predetermined number or more. A gaming machine characterized in that it can be set longer than the fluctuation time of the identification information.

According to (b-2), when the number of holdings of the first holding means is less than the predetermined number (for example, 0 or 1), the fluctuation time of the identification information is equal to or more than the predetermined number (for example, 2 to 2). It can be set longer than the fluctuation time of the identification information of 4). As a result, it becomes possible to secure a time for passing the game ball through the second starting area while the identification information based on the hold of the second hold means is fluctuating, and the hold of the first hold means is held. In the state, the identification information based on the hold of the second hold means can continue to fluctuate.

(B-3) In (b-1, 2),
A special area (for example, V winning opening 545) through which the game ball entered in the variable winning device can pass, and
A second displacement member (for example, shutter 546) that can be switched between a first displacement state that facilitates the passage of the game ball to the special region and a second displacement state that makes it difficult for the game ball to pass through the special region. Further prepared,
The second displacement member is switched to the first displacement state at least in the second special gaming state.
When the game ball passes through the first starting area, the special gaming state control means has a higher probability of shifting to the first special gaming state when the game ball passes through the second starting area. A gaming machine characterized by shifting to a second special gaming state and shifting to the first special gaming state when a game ball passes through the special area in the second special gaming state.

According to (b-3), in the game machine that shifts to the first special gaming state on the condition that the game ball passes through the special area when shifting to the second special gaming state, (b-1, 2). ) And the same effects can be achieved.

<Appendix A>
In a pachinko gaming machine, generally, when a player launches a game ball, which is a game medium, into a game area by a launching device, and the game ball wins a prize in a winning opening or the like provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls Will be paid out. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines perform a jackpot game in which the jackpot, which is normally closed, is repeatedly opened for a predetermined period of time. In the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the game balls that have won the big prize opening. Here, some of the big winning openings have a blade member, and such a large winning opening repeatedly operates the blade member to change from the closed state to the open state to execute the big hit game. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines perform a small hit game in which the large winning opening is opened for a predetermined period from the closed state.

For example, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-233375, during a small hit game, the blade member changes its posture to an open posture that opens the opening / closing region, and the gaming ball can enter the opening / closing region. There is a pachinko game machine. In this pachinko gaming machine, a V winning opening is provided in the opening / closing area, and the game ball wins a prize in the V winning opening during the small hit game, so that the pachinko gaming machine is controlled to the big hit game state. In this pachinko gaming machine, when a game ball wins a prize in the V winning opening during a small hit game and is controlled to a big hit game state, a small hit symbol showing the result of a special symbol determination that triggered the current big hit game state. The game state after the jackpot game is completed is determined according to the type of. It should be noted that, for example, the transition probability to the jackpot game state changes as the game state changes. Therefore, as a result, the number of game balls that the player can acquire changes, and whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player may change.

By the way, in the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-233375, it is easy to win a small hit game during a short-time game, and since the opening / closing area is easy to open, a game ball wins a prize in the V winning opening. There is a possibility of shifting to the jackpot game state. In addition, even if the player is not in the short-time game, the game state may shift to the jackpot game state, and the game state may be changed. As described above, the number of game balls that can be acquired by the player changes as a result of the change in the game state. As described above, according to the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the number of gaming balls that the player can acquire as a result of the change in the gaming state changes rather than a constant ratio. Therefore, it is suppressed that the game becomes monotonous.

The present inventor improves the interest of the player in the game and the player's motivation for the game by devising the relevance of a plurality of types of effects in the process of diligently examining the above-mentioned game machine. I came up with the idea that it could be improved.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game and improving a player's motivation for playing a game. To do.

In this respect, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment has the following features.

(A-1) A game control means capable of controlling game execution based on a set value of one of a plurality of set values, and a game control means.
Identification information control means that can display the identification information (special symbol) in a variable manner and then stop it.
A first effect execution means capable of executing any of a plurality of predetermined effects (display of an identification symbol for effect), and
A second effect executing means capable of executing a suggestion effect (setting suggestion effect) that can suggest the set value, and
An effect selection means capable of selecting an effect that can be executed by the first effect execution means based on one of the effect selection tables among the plurality of effect selection tables.
When one effect is continuously executed by the first effect execution means, the effect selection means can switch the effect selection table according to the number of consecutive times of the effect.
In the second effect executing means, when a predetermined effect (display of a specific effect identification symbol (predetermined chance eye)) is executed by the first effect executing means, the next variation display is performed by the identification information control means. It is possible to perform the suggestion effect while
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, it is possible to execute any one of a plurality of predetermined effects (display of an identification symbol for effect) (first effect). , When a predetermined effect (display of a specific effect identification symbol (predetermined chance eye)) is executed as the first effect, an effect (setting suggestion effect) (second effect) that can suggest a set value is executed. It is possible to do. That is, it is configured to execute the second effect according to the type of effect selected as the first effect. Then, the selection of the first effect can be controlled according to the continuous execution of one effect as the first effect. Through such a relationship between the first production and the second production, it is possible to realize a tasteful production, and it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the development of the production.

As the plurality of effect selection tables, for example, an effect selection table A and an effect selection table B can be provided. The effect selection table B can be configured so that the probability that one effect (specific effect) is selected is lower than that of the effect selection table A. Alternatively, in the effect selection table B, the probability that a specific effect is selected may be set to 0. Then, when the number of consecutive times of a specific effect (for example, the value of the tempai counter) is less than a predetermined number, the first effect (identification symbol for effect) is selected with reference to the effect selection table A, while being specified. When the number of consecutive effects of is reached a predetermined number (for example, when a specific effect is executed in a predetermined number of consecutive special symbol fluctuations), the first effect (effect) is referred to with reference to the effect selection table B. It is possible to configure to select the identification symbol). Even when the number of consecutive times of a specific effect reaches a predetermined number, if the result of a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is a predetermined result (big hit to small hit), the effect selection table A The first effect (identification symbol for effect) may be selected with reference to. That is, when the number of consecutive times of a specific effect reaches a predetermined number, the effect selection is performed on condition that the result of a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) corresponding to the special symbol variation related to the first effect is lost. You may switch to table B.

In the second embodiment, it has been described that the first effect is an effect of displaying an identification symbol for effect. In the present invention, the content of the first effect is not limited to the display of the symbol, and any effect can be appropriately adopted. For example, an effect of displaying a symbol, a mark, or the like may be adopted as the first effect, or an effect using color, sound, or light may be adopted as the first effect. Further, the specific effect may be the same effect as the predetermined effect, or may be a different effect from the predetermined effect. For example, as a predetermined effect, an effect of displaying a predetermined chance eye is adopted, while as a specific effect, an effect of displaying a chance eye different from the predetermined chance eye (for example, a head odd number tempai) is adopted. May be. Further, as a specific effect and a predetermined effect, it is possible to provide a plurality of types of effects. For example, when a plurality of types of effects (effect A, effect B, effect C, etc.) are provided as specific effects, even if any of the plurality of types of effects is selected. While adding the value of the tempai counter, the value of the tempai counter may be cleared when none of the plurality of types of effects is selected.

(A-2) A lottery means capable of performing a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) related to a game based on a set value of one of a plurality of set values.
When the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means becomes a predetermined result (big hit to small hit), a specific game capable of shifting to a specific game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player. State control means and
A first effect executing means capable of executing any first effect (display of an identification symbol for effect) of a plurality of predetermined first effects, and
A second effect (setting suggestion effect) that can suggest the set value when a predetermined first effect (display of a specific effect identification symbol (predetermined chance eye)) is executed by the first effect execution means. The second production execution means that can execute
When the predetermined first effect is not executed by the first effect executing means, a third effect (background change notice) that can suggest that the result of the predetermined lottery has become the predetermined result is executed. With a third production execution means that can be done,
The first effect executing means can suggest that the result of the predetermined lottery has become the predetermined result by continuously executing the predetermined first effect.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, it is possible to execute the first effect (display of the identification symbol for effect) of any of a plurality of predetermined first effects, and also. When a predetermined first effect (display of a specific effect identification symbol (predetermined chance eye)) is executed as the first effect, a second effect (setting suggestion effect) that can suggest a set value is executed. Is possible. Further, when the result of a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) becomes a predetermined result (big hit to small hit), it is possible to shift to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) which is advantageous for the player. When a predetermined first effect (display of a specific effect identification symbol (predetermined chance eye)) is not executed as one effect, the result of a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is a predetermined result (big hit to small hit). ), It is possible to execute the third effect (background change notice). On the other hand, the result of a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is a predetermined result (big hit to small) by continuously executing a predetermined first effect (display of a specific effect identification symbol (predetermined chance eye)). It is configured so that it can be suggested that it has become a hit). Through the relationship between the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect, it is possible to realize a tasteful effect, and it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the development of the effect.

As an aspect suggesting that the result of the predetermined lottery has become the predetermined result, the player indicates that the result of the predetermined lottery has become the predetermined result by combining the first effects that are continuously executed. Is recognizable (as a result, it is suggested that the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result), or the first effect of one of the first effects continuously executed. (As a result, it is suggested that the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result) so that the player can recognize that the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result. It can be said that these aspects also "suggest that the result of the predetermined lottery has become the predetermined result by continuously executing the predetermined first effect". The third effect is not particularly limited, and an arbitrary look-ahead effect can be appropriately adopted in addition to the background change notice.

(A-2') The gaming machine according to (A-2).
Identification information control means that can display the identification information (special symbol) in a variable manner and then stop it.
A first effect selection means capable of selecting the first effect that can be executed by the first effect execution means based on the effect selection table of one of the plurality of effect selection tables.
When the predetermined first effect is executed by the first effect executing means, the second effect executing means performs the second effect while the next variation display is performed by the identification information control means. It is possible to do
When the predetermined first effect is continuously executed by the first effect executing means, the first effect selection means switches the effect selection table according to the number of consecutive times of the predetermined first effect. It is possible,
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, when a predetermined first effect (display of a specific effect identification symbol (predetermined chance eye)) is executed, the next variation display is performed. Where it is possible to execute the second effect in the meantime, if a predetermined first effect (display of a specific effect identification symbol (predetermined chance eye)) is continuously executed, a predetermined effect is executed. It is configured so that the effect selection table can be switched according to the number of consecutive times of the first effect (display of a specific effect identification symbol (predetermined chance eye)). As a result, it is possible to change the content of the first effect according to the number of consecutive times of the predetermined first effect (display of the specific effect identification symbol (predetermined chance eye)), and realize a more tasteful effect. can do.

(A-3) A lottery means capable of performing a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) related to a game based on a set value of one of a plurality of set values.
When the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means becomes a predetermined result (big hit to small hit), a specific game capable of shifting to a specific game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player. State control means and
A first effect executing means capable of executing any first effect (display of an identification symbol for effect) of a plurality of predetermined first effects, and
A second effect (setting suggestion effect) that can suggest the set value when a predetermined first effect (display of a specific effect identification symbol (predetermined chance eye)) is executed by the first effect execution means. With a second production execution means capable of executing
As the predetermined first effect, a plurality of first effects are provided.
The first effect executing means can suggest that the result of the predetermined lottery has become the predetermined result through the type of the predetermined first effect.
When the predetermined first effect is executed by the first effect executing means, the second effect executing means can suggest the set value with a probability according to the type of the predetermined first effect. Is,
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, it is possible to execute the first effect (display of the identification symbol for effect) of any of a plurality of predetermined first effects, and also. When a predetermined first effect (display of a specific effect identification symbol (predetermined chance eye)) is executed as the first effect, a second effect (setting suggestion effect) that can suggest a set value is executed. Is possible. In addition, when the result of a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) becomes a predetermined result (big hit to small hit), it is possible to shift to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) which is advantageous for the player. As a predetermined first effect (display of a specific effect identification symbol (predetermined chance eye)), a plurality of first effects are provided, and a predetermined first effect (specific effect identification symbol (predetermined)) is provided. It is configured so that it can be suggested that the result of a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) has become a predetermined result (big hit or small hit) through the type of display) of the chance eye). On the other hand, in the second effect, when a predetermined first effect (display of a specific effect identification symbol (predetermined chance eye)) is executed as the first effect, the predetermined first effect (specific effect) is executed. It is possible to suggest a set value with a probability according to the type of the identification symbol (display of a predetermined chance eye). As a result, for example, the reliability of the first effect (how much can be expected that the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is the predetermined result (big hit to small hit)) and the reliability of the second effect (suggestion). It is possible to associate it with (how reliable the set value is), and it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the development of the production.

For example, a plurality of first effects provided as predetermined first effects are referred to as a first effect A, a first effect B, and a first effect C. When the first effect A is executed, the probability that the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is a predetermined result (big hit to small hit) is 20%, and when the first effect B is executed, there is a 20% probability. The probability that the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) is the predetermined result (big hit to small hit) is 50%, and when the first effect C is executed, the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) is predetermined. The probability of being the result of (big hit to small hit) is 100%. On the other hand, when the first effect A, the first effect B, or the first effect C is executed, the second effect (setting suggestion effect) can be executed, but the first effect A is a predetermined first effect. When executed, the probability that the set value suggested in the second effect (setting suggestion effect) matches the actual set value is 20%, and the first effect B is executed as the predetermined first effect. In that case, the probability that the set value suggested in the second effect (setting suggestion effect) matches the actual set value is 50%, and when the first effect C is executed as the predetermined first effect, , The probability that the set value suggested in the second effect (setting suggestion effect) matches the actual set value is 100%. Alternatively, when the first effect A is executed, the second effect (setting suggestion effect) is executed with a 20% probability, and when the first effect B is executed, the second effect (setting suggestion effect) is executed with a 50% probability. The setting suggestion effect) may be executed, and when the first effect C is executed, the second effect (setting suggestion effect) may be executed with a 100% probability.

(A-3') The gaming machine according to (A-3).
Identification information control means that can display the identification information (special symbol) in a variable manner and then stop it.
A first effect selection means capable of selecting the first effect that can be executed by the first effect execution means based on the effect selection table of one of the plurality of effect selection tables.
When the predetermined first effect is executed by the first effect executing means, the second effect executing means performs the second effect while the next variation display is performed by the identification information control means. It is possible to do
When the predetermined first effect is continuously executed by the first effect executing means, the first effect selection means switches the effect selection table according to the number of consecutive times of the predetermined first effect. It is possible,
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, when a predetermined first effect (display of a specific effect identification symbol (predetermined chance eye)) is executed, the next variation display is performed. Where it is possible to execute the second effect in the meantime, if a predetermined first effect (display of a specific effect identification symbol (predetermined chance eye)) is continuously executed, a predetermined effect is executed. It is configured so that the effect selection table can be switched according to the number of consecutive times of the first effect (display of a specific effect identification symbol (predetermined chance eye)). As a result, it is possible to change the content of the first effect according to the number of consecutive times of the predetermined first effect (display of the specific effect identification symbol (predetermined chance eye)), and realize a more tasteful effect. can do.

(A-4) A symbol display means (display device 16 or the like) capable of displaying fluctuations and stops of symbols, and
A lottery means that can perform a predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) related to the game,
Based on the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means, a display control means capable of variablely displaying and then stopping the symbol in the symbol display means.
When the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means becomes a predetermined result (big hit to small hit), a specific game capable of shifting to a specific game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player. State control means and
A specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect (look-ahead effect) that can suggest that the result of the predetermined lottery has become the predetermined result is provided.
The specific effect executing means is
It is suggested that the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result through the continuous appearance of a specific display mode (head odd number tempai) as the display mode of the symbol to be stopped and displayed by the display control means. The first specific production execution means that can be done,
When a display mode other than the specific display mode appears as a display mode of the symbol to be stopped and displayed by the display control means, the predetermined lottery is performed while the next variable display is performed by the display control means. It is provided with a second specific effect executing means capable of suggesting that the result is the predetermined result (notifying the background change).
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, it is possible to display the symbol in a variable manner and then stop it based on the result of a predetermined lottery (big hit determination), and also to display a stop display, and also to display a predetermined lottery (big hit determination). ) Is a predetermined result (big hit to small hit), it is possible to shift to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player, and a predetermined lottery (big hit determination). It is configured so that it is possible to execute a specific effect (look-ahead effect) that can suggest that the result of is a predetermined result (big hit or small hit). Specifically, the result of a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is a predetermined result (big hit to small hit) through the continuous appearance of a specific display mode (head odd number tempai) as a display mode of the symbol to be stopped and displayed. ) (1st specific effect), but also when a display mode other than the specific display mode (head odd number tempai) appears as the display mode of the symbol to be stopped and displayed. While the next variable display is being performed, it is possible to suggest that the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) has become the predetermined result (big hit to small hit) (second specific effect). There is. That is, the suggestion that the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is the predetermined result (big hit to small hit) is given in a different production mode depending on the appearance or absence of a specific display mode (head odd number tempai). Can be done. Through the relationship between the first specific effect and the second specific effect, it is possible to realize a tasteful effect, and it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the development of the effect.

The display mode of the symbols to be stopped and displayed can be determined based on the symbol lottery table. As the symbol lottery table, a winning symbol lottery table and a losing symbol lottery table can be provided. The winning symbol lottery table can be configured so that the probability of selecting a specific display mode (head odd number tempai) is higher than that of the losing symbol lottery table. When the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) is a predetermined result (big hit to small hit), the display mode of the symbol is determined by referring to the winning symbol lottery table, and the predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) is performed. ) Is not a predetermined result (big hit or small hit), the display mode of the symbol can be determined with reference to the losing symbol lottery table. The winning symbol lottery table and the losing symbol lottery table may be provided as a kind of the above-mentioned effect selection table A, respectively.

<Appendix B>
In a pachinko gaming machine, generally, when a player launches a game ball, which is a game medium, into a game area by a launching device, and the game ball wins a prize in a winning opening or the like provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls Will be paid out. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines perform a jackpot game in which the jackpot, which is normally closed, is repeatedly opened for a predetermined period of time. In the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the game balls that have won the big prize opening. Here, some of the big winning openings have a blade member, and such a large winning opening repeatedly operates the blade member to change from the closed state to the open state to execute the big hit game. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines perform a small hit game in which the large winning opening is opened for a predetermined period from the closed state.

For example, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-233375, during a small hit game, the blade member changes its posture to an open posture that opens the opening / closing region, and the gaming ball can enter the opening / closing region. There is a pachinko game machine. In this pachinko gaming machine, a V winning opening is provided in the opening / closing area, and the game ball wins a prize in the V winning opening during the small hit game, so that the pachinko gaming machine is controlled to the big hit game state. In this pachinko gaming machine, when a game ball wins a prize in the V winning opening during a small hit game and is controlled to a big hit game state, a small hit symbol showing the result of a special symbol determination that triggered the current big hit game state. The game state after the jackpot game is completed is determined according to the type of. It should be noted that, for example, the transition probability to the jackpot game state changes as the game state changes. Therefore, as a result, the number of game balls that the player can acquire changes, and whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player may change.

By the way, in the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-233375, it is easy to win a small hit game during a short-time game, and since the opening / closing area is easy to open, a game ball wins a prize in the V winning opening. There is a possibility of shifting to the jackpot game state. In addition, even if the player is not in the short-time game, the game state may shift to the jackpot game state, and the game state may be changed. As described above, the change in the game state results in a change in the number of game balls that the player can acquire. As described above, according to the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the number of gaming balls that the player can acquire as a result of the change in the gaming state changes rather than a constant ratio. Therefore, it is suppressed that the game becomes monotonous.

The present inventor improves the interest of the player in the game and the player's motivation for the game by devising a scene for generating a specific effect in the process of diligently examining the game machine as described above. I came up with the idea that it could be improved.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game and improving a player's motivation for playing a game. To do.

In this respect, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment has the following features.

(B-1) Identification information display means (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74, display device 16, etc.) capable of performing variable display and stop display of identification information, and
A lottery means that can perform a predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) related to the game,
Based on the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means, the identification information display means can display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop the display.
When the result of the predetermined lottery becomes a predetermined result (big hit to small hit) and the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode by the display control means, a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player ), And a specific game state control means that can be transferred to
When the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result, the result of the predetermined lottery becomes the predetermined result before the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific display mode by the display control means. With suggestion means that can suggest that
As the predetermined result, a plurality of types of results including a specific result (big hit) are provided.
After shifting to the specific gaming state for a specific number of times (one less than the number of times of the limiter), the suggestion means stops and displays the identification information in the specific display mode, and triggers the stop display. When the result of one of the predetermined lottery performed after the predetermined lottery is the specific result, it is possible to execute a specific effect (freeze effect).
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the identification information display means (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74, display device) based on the result of a predetermined lottery (big hit determination). While it is possible to display the identification information in a variable manner in (16, etc.) and then stop the display, the result of a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) becomes a predetermined result (big hit to small hit), and the identification information is displayed in a specific display mode. When the stop display is displayed with, it is possible to shift to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. In addition, when the result of a predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) becomes a predetermined result (big hit to small hit), the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) is performed before the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode. It is possible to suggest that the result is a predetermined result (big hit to small hit). Here, as a predetermined result (big hit to small hit), a plurality of types of results including a specific result (big hit) are provided, and the specific game state (big hit game state) is set to a specific number of times (1 more than the limiter number). After the transition over a small number of times), the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, and one predetermined lottery is performed after the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) that triggered the stop display. When the result of (big hit determination) is a specific result (big hit), it is configured so that a specific effect (freeze effect) can be executed. That is, if the specific number of times (the number of times less than the limiter number) is expressed as (N-1) times, the specific game state (big hit game state) occurs (N-1) times and then the Nth specific game state (N-1). The condition for generating the big hit game state) is satisfied, and after the end of the Nth specific game state (big hit game state), the specific game state (big hit game state) is further determined based on the specific result (big hit). When it is determined that it can be generated, it is possible to execute a specific effect (freeze effect). As a result, even if the Nth specific game state (big hit game state) ends through the specific effect (freeze effect), a specific game state (big hit game state) based on a specific result (big hit) can occur. Can be notified to the player, so that the player's expectation that a specific effect (freeze effect) is executed can be increased. Then, when a specific effect (freeze effect) is executed, it is possible to raise the feelings of the player, and it is possible to excite the game.

The predetermined result includes a special figure 1 big hit, a special figure 2 big hit, and a small hit, and the above specific result may be a special figure 2 big hit or a small hit. Further, the specific number of times may be one less than the number of times of the limiter, or may be the same number of times as the number of times of the limiter.

(B-2) A lottery means capable of performing a predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) regarding a game, and
When the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means becomes a predetermined result (big hit to small hit), a specific game capable of shifting to a specific game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player. State control means and
When the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result, the suggestion means capable of suggesting that the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result is provided.
As the predetermined result, a plurality of types of results including the first predetermined result (small hit) and the second predetermined result (big hit) are provided.
As the specific gaming state, a first specific gaming state corresponding to the first predetermined result (a large hit gaming state via a small hit) and a second specific gaming state corresponding to the second predetermined result (via a small hit). There is a big hit game state)
When the result of the predetermined lottery is the first predetermined result, the specific game state control means shifts to the first specific game state on condition that a predetermined prize (V prize) is established. Is possible,
In the suggestion means, the result of the predetermined lottery becomes the first predetermined result, the predetermined prize is established, and the result of one of the predetermined lottery performed after the predetermined lottery is the result. In the case of the second predetermined result, it is possible to suggest that the state can be shifted to the second specific gaming state by executing a specific effect (freeze effect) triggered by the establishment of the predetermined prize. Is,
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, when the result of a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) becomes a predetermined result (big hit to small hit), a specific gaming state (big hit game) advantageous to the player is achieved. It is possible to shift to the state), and it is possible to suggest that the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is the predetermined result (big hit to small hit). As the predetermined result (big hit to small hit), a plurality of types of results including the first predetermined result (small hit) and the second predetermined result (big hit) are provided, and a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) is provided. The first specific gaming state (small hit via small hit) corresponding to the first predetermined result (small hit) and the second specific gaming state (small hit) corresponding to the second predetermined result (big hit). A jackpot game state) that does not go through is provided. Here, when the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is the first predetermined result (small hit), the first specific gaming state (on the condition that the predetermined prize (V prize) is established) It is possible to shift to the big hit game state via the small hit). In addition, the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) becomes the first predetermined result (small hit), the predetermined prize (V prize) is established, and the lottery (big hit judgment) is performed later. When the result of one predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) is the second predetermined result (big hit), a specific effect (freeze effect) is executed when the predetermined prize (V prize) is established. Thereby, it is possible to suggest that it is possible to shift to the second specific gaming state (large hit gaming state that does not go through the small hit). That is, the condition for generating the first specific game state (big hit game state via the small hit) is satisfied, and the second after the end of the first specific game state (big hit game state via the small hit). When it is determined that a specific game state (a big hit game state that does not go through a small hit) can be generated, it becomes possible to notify the player of this through a specific effect (freeze effect). There is. Then, the execution trigger of such a specific effect (freeze effect) is the establishment of a predetermined prize (V prize). As a result, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that a specific effect (freeze effect) will be executed when a predetermined prize (V prize) is established, and the specific effect (freeze effect) will be executed. In that case, it is possible to raise the feelings of the player, and it is possible to excite the game.

(B-3) A lottery means capable of performing a predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) regarding a game, and
When the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means becomes a predetermined result (big hit to small hit), a specific game capable of shifting to a specific game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player. State control means and
A predetermined game state control means capable of shifting to a predetermined game state (time saving game state) after the end of the specific game state, and
When the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result, the suggestion means capable of suggesting that the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result is provided.
The lottery means
A first lottery means capable of performing a first predetermined lottery (first special symbol lottery) when the first condition (a winning of a game ball to the first starting port 420) is satisfied, and
A second lottery means capable of performing a second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) when the second condition (winning of a game ball to the second starting port 440) is satisfied is provided. ,
When the second condition is satisfied, the control can be performed more favorably for the player than when the first condition is satisfied.
In the predetermined gaming state, the second condition is more likely to be satisfied as compared with the non-predetermined gaming state.
The predetermined game state control means can be controlled so as not to shift to the predetermined game state after the end of one of the specific game states when a specific condition (reaching the number of limiters) is satisfied. A predetermined game state re-transition means capable of re-shifting to the predetermined game state after the end of one specific game state that shifts after the specific game state is provided.
When the suggestion means can be re-shifted to the predetermined gaming state by the predetermined gaming state re-transition means, by executing a specific effect (freeze effect), one of the second predetermined lottery It is possible to suggest that the result is the given result.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, when the result of a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) becomes a predetermined result (big hit to small hit), a specific gaming state (big hit game) advantageous to the player is achieved. It is possible to shift to a predetermined gaming state (short-time gaming state) after the end of the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state). The predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is triggered by the fulfillment of the first condition (winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420) or the second condition (winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440). When the second condition (winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440) is satisfied, when the first condition (winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420) is satisfied. It is possible to control the player more advantageously, and in the predetermined gaming state (time saving gaming state), the second condition (winning of the gaming ball to the second starting port 440) is compared with the non-predetermined gaming state. Is easier to hold. In this respect, the predetermined gaming state (time-saving gaming state) is an advantageous gaming state for the player. Here, when a specific condition (reaching the number of limiters) is satisfied, it is possible to control so as not to shift to a predetermined game state (time saving game state) after the end of one specific game state (big hit game state). However, after the end of one specific game state (big hit game state) that shifts after the specific game state (big hit game state), it is possible to shift to the predetermined game state (time saving game state) again. Then, when it is possible to shift to the predetermined gaming state (time saving gaming state) again in this way, by executing a specific effect (freeze effect), one second predetermined lottery (second). It is configured so that it can be suggested that the result of the special symbol lottery) is a predetermined result (big hit or small hit). That is, even when a specific condition (reaching the number of limiters) is satisfied and the occurrence of the predetermined gaming state (time saving game state) is temporarily interrupted, the generation of the predetermined gaming state (time saving gaming state) is restarted. When it is decided to obtain it, it is possible to notify the player through a specific effect (freeze effect). As a result, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that a specific effect (freeze effect) is executed, and when a specific effect (freeze effect) is executed, the player's feelings are raised. It is possible to liven up the game.

(B-3') The game machine according to (B-3).
As the predetermined result, a plurality of types of results including the first predetermined result (small hit) and the second predetermined result (big hit) are provided.
As the specific gaming state, a first specific gaming state corresponding to the first predetermined result (a large hit gaming state via a small hit) and a second specific gaming state corresponding to the second predetermined result (via a small hit). There is a big hit game state)
When the result of the second predetermined lottery is the first predetermined result, the specific game state control means enters the first specific game state on condition that a predetermined prize (V prize) is established. It is possible to migrate,
In the suggestion means, the result of the second predetermined lottery becomes the first predetermined result, the predetermined prize is established, and the second predetermined lottery is performed after the second predetermined lottery. When the result of the lottery is the second predetermined result, it is possible to execute the specific effect when the predetermined winning is established.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the predetermined results (big hit to small hit) include a plurality of types of results including the first predetermined result (small hit) and the second predetermined result (big hit). Is provided, and as the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state), the first specific gaming state (big hit gaming state via the small hit) and the second predetermined result corresponding to the first predetermined result (small hit) are provided. A second specific gaming state (a jackpot gaming state that does not go through a small hit) corresponding to (big hit) is provided. Here, when the result of the second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) becomes the first predetermined result (small hit), the second predetermined prize (V prize) is established on condition that the predetermined prize (V prize) is established. 1 It is possible to shift to a specific game state (a big hit game state via a small hit). In addition, the result of the second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) becomes the first predetermined result (small hit), the predetermined prize (V prize) is established, and the second predetermined lottery (second). If the result of one second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) performed after the special symbol lottery) is the second predetermined result (big hit), the predetermined prize (V prize) is established. It is configured so that a specific effect (freeze effect) can be executed when the action is taken. That is, the condition for generating the first specific game state (big hit game state via the small hit) is satisfied, and the second after the end of the first specific game state (big hit game state via the small hit). When it is determined that a specific game state (a big hit game state that does not go through a small hit) can be generated, it becomes possible to notify the player of this through a specific effect (freeze effect). There is. Then, the execution trigger of such a specific effect (freeze effect) is the establishment of a predetermined prize (V prize). As a result, the player's expectation that a specific effect (freeze effect) is executed when a predetermined prize (V prize) is established can be further increased.

In the second embodiment, the result of the second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) becomes the first predetermined result (small hit), the predetermined prize (V prize) is established, and the second predetermined lottery is established. If the result of one second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) performed after the lottery (second special symbol lottery) is the second predetermined result (big hit), a predetermined prize (V prize) It was explained that a specific effect (freeze effect) is executed when the above is established. In the present invention, the trigger for executing the specific effect (freeze effect) and the conditions for executing the specific effect (freeze effect) are not limited to this example. For example, a specific effect (freeze effect) may be executed during the first specific game state (a large hit game state via a small hit). In addition, the result of the second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) becomes the first predetermined result (small hit), the predetermined prize (V prize) is established, and the second predetermined lottery (second). When the result of the first second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) performed after the special symbol lottery) is the first predetermined result (small hit), the predetermined prize (V prize) is established. It is also possible to execute a specific effect (freeze effect) on the occasion of this (or during the first specific game state (big hit game state via a small hit)).

In particular, the result of the second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) becomes the first predetermined result (small hit), the predetermined prize (V prize) is established, and the second predetermined lottery (the second predetermined lottery) The result of the second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) that was held first among the second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) that was held after the second special symbol lottery) is the second predetermined. In the case of a result (big hit), a specific effect (freeze effect) may be executed when a predetermined prize (V prize) is established. That is, the result of the second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) becomes the first predetermined result (small hit), the predetermined prize (V prize) is established, and the second predetermined lottery (second). Even if the result of the first second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) performed after the special symbol lottery) is the second predetermined result (big hit), the first second predetermined lottery If the lottery (second special symbol lottery) is not the second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery ... special figure 2 hold that is digested immediately after reaching the limiter number), it is specified. (Freeze effect) may not be executed. In addition, when the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is the first predetermined result (small hit), the fluctuation time (variation time A) of the identification information based on the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) and the predetermined The variation time (variation time B) of the identification information based on the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) when the result of the lottery (big hit determination) is the second predetermined result (big hit) is configured to be different. It is possible to make the fluctuation time B shorter than the fluctuation time A. Even in this case, the result of the second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery ... special figure 2 hold that is digested immediately after reaching the limiter number) is the second predetermined result. Even if a specific fluctuation time (variation time longer than the fluctuation time A) is determined as the fluctuation time of the identification information based on the result of the second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) in the case of (big hit). Good.

Further, in the second embodiment, when the second condition (winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440) is satisfied, the first condition (winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420) is satisfied. It was explained that the control is more advantageous to the player than the case where the player does. "When the second condition (winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440) is satisfied, the player is more than when the first condition (winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420) is satisfied. The means for making it "controllable in an advantageous manner" is not particularly limited. For example, it is possible to configure the second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) to have a higher probability of winning a small hit than the first predetermined lottery (first special symbol lottery). The probability of winning a small hit in the first predetermined lottery (first special symbol lottery) may be 0 or may not be 0. Further, it is possible to configure the second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) to have a higher probability of winning a big hit than the first predetermined lottery (first special symbol lottery). Further, it is possible to configure the second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) to have a lower probability of losing than the first predetermined lottery (first special symbol lottery). Further, it is possible to configure the second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) to have a higher probability of becoming a big hit with a large number of rounds than the first predetermined lottery (first special symbol lottery). is there.

In addition, the second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) is given a larger number of time reductions (including the jackpot via the small hit) than the first predetermined lottery (first special symbol lottery). It is possible to configure it so that the probability of becoming is high. In the second embodiment, the number of time reductions given after the end of the big hit game state (the big hit game state via the small hit and the big hit game state not passing through the small hit) generated based on the second special symbol lottery is the number of limiters. It was explained that it was 100 times unless it reached. However, in the present invention, the number of time reductions is not particularly limited, and even after the end of the jackpot game state generated based on the second special symbol lottery, the number of time reductions less than 100 times may be given. May be good. For example, the number of time reductions may be one, such as after the end of the jackpot game state generated based on the first special symbol lottery, or even if the number of time reductions has not been reached, the number of time reductions may be one. It may be 0.

In addition, the big prize opening opened in the first specific game state (big hit game state via small hit) and the big prize opening opened in the second specific game state (big hit game state not passing through small hit) , The same big prize opening or different big winning openings may be used. A large winning opening (large winning opening A) opened in the first specific gaming state (big hit gaming state via a small hit) and a large winning opening opened in the second specific gaming state (big hit gaming state not passing through a small hit). If the winning opening (large winning opening B) is a different large winning opening, the number of prize balls by winning the large winning opening A may be larger than the number of winning balls by winning the large winning opening B. , The number of prize balls by winning the prize opening B may be larger than the number of prize balls by winning the prize opening A, or the number of prize balls may be equal. As the large winning opening B, a large winning opening different from the first large winning opening 540a and the second large winning opening 540b may be provided.

<Appendix C>
In a pachinko gaming machine, generally, when a player launches a game ball, which is a game medium, into a game area by a launching device, and the game ball wins a prize in a winning opening or the like provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls Will be paid out. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines perform a jackpot game in which the jackpot, which is normally closed, is repeatedly opened for a predetermined period of time. In the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the game balls that have won the big prize opening. Here, some of the big winning openings have a blade member, and such a large winning opening repeatedly operates the blade member to change from the closed state to the open state to execute the big hit game. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines perform a small hit game in which the large winning opening is opened for a predetermined period from the closed state.

For example, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-233375, during a small hit game, the blade member changes its posture to an open posture that opens the opening / closing region, and the gaming ball can enter the opening / closing region. There is a pachinko game machine. In this pachinko gaming machine, a V winning opening is provided in the opening / closing area, and the game ball wins a prize in the V winning opening during the small hit game, so that the pachinko gaming machine is controlled to the big hit game state. In this pachinko gaming machine, when a game ball wins a prize in the V winning opening during a small hit game and is controlled to a big hit game state, a small hit symbol showing the result of a special symbol determination that triggered the current big hit game state. The game state after the jackpot game is completed is determined according to the type of. It should be noted that, for example, the transition probability to the jackpot game state changes as the game state changes. Therefore, as a result, the number of game balls that the player can acquire changes, and whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player may change.

By the way, in the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-233375, it is easy to win a small hit game during a short-time game, and since the opening / closing area is easy to open, a game ball wins a prize in the V winning opening. There is a possibility of shifting to the jackpot game state. In addition, even if the player is not in the short-time game, the game state may shift to the jackpot game state, and the game state may be changed. As described above, the number of game balls that can be acquired by the player changes as a result of the change in the game state. As described above, according to the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the number of gaming balls that the player can acquire as a result of the change in the gaming state changes rather than a constant ratio. Therefore, it is suppressed that the game becomes monotonous.

The present inventor improves the interest in the game of the player by devising a scene controlled to the production mode selected by the operation of the player in the process of diligently examining the game machine as described above. I came up with the idea that it might be possible to improve the motivation of the players for the game.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game and improving a player's motivation for playing a game. To do.

In this respect, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment has the following features.

(C-1) A lottery means capable of performing a predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) regarding a game, and
When the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means becomes a predetermined result (big hit to small hit), a specific game capable of shifting to a specific game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player. State control means and
A predetermined game state control means capable of shifting to a predetermined game state (time saving game state) after the end of the specific game state, and
A production mode control means that can control any of a plurality of production modes (single combat mode and each time selection mode), and
An operation means (operation button group 66) capable of accepting an operation for selecting the effect mode is provided.
The lottery means
A first lottery means capable of performing a first predetermined lottery (first special symbol lottery) when the first condition (a winning of a game ball to the first starting port 420) is satisfied, and
A second lottery means capable of performing a second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) when the second condition (winning of a game ball to the second starting port 440) is satisfied is provided. ,
When the second condition is satisfied, the control can be performed more favorably for the player than when the first condition is satisfied.
In the predetermined gaming state, the second condition is more likely to be satisfied as compared with the non-predetermined gaming state.
When the number of times of the specific game state shifted in the predetermined game state reaches a specific number of times (limiter number of times), the predetermined game state control means has the predetermined game after the end of the specific game state of the specific number of times. While it is possible to control so as not to shift to the state, it is possible to shift to the predetermined gaming state again after the end of one specific gaming state that shifts after the specific gaming state of the specific number of times.
The operating means can accept an operation for selecting the effect mode during the specific gaming state of the specific number of times.
The effect mode control means is selected by the operation of the operation means in a predetermined period (pullback zone) from the end of the specific game state of the specific number of times to the transition to the specific game state of the one. It can be controlled to the production mode,
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, when the result of a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) becomes a predetermined result (big hit to small hit), a specific gaming state (big hit game) advantageous to the player is achieved. It is possible to shift to a predetermined gaming state (short-time gaming state) after the end of the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state). The predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is triggered by the fulfillment of the first condition (winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420) or the second condition (winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440). When the second condition (winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440) is satisfied, when the first condition (winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420) is satisfied. It is possible to control the player more advantageously, and in the predetermined gaming state (time saving gaming state), the second condition (winning of the gaming ball to the second starting port 440) is compared with the non-predetermined gaming state. Is easier to hold. In this respect, the predetermined gaming state (time-saving gaming state) is an advantageous gaming state for the player. Here, when the number of times of the specific game state (big hit game state) shifted in the predetermined game state (time saving game state) reaches the specific number of times (limiter number), the specific game state (big hit) of the specific number of times (limiter number of times) After the end of the game state), it is possible to control so as not to shift to the predetermined game state (time saving game state), but the shift is made after the specific game state (big hit game state) of the specific number of times (limiter number). After the end of the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state), it is possible to shift to the predetermined gaming state (time saving gaming state) again. Therefore, the predetermined period (pullback zone) from the end of the specific game state (big hit game state) of the specific number of times (limiter number) to the occurrence of the one specific game state (big hit game state) is from the player. Then, it depends on whether or not the predetermined gaming state (time saving gaming state) can be generated again, which is an extremely important period. Then, in such a predetermined period (pullback zone), it is configured to be controllable to the effect mode (single combat mode or each time selection mode) selected by the operation of the player. As a result, during the period (pullback zone), the effect regarding whether or not the predetermined game state (short-time game state) can be regenerated through the effect mode (single combat mode or each time selection mode) (the second predetermined through the character battle). It is possible to perform a lottery (a production that suggests the result of the second special symbol lottery), and it is possible to greatly excite the game during the period (pullback zone). Further, the operation for selecting the effect mode (one-on-one combat mode or each time selection mode) is configured to be able to be accepted during the specific game state (big hit game state) of the specific number of times (limiter number of times). Therefore, through the player's own act of selecting the production mode (single combat mode or each time selection mode), the player realizes that the predetermined period (pullback zone) will start soon, and the predetermined period (pullback zone). Can provide an opportunity to prepare for the start.

(C-2) A lottery means capable of performing a predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) regarding a game, and
When the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means becomes a predetermined result (big hit to small hit), a specific game capable of shifting to a specific game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player. State control means and
A predetermined game state control means capable of shifting to a predetermined game state (time saving game state) after the end of the specific game state, and
A production mode control means that can control any of a plurality of production modes (single combat mode and each time selection mode), and
An operation means (operation button group 66) capable of accepting an operation for selecting the effect mode is provided.
The lottery means
A first lottery means capable of performing a first predetermined lottery (first special symbol lottery) when the first condition (a winning of a game ball to the first starting port 420) is satisfied, and
A second lottery means capable of performing a second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) when the second condition (winning of a game ball to the second starting port 440) is satisfied is provided. ,
When the second condition is satisfied, the control can be performed more favorably for the player than when the first condition is satisfied.
In the predetermined gaming state, the second condition is more likely to be satisfied as compared with the non-predetermined gaming state.
Assuming that the specific game state of a specific number of times (limiter number) is set as one set, the predetermined game state control means does not shift to the predetermined game state after the end of the final specific game state in one set. On the other hand, it is possible to generate the next set starting from one said specific gaming state that transitions after the final said specific gaming state.
The effect mode control means is used in the operating means during a predetermined period (pullback zone) from the end of the final specific gaming state in one set to the transition to the first specific gaming state in the next set. It is possible to control the effect mode selected by operation,
The effect mode that can be selected via the operation means has contents according to the number of occurrences of the set.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, when the result of a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) becomes a predetermined result (big hit to small hit), a specific gaming state (big hit game) advantageous to the player is achieved. It is possible to shift to a predetermined gaming state (short-time gaming state) after the end of the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state). The predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is triggered by the fulfillment of the first condition (winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420) or the second condition (winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440). When the second condition (winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440) is satisfied, when the first condition (winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420) is satisfied. It is possible to control the player more advantageously, and in the predetermined gaming state (time saving gaming state), the second condition (winning of the gaming ball to the second starting port 440) is compared with the non-predetermined gaming state. Is easier to hold. In this respect, the predetermined gaming state (time-saving gaming state) is an advantageous gaming state for the player. Here, assuming that the specific game state (big hit game state) of the specific number of times (limiter number) is one set, the predetermined game state (time reduction) after the end of the final specific game state (big hit game state) in one set. It is possible to control so as not to shift to the game state), but generate the next set starting from one specific game state (big hit game state) that shifts after the final specific game state (big hit game state). It is possible. Therefore, the predetermined period (pullback zone) from the end of the final specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) in one set to the occurrence of the first specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) in the next set is from the player. Then, it depends on whether or not the predetermined gaming state (short-time gaming state) can be generated again, which is an extremely important period. Then, in such a predetermined period (pullback zone), it is configured to be controllable to the effect mode (single combat mode or each time selection mode) selected by the operation of the player. As a result, during the period (pullback zone), the effect regarding whether or not the predetermined game state (short-time game state) can be regenerated through the effect mode (single combat mode or each time selection mode) (the second predetermined through the character battle). It is possible to perform a lottery (a production that suggests the result of the second special symbol lottery), and it is possible to greatly excite the game during the period (pullback zone). Further, the repeated occurrence of the set means that the advantageous state for the player continues, and the effect mode that can be selected by the player is the content according to the number of occurrences of the set. There is. Therefore, the player is made to realize how long the advantageous state continues through his own act of selecting the production mode, and the desired production is caused by the increase in the number of times the set is generated. Great satisfaction can be provided if the mode can be selected.

As described in the second embodiment, it is performed after the second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) that triggered the generation of the specific game state (big hit game state) at the specific number of times (limiter number). The result of the second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) is the predetermined result (big hit to small hit) (big hit or small hit in the special figure 2 hold at the time when the specific gaming state occurs). In the case of (including), the specific game state (big hit game state via the small hit game state or small hit game state) generated based on the first second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) It is possible to re-generate a predetermined game state (time saving game state) after the end of the big hit game state without going through. In addition, the first second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) that was held after the second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) that triggered the generation of the final specific game state (big hit game state) in one set. 2 If the result of the special symbol lottery) is a predetermined result (big hit to small hit) (special figure 2 hold at the time when the specific gaming state occurs includes a big hit or a small hit), the one It is started from a specific game state (a big hit game state that goes through the small hit game state or a big hit game state that does not go through the small hit game state) that occurs based on the second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery). It is possible to generate the next set. The effect mode that can be selected by the player is set according to the number of occurrences of the set. For example, the type of character that can be selected by the player is configured to be different according to the number of occurrences of the set. Is possible. For example, a predetermined character may be selectable in the selection mode each time, provided that the number of occurrences of the set reaches a predetermined number of times.

Further, as described in the second embodiment, the information included in the start winning command based on the second starting opening winning is stored in the starting storage area for the second production as the hold information. The pending information includes information (determination result information) indicating the result of the jackpot determination. In the pullback zone, an effect is performed in the one-on-one combat mode or the selection mode each time, and through the effect, the second effect start storage area (0) (or the second effect start storage area (1) to the second effect start It is suggested whether or not the storage area (4) includes hit information (information indicating that it is a big hit or information indicating that it is a small hit) as the determination result information. Here, when the hit information is included in the start storage area for the second effect (a big hit or a small hit is included in the special figure 2 hold), a special effect (for example, a freeze effect) is performed before entering the pullback zone. ) May be executed to notify that the special figure 2 hold includes a big hit or a small hit. In this case, even after the notification by the special effect is performed, the player is made to select the effect mode (single combat mode or each time selection mode) during the big hit game state (or small hit game state) and is selected. The above suggestion may be made through an effect in the effect mode (an effect performed at the time of a special symbol change corresponding to the hold or before the change). The pullback zone is a period corresponding to the pullback mode.

<Appendix D>
In a pachinko gaming machine, generally, when a player launches a game ball, which is a game medium, into a game area by a launching device, and the game ball wins a prize in a winning opening or the like provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls Will be paid out. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines perform a jackpot game in which the jackpot, which is normally closed, is repeatedly opened for a predetermined period of time. In the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the game balls that have won the big prize opening. Here, some of the big winning openings have a blade member, and such a large winning opening repeatedly operates the blade member to change from the closed state to the open state to execute the big hit game. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines perform a small hit game in which the large winning opening is opened for a predetermined period from the closed state.

For example, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-233375, during a small hit game, the blade member changes its posture to an open posture that opens the opening / closing region, and the gaming ball can enter the opening / closing region. There is a pachinko game machine. In this pachinko gaming machine, a V winning opening is provided in the opening / closing area, and the game ball wins a prize in the V winning opening during the small hit game, so that the pachinko gaming machine is controlled to the big hit game state. In this pachinko gaming machine, when a game ball wins a prize in the V winning opening during a small hit game and is controlled to a big hit game state, a small hit symbol showing the result of a special symbol determination that triggered the current big hit game state. The game state after the jackpot game is completed is determined according to the type of. It should be noted that, for example, the transition probability to the jackpot game state changes as the game state changes. Therefore, as a result, the number of game balls that the player can acquire changes, and whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player may change.

By the way, in the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-233375, it is easy to win a small hit game during a short-time game, and since the opening / closing area is easy to open, a game ball wins a prize in the V winning opening. There is a possibility of shifting to the jackpot game state. In addition, even if the player is not in the short-time game, the game state may shift to the jackpot game state, and the game state may be changed. As described above, the number of game balls that can be acquired by the player changes as a result of the change in the game state. As described above, according to the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the number of gaming balls that the player can acquire as a result of the change in the gaming state changes rather than a constant ratio. Therefore, it is suppressed that the game becomes monotonous.

The inventor of the present invention has come up with the idea that a desired effect can be produced by devising the fluctuation time of the identification information in the process of diligently examining the above-mentioned gaming machine.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of performing a desired effect.

In this respect, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment has the following features.

(D-1) Identification information display means (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74, display device 16, etc.) capable of performing variable display and stop display of identification information, and
A lottery means that can perform a predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) related to the game,
Based on the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means, the identification information display means can display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop the display.
A variation time determining means capable of determining a variation time, which is a time from the start of variation display of identification information in the identification information display means to the stop display of identification information,
A predetermined game state ending means capable of ending a predetermined game state (big hit game state) when a predetermined condition is satisfied is provided.
The fluctuation time determining means is the number of the predetermined lottery that has been executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the variation display and stop display of the identification information based on the result of the predetermined lottery have not been executed. It is possible to determine the fluctuation time in the first fluctuation display after the predetermined condition is satisfied.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, it is possible to change and display the identification information based on the result of a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) and then stop and display the identification information. It is possible to determine the fluctuation time, which is the time from the start of the operation to the stop display of the identification information. Here, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the predetermined gaming state (big hit gaming state) can be terminated, but the fluctuation time in the first fluctuation display after the predetermined condition is satisfied is the predetermined condition. Of the predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) that has been executed at the time when is established, the number of those (holding balls) for which the variation display and stop display of the identification information based on the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) have not been executed. It is configured so that it can be determined according to the situation. Prior to the present invention, when the present inventor enters a period in which the reserved ball is digested after the end of the predetermined gaming state (big hit gaming state), the present inventor has an effect indicating that the holding ball will enter the period and a predetermined gaming state (big hit). I wanted to do both of the productions that show the game results during the game state). However, when the number of reserved balls is small, the fluctuation display for the number of reserved balls ends earlier, so the time required for those effects is longer than the time during which the fluctuation display is performed, and the fluctuation time I faced the problem of not being able to complete those productions within. In this regard, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, since the fluctuation time in the first fluctuation display after the predetermined condition is satisfied can be determined according to the number of reserved balls, the reserved balls can be determined. Even when the number of is small (for example, one), by lengthening the fluctuation time in the first fluctuation display, both of the above effects can be completed within the fluctuation time. As a result, the present inventor has found that a desired effect can be realized while the variable display of the identification information is being performed.

(D-1') The game machine according to (D-1).
The fluctuation time is the total time of the first fluctuation time (first half fluctuation time) and the second fluctuation time (second half fluctuation time).
The fluctuation time determining means is
A first fluctuation time determining means capable of determining the first fluctuation time, and
A second fluctuation time determining means capable of determining the second fluctuation time is provided.
Among the predetermined lottery that has been executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first fluctuation time determining means has not executed the variation display and the stop display of the identification information based on the result of the predetermined lottery. It is possible to determine the first variation time according to the number of things.
The second fluctuation time determining means can determine the second fluctuation time according to the result of the predetermined lottery.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the fluctuation time is the total time of the first fluctuation time (first half fluctuation time) and the second fluctuation time (second half fluctuation time), and is the first fluctuation time (first half). Of the predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) that has been executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the variation display and stop display of the identification information based on the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) have not been executed. While it is possible to determine according to the number of certain objects (holding balls), the second fluctuation time (second half fluctuation time) can be determined according to the result of a predetermined lottery (big hit judgment). It is configured in. Prior to the present invention, the present inventor describes an effect (for example, what kind of game playability the period has) that is irrelevant to the result of a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) during the period when the reserved ball is digested. I wanted to do a production with a screen). However, if the number of reserved balls is small, the fluctuation display for the number of reserved balls ends earlier, so the time required for the production is longer than the time during which the fluctuation display is performed, and the time required for the production is within the fluctuation time. Faced with the problem of not being able to complete the production. In this regard, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the first fluctuation time (first half fluctuation time) can be determined according to the number of reserved balls, so that the number of reserved balls is small. However, by lengthening the first fluctuation time (first half fluctuation time), the above-mentioned effect can be completed within the fluctuation time. As a result, the present inventor has found that a desired effect can be realized while the variable display of the identification information is being performed. Further, the first variation time (first half variation time) is used for the effect irrelevant to the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) as described above (for example, the effect accompanied by the explanation screen), and the second variation time. (Second half fluctuation time) can be determined (depending on the result of a predetermined lottery (big hit determination)) regardless of the time required for the production. Therefore, when designing the production performed using the second fluctuation time (second half fluctuation time) and the second fluctuation time (second half fluctuation time) (the production according to the result of a predetermined lottery (big hit determination)), the first fluctuation Since it is not necessary to consider the time (first half fluctuation time) (for example, the time required for the production accompanied by the above explanation screen), the convenience of the design can be improved.

As an effect unrelated to the result of the above-mentioned predetermined lottery (big hit determination), an effect indicating that the predetermined game state (big hit game state) is completed and the reserved ball is digested into a predetermined period (pullback zone) ( An effect of displaying a rush screen) and an effect of showing a game result during a predetermined game state (big hit game state) (an effect of displaying a result screen) can be mentioned. For example, when there is one reserved ball at the end of the jackpot game state when the number of limiters is reached, both the entry screen and the result screen are the first special symbols in the predetermined period (pullback zone). Displayed during fluctuations. Further, for example, when there are two reserved balls at the end of the jackpot game state when the number of limiters is reached, the rush screen is displayed during the first special symbol change in the predetermined period (pullback zone). , The result screen is displayed during the second special symbol change in the predetermined period (pullback zone). On the other hand, as the effect according to the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination), a reach effect or an effect using a character or the like (for example, a final battle effect) can be mentioned. According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the effect (time required for the effect) unrelated to the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is different depending on the game state or the number of reserved balls. The first fluctuation time (first half fluctuation time) is individually provided as the fluctuation time for the production. On the other hand, the variation time for the production according to the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is the first regardless of whether or not the production unrelated to the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is performed. Two fluctuation times (second half fluctuation time) are provided in common. This makes it possible to efficiently insert (display) the irrelevant effect (the rush screen, the result screen, etc.). The result screen may be displayed when all the reserved balls are lost, and the result screen may not be displayed when there are big hits or small hits in the reserved balls.

In the predetermined period (pullback zone), an image for urging the player to hit left may be displayed, or an image for urging the player to hit right may be displayed. Further, when the number of limiters is expressed as N times, the player is urged to hit right in the time-saving game state in which the (N-1) th big hit game state is completed or the Nth big hit game state is completed. An image (an image prompting the accumulation of the special figure 2 hold) may be displayed. During the jackpot game state, the second condition (winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440) is not satisfied (the time to shift to the state where the game ball can easily pass through the second starting port 440 is very short. ) May be configured.

(D-2) Identification information display means (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74, display device 16, etc.) capable of performing variable display and stop display of identification information, and
A lottery means that can perform a predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) related to the game,
Based on the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means, the identification information display means can display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop the display.
The identification information display means includes a fluctuation time determining means capable of determining a fluctuation time, which is a time from the start of the variation display of the identification information to the stop display of the identification information.
The fluctuation time is the total time of the first fluctuation time (first half fluctuation time) and the second fluctuation time (second half fluctuation time).
The fluctuation time determining means is
A first fluctuation time determining means capable of determining the first fluctuation time, and
A second fluctuation time determining means capable of determining the second fluctuation time is provided.
The first variation time determining means is the first variation according to the number of the predetermined lottery that has been executed and the variation display and stop display of the identification information based on the result of the predetermined lottery have not been executed. It is possible to determine the time,
The second fluctuation time determining means can determine the second fluctuation time according to the result of the predetermined lottery.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, it is possible to change and display the identification information based on the result of a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) and then stop and display the identification information. It is possible to determine the fluctuation time, which is the time from the start of the operation to the stop display of the identification information. Here, the fluctuation time is the total time of the first fluctuation time (first half fluctuation time) and the second fluctuation time (second half fluctuation time), and the first fluctuation time (first half fluctuation time) is a predetermined lottery that has been executed. Among (big hit judgments), it is possible to determine according to the number of (holding balls) in which the variable display and stop display of the identification information based on the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) have not been executed. The second fluctuation time (second half fluctuation time) is configured so that it can be determined according to the result of a predetermined lottery (big hit determination). Prior to the present invention, the present inventor describes an effect (for example, what kind of game playability the period has) that is irrelevant to the result of a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) during the period when the reserved ball is digested. I wanted to do a production with a screen). However, if the number of reserved balls is small, the fluctuation display for the number of reserved balls ends earlier, so the time required for the production is longer than the time during which the fluctuation display is performed, and the time required for the production is within the fluctuation time. Faced with the problem of not being able to complete the production. In this regard, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the first fluctuation time (first half fluctuation time) can be determined according to the number of reserved balls, so that the number of reserved balls is small. However, by lengthening the first fluctuation time (first half fluctuation time), the above-mentioned effect can be completed within the fluctuation time. As a result, the present inventor has found that a desired effect can be realized while the variable display of the identification information is being performed. Further, the first variation time (first half variation time) is used for the effect irrelevant to the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) as described above (for example, the effect accompanied by the explanation screen), and the second variation time. (Second half fluctuation time) can be determined (depending on the result of a predetermined lottery (big hit determination)) regardless of the time required for the production. Therefore, when designing the production performed using the second fluctuation time (second half fluctuation time) and the second fluctuation time (second half fluctuation time) (the production according to the result of a predetermined lottery (big hit determination)), the first fluctuation Since it is not necessary to consider the time (first half fluctuation time) (for example, the time required for the production accompanied by the above explanation screen), the convenience of the design can be improved.

(D-3) Identification information display means (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74, display device 16, etc.) capable of performing variable display and stop display of identification information, and
A lottery means that can perform a predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) related to the game,
Based on the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means, the identification information display means can display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop the display.
A variation time determining means capable of determining a variation time, which is a time from the start of variation display of identification information in the identification information display means to the stop display of identification information,
When the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means becomes a predetermined result (big hit to small hit), a specific game capable of shifting to a specific game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player. State control means and
A predetermined game state control means capable of shifting to a predetermined game state (time saving game state) after the end of the specific game state is provided.
The lottery means
A first lottery means capable of performing a first predetermined lottery (first special symbol lottery) when the first condition (a winning of a game ball to the first starting port 420) is satisfied, and
A second lottery means capable of performing a second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) when the second condition (winning of a game ball to the second starting port 440) is satisfied is provided. ,
When the second condition is satisfied, the control can be performed more favorably for the player than when the first condition is satisfied.
In the predetermined gaming state, the second condition is more likely to be satisfied as compared with the non-predetermined gaming state.
When the number of times of the specific game state shifted in the predetermined game state reaches a specific number of times (limiter number of times), the predetermined game state control means has the predetermined game after the end of the specific game state of the specific number of times. While it is possible to control so as not to shift to the state, it is possible to shift to the predetermined gaming state again after the end of one specific gaming state that shifts after the specific gaming state of the specific number of times.
The variable time determining means determines the variable time according to the number of times of the second predetermined lottery performed after the second predetermined lottery that triggered the transition to the specific gaming state at the specific number of times. It is possible to determine,
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, when the result of a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) becomes a predetermined result (big hit to small hit), a specific gaming state (big hit game) advantageous to the player is achieved. It is possible to shift to a predetermined gaming state (short-time gaming state) after the end of the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state). The predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is triggered by the fulfillment of the first condition (winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420) or the second condition (winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440). When the second condition (winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440) is satisfied, when the first condition (winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420) is satisfied. It is possible to control the player more advantageously, and in the predetermined gaming state (time saving gaming state), the second condition (winning of the gaming ball to the second starting port 440) is compared with the non-predetermined gaming state. Is easier to hold. In this respect, the predetermined gaming state (time-saving gaming state) is an advantageous gaming state for the player. Here, when the number of times of the specific game state (big hit game state) shifted in the predetermined game state (time saving game state) reaches the specific number of times (limiter number), the specific game state (big hit) of the specific number of times (limiter number of times) After the end of the game state), it is possible to control so as not to shift to the predetermined game state (time saving game state), but the shift is made after the specific game state (big hit game state) of the specific number of times (limiter number). After the end of the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state), it is possible to shift to the predetermined gaming state (time saving gaming state) again. Therefore, from the player's point of view, the period from the end of the specific game state (big hit game state) of the specific number of times (limiter number) to the occurrence of the one specific game state (big hit game state) It is an extremely important period because it depends on whether or not the predetermined gaming state (time saving gaming state) can be generated again.

On the other hand, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, it is possible to display the identification information in a variable manner based on the result of a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) and then stop the display. It is possible to determine the fluctuation time, which is the time from the start of the fluctuation display of the above to the stop display of the identification information. In particular, in the above period, the fluctuation time is performed after the second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) that triggered the transition to the specific game state (big hit game state) at the specific number of times (limiter number). It is configured so that it can be determined according to the number of times of the second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) (reserved ball). Prior to the present invention, the present inventor enters the above period after the number of specific gaming states (big hit gaming states) that have occurred in a predetermined gaming state (time-saving gaming state) reaches a specific number of times (limiter number of times). , I wanted to perform both an effect showing the entry into the period and an effect showing the game result up to the period. However, when the number of reserved balls is small, the fluctuation display for the number of reserved balls ends earlier, so the time required for those effects is longer than the time during which the fluctuation display is performed, and the fluctuation time I faced the problem of not being able to complete those productions within. In this regard, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, since the fluctuation time can be determined according to the number of reserved balls, the fluctuation time even when the number of reserved balls is small By lengthening, both of the above effects can be completed within the fluctuation time. As a result, the present inventor has found that a desired effect can be realized while the variable display of the identification information is being performed.

<Appendix E>
In a pachinko gaming machine, generally, when a player launches a game ball, which is a game medium, into a game area by a launching device, and the game ball wins a prize in a winning opening or the like provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls Will be paid out. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines perform a jackpot game in which the jackpot, which is normally closed, is repeatedly opened for a predetermined period of time. In the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the game balls that have won the big prize opening. Here, some of the big winning openings have a blade member, and such a large winning opening repeatedly operates the blade member to change from the closed state to the open state to execute the big hit game. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines perform a small hit game in which the large winning opening is opened for a predetermined period from the closed state.

For example, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-233375, during a small hit game, the blade member changes its posture to an open posture that opens the opening / closing region, and the gaming ball can enter the opening / closing region. There is a pachinko game machine. In this pachinko gaming machine, a V winning opening is provided in the opening / closing area, and the game ball wins a prize in the V winning opening during the small hit game, so that the pachinko gaming machine is controlled to the big hit game state. In this pachinko gaming machine, when a game ball wins a prize in the V winning opening during a small hit game and is controlled to a big hit game state, a small hit symbol showing the result of a special symbol determination that triggered the current big hit game state. The game state after the jackpot game is completed is determined according to the type of. It should be noted that, for example, the transition probability to the jackpot game state changes as the game state changes. Therefore, as a result, the number of game balls that the player can acquire changes, and whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player may change.

By the way, in the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-233375, it is easy to win a small hit game during a short-time game, and since the opening / closing area is easy to open, a game ball wins a prize in the V winning opening. There is a possibility of shifting to the jackpot game state. In addition, even if the player is not in the short-time game, the game state may shift to the jackpot game state, and the game state may be changed. As described above, the number of game balls that can be acquired by the player changes as a result of the change in the game state. As described above, according to the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the number of gaming balls that the player can acquire as a result of the change in the gaming state changes rather than a constant ratio. Therefore, it is suppressed that the game becomes monotonous.

The present inventor improves the interest of the player in the game and improves the motivation of the player to play the game by devising the production using the design in the process of diligently examining the game machine as described above. I came up with the idea that it could be done.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game and improving a player's motivation for playing a game. To do.

In this respect, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment has the following features.

(E-1) A symbol display means (display device 16 or the like) capable of displaying fluctuations and stops of symbols, and
A lottery means that can perform a predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) related to the game,
A display control means capable of stopping and displaying N symbols in the symbol display means based on the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means.
Equipped with an operation means (effect button) that can accept operations by the player,
The operating means can accept an effective operation during a predetermined operation valid period after the symbol variable display is started in the symbol display means and before the symbol is finally stopped and displayed.
The display control means provisionally displays one symbol each time the operation means is operated during the predetermined operation validity period, and when the number of provisionally displayed symbols reaches N. While it is possible to restart the variable display of all the symbols, it is possible to control the final stop display of the symbols according to the display mode of the symbols when the predetermined operation valid period has expired. is there,
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, it is possible to stop and display N symbols by the symbol display means (display device 16 or the like) based on the result of a predetermined lottery (big hit determination). However, in a predetermined operation valid period after the variable display of the symbol is started and before the symbol is finally stopped and displayed, one symbol is provisionally set each time the operation means (effect button) is operated by the player. It is possible to restart the variable display of all the symbols when the number of the provisionally displayed symbols reaches N. Then, it is configured to be able to control to finally stop and display the symbol according to the display mode of the symbol when the predetermined operation valid period has expired. As a result, it is possible to repeat the provisional display (temporary stop) and the variable display of the symbol in conjunction with the operation of the operation means (effect button), and the display mode of the symbol changes every moment in the process. By doing so, it is possible to make the player expect that the display mode of the symbol that is finally stopped and displayed becomes an advantageous mode (for example, a display mode corresponding to a big hit). In addition, even if the display mode of the symbol when the predetermined operation valid period has expired (display mode at the expiration of the period) and the display mode of the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed (final display mode) do not match, the period has expired. The final display mode can be appropriately derived by changing the display mode of the symbol according to the time display mode. Then, through such a change from the display mode at the end of the period to the final display mode, the player expects that an advantageous mode (for example, a display mode corresponding to a big hit) is derived, and the game is played. You can get excited.

(E-2) A symbol display means (display device 16 or the like) capable of displaying fluctuations and stops of symbols, and
A lottery means that can perform a predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) related to the game,
Based on the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means, a display control means capable of variablely displaying and then stopping the symbol in the symbol display means.
As an effect related to the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means, a suggestion effect executing means capable of performing any one of a plurality of suggestion effects (change in background color), and
Equipped with an operation means (effect button) that can accept operations by the player,
The operating means can accept an effective operation during a predetermined operation valid period after the symbol variable display is started in the symbol display means and before the symbol is finally stopped and displayed.
The display control means can temporarily display a symbol by operating the operation means during the predetermined operation validity period.
The suggestion effect execution means can change the effect from one suggestion effect to another suggestion effect according to the display mode of the provisionally displayed symbol.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, it is possible to display the symbol in a variable manner by the symbol display means (display device 16 or the like) and then stop the display based on the result of a predetermined lottery (big hit determination). However, in a predetermined operation valid period after the variable display of the symbol is started and before the symbol is finally stopped and displayed, the operation means (effect button) is operated by the player to display the symbol. It is possible to display it provisionally. Then, according to the display mode of the tentatively displayed symbol, the effect (suggestion effect (background color)) related to the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is changed from one suggestion effect (background color) to another suggestion effect. It is configured so that it can be changed to (background color). As a result, the symbol is temporarily displayed (temporarily stopped) in conjunction with the operation of the operating means (effect button), and a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is performed according to the display mode of the temporarily stopped symbol. The effect related to the result of (for example, the effect suggesting the degree of expectation regarding the jackpot) can be changed. Then, through the correlation between the temporary stop of the pattern and the change of the suggestive effect (background color), it is possible to realize a tasteful effect, and it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the development of the effect. it can.

In the present invention, the operation means (effect button) is operated once when the provisional display (temporary stop) and the variable display of the symbol are repeated in conjunction with the operation of the operation means (effect button). The symbol may be temporarily stopped (variation display is restarted), or the symbol is temporarily stopped (variation display is resumed) every time the operating means (effect button) is operated multiple times. May be good. In addition, when the effect related to the result of a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) changes (for example, the effect suggesting the degree of expectation regarding the big hit) according to the display mode of the temporarily stopped symbol, the scenario of the change is determined in advance. It may be that. For example, a plurality of stages of background colors (for example, none, white, blue, green, purple, red, and rainbow) having different expectations are provided, and the display mode of the temporarily stopped symbol and the degree of change in the background color are determined. The display mode of the temporarily stopped symbol may be determined in advance after associating with the above. For example, when the display mode A is temporarily stopped, the background color changes in three stages (for example, none → green), and when the display mode B is temporarily stopped, the background color changes in two stages (for example, green → red). ), And when the display mode C is temporarily stopped, the background color can be changed by one step (for example, red → rainbow). In addition, in this specification, "stop" means the final stop of the symbol (identification information) (when the fluctuation time has expired), and the final stop of the symbol (identification information). It is a concept that includes both temporary suspensions (in the middle of the lapse of fluctuation time).

<Appendix F>
In a pachinko gaming machine, generally, when a player launches a game ball, which is a game medium, into a game area by a launching device, and the game ball wins a prize in a winning opening or the like provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls Will be paid out. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines perform a jackpot game in which the jackpot, which is normally closed, is repeatedly opened for a predetermined period of time. In the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the game balls that have won the big prize opening. Here, some of the big winning openings have a blade member, and such a large winning opening repeatedly operates the blade member to change from the closed state to the open state to execute the big hit game. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines perform a small hit game in which the large winning opening is opened for a predetermined period from the closed state.

For example, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-233375, during a small hit game, the blade member changes its posture to an open posture that opens the opening / closing region, and the gaming ball can enter the opening / closing region. There is a pachinko game machine. In this pachinko gaming machine, a V winning opening is provided in the opening / closing area, and the game ball wins a prize in the V winning opening during the small hit game, so that the pachinko gaming machine is controlled to the big hit game state. In this pachinko gaming machine, when a game ball wins a prize in the V winning opening during a small hit game and is controlled to a big hit game state, a small hit symbol showing the result of a special symbol determination that triggered the current big hit game state. The game state after the jackpot game is completed is determined according to the type of. It should be noted that, for example, the transition probability to the jackpot game state changes as the game state changes. Therefore, as a result, the number of game balls that the player can acquire changes, and whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player may change.

By the way, in the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-233375, it is easy to win a small hit game during a short-time game, and since the opening / closing area is easy to open, a game ball wins a prize in the V winning opening. There is a possibility of shifting to the jackpot game state. In addition, even if the player is not in the short-time game, the game state may shift to the jackpot game state, and the game state may be changed. As described above, the number of game balls that can be acquired by the player changes as a result of the change in the game state. As described above, according to the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the number of gaming balls that the player can acquire as a result of the change in the gaming state changes rather than a constant ratio. Therefore, it is suppressed that the game becomes monotonous.

The present inventor has improved the interest of the player in the game by devising the determination of the fluctuation pattern of the identification information in the process of diligently examining the game machine as described above, and the player's motivation for the game. I came up with the idea that it could be improved.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game and improving a player's motivation for playing a game. To do.

In this respect, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment has the following features.

(F-1) A gaming machine including a first control means (main control circuit 100) for controlling the execution of a game and a second control means (sub control circuit 200) for controlling the production.
The first control means
Identification information display means (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74, etc.) capable of performing variable display and stop display of identification information, and
A predetermined lottery execution means capable of performing a predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) regarding a game, and
Based on the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the predetermined lottery execution means, the variation pattern of the identification information from the start of the variation display of the identification information in the identification information display means to the stop display of the identification information is determined. Specific lottery execution means capable of performing a specific lottery (variable pattern lottery) for
A display control means capable of displaying the identification information in a variable manner and then stopping the display in the identification information display means in a variation pattern according to the result of the specific lottery performed by the specific lottery execution means.
A transmission means capable of transmitting information (data indicating a fluctuation pattern) according to the result of the specific lottery performed by the specific lottery execution means to the second control means, and a transmission means.
When the result of the predetermined lottery becomes a predetermined result (big hit) and the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode by the identification information display means, the player is in a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) which is advantageous to the player. Equipped with a specific game state control means that can be transferred,
As the predetermined result, a plurality of types of results including the first predetermined result (10 round jackpot) and the second predetermined result (6 round jackpot) are provided.
When the result of the predetermined lottery is the first predetermined result, it can be controlled more advantageously for the player than when the result of the predetermined lottery is the second predetermined result.
As a result of the specific lottery, a plurality of types of results including the first specific result (per chance 2 [indefinite jackpot B]) and the second specific result (per chance 2 [fixed value]) are provided.
The specific lottery execution means is
The probability that the result of the specific lottery will be the first specific result when the result of the predetermined lottery is the first predetermined result, and the result of the predetermined lottery will be the second predetermined result. When the result of the specific lottery is different from the probability of the first specific result, the result of the specific lottery is different from the probability that the result of the specific lottery is the first predetermined result. The probability that the second specific result will be obtained and the probability that the result of the specific lottery will be the second specific result when the result of the predetermined lottery is the second predetermined result will be the same. As described above, and when the result of the predetermined lottery is the first predetermined result and when the result of the predetermined lottery is the second predetermined result, the result of the specific lottery is the first. 1 It is possible to perform the specific lottery so that the probability that the result of the specific lottery will be the second specific result is higher than the probability that the result will be the specific result.
The second control means
When the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result, the result of the predetermined lottery is the same as the predetermined result before the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific display mode in the identification information display means. Equipped with suggestion means that can suggest that it has become (pre-reading effect)
The transmission means
In both cases where the result of the specific lottery is the first specific result and the result of the specific lottery is the second specific result, the result of the specific lottery It is possible to transmit the corresponding information to the second control means.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the variation pattern of the identification information from the start of the variation display of the identification information to the stop display of the identification information based on the result of a predetermined lottery (big hit determination). Where it is possible to perform a specific lottery (variable pattern lottery) to determine, when the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) is the first predetermined result (10 round big hit), the specific lottery The probability that the result of (variable pattern lottery) will be the first specific result (chance 2 [indefinite jackpot B]) and the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) will be the second predetermined result (6 round jackpot). In this case, the probability that the result of the specific lottery (variable pattern lottery) will be the first specific result (chance 2 [indefinite jackpot B]) is different, while the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) is the first predetermined. The probability that the result of a specific lottery (variable pattern lottery) will be the second specific result ([fixed value] per chance 2) and the predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) when the result (10 rounds jackpot) is obtained. When the result is the second predetermined result (6 round big hit), the probability that the result of the specific lottery (variable pattern lottery) becomes the second specific result ([fixed value] per chance 2) is the same. As described above, it is possible to perform a specific lottery (variable pattern lottery). Then, the first control means (main control circuit 100) is used when the result of the specific lottery (variable pattern lottery) becomes the first specific result (chance 2 [indefinite jackpot B]) and the specific lottery. Information (variation pattern) according to the result of the specific lottery (variation pattern lottery) in both cases where the result of (variation pattern lottery) is the second specific result ([fixed value] per chance 2). (Data indicating) can be transmitted to the second control means (sub-control circuit 200). Thereby, in both of these cases, based on the transmitted information, before the identification information is stopped and displayed in the second control means (effect control means) (sub-control circuit 200) in a specific display mode. It is possible to perform an effect (suggestion effect) that can suggest that the result of a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is a predetermined result (big hit).

Here, in the conventional game machine, result I and result II having different degrees of advantage are provided as predetermined results (big hits), and result X is provided as a result of a specific lottery (variable pattern lottery). In such a form, when the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) is the result I, the probability that the result of the specific lottery (variable pattern lottery) is the result X and the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) are When the result II is obtained, the probability that the result of a specific lottery (variable pattern lottery) is the result X may be designed to be different. As a result, the probability that a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the result X will appear depending on whether the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) is the result I or the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) is the result II. I was trying to improve the interest of the game by making a difference. However, in such a game machine, when the result of a specific lottery (variable pattern lottery) is the result X, information according to the result of the specific lottery (variable pattern lottery) is transmitted to the effect control means. Due to the fact that it was not done, the suggestion effect according to the result X was not performed.

The present inventor pays attention to this point, and separately from the first specific result (per chance 2 [indefinite jackpot B]) (corresponding to the result X in the conventional gaming machine), the second specific result (per chance 2 [per chance 2]. [Fixed value]) is provided, and when the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) becomes the first predetermined result (10 round big hit), the result of the specific lottery (variable pattern lottery) becomes the second specific result (chance). The probability of becoming a 2 hit [fixed value]) and the result of a specific lottery (variable pattern lottery) when the result of a predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) becomes the second predetermined result (6 round big hit) is the second. By configuring so that the probability of achieving a specific result ([fixed value] per chance 2) is the same, the result of the specific lottery (variable pattern lottery) becomes the second specific result ([fixed value] per chance 2]. Value]), and also when the result of a specific lottery (variable pattern lottery) is the first specific result (per chance 2 [indefinite jackpot B]), the specific lottery (variable pattern lottery) ), Information (data showing the fluctuation pattern) according to the result of) is transmitted to the second control means (sub control circuit 200). As a result, not only when the result of the specific lottery (variable pattern lottery) becomes the second specific result ([fixed value] per chance 2), but also the result of the specific lottery (variable pattern lottery) is the first specific. Even when the result is (chance 2 [indefinite jackpot B]), it is possible to perform suggestion effect based on the transmitted information. As a result, the present inventor has a case where the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is the first predetermined result (10 round big hit) and the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is the second predetermined result (6). In the case of a round jackpot), the probability that a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the first specific result (per chance 2 [indefinite jackpot B]) to the second specific result (per chance 2 [fixed value]) will appear. While making a difference, we succeeded in performing a suggestion effect according to the first specific result (per chance 2 [indefinite jackpot B]) to the second specific result (per chance 2 [fixed value]).

(F-1') The gaming machine of the above (F-1).
The display control means
The identification information display means has the same variation pattern depending on whether the result of the specific lottery is the first specific result or the result of the specific lottery is the second specific result. It is possible to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop the display.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the first specific result (per chance 2 [indefinite jackpot B]) and the second specific result (per chance 2 [fixed value]) Where the corresponding fluctuation pattern is the same, the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) is the first predetermined result (10 round big hit) and the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) is the second predetermined result. It is possible to perform a suggestion effect according to the fluctuation pattern while making a difference in the probability that the fluctuation pattern appears depending on the result (6 round big hit).

(F-2) A gaming machine including a first control means (main control circuit 100) for controlling the execution of a game and a second control means (sub control circuit 200) for controlling the production.
Identification information display means (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74, display device 16, etc.) capable of performing variable display and stop display of identification information, and
When a predetermined condition (winning of a game ball to the first starting port 420 to the second starting port 440) is satisfied, a predetermined lottery execution means capable of performing a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) regarding the game, and a predetermined lottery execution means.
Based on the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the predetermined lottery execution means, the variation pattern of the identification information from the start of the variation display of the identification information in the identification information display means to the stop display of the identification information is determined. Specific lottery execution means capable of performing a specific lottery (variable pattern lottery) for
A display control means capable of displaying the identification information in a variable manner and then stopping the display in the identification information display means in a variation pattern according to the result of the specific lottery performed by the specific lottery execution means.
When the result of the predetermined lottery becomes a predetermined result (big hit) and the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode in the identification information display means, the player is in a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) which is advantageous to the player. Specific game state control means that can be transferred,
When the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result, the result of the predetermined lottery is the same as the predetermined result before the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific display mode in the identification information display means. Suggestion effect execution means that can perform suggestion effect (look-ahead effect) that can suggest that it has become
Provided with a suggestion effect determining means capable of determining whether or not to perform the suggestion effect when the predetermined condition is satisfied.
As a result of the specific lottery, a plurality of types of results including a first specific result (“indefinite jackpot”) and a second specific result (“fixed value”) are provided.
The first control means
A transmission means capable of transmitting information (data indicating a fluctuation pattern) according to the result of the specific lottery performed by the specific lottery execution means to the second control means is provided.
The transmission means
When the result of the specific lottery is the first specific result, the information corresponding to the result of the specific lottery is not transmitted to the second control means, while the result of the specific lottery is the first. 2 When a specific result is obtained, it is possible to transmit information according to the result of the specific lottery to the second control means.
The suggestion effect execution means
When the predetermined condition is satisfied a plurality of times, the result of the specific lottery performed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition of one of the plurality of times the predetermined condition is satisfied is the first. When a specific result is obtained and it is determined that the suggestion effect is to be performed based on the Nth time when the predetermined condition is satisfied after the one predetermined condition is satisfied, the variable display of the identification information is displayed based on the satisfaction of the one predetermined condition. While the suggestion effect is not performed while the suggestion effect is performed, the identification information is variablely displayed based on the Kth (K is an arbitrary integer of 1 to N) predetermined condition after the one predetermined condition is satisfied. Can perform the suggestion effect,
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the variation pattern of the identification information from the start of the variation display of the identification information to the stop display of the identification information based on the result of a predetermined lottery (big hit determination). Where a specific lottery (variable pattern lottery) can be performed to determine the above, in the first control means (main control circuit 100), the result of the specific lottery (variable pattern lottery) is the first specific result. In the case of (“indefinite jackpot”), information (data indicating the fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the result of the specific lottery (variation pattern lottery) is not transmitted to the second control means (sub-control circuit 200). , When the result of the specific lottery (variable pattern lottery) becomes the second specific result (“fixed value”), the information (variable pattern is shown) according to the result of the specific lottery (variable pattern lottery). Data) can be transmitted to the second control means (sub control circuit 200). As a result, when the result of the specific lottery (variable pattern lottery) becomes the second specific result (“fixed value”), the second control means (control means for effect) is based on the transmitted information. In the (sub-control circuit 200), an effect (suggestion effect) that can suggest that the result of a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is a predetermined result (big hit) before the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode. (Look-ahead effect)) can be performed, but when the result of a specific lottery (variable pattern lottery) is the first specific result (“indefinite jackpot”), the specific lottery (variable pattern lottery) ), The suggestion effect (look-ahead effect) is not performed because the information corresponding to the result of) is not transmitted. Here, when a predetermined condition (winning of a game ball to the first starting port 420 to the second starting port 440) is satisfied a plurality of times, one of the predetermined conditions is satisfied a plurality of times. The result of the specific lottery (variable pattern lottery) performed based on the establishment of the above condition becomes the first specific result (“indefinite jackpot”), and is based on the Nth predetermined condition establishment after the one predetermined condition is satisfied. When it is decided to perform the suggestion effect (look-ahead effect), the suggestion effect (look-ahead effect) is not performed while the variation display of the identification information is performed based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition of the one. It is configured so that the suggestion effect (look-ahead effect) can be performed while the variation display of the identification information is performed based on the condition of the Kth time (K is an arbitrary integer of 1 to N) after the condition of is satisfied. Has been done. It is possible to adopt an arbitrary integer of 1 or more as N. For example, if N = 3, the specification performed based on the satisfaction of one predetermined condition (for example, the first reserved ball). The result of the lottery (variable pattern lottery) is the first specific result (“indefinite jackpot”), and is based on the third predetermined condition (for example, the fourth reserved ball) after the one predetermined condition is satisfied. When it is decided to perform the suggestion effect (look-ahead effect), the suggestion effect (look-ahead effect) is performed while the identification information is variablely displayed based on the satisfaction of the one predetermined condition (for example, the first reserved ball). ) Is not performed, while the first predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the second reserved ball) and the identification information is variablely displayed after the one predetermined condition is satisfied. While the identification information is variablely displayed based on the second predetermined condition being satisfied (for example, the third reserved ball) after the establishment, and after the one predetermined condition is satisfied, the third predetermined condition is satisfied (for example). For example, while the variation display of the identification information is performed based on the fourth reserved ball), it is possible to configure the suggestion effect (look-ahead effect) to be performed. By providing such a first specific result (“indefinite jackpot”) and a second specific result (“fixed value”) as a result of a specific lottery (variable pattern lottery), various suggestion effects (look-ahead effects) are provided. ) Can be realized, and the player's interest in the suggestion effect (look-ahead effect) can be increased.

(F-3) A gaming machine including a first control means (main control circuit 100) for controlling the execution of a game and a second control means (sub control circuit 200) for controlling the production.
Identification information display means (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74, display device 16, etc.) capable of performing variable display and stop display of identification information, and
When a predetermined condition (winning of a game ball to the first starting port 420 to the second starting port 440) is satisfied, a predetermined lottery execution means capable of performing a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) regarding the game, and a predetermined lottery execution means.
Based on the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the predetermined lottery execution means, the variation pattern of the identification information from the start of the variation display of the identification information in the identification information display means to the stop display of the identification information is determined. Specific lottery execution means capable of performing a specific lottery (variable pattern lottery) for
A display control means capable of displaying the identification information in a variable manner and then stopping the display in the identification information display means in a variation pattern according to the result of the specific lottery performed by the specific lottery execution means.
When the result of the predetermined lottery becomes a predetermined result (big hit) and the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode in the identification information display means, the player is in a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) which is advantageous to the player. Specific game state control means that can be transferred,
When the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result, the result of the predetermined lottery is the same as the predetermined result before the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific display mode in the identification information display means. Suggestion effect execution means that can perform suggestion effect (look-ahead effect) that can suggest that it has become
Provided with a suggestion effect determining means capable of determining whether or not to perform the suggestion effect when the predetermined condition is satisfied.
As a result of the specific lottery, a plurality of types of results including a first specific result (“indefinite jackpot”) and a second specific result (“fixed value”) are provided.
The first control means
A transmission means capable of transmitting information (data indicating a fluctuation pattern) according to the result of the specific lottery performed by the specific lottery execution means to the second control means is provided.
The transmission means
When the result of the specific lottery is the first specific result, the information corresponding to the result of the specific lottery is not transmitted to the second control means, while the result of the specific lottery is the first. 2 When a specific result is obtained, it is possible to transmit information according to the result of the specific lottery to the second control means.
The suggestion effect execution means
When the predetermined condition is satisfied a plurality of times, it is determined that the suggestion effect is performed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition of one of the plurality of times the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the predetermined condition is determined. It is determined that the suggestion effect is not performed based on the first to Nth predetermined condition establishment after the condition is satisfied, and the suggestion effect is based on the (N + 1) th time after the one predetermined condition is satisfied. When it is decided to perform the above suggestion effect based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, while the variable display of the identification information is performed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the predetermined condition of the one is performed. While the variation display of the identification information is performed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition for the Kth time (K is an arbitrary integer of 1 to (N + 1)) after the condition is satisfied, the (N + 1) time after the one predetermined condition is satisfied. It is possible to perform the suggestion effect based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the variation pattern of the identification information from the start of the variation display of the identification information to the stop display of the identification information based on the result of a predetermined lottery (big hit determination). Where a specific lottery (variable pattern lottery) can be performed to determine the above, in the first control means (main control circuit 100), the result of the specific lottery (variable pattern lottery) is the first specific result. In the case of (“indefinite jackpot”), information (data indicating the fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the result of the specific lottery (variation pattern lottery) is not transmitted to the second control means (sub-control circuit 200). , When the result of the specific lottery (variable pattern lottery) becomes the second specific result (“fixed value”), the information (variable pattern is shown) according to the result of the specific lottery (variable pattern lottery). Data) can be transmitted to the second control means (sub control circuit 200). As a result, when the result of the specific lottery (variable pattern lottery) becomes the second specific result (“fixed value”), the second control means (control means for effect) is based on the transmitted information. In the (sub-control circuit 200), an effect (suggestion effect) that can suggest that the result of a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is a predetermined result (big hit) before the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode. (Look-ahead effect)) can be performed, but when the result of a specific lottery (variable pattern lottery) is the first specific result (“indefinite jackpot”), the specific lottery (variable pattern lottery) ), The suggestion effect (look-ahead effect) is not performed because the information corresponding to the result of) is not transmitted. Here, when a predetermined condition (winning of a game ball to the first starting port 420 to the second starting port 440) is satisfied a plurality of times, one of the predetermined conditions is satisfied a plurality of times. It is decided that the suggestion effect (look-ahead effect) will be performed based on the satisfaction of the above condition, and that the suggestion effect (look-ahead effect) will not be performed based on the first to Nth predetermined condition establishment after the one predetermined condition is satisfied. Then, when it is decided to perform the suggestion effect (look-ahead effect) based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition (N + 1) th time after the determination of the predetermined condition is satisfied, the identification information is changed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition of the one. While the display is performed, the suggestion effect (look-ahead effect) based on the satisfaction of the one predetermined condition is performed, while the Kth time (K is an arbitrary integer of 1 to (N + 1)) after the one predetermined condition is satisfied. While the variable display of the identification information is performed based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, it is possible to perform the suggestion effect (look-ahead effect) based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition for the (N + 1) th time after the one predetermined condition is satisfied. It is configured in. It is possible to adopt an arbitrary integer of 1 or more as N. For example, if N = 2, a suggestion effect (look-ahead) is made based on the satisfaction of one predetermined condition (for example, the first reserved ball). It is decided to perform the effect), and the suggestion effect (look-ahead effect) is performed based on the first and second predetermined conditions (for example, the second and third reserved balls) after the one predetermined condition is satisfied. When it is decided not to perform the suggestion effect (pre-reading effect) based on the third predetermined condition (for example, the fourth reserved ball) after the one predetermined condition is satisfied, the first While the variation display of the identification information is performed based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition (for example, the first reserved ball), the suggestion effect based on the establishment of the predetermined condition (for example, the first reserved ball) While performing (look-ahead effect), while the first predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the second reserved ball) and the identification information is variablely displayed after the one predetermined condition is satisfied, the one predetermined condition is performed. While the variation display of the identification information is performed based on the second predetermined condition being satisfied (for example, the third holding ball) after the condition of the above is satisfied, and the third predetermined condition after the one predetermined condition is satisfied. While the variation display of the identification information is performed based on the establishment (for example, the fourth reserved ball), the third predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the fourth reserved ball) after the one predetermined condition is satisfied. It is possible to configure the suggestion effect (look-ahead effect) based on the above. As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, it is possible to realize various suggestion effects (look-ahead effects), and the player's interest in the suggestion effects (look-ahead effects) is increased. be able to.

As the information according to the result of the specific lottery (variable pattern lottery), in addition to the information indicating the fluctuation pattern, the information indicating the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) (information indicating whether or not the big hit) is given. Can be done. When the result of a specific lottery (variation pattern lottery) is a "fixed value" (variation pattern with the same selection probability regardless of the type of jackpot), information indicating whether or not it is a jackpot and information indicating the fluctuation pattern Is transmitted from the first control means (main control circuit 100) to the second control means (sub control circuit 200), while the result of a specific lottery (variable pattern lottery) is "indefinite jackpot" (depending on the type of jackpot). In the case of fluctuation patterns with different selection probabilities), only the information indicating whether or not it is a big hit is transmitted from the first control means (main control circuit 100) to the second control means (sub control circuit 200), and the fluctuation pattern It is possible to configure so that the information indicating the above is not transmitted. In this case, if the selection probability of the "fixed value" is made higher than the selection probability of the "indefinite jackpot", the selection ratio of the "indefinite jackpot" is relatively reduced, and the suggestion effect (look-ahead effect) is performed. The frequency can be increased.

In the second embodiment, it has been described that the first predetermined result (10 round jackpot) and the second predetermined result (6 round jackpot) are provided as the predetermined result (big hit). In the present invention, the type of jackpot is not particularly limited, and as the first predetermined result and the second predetermined result, a jackpot with a large number of time reductions and a jackpot with a small number of time reductions may be adopted, respectively. A large hit and a short-time no big hit may be adopted, or a probable variable big hit and a probable variable no big hit may be adopted.

<Appendix G>
In a pachinko gaming machine, generally, when a player launches a game ball, which is a game medium, into a game area by a launching device, and the game ball wins a prize in a winning opening or the like provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls Will be paid out. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines perform a jackpot game in which the jackpot, which is normally closed, is repeatedly opened for a predetermined period of time. In the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the game balls that have won the big prize opening. Here, some of the big winning openings have a blade member, and such a large winning opening repeatedly operates the blade member to change from the closed state to the open state to execute the big hit game. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines perform a small hit game in which the large winning opening is opened for a predetermined period from the closed state.

For example, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-233375, during a small hit game, the blade member changes its posture to an open posture that opens the opening / closing region, and the gaming ball can enter the opening / closing region. There is a pachinko game machine. In this pachinko gaming machine, a V winning opening is provided in the opening / closing area, and the game ball wins a prize in the V winning opening during the small hit game, so that the pachinko gaming machine is controlled to the big hit game state. In this pachinko gaming machine, when a game ball wins a prize in the V winning opening during a small hit game and is controlled to a big hit game state, a small hit symbol showing the result of a special symbol determination that triggered the current big hit game state. The game state after the jackpot game is completed is determined according to the type of. It should be noted that, for example, the transition probability to the jackpot game state changes as the game state changes. Therefore, as a result, the number of game balls that the player can acquire changes, and whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player may change.

By the way, in the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-233375, it is easy to win a small hit game during a short-time game, and since the opening / closing area is easy to open, a game ball wins a prize in the V winning opening. There is a possibility of shifting to the jackpot game state. In addition, even if the player is not in the short-time game, the game state may shift to the jackpot game state, and the game state may be changed. As described above, the number of game balls that can be acquired by the player changes as a result of the change in the game state. As described above, according to the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the number of gaming balls that the player can acquire as a result of the change in the gaming state changes rather than a constant ratio. Therefore, it is suppressed that the game becomes monotonous.

The present inventor improves the interest of the player in the game and improves the motivation of the player to play the game by devising the production using the design in the process of diligently examining the game machine as described above. I came up with the idea that it could be done.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game and improving a player's motivation for playing a game. To do.

In this respect, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment has the following features.

(G-1) A symbol display means (display device 16 or the like) capable of displaying fluctuations and stops of symbols, and
A lottery means that can perform a predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) related to the game,
Based on the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means, the symbol display means includes a display control means capable of variablely displaying the symbol and then stopping the display.
The display control means can perform re-variation display a plurality of times to temporarily stop the variation display of the symbol and then restart the variation display of the symbol before the symbol display means finally stops and displays the symbol. Equipped with re-variable display control means
The re-variation display control means
It is possible to display the variation of the symbol and the temporary stop display so that the symbols displayed along the plurality of virtual lines (effective lines) each have a reach mode.
In the one re-variation display, the first symbol (odd symbol) is displayed so as to reach along at least one virtual line among the plurality of virtual lines, while the virtual lines other than the virtual line are displayed. When the second symbol (even symbol) is displayed in the reach mode along the line, the display control is performed so that the first symbol is in the reach mode along all the virtual lines in the next re-variation display. It is possible to do,
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the symbol can be displayed in a variable manner and then stopped based on the result of a predetermined lottery (big hit determination), but the symbol is finally stopped. Before displaying, it is possible to perform re-variation display a plurality of times after temporarily stopping the variation display of the symbol and then restarting the variation display of the symbol. Then, it is possible to perform variable display and temporary stop display of the symbols so that the symbols displayed along the plurality of virtual lines (effective lines) each have a reach mode, and in one re-variation display, The first symbol (odd symbol) is displayed so as to reach along at least one virtual line (valid line) among the plurality of virtual lines (valid lines), while other than the virtual line (valid line). When the second symbol (even symbol) is displayed in the reach mode along the virtual line (effective line) of, the first symbol is displayed along all the virtual lines (effective line) in the next re-variation display. It is configured so that display control can be performed so that (odd number symbols) are in the reach mode. As a result, it is possible to make the player interested in the temporary stop display of the first symbol (odd symbol) in at least one virtual line (valid line), and all the virtual lines (valid lines). ), The player's expectation can be raised by making the first symbol (odd number symbol) reach.

It should be noted that a plurality of types of the first symbol (odd number symbol) and the second symbol (even number symbol) may be provided. For example, "1", "3", "5", "7", and "9" are provided as the first symbol (odd number symbol), while "2", "2", "2" are provided as the second symbol (even number symbol). 4 ”,“ 6 ”, and“ 8 ”may be provided. In this case, in the above-mentioned "the first symbol (odd number symbol) becomes the reach mode along all the virtual lines (valid lines)", the first symbol (odd number) constituting the reach mode in each virtual line (valid line) In addition to the case where all the symbols) are the same first symbol (odd symbol), the first symbol (odd symbol) constituting the reach mode in each virtual line (effective line) is the same as the first symbol (odd symbol). A case where other first symbols (odd symbols) are mixed is included.

(G-2) A symbol display means (display device 16 or the like) capable of displaying fluctuations and stops of symbols, and
A lottery means that can perform a predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) related to the game,
Based on the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means, the symbol display means includes a display control means capable of variablely displaying the symbol and then stopping the display.
The display control means can perform re-variation display a plurality of times to temporarily stop the variation display of the symbol and then restart the variation display of the symbol before the symbol display means finally stops and displays the symbol. Equipped with re-variable display control means
The re-variation display control means
While it is possible to perform variable display and temporary stop display of symbols so that the symbols displayed along a plurality of virtual lines (effective lines) each have a reach mode.
When a specific symbol (“NEXT”) appears as a symbol displayed without following the virtual line in the re-variation display, the next re-variation display can be generated, and the revariation display can be generated.
It is possible to increase the number of the virtual lines as the number of occurrences of the revariation display increases.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the symbol can be displayed in a variable manner and then stopped based on the result of a predetermined lottery (big hit determination), but the symbol is finally stopped. Before displaying, it is possible to perform re-variation display a plurality of times after temporarily stopping the variation display of the symbol and then restarting the variation display of the symbol. Then, it is possible to perform variable display and temporary stop display of the symbols so that the symbols displayed along the plurality of virtual lines (effective lines) each have a reach mode, while virtual in one re-variable display. When a specific symbol (“NEXT”) appears as a symbol displayed without following the line (effective line), it is possible to generate the next re-variation display and the number of occurrences of the re-variation display is It is configured so that the number of virtual lines (valid lines) can be increased as the number increases. As a result, the player is interested in the increase in the number of virtual lines (valid lines) due to the appearance of a specific symbol (“NEXT”), and each increased virtual line (valid). The player's expectation can be raised by the appearance of the reach mode along the line).

In the present specification, the "virtual line" refers to a (virtual) line that cannot be visually recognized by the player. In the second embodiment, the symbol (identification information) is finally stopped and displayed along one line (when the fluctuation time expires), but until the final stop of the symbol (identification information) is reached ( Temporary stops (temporary stops) (in the middle of the lapse of fluctuation time) may occur along multiple lines. In the above, the plurality of lines (lines different from the line for displaying the final result) are referred to as "virtual lines".

<Appendix H>
In a pachinko gaming machine, generally, when a player launches a game ball, which is a game medium, into a game area by a launching device, and the game ball wins a prize in a winning opening or the like provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls Will be paid out. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines perform a jackpot game in which the jackpot, which is normally closed, is repeatedly opened for a predetermined period of time. In the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the game balls that have won the big prize opening. Here, some of the big winning openings have a blade member, and such a large winning opening repeatedly operates the blade member to change from the closed state to the open state to execute the big hit game. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines perform a small hit game in which the large winning opening is opened for a predetermined period from the closed state.

For example, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-233375, during a small hit game, the blade member changes its posture to an open posture that opens the opening / closing region, and the gaming ball can enter the opening / closing region. There is a pachinko game machine. In this pachinko gaming machine, a V winning opening is provided in the opening / closing area, and the game ball wins a prize in the V winning opening during the small hit game, so that the pachinko gaming machine is controlled to the big hit game state. In this pachinko gaming machine, when a game ball wins a prize in the V winning opening during a small hit game and is controlled to a big hit game state, a small hit symbol showing the result of a special symbol determination that triggered the current big hit game state. The game state after the jackpot game is completed is determined according to the type of. It should be noted that, for example, the transition probability to the jackpot game state changes as the game state changes. Therefore, as a result, the number of game balls that the player can acquire changes, and whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player may change.

By the way, in the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-233375, it is easy to win a small hit game during a short-time game, and since the opening / closing area is easy to open, a game ball wins a prize in the V winning opening. There is a possibility of shifting to the jackpot game state. In addition, even if the player is not in the short-time game, the game state may shift to the jackpot game state, and the game state may be changed. As described above, the number of game balls that can be acquired by the player changes as a result of the change in the game state. As described above, according to the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the number of gaming balls that the player can acquire as a result of the change in the gaming state changes rather than a constant ratio. Therefore, it is suppressed that the game becomes monotonous.

The present inventor appropriately realizes the game playability intended by the developer of the game machine by devising the end condition of the predetermined game state in the process of diligently studying the game machine as described above. I came up with the idea that I could do it.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of achieving desired game playability.

In this respect, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment has the following features.

(H-1) The first winning device (first starting port 420) capable of entering a game ball, and
A second winning device (second starting port 440) that allows a game ball to enter,
The state regarding the possibility of entering the game ball into the second winning device is described in the first state (closed state) in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second winning device and the game ball enters the second winning device. A winning state control means that can be changed between an easy second state (open state) and
A specific game state control means capable of shifting to a specific game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player based on the game ball entering the first winning device.
After the end of the specific game state, a predetermined game state control means capable of shifting to a predetermined game state (time saving game state) that can be easily controlled to the second state by the winning state control means, and
Identification information display means (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74, display device 16, etc.) capable of performing variable display and stop display of identification information, and
Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second winning device, the identification information display means includes display control means capable of variablely displaying the identification information and then stopping the display.
The predetermined game state control means terminates the predetermined game state when the variable display of the identification information performed by the display control means is started for the first time after the end of the specific game state, and the winning state control means It is possible to shift to a non-predetermined gaming state that is easy to control to the first state.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player is based on the fact that the gaming ball enters the first winning device (first starting port 420). In addition, after the end of the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state), the second winning device (second starting port 440) can be easily entered into the second winning state (open state). It is possible to shift to a predetermined gaming state (time saving gaming state) that is easy to control. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second winning device (second starting port 440), the identification information can be variablely displayed and then stopped, and the specific game state (big hit game state) can be displayed. When the variable display of the identification information, which is performed for the first time after the end of), is started, the predetermined game state (short-time game state) is ended, and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second winning device (second start port 440). It is configured so that it is possible to shift to a non-predetermined gaming state that can be easily controlled to the first state (closed state). As a result, for example, even when the variation display is performed for a long time, it is possible to end the predetermined gaming state (time saving gaming state) without waiting for the end of the variation display. It is possible to reduce the possibility that a large number of game balls enter the second winning device (second starting port 440) (holding balls are accumulated) during the variation display. In this regard, there is concern that if a situation occurs in which more reserved balls are accumulated than the developer of the game machine expects, it will not be possible to realize the game playability intended by the developer. Will be done. According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

(H-1') The gaming machine of the above (H-1).
A displacement member (ordinary electric accessory) that is arranged on the side of the second winning device and can change its position between a first position (retracted state) and a second position (protruding state). With 460)
In the second winning device, the side on which the displacement member is arranged is open.
The winning state control means controls the first state by arranging the displacement member at the first position, while controlling the second state by arranging the displacement member at the second position. It is possible to
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the displacement member (ordinary electric accessory 460) changes its position between the first position (pull-in state) and the second position (protruding state). Where it is possible, the displacement member (ordinary electric accessory 460) is arranged on the side of the second winning device (second starting port 440), while the second winning device (second starting port 440) is , The side on which the displacement member (ordinary electric accessory 460) is arranged is open. As a result, by changing the position of the displacement member (ordinary electric accessory 460), the state related to the possibility of the game ball entering the second winning device (second starting port 440) is changed to the first state (closed state). It is possible to switch between the second state (open state) and the possibility that a large number of game balls enter the second winning device (second starting port 440) (holding balls are accumulated). Can be reduced to.

(H-2) A lottery means capable of performing a predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) regarding a game, and
When the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means becomes a predetermined result (big hit to small hit), a specific game capable of shifting to a specific game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player. State control means and
A predetermined game state control means capable of shifting to a predetermined game state (time saving game state) after the end of the specific game state is provided.
The lottery means
A first lottery means capable of performing a first predetermined lottery (first special symbol lottery) when the first condition (a winning of a game ball to the first starting port 420) is satisfied, and
A second lottery means capable of performing a second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) when the second condition (winning of a game ball to the second starting port 440) is satisfied is provided. ,
In the predetermined gaming state, the second condition is more likely to be satisfied as compared with the non-predetermined gaming state.
As the predetermined result, a plurality of types of results including the first predetermined result (small hit) and the second predetermined result (big hit) are provided.
When the result of the second predetermined lottery is the first predetermined result, the specific game state control means shifts to the specific game state on condition that a predetermined prize (V prize) is established. Is possible,
When the result of the second predetermined lottery is the first predetermined result, the predetermined game state control means terminates the predetermined game state even if the predetermined prize is not established. It is possible to shift to a non-predetermined gaming state,
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, when the result of a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) becomes a predetermined result (big hit to small hit), a specific gaming state (big hit game) advantageous to the player is achieved. It is possible to shift to a predetermined gaming state (short-time gaming state) after the end of the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state). The predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is triggered by the fulfillment of the first condition (winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420) or the second condition (winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440). In the predetermined gaming state (time saving gaming state), the second condition (winning of the gaming ball to the second starting port 440) is more likely to be satisfied as compared with the non-predetermined gaming state. Here, as the predetermined result (big hit to small hit), a plurality of types of results including the first predetermined result (small hit) and the second predetermined result (big hit) are provided, and the second predetermined lottery When the result of (the second special symbol lottery) is the first predetermined result (small hit), the specific game state (big hit game state) is set on condition that the predetermined prize (V prize) is established. It is possible to migrate. Then, when the result of the second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) becomes the first predetermined result (small hit), even if the predetermined prize (V prize) is not established, the predetermined game It is configured so that the state (time saving game state) can be terminated and the state can be shifted to the non-predetermined game state. As a result, for example, even if the player intentionally hits the ball so that the predetermined prize (V prize) is not established, regardless of whether or not the predetermined prize (V prize) is established. Since it is possible to end the predetermined game state (time-saving game state), it is possible to prevent the timing at which the predetermined game state (time-saving game state) ends from changing depending on how the player strikes. In this respect, there is a concern that if the player plays a game in a method different from that assumed by the developer of the game machine, it will not be possible to realize the game playability intended by the developer. Will be done. According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

(H-3) The first winning device (first starting port 420) capable of entering a game ball, and
A second winning device (second starting port 440) that allows a game ball to enter,
The state regarding the possibility of entering the game ball into the second winning device is described in the first state (closed state) in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second winning device and the game ball enters the second winning device. A winning state control means that can be changed between an easy second state (open state) and
A specific game state control means capable of shifting to a specific game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player based on the game ball entering the first winning device.
After the end of the specific game state, a predetermined game state control means capable of shifting to a predetermined game state (time saving game state) that can be easily controlled to the second state by the winning state control means, and
Identification information display means (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74, display device 16, etc.) capable of performing variable display and stop display of identification information, and
Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first winning device or the second winning device, the identification information display means can display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop the display. Prepare,
The predetermined game state control means is the predetermined game state when the change display based on the game ball entering the second winning device is performed a predetermined number of times as the change display of the identification information by the display control means. On the other hand, even when the number of times of the variation display performed based on the game ball entering the second winning device does not reach the predetermined number of times, the first When the variation display based on the game ball entering the winning device is performed a specific number of times, the non-predetermined game in which the predetermined game state is terminated and the winning state control means can easily control the game to the first state. It is possible to move to the state,
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player is based on the fact that the gaming ball enters the first winning device (first starting port 420). In addition, after the end of the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state), the second winning device (second starting port 440) can be easily entered into the second winning state (open state). It is possible to shift to a predetermined gaming state (time saving gaming state) that is easy to control. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first winning device (first starting port 420) or the second winning device (second starting port 440), the identification information may be variablely displayed and then stopped. Where possible, as a variation display of the identification information, when a variation display based on a game ball entering the second winning device (second start port 440) is performed a predetermined number of times, a predetermined game state (time saving game) is performed. The state) can be terminated, but the number of times of the variation display performed based on the game ball entering the second winning device (second starting port 440) has not reached the predetermined number of times. Even if there is, if the fluctuation display based on the game ball entering the first winning device (first starting port 420) is performed a specific number of times, the predetermined game state (time saving game state) is terminated and the game state is terminated. The second winning device (second starting port 440) is configured to be able to shift to a non-predetermined gaming state in which the game ball can be easily controlled to the first state (closed state) in which it is difficult to enter the ball. As a result, for example, the player hits the game ball into the first winning device (first starting port 420) instead of the second winning device (second starting port 440). However, since it is possible to end the predetermined gaming state (time-saving gaming state) based on the game ball entering the first winning device (first starting port 420), the second winning device (second winning device). It is possible to prevent a situation in which a predetermined gaming state (short-time gaming state) continues for an excessively long period of time due to the fact that the gaming ball does not enter the starting port 440). In this regard, if a situation occurs in which the predetermined gaming state (short-time gaming state) continues for a longer period than expected by the developer of the gaming machine, the game playability intended by the developer is realized. There is concern that it will not be possible to do so. According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

As the specific number of times, any number of times (for example, 5 times) can be appropriately adopted, may be less than a predetermined number of times, may be more than a predetermined number of times, or be the same number as the predetermined number of times. It may be.

[Extensibility of other game machines according to the present embodiment]
Further, the game machine 1 of the present embodiment may be configured so that, for example, set values in six stages of "1" to "6" can be set by, for example, a person involved in the hall. When the set value is changed, for example, the jackpot probability (internal winning probability) in the internal lottery is changed.

The game machine 1 of the present embodiment can apply the present invention to all game machines in which a game is played using a game medium and benefits are given based on the result of the game. That is, not only is the game played by the game medium being launched or thrown in by the physical movement of the player, and the game medium is paid out based on the result of the game, but the main control circuit itself is the game. The game medium owned by the person may be electromagnetically managed to enable a game performed by circulating the enclosed game ball or a game performed without a medal. Further, it may be a game medium management device that is attached (connected) to the main control circuit and manages the game medium that electromagnetically manages the game medium owned by the player.

When managed by a game media management device connected to the main control circuit, the game media management device has a ROM and RWM (or RAM) and is provided in the game machine, and is an external game medium (not shown). It is connected to the handling device via a predetermined interface so that it can communicate in both directions, and the game medium lending operation (that is, the operation of providing the game medium necessary for the player to perform the game medium loading operation). ) Or, when a winning combination related to the payout of the game medium is won (the winning combination is established), the game medium payout operation (that is, the player is made to acquire the game medium necessary for paying out the game medium). (Operation), or an operation of electromagnetically recording a game medium used for a game may be performed. Further, the game media management device not only manages the actual number of game media, but also displays the number of game media possessed on the front surface of the game machine 1 based on, for example, the management result of the number of game media. A medium number display device (not shown) may be provided, and the number of game media displayed on the possessed game medium number display device may be managed. That is, the game media management device may be capable of recording and displaying the total number of game media that the player can use for the game by an electromagnetic method.

Further, in this case, the game media management device has a performance that allows the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to an external game medium handling device, and also has a game. In addition to the case where a person directly operates the game medium, the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and an external connection terminal plate (not shown) is provided between the device and an external game medium handling device. It is desirable that the player has the ability to transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media only through the external connection terminal plate, but the game media management device is via a dedicated unit or the like. When transmitting and receiving signals to and from the game machine, it is also possible to receive game information and the like via a dedicated unit or board for transmitting and receiving signals.

In addition to the above, the game machine is provided with a lending operation means, a return (payment) operation means, and an external connection terminal plate that can be operated by the player, and the game medium handling device is provided with a slot for valuable value such as banknotes and a recording medium. (For example, IC card) insertion slot, non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money from mobile terminals, other various operation means such as lending operation means, return operation means, external connection terminal board on the game media handling device side It may be provided (neither is shown).

As a flow of the game at that time, for example, the player deposits valuable value to the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of any of the above lending operation means. Then, the number of game media corresponding to the valuable value subtracted from the game media handling device to the game media management device is increased. Then, the player plays a game, and if a game medium is required, the above operation is repeated. After that, a predetermined number of game media are acquired as a result of the game, and when the game is finished, the number of game media is transmitted from the game media management device to the game media handling device by operating one of the return operation means, and the game is played. The medium handling device discharges a recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. The game media management device clears the number of game media stored by itself when the number of game media is transmitted. The player takes the discharged recording medium to a prize counter or the like for exchanging prizes, or moves the game table to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another table.

In the above example, all the game media are transmitted to the game medium handling device, but only the number of game media desired by the player is transmitted on the game machine or the game medium handling device side, and the game medium possessed by the player is transmitted. It may be divided and processed. Further, not only the recording medium is discharged, but cash or a cash equivalent may be discharged, or the recording medium may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. Further, the game medium handling device may be capable of inserting a member recording medium of the game hall and storing the member recording medium in the member recording medium so that the game can be replayed at a later date.

Further, in the game machine or the game medium handling device, a lock operation for locking the game medium or valuable value data communication can be executed on the game medium handling device or the game medium management device by operating a predetermined operating means (not shown). May be good. In that case, the player may be recorded by setting information such as a one-time password that only the player can know, or by using an imaging means provided in the game machine or the game medium handling device.

Further, in the above, the case where the game medium management device is applied to the pachinko game machine is described, but the game medium management device is also used in the pachislot machine, the slot machine using the game ball, and the enclosed game machine. It can also be provided so that the player's game medium is managed.

In this way, by providing the game medium management device described above, the number of parts inside the game machine can be reduced as compared with the case where the game medium is physically used for the game, and the cost and manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced. Not only can it be reduced, but it is also possible to prevent the player from coming into direct contact with the game medium, improving the game environment, reducing noise, and reducing the power consumption of the game machine by reducing the number of parts. It will also be. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts through the game medium and the slot and payout port of the game medium. That is, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of improving various environments surrounding the game machine.

In addition, a communication cable is used to transmit data on an enclosed game machine configured so that the game medium can be played without being discharged to the outside, and an increase / decrease in the game medium due to consumption, lending, and payout of the game medium to the game machine. When the present invention is applied to a game system having a game medium management device connected so as to be able to transmit and receive by an optical signal via an optical signal, the game system may be configured as follows.

The outline of the enclosed game machine will be described below. In the enclosed game machine, the launching device is located above the game area and launches a game ball as a game medium from above with respect to the game area. When the player operates the handle, the payout control circuit drives the ball feed solenoid, and the ball feed punch pushes the ball in the standby state toward the launch pad. As a result, the game ball moves to the launch pad. In addition, a subtraction sensor is provided on the path from the standby position to the launch pad to detect a game ball moving to the launch pad. When the game ball is detected by the subtraction sensor, the number of balls held is subtracted by 1. In this way, since the game ball as the game medium is launched from above with respect to the game area, the so-called return ball (foul ball) can be avoided in the enclosed game machine. Then, the game ball discharged from the game area after rolling in the game area is polished by the ball polishing device. The game ball polished by the ball polishing device is transported upward by the lifting device and guided to the launching device. The game balls are not discharged to the outside of the enclosed game machine, and a certain number (for example, 50) of game balls are configured to circulate in a series of paths in the game machine.

In the enclosed game machine, since the game ball is not discharged to the outside of the game machine, an upper plate or a lower plate for temporarily holding the game ball is not provided. Since the game ball is not discharged to the outside in the enclosed game machine, the game ball is not actually in the player's hand, and the game ball does not actually increase or decrease by playing the game. In the enclosed game machine, the player starts the game after obtaining a ball by lending from the game medium management device. Here, obtaining a holding ball means that the player obtains a game medium in terms of data management. Then, when the game ball is launched from the launching device, the possessed ball is consumed and the number of possessed balls decreases. In addition, as the game balls pass through each winning opening or the like provided in the game area, the number of balls held is increased by paying out the number according to the conditions set according to the winning opening. Furthermore, the number of balls held will increase by lending from the game media management device. In addition, "consumption, lending and payout of game media" means that the ball is consumed, lent and paid out. In addition, "increase / decrease in game media" means that the number of balls held increases / decreases due to consumption, lending, and payout. In addition, "data on increase / decrease in game media due to consumption, lending, and payout of game media" is data on a decrease in the number of balls held due to the launch of a game ball and an increase in the number of balls held due to lending and paying out.

The enclosed game machine may have a payout control circuit and operating means (for example, a touch panel type liquid crystal display device, which may be provided separately or integrally with the game machine). However, the game medium management device may have an operating means (for example, a touch panel type liquid crystal display device, which may be provided separately or integrally with the game medium management device). The payout control circuit is connected to various sensors that detect the passage of the game ball through each winning opening or the like. The payout control circuit manages the number of balls held. For example, when a game ball passes through each winning opening, the number of game balls paid out due to this is added to the number of balls held. Also, when the game ball is launched, the number of balls held is subtracted. The payout control circuit transmits data regarding the number of balls held to the game medium management device by the operation of the player. Further, the above-mentioned liquid crystal display device (or touch panel, etc.) is mainly located at the lower part of the game machine, although the installation position is not particularly limited, and the game value managed by the game medium management device is changed to the holding ball. Accepts requests for conversion (ball lending) and counting (returning) balls. Then, these requests are transmitted to the payout control circuit via the game medium management device, and the payout control circuit instructs the game medium management device to transmit data regarding the current number of balls held. Here, the "game value" refers to money / banknotes, prepaid media, tokens, electronic money, tickets, etc., which can be converted into holding balls by the game media management device. In the present embodiment, the game media management device is a so-called CR unit, and is configured to be able to accept banknotes, prepaid media, and the like. In addition, the counted balls can be used for prize exchange and the like at a game hall where a game system is installed.

In addition, the enclosed game machine has a backup power supply. As a result, even when the power is turned off at night or the like, the data immediately before the power is turned off can be retained. Further, with this backup power supply, for example, the door frame opening detection by the door opening sensor may be continuously executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent cheating at night. In this case, information such as the number of times the door frame is opened may be stored. Further, when the power is turned on, information such as the number of times the door frame is opened may be output to the liquid crystal display device of the game machine or the like.

The game medium management device has a game machine connection board. The game medium management device is configured to transmit / receive data (transmission signal) to / from the game machine via the game machine connection board. The data to be transmitted and received includes the unique ID of the CPU provided in the main control circuit, the unique ID of the CPU provided in the payout control circuit, the game machine manufacturer code stored in the game machine, the security chip manufacturer code, and the game. Information such as the model code of the machine. Then, when one of the game machine and the game medium management device is used as a transmission source and the other is used as a transmission destination, and the transmission source transmits a transmission signal, the transmission destination that receives the transmission signal is the same signal as the transmission signal. The confirmation signal is transmitted to the transmission source, and the transmission source compares the transmission signal with the confirmation signal and determines whether or not they are the same.

In this way, the transmission source compares the confirmation signal transmitted from the transmission destination with the transmission signal to determine whether or not they are the same, so that the signal transmitted from the transmission source is not tampered with. It can be confirmed that the signal has been sent to the sender. As a result, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as falsification of transmission / reception signals between the game machine and the game medium management device.

Further, in the game system, the transmission source has a modulation unit that modulates a signal, the signal modulated by the modulation unit is transmitted as the transmission signal, and the transmission destination transmits the signal modulated by the modulation unit. It may have a demodulation unit for demodulation.

As a result, even if the transmission / reception signal between the game machine and the game medium management device is read, it is difficult to decipher this signal, and the transmission / reception signal between the game machine and the game medium management device is transmitted. It is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as falsification.

Further, in the game system, when the transmission destination receives the transmission signal from the transmission source, the approval signal, which is a signal indicating that the transmission signal has been received, is set in addition to the confirmation signal. It may be transmitted to the source.

As a result, by comparing the transmission signal and the confirmation signal, it is confirmed not only that the normal signal has been transmitted / received, but also that the normal signal has been transmitted / received based on the approval signal. Therefore, it is possible to further strengthen the suppression of fraudulent activities.

(2) Extensibility 2
In the big hit game state, it is possible to perform a round game, while in the small hit game state, it is basically not equipped with a round game, and it is possible to open and close the big prize opening where the character continuous operation device does not operate. Yes, it is possible to shift to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player after the end of the big hit game state, but basically it is more advantageous after the end of the small hit game state than before the transition to the small hit game state. It does not shift to the game state.
However, if the large winning opening with a specific area opens during the small hit game state, the condition device operates when the game ball passes through the specific area, and the accessory continuous operation device operates, the small hit After the end of the gaming state, the game shifts to the big hit gaming state, which is an advantageous gaming state for the player, and at this time, the number of rounds may be counted even after the small hit gaming state.

Compared to "normal reach" and "normal reach", the ratio of the effect executed according to the fluctuation of the special symbol is higher when it becomes a big hit, and it is executed when the fluctuation pattern has a high expectation of becoming a big hit. It may have a "super reach" effect. At this time, it is desirable that the "super reach" is a fluctuation pattern having a longer fluctuation time than the "normal reach". The degree of expectation is a concept that includes the degree of expectation for big hits, probability changes, and time reductions. Specifically, the degree of expectation for a big hit (reliability, etc.) is the degree of expectation (ratio of a big hit) that becomes a big hit when each reach fluctuation pattern is selected. For example, the reach fluctuation is performed 100 times. In this case, if the jackpot is 70 times, the expectation for the jackpot is 70% (the appearance rate (probability) at which the jackpot appears is 70%). In addition, the degree of expectation for probability change and time saving is the probability change state (high probability state of special figure, high probability of normal figure or low probability of normal figure) and time saving state (normal figure in electric support state) after the end of big hit etc. It is a high-probability state of, mainly a low-probability state of a special figure, but it may be a high-probability of a special figure.) Even if it indicates a combination of expectations and various expectations. good.

(3) Extensibility 3
In the gaming machine of the present invention, opening the door may be a condition for changing the setting on the software. The setting can be changed only after the door opening is monitored (detected) by turning on the setting key + RWM (RAM) clear switch when the power is turned on. When the set value is not set, "E" is displayed in all 4 digits of the performance display monitor. At this time, although a predetermined sound is also generated, not only the predetermined sound but also a voice "RWM abnormality error" may be generated. When the setting is changed, a specific sound is generated (the voice "The setting is being changed" may also be generated), and all the lamps are lit. On the back side of the game machine, the set value changes each time the RWM clear switch is pressed, and when the setting key is returned (pulled out), it returns to the normal state. If you open the door and turn on the power with the key turned, you can check the setting value on the back side in the setting confirmation state, and the wording "Settings are being changed" is displayed on the screen.

In addition, a maintenance mode may be installed. In the maintenance history, the time when the power is turned on, the time when the setting is confirmed, the time when the RWM (RAM) abnormality occurs, the error related to the setting, and the like are recorded. In this case, for example, a maximum of about 200 maintenance histories may be recorded. In the setting history, the history of setting change and setting confirmation and the setting value can be confirmed. Note that this history cannot be viewed without the setting key.

Further, the display of the setting change may be performed only by the control of the sub side, but the special figure-related display may be fully lit by the control of the main side. In addition, when the setting change is displayed by all lighting of the special figure related display, the pattern of all lighting is not provided in the display pattern of the special symbol. Further, the setting change history can be recorded up to about 100, for example, and the maintenance mode can be operated only during the setting confirmation. In addition, the history cannot be deleted in the hall (game hall).

Further, since the power supply board is provided with a backup function, an RWM abnormality occurs when the board is switched, and the performance display monitor is also cleared. There is no delay at the final confirmation of setting the set value. The setting is changed during the delay.

(4) Extensibility 4
In pachinko gaming machines, a first sensor that detects the opening of the front door and a second sensor that detects that the main body (holding frame of the board) has moved (opening operation, etc.) from the outer frame (machine frame, etc.). A sensor is provided.

The setting may not be changed when the opening is detected by the first sensor, and the setting may be changed when the opening is detected by the second sensor. In this case, the switch that is pressed to change the setting is provided on the board or the like on the back side of the game machine, and the worker in the game hall moves the main body to move the front of the game machine (outer frame of the game machine). It is possible to change the settings while it is guaranteed to work from the front). The present invention is not limited to this, and the setting may be changed when the opening is detected by both the first sensor and the second sensor, or the opening is detected by the first sensor. It may be configured so that the setting can be changed when it is set.

[11. Addendum]
According to the pachinko gaming machine of the embodiment described above, the following gaming machines can be provided.

[11-1. Appendix 1-1 to Appendix 1-8]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, the big hit game is started, and the big winning opening opens and closes in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. If the above jackpot is a probability variation jackpot, the jackpot game is controlled to a high probability gaming state after the jackpot game is completed.

As a game machine of this type, a game setting value in which the state of a game element (structural element or control element) that influences the ball entry rate to the ball entry port and the ball ejection tendency is input in advance by a predetermined setting input means. A pachinko gaming machine that is set to a state corresponding to the above is disclosed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977).

According to the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, since the ball ejection tendency for each game table can be arbitrarily set, it becomes impossible to adjust or maintain the game board configuration such as game nails and accessories. Even so, it is possible to prevent uniform ball ejection tendency for each game store or game table.

(First issue)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, although the ball ejection tendency for each game table can be arbitrarily set, structural factors that influence the ball entry rate and the ball ejection tendency to the ball entrance Alternatively, the state of the control element can only be changed according to the set value, and the degree of contribution to the improvement of the game interest is not necessarily large.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of suitably changing the state of a game element according to a setting while improving the interest. is there.

In order to solve the first problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 1-1 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 1-1 is
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data related to the progress of the game can be obtained. A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in 6 stages of setting 1 to setting 6).
A lottery means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of steps S73, S83, and S118) capable of executing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and
A display means (for example, the first special symbol display unit 73, the second special symbol display unit 74) in which the variation display of the symbol (for example, a special symbol) is performed in a predetermined variation pattern over a predetermined variation time.
A variation pattern determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S78) that determines a variation pattern performed in the display means based on the result of the lottery.
A variation pattern table storage means (for example, main ROM 102) for storing the variation pattern table used for determining the variation pattern, and
A symbol display control means (for example, a symbol display control means that displays a variation of the symbol (for example, a variation display of a special symbol) over a variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determining means, and stops and displays the result of the lottery. For example, the main CPU 101) capable of executing the process of step S93 and
With
The fluctuation pattern table storage means
A fluctuation pattern table defined so that the probability that the fluctuation time is relatively determined to be a short fluctuation pattern (for example, normal fluctuation B) increases as the set value set by the setting change control means increases (for example, FIG. It is characterized in that it stores the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol shown in 23).

According to the game machine of (1) above, the higher the set value set by the setting change control means, the shorter the fluctuation time. Expectations will be raised, and it will be possible to improve the entertainment of the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
A lottery number counting means (for example, main CPU 101) for counting the number of times the lottery is executed from a specific time is further provided, and
The fluctuation pattern table storage means
Another variation pattern table (for example, FIG. 25) is defined so that the probability of being determined by the short variation pattern becomes higher than that of the variation pattern table as the set value set by the setting change control means increases. The fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol when the number of fluctuations shown is 1001 or more is further stored.
The fluctuation pattern determining means
When the number of executions of the lottery counted by the lottery count means satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, when a big hit lottery of 1001 or more special symbols is performed after the big hit game state ends), It is characterized in that the fluctuation pattern can be determined by using the other fluctuation pattern table.

According to the game machine of (2) above, when the number of times the lottery is executed counted by the lottery number counting means satisfies a predetermined condition, the fluctuation pattern can be determined using another fluctuation pattern table. Therefore, the higher the set value, the greater the number of lottery times per unit time, and when the number of times the lottery is executed is a specific number of times the lottery is executed, the player's expectation is raised, and it is possible to improve the game interest. The "predetermined condition" corresponds to, for example, when a jackpot lottery for a predetermined number or more (for example, 1001 times or more) is performed after the jackpot game state ends, but is not limited to this.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (2) above
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of held storage stored in the held storage means, the lottery result for the held storage and the variable display, the set value). Possible game information storage means (eg, RWM (main RAM 103)) and
Appropriate determination means (main CPU 101 that performs processing in steps S72 and S82) for determining suitability / unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means at a predetermined timing, and
If the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined to be unsuitable by the appropriateness determination means while the symbol variation display is being performed, a lottery for the symbol variation display is performed. A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722) that controls the game so that it cannot proceed even if the symbol is not stopped and displayed in a mode showing the result.
It is characterized by having.

According to the game machine of (3) above, when the variable display of the symbol (for example, the variable display of the special symbol) is performed, the suitability / unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined. May be done. In this case, even if the symbol is not stopped and displayed in a manner showing the result of the lottery for the variable display of the symbol, if it is determined to be inappropriate in the determination of suitability / unsuitability for the game information, It is configured so that the game cannot proceed. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the first problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 1-2 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machines in Appendix 1-2 are
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data related to the progress of the game can be obtained. A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in 6 stages of setting 1 to setting 6).
A lottery means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of steps S73, S83, and S118) capable of executing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and
A display means (for example, a display device 16) in which a symbol effect (for example, a variation effect of a decorative symbol) is performed by a predetermined symbol and the result of the lottery can be shown depending on the stop mode of the symbol.
A stop mode determining means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 capable of executing the process of step S205) that determines the stop mode of the symbol that can be shown in the display means based on the result of the lottery.
A stop mode table storage means (for example, sub-main ROM 2050) for storing a stop mode table (for example, the decorative symbol determination table of FIG. 24) used for determining the stop mode of the symbol by the stop mode determining means.
A symbol effect control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 capable of executing the process of step S207) that controls the symbol to be stopped in the stop mode determined by the stop mode determining means.
When the symbol is displayed in an aspect (for example, a first aspect, a second aspect, a specific aspect) indicating that the result of the lottery is a specific result (for example, a big hit), a plurality of benefits advantageous to the player. (For example, 4R normal jackpot, 4R probability variable jackpot, 10R normal jackpot, 10R probability variable jackpot), and a profit-giving means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the jackpot game control of FIG. 20).
With
The profit-giving means
When the symbol is displayed in a stop mode indicating that the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, a big hit) and the stop mode is a specific stop mode (for example, a specific mode), the plurality of benefits Among them, it is configured to be able to give a specific profit (for example, 10R probability variation jackpot) with a relatively high advantage.
The stop mode determining means
When the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, a big hit), the probability that the stop mode of the symbol will be stopped in the specific stop mode increases as the set value set by the setting change control means increases. It is characterized in that it is configured so that the stopping mode of the symbol can be determined so as to be enhanced.

According to the game machine of (1) above, the higher the set value set by the setting change control means, the more the symbol stop mode is stopped in a specific stop mode having a relatively high advantage among a plurality of benefits. It is possible to increase the probability that the game will be played, and it will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
The stop mode determining means
When the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, a big hit), the set value set by the setting change control means has the same probability that the specific profit is given regardless of the set value. It is characterized in that the stop mode of the symbol can be determined so that the probability that the stop mode of the symbol is stopped in the specific stop mode increases as the value increases.

According to the game machine of (2) above, when the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, big hit), the setting is changed while the probability that the specific profit is given is the same regardless of the setting. As the set value set by the control means increases, the probability of being stopped in the specific stop mode increases, so that it is possible to improve the game interest.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of held storage stored in the held storage means, the lottery result for the held storage and the variable display, the set value). Possible game information storage means (eg, RWM (main RAM 103)) and
Appropriate determination means (main CPU 101 that performs processing in steps S72 and S82) for determining suitability / unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means at a predetermined timing, and
When the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined to be unsuitable by the appropriateness determination means when the symbol effect is being performed, the result of the lottery is the specific result. Even if it is determined by the stop mode determining means that the stop mode of the symbol is stopped in the specific stop mode, the game control means (for example, the process of step S722) for controlling the game cannot proceed is executed. Main CPU 101) and
It is characterized by having.

According to the game machine of (3) above, when a symbol effect (for example, a variation effect of a decorative symbol) is being performed, the suitability or unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined. Sometimes. In this case, even if the result of the lottery is a specific result and it is determined that the stop mode of the symbol is stopped in the specific stop mode, it is inappropriate in determining the suitability / unsuitability of the game information. If it is determined that the game cannot proceed, the game cannot proceed. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the first problem, the game machine of Appendix 1-3 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machines in Appendix 1-3 are
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data related to the progress of the game can be obtained. A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in 6 stages of setting 1 to setting 6).
A lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of steps S73, S83, and S118, including both a jackpot lottery and a main symbol determination lottery).
A lottery table storage means for storing a lottery table used for the lottery (for example, a table showing the selection rate of the main symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol of FIG. 26 or FIG. 27 is a jackpot).
At least a display means (for example, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74) in which variable display of symbols is performed, and
A symbol display control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S93) that displays a variation of the symbol and stops and displays the result of the lottery.
The symbol is in an aspect (for example, Special Figure 1-1 to Special Figure 1-8, Special Figure 2-1 to Special Figure 2-4) indicating that the result of the lottery is a specific result (for example, a big hit). When displayed, a profit-giving means (for example, FIG. 20) that grants one of a plurality of profits advantageous to the player (for example, 4R normal jackpot, 4R probability variable jackpot, 10R normal jackpot, 10R probability variable jackpot). Main CPU 101) that executes jackpot game control, and
With
The lottery table storage means
A plurality of lottery tables in which the lottery probabilities for specific profits (for example, 10R probability variation jackpot) having a relatively high advantage among the plurality of profits differ depending on the set value are stored.
The lottery means
It is characterized in that the lottery can be performed using the lottery table according to the set value set by the setting change control means.

According to the game machine of (1) above, since the lottery is performed using a plurality of lottery tables in which the lottery probabilities for specific profits having a relatively high advantage differ depending on the set value, the lottery is set by the setting change control means. It is possible to make the degree of profit given to the player different according to the set value, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
The profit-giving means
As the specific profit, at least a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a high-probability gaming state in which the profit is given to the gaming state after the special gaming state ends with a relatively high probability are given. And
The lottery table storage means
It is characterized in that it stores a plurality of tables in which the probability of being controlled in the high probability gaming state differs depending on the set value.

According to the game machine of the above (2), since the probability of being controlled to the high probability game state differs depending on the set value, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
The profit-giving means
As the specific profit, a specific gaming state (for example, a time-saving gaming state) in which the lottery is promoted is further given.
The lottery table storage means
It is characterized in that it stores a plurality of tables in which the probability of being controlled to the specific gaming state differs depending on the set value.

According to the game machine of (2) above, since the probability of being controlled to the specific game state differs depending on the set value, it is possible to improve the game interest.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of held storage stored in the held storage means, the lottery result for the held storage and the variable display, the set value). Possible game information storage means (eg, RWM (main RAM 103)) and
Appropriate determination means (main CPU 101 that performs processing in steps S72 and S82) for determining suitability / unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means at a predetermined timing, and
When the appropriateness determination means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate while the symbol variation display is being performed, a lottery for the symbol variation display is performed. Even if the result is the result of granting the specific profit, the game control means for controlling the game from proceeding (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722) and
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine of (4) above, when the variable display of the symbol is performed, the suitability or unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined. In this case, even if the result of the lottery related to the variable display of the symbol is the result of giving a specific profit, the game cannot proceed. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the first problem, the game machine of Appendix 1-4 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machines in Appendix 1-4 are
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data related to the progress of the game can be obtained. A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in 6 stages of setting 1 to setting 6).
A plurality of starting ports including a first starting port and a second starting port provided in the game area, and
The main capable of executing the processing of the special lottery means (for example, step S73, step S83, step S118) in which the special lottery is performed in different lottery modes based on the entry (for example, acceptance) of the game ball into each of the plurality of start ports. CPU101) and
A special game execution means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the big hit game control of FIG. 20) capable of executing a special game that operates based on the result of the special lottery being a special result (for example, a big hit).
Based on the result of the special lottery being a specific result (for example, a small hit), a specific game execution means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of executing a specific game having a lower degree of advantage than the special game, and
With
The special lottery means
When the special lottery is performed based on the entry (for example, acceptance) of the game ball into the start port, the probability that the specific result will be obtained depends on the set value set by the setting change control means. Can be done differently
The specific game execution means is
Regardless of the set value set by the setting change control means, the frequency is higher when the game ball enters the second starting port than when the game ball enters the first starting port. It is characterized in that it is configured so that the specific game can be executed.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the probability of a specific result may differ depending on the set value set by the setting change control means, and regardless of the set value set by the setting change control means, the first The specific game is executed more frequently when the game ball enters the second starting port than when the game ball enters the first starting port. That is, if a game ball is won in the second starting port, it is possible to make the execution frequency of the specific game different according to the set value on the premise that the specific game is executed at a high frequency. It is possible to improve the interest.

It should be noted that "the specific game can be executed more frequently when the game ball enters the second starting port than when the game ball enters the first starting port" is the first. When the game ball enters the starting port of, a winning judgment (including a probability of 0) is made for a specific result, but the probability that a specific result will be obtained in the winning judgment is that the game ball has entered the second starting port. It includes not only a mode lower than the case, but also a mode in which a winning judgment situation for a specific result is not performed when the game ball enters the first starting port.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
A normal starting port (for example, a passing gate 49) provided in the game area,
A normal lottery means for performing a normal lottery based on the entry (for example, passing) of a game ball into the normal start port (for example, the main CPU 101 for performing a normal hit determination in the normal game of FIG. 20).
Based on the result of the ordinary lottery being a predetermined result (for example, a normal hit), the start variable control means (for example, for example) capable of facilitating the entry (for example, acceptance) of the game ball into the start opening. , Main CPU101) and
Based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port (first start port 420), the variation display of the first special symbol is performed, and the game ball enters the second start port (first start port 440). A special symbol variation display control means (for example, main CPU 101) that displays variation of the second special symbol based on the approach, and
A normal game in which both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are set to OFF so that the time for displaying the variation of the second special symbol (for example, an average time of 1000 sec) is long enough to affect the progress of the game. The second gaming state (for example, the average time of 1 sec) is shorter than the time of the variation display of the first special symbol (for example, an average time of 10 sec). A game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) that can be controlled to an advantageous game state in which the probability change flag is set to ON and the time saving flag is set to OFF).
It is characterized by further providing.

According to the game machine (2) above, in the second game state, the variation display of the second special symbol is shorter than the variation display time of the first special symbol, so that the specific game is executed with high frequency. , It is possible to make the execution frequency of the specific game different according to the set value without increasing the execution frequency of the normal lottery.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of held storage stored in the held storage means, the lottery result for the held storage and the variable display, the set value). Possible game information storage means (eg, RWM (main RAM 103)) and
Display means for displaying the result of the special lottery (for example, first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) and
Appropriate determination means (main CPU 101 that performs processing in steps S72 and S82) for determining suitability / unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means at a predetermined timing, and
The game information stored in the game information storage means by the appropriate determination means is unsuitable before the result of the special lottery is displayed even though the game ball has entered the start port (for example, the second start port). If it is determined that, even if the result of the special lottery (for example, the second special lottery) is the specific result, the game cannot proceed without executing the specific game by the specific game executing means. The game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722) and
It is characterized by having.

According to the game machine of (3) above, even if the game ball enters the start port (for example, the second start port), a special lottery (for example, for example) is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the start port. Before the result of the second special lottery) is shown (for example, during the variable display of the special symbol), the suitability or unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined. In this case, the result of the special lottery (for example, the second special lottery) performed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port (for example, the second starting port) is a specific result (for example, a small hit). Even if it is determined that it is inappropriate in the determination of suitability / unsuitability of the game information, the game cannot be advanced before the specific game (for example, a small hit game) is executed. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the first problem, the game machine of Appendix 1-5 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machines in Appendix 1-5 are
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data related to the progress of the game can be obtained. A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in 6 stages of setting 1 to setting 6).
A start port provided in the game area and
A special lottery means for performing a special lottery based on the entry (for example, acceptance) of a game ball into the starting port, and
A first special game execution means capable of executing a first special game that operates based on the result of the special lottery being a special result (for example, a big hit), and
A normal starting port (for example, a passing gate 49) provided in the game area,
A normal lottery means for performing a normal lottery based on the entry (for example, passing) of a game ball into the normal start port (for example, the main CPU 101 for performing a normal hit determination in the normal game of FIG. 20).
Based on the result of the ordinary lottery being a predetermined result (for example, a normal hit), the start variable control means (for example, for example) capable of facilitating the entry (for example, acceptance) of the game ball into the start opening. , Main CPU101) and
Within the specific area where the specific opening is provided based on the result of the special lottery performed based on the entry (for example, acceptance) of the game ball into the starting port is a specific result (for example, a small hit). A specific area variable control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of operating a predetermined movable piece so that the game ball can easily enter (for example, accept) the game ball.
A second special game execution means capable of executing a second special game that operates based on the acceptance of the game ball in the specific mouth provided in the specific area, and
With
The specific area variable control means
It is configured so that the predetermined movable piece can be operated so that the ease of entering the game ball into the specific area may differ depending on the set value set by the setting change control means. It is a feature.

According to the game machine of (1) above, since the probability of a specific result can be different depending on the set value set by the setting change control means, it is determined according to the set set value. The operating frequency of the movable piece is different, and as a result, the opportunity for which the privilege is given can be made different according to the set value, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
The operation of the predetermined movable piece by the specific area variable control means
The ease of entering (for example, accepting) the game ball into the starting port is made different according to the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the probability of normal hit is made different) of the normal symbol. (Shortening the fluctuation time, etc.) By making the execution frequency of the special lottery different according to the set set value, the ease of entry of the game ball into the specific area is set. It is characterized in that it is performed so that it can be different depending on the situation.

According to the game machine of (2) above, the ease of entry of the game ball into the starting port (for example, the second starting port 440) is usually different depending on the set value set by the setting change control means. Since the lottery is performed, the amount of benefits given based on the entry of the game ball into the specific area will differ according to the set set value, and it will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
The operation of the predetermined movable piece by the specific area variable control means
Ease of entry of the game ball into the specific area by making the probability of obtaining the specific result (for example, a small hit) in the special lottery different according to the set value set by the setting change control means. Is characterized in that is performed so as to be different depending on the set value set.

According to the game machine of (3) above, the ease of entry of the game ball into the starting port (for example, the second starting port 440) is usually different depending on the set value set by the setting change control means. Since the lottery is performed, the amount of the privilege given based on the entry of the game ball into the specific area differs according to the set value set, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of held storage stored in the held storage means, the lottery result for the held storage and the variable display, the set value). Possible game information storage means (eg, RWM (main RAM 103)) and
Display means for displaying the result of the special lottery (for example, first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) and
Appropriate determination means (main CPU 101 that performs processing in steps S72 and S82) for determining suitability / unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means at a predetermined timing, and
If it is determined by the appropriate determination means that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate before the result of the special lottery is displayed even though the game ball has entered the start port. Even if the result of the special lottery is a specific result, the game control means (for example, the process of step S722) for controlling the game so that the game cannot proceed without operating the predetermined movable piece by the specific area variable control means. The main CPU 101) to be executed and
It is characterized by having.

According to the game machine of (4) above, even if the game ball enters the starting port, before the result of the special lottery performed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port is shown (for example, a special symbol). During the variable display), the suitability or unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined. In this case, even if the result of the special lottery conducted based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port is a specific result, it is determined that the game information is inappropriate or unsuitable. Is configured so that the game cannot proceed before a predetermined movable piece is activated. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the first problem, the game machine of Appendix 1-6 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machines in Appendix 1-6 are
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data related to the progress of the game can be obtained. A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in 6 stages of setting 1 to setting 6).
A lottery means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of steps S73, S83, and S118) capable of executing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and
A special game state control means (for example, the big hit game control of FIG. 20) that can be controlled to a special game state (for example, a big hit game state) based on the result of the lottery being a special result (for example, a big hit) is executed. Main CPU101) and
A game state control means (for example, in step S169) capable of controlling the game state after the special game state is ended to an advantageous game state (for example, a high probability game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. The main CPU101), which advances the game after setting the flag,
A counting means (for example, main) that counts the number of times (for example, the number of loops) that the special game state and the advantageous game state are repeated without being controlled by the normal game state after being controlled to the special game state. CPU101) and
With
The game state control means
Even when the result of the lottery in the advantageous gaming state is the special result, it is configured to be controllable to the special gaming state.
When the number of times counted by the counting means reaches a predetermined number of times, the game state after the end of the special game state is controlled to the normal game state.
The specified number of times
It is characterized in that it is configured so as to be different depending on the set value set by the setting change control means.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state can be repeated up to a specified number of times, and this specified number of times differs depending on the set value set by the setting change control means. It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
Further provided with a specified number of times determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs a limiter number of times lottery) for determining the specified number of times by lottery.
The specified number of times determination means
It is characterized in that the lottery for determining the specified number of times is performed so that the expected value for the specified number of times differs according to the set value set by the setting change control means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the specified number of times that the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state can be repeated is determined by lottery, and the expected value for this specified number of times is set by the setting change control means. Since it differs depending on the game, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of held storage stored in the held storage means, the lottery result for the held storage and the variable display, the set value). Possible game information storage means (eg, RWM (main RAM 103)) and
Appropriate determination means (main CPU 101 that performs processing in steps S72 and S82) for determining suitability / unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means at a predetermined timing, and
When the appropriateness determination means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, the counting means counts even if the number of times counted by the counting means is less than the specified number of times. A game control means for controlling the number of times counted by the player so that the game cannot proceed without reaching the specified number of times (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722).
It is characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the number of times the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state are repeated (that is, the number of loops) without being controlled by the normal gaming state has not reached the specified number of times (that is, during the loop). ), The suitability or unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined. In this case, even if the game is in a loop, if it is determined that the game information is inappropriate or inappropriate, the game cannot proceed without the number of loops reaching the specified number. There is. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the first problem, the game machine of Appendix 1-7 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machines in Appendix 1-7 are
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data related to the progress of the game can be obtained. A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in 6 stages of setting 1 to setting 6).
With a lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, acceptance of a game ball into the first starting port 440) (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of steps S73, S83, and S118). ,
A game control means capable of controlling the progress of a game (for example, the big hit game control of FIG. 20), including controlling the special game state based on the result of the lottery being a special result (for example, a big hit). Main CPU 101) to execute and
An effect control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 (display control circuit 2300)) capable of at least executing an opening effect performed at the start of the special game state and an ending effect performed at the end of the special game state.
With
The lottery means
The higher the set value set by the setting change control means, the higher the advantage of the lottery.
The effect control means
The opening effect and the ending effect are executed so that at least one of the time required for the opening effect and the time required for the ending effect can be lengthened as the set value set by the setting change control means becomes higher. It is characterized in that it is configured to do so.

According to the game machine of (1) above, the lottery is performed in a manner in which the higher the set value is, the higher the advantage is, while at least one of the time required for the opening effect and the time required for the ending effect. Can be longer as the set value is set. Therefore, at a high setting, it is possible to suppress the prize balls paid out in a unit time while improving the game entertainment.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
A symbol variation display control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S93) that displays variation of symbols based on the result of the lottery, and
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of held storage stored in the held storage means, the lottery result for the held storage and the variable display, the set value). Possible game information storage means (eg, RWM (main RAM 103)) and
Appropriate determination means (main CPU 101 that performs processing in steps S72 and S82) for determining suitability / unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means at a predetermined timing, and
With more
The lottery means
Regardless of whether or not it is controlled to the special gaming state, a random number can be extracted based on the winning of the gaming ball to the starting port, and a random number can be extracted.
The appropriateness determination means
Even when the game is controlled to the special game state, it is configured so that the suitability / unsuitability of the game information can be determined.
The game control means
When the appropriateness determination means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, the game progress is not permitted to control the game so that it cannot proceed even if it is controlled to the special game state. It is characterized by having means (for example, a main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722).

According to the game machine of (2) above, even when the game is controlled to the special game state, the suitability / unsuitability of the game information may be determined. In such a case, if it is determined that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, the game cannot proceed even if it is controlled to the special game state, so that security is ensured. At the same time, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

In order to solve the first problem, the game machine of Appendix 1-8 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machines in Appendix 1-8 are
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data related to the progress of the game can be obtained. A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in 6 stages of setting 1 to setting 6).
A plurality of entrances having at least a first entrance (for example, the accessory continuous operation left gate 1100) and a second entrance (for example, the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110).
An approach permitting means (for example, a distribution device 1120) configured to allow a game ball to enter any of the plurality of entrances and exits.
Different benefits (for example, if the number of rounds is different and there is a starting port below the entrance, a lottery will be held) when the game ball enters the first entrance and when the game ball enters the second entrance. A profit-giving means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the jackpot game control of FIG. 20) capable of giving the player a profit-giving means (for example, whether or not it is executed) and
With
The entry allowance means
A feature of the first entrance and the second entrance is that the ease of entry of the game ball can be different depending on the set value set by the setting change control means. To do.

According to the game machine of (1) above, there is a possibility that the profit given to the player differs depending on whether the game ball enters the first entrance or the second entrance. Therefore, the ease of entry of the game ball between the first entrance and the second entrance is configured to be different depending on the set value set by the setting change control means. Moreover, since the player can aim at which of the first entrance and the second entrance the game ball enters, the state of the game element according to the setting while improving the game interest. Can be preferably changed.

It should be noted that "a different benefit can be given to the player when the game ball enters the first entrance and when the game ball enters the second entrance" means, for example, a game at the first entrance. In addition to the case where the number of rounds in the jackpot game state is different when the ball enters and when the game ball enters the second entrance, one entrance is the starting port that triggers the lottery, and the other entrance is the lottery. This corresponds to the case where it is a general winning opening that does not trigger.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
Starting ports (for example, first starting port 420, second starting port 440) provided in the game area, and
A lottery means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of step S73, step S83, and step S118) that draws a lot based on the acceptance of the game ball at the starting port.
Display means (for example, first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) in which variable display of symbols is performed based on the result of the lottery.
Game information related to the progress of the game including the information of the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved storage means, the lottery result for the reserved storage and the variable display, the set value). A game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)) capable of storing
Appropriate determination means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) for determining suitability / unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means at a predetermined timing.
When the appropriateness determination means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, the player is notified even if the game ball enters the first entrance or the second entrance. A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722) that controls the game so that the game cannot proceed without giving a profit.
It is characterized by having.

According to the game machine of (2) above, when a game ball has entered the first entrance or the second entrance but no profit has been given while the symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, it is stored in the game information storage means. Appropriate / unsuitable for the game information being played may be determined. In this case, even though there is a possibility that a profit may be given to the player, when it is determined that the game information is inappropriate or unsuitable, the game proceeds without giving a profit to the player. It is configured so that it cannot be done. This makes it possible to ensure security.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (2) above
Based on the result of the lottery being a special result, the approach enabling means (for example, the main for operating the condition device) for enabling the entry of the game ball at least for the first entrance and the second entrance. With CPU101)
The profit-giving means
When the game ball enters the first entrance, a predetermined profit (for example, 8R jackpot game state) can be given to the player, and the player can be given a predetermined profit.
When a game ball enters the second entrance, a specific profit (for example, a 16R jackpot game state) having a profit degree higher than the predetermined profit can be given to the player.

According to the game machine (3) above, the player will play the game aiming at the second entrance where a specific profit with a larger profit may be given, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment. It becomes.

According to each of the gaming machines of Appendix 1-1 to Appendix 1-8 having the above configuration, it is possible to suitably change the state of the gaming element according to the setting while improving the interest.

[11-2. Appendix 2 game machine]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, the big hit game is started, and the big winning opening opens and closes in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. If the above jackpot is a probability variation jackpot, the jackpot game is controlled to a high probability gaming state after the jackpot game is completed.

As a game machine of this type, a game setting value in which the state of a game element (structural element or control element) that influences the ball entry rate to the ball entry port and the ball ejection tendency is input in advance by a predetermined setting input means. A pachinko gaming machine that is set to a state corresponding to the above is disclosed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977).

According to the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, since the ball ejection tendency for each game table can be arbitrarily set, it becomes impossible to adjust or maintain the game board configuration such as game nails and accessories. Even so, it is possible to prevent uniform ball ejection tendency for each game store or game table.

(Second issue)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, although it is possible to arbitrarily set the ball ejection tendency for each game console, for example, an abnormality may occur in the game setting value or the like, and security is perfect. Is hard to say.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of changing the state of a game element according to a setting while improving security.

In order to solve the second problem, the game machine of Appendix 2 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 2 is
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data related to the progress of the game can be obtained. A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in 6 stages of setting 1 to setting 6).
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved storage means, the lottery result for the reserved storage and the variable display, the set value). Game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)) and
A lottery means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of steps S73, S83, and S118) that draws a lot based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, acceptance of a game ball into the first starting port 440).
A symbol variation display control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S93) that displays variation of symbols based on the result of the lottery, and
With appropriate determination means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) for determining the suitability / unsuitability of the game information at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing of receiving the game ball into the first starting port 440). ,
If it is determined by the appropriateness determining means that the game information stored in the game information is inappropriate while the variation display of the symbol is being performed, it is assumed that the variation display of the symbol is being performed. The game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722) that controls the game so that it cannot proceed, and
It is characterized by having.

According to the game machine of the above (1), the suitability / unsuitability of the game information may be determined when the variable display of the symbol is performed. In such a case, if it is determined that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, the progress of the game is disallowed even if the symbol is displayed in a variable manner. It will be possible to improve.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 2 of the above configuration, it is possible to change the state of the gaming element according to the setting while improving the security.

[11-3. Game machine of Appendix 3]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, the big hit game is started, and the big winning opening opens and closes in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. If the above jackpot is a probability variation jackpot, the jackpot game is controlled to a high probability gaming state after the jackpot game is completed.

As a game machine of this type, a game setting value in which the state of a game element (structural element or control element) that influences the ball entry rate to the ball entry port and the ball ejection tendency is input in advance by a predetermined setting input means. A pachinko gaming machine that is set to a state corresponding to the above is disclosed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977).

According to the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, since the ball ejection tendency for each game table can be arbitrarily set, it becomes impossible to adjust or maintain the game board configuration such as game nails and accessories. Even so, it is possible to prevent uniform ball ejection tendency for each game store or game table.

(Third issue)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, although the ball ejection tendency for each game console can be arbitrarily set, changing the ball ejection tendency according to the set value does not necessarily have a light design load. It's hard to say.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of suitably changing the state of a game element according to a setting while reducing a design load. It is in.

In order to solve the third problem, the game machine of Appendix 3 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 3 is
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data related to the progress of the game can be obtained. A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in 6 stages of setting 1 to setting 6).
A random number generating means for generating a random number with a predetermined width (for example, a main CPU 101 that generates a random number value by executing a program) and
Random number extraction means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S73) that extracts random numbers based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and
A table storage means (for example, main RAM 103) that stores a lottery table (for example, a big hit random number determination table) that defines a total random number (for example, a range of random numbers for big hit determination) and a specific random number (for example, big hit determination value data). ,
A lottery (for example, the process of step S118) is performed using the random numbers extracted by the random number extraction means, and when the extracted random numbers are specific random numbers (for example, jackpot determination value data), the special gaming state is controlled. Possible special game state control means and
With
The table storage means
A lottery table in which at least the total number of random numbers is different according to the set value set by the setting change control means is stored.
The random number generation means
It is characterized in that it is configured to generate a total random number of a number specified in the lottery table according to a set value set by the setting change control means.

According to the game machine of (1) above, the probability of being controlled to a special gaming state (that is, by changing the denominator (range of random numbers for big hit judgment) having more digits than the numerator (number of big hit judgment value data)) Since the jackpot probability) will be changed, it is possible to set the jackpot probability for each set value more finely than the method of changing the number of jackpot judgment value data according to the set value with the range of the random number for jackpot judgment as a fixed value. It will be possible.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
A symbol variation display control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S93) that displays variation of symbols based on the result of the lottery, and
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of held storage stored in the held storage means, the lottery result for the held storage and the variable display, the set value). Possible game information storage means (eg, RWM (main RAM 103)) and
When a random number is extracted based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, an appropriate determination means (step) for determining suitability / unsuitability of the total random number generated by the random number generation means by the time the variable display of the symbol is started. Main CPU101) that performs the processing of S72 and step S82, and
When the total random number generated by the random number generation means is determined to be unsuitable by the appropriateness determination means, the game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722) that controls the game so as not to proceed, and
It is characterized by having.

According to the game machine of (2) above, when it is determined that the total random number generated by the random number generation means is inappropriate, the game cannot proceed. Therefore, the set value is set while ensuring security. It is possible to finely set the jackpot probability for each.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 3 having the above configuration, it is possible to suitably change the state of the gaming element according to the setting while reducing the design load.

[11-4. Each game machine of Appendix 4-1 and Appendix 4-2]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, the big hit game is started, and the big winning opening opens and closes in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. If the above jackpot is a probability variation jackpot, the jackpot game is controlled to a high probability gaming state after the jackpot game is completed.

As a game machine of this type, a game setting value in which the state of a game element (structural element or control element) that influences the ball entry rate to the ball entry port and the ball ejection tendency is input in advance by a predetermined setting input means. A pachinko gaming machine that is set to a state corresponding to the above is disclosed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977).

According to the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, since the ball ejection tendency for each game table can be arbitrarily set, it becomes impossible to adjust or maintain the game board configuration such as game nails and accessories. Even so, it is possible to prevent uniform ball ejection tendency for each game store or game table.

(Fourth issue)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, while the ball ejection tendency for each game console can be arbitrarily set, the player becomes suspicious because the ball ejection tendency can be arbitrarily set. , There is a risk that the interest will decline.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of suitably suppressing a decrease in interest while changing the state of a game element according to a setting. There is.

In order to solve the fourth problem, the game machine of Appendix 4-1 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 4-1 is
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data related to the progress of the game can be obtained. A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in 6 stages of setting 1 to setting 6).
A plurality of winning openings (for example, first starting opening 420, second starting opening 440, general winning openings 53 to 56) provided in the game area, including a starting opening,
A privilege granting means (for example, a payout device 350) that grants a privilege (for example, a prize ball) based on the acceptance of a game ball in any of the plurality of winning openings.
A lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on the acceptance of the game ball at the start port (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of steps S73, S83, and S118).
A display means (for example, a display device 16) at which at least a pattern variation effect performed based on the result of the lottery is performed, and
When the variable effect of the symbol is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach effect) indicating that the result of the lottery may be a specific result, a specific winning opening among the plurality of winning openings A setting suggesting means (for example, a host control circuit 2100) capable of suggesting setting value information about a set value set by the setting change control means based on the acceptance of the game ball.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine of (1) above, setting change control is based on the fact that a game ball is accepted in a specific winning opening when a symbol variation effect is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach effect). Since the set value information about the set value set by the means may be suggested, it is possible to reduce the player from becoming suspicious. Further, if the pattern variation effect is performed in a specific mode, the player may stop firing the game ball, but such a situation can be suppressed.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
Further provided with a specified number of times determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs a limiter number of times lottery) for determining the specified number of times by lottery.
Specific mode determining means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S78) for determining whether or not to perform the variation effect of the symbol in the specific mode (for example, reach effect), and
When it is determined by the specific mode determining means that the variation effect of the symbol is to be performed in the specific mode, the specific winning opening determining means for randomly determining any one of the plurality of winning openings in the specific winning opening. (For example, main CPU 101) and
It is characterized by further providing.

According to the game machine of (2) above, since the specific winning opening is randomly determined to be one of a plurality of winning openings instead of the fixed winning opening, it is possible to enhance the game interest. It is preferable that the randomly determined specific winning openings are kept secret without being disclosed. As a result, the player is interested in which winning opening should be aimed at.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of held storage stored in the held storage means, the lottery result for the held storage and the variable display, the set value). Possible game information storage means (eg, RWM (main RAM 103)) and
Appropriate determination means (main CPU 101 that performs processing in steps S72 and S82) for determining suitability / unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means at a predetermined timing, and
When the appropriateness determination means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, even if the game ball is accepted by the specific winning opening, it is set by the setting change control means. A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722) that controls the game so that the game cannot proceed without suggesting the set value information about the set value.
It is characterized by having.

According to the game machine of (3) above, the game information is stored when the pattern variation effect is performed or when the game ball is accepted in a specific winning opening but the set value information is not yet suggested. The suitability or unsuitability of the game information stored in the means may be determined. In this case, even if there is a possibility that the set value information may be suggested, if it is determined that the game information is inappropriate or unsuitable, the set value set by the setting change control means is used. It is configured so that the game cannot proceed without suggesting the setting value information of. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the fourth problem, the game machine of Appendix 4-2 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 4-2 is
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data related to the progress of the game can be obtained. A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in 6 stages of setting 1 to setting 6).
Starting ports (for example, first starting port 420, second starting port 440) provided in the game area, and
A lottery means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of step S73, step S83, and step S118) that draws a lot based on the acceptance of the game ball at the starting port.
Display means (for example, first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) in which variable display of symbols is performed based on the result of the lottery.
A game control means capable of controlling the progress of a game (for example, the big hit game control of FIG. 20), including controlling the special game state based on the result of the lottery being a special result (for example, a big hit). Main CPU 101) to execute and
Setting for the set value set by the setting change control means based on satisfying a predetermined condition related to the acceptance of the game ball to the starting port (for example, the overflow point reaches the predetermined point). Setting suggestion means (for example, host control circuit 2100) capable of suggesting value information, and
It is characterized by having.

According to the game machine of (1) above, the current set value (set value set by the setting change control means) is based on satisfying the predetermined conditions related to the acceptance of the game ball to the starting port. Since the set value information can be suggested, it is possible to reduce the player from becoming a suspicious demon. In addition, the execution of the game is urged so that the game ball is accepted at the starting port. It should be noted that "satisfying the predetermined conditions for accepting the game ball to the starting port" is held because, for example, the holding limit was reached even though the game ball was accepted at the starting port. It is assumed that there is no such thing, or that points are accumulated and the points reach the specified points when the game ball is not held because it was held at the upper limit even though the game ball was accepted at the starting port. However, it is not limited to these.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of held storage stored in the held storage means, the lottery result for the held storage and the variable display, the set value). Possible game information storage means (eg, RWM (main RAM 103)) and
Appropriate determination means (main CPU 101 that performs processing in steps S72 and S82) for determining suitability / unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means at a predetermined timing, and
With more
The game control means
If the appropriateness determination means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, the game ball may satisfy the predetermined condition when the game ball is accepted at the start port ( For example, even if the overflow point reaches a predetermined point, the game progress disallowance means (for example, the game progress disapproval means) for controlling the game so as not to proceed without suggesting the set value information about the set value set by the setting change control means. , The main CPU 101) that executes the process of step S722.

According to the game machine of (2) above, when the variable display of the symbol is performed, the suitability or unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined. In this case, even if there is a possibility that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the game ball is accepted at the start port, in the determination of suitability / unsuitability of the game information performed by the game ball being accepted at the start port. If it is determined to be unsuitable, the game cannot proceed without suggesting the set value information about the set value set by the setting change control means. This makes it possible to ensure security.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 4-1 and the gaming machine of Appendix 4-2 having the above configuration, it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in interest while changing the state of the gaming element according to the setting.

[11-5. Appendix 5 game machine]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, the big hit game is started, and the big winning opening opens and closes in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. If the above jackpot is a probability variation jackpot, the jackpot game is controlled to a high probability gaming state after the jackpot game is completed.

As a game machine of this type, a game setting value in which the state of a game element (structural element or control element) that influences the ball entry rate to the ball entry port and the ball ejection tendency is input in advance by a predetermined setting input means. A pachinko gaming machine that is set to a state corresponding to the above is disclosed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977).

According to the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, since the ball ejection tendency for each game table can be arbitrarily set, it becomes impossible to adjust or maintain the game board configuration such as game nails and accessories. Even so, it is possible to prevent uniform ball ejection tendency for each game store or game table.

(Fifth issue)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, although the ball ejection tendency for each game console can be arbitrarily set, there is a possibility that the ball ejection management becomes difficult.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of easily performing ball ejection management.

In order to solve the fifth problem, the game machine of Appendix 5 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 5 is
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data related to the progress of the game can be obtained. A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in 6 stages of setting 1 to setting 6).
A game control means (for example, main CPU 101) that controls the progress of the game based on the set value set by the setting change control means.
A payout means (for example, a payout device 350) that pays out the game medium based on a prize as a result of the game,
A special game execution means (for example, a special game execution means) capable of executing a special game in which the frequency of winning is increased based on the result of a lottery performed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition being a specific result (for example, a big hit). The main CPU 101) that executes the jackpot game control of FIG. 20 and
A data aggregation means (for example, a payout / launch control circuit 300) capable of aggregating data related to the game medium paid out by the payout means, and
A data display control means (main CPU 101) that displays the data aggregated by the data aggregation means in a predetermined display area (performance display monitor 334), and
With
The data aggregation means is
All history aggregation means that aggregates the above data based on all game history,
It has a history totaling means for each set value that aggregates the data based on the game history for each set value.
The data display control means
A gaming machine characterized in that the data aggregated by the all history aggregation means and / and the data aggregated by the set value-based history aggregation means can be displayed.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine of (1) above, it is possible to display either one or both of the data aggregated by the total history aggregation means and the data aggregated by the set value-based history aggregation means. Ball management can be easily performed.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 5 having the above configuration, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of easily performing ball ejection management.

[11-6. Appendix 6 game machine]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, the big hit game is started, and the big winning opening opens and closes in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. If the above jackpot is a probability variation jackpot, the jackpot game is controlled to a high probability gaming state after the jackpot game is completed.

As this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine whose specifications can be changed is disclosed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-010833).

According to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-010833, the specifications of the gaming machine can be easily changed, so that the storage means for storing the effect data necessary for executing the effect can be exchanged. Is no longer necessary, and waste can be eliminated.

(Sixth issue)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-010833, although it is possible to eliminate waste, there is a risk that it will be uninteresting just by changing the specifications.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest.

In order to solve the sixth problem, the game machine of Appendix 6 having the following configuration is provided.
(1) The game machine of Appendix 6 is
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), the game can be played according to the set value. A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 6-step setting values of settings 1 to 6) having different values.
A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that controls the progress of the game based on the set value set by the setting change control means.
With
The game control means
A lottery means capable of executing a lottery (for example, processing of step S73, step S83, and step S118) based on the game characteristics according to the set value set by the setting change control means.
Based on the result of the lottery, a special game executing means capable of executing a special game (for example, the jackpot game control of FIG. 20) in which a privilege according to a set value set by the setting change control means is given, and a special game executing means.
It is characterized by having at least.

According to the game machine of (1) above, it is possible to execute a game with different game characteristics based on the set value set by the setting change control means with one game machine, and the game machine management manager or the like can execute the game. It is possible to have a wide range of ways to utilize the game machine.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
The game control means
When the first set value is set among the plurality of set values, in the high probability state in which the lottery is performed with a relatively high probability, if the lottery is not won within a predetermined period, the high probability state is obtained. The first game control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that executes the game under the game nature (for example, ST specification) that ends the game.
When the second set value is set among the plurality of set values, in the high probability state in which the lottery is performed with a relatively high probability, the high probability state does not end until the lottery is won. A second game control player (for example, main CPU 101) stage that executes a game under continuous game characteristics (for example, probability variation loop specification), and
It is characterized by having at least.

According to the game machine of (2) above, although both the game property by the first game control means and the game property by the second game control means are controlled in a high probability gaming state, the first game control means The high-probability game state may end halfway without continuing until the next big hit game state, and the high-probability game state is controlled to the next special game state in the game property by the second game control means. It differs greatly in that it is continuously executed until. In this way, by making it possible to switch between two games that look similar but are substantially different, the manager of the game machine can use the pachinko game machine in a wider range of ways. It is possible to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 6 having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest.

[11-7. Each game machine of Appendix 7-1 to Appendix 7-12]
Conventionally, there has been known a game machine in which a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied and a variable display of a symbol is performed based on the result of the lottery. Then, when the result of the lottery is displayed with a specific display result indicating that the result is a specific result, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, one of a plurality of setting values indicating the probability of being involved in the advantage or disadvantage of the player in the game, such as the probability that the result of the lottery will be a specific result, is set. A gaming machine whose progress is controlled based on a set value is known (see, for example, paragraph [0063] of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-206588). The above set value can be set by an authorized person such as a game machine manager in the hall.

(7th issue)
However, in a gaming machine in which the progress of the game is controlled based on the set value, for example, an unauthorized person illegally changes the set value or confirms the set value, or the set value is caused by noise or the like. There is a concern that various problems will occur, such as changes in.

Further, since the above set value is an important factor for both the hall and the player, it should be strictly managed by an authorized person, and convenience is also required for the management.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a highly convenient gaming machine capable of dealing with a problem related to a set value.

In order to solve the seventh problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 7-1 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 7-1 is
A first control means (for example, the main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and
A predetermined display means (for example, a display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for the operation related to the one set value, and
When the power is turned on, the power supply means (for example, the power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
With
The first control means
Setting state control means for controlling at least the setting state in which the setting value can be changed or confirmed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON). (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24 or step S26) and
A first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the set value information about the one set value, and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed can be transmitted (for example). , And a main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of the command output port 106 and step S55.
The second control means
A receiving means (for example, a relay board 2010) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting means, and
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, subwork RAM 2100a) that can store as history information.
It is characterized by having a display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) on which the history information is displayed based on a predetermined operation.

According to the game machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse an information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

The setting operation information is the setting value change information indicating that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and the setting value is confirmed when the setting value is confirmed. It is the setting value confirmation information indicating that it has been performed. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information about one setting value after the change. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information about the set one setting value may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the set value information to the second control means.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be the time information in which the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
The display control means
The information screen can be displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and the information screen that limits the display of the information screen even if the predetermined operation is performed during the execution of the game. Having a limiting means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that terminates the hall menu task when it is determined to be NO in step S301, and a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S317 when it is determined to be YES in step S316). It is a feature.

According to the game machine of (2) above, the information screen is a screen displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and it is assumed that a predetermined operation is performed during the execution of the game. Is a screen whose display is restricted. That is, the information screen is not displayed unless the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON). Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily browse the information screen for the purpose of fraud, and security can be ensured.

In order to solve the seventh problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 7-2 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 7-2 is
A first control means (for example, the main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and
A predetermined display means (for example, a display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for the operation related to the one set value, and
When the power is turned on, the power supply means (for example, the power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
With
The first control means
Setting state control means for controlling at least the setting state in which the setting value can be changed or confirmed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON). (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24 or step S26) and
A first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the set value information about the one set value, and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, the setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed, and the one set value It has a transmission means (for example, a command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S55) capable of transmitting the set value information of the above.
The second control means
A receiving means (for example, a relay board 2010) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting means, and
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, subwork RAM 2100a) capable of storing the set value information as history information.
It has a display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of displaying an information screen on which the history information is displayed based on a predetermined operation.
The display control means
A first screen display control means for displaying a first screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen of FIG. 124) in which history information that does not include the set value information among the history information is displayed based on the predetermined operation. (For example, the host control circuit 2100 that displays the setting change / confirmation history screen of FIG. 124) and
A second screen display control means for displaying a second screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen of FIG. 126) in which history information including at least the set value information is displayed on condition that the first screen is displayed. (For example, the host control circuit 2100 that displays the setting change / confirmation history screen of FIG. 126) is provided.

According to the game machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse an information screen in which the setting operation information, the time information related to the setting operation information, and the set value information are shown as history information. Therefore, it is possible to deal with various problems related to the set value. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

Moreover, when a predetermined operation is performed, first, the first screen (for example, the setting change / confirmation history screen of FIG. 124) showing the history information that does not include the setting value information among the history information is displayed, and the first screen is displayed. On condition that the screen is displayed, the second screen (for example, the setting change / confirmation history screen of FIG. 126) in which the history information including the setting value information is displayed is displayed.

The transmission means capable of transmitting various information to the second control means may transmit the setting operation information and the set value information together or separately. The setting operation information is the setting value change information indicating that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and the setting value is confirmed when the setting value is confirmed. This is the set value confirmation information indicating that. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information about one setting value after the change. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information about the set one setting value may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the set value information to the second control means.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be the time information in which the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
The second screen display control means
The second screen is configured to be displayed only when a specific condition is satisfied.

According to the game machine (2) above, only when a specific condition is satisfied, a second screen showing history information including setting value information is displayed, so that the setting value information can be easily browsed. It is not possible to prevent the setting value information from being viewed for the purpose of fraud. The specific condition is, for example, the case where an appropriate password is entered.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above
The display control means
The information screen can be displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and information that limits the display of the information screen even if the predetermined operation is performed during the execution of the game. It is characterized by having a screen limiting means.

According to the game machine of (3) above, the information screen is a screen displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and it is assumed that a predetermined operation is performed during the execution of the game. Is a screen whose display is restricted. That is, the information screen is not displayed unless the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON). Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily browse the information screen for the purpose of fraud, and security can be ensured.

In order to solve the seventh problem, the game machine of Appendix 7-3 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machines in Appendix 7-3 are
A first control means (for example, the main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and
A predetermined display means (for example, a display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for the operation related to the one set value, and
When the power is turned on, the power supply means (for example, the power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
With
The first control means
Setting state control means for controlling at least the setting state in which the setting value can be changed or confirmed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON). (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24 or step S26) and
A first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the set value information about the one set value, and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed can be transmitted (for example). , And a main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of the command output port 106 and step S55.
The second control means
A receiving means (for example, a relay board 2010) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting means, and
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received) A second storage means (for example, subwork RAM 2100a) that can store the information as history information.
A display control means capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) showing the history information based on a predetermined operation.
After the information screen is displayed, the information screen can be displayed until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until a command for generating an effect control object is received), but when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the information is displayed. It is characterized by having an information screen display restricting means for restricting screen display (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes a hall menu display prohibition process in step S318).

According to the game machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse an information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

Moreover, although the displayed information screen can be displayed until the predetermined condition is satisfied, the display is restricted when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, once the predetermined conditions are met, the information screen cannot be viewed, and even if an unauthorized person attempts to view it illegally, it cannot be easily viewed and security can be ensured. It becomes.

The setting operation information is the setting value change information indicating that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and the setting value is confirmed when the setting value is confirmed. It is the setting value confirmation information indicating that it has been performed. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information about one setting value after the change. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information about the set one setting value may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the set value information to the second control means.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be the time information in which the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

In order to solve the seventh problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 7-4 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machines in Appendix 7-4 are
A first control means (for example, the main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and
A predetermined display means (for example, a display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for the operation related to the one set value, and
When the power is turned on, the power supply means (for example, the power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
With
The first control means
Setting state control means for controlling at least the setting state in which the setting value can be changed or confirmed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON). (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24 or step S26) and
A first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the set value information about the one set value, and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed can be transmitted (for example). , And a main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of the command output port 106 and step S55.
The second control means
A receiving means (for example, a relay board 2010) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting means, and
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, subwork RAM 2100a) that can store as history information.
A normal screen (for example, a guide initial image) that can be viewed by an unspecified person (for example, a player) and a specific person (for example, a game machine administrator) can be viewed only. A display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of displaying one of a plurality of screens including an information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) on which history information is displayed on the display means. Have,
The display control means
The normal screen can be displayed as long as the power is turned on, while the information screen is turned on at least when the setting operating means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON). It is characterized in that it is configured to be displayed in.

According to the game machine of (1) above, the predetermined display means includes a normal screen that can be viewed by an unspecified person (for example, a player) and a specific person (for example, a game machine manager). An information screen that can be viewed only is displayed. The normal screen can be displayed as long as the power is turned on, while the information screen is not displayed only when the power is turned on, and at least the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated. It is configured so that it is not displayed without it. Therefore, the information screen cannot be easily viewed by an unspecified person who does not have the authority, and it is possible to prevent unauthorized viewing.

By the way, the above normal screen may not be interpreted as being able to be viewed by an unspecified person when, for example, only the player who has registered as a member can view it, but as long as the member is registered, Since anyone can view it (that is, if they have the intention to view it), it can be said that it is a normal screen that can be viewed by an unspecified person. On the other hand, the information screen cannot be viewed even if there is an intention to view it, and is a screen that can be viewed only by an authorized person such as a game machine administrator.

Further, since the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information on the information screen that can be viewed only by a specific person, it is possible to deal with various problems related to the setting value. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

The setting operation information is the setting value change information indicating that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and the setting value is confirmed when the setting value is confirmed. It is the setting value confirmation information indicating that it has been performed. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information about one setting value after the change. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information about the set one setting value may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the set value information to the second control means.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be the time information in which the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
The display control means
The information screen can be displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and the information screen limiting means for limiting the display of the information screen during the execution of the game (for example, NO in step S301). It is characterized by having a host control circuit 2100 that terminates the hall menu task when it is determined, and a host control circuit 2100) that executes the process of step S317 when it is determined to be YES in step S316.

According to the game machine of (2) above, the information screen is a screen displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and it is assumed that a predetermined operation is performed during the execution of the game. Is a screen whose display is restricted. That is, the information screen is not displayed unless the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON). Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily browse the information screen for the purpose of fraud, and security can be ensured.

In order to solve the seventh problem, the game machine of Appendix 7-5 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 7-5 is
A first control means (for example, the main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and
A predetermined display means (for example, a display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for the operation related to the one set value, and
When the power is turned on, the power supply means (for example, the power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
With
The first control means
Setting state control means for controlling at least the setting state in which the setting value can be changed or confirmed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON). (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24 or step S26) and
A first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the set value information about the one set value, and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed can be transmitted (for example). , And a main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of the command output port 106 and step S55.
The second control means
A receiving means (for example, a relay board 2010) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting means, and
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, subwork RAM 2100a) that can store as history information.
A display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) on which the history information is displayed based on a predetermined operation, and
It has an information erasing means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes processing such as step S3066 and step S3160) that erases the history information from the second storage means when receiving a specific operation.
The information erasing means
It is characterized in that it is configured to accept the specific operation only when a specific condition is satisfied.

According to the game machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse an information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

Moreover, when a specific operation (for example, an operation of pressing the main button 662 after selecting the "clear" item) is accepted, the history information is deleted, and the specific operation is specific. It can be accepted only when the conditions are met (for example, when the entered password is correct). Therefore, for example, even if an unauthorized person tries to delete the history of changing the set value, confirming the set value, or browsing for the purpose of fraud, such deletion cannot be executed unless specific conditions are satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fraud history from being intentionally deleted. In addition, for those who have authority, the history information can be deleted, which can enhance convenience.

The setting operation information is the setting value change information indicating that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and the setting value is confirmed when the setting value is confirmed. It is the setting value confirmation information indicating that it has been performed. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information about one setting value after the change. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information about the set one setting value may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the set value information to the second control means.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be the time information in which the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
The transmission means
It is possible to further transmit the setting value information about the above-mentioned one setting value.
The second storage means
The set value information can also be stored as the history information and can be stored.
The display control means
It is possible to display an information screen (for example, the setting change / confirmation history screen of FIG. 126) in which the setting value information is included in the history information.
The information erasing means
It is characterized in that the history information including the set value information is deleted from the second storage means.

According to the game machine of (2) above, when the information screen is displayed, more useful information such as set value information can be browsed. Moreover, even such useful information can be deleted by an authorized person, so that convenience can be enhanced.

In addition, the transmission means may transmit the setting operation information and the setting value information together or separately.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
The information erasing means
When erasing the history information from the second storage means, it is characterized in that only a part of the history information stored in the second storage means can be erased as the history information.

According to the game machine of (3) above, since the authorized person can select the history information to be deleted from the history information stored in the second storage means, the convenience is enhanced. For example, the history information is displayed in association with one setting operation information, one date and time information, and one setting value information (see, for example, FIG. 126). The information erasing means may delete the associated history information (for example, each No. shown in FIG. 126), or may delete each item of the information of a plurality of items included in the history information (for example, each item). For example, all of the date and time items, the operation type items, and the set value items shown in FIG. 126 may be deleted).

In order to solve the seventh problem, the game machine of Appendix 7-6 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 7-6 is
A first control means (for example, the main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and
A predetermined display means (for example, a display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for the operation related to the one set value, and
When the power is turned on, the power supply means (for example, the power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
With
The first control means
Setting state control means for controlling at least the setting state in which the setting value can be changed or confirmed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON). (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24 or step S26) and
A first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the set value information about the one set value, and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed can be transmitted (for example). , And a main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of the command output port 106 and step S55.
The second control means
A receiving means (for example, a relay board 2010) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting means, and
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, subwork RAM 2100a) that can store as history information.
It has a display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of displaying an information screen on which the history information is displayed based on a predetermined operation.
The setting operation information is
It is information that can distinguish the operation type whether it is the information indicating that the one set value has been changed or the information indicating that the one set value has been confirmed. ,
The display control means
A list information screen (for example, a list screen) in which all of the setting operation information, the time information, and the setting value information are displayed as history information regardless of the type of the setting operation information.
It is possible to selectively display the setting operation information, the time information, and a specific information screen (for example, a narrowing screen) in which the setting value information is displayed as history information, which corresponds to a specific type of the setting operation information. It is characterized by being composed of.

According to the game machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse an information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

Moreover, regardless of the type of setting operation information, the information screen of the list in which all of the setting operation information, the time information, and the setting value information are displayed as history information, and the setting operation information correspond to a specific type. Since the setting operation information, the time information, and a specific information screen in which the set value information is displayed as history information can be selectively displayed, the convenience of the operator (for example, the game machine administrator) is enhanced. Can be done.

The setting operation information is the setting value change information indicating that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and the setting value is confirmed when the setting value is confirmed. It is the setting value confirmation information indicating that it has been performed. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information about one setting value after the change. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information about the set one setting value may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the set value information to the second control means.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be the time information in which the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
The display control means
It is characterized in that the information screen of the list and the specific information screen can be selectively displayed only when a specific condition is satisfied.

According to the game machine (2) above, the information screen of the list and the specific information screen can be selectively displayed only when a specific condition is satisfied, so that the history information is browsed for the purpose of fraud. Can be suppressed. The specific condition is, for example, the case where an appropriate password is entered.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above
The transmission means
It is possible to further transmit the setting value information about the above-mentioned one setting value.
The second storage means
The set value information can also be stored as the history information and can be stored.
The display control means
It is characterized in that an information screen including the set value information in the history information can be displayed.

According to the game machine (3) above, when the information screen is displayed, it is possible to browse more useful information such as set value information. Moreover, even such useful information can be deleted by an authorized person, so that convenience can be enhanced.

In addition, the transmission means may transmit the setting operation information and the setting value information together or separately.

In order to solve the seventh problem, the game machine of Appendix 7-7 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 7-7 is
A first control means (for example, the main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and
A predetermined display means (for example, a display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
A setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value, and
When the power is turned on, the power supply means (for example, the power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
With
The first control means
Setting state control means for controlling at least the setting state in which the setting value can be changed or confirmed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON). (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24 or step S26) and
A first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the set value information about the one set value, and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed can be transmitted (for example). , And a main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of the command output port 106 and step S55.
The second control means
A receiving means (for example, a relay board 2010) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting means, and
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, subwork RAM 2100a) that can store as history information.
A normal screen (for example, a hall menu screen) in which the history information is not displayed can be displayed based on a predetermined operation, and an information screen (for example, a hall menu screen) in which the history information is displayed when a predetermined operation is performed on the normal screen (for example). For example, a display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of displaying a setting change / confirmation history screen) and
The information screen can be displayed until the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until YES is determined in step S314, step S315, or step S316), but when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the display of the information screen is restricted. Information screen display limiting means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S317 when YES is determined in step S314, step S315, or step S316).
The second storage means
When the information screen is displayed by performing the predetermined operation on the normal screen, a browsing history indicating that the information screen has been browsed can be stored as one of the history information.
Even if the information screen is displayed a plurality of times by performing the predetermined operation on the normal screen before the display of the information screen is restricted, it is regarded as one browsing history. It is characterized by being configured to be memorized.

According to the game machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse an information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

Further, although the information screen can be displayed until the predetermined condition is satisfied, the display is restricted when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily browse the information screen for the purpose of fraud, and security can be ensured.

In addition, the information screen is displayed by performing a predetermined operation on the normal screen. At this time, the browsing history is stored in the second storage means. However, even if the information screen is displayed multiple times by performing a predetermined operation on the normal screen before the display of the information screen is restricted, it is recorded as one setting history information. Will be done. This makes it possible for a person who changes settings, confirms settings, browses information screens, etc. for the purpose of fraud to make it difficult to intentionally create a large number of browsing histories. In particular, in the case of browsing history, unlike changing or checking the set value, browsing is performed multiple times without going through the process of turning on the power while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON). The effect is great because it is possible to do so and therefore it is easy to intentionally create a large number of histories.

The setting operation information is the setting value change information indicating that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and the setting value is confirmed when the setting value is confirmed. It is the setting value confirmation information indicating that it has been performed. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information about one setting value after the change. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information about the set one setting value may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the set value information to the second control means.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be the time information in which the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

In order to solve the seventh problem, the game machine of Appendix 7-8 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 7-8 is
A first control means (for example, the main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and
A predetermined display means (for example, a display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for the operation related to the one set value, and
When the power is turned on, the power supply means (for example, the power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
With
The first control means
Setting state control means for controlling at least the setting state in which the setting value can be changed or confirmed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON). (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24 or step S26) and
A first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the set value information about the one set value, and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least setting operation information (for example,) that can distinguish whether the one set value has been changed or the one set value has been confirmed (for example, It has a transmission means (for example, a command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S55) capable of transmitting a setting operation command).
The second control means
A receiving means (for example, a relay board 2010) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting means, and
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, subwork RAM 2100a) that can be stored as history information including setting change history information or setting confirmation history information.
A normal screen (for example, a hall menu screen) in which the history information is not displayed can be displayed based on a predetermined operation, and an information screen (for example, a hall menu screen) in which the history information is displayed when a predetermined operation is performed on the normal screen (for example). For example, it has a display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of displaying a setting change / confirmation history screen).
The second storage means
When the information screen is displayed by performing the predetermined operation on the normal screen, browsing history information indicating that the information screen has been browsed can be stored as one of the history information.
Further, when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated,
When the confirmation of the one set value and the browsing of the information screen are performed, both the setting confirmation history information and the browsing history information are displayed, while the browsing history information is displayed.
When the one setting value is changed and the information screen is browsed, only the browsing history information of the setting change history information and the browsing history information is displayed. It is a feature.

According to the game machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse an information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

By the way, when fraud involving a setting change is performed, it is possible to detect that there is a possibility of fraud based on the setting change history that is not remembered by the game machine manager, but regarding fraud involving a setting confirmation history. It is difficult to detect that there is a possibility of fraud only from the confirmation history of the settings. In addition, it is considered that the person who commits fraud is mainly browsing after confirming the setting rather than browsing after changing the setting. Therefore, when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated and one setting value is confirmed and the information screen is browsed, both the setting confirmation history information and the browsing history information are both. Is displayed, and when one setting value is changed and the information screen is browsed, only the browsing history information of the setting change history information and the browsing history information is displayed. As a result, the amount of history information displayed on the display means can be suppressed as much as possible, and it is possible to prevent the total number of histories from being unnecessarily increased, making it difficult to detect fraud.

In addition, "when the one setting value is changed and the information screen is browsed, only the browsing history information is displayed among the setting change history information and the browsing history information" is ". Of the setting change history information and the browsing history information, only the browsing history information is stored in the second storage means so that only the browsing history information is displayed. ”And“ Both the setting change history information and the browsing history information are displayed. Although it is stored in the second storage means, only the browsing history information among these information may be displayed by the control by the display control means ”, but from the viewpoint of reducing the load on the second storage means. Therefore, the former is preferable.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be the time information in which the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

In order to solve the seventh problem, the game machine of Appendix 7-9 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 7-9 is
A first control means (for example, the main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and
A predetermined display means (for example, a display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for the operation related to the one set value, and
When the power is turned on, the power supply means (for example, the power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
With
The first control means
Setting state control means for controlling at least the setting state in which the setting value can be changed or confirmed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON). (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24 or step S26) and
A first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the set value information about the one set value, and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed can be transmitted (for example). , And a main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of the command output port 106 and step S55.
The second control means
A receiving means (for example, a relay board 2010) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting means, and
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, subwork RAM 2100a) that can store as history information.
A display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) on which the history information is displayed based on a predetermined operation, and
When the amount of history information stored in the second storage means exceeds a predetermined amount, history erasing means (for example, history erasing means) that executes control to erase at least a part of the history information stored in the second storage means , A host control circuit 2100) that executes the process of step S306, and the like.

According to the game machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse an information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

By the way, the above history information is stored in the second storage means (for example, subwork RAM 2100a), but since there is an upper limit to the amount of history information that can be stored in the second storage means, it is stored in the second storage means. If the amount of history information is large, there is a possibility that the history information cannot be recorded when it is desired to be recorded in the second storage means. Therefore, when the history information stored in the second storage means exceeds a predetermined amount, new history information is recorded by erasing at least a part of the history information stored in the second storage means. It prevents situations such as being unable to do so.

In addition, "when the amount of history information stored in the second storage means exceeds a predetermined amount, at least a part of the history information stored in the second storage means is erased" is the second. By overwriting the new history information with respect to the history information already stored in the storage means, the history information may be deleted as a result, or the new history information is stored in the second storage means. When there is a risk of exceeding a predetermined amount, at least a part of the history information stored in the second storage means may be erased and then the history information may be stored. Further, even when new history information is stored in the second storage means, it is stored in the second storage means when there is a risk that the upper limit may be exceeded if more history information is stored in the second storage means. At least a part of the existing history information may be deleted.

In addition, the setting operation information is the setting value change information indicating that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and the setting value has been confirmed when the setting value has been confirmed. It is the setting value confirmation information indicating that it has been performed. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information about one setting value after the change. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information about the set one setting value may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the set value information to the second control means.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be the time information in which the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
The display control means
Information that can display the information screen when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and restricts the display of the information screen even if the predetermined operation is performed during the execution of the game. Having a screen limiting means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that terminates the hall menu task when it is determined to be NO in step S301, and a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S317 when it is determined to be YES in step S316). It is characterized by.

According to the game machine of (2) above, the information screen is a screen displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and it is assumed that a predetermined operation is performed during the execution of the game. Is a screen whose display is restricted. That is, the information screen is not displayed unless the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON). Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily browse the information screen for the purpose of fraud, and security can be ensured.

In order to solve the seventh problem, the game machine of Appendix 7-10 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 7-10 is
A first control means (for example, the main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and
A predetermined display means (for example, a display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for the operation related to the one set value, and
When the power is turned on, the power supply means (for example, the power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
With
The first control means
When the power is turned on at least in the state where the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the setting change state in which the one setting value can be changed or the setting value in the one is confirmed. A setting state control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24 or step S26) that controls the setting confirmation state that can be performed, and
A first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the set value information about the one set value, and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one set value is changed or confirmed can be transmitted (for example, the transmission means). It has a command output port 106 and a main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of step S55.
The second control means
A receiving means (for example, a relay board 2010) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting means, and
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, subwork RAM 2100a) that can store as history information.
An information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) in which the history information is displayed in the setting change state and / and the setting confirmation state can be displayed on the display means, and the setting change state and / and the setting It has a display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of restricting the display of the information screen so that the information screen is not displayed when the confirmation state is completed.
The display control means
At least when the setting change state ends, even if the setting change state ends, the information screen can be displayed without limiting the display of the information screen until a predetermined time elapses (for example, step S312 and step S313). (Can execute the processing of)
Even if the setting change state ends, it is possible to control so that the display of the information screen is not restricted as long as a predetermined operation related to the information screen is performed on the information screen displayed after the setting change state ends ( The process of step S313 to step S316 can be repeated).

According to the game machine of (1) above, at least the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information can be browsed as history information, so that various problems related to the setting value can be viewed. It becomes possible to correspond to. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

Further, since the above information screen is displayed in the setting change state and / or the setting confirmation state, security such that an unauthorized third party cannot easily view the information screen is ensured. Moreover, at least when controlled to the setting change state, the display of the information screen is not restricted as long as the predetermined operation on the information screen is performed until a predetermined time elapses after the setting change state ends. It is also possible to improve the convenience of the operator.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
The transmission means
At least when the one set value is changed, the set value information about the one set value can also be transmitted.
The display control means
In the setting change state and / or the setting confirmation state, the information screen including the setting value information for the one setting value in the history information can be displayed on the display means.

According to the game machine of (2) above, when the history screen is displayed, the setting value information for one setting value is also displayed, so that the authorized person can view more detailed history information. .. In particular, since the set value information about one set value is useful information for business, it can be useful for hall management.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
The display control means
Even if a predetermined operation related to the information screen is performed on the information screen displayed after the setting change state is completed, when specific information related to the progress of the game is received by the receiving means, the information screen is displayed. It is characterized by having a forced termination means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S317 when it is determined to be YES in step S316).

According to the game machine of (3) above, even if a predetermined operation related to the information screen is performed on the information screen, the display of the information screen is forced when specific information related to the progress of the game is received by the receiving means. Because it ends in a targeted manner, the execution of the game is not hindered. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the convenience of operation by an authorized person and to suppress fraud by an unauthorized third party while ensuring a state in which the game can be executed.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.
On the information screen displayed after the setting change state is completed, it is possible to grasp that the game can be executed without interfering with the predetermined operation on the information screen (for example,). , While the LED 25 is fully lit in white during the setting change or setting confirmation, the LED 25 is fully lit in red when the setting change or setting confirmation is completed).

According to the game machine of (4) above, on the information screen displayed after the setting change state is completed, the game can be executed without hindering the execution of the predetermined operation on the information screen. Since it is possible to grasp that the game is to be executed, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the game cannot be executed without being able to grasp the game even though the game can be executed.

In order to solve the seventh problem, the game machine of Appendix 7-11 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 7-11 is
A first control means (for example, the main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and
A predetermined display means (for example, a display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for the operation related to the one set value, and
When the power is turned on, the power supply means (for example, the power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
With
The first control means
Setting state control means for controlling at least the setting state in which the setting value can be changed or confirmed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON). (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24 or step S26) and
A first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the set value information about the one set value, and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one set value is changed or confirmed can be transmitted (for example, the transmission means). It has a command output port 106 and a main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of step S55.
The second control means
A receiving means (for example, a relay board 2010) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting means, and
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, subwork RAM 2100a) that can store as history information.
In the set state, there is a display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a hall menu screen, a hall menu item screen) on which various information can be displayed on the display means. And
The information screen is
A history screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) in which the history information is displayed, and a non-history screen (for example, a hall) in which the history information is displayed by performing a predetermined operation although the history information is not shown. Has multiple information screens, including at least a menu screen)
The display control means
A screen updating means (for example, a step) for controlling so that when a predetermined operation is performed while the information screen of any one of the plurality of information screens is displayed on the display means, the other information screen is displayed. The host control circuit 2100) that executes the processes of S3051, step S3057, step S3073, etc.
When the non-history screen is displayed in the setting state, the non-history screen is continuously displayed even if the predetermined operation is not performed (for example, the hall menu display process of step S302 is executed. When none of the items is selected in the process of step S303, the hall menu screen is continuously displayed.) On the other hand, when the history screen is displayed, the predetermined operation must be performed for a predetermined time or longer. For example, it is characterized by having a specific display control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S317 when it is determined to be YES in step S3072) that controls the display of the history screen to be terminated. ..

According to the game machine of (1) above, at least the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information can be viewed as history information, so that various problems related to the setting value can be viewed. It becomes possible to correspond to. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been performed by viewing the history screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

In addition, the non-history screen that does not show history information is continuously displayed even if the predetermined operation is not performed, but the history screen that shows history information ends if the predetermined operation is not performed for a predetermined time or longer. To do. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the history information from being viewed by an unauthorized third party due to the continuous display. The above-mentioned "continuous display" includes temporarily ending the display and redisplaying. That is, it is important whether the display is displayed or the display is not performed even when the predetermined operation is not performed for a predetermined time or longer.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
The transmission means
At least when the one set value is changed, the set value information about the one set value can also be transmitted.
The display control means
When displaying the history screen on the display means in the setting state, the setting value information about the one setting value is also displayed.

According to the game machine of (2) above, when the history screen is displayed, the setting value information for one setting value is also displayed, so that the authorized person can view more detailed history information. .. In particular, since the set value information about one set value is useful information for business, it can be useful for hall management.

In order to solve the seventh problem, the game machine of Appendix 7-12 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machines in Appendix 7-12 are
It is possible to execute control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and it is possible to store information related to the progress of the game including the set value information for the one set value. A first control means having one storage means (for example, a main control circuit 100) and
A predetermined display means (for example, a display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for the operation related to the one set value, and
Specific operating means (for example, backup clear switch 330) used for the operation of erasing the information stored in the first storage means, and
When the power is turned on, the power supply means (for example, the power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
With
The first control means
When the specific operating means is operated and the power is turned on while the setting operating means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the setting changing state in which the one set value can be changed is entered. The setting change state control means to be controlled (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting change information (for example, the setting change start command) indicating that the one setting value is changed, and the setting value for the one setting value. When the erasing process for erasing the information (for example, the set value information after the change when the set value is changed) and the information stored in the first storage means is executed, the erasing process is executed. It has a transmission means (for example, a command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S55) capable of transmitting information indicating that (for example, an initialization command).
The second control means
A receiving means (for example, a relay board 2010) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting means, and
When the setting change information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting change information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting change information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, subwork RAM 2100a) that can store as history information.
An information display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of displaying an information screen on which the history information is displayed on the display means at least in the setting change state.
Erasing execution information notifying means capable of notifying that the erasing process has been executed (for example, a display control circuit 2300, a voice / LED control circuit 2200 that controls the voice output of the speaker 24, and a voice / LED that controls the lighting mode of the LED 25. It has a control circuit 2200) and
The erasure execution information notification means
When the erasing process (for example, backup clearing process) is executed without being controlled by the setting change state, the first aspect (for example, in the display area of the display device 16) can be grasped that the erasing process is executed. The first notification means (host control circuit 2100) that notifies by the character display such as "RAM has been cleared", the voice output such as "RAM has been cleared", and the LED 25 is fully lit in red).
When the erasing process is executed while being controlled to the setting change state, it is more difficult to grasp that the erasing process is executed so as not to hinder the visibility of the information screen than in the first aspect. A second notification means (host) that notifies in a mode (for example, no display is performed on the display device 16, only a voice output such as "setting has been changed. RAM has been initialized" and all red lighting of the LED 25). It is characterized by having a control circuit 2100).

According to the game machine of (1) above, at least the setting change information and the time information related to the setting change information can be viewed as history information on the information screen, so that various problems related to the setting value can be viewed. It becomes possible to correspond to. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that a setting value has been changed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, by browsing the information screen, it is possible to track whether or not the above fraud has been committed. It becomes possible to do. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

Further, the erasing process (for example, backup clearing process) for erasing the information stored in the first storage means is executed without being controlled by the setting change state, or is controlled by the setting change state. May be executed. When the erasure process is executed without being controlled by the setting change state, the erasure process is executed by, for example, an unauthorized third party because it is notified in the first mode in which it can be grasped that the erasure process has been executed. It is possible to suppress being done. On the other hand, when the erasing process is executed while being controlled to the setting change state, the main purpose is to change one setting value, and the erasing process is only executed accordingly. Therefore, the notification is made in the second aspect, which is more difficult to grasp than the first aspect. Further, when the erasing process is executed while being controlled to the setting change state, the information screen showing the history information is displayed, but in the second aspect, the visibility of the information screen is not hindered. Since the execution of the erasing process is notified, convenience can be ensured.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
In addition to further providing an audio output means (for example, a speaker 24) capable of outputting a predetermined audio,
The second control means
Further, it has a voice control means (for example, a voice / LED control circuit 2200) capable of controlling the voice output from the voice output means.
The first notification means is
The fact that the erasing process has been executed is notified by using both the display means and the voice output means.
The second notification means is
It is characterized in that it is configured to notify that the erasing process has been executed by using only the voice output means of the display means and the voice output means.

According to the game machine (2) above, when the erasing process (for example, backup clearing process) is executed without being controlled by the setting change state, both the display means and the voice output means are used to notify the user. Therefore, it is possible to clearly grasp that the erasing process has been executed. On the other hand, when the erasing process is executed due to the control of the setting change state, only the voice output means of the display means and the voice output means is used for notification, so that the visibility of the information screen is hindered. It is possible to grasp the execution of the erasing process while preventing the erasing process from being performed, and it is possible to improve the convenience and suppress the execution of the erasing process by, for example, an unauthorized third party.

According to each of the gaming machines of Appendix 7-1 to Appendix 7-12 having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a highly convenient gaming machine capable of dealing with a problem related to a set value.

[11-8. Appendix 8 game machine]
Conventionally, there has been known a game machine in which a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied and a variable display of a symbol is performed based on the result of the lottery. Then, when the result of the lottery is displayed with a specific display result indicating that the result is a specific result, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, one of a plurality of setting values indicating the probability of being involved in the advantage or disadvantage of the player in the game, such as the probability that the result of the lottery will be a specific result, is set. A gaming machine whose progress is controlled based on a set value is known (see, for example, paragraph [0063] of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-206588). The above set value can be set by an authorized person such as a game machine manager in the hall.

(8th issue)
However, in a gaming machine in which the progress of the game is controlled based on the set value, for example, an unauthorized person illegally changes the set value or confirms the set value, or the set value is caused by noise or the like. Is changed, and there is a concern that various problems may occur such as the control board being replaced illegally.

Further, since the above setting value is an important factor for both the hall and the player, it should be strictly managed by an authorized person.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of dealing with a problem related to a set value.

In order to solve the eighth problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 8 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 8 is
A first control means (for example, the main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and
A predetermined display means (for example, a display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for the operation related to the one set value, and
With
The first control means
When at least the setting operation means is operated, the setting state control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24 or step S26) for controlling the setting state in which the one setting value can be changed or confirmed. )When,
A storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the set value information about the one set value, and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the set value information about the one set value can be transmitted (for example, the command output port 106 and the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S55). And have
The second control means
A receiving means (for example, a relay board 2010) capable of receiving the set value information transmitted from the transmitting means, and
Based on the reception of the set value information by the receiving means, the suitability of the one set value is determined by using the received set value information and the set value information received prior to the set value information. Setting determination means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that determines whether or not the previously set value and the current set value match) and
It has an abnormal time processing execution means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes a set value abnormal time processing) that executes an abnormal time processing when the setting determination means determines that the one set value is inappropriate. It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine of (1) above, the second control means determines the suitability of one set value by using the set value information about one set value transmitted from the first control means a plurality of times. It becomes possible. That is, even if the first control means can determine the suitability of one set value, for example, when the first control means is illegally replaced, the one set value is normal. Regardless of whether it is abnormal or abnormal, the first control means determines that one set value is normal. Therefore, by enabling the second control means to determine the suitability for one set value, for example, even when the first control means is illegally replaced, the one set value can be determined. It is possible to immediately discover the suitability.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
The transmission means
It is also possible to send setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the above-mentioned one setting value has been changed or confirmed.
The second control means
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information are stored separately from the storage means which can be stored as history information. Means (eg, subwork RAM 2100a) and
Having a display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) on which the history information is displayed on a predetermined display means based on a predetermined operation. It is characterized by.

According to the game machine of (2) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse an information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

When the transmission means capable of transmitting various information to the second control means transmits both the setting operation information and the set value information, these information may be transmitted together or separately. The setting operation information is the setting value change information indicating that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and the setting value is confirmed when the setting value is confirmed. This is the set value confirmation information indicating that. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information about one setting value after the change. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information about the set one setting value may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the set value information to the second control means.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be the time information in which the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 8 having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of dealing with a problem related to a set value.

[11-9. Appendix 9 game machine]
Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which a lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a game advantageous to the player is executed based on the result of the lottery.

As a game machine of this kind, a game machine having a plurality of functions with one device has been proposed. For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-170505, in order to be pressed by a player and to give an impact to the player, it is made to jump out to a position greatly protruding from the main body of the game machine regardless of the operation of the player. The push button is disclosed.

(9th issue)

By the way, when checking the operation of accessories, various sensors, etc., the maintainability of one device having a plurality of functions, such as the push button described in JP2012-170505, deteriorates. There is concern about fear.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving maintainability of a device having a plurality of functions in one device. is there.

In order to solve the ninth problem, the game machine of Appendix 9 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 9 is
A gaming machine capable of performing a lottery (for example, a special lottery) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and performing a game advantageous to the player based on the result of the lottery.
A character that can operate based on the result of the lottery (for example, a character group 1000) and
A compound means having a plurality of functions in one (for example, an effect button 62) and
Various sensors used for the progress of the game (for example, the first start port switch 421) and
A predetermined display means (for example, a display device 16) and
At least, the maintenance item determining means (for example, the process of step S3084) for determining the maintenance item to be executed among the plurality of maintenance items including the operation confirmation of the accessory, the function confirmation of the composite means, and the detection confirmation of the various sensors. Executable host control circuit 2100) and
In determining the maintenance item, a selection screen (for example, FIG. 132) in which one of a plurality of maintenance items including operation confirmation of the accessory, function confirmation of the composite means, and detection confirmation of the various sensors can be selected can be selected. A maintenance screen display control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 capable of executing the process of step S3083) that displays at least a maintenance screen), and
With
The maintenance item determination means is
It is possible to determine the maintenance item selected on the selection screen displayed by the maintenance screen display control means.
The maintenance screen display control means
The combined means, which has one but has a plurality of functions, is configured to be displayable so that an item can be selected for each function on the selection screen (for example, the item of "effect button 1" in FIG. 132). It is displayed so that you can select one of the items of "Production button 2")
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine of (1) above, for a composite means having a plurality of functions even though it is one, an item can be selected for each function on a selection screen in which one of a plurality of maintenance items can be selected. Since it is displayed, it is possible to improve maintainability.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
The combined means
At the very least, it has an operation function and an effect function that can be executed based on the result of the lottery.
The maintenance item determination means is
When the operation function item (for example, effect button 1) is selected on the selection screen, the maintenance item related to the operation function is determined, and the effect function item (for example, effect button 2) is selected. The feature is that the maintenance items related to the effect function can be determined.

According to the game machine of (2) above, when the item of the operation function is selected, the maintenance item related to the operation function is determined, and when the item of the effect function is selected, the maintenance item related to the effect function is selected. Since it is configured to be decidable, it is possible to appropriately perform maintenance on both the operation function and the effect function.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 9 having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving maintainability of one device having a plurality of functions.

[11-10. Appendix 10 Game Machine]
Conventionally, in a game machine that executes a game advantageous to a player based on the result of a lottery performed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, a game machine having a movable accessory that operates based on the result of the lottery has been known. There is.

As a game machine of this type, as a movable accessory that operates based on the result of a lottery, a gaming machine including a first movable accessory and a second movable accessory having different drive sources is disclosed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-15273).

(10th issue)
By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-15273, for example, which includes a plurality of movable accessories having different drive sources, maintenance work may be complicated and troublesome. This is especially noticeable when a plurality of movable objects having different drive sources may interfere with each other.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to reduce the troublesomeness of maintenance work even when a plurality of movable accessories having different drive sources are provided. It is to provide a game machine.

In order to solve the tenth problem, the game machine of Appendix 10 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 10 is
A gaming machine capable of performing a lottery (for example, a special lottery) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and performing a game advantageous to the player based on the result of the lottery.
The first accessory and the second accessory, which can operate based on the result of the lottery and have different drive sources,
Various sensors used for the progress of the game (for example, the first start port switch 421) and
A predetermined display means (for example, a display device 16) and
A maintenance item determining means (for example, a step) for determining a maintenance item to be executed among a plurality of maintenance items including at least the operation confirmation of the first accessory, the operation confirmation of the second accessory, and the detection confirmation of the various sensors. A host control circuit 2100) capable of executing the processing of S3084 and
In determining the maintenance item, a selection screen (for example,) in which one of a plurality of maintenance items including operation confirmation of the first accessory, operation confirmation of the second accessory, and detection confirmation of the various sensors can be selected (for example). , A maintenance screen display control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 capable of executing the process of step S3083) that displays at least the maintenance screen of FIG. 132.
With
The maintenance item determination means is
It is possible to determine the maintenance item selected on the selection screen displayed by the maintenance screen display control means.
The maintenance screen display control means
Not only the operation check of the first accessory and the second accessory alone, but also the operation check when both the first accessory and the second accessory are operated is selected on the selection screen. It is configured to be displayable so that it can be displayed (for example, the item of "directing accessory 1 + 2" in FIG. 132 is displayed).
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine of (1) above, not only the operation check of each of the first and second bonuses independently, but also the operation check when both the first and second bonuses are operated. Can be selected on the selection screen, so that the troublesome maintenance work can be reduced.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
The maintenance screen display control means
It is configured so that the operation check when the second accessory is operated after the first accessory is operated can be selected on the selection screen (for example, "Direction accessory 1 → 2" in FIG. 132). Items etc. are displayed)
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine of (2) above, even if the operation start timing of the first accessory and the operation start timing of the second accessory can be different, the second accessory is operated after the first accessory is operated. Since the operation check when the is operated can be selected on the selection screen, it is possible to reduce the troublesome maintenance work and further improve the maintainability.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
It is further provided with a third accessory that can operate based on the result of the lottery and has a different drive source from both the first accessory and the second accessory.
The maintenance screen display control means
When there is a possibility that the first accessory and / and the second accessory and the third accessory may interfere with each other when they operate, the first accessory and / and the second accessory The selection screen can be displayed in such a manner that neither the third accessory nor the third accessory can be operated (for example, it is displayed so that the item of "effect 1 + 3" in FIG. 132 cannot be selected. )
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine of (3) above, when there is a possibility that the first accessory and / or the second accessory and the third accessory may interfere with each other when they operate, the first accessory is displayed on the selection screen. Since it is not possible to select a mode in which either the 1st accessory or / or the 2nd accessory and the 3rd accessory are operated, it is possible to improve maintainability.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 10 having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving maintainability of one device having a plurality of functions.

[11-11. Each game machine of Appendix 11-1 and Appendix 11-2]
Conventionally, there has been known a game machine in which a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied and a variable display of a symbol is performed based on the result of the lottery. Then, when the result of the lottery is displayed with a specific display result indicating that the result is a specific result, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, one of a plurality of setting values indicating the probability of being involved in the advantage or disadvantage of the player in the game, such as the probability that the result of the lottery will be a specific result, is set. A gaming machine whose progress is controlled based on a set value is known (see, for example, paragraph [0063] of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-206588). The above set value can be set by an authorized person such as a game machine manager in the hall.

(11th issue)

By the way, in a gaming machine in which the progress of the game is controlled based on the set set value, the set value is an important factor for both the hall and the player because it is related to the ball output. However, for example, there is a possibility that an abnormality may occur in the set value due to the occurrence of power interruption or the like.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of appropriately maintaining a set value.

In order to solve the eleventh problem, the game machine of Appendix 11-1 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 11-1 is
Control related to the progress of the game can be executed based on the set value of any one of the plurality of set values, and information related to the progress of the game including the set value information for the one set value can be stored. A control means (eg, main control circuit 100) having means (eg, main RAM 103) and
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for the operation related to the one set value, and
Specific operating means (for example, backup clear switch 330) used for the operation of erasing the information stored in the storage means, and
A power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the control means when the power is turned on, and
With
The control means
When the specific operating means is turned ON and the power is turned on while the setting operating means is turned ON, a state control means (for example, a state control means that controls the setting changing state in which the one set value can be changed). , The main CPU 101) capable of executing the process of step S24,
The state control means
When the power supply is stopped in the setting change state, even if the power is turned on without performing the ON operation of the setting operation means and / or the ON operation of the specific operation means, the control is controlled to the setting change state. It is possible to restore power in the above-mentioned setting change state when the power supply is stopped (for example, the process of step S24 is executed when it is determined as NO in step S21).
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine of (1) above, even if a power failure occurs while being controlled to the setting change state, when the power is turned on after that, the setting change state is controlled or the power is turned on. Since the power is restored with the setting changed when the supply is stopped, the set value is always set and the set value is maintained properly. That is, for example, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the set value is not set due to the occurrence of an unintended power failure in the setting change state.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
The control means
When the setting operation means is turned off after the one setting value is changed in the setting change state, the setting value fixing means (for example,) for fixing the one setting value to the changed setting value. , Further has a main CPU 101) that executes the process of step S2480.
The set value determining means is
When the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned ON, or when the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, the setting operation means is turned ON. After that, when the OFF operation is further performed, the above-mentioned one set value is configured to be fixed to the set value after being changed.

According to the game machine of (2) above, the setting is made when the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned on or the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped. Although it is necessary to turn on the operating means once, it is possible to determine one set value by performing the same operation as usual, such as turning off the setting operating means. As a result, even if the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned on, or the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, complicated operations are performed. Without this, it is possible to preferably prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the set value is not set.

In order to solve the eleventh problem, the game machine of Appendix 11-2 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 11-2 is
Control related to the progress of the game can be executed based on the set value of any one of the plurality of set values, and information related to the progress of the game including the set value information for the one set value can be stored. A control means having the means (for example, the main control circuit 100) and
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for the operation related to the one set value, and
Specific operating means (for example, backup clear switch 330) used for the operation of erasing the information stored in the storage means, and
A power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the control means when the power is turned on, and
With
The control means
The state after the power is turned on according to the operation state of the setting operation means and the operation state of the specific operation means, the setting change state in which the one setting value can be changed and the one setting. It has a state control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing processing such as step S24, step S26, and step S28) that can control any of a plurality of states including a setting confirmation state in which a value can be confirmed. And
The state control means
When the power supply is stopped in the setting confirmation state and then the power is turned on, the control is performed in one of the plurality of states according to the operation state of the setting operation means and the operation state of the specific operation means. (For example, the processes of steps S22 to S28 are executed), and
When the power supply was stopped in the setting change state and then the power was turned on, the controllable or power supply was stopped in the setting change state regardless of the operation states of the setting operation means and the specific operation means. It is possible to restore power in the state of changing the setting at the time (for example, when NO is determined in step S21, the process of step S24 is executed).
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine of (1) above, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where the set value is not set due to the occurrence of power failure or the like while ensuring the convenience of the operator. That is, since the setting confirmation state is a state in which one setting value can only be confirmed and one setting value cannot be changed, for example, even if an unintended power failure occurs, one setting value cannot be changed. It is unlikely that it will affect. On the other hand, since the setting change state is a state in which one setting value can be changed, for example, if an unintended power failure occurs, the one setting value may be affected. Therefore, when the power supply is stopped in the setting confirmation state, when the power is turned on after that, one of a plurality of states is set according to the operation state of the setting operation means and the operation state of the specific operation means. When the power supply is stopped in the setting change state, when the power is turned on after that, it is controlled to the setting change state or in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped. By recovering the power, the convenience of the operator is ensured, and the occurrence of a situation in which the set value is not set due to an unintended power failure or the like is prevented.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
The state control means
When the specific operating means is turned ON and the power is turned on while the setting operating means is turned ON, the setting is controlled to the changed state.
The control means
When the setting operation means is turned off after the one setting value is changed in the setting change state, the setting value determination means for fixing the one setting value to the changed setting value is further added. Have
The set value determining means is
When the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned ON, or when the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, the setting operation means is turned ON. After that, when the OFF operation is further performed, the above-mentioned one set value is configured to be fixed to the set value after being changed.

According to the game machine of (2) above, the setting is made when the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned on or the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped. Although it is necessary to turn on the operating means once, it is possible to determine one set value by performing the same operation as usual, such as turning off the setting operating means. As a result, even if the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned on, or the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, complicated operations are performed. Without this, it is possible to preferably prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the set value is not set.

According to each of the gaming machines of Appendix 11-1 and Appendix 11-2 having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the set value can be appropriately maintained.

[11-12. Appendix 12 game machines]
Conventionally, there has been known a game machine in which a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied and a variable display of a symbol is performed based on the result of the lottery. Then, when the result of the lottery is displayed with a specific display result indicating that the result is a specific result, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, one of a plurality of setting values indicating the probability of being involved in the advantage or disadvantage of the player in the game, such as the probability that the result of the lottery will be a specific result, is set. A gaming machine whose progress is controlled based on a set value is known (see, for example, paragraph [0063] of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-206588). The above set value can be set by an authorized person such as a game machine manager in the hall.

(12th issue)
By the way, in a game machine in which the progress of the game is controlled based on the set value, the set value is an important factor for both the hall and the player because it is related to the ball output. However, there is a possibility that an abnormality may occur in the set value due to, for example, noise generation or fraudulent activity.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of appropriately maintaining a set value.

In order to solve the twelfth problem, the game machine of Appendix 12 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 12 is
Control related to the progress of the game can be executed based on the set value of any one of the plurality of set values, and information related to the progress of the game including the set value information for the one set value can be stored. A control means (eg, main control circuit 100) having means (eg, main RAM 103) and
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for the operation related to the one set value, and
Specific operating means (for example, backup clear switch 330) used for the operation of erasing the information stored in the storage means, and
A power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the control means when the power is turned on, and
With
The control means
When the specific operation means is turned ON and the power is turned on while the setting operation means is turned ON, the setting change state control means for controlling the setting change state in which the one set value can be changed. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) and
Appropriate determination means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S721) for determining the suitability / non-suitability of the information stored in the storage means, and
When it is determined that the information stored in the storage means is inappropriate, it is controlled to an abnormal state (for example, a state in which the process of step S722 to step S727 is executed) (process of step S722 to step S727). Main CPU 101) that executes
When the power supply is stopped in the abnormal state and the setting change state is not controlled after the power is turned on, the game is executed even if the operation of erasing the information stored in the storage means is performed. Control so that the game cannot be executed (for example, the process of step S1790 is not executed when NO is determined in step S1770), while the game is controlled so that the game can be executed when the setting change state is controlled after the power is turned on (for example, step It is characterized by having a game execution means (for example, a main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S17) that executes the process of step S1790 when it is determined to be YES in S1770 and YES in step S1780).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when an abnormal state occurs due to noise generation or fraudulent activity, and the power supply is stopped in such an abnormal state, the setting change state is not controlled after the power is turned on. In that case, even if the operation of erasing the information stored in the storage means is performed, the game cannot be executed, and the game can be executed when the setting is changed after the power is turned on. .. When an abnormal state occurs, there is a high possibility that the one set value information stored in the storage means is abnormal, so only when the setting change state is controlled so that the one set value is always changed. It is intended to enable the game to be executed and to maintain the set value appropriately.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 12 having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of properly maintaining the set value.

[11-13. Appendix 13 Game Machine]
Conventionally, there has been known a game machine in which a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied and a variable display of a symbol is performed based on the result of the lottery. Then, when the result of the lottery is displayed with a specific display result indicating that the result is a specific result, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, one of a plurality of setting values indicating the probability of being involved in the advantage or disadvantage of the player in the game, such as the probability that the result of the lottery will be a specific result, is set. A gaming machine whose progress is controlled based on a set value is known (see, for example, paragraph [0063] of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-206588). The above set value can be set by an authorized person such as a game machine manager in the hall.

(13th issue)
However, in a gaming machine in which the progress of the game is controlled based on the set value, for example, an unauthorized person illegally changes the set value or confirms the set value, or the set value is caused by noise or the like. There is a concern that various problems will occur, such as changes in.

Further, since the above setting value is an important factor for both the hall and the player, it should be strictly managed by an authorized person.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of dealing with a problem related to a set value.

In order to solve the thirteenth problem, the game machine of Appendix 13 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 13 is
A first control means (for example, the main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and
A predetermined display means (for example, a display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for the operation related to the one set value, and
When the power is turned on, the power supply means (for example, the power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
With
The first control means
At least when the power is turned on with the setting operation means turned on (for example, the setting key is ON), the state control means for controlling the setting value so that the one setting value can be changed or confirmed. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing processing such as step S24, step S26, and step S28) and
A game execution means that can be controlled so that the game cannot be executed in the set state but can be executed when the set state is completed (for example, the game is executed in the setting process of step S20 in which the game return process of step S30 has not yet been executed). When the setting process of step S20 is completed, the game return process of step S30 is executed to execute the power-on process that enables the game to be executed, although it cannot be done.
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, operation type information) indicating that the one set value is changed or confirmed can be transmitted (for example, the transmission means). It has a command output port 106 and a main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of step S55.
The second control means
A receiving means (for example, a relay board 2010) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting means, and
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, the setting operation effect executing means (for example,) that can execute the effect indicating that the change or confirmation of the one set value has been performed in the set state in which the game cannot be executed. , A host control circuit 2100) that executes control to turn on all the LEDs 25 in red via the voice / LED control circuit 2200.
The setting operation effect executing means is
Even if the set state ends and the game can be executed, it is possible to execute an effect indicating that the change or confirmation of the one set value has been performed until the predetermined period elapses. It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine of (1) above, when the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, an effect indicating that one set value is changed or confirmed is executed in a set state in which the game cannot be executed. Further, even if the set state ends and the game can be executed, an effect indicating that one set value has been changed or confirmed is executed until a predetermined period elapses. Therefore, it is possible to easily find such fraud when the set value is changed or the set value is confirmed illegally, and it is possible to suppress the fraud itself.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
The setting operation effect executing means is
An aspect in which it is possible to visually grasp that the game can be executed by the effect indicating that the change or confirmation of the one set value has been performed after the set state is completed and the game can be executed. It is characterized by being configured to be executable in.

According to the game machine of (2) above, since the effect indicating that one set value has been changed or confirmed is executed in a manner in which it is possible to visually grasp that the game can be executed, one of the above. It is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being hindered while the effect indicating that the set value has been changed or confirmed has been executed.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
The state control means
It has a setting change state control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) for controlling the setting change state capable of changing the one set value, and also has
The second control means
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). With a storage means (for example, subwork RAM 2100a) that can store as history information.
An information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) showing the history information in the setting state can be displayed on the display means, and the information screen is not displayed when the setting state is completed. Further, it has a display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of limiting the display.
The display control means
When the receiving means receives the setting operation information indicating that the setting change state has ended, even if the setting change state ends, the display of the information screen is not restricted until a predetermined time elapses. It is characterized in that the information screen can be displayed (for example, the processes of steps S312 to S316 can be executed).

According to the game machine of (3) above, the information screen showing the history information can be displayed on the display means in the set state, and the display of the information screen is restricted when the set state is completed. Therefore, in the set state, it is possible to deal with various problems related to the set value by browsing the information screen showing the history information. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales. Furthermore, while the display of the information screen is restricted when the setting state ends, when the setting operation information indicating that the setting change state has ended is received, even if the setting change state ends, until the predetermined time elapses. Can display the information screen. Therefore, even if the fraud is committed, it is possible to easily find the fraud and to suppress the fraud itself.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 13 having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of dealing with a problem related to a set value.

[11-14. Appendix 14 Game Machine]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins a prize at the starting port, and a big hit game is performed when the result of this lottery is a big hit.

As a game machine of this type, a long-press effect is performed on the operating means to change the execution mode of the specific game effect on condition that the player performs a predetermined long-press operation, which is shorter than the long-press operation. There is known a gaming machine capable of executing a continuous striking effect on condition that a continuous striking operation of performing a pressing operation a plurality of times is performed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-055977). In the gaming machine of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, if the long-press operation is performed within the long-press operation acceptance valid period for determining whether or not the long-press operation is performed, the long-press effect is executed.

(14th issue)
It is not preferable to control by determining whether a long press operation is performed or a continuous striking effect is performed on the operating means as in the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-055977, because the control load becomes large. ..

However, in recent years, there has been a demand for a game machine that can enhance the interest by producing a production that can give a further visual impact.

In order to solve the 14th problem, the game machine of Appendix 14 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 14 is
A gaming machine capable of executing a main process (for example, a main loop process) in which various processes (for example, various request control processes) are performed every predetermined time (for example, 33.3 msec).
With a predetermined operating means (for example, main button),
Control capable of performing interrupt processing every time shorter than the predetermined time (for example, 1 msec) and generating input information in the main processing based on the input state of the operating means detected by the interrupt processing. Means (eg, host control circuit 2100) and
With
The control means
As the input information, after the input state of the operating means changes from the OFF state to the ON state,
As the input information, after the input state of the operating means changes from the OFF state to the ON state, it is determined that the ON state has continued for a certain period of time (for example, 10 frames), and then the input state of the operating means is described. Input information that generates information that can be periodically determined to have occurred (for example, ON edge information with a repeat function) as long as the ON state continues for a time shorter than a certain time (for example, 4 frames). A generation means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1309) and
Having a device control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100) capable of executing control of a predetermined device based on the information generated by the input information generation means (for example, the ON edge information with a repeat function). It is a feature.

According to the game machine of (1) above, the ON state is constant after the input state of the operating means changes from the OFF state to the ON state based on the input state of the operating means (for example, the input information of the subdevice). By generating information that can be determined to have occurred periodically as long as the input state of the operating means continues to be ON for a time shorter than a certain period of time after it is determined that the time has continued. It is possible to easily perform control such as control of the continuous hitting effect of the sub device and control of the long press effect.

Further, according to the gaming machine of Appendix 14, it is possible to execute control according to the mode of the operating means while reducing the control load.

[11-15. Each game machine of Appendix 15-2]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins a prize at the starting port, and based on the result of this lottery, an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display.

As this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine including a display device that emits light by a backlight is disclosed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-159026).

(15th issue)
However, for example, if the brightness of the light emitting means of the backlight is unstable, the display of the effect image on the display device may become unstable, which is not preferable.

In order to solve the fifteenth problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 15-1 and the gaming machine of Appendix 15-2 having the following configurations are provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 15-1 is
A light emitting means (for example, a backlight) capable of emitting light in a predetermined embodiment,
A data storage means (for example, a FIFO data area) that stores drive data (for example, luminance data) corresponding to a light emitting mode emitted by the light emitting means in a predetermined area, and
A light emitting drive means (for example, LSI) that outputs a control signal based on the drive data stored in the data storage means to the light emitting means, and
A data setting means for setting the drive data in a predetermined area of the data storage means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1346) and
With
The data setting means is
When the number of drive data set in the predetermined area of the data storage means reaches the reference number of drive data that can be set in the predetermined area, a new drive data is set. And.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 15-1 of the above (1), when the number of drive data set in the predetermined data area becomes the reference data number of the drive data that can be stored in the predetermined area, new drive data Is set, so that a control signal output by the light emitting driving means (for example, a signal equivalent to PWM continuously output from the serial data output terminal of SPI) can be output, and the light emitting means is transmitted via a driver. It is possible to emit light stably without using it.

The above-mentioned "reference data number" corresponds to 1 to 64 data if the number of data that can be set in a predetermined area of the data storage means (for example, the FIFA data area) is up to 64, for example. Considering that it is necessary to prevent the number of data set in a predetermined area of the storage means from becoming 0, it is preferable that the number of data is two or more. Further, the number of luminance data that can be set in the FIFO data area is not limited to 64, and it is sufficient that at least two or more luminance data can be set. When the number of brightness data set in the FIFA data area is, for example, two or more, if the number of brightness data set in the FIFA data area is less than the first number (for example, two), the second number is obtained. The brightness data (for example, one) may be supplemented.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 15-2 is
A light emitting means (for example, a backlight) capable of emitting light in a predetermined embodiment,
A data storage means (for example, a FIFO data area) that stores drive data (for example, luminance data) corresponding to a light emitting mode emitted by the light emitting means in a predetermined area (for example, a FIFO data area).
A light emitting drive means (for example, LSI) that outputs a control signal based on the drive data stored in a predetermined area of the data storage means to the light emitting means, and
A data setting means for setting the drive data in a predetermined area of the data storage means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1346) and
A timekeeping means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1356) capable of measuring the elapsed time since the drive data is set in a predetermined area of the data storage means.
With
The data setting means is
It is characterized in that the driving data can be set in a predetermined area of the data storage means (the process of step S1354 can be executed) based on the elapse of a predetermined time or more by the time counting means. And.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 15-2 of the above (1), the driving data is data based on the elapsed time from the setting of the driving data in the predetermined area of the data storage means to the predetermined time or more. It is set in a predetermined area of the storage means. For example, when some processing takes time, the driving data set in the predetermined area of the data storage means disappears until the timing of setting the driving data in the predetermined area of the data storage means is reached. There is a risk of In this regard, according to this gaming machine, even if it is not the timing to set the drive data in the predetermined area of the data storage means, the drive data is determined by the data storage means based on the elapse of the predetermined time or more. Since it is set in the area of, it is possible to prevent the drive data set in the predetermined data area from becoming empty. Therefore, the control signal output by the light emitting driving means (for example, the signal equivalent to PWM continuously output from the serial data output terminal of SPI) can be output, and the light emitting means can be stably output without using a driver. It is possible to make it emit light.

Further, according to the gaming machine of Appendix 15-1 and the gaming machine of Appendix 15-2, it is possible to suppress the unstable light emission of the light emitting means.

[11-16. Each game machine of Appendix 16-2]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins a prize at the starting port, and a production image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of this lottery.

As this type of game machine, there is known a game machine used for directing or decorating by emitting light in a predetermined mode from a light emitting device composed of a plurality of light emitting bodies such as LEDs provided on the front side. .. Further, there is disclosed a gaming machine in which the brightness of these light emitting devices can be adjusted by a player or the like within a preset range (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295551).

(16th issue)
By the way, in recent years, the production has become flashy, including a light emitting device composed of a plurality of light emitting bodies such as LEDs provided on the front side. Therefore, if the brightness of the light emitting device is high, it may be stressful for some players. If the brightness of the light emitting device can be operated by the player or the like, the player can adjust the brightness to a desired brightness, but that alone may not be sufficient.

In order to solve the 16th problem, the game machine of Appendix 16-1 and the game machine of blow 16-2 having the following configurations are provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 16-1 is
A first light emitting means (for example, a backlight) capable of emitting light in a predetermined embodiment,
An operating means (for example, a brightness setting screen displayed on a liquid crystal display device used as a display device 16) capable of changing the brightness of the first light emitting means to any one of a plurality of stages, and
A host control circuit that executes the process of step S1384, which can change the brightness of the first light emitting means to any one of a plurality of stages based on the operation of the operating means. 2100) and
A second light emitting means (for example, a panel side LED or a frame side LED) provided separately from the first light emitting means,
A second light emitting control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1385) capable of changing the brightness of the second light emitting means, and
With
The second light emission control means
The brightness of the second light emitting means is changed to one of the plurality of steps at a timing different from the timing at which the brightness of the first light emitting means is changed based on the operation of the operating means. It is characterized by being configured to be possible.

According to the game machine (1), when the operating means capable of changing the brightness of the first light emitting means is operated, the second light emitting means is changed at a timing different from the timing at which the brightness of the first light emitting means is changed. While the brightness of the light emitting means is also changed, the brightness of the second light emitting means is also changed to one of a plurality of stages, so that the degree of freedom for the player to change the brightness can be further increased. ..

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
A data storage means (for example, a FIFO data area) that stores drive data corresponding to a light emitting mode emitted by the first light emitting means in a predetermined area, and
A light emitting drive means (for example, LSI) that outputs a control signal based on the drive data stored in the data storage means to the first light emitting means, and
A data setting means for setting the drive data in a predetermined area of the data storage means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1346) and
With
The data setting means is
When the number of drive data set in the predetermined area of the data storage means reaches the reference number of drive data that can be stored in the predetermined area, new drive data is set and new drive data is set.
When the operating means is operated, it is characterized in that the driving data after the brightness is changed is set as the new driving data.

According to the game machine of (2) above, when the number of drive data set in the predetermined data area reaches the reference number of drive data that can be stored in the predetermined area, new drive data is set. , A control signal output by the light emitting driving means (for example, a signal equivalent to PWM continuously output from the serial data output terminal of SPI) can be output, and the light emitting means can emit light stably without going through a driver. It becomes possible to make it. Moreover, when the brightness is changed, the changed drive data is set as new drive data, so that the first light emitting means can be stably emitted according to the set brightness.

The above-mentioned "reference data number" corresponds to 1 to 64 data if the number of data that can be set in a predetermined area of the data storage means (for example, the FIFA data area) is up to 64, for example. Considering that it is necessary to prevent the number of data set in a predetermined area of the storage means from becoming 0, it is preferable that the number of data is two or more. Further, the number of luminance data that can be set in the FIFO data area is not limited to 64, and it is sufficient that at least two or more luminance data can be set. When the number of brightness data set in the FIFA data area is, for example, two or more, if the number of brightness data set in the FIFA data area is less than the first number (for example, two), the second number is obtained. The brightness data (for example, one) may be supplemented.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 16-2 is
A lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S45) that draws a lot based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and
A display means for displaying a predetermined effect image (for example, a liquid crystal display device used as the display device 16) and
Based on the result of the lottery, the variable display control means (for example, the display control circuit 2300) that displays the variable of the symbol (for example, the identification symbol for effect) in the display means,
A first light emitting means (for example, a backlight) capable of emitting light in a predetermined embodiment,
An operating means (for example, a brightness setting screen displayed on a liquid crystal display device used as a display device 16) capable of changing the brightness of the first light emitting means to any one of a plurality of stages, and
Host control for executing the process of the first light emitting control means (for example, step S1394) in which the brightness of the first light emitting means can be changed to any one of a plurality of steps based on the operation of the operating means. Circuit 2100) and
A second light emitting means (for example, a panel side LED or a frame side LED) provided separately from the first light emitting means,
A second light emitting control means (host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1392) that controls the light emitting mode of the second light emitting means based on a predetermined request, and
With
The second light emission control means
The brightness of the second light emitting means is changed after the brightness of the first light emitting means is changed and after the variation display of the symbol is completed based on the operation of the operating means. (For example, the process of step S1399 is executed). It is characterized in that it is configured to be possible.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the brightness of the first light emitting means can be changed when the operating means is operated. Further, the brightness of the second light emitting means is changed after the brightness of the first light emitting means is changed and after the variation display of the symbol is completed. Here, since the light emitting mode of the second light emitting means is controlled based on a predetermined request, the control load is minimized by changing the brightness of the second light emitting means after the variable display of the symbol is completed. It is possible to change the brightness of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means while suppressing the limit.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
A data storage means (for example, a FIFO data area) that stores drive data corresponding to a light emitting mode emitted by the first light emitting means in a predetermined area, and
A light emitting drive means (for example, LSI) that outputs a control signal based on the drive data stored in the data storage means to the first light emitting means, and
A data setting means for setting the drive data in a predetermined area of the data storage means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1346) and
With
The data setting means is
When the number of drive data set in the predetermined area of the data storage means reaches the reference number of drive data that can be stored in the predetermined area, new drive data is set and new drive data is set.
When the operating means is operated, it is characterized in that the driving data after the brightness is changed is set as the new driving data.

According to the game machine of (2) above, when the number of drive data set in the predetermined data area reaches the reference number of drive data that can be stored in the predetermined area, new drive data is set. , A control signal output by the light emitting driving means (for example, a signal equivalent to PWM continuously output from the serial data output terminal of SPI) can be output, and the light emitting means can emit light stably without going through a driver. It becomes possible to make it. Moreover, when the brightness is changed, the changed drive data is set as new drive data, so that the first light emitting means can be stably emitted according to the set brightness.

The above-mentioned "reference data number" corresponds to 1 to 64 data if the number of data that can be set in a predetermined area of the data storage means (for example, the FIFA data area) is up to 64, for example. Considering that it is necessary to prevent the number of data set in a predetermined area of the storage means from becoming 0, it is preferable that the number of data is two or more. Further, the number of luminance data that can be set in the FIFO data area is not limited to 64, and it is sufficient that at least two or more luminance data can be set. When the number of brightness data set in the FIFA data area is, for example, two or more, if the number of brightness data set in the FIFA data area is less than the first number (for example, two), the second number is obtained. The brightness data (for example, one) may be supplemented.

Further, according to the game machine of Appendix 16-1 and the game machine of Appendix 16-2, it is possible to provide a game machine in which the player or the like can more preferably adjust the brightness of the light emitting device.

[11-17. Appendix 17 Game Machine]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins a prize at the starting port, and a production image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of this lottery.

As this type of game machine, there is known a game machine used for directing or decorating by emitting light in a predetermined mode from a light emitting device composed of a plurality of light emitting bodies such as LEDs provided on the front side. .. Further, there is disclosed a gaming machine in which the brightness of these light emitting devices can be adjusted by a player or the like within a preset range (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295551).

(17th issue)
By the way, in recent years, the production has become flashy, including a light emitting device composed of a plurality of light emitting bodies such as LEDs provided on the front side. Therefore, if the intensity of the light received from the light emitting device is high, it may be stressful for some players.

In order to solve the 17th problem, the game machine of Appendix 17 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 17 is
The gaming machine according to the present invention
A first light emitting means (for example, a backlight) capable of emitting light in a predetermined embodiment,
An operating means (for example, a brightness setting screen displayed on a liquid crystal display device used as a display device 16) capable of changing the brightness of the first light emitting means to any one of a plurality of stages, and
A host control circuit that executes the process of step S1394 (for example, a host control circuit that can change the brightness of the first light emitting means to any one of a plurality of stages based on the operation of the operating means. 2100) and
A second light emitting means (for example, a panel side LED or a frame side LED) provided separately from the first light emitting means,
A second light emitting control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1406) capable of changing the light emitting mode of the second light emitting means, and
With
The second light emission control means
The mode of the light emitting effect executed by the second light emitting means is limited and executed at a timing different from the timing at which the brightness of the first light emitting means is changed based on the operation of the operating means. It is characterized by being configured to be possible.

According to the gaming machine (1), when the operating means capable of changing the brightness of the first light emitting means is operated, the mode of the light emitting effect executed by the second light emitting means is limited. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the intensity of the light received from the second light emitting means by a simple process.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
A data storage means (for example, a FIFO data area) that stores drive data corresponding to a light emitting mode emitted by the first light emitting means in a predetermined area, and
A light emitting drive means (for example, LSI) that outputs a control signal based on the drive data stored in the data storage means to the first light emitting means, and
A data setting means for setting the drive data in a predetermined area of the data storage means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1346) and
With
The data setting means is
When the number of drive data set in the predetermined area of the data storage means reaches the reference number of drive data that can be stored in the predetermined area, new drive data is set and new drive data is set.
When the operating means is operated, it is characterized in that the driving data after the brightness is changed is set as the new driving data.

According to the game machine of (2) above, when the number of drive data set in the predetermined data area reaches the reference number of drive data that can be stored in the predetermined area, new drive data is set. , A control signal output by the light emitting driving means (for example, a signal equivalent to PWM continuously output from the serial data output terminal of SPI) can be output, and the light emitting means can emit light stably without going through a driver. It becomes possible to make it. Moreover, when the brightness is changed, the changed drive data is set as new drive data, so that the first light emitting means can be stably emitted according to the set brightness.

The above-mentioned "reference data number" corresponds to 1 to 64 data if the number of data that can be set in a predetermined area of the data storage means (for example, the FIFA data area) is up to 64, for example. Considering that it is necessary to prevent the number of data set in a predetermined area of the storage means from becoming 0, it is preferable that the number of data is two or more. Further, the number of luminance data that can be set in the FIFO data area is not limited to 64, and it is sufficient that at least two or more luminance data can be set. When the number of brightness data set in the FIFA data area is, for example, two or more, if the number of brightness data set in the FIFA data area is less than the first number (for example, two), the second number is obtained. The brightness data (for example, one) may be supplemented.

As described above, according to the gaming machine of Appendix 17, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the player or the like can suitably adjust the intensity of the light received from the light emitting device.

[11-18. Appendix 18 Game Machine]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, for example, a gaming machine in which an effect depending on an RTC (real-time clock) is performed is known.

In this type of gaming machine, the RTC abnormality is determined when the power is turned on, and if there is an abnormality, the date and time are notified, and if an RTC abnormality is found, a gaming machine that can quickly deal with this is available. It is known (see, for example, JP-A-2017-51853 (eg, paragraph [0094])).

(18th issue)
According to the gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-51853, if there is an abnormality in the RTC, the date and time will be notified, so there is a possibility that it can be dealt with quickly, but if the date and time cannot be obtained due to the RTC abnormality, it depends on the RTC. There is a risk that it will not be possible to perform the production.

In order to solve the above-mentioned eighteenth problem, the game machine of Appendix 18 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 18 is
A real-time clock (for example, RTC) that can output time information,
A time information management means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1413) capable of acquiring time information from the real-time clock and updating the acquired time to the current time information.
An effect executing means (for example, host control circuit 2100) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, RTC effect) based on the current time information being specific time information (for example, a designated time).
An abnormality determining means for determining an abnormality of the real-time clock (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1414) and
With
The time information management means
When it is determined that the real-time clock is abnormal, the previous time information previously acquired by the time information management means is maintained as the current time information (for example, step S1415), and it is determined that the real-time clock is normal. Then, the previous time information can be updated to the current time information (for example, the process of step S1416).
The effect executing means is
The specific effect is executed on the condition that the current time information is the specific time information (YES in step S1417) and the previous time information and the current time information do not match (YES in step S1418). ) It is characterized by being configured as follows.

According to the game machine of the above (1), even if the RTC is abnormal, it is possible to preferably perform an effect depending on the RTC.

[11-19. Appendix 19-1 and Appendix 19-2]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins a prize at the starting port, and an effect image is displayed on a display device or the like based on the result of this lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, the big hit game is started.

As a game machine of this kind, there is known a game machine in which compressed image data is decoded, the decoded image data is appropriately converted, stored in a frame buffer, and output to a display device. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-87402 (see, for example, paragraph [0100])).

(19th issue)
In recent years, the variation of the effect image displayed on the display device has increased, and the control of the effect image tends to be complicated. In such a case, it is desired to efficiently control the effect image.

In order to solve the 19th problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 19-1 and the gaming machine of Appendix 19-2 having the following configurations are provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 19-1 is
A gaming machine capable of executing a process of switching between functions (for example, bank flip) between a drawing output destination buffer having a drawing function and a frame buffer having a display function.
A registration means (for example, a display control circuit 2300 capable of executing steps S1449 and S1458) capable of registering image information (for example, composition) related to an effect image displayed on a predetermined display means in the drawing output destination buffer). When,
After the drawing output destination buffer is switched to the frame buffer (for example, after the process of step S1446 is performed), the effect image is displayed on the predetermined display means based on the image information registered by the registration means. An effect image display control means (for example, display control circuit 2300) that controls the display, and
With
The registration means
When the image information registered in the frame buffer switched from the drawing output destination buffer includes image information for pausing the image (for example, when YES is determined in step S1447), the said. A first registration means (for example, a display control circuit 2300 that executes the process of step S1449) for registering image information in the drawing output destination buffer, and
Even if there is no image information registered in the drawing output destination buffer (for example, even if NO is determined in step S1444), the effect image displayed in the predetermined display means is registered in the frame buffer. When the upper limit of the image information is reached (for example, when YES is determined in step S1450), the second registration means (for example, step S1458) for registering the image information in the drawing output destination buffer can be executed. It is characterized by having a display control circuit 2300).

According to the game machine of (1) above, while the image information is registered on the condition that the image information is not registered, even if the image information is registered, it is specific to the registered image information. Since the image information is registered when the image information is included, it is possible to efficiently control the effect image.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 19-2 is
A plurality of display means (for example, a display) capable of reproducing a predetermined effect image, and
Display control means (for example, display control circuit 2300) capable of controlling image information related to the effect image reproduced by the plurality of display means, and
With
The display control means
A layer number determination means (for example, a display control circuit 2300 that executes the process of step S1441) for determining the appropriateness of the number of layers related to the image information simultaneously reproduced by the display means, and
When the number of layers is appropriate (for example, when YES is determined in step S1441), the number of display means determining means for determining the appropriateness of the number of display means used for reproducing the effect image (for example, step). The display control circuit 2300) that executes the processing of S1442 and
When the number of display means used for reproducing the effect image is appropriate (for example, when YES is determined in step S1442), there is a display means for determining the existence of the display means for which the image information is to be registered. A determination means (for example, a display control circuit 2300 that executes the process of step S1443) and
When there is a display means for which the image information is to be registered (for example, when YES is determined in step S1443), the image information registration means for registering the image information to be reproduced in the display means (for example, step S1449). And a display control circuit 2300) that executes the process of step S1458 and
After the image information to be reproduced in one of the plurality of display means is registered by the image information registration means, the image information is registered in another display means different from the one display means. It is characterized in that the determination by the display means number determination means and the determination by the display means existence determination means (the process of step S1459 is executed and then the process of returning to step S1442 is performed).

According to the game machine of (1) above, when there are a plurality of display means and the number of layers required for the image information is appropriate, the image information related to the effect image displayed on one display means is registered. Since the image information related to the effect image displayed on another display means different from one display means is registered, it is possible to efficiently register the image information determined to have an appropriate number of layers. Become.

As described above, according to the gaming machine of Appendix 19-1 and the gaming machine of Appendix 19-2, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of efficiently controlling the effect image.

[11-20. Appendix 20-1 and Appendix 20-2]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins a prize at the starting port, and based on the result of this lottery, an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display. In addition to such an effect image, a sound effect is also output.

As a game machine of this type, it is determined whether or not the timing for determining an abnormality of the digital amplifier has been reached. For example, when the operation determination timing determined at a time interval of about several seconds has been reached, the input port Pi2 is used. A gaming machine that acquires an abnormality notification signal ERR and determines whether or not the digital amplifier is at an abnormal level is known (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-209723 (for example, paragraphs [0178] and [0179])).

(20th issue)
In recent years, due to an increase in variations of production images displayed on liquid crystal displays and the like, the production content has become more sophisticated and the interest has been improved. However, with the sophistication of the production content, the production content of the game sound tends to be more sophisticated, and in order to output a normal game sound, it is necessary to appropriately perform the determination process of the amplification device that amplifies the game sound. There is.

In order to solve the twentieth problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 20-1 and the gaming machine of Appendix 20-2 having the following configurations are provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 20-1 is
A gaming machine capable of executing predetermined processing (for example, main processing, interrupt processing, etc.) every time a predetermined time elapses.
An output means capable of outputting game sounds (for example, a speaker 24) and
Amplifying means (for example, digital audio power amplifier 2620) capable of amplifying the game sound output from the output means, and
An abnormality determination means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes processing such as step S1503, step S1511, and step S1515) that performs abnormality determination processing as to whether or not the amplification hand is normal, and
With
The abnormality determination means is
The abnormality determination process can be divided into a plurality of times of abnormality determination processes (for example, processes of step S1503, step S1511, step S1515, etc.) and can be executed.
In the one predetermined process (for example, one frame) executed within the predetermined time, a part of the abnormality determination process (for example, step S1503, step S1511, step S1515) divided into the plurality of times is executed. It is characterized in that a part or all of the remaining abnormality determination processing can be executed in the predetermined processing from the next time onward.

According to the game machine of (1) above, a part of the abnormality determination process of the amplification means (for example, a normal amplifier or a deep bass amplifier) is performed over a plurality of frames within a predetermined process (for example, one frame). , It becomes possible to execute all of the abnormality determination processing of each amplification means over a plurality of frames.

(2) Another example of the gaming machine in Appendix 20-1 is
A gaming machine capable of executing predetermined processing (for example, main processing, interrupt processing, etc.) every time a predetermined time elapses.
An output means capable of outputting game sounds (for example, a speaker 24) and
Amplifying means (for example, digital audio power amplifier 2620) capable of amplifying the game sound output from the output means, and
The setting information confirmation means (for example, the host control circuit 2100 that executes the processing of steps S1506 to S507, steps S152 to S523, etc.) for confirming the setting information about the amplification means, and the setting information confirmation means.
With
The setting information confirmation means is
The confirmation process can be divided into a plurality of confirmation processes and can be executed.
A part of the confirmation process (for example, the host control circuit 2100 that executes the processes of steps S1506 to S507, steps S152 to S523, etc.) in the one predetermined process executed within the predetermined time. Is executed, and a part or all of the remaining confirmation processing can be executed in the predetermined processing from the next time onward.

According to the game machine of (2) above, a part of the confirmation process of the setting information of the amplification means (for example, a normal amplifier or a deep bass amplifier) is performed over a plurality of frames within a predetermined process (for example, one frame). Therefore, it is possible to execute the entire confirmation process of the setting information of each amplification means over a plurality of frames.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 20-2 is
A gaming machine capable of executing predetermined processing (for example, main processing, interrupt processing, etc.) every time a predetermined time elapses.
An output means capable of outputting game sounds (for example, a speaker 24) and
Amplifying means (for example, digital audio power amplifier 2620) capable of amplifying the game sound output from the output means, and
The abnormality determination process of whether or not the amplification means is normal can be executed by dividing it into a plurality of abnormality determination processes (for example, processing of check status = 0, 2, 3), and the plurality of abnormalities can be executed. An abnormality determination means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes processes such as step S1503, step S1511, and step S1515) that performs the determination process a plurality of times over the predetermined process.
A progress management means for managing the progress of the abnormality determination process (for example, a host control circuit 2100 for managing the check status) and
With
The progress management means
It is possible to determine whether or not one of the plurality of abnormality determination processes (for example, check status = 0, 2, 3 processes) is completed in one predetermined process.
The abnormality determination means is
When the one abnormality determination process (for example, the process of check status 0) is completed in the one predetermined process, another abnormality determination process different from the one abnormality determination process is performed in the next and subsequent predetermined processes (for example, after the next frame). When the abnormality determination process (for example, the process of check status 2) is executed and the abnormality determination process (for example, the process of check status 0) is not completed in the one predetermined process, in the next and subsequent predetermined processes. It is characterized in that the one abnormality determination process (for example, the process of check status 0) can be executed again.

According to the game machine of (1) above, a part of the abnormality determination process of the amplification means (for example, a normal amplifier or a deep bass amplifier) is performed over a plurality of frames within a predetermined process (for example, one frame). , It becomes possible to execute all of the abnormality determination processing of each amplification means over a plurality of frames. Moreover, when one abnormality determination process is not completed in one predetermined process (for example, one frame main process or interrupt process), the one abnormality determination is performed in the next or subsequent (for example, next frame or later) predetermined process. Since the processing is executed again, any abnormality determination processing will be executed until it is completed.

(2) Another example of the gaming machine in Appendix 20-2 is
A gaming machine capable of executing predetermined processing (for example, main processing, interrupt processing, etc.) every time a predetermined time elapses.
An output means capable of outputting game sounds (for example, a speaker 24) and
Amplifying means (for example, digital audio power amplifier 2620) capable of amplifying the game sound output from the output means, and
The confirmation process of the setting information about the amplification means can be executed by dividing it into a plurality of confirmation processes (for example, processes of check status = 1, 5), and the plurality of confirmation processes can be performed a plurality of times of the predetermined process. Setting information confirmation means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes processes such as steps S1506 to S507 and steps S152 to S523) and
A progress management means for managing the progress of the confirmation process of the setting information (for example, a host control circuit 2100 for managing the check status) and
With
The progress management means
It is possible to determine whether or not one of the plurality of confirmation processes (for example, check status = 1,5 processes) is completed in one predetermined process.
The setting information confirmation means is
When the one confirmation process (for example, the process of check status = 1) is completed in the one predetermined process, another confirmation process different from the one confirmation process (for example, check status = 1) in the next and subsequent predetermined processes. 5) is executed, and when the one confirmation process is not completed in the one predetermined process, the one confirmation process can be executed again in the next and subsequent predetermined processes. ..

According to the game machine of (2) above, a part of the confirmation process of the setting information of the amplification means (for example, a normal amplifier or a deep bass amplifier) is performed over a plurality of frames within a predetermined process (for example, one frame). Therefore, it is possible to execute the entire confirmation process of the setting information of each amplification means over a plurality of frames. Moreover, when one confirmation process is not completed in one predetermined process (for example, main process or interrupt process of one frame), the one confirmation process is performed in the next or later (for example, next frame or later) predetermined process. Since it is executed again, each confirmation process will be executed until it is completed.

As described above, according to the gaming machine of Appendix 20-1 and the gaming machine of Appendix 20-2, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately performing the determination process of the amplification device.

[11-21. Appendix 21-1 and Appendix 21-2]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins a prize at the starting port, and based on the result of this lottery, an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display. In addition to such an effect image, a game sound is also output from the speaker.

As a game machine of this type, a game machine that operates a simple access controller by writing a SAC number to a voice control register and outputs voice data such as game sounds from a voice memory is disclosed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-77971 (see).

(21st issue)
In recent years, as the variation of the production image has increased, the variation of the game sound has also increased. However, for example, when a plurality of game sounds overlap, the effect of the game sound may be halved.

In order to solve the 21st problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 21-1 and the gaming machine of Appendix 21-2 having the following configurations are provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 21-1 is
Setting means (for example, host control circuit 2100) that can assign and set sound information (for example, SAC number) related to game sound data to a channel, and
A sound output means (for example, a voice / LED control circuit) capable of outputting a game sound based on the sound information assigned to the channel, and
With
The setting means is
When allocating sound information to one channel, when a plurality of sound information is set to the one channel (for example, when it is determined to be YES in the process of step S1542),
When the plurality of sound information is specific sound information (for example, SHOT reproduction and LOOP reproduction chain reproduction), the sound information of any one of the plurality of sound information (for example, loop reproduction) is provided for at least a predetermined time. A first setting means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1544) for setting with a delay of (for example, one frame) or more, and
On condition that the plurality of sound information is non-specific sound information different from the specific sound information (for example, it is determined as NO in the process of step S1543), without delaying for the predetermined time or more (for example). For example, it is characterized by having a second setting means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the processing of step S1546 and step S1547) for setting the plurality of sound information (in the frame).

According to the game machine of (1) above, when a plurality of sound information is set in one channel, if the plurality of sound information is specific sound information, one of the sound information is delayed. Since it is set, it is possible to enjoy the sound effect by delaying (for example, the sound effect by muting). On the other hand, if the plurality of sound information is non-specific sound information, the plurality of sound information is set without delay, so that processing can be performed quickly. That is, by delaying or not delaying depending on the situation, it is possible to ensure the speed of processing while utilizing the game sound effect due to the delay.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
The specific sound information is
It includes at least the first sound information (for example, SHOT reproduction) that is reproduced only once and the second sound information (LOOP reproduction) that is reproduced multiple times.
The first setting means is
It is characterized in that the second sound information can be set with a delay of a predetermined time or more after the first sound information is set.

According to the game machine (2) above, since the first sound information to be reproduced only once is set and then delayed by a predetermined time or more, the second sound information to be reproduced multiple times is set. It is possible to prevent the first sound information, which is reproduced only once, from becoming difficult to hear.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 21-2 is
Setting means (for example, voice / LED control circuit) that can assign sound information (for example, SAC number) related to game sound data to a channel and set it,
A sound output means capable of outputting a game sound based on the sound information assigned to the channel, and
With
The setting means is
When allocating sound information to one channel, when a plurality of sound information is set to the one channel (for example, when it is determined to be YES in the process of step S1542),
When the plurality of sound information is specific sound information (for example, SHOT + loop chain reproduction), the sound information of any one of the plurality of sound information (for example, loop reproduction) is provided for at least a predetermined time (for example, loop reproduction). A first setting means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1544) for setting with a delay of one frame or more.
On condition that the plurality of sound information is non-specific sound information different from the specific sound information (for example, it is determined as NO in the process of step S1543), without delaying for the predetermined time or more (for example). For example, a second setting means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the processing of step S1546 or step S1547) for setting the plurality of sound information (in the frame), and
Have,
The second setting means is
When mute is set for all channels (for example, when YES is determined in the process of step S1545), sound information is set without overwriting the mute setting (for example, the process of step S1546 is performed). On the other hand, when the mute setting is not for all channels but for one channel (for example, when NO is determined in step S1545), the mute setting is overwritten and sound information is set (for example, step S1547). It is characterized by being configured so that it can be processed.

(1) According to the game machine of 1 above, when a plurality of sound information is set in one channel, if the plurality of sound information is specific sound information, one of the sound information is delayed. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the sound effect by delaying (for example, the sound effect by muting). On the other hand, if the plurality of sound information is non-specific sound information, the plurality of sound information is set without delay, so that processing can be performed quickly. That is, by delaying or not delaying depending on the situation, it is possible to ensure the speed of processing while utilizing the game sound effect due to the delay. Furthermore, when a plurality of sound information is non-specific sound information, when the mute setting is set for all channels, the sound information is set without overwriting the mute setting, and the sound information is set instead of the mute setting for all channels. When the mute setting for the channel is set, the mute setting is overwritten and the sound information is set, so that the sound information is set for the required time (for example, until the change display of the next special symbol is started when the change display of the special symbol ends. ) Can be secured.

As described above, according to the gaming machines of Appendix 21-1 and Appendix 21-2, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably outputting game sounds.

[11-22. Appendix 22 Game Machine]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins a prize at the starting port, and based on the result of this lottery, an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display. In addition to such an effect image, a game sound is also output from the speaker.

As this type of gaming machine, there is disclosed a gaming machine that outputs a sound that excites the game in conjunction with an effect image displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144066).

(22nd issue)
However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144066, the secondary volume is maintained at a fixed value and the volume of the effect sound is controlled by the primary volume. Therefore, in order to increase the variation in the volume of the effect sound. There is a limit.

In order to solve the 22nd problem, the game machine of Appendix 22 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 22 is
An output means (for example, a speaker 24) capable of outputting a predetermined game sound, and
Sound data setting means (for example, host control circuit 2100) capable of setting sound data (for example, voice data) related to the game sound output from the output means, and
A volume control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes a sound request) having a plurality of playback channels (for example, CH1 to CH31) and capable of controlling the volume output from the output means,
With
The volume control means
A first volume control means (for example,) capable of changing information related to volume for all of the plurality of playback channels based on a predetermined operation (for example, a hardware switch operation or a screen operation by a user). , Volume control 2810 by hardware switch, user volume control 2820 by volume setting screen, and host control circuit 2100) that executes debug volume control 2830 during debugging.
A second volume control means (for example, a first playback channel primary control 2840, a second playback channel primary control 2850, and a second playback channel primary control 2850,) capable of changing information related to the volume for each of the plurality of playback channels. The host control circuit 2100)) that executes the volume control 2860, 2870, 2880 incorporated in the voice data, and
It is configured so that the volume output from the output means can be changed by multiplying the information related to the volume by the first volume control means and the information related to the volume by the second volume control means. ,
The second volume control means
Volume control (first playback channel primary control 2840) that controls the information related to the volume to be changed when the predetermined operation is performed for each playback channel.
A volume that controls the output of information related to a certain volume (for example, an error sound or an alarm sound at the time of illegal activity) before and after the predetermined operation is performed for each playback channel. It is characterized in that the control (second reproduction channel primary control 2850) and the control (second reproduction channel primary control 2850) can be executed.

According to the game machine of (1) above, the game sound output from the output means is defined by multiplying the information related to the volume by the first volume control means and the information related to the volume by the second volume control means. Therefore, it is possible to give diversity to the volume of the game sound. Moreover, the second volume control means controls each reproduction channel so that even if a predetermined operation is performed, information related to a constant volume is output before and after the operation is performed. As a result, even if a predetermined operation is performed, it is possible to control the output of information related to a certain volume before and after the operation is performed only on a specific playback channel instead of the entire channel. ..

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
The first volume control means
The feature is that the information related to the volume can be controlled by the debug volume control at the time of debugging.

According to the game machine of (2) above, the game sound data used in the game can be used as it is at the time of debugging, and the work efficiency at the time of debugging can be improved.

Further, according to the gaming machine of Appendix 22, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of giving a variety of variations in the volume of the effect sound.

[11-23. Appendix 23-1 to Appendix 23-58]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins a prize at the starting port, and based on the result of this lottery, an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display. In addition to such an effect image, a game sound is also output from the speaker.

As a game machine of this type, a game machine capable of adjusting the volume of a game sound output from a speaker by a player's operation is disclosed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-229766).

(23rd issue)
However, if the volume of the game sound output from the speaker can be adjusted by operating the game sound, it may affect sounds that you do not want to change, such as error sounds and warning sounds. , Not preferable.

In order to solve the 23rd problem, the game machines of Appendix 23-1 to Appendix 23-5 having the following configurations are provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 23-1 is
A plurality of output means (for example, a speaker 24) capable of outputting a predetermined game sound, and
An operating means (for example, a volume setting screen) capable of controlling the volume output from the output means,
A sound control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes a sound request control process) capable of controlling the volume based on the operation of the operation means, and
With
The volume output from the output means is output by at least the first information (for example, the second reproduction channel primary control 2850) having constant volume information before and after the operation is performed even if the operation means is operated. (Voice signal) and second information (for example, a voice signal output by the first playback channel primary control 2840) having volume information changed based on the operation of the operating means. Being done
The plurality of output means include a dedicated output means (for example, a dedicated speaker) used for outputting a specific sound and a shared output means (for example, a shared speaker) used for outputting sounds other than the specific sound. And at least are included
The sound control means
Regarding the dedicated output means, even if the operation means is operated, the specific sound control means (for example, a step) capable of executing control to output the first information so that a constant volume is output before and after the operation is performed. The host control circuit 2100) that executes S1559 and
Regarding the shared output means, a non-specific sound control means (for example, a host that executes step S1558) that can execute control to output the second information so that the volume is changed based on the operation of the operation means. It is characterized by having a control circuit 2100).

According to the game machine of (1) above, with respect to the dedicated output means used for outputting a specific sound, a constant volume is output before and after the operation is performed even if an operator who can control the volume is operated. It is controlled to be done. That is, although the volume can be controlled, a constant volume is output without changing the volume before and after the operation of the operating means. Further, as for the shared output means used for outputting sounds other than specific sounds, the second information whose volume information is changed based on the operation of the operator who can control the volume is output. It becomes possible to preferably adjust the volume.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
The dedicated output means is a speaker for vibration.

According to the game machine of (2) above, it is possible to output a specific sound (for example, an error sound, a warning sound, etc.) from the vibration speaker at a constant volume.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above
When the power is turned on (for example, during various initialization processes of step S1201), the dedicated output setting means (for example, the process of step S1201) for setting which of the plurality of output means is to be the dedicated output means is executed. Host control circuit 2100)
The data related to the specific sound (for example, the voice data related to the specific sound specified by the SAC number) is characterized in that it is specified that the output destination of the specific sound is the dedicated output means. And.

According to the game machine of (3) above, when the power is turned on, the output destination of the data related to a specific sound is defined by the dedicated output means, so it is possible to set which output means is used as the dedicated output means. At the same time, since it is stipulated that the audio data related to a specific sound to which a constant volume is output is output from the dedicated output means, it is possible to enhance the versatility.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 23-2 is
An output means (for example, a speaker 24) capable of outputting a predetermined game sound, and
An operating means (for example, a volume setting screen) capable of controlling the volume output from the output means,
A sound control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes a sound request control process) having a plurality of playback channels and capable of controlling the volume based on the operation of the operation means.
With
The volume output from the output means is output by at least the first information (for example, the second reproduction channel primary control 2850) having constant volume information before and after the operation is performed even if the operation means is operated. (Voice signal) and second information (for example, a voice signal output by the first playback channel primary control 2840) having volume information changed based on the operation of the operating means. Being done
The plurality of playback channels include at least a dedicated channel used for outputting a specific sound and a shared channel used for outputting sounds other than the specific sound.
The sound control means
Regarding the dedicated channel, even if the operation means is operated, the specific sound control means (for example, step S1580) capable of executing control to output the first information so that a constant volume is output before and after the operation is performed. Host control circuit 2100) that executes
Regarding the shared channel, a non-specific sound control means (for example, a host control for executing step S1581) capable of executing control to output the second information so that the volume is changed based on the operation of the operation means. It is characterized by having a circuit 2100).

According to the game machine of (1) above, even if the operating means is operated for the dedicated channel used for outputting a specific sound, it is controlled so that a constant volume is output before and after the operation is performed. .. That is, although the volume can be controlled, constant volume information is output without changing the volume before and after the operation of the operating means. In addition, for shared channels used to output sounds other than specific sounds, it is preferable to adjust the volume because the volume is controlled so that it is changed based on the operation of the operator who can control the volume. It becomes possible to do it.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
When the power is turned on, a dedicated channel (for example, CH31, CH32) used for outputting the specific sound and a shared channel (for example, CH1 to CH30) used for outputting sounds other than the specific sound are set. Channel setting means (for example, host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1201) and
Sound information registration means (for example, a host for registering a SAC number) for registering sound information (for example, SAC number) related to data of the specific sound and sounds other than the specific sound to the dedicated channel or the shared channel. Control circuit 2100) and
It is characterized by further providing.

According to the game machine (2) above, when the power is turned on, a dedicated channel used for outputting a specific sound and a shared channel used for outputting sounds other than the specific sound are set and specified. Since the sound information related to the data of the sound of and the sound other than the specific sound is registered in each channel, it is possible to enhance the versatility.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 23-3 is
An output means (for example, a speaker 24) capable of outputting a predetermined game sound, and
An operating means (for example, a volume setting screen) capable of controlling the volume output from the output means,
A sound control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes a sound request control process) having a playback channel and capable of controlling the volume based on the operation of the operation means.
With
The volume output from the output means is output by at least the first information (for example, the second reproduction channel primary control 2850) having constant volume information before and after the operation is performed even if the operation means is operated. (Voice signal) and second information (for example, a voice signal output by the first playback channel primary control 2840) having volume information changed based on the operation of the operating means. Being done
The sound control means
A data determination means for determining whether or not the game sound data being reproduced on the reproduction channel is the specific data of the specific sound (for example, the host control circuit 2100 that executes step S1599).
When the data discriminating means determines that the data of the game sound being played on the playback channel is the specific data, a constant volume is output before and after the operation even if the operating means is operated. A specific sound control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes step S1600) capable of executing control for outputting the first information, and
When the data discriminating means determines that the data of the game sound being played on the playback channel is non-specific data, the second information is changed so that the volume is changed based on the operation of the operating means. It is characterized by having a non-specific sound control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes step S1601) capable of executing output control.

According to the game machine of (1) above, when it is determined that the data of the game sound being played is specific data, a constant volume is output before and after the operation is performed even if the operation means is operated. When it is determined that the game sound data being played is non-specific data, the volume is controlled to be changed based on the operation of the operating means, so the volume can be adjusted. It becomes possible to carry out suitably.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 23-4 is
An output means (for example, a speaker 24) capable of outputting a predetermined game sound, and
An operating means (for example, a volume setting screen) capable of controlling the volume output from the output means,
A sound control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes a sound request control process) having a playback channel and capable of controlling the volume based on the operation of the operation means.
With
The volume output from the output means is output by at least the first information (for example, the second reproduction channel primary control 2850) having constant volume information before and after the operation is performed even if the operation means is operated. (Voice signal) and second information (for example, a voice signal output by the first playback channel primary control 2840) having volume information changed based on the operation of the operating means. Being done
The sound control means
When the sound information (for example, SAC number) corresponding to the sound output reproduced in the reproduction channel is specific sound information, a constant volume is output before and after the operation is performed even if the operation means is operated. The specific sound control means (for example, the host control circuit 2100 that executes step S1621) capable of setting the first information in the reproduction channel, and
When the sound information (for example, SAC number) corresponding to the game sound reproduced on the reproduction channel is non-specific sound information, the reproduction is performed so that the volume is changed based on the operation of the operation means. It is characterized by having a non-specific sound control means capable of setting the second information in a channel (for example, a host control circuit 2100 for executing step S1623).

According to the game machine of (1) above, if the sound information (for example, SAC number) corresponding to the sound output reproduced on the reproduction channel is specific sound information, a constant volume is produced even if the operating means is operated. If the sound information (for example, SAC number) corresponding to the game sound played on the playback channel is non-specific sound information while being controlled to be output, the volume will be increased based on the operation of the operating means. Since it is changed, it becomes possible to preferably adjust the volume.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 23-5 is
An output means (for example, a speaker 24) capable of outputting a predetermined game sound, and
An operating means (for example, a volume setting screen) capable of controlling the volume output from the output means,
A sound control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes a sound request control process) having a playback channel and capable of controlling the volume based on the operation of the operation means.
With
The volume output from the output means is output by at least the first information (for example, the second reproduction channel primary control 285) having constant volume information before and after the operation is performed even if the operation means is operated. The audio signal to be generated), the second information having the information of the volume changed based on the operation of the operating means (for example, the audio signal output by the primary control 2840 of the first reproduction channel), and the above. Third information having volume information incorporated in the sound data specified from the sound information registered in the reproduction channel (for example, an audio signal output by the volume control 2860, 2870, 2880 incorporated in the audio data. ) And
The sound control means
When the sound data specified from the sound information (for example, SAC number) registered in the reproduction channel is specific sound data (for example, sound data that is not affected by the volume adjustment), the specific sound data is used. With identification information setting means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1632) that presets identification information (for example, a flag indicating whether or not each channel is affected by volume adjustment) that can be identified as being present. ,
When setting the volume of the playback channel, when the sound data specified from the sound information (for example, SAC number) can be identified as the specific sound data by the identification information (for example, YES in step S1637). (When), even if the operating means is operated, the first volume setting means (for example, a step) capable of setting the first information to the playback channel so that a constant volume is output before and after the operation is performed. A host control circuit 2100) capable of executing the processing of S1641 and
When setting the volume of the playback channel, when the sound data specified from the sound information can be identified by the identification information if it is not the specific sound data (for example, when it is determined as NO in step S1637), the operation. A second volume setting means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 capable of executing the process of step S1638) capable of setting the second information to the reproduction channel so that the volume is changed based on the operation of the means.
When setting the volume in the reproduction channel, it is characterized by having a third volume setting means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 capable of executing the process of step S1644) for setting the third information in the reproduction channel.

According to the game machine of (1) above, identification information that can identify that the sound data specified from the sound information registered in the playback channel is specific sound data is set in advance, and is specified from the sound information. When the sound information can be identified as specific sound data by the identification information, it is set so that a constant volume is output even if the operating means is operated. In addition, the volume is set to be changed based on the sound data specified from the sound information registered in the playback channel. Further, the third information having the volume information incorporated in the sound data specified from the sound information registered in the reproduction channel is set in the reproduction channel. In this way, it is possible to preferably adjust the volume.

In the above-mentioned game machine, when the sound data specified from the sound information (for example, SAC number) registered in the reproduction channel can be identified as the specific sound data by the identification information (for example, YES in step S1637). (When determined), even if the operating means is operated, a constant volume is output before and after the operation is performed, but the constant volume in this case is always information related to the maximum volume. Is also good. However, even if the sound data specified from the sound information registered in the playback channel is specific sound data (first information related to a certain volume), the sound information registered in the playback channel (for example, SAC number). The output volume may not be constant because it is multiplied by the volume embedded in the sound data specified from).

As described above, according to each of the gaming machines of Appendix 23-1 to Appendix 23-5, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably adjusting the volume.

[11-24. Appendix 24 Game Machine]
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game in which a light emitting means composed of a light emitting body such as an LED is provided on the front side of the game machine and the light emitting means is turned on or blinks in a predetermined mode is known. ing.

As this type of gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine in which the brightness of the light emitting means can be adjusted by, for example, an operation by a player or the like (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295551).

(24th issue)
According to the gaming machine described in JP-A-2008-295551, the brightness of the light emitting means can be challenged by an operation by a player or the like, but when the light emitting means can emit light in full color, it emits light when the brightness is changed. Even the color may change significantly.

In order to solve the above-mentioned twenty-fourth problem, the game machine of Appendix 24 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 24 is
With a predetermined light emitting means (for example, lamp (LED) group 25),
An operating means that can be operated so that the brightness of the light emitting means can be selected (for example, a brightness setting screen displayed on a liquid crystal display device used as the display device 16).
A storage means (for example, an attenuation table) that stores a luminance information table (for example, a attenuation table) in which luminance information is set for each of a plurality of colors (for example, RGB) as luminance information (for example, luminance attenuation factor) related to the luminance of the light emitting means. Sub-main ROM 2050) and
When the luminance is selected by the operating means, the luminance control means (for example, the host control circuit 2100) capable of controlling the luminance of the light emitting means based on the luminance information table
With
The storage means
A luminance information table in which the luminance information is set for each of the plurality of colors is stored according to the luminance that can be selected by the operating means.
The brightness control means is
Based on the luminance information table corresponding to the luminance selected by the operating means, the luminance of the light emitting means can be controlled so that the attenuation rate of blue is the largest and the attenuation rate of red is the smallest among the plurality of colors. It is characterized by being configured in.

According to the game machine of (1) above, the light emitting means is used so that the blue attenuation factor is the largest and the red attenuation factor is the smallest among the plurality of colors based on the luminance information set for each of the plurality of colors. Since the light emission is controlled, for example, even if the brightness of the light emitting means is changed by an operation of a player or the like, it is possible to suppress the change in the light emitting color, that is, to maintain the white balance.

As described above, according to the game machine of the above (1), it is possible to provide a game machine capable of changing the brightness while suppressing the change of the emission color.

[11-25. Appendix 25 Game Machine]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins a prize at the starting port, and based on the result of this lottery, an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display.

As a game machine of this type, a game machine in which a movable body is arranged on a game board and the movable body is operated to give an impact to the player and increase the motivation for the game has been proposed. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-288649).

(25th issue)
For example, in a gaming machine in which a movable body is operated as in JP-A-2006-288649, the movement of the movable body has been diversified in recent years, and the control for operating the movable body has become complicated accordingly. Therefore, in recent years, there has been a demand for a gaming machine capable of suppressing a control load while giving diversity to the movement of a movable body.

In order to solve the 21st problem, the game machine of Appendix 25 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 25 is
With the prescribed character
A control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100) capable of controlling the operation of the predetermined accessory and
An operating member (for example, a solenoid) capable of operating a member constituting the accessory, and
With multiple light emitting means (eg, LEDs),
A plurality of connection portions (for example, Port0 to Port23) capable of transmitting a signal to the connected light emitting means by being connected to any of the plurality of light emitting means.
A light emitting control means (for example, a voice / LED control circuit 2200) capable of controlling the light emitting means by transmitting a signal to the light emitting means through the connecting portion.
With
The operating member
It is connected to any one of the plurality of connecting portions, and is configured to be able to operate a member constituting the accessory by a signal from the light emitting control means.
The control means
It is characterized in that the operating member connected to any one of the plurality of connecting portions can be operated in synchronization with the predetermined accessory.

According to the game machine of (1) above, even if the number of operating members increases due to the diversification of the movement of the accessory, the control for operating the accessory while maintaining the diversity of the movement of the accessory. It is possible to suppress the load and synchronize the accessory and the operating member.

As described above, according to the gaming machine of the above (1), it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a control load.

[11-26. Appendix 26 Game Machine]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins a prize at the starting port, and based on the result of this lottery, an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display.

As this type of gaming machine, image data to be read from a CGROM that stores compressed data of still images and moving images displayed on the liquid crystal display, decompress the read compressed data, and output to the liquid crystal display. Is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-159026).

(26th issue)
However, as described in JP-A-2016-159026, for example, when the compressed data is read from the CGROM and the image data to be output is generated, if the amount of data is large, the loading process takes time. .. In this case, the watchdog reset may be applied even though the load process is proceeding normally, which is not preferable.

In order to solve the above-mentioned 26th problem, the game machine of Appendix 26 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 26 is
A read-only storage area (for example, sub-main ROM 2050 or CGROM 2060) in which game data related to the game is stored, and
A volatile storage area (for example, SRAM 2100b or built-in VRAM 2370) that can read and write game data related to the game, and
A transfer execution means for executing a load process of reading the game data stored in the read-only storage area and writing the game data to the volatile storage area (for example, a host control circuit 2100 for executing the data load process of FIG. 93).
Watchdog timer and
A clearing means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 having a CPU processor) that clears the clock of the watchdog timer after a lapse of a predetermined time, and
With
The transfer executing means is
It is characterized by having a load reprocessing means (host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1656) that resets the watchdog timer and executes the load process again when the load process exceeds a predetermined time.

According to the game machine of (1) above, when the time required for the load process by the transfer executing means exceeds a predetermined upper limit value, the load process is terminated and the load process is executed again. Even if it takes time, it is possible to automatically recover.

As described above, according to the gaming machine of Appendix 26, even when the loading process takes time, the loading process can be suitably advanced.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
The clearing means
When the load process does not exceed the predetermined time, the watchdog timer is cleared (for example, the process of step S1655), and only when the load process exceeds the predetermined time, the watchdog timer is clocked. It is configured so that error processing (for example, processing in step S1656) is executed without clearing.
The transfer executing means is
It is characterized in that the load process is executed again as the error process.

According to the game machine (2) above, the watchdog timer is cleared when the load process does not exceed the predetermined time, but the watchdog timer is not cleared only when the load process exceeds the predetermined time. Since the error processing is executed in, it is possible to grasp that the loading processing could not be completed due to the occurrence of the error.

[11-27. Appendix 27-1 and Appendix 27-2]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins a prize at the starting port, and a big hit game is performed when the result of the lottery is a big hit. Further, for example, a liquid crystal display for displaying the effect image is provided, and the effect image determined by lottery is displayed on the liquid crystal display.

In this type of gaming machine, lottery is performed in various situations, and such lottery is performed by generating and acquiring random numbers. For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-023629, the number of digits of a newly acquired random number value is determined, one digit is calculated from the reference random number value by the determined number of digits, and the calculated value is used as each digit. It describes how to place and get new numbers.

(27th issue)
In the random number acquisition process for acquiring random numbers, it is required that the acquired random numbers are less likely to have regularity. However, if the processing is complicated, the control load becomes large, which is not preferable. Therefore, it is preferable to perform a random number acquisition process in which regularity is unlikely to occur while suppressing an increase in the control load.

In order to solve the 27th problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 27-1 and the gaming machine of Appendix 27-2 having the following configurations are provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 27-1 is
It is a game machine that draws lots using a predetermined random number.
A real-time clock (for example, RTC) that can output time information,
A random number generating means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the processes of FIGS. 95 and 96) for generating a random number used in a predetermined lottery, and
With
The random number generating means
An initialization means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes a random number initialization process) that acquires time information from the real-time clock and generates an initial value of a random number using the acquired time information.
A non-stationary update means (host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of FIG. 96) that updates the random number when the generated random number is used in the lottery, and
A steady-state update means (host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of FIG. 95) that periodically updates the random numbers even if the generated random numbers are not used in the lottery.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine of (1) above, since the initial value of the random number is generated using the time information acquired from the real-time clock, the acquired random number can be randomized and is biased to the acquired random number. Can be suppressed. In particular, since the initial value of the random number is involved in the time when the power is turned on in units of minutes and seconds, it is possible to make the initial value different each time.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 27-2 is
It is a game machine that draws lots using a predetermined random number.
A random number table creating means (for example, step S1704) for creating a random number table in which a plurality of random numbers are registered by using one of a plurality of random number seeds (for example, random number seeds a to h) is executed. Host control circuit 2100) and
Random number acquisition means for acquiring random numbers to be used in a predetermined lottery with reference to the random number table created by the random number table creation means (for example, in the random number acquisition process of step S1706, from the random number table created in step S1704). Host control circuit 2100) that acquires random numbers and
Reference position updating means for updating the reference position of the random number table at a timing different from the timing at which the random number table is created (in step S1706, a host control circuit that updates the reference position of the random number table when a random number is acquired from the random number table. 2100) and
With
The random number acquisition means
After acquiring a random number by referring to the random number table, it is possible to acquire a random number to be subjected to the predetermined lottery by referring to the same random number table whose reference position has been updated without creating the random number table (for example). It is characterized in that it is configured in the packet reception loop of FIG. 98 and the random number acquisition process of step S1706 can be executed).

According to the game machine of (1) above, even if there are a plurality of random number acquisition opportunities, the random numbers are acquired because the reference position is only updated using the same random number table already created and the random numbers are acquired. It is possible to reduce the control load while giving irregularities to random numbers.

As described above, according to the gaming machine of Appendix 27-1 and the gaming machine of Appendix 27-2, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of performing processing in which regularity is unlikely to occur while suppressing an increase in the control load. ..

[11-28. Appendix 28 Game Machine]
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a variable display of a symbol is displayed in a display area based on the result of the lottery. Then, when this symbol stops at a specific combination, it shifts to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. In addition, when the variable display of the design is performed, various effects are performed.

As a game machine of this kind, a game machine that performs an effect using a movable accessory driven by a motor is known. Then, in a game machine that performs an effect using such a movable accessory, a process for returning the movable accessory to the initial position (retry process) when a problem such as the movable accessory not returning to the initial position occurs. ) Has been proposed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-268038).

In the gaming machine described in JP-A-2007-268038, a reference position sensor for detecting whether or not a movable accessory is present at an operation reference position (initial position) is provided, and based on the detection result of the reference position sensor. Retry processing is in progress. Then, when a problem such as the movable accessory not returning to the initial position occurs, if the movable accessory does not return to the initial position even if the retry processing is continuously performed, an error is determined and a predetermined error is determined. The process is being executed.

(28th issue)
However, as a defect related to the operation of the movable accessory, there is also a minor error that is resolved when the variable display of the symbol is executed a plurality of times. If it is determined that an error occurs even when such a minor error occurs, there is a problem that unnecessary error processing increases.

In order to solve the 28th problem, the game machine of Appendix 28 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 28 is
A game control means (for example, a game control means capable of executing one game by starting the variable display of a symbol (for example, a special symbol) when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and stopping the variable display of the symbol when a predetermined end condition is satisfied. For example, the main CPU 101) of the main control circuit 100 and
An effect control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 having a CPU processor) capable of executing control related to the operation of a movable member (for example, a accessory group 1000 or the like), and
With
The game control means
At least, the start information of the variation display of the symbol and the stop information of the variation display of the symbol can be transmitted to the effect control means (for example, the main CPU 101 can execute the process of step S55).
The effect control means
A first determination means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S19141) for determining whether or not the state related to the operation of the movable member is normal at the timing when the variation display of the symbol is started.
If it is determined in the determination by the first determination means that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal, the first restoration process (for example, the initial position restoration operation transition setting in step S19147) can be executed so as to be normalized. First recovery control means (for example, the host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S19147) and
A second determination means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S19171) for determining whether or not the state related to the operation of the movable member is normal at the timing when the variation display of the symbol is stopped.
If it is determined in the determination by the second determination means that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal, the second restoration process (for example, the motor driver reset process in step S19176) can be executed so as to be normalized. It has two recovery control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S19176).
The first determination means is
In a plurality of games, it is possible to determine whether or not the state related to the operation of the predetermined accessory or the movable member is normal at the timing when the variation display of the symbol is started.
The first recovery control means
The first recovery process can be executed each time the first determination means determines that the game is not normal in the plurality of games.
The second determination means is
In a plurality of games, it is possible to determine whether or not the state related to the operation of the predetermined accessory or the movable member is normal at the timing when the variation display of the symbol is stopped.
The second recovery control means
The second recovery process can be executed each time the second determination means determines that the game is not normal in the plurality of games.
The effect control means further
A first counting means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S19144) that counts the number of times the first recovery process is executed by the first recovery control means.
A second counting means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S19177) that counts the number of times the second recovery process is executed by the second recovery control means.
The result of counting by the first counting means is the first specified number of times (for example, 10 times), and the result of counting by the second counting means is the second specified number of times (for example, 10 times). When at least one of the above is satisfied, the movable member has an inoperable means (for example, the host control circuit 2100) that makes the movable member inoperable (for example, an error motor operation stopped state). It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine of the above (1), if it is determined by the first determination means that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal, the operation is not disabled, and the first restoration process is performed. Similarly, if the second determination means determines that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal, the operation is not disabled, and the second restoration process is performed. Then, when the number of games in which the first recovery process is executed reaches the first specified number of times, or when the number of games in which the first recovery process is executed reaches the first specified number of times, the movable member is moved. It is in an inoperable state. Therefore, it does not become an inoperable state even if a minor error occurs, but it is made into an inoperable state when the first recovery process or the second recovery process is executed over a plurality of games but cannot be recovered. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of serious errors.

Moreover, whether or not the state related to the operation of the movable member is normal is determined at each of the timing at which the variation display of the symbol is started and the timing at which the variation display of the symbol is stopped. Then, the number of games in which the recovery process and the recovery process are executed is counted separately at the timing when the symbol variation display is started and the timing when the symbol variation display is stopped, and the number of times the recovery process is executed. However, when the specified number of times is reached, the operation is disabled, so that the occurrence of a serious error can be further suppressed.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
A position detecting means (for example, accessory detection sensor group 1002) capable of detecting the presence of the movable member at a specific position (for example, an initial position), and
A driving means capable of operating the movable member from the specific position toward a specified position (for example, the maximum range of motion), and
With more
The first determination means is
When the movable member does not exist at least at the specific position, it is determined that the movement is not normal.
The second determination means is
It is characterized in that it is determined that the movable member is not normal when the movable member cannot be operated from the specific position toward at least the specified position (for example, when a motor error is detected) by the driving means.

According to the game machine of (2) above, it is determined whether or not the state related to the operation of the movable member, which is performed at the timing when the fluctuation display of the symbol is started, and the timing when the fluctuation display of the symbol is stopped. Since the determination as to whether or not the state related to the operation of the movable member is normal is performed from different viewpoints, the accuracy of the error occurrence determination can be improved. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of serious errors with higher accuracy while avoiding the inoperability state even if a minor error occurs.

As described above, according to Appendix 28, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of suitably performing error processing.

[11-29. Each game machine of Appendix 29-1 to Appendix 29-3]
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a variable display of a symbol is displayed in a display area based on the result of the lottery. Then, when this symbol stops at a specific combination, it shifts to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. In addition, when the variable display of the design is performed, various effects are performed.

As a game machine of this kind, a game machine that performs an effect using a movable accessory driven by a motor is known. Then, in a game machine that performs an effect using such a movable accessory, a process for returning the movable accessory to the initial position (retry process) when a problem such as the movable accessory not returning to the initial position occurs. ) Has been proposed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-268038).

In the gaming machine described in JP-A-2007-268038, a reference position sensor for detecting whether or not a movable accessory is present at an operation reference position (initial position) is provided, and based on the detection result of the reference position sensor. Retry processing is in progress. Then, when a problem such as the movable accessory not returning to the initial position occurs, if the movable accessory does not return to the initial position even if the retry processing is continuously performed, an error is determined and a predetermined error is determined. The process is being executed.

(29th issue)
However, as a defect related to the operation of the movable accessory, there is also a minor error that is resolved when the variable display of the symbol is executed a plurality of times. If it is determined that the error is even in the case of such a minor error, unnecessary error processing will increase, which is not appropriate. On the other hand, the production using the movable accessory is an important factor in enhancing the interest of the game, so if the game is played on the game machine in which the error related to the operation of the movable accessory occurs, the decrease in the interest is denied. Absent. Therefore, it is preferable that the gaming machine in which the movable accessory cannot operate normally is managed by an authorized hall-related person, including the determination of whether to continue or stop the operation.

In order to solve the 29th problem, the game machines of Appendix 29-1 to the game machines of Appendix 229-3 having the following configurations are provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 29-1 is
It is possible to execute control related to the progress of the game based on any one of a plurality of set values, and when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, a variable display of a symbol (for example, a special symbol) is started, and a predetermined start condition is established. When the end condition is satisfied, the game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100) capable of executing one game by stopping the variable display of the symbol, and
At least the setting operation means (for example, the setting key 328) operated when changing the one setting value, and
An effect control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 having a CPU processor) capable of executing control related to the operation of a movable member, and
When the power-on operation is performed, the power supply means (for example, the power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the game control means and the effect control means, and
With
The game control means
When the power-on operation is performed while at least the setting operation means is operated, the setting change state control means (for example, in step S24) for controlling the setting change state in which the one setting value can be changed. It has a main CPU 101) capable of executing processing, and can transmit various information (for example, information related to the progress of the game, setting change information indicating that one set value has been changed) to the effect control means. Yes (for example, the main CPU 101 can execute the process of step S55).
The effect control means
A determination means for determining whether or not the state related to the operation of the movable member is normal at a predetermined timing in the one game (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the processes of steps S19141 and S19147).
If it is determined that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal in the determination by the determination means, the restoration process (for example, the initial position restoration operation transition setting in step S19147 and the motor driver reset process in step S19176) is performed so as to be normalized. ) With a recovery control means (eg, host control circuit 2100) that can execute
And can receive various information transmitted from the game control means.
The determination means
In a plurality of games, it is possible to determine whether or not the state related to the operation of the movable member is normal at a predetermined timing in each game.
The recovery control means
The recovery process can be executed each time the determination means determines that the game is not normal in the plurality of games.
The effect control means further
A counting means for counting the number of times the recovery process is executed by the recovery control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S19144 or step S19177).
When the result of counting by the counting means reaches a specified number of times (for example, 10 times), the accessory inoperable means (for example, an error motor operation stop state) in which the movable member cannot be operated is set. The host control circuit 2100) that executes the processing of steps S19146 and S19179, and
Based on the reception of the setting change information indicating that the one set value has been changed, the release means for canceling the inoperable state by the accessory inoperable means (for example, the process of step S311 is executed). It is characterized by having a host control circuit (2100) and a host control circuit (2100).

According to the game machine according to the above (1), if the determination means determines that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal, the operation is not disabled and the restoration process is performed. Then, when the number of times the restoration process is executed reaches the specified number of times, the movable member is in an inoperable state. Therefore, even if a minor error occurs, it does not become an inoperable state, but when the recovery process cannot be recovered even though it has been executed over multiple games, it becomes an inoperable state, and a serious error occurs. Can be suppressed.

By the way, since the production using the movable member is an important factor for enhancing the interest of the game, it is undeniable that the interest is lowered when the game is played by the game machine in which the movable member cannot operate normally. Therefore, in the game machine of (1) above, the movable member operates by making it possible to cancel the inoperable state based on the reception of the setting change information indicating that one setting value has been changed. Important decisions such as whether or not to operate the game machine that can no longer be operated can be made by an authorized hall-related person, and the error motor operation stopped state cannot be canceled by an unauthorized person.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
A position detecting means (for example, accessory detection sensor group 1002) capable of detecting the presence of the movable member at a specific position (for example, an initial position) is further provided.
The determination means
It has a position determining means for determining that the movable member is not normal when it is not present at least at the specific position.
The recovery control means
Each time the position determination means determines that the movable member does not exist at the specific position, a position restoration process for returning the movable member to the specific position (for example, initial position restoration operation transition setting in step S19147) is executed. The position recovery control means means (for example, the host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S19147) is provided.
The release means is
Based on the receipt of the setting change information indicating that the change of the one set value has been performed, the number of times the position restoration process counted by the counting means is executed is reset (for example, in step S323). processing)
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine (2) above, this position restoration process is performed when the position restoration process for returning the movable member to a specific position is executed once or more even if it is not in an inoperable state. Can be reset based on the receipt of setting change information indicating that one setting value has been changed. Therefore, the resetting of the number of times the position restoration process is executed is also performed by an authorized hall-related person, and is not performed by an unauthorized person, so that the game machine can be appropriately managed.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
Further, a driving means (for example, a motor for operating the accessory group 1000) capable of operating the movable member from a specific position (for example, an initial position) to a specified position (for example, a maximum operating range) is further provided. Prepare,
The determination means
When the movable member cannot be operated from the specific position toward at least the specified position by the driving means (for example, when a motor error is detected), an operation determining means (for example, when a motor error is detected) is determined to be abnormal. It has a host control circuit 2100) that executes the process of step S19171.
The recovery control means
Operation recovery control for executing an operation recovery process (for example, a motor driver reset process in step S19176) for resetting the driver of the drive means each time the operation determination means determines that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal. Having means (eg, host control circuit 2100)
The release means is
Based on the reception of the setting change information indicating that the change of the one set value has been performed, the number of times the operation recovery process counted by the counting means is executed is reset (for example, in step S323). processing)
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine of (3) above, even if the operation is not inoperable, the operation recovery process is performed when the operation recovery process for resetting the driver of the driving means is executed once or more. The number of executions can be reset based on the receipt of setting change information indicating that one setting value has been changed. Therefore, the reset of the number of times the operation recovery process is executed is also performed by an authorized hall-related person and is not performed by an unauthorized person, so that the game machine can be appropriately managed.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 29-2 is
It has a storage means (for example, main ROM 102) that can execute control related to the progress of the game based on the set value of any one of the plurality of set values and can store the game information related to the progress of the game. A game control means (for example, a game control means capable of executing one game by starting the variable display of a symbol (for example, a special symbol) when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and stopping the variable display of the symbol when a predetermined end condition is satisfied. For example, the main CPU 101) of the main control circuit 100 and
At least the setting operation means (for example, the setting key 328) operated when changing the one setting value, and
At least a specific operating means (for example, a backup clear switch 330) operated when erasing the game information stored in the storage means, and
An effect control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 having a CPU processor) capable of executing control related to the operation of a movable member, and
When the power-on operation is performed, the power supply means (for example, the power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the game control means and the effect control means, and
With
The game control means
When the operation of the specific operation means and the power-on operation are performed while the setting operation means is operated, the setting change state control for controlling the setting change state in which the one setting value can be changed is performed. Means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) and
When at least the operation of the specific operating means and the power-on operation are performed, the game information erasing means (for example, the process of step S2420) capable of erasing the game information stored in the storage means can be executed. Main CPU101) and
And various information (for example, information related to the progress of the game, setting change information indicating that one set value has been changed, information indicating that the game information has been deleted) is used as the effect control means. It can be transmitted (for example, the main CPU 101 can execute the process of step S55).
The effect control means
A determination means for determining whether or not the state related to the operation of the movable member is normal at a predetermined timing in the one game (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the processes of steps S19141 and S19147).
If it is determined that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal in the determination by the determination means, the restoration process (for example, the initial position restoration operation transition setting in step S19147 and the motor driver reset process in step S19176) is performed so as to be normalized. ) With a recovery control means (eg, host control circuit 2100) capable of executing.
The determination means
In a plurality of games, it is possible to determine whether or not the state related to the operation of the movable member is normal at a predetermined timing in each game.
The recovery control means
The recovery process can be executed each time the determination means determines that the game is not normal in the plurality of games.
The effect control means further
A counting means for counting the number of times the recovery process is executed by the recovery control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S191444 or step S19177).
When the result of counting by the counting means reaches a specified number of times (for example, 10 times), the accessory inoperable means (for example, an error motor operation stop state) in which the movable member cannot be operated is set. The host control circuit 2100) that executes the processing of steps S19146 and S19179, and
It has a release means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S311) for releasing the inoperable state by the accessory inoperable means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.
The release means is
When the setting change state is not controlled after the power is turned on, even if the operation of erasing the game information stored in the storage means is performed, the inoperable state by the accessory inoperable means is not released. It is characterized in that, when the setting change state is controlled after the power is turned on, the inoperable state by the accessory inoperable means is released (for example, the process of step S311 is executed).

According to the game machine according to the above (1), if the determination means determines that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal, the operation is not disabled and the restoration process is performed. Then, when the number of times the restoration process is executed reaches the specified number of times, the movable member is in an inoperable state. Therefore, even if a minor error occurs, it does not become an inoperable state, but when the recovery process cannot be recovered even though it has been executed over multiple games, it becomes an inoperable state, and a serious error occurs. Can be suppressed.

By the way, since the production using the movable member is an important factor for enhancing the interest of the game, it is undeniable that the interest is lowered when the game is played by the game machine in which the movable member cannot operate normally. Therefore, in the game machine of the above (1), when the setting change state is not controlled, the inoperable state is not released even if the operation of erasing the game information stored in the storage means is performed, and the setting is made. The inoperable state is released when it is controlled to the changed state. As a result, important decisions such as whether or not to operate the game machine in which the movable member cannot operate can be made by an authorized hall-related person, and the error motor operation stopped state cannot be canceled by an unauthorized person. Can be done.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
Further provided with a driving means (for example, a motor for operating the accessory group 1000) capable of operating the movable member from the specific position to a specified position.
The determination means
When the movable member cannot be operated from the specific position toward at least the specified position by the driving means (for example, when a motor error is detected), an operation determining means (for example, when a motor error is detected) is determined to be abnormal. It has a host control circuit 2100) that executes the process of step S19171.
The recovery control means
Even if the determination means determines that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal, the operation is not disabled until the result of counting by the counting means reaches a specified number of times (for example, 10 times). It has a character effect disapproval means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S19180) that makes the character effect disapproval state so that the effect using the movable member cannot be executed.
The release means is
When the setting change state is not controlled after the power is turned on, even if the operation of erasing the game information stored in the storage means is performed, the inoperable state by the accessory inoperable means is not released. It is characterized in that the state in which the character production is not permitted by the character production disapproval means can be canceled.

According to the game machine (2) above, even if it is determined that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal, the operation is not possible until the number of times the recovery process is executed reaches the specified number of times (for example, 10 times). The character production is not permitted so that the production using the movable member cannot be performed without setting the state. Then, even if the operation of erasing the game information stored in the storage means is performed when the setting change state is not controlled after the power is turned on, the inoperable state is not released, but the character production is not permitted. I am trying to cancel. As a result, important decisions can be made by authorized hall personnel, and when the error is not so serious as to be inoperable, such as when the character production is not permitted, the game information is deleted. Convenience can be ensured by canceling the production disapproval state.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 29-3 is
It is possible to execute control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the symbol variation display is started, and when the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the above-mentioned A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100) capable of executing one game by stopping the variable display of the symbol, and
At least the setting operation means (for example, the setting key 328) operated when changing the one setting value, and
A display means (for example, a display device 16) on which a predetermined image is displayed, and
An effect control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 having a CPU processor) capable of executing control related to the operation of a movable member, and
When the power-on operation is performed, the power supply means (for example, the power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the game control means and the effect control means, and
With
The game control means
When the power-on operation is performed while at least the setting operation means is operated, the setting change state control means (for example, in step S24) for controlling the setting change state in which the one setting value can be changed. It has a main CPU 101) capable of executing processing, and can transmit various information (for example, information related to the progress of the game, setting change information indicating that one set value has been changed) to the effect control means. Yes (for example, the main CPU 101 can execute the process of step S55).
The effect control means
A determination means for determining whether or not the state related to the operation of the movable member is normal at a predetermined timing in the one game (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the processes of steps S19141 and S19147).
If it is determined that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal in the determination by the determination means, the restoration process (for example, the initial position restoration operation transition setting in step S19147 and the motor driver reset process in step S19176) is performed so as to be normalized. ) With a recovery control means (eg, host control circuit 2100) that can execute
And can receive various information transmitted from the game control means.
The determination means
In a plurality of games, it is possible to determine whether or not the state related to the operation of the movable member is normal at a predetermined timing in each game.
The recovery control means
The recovery process can be executed each time the determination means determines that the game is not normal in the plurality of games.
The effect control means further
A counting means for counting the number of times the recovery process is executed by the recovery control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S19144 or step S19177).
When the result of counting by the counting means reaches a specified number of times (for example, 10 times), the accessory inoperable means (for example, an error motor operation stop state) in which the movable member cannot be operated is set. The host control circuit 2100) that executes the processing of steps S19146 and S19179, and
Based on the reception of the setting change information indicating that the one set value has been changed, the release means for canceling the inoperable state by the accessory inoperable means (for example, the process of step S311 is executed). Host control circuit 2100)
The storage means (for example, the history recording process of step S306 and step S307) that can store the time information in the inoperable state as the history information based on the inoperable state by the accessory inoperable means Subwork RAM 2100a) that stores history information when it is performed,
A display control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that displays the error information history screen of FIG. 116 via the display control circuit 2300) that can display an information screen on which the history information is displayed based on a predetermined operation. It is characterized by having.

According to the game machine according to the above (1), if the determination means determines that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal, the operation is not disabled and the restoration process is performed. Then, when the number of times the restoration process is executed reaches the specified number of times, the movable member is in an inoperable state. Therefore, even if a minor error occurs, it does not become an inoperable state, but when the recovery process cannot be recovered even though it has been executed over multiple games, it becomes an inoperable state, and a serious error occurs. Can be suppressed.

In addition, since an information screen is displayed in which the time information in the inoperable state is displayed as history information, it is possible to manage the history of serious errors.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
A position detecting means (for example, accessory detection sensor group 1002) capable of detecting the presence of the movable member at a specific position (for example, an initial position) is further provided.
The determination means
It has a position determining means (for example, a host control circuit 2100) that is not normal when the movable member is not present at least at the specific position (for example, NO in step S19141).
The recovery control means
Each time the position determining means determines that the movable member does not exist at the specific position (for example, NO is determined in step S19141), a position restoration process for returning the movable member to the specific position (for example, for example). It has a position recovery control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100) for executing the initial position recovery operation transition setting in step S19147.
The release means is
Based on the receipt of the setting change information indicating that the change of the one set value has been performed, the number of times the position restoration process counted by the counting means is executed is reset (for example, in step S323). Execute the process),
The storage means
It is possible to store at least one of the position restoration process history information including the time information when the position restoration process is executed and the position restoration process number reset history information in which the number of times the position restoration process is executed is reset. ,
The display control means
Information indicating at least one of the position recovery processing history information and the position recovery processing count reset history information based on the reception of the setting change information indicating that the one setting value has been changed. The feature is that the screen can be displayed.

According to the game machine (2) above, every time it is determined that the movable member does not exist at a specific position, a position restoration process for returning the movable member to a specific position is executed, and one set value is changed. Based on what was done, the number of times the location recovery process was executed is reset. Then, based on the change of one setting value, the position recovery process history information including the time information in which the position recovery process is executed and the time information in which the number of times the position recovery process is executed are reset are input. An information screen showing at least one of the reset history information including the number of times of position recovery processing is displayed. Therefore, although it has not reached a serious error such as an inoperable state, it is possible to grasp in advance the possibility of a serious error such as an inoperable state by viewing the position recovery processing history information and the position recovery processing count reset history information. It is possible to manage the game machine appropriately.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
Further, a driving means (for example, a motor for operating the accessory group 1000) capable of operating the movable member from a specific position (for example, an initial position) to a specified position (for example, a maximum operating range) is further provided. Prepare,
The determination means
When the movable member cannot be operated from the specific position toward at least the specified position by the driving means (for example, when a motor error is detected), an operation determining means (for example, when a motor error is detected) is determined to be abnormal. It has a host control circuit 2100) that executes the process of step S19171.
The recovery control means
Operation recovery control for executing an operation recovery process (for example, a motor driver reset process in step S19176) for resetting the driver of the drive means each time the operation determination means determines that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal. Having means (eg, host control circuit 2100)
The release means is
Based on the reception of the setting change information indicating that the one set value has been changed, the number of times the operation recovery process counted by the counting means is executed is reset (for example, in step S323). Execute the process),
The storage means
It is possible to store at least one of the operation recovery process history information including the time information when the operation recovery process is executed and the operation recovery process number reset history information in which the number of times the operation recovery process is executed is reset. ,
The display control means
Information indicating at least one of the operation recovery processing history information and the operation recovery processing count reset history information based on the reception of the setting change information indicating that the one setting value has been changed. It is characterized in that the screen can be displayed (for example, the hall menu display process of step S302 can be executed).

According to the game machine of (3) above, every time it is determined that the state related to the movable member is not normal, the operation recovery process for resetting the driver of the driving means is executed, and one set value is changed. Based on this, the number of times the operation recovery process is executed is reset. Then, based on the change of one setting value, the operation recovery process history information including the time information in which the operation recovery process is executed and the time information in which the number of times the position recovery process is executed are reset are input. An information screen is displayed showing at least one of the reset history information including the number of operation recovery processes. Therefore, although it has not reached a serious error such as an inoperable state, it is possible to grasp in advance the possibility of a serious error such as an inoperable state by viewing the operation recovery processing history information and the operation recovery processing count reset history information. It is possible to manage the game machine appropriately.

As described above, according to each of the gaming machines of Appendix 29-1 to Appendix 29-3, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably performing error processing and management of the gaming machine.

[12. Other expansion examples, etc.]
In the present embodiment, the embodiment when applied to a pachinko gaming machine has been described, but all the inventions described in the present specification include pachinko machines, game machines, and slots without departing from the spirit of the invention. It can be applied to machines and all other gaming machines.

In addition, each of the above-described embodiments, examples, and modifications, including the above-mentioned appendix, is an example. It goes without saying that the configurations shown in each embodiment, each embodiment and each modification can be partially replaced or combined in other embodiments, other embodiments and other modifications. No. That is, the components described in each embodiment, each embodiment, and each modification can be arbitrarily combined with each other.

16 Liquid crystal display 24 Speaker 35 Power switch 100 Main control circuit 101 Main CPU
102 Main ROM
103 RWM (main RAM)
106 Command output port 201 Sub CPU
203 Subwork RAM
328 Setting key 330 Backup clear switch 338 Power supply circuit 420 1st start port 440 2nd start port 460 Normal electric accessory 540a 1st big prize opening 540b 2nd big prize opening 545 V winning port 601 1st special electric accessory 602 2nd special electric accessory
662 Main button 664 Select button 1000 Character group 1002 Character detection sensor group 2010 Relay board 2100 Host control circuit

Claims (2)

A launching means for launching a game ball,
A game board having a first area of a game area in which the game ball can be rolled and hit, and a second area of a game area different from the first area.
A first starting area, which is arranged in the first area and through which a game ball can pass,
A second starting area, which is arranged in the second area and through which a game ball can pass,
A special game state control means capable of shifting to a special game state advantageous to the player, triggered by either the passage of the game ball through the first start area or the passage of the game ball through the second start area.
A variable winning device capable of entering a game ball in the special gaming state,
Identification information display means for notifying the player of the transition to the special gaming state by changing and stopping the identification information.
When the game ball passes through the first starting region while the identification information is fluctuating, the first holding means for holding the fluctuation of the identification information a predetermined number of times, and
A second holding means that holds the change of the identification information a predetermined number of times when the game ball passes through the second starting region while the identification information is changing.
A passing area arranged in the first area and through which a game ball can pass,
A second state capable of switching between a first state that facilitates the passage of the game ball launched into the first region to the first starting region and a second state that makes it difficult for the game ball to pass through the first starting region. 1 Displacement member and
A determination means for determining whether or not to switch the first displacement member in the second state to the first state when the game ball has passed through the passing region is provided.
The special gaming state includes a first special gaming state and a second special gaming state different from the first special gaming state.
After the end of the first special gaming state, the determination means switches the first displacement member to the first state to shift to the first gaming state in which the frequency of passage to the first starting region is improved, and the identification is performed. A gaming state control means for shifting to a second gaming state in which the frequency of passing through the first starting region is lower than that of the first gaming state when the number of times the information is changed reaches a predetermined number of endings.
Further provided is a suggestion means for suggesting to the player that the game ball is fired in the second region when the transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state is provided.
The identification information display means is a gaming machine characterized in that changes held by the second holding means are displayed with priority over changes held by the first holding means. A special area through which the game ball entered in the variable winning device can pass, and
Further, a second displacement member that can be switched between a first displacement state that facilitates the passage of the game ball to the special region and a second displacement state that makes it difficult for the game ball to pass through the special region is provided.
The second displacement member is switched to the first displacement state at least in the second special gaming state.
When the game ball passes through the first starting area, the special gaming state control means has a higher probability of shifting to the first special gaming state when the game ball passes through the second starting area. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the game machine shifts to the second special gaming state, and when the gaming ball passes through the special area in the second special gaming state, the game shifts to the first special gaming state.